.l~ JI-j]J[S1rOI~Y

OF iNDIAN LOCJrJIC

(ANCIENT, l\1EDIAEVAL AND
:LvlODERN SCIIOOLS.)

BY
MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA

SATIS CHANDRA VIDYABHUSANA, M.A., PH.D., M.R.A.S., F.A.S.B.,

Pt mc/pal Sanskrit Colleg.e) Calcutta; Jowt Philological Set retary A,wtlC .socuty of Bmgal, Fellow of the Calwtta

Umocrslry; etc.

MOTILAL SANARSIOASS DELHI :: PATNA :: VARANASI

Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Satischandra Vidyabhushan.

(KAU'!'ILYA.)

" Anvikllliki (Logic) has ever been esteemed as the lamp of all soienoes. the resource of all actions and the shelter of all virtues."
itli ~ 111<11 f~fac:ti (*='9 fffiEtitflTcni.tt1en I OW 6'1I~fJ7f1"'W:

'" a~q tmi;r~: ~~: f~ ifTiT ~fa-~(~ec(''': II

I

'"

Modern Logic is a veritable ocean whose water is saline and which is unapproachable owing to the tumults and uproars of the commentators. Is not then the water of that ooean capable of being drunk ~ Why not ~ Intelligent people, like clouds, can easily approach the ooean and drink its wa.ter pure a.nd sweet."
f(

It pleased His Excellency the Earl of Ronaldshay, G.C.I.E., the Governor of Bengal, to utter these memorable words while presiding at the Convocation of the Calcutta University in the year 1918 :-" That an Indian student should pass through a course of philosophy at an Jndian U nivE-rsity without ever' hearing mention of, shall I say, Sankara, the thinker who, perhaps, has carried idealism further than any other thinker of any other age 01' country, or of the subtleties of the Nyaya system which has been handed down through immemorial ages, and is to-day the pride and glor.Y of the tols of Navadvipa, does, indeed, appear to me to be a profound anomaly." Words like t,hese coming frum one who is himself a keen and ardent sturtent of Ind!an Philosophy and a scrupulous and sympathetic ruler, came upon me, who have the good fortune to belong to Navadvipa, ,; with double sway" and supplied the inspiration which s11stained me in this my humble attempt to present a history of Indian Logic or Nyaya Darsana before the English-knowing pubtic. It was my revered preceptors Mahamahopadhyaya Mohesh Chandra Nyayaratna, C.LE., Principal, Sanskrit College, Calcutt~. and Mahamahopadhyaya Jadunath Sarvabhs,uma of Navadvipa, awho (the first by his lecture on Bha~aparicheda and Siddhan€ '"!..uktaval~, and the second by his lectures on K u8umlUijali and Atma-tattt·a-viveka.) first awakened in me an interest in the study of Indian Logic. That was about the year 1892. Subsequently I read Modern Logic, viz. Tattvacintama1Ji and Sabdaaakti-prakiUikij- under Pandit Bamacharan Nya.yacharya and Raghunatha Siroma1}i's Didhiti under Pandit Jibanath Misra, both ot Benares College. I searched out and studied most of the books and manuscripts on the subject of Hindu Logic to be found in the Sanskrit College Library and the Asiatic Society of Bengal and occasionally consulted works supplied by the Deccan College, Poona, and Benares Sanskrit College. I thus put myself in the way of acquiring some acquaintance with Indian Logic and from time to time published several books and articles on Nyaya. With regard to Jaina Logic, I derived valuable help from my teacher, Sastra-visarada Jainacarya Vijayadharma Suri, Pandit Indravijaya Upadhyaya and oocasionally from Pandit Hal'agovind Seth Nyayatirtha. I gathered Jaina books from various Jaina
C'1 _ __'!_~_.

"1""""" , .....

1

TT

x

Azimganj, Arrah, Bhavnagar, et.c. I also used a. large number of J aina manuscripts, of the AsiatiC' Society of Bengal, Deccan College:, Poona, etc., besides those in the possession of the aforesaid Venerable Vijayadharma Surl. As regards Buddhistic Logic, I could not get much help from Pali sources, because neither in the Buddhistic Scriptures introduced into Ceylon in 254 B.C. by 1Iahendra, son of Asoka, nor in the Buddhistic bookg recorded in writing in 88 B.C. by Vatta-gamini: is there any trace of a systematic culture of Nyhya. Even durmg my visit to Ceylon in 1909 (Appendix K), I did not come across in t.hat island any evidence of Nyaya study. On this subject I have derived materials to some extent from Chinese, but mostly from Tibetan sources. Professor Kimura occasionally helped me in dealing with Chinese materials. Concerning the Tibetan sourceR almost all the materials were derived from Jl§.tan-llgyur some volumes whereof were lent to me by the India office through the courtesv of Dr. F. W. Thomas. Through the kindness of Lord Curzon. ~the then Viceroy of India, I was enabled to retain temporarily for my use some other volumefl of !lfJlan-!jgyut brought down from Gyantse during the Tibet Mission of 1904. To secure further materials bearinp' ,-:;, on the subject of Buddhistic Logic I visited LabranO' and Pamyangchi monasteries in June 1907 and October 1908, reOspectivoly (App9I1dices I and J), and cam.e acros'S a world of facts for observat,1on and comment. Since the opening of increased intercourse between India and Tibet consequent upon the Ta"hi Lama's visit to India in 1905 (of ~hich an account is,given in Appendix H), batohes of Tihet~n traders have been pouring into India and fronl them foul' coples of, B§tan-lJgyur have bef'n obtained since 1911, of which one is with me, one in the Asiatic Society, Calcutta, one (a fragmentary copy) in the Sahitya-Parishad Library, and one- in the Calcutta University Library. In regard to the chapters on modern Logic I occasionally consulted some scholars among w(1om Mahamahopadhyaya Pramatha Nath Tarkabhi.i~aI}.a, Mahamahopadhyaya Guruc,hara~ Tarka·darsana-tirtha, Mahamahopadhyaya Lakshman Sastn, Mahamahopadhyaya VindhYf'swari and PanditJaminiNath Tarkavagisa may be gratefully mentioned. My thanks are due to Hon'ble Mr W. W. Hornell, Director of Public Instruction, Bengal, who very kindly looked through the first batoh of, manuscripts and made many suggestions which have stood me in great stead in preparing the volume. I am. also grateful to Rev. A. Johnstone, 1\LA., Principal, C.M.S. College, for having revised manuscripts as well as the proofs of the portion
..3 _
I'IIL

1': _ __

__!.L 1.....

~

___ .!' _ _

~

'Y"

..

... ,.,.

......

"'r.... ...

11

\

.....

r'4"'"

'"

..

PREEACE.

xi

he left for England, the work of revislOn 'Yas very kindly undertaken by Dr. \V. S. Urquhart J of the Scottish Churches College, to whom I offer my thanks. My special thanks are due to Dr. H. Stephen of the Calcutta University for the interest and thoroughness with which he examined all the proofs of the present volume. The book however could not have seen the light nor assumed its present form were it not for help of various kinds received from that Macenas of letters-I mean the Hon'ble Justice Sir Asutosh Mukherji, Sarasvati, whose name is inseparably assoCIated with every form of educational work in Bang,al., who has spent the best years of his life in e£fecting various improvements III the status of the Calcutta University and who above anything else is the typical man of action-a great Kannayogin-unswerving in his aim and fixity of purpose, selfless in his devotion to work, malediction or benediction, pursuing it through lif~ regardless praise or blame.

or

CALCUTTA, 21st Apr~l, 19.90.

SATIS CHANDRA VIDYABHUSANA.

The late Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Satis Chandra Vidyabhu~ana had seen this book through up to p. 384. After his rather sudden death the work of seeing the remainder of the book through the press, was entirely left to me. I am, therefore, entirely responsible for any defects to be found in those pagcs. I have been helped, however, very materially by Dr. W. S. Urquhart and by Pandit Pasupati Nath Sastr:L :\£ A., to both of whom I have to express my thanks. The Index has been prepared by myoId pupil Prof. Surendranath Bhat~acarya, :M.A., of the Behar National College and for the Tibetan Index I have to thank Mr. lohan Van lVlan€ 'n, Librarian, Imperial Library, Calcutta. I am well aware of my unfitness to undertake such a task requiring years of patient" study. But I was tempted to do so, among other reasons, on account of the feeling of esteem and regard which I always entertained for my late friend, and I look upon this slight service to his memory as going a little way towards repaying the many kindness<:"s he had always shown to me ever since I first knew him
CALCUTTA,

1. J. S.

TARAPOREWALA.

December, 1920

INTRODUCTION.
My object in this volume is to write the history of what is called N yaya, one of the six schools into which orthodox: philosophy in India is divided. The word • logic,' although it is in common parlance held synonymous with Indian Nyaya, is not exactly identical with it. Logic covers some of the subjects of Nyaya as well as Vaise~ika and is not co-extensive with either. Indian Logic has been differently defined in different ages but the definition generally accepted is the science which ascertains valid knowledge either"by means of the six: senses or by means of the five members of the syllogism; in other words) pe-rception and inference are the subject-matter of Logic In my anxiety to assign a proper place to J aina and Buddhistic Logic, which played no inconsiderable part in the development of the science of reasoning in India, I have made a departure from the time-honoured classification of Indian Logic into Ancient and Modern and have added an intermediate stage-:J::~lS dh:diug it into three periods. Ancient (650 B.C.-lOO A.D.), Mediooval (up to 1200 A.D.) and Modern (from 900 A.D.). The standard texts for each of these periods were Nyaya-I)utra by Ak~apada, PramaI).asamuccaya by Dignaga. and Tattva·C1I.,ltama:Q.i by Gangesa Upadhyaya respectively. The wide popularity of these works is evidenced by the large numbers of commentaries that have been writhen upon them, as mentioned below:THE ANOIENT SCHOOL OF INDIAN LoGIC.

Text. 1. Nyaya-siitra by Ak~apada Gautama.
Commentaries.

2. Nyaya-bha~ya by Vatsyayana. 3. Nyaya.vartika by Udyotakara. 4. Nyaya·vartika.tatparya-~ika by Vacaspatl Misra. 5. Nyaya·vartika-tatparya-~ika-parisuddhi by Udayanacarya. 6. Nyaya-nibandha.prakasa by Vardhamana. 7. Nyayalankara by Srlkatl~ha" 8. Nyaya-vrtti by Abhayatilaka Upadhyaya. 9. Nyaya-siitroddhara by Vacaspati Misra. 10. Nyaya-rahasya by Ramabhadra. 11. Nyaya-siddhanta-mala by Jayrama.. 12. Nyaya-siitra-vrtti by ViSva.natha Siddhantapancananu,. 13. Nyaya..saIp.~epa by Gevinda Sanna.

xiv

INTRODUCTION.
THE MEDI1EV AL SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC.

Text.
I.
Prl1ma~a-samuccaya

by Dignaga.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8 9. 10. 11. 12

Commentaries. Pl'ama1;la-samuccaya,vrtti by Dignaga. Pramana-vartIka-karika bv Dharmaklrti Prama~a.va.rtika-vftti by Dharmakirti. PramaI).a-vartika-pafijika by Devendrabodhi. ,.Pramal)a-vartika-paftjika-~Ika by Sakyabodhi. Pramal)a-vartika.v!'tti by Ravi Gupta. PramaI).a-samuccaya-tlka (Visalamalavatl-nama) by Jinendrabodhi. Pram~l).a.var~ikalaIikara by Prajfiakara Gupta. Pramana-vartikalaIikara-tika by .Jina Pramana-vartikalatikara bv Ya'mari. Prama~a-va.rtika-~ika by S'alikarananda.
THE MODERN SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC

1 2. 3 4, 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15 16.

Text. Tattva-cintamaI).i by Gu.Iigesa. Oommentaries. Tattva-cintamaI).i-pl'akasa by Vardhamana Upadhyaya. Tattva-cintamani~aloka bv Paksadhara Misra. Tattva-cintama~i-prakasa by Rucidatta. Tattva-cintamani-maviikha bv Sankara MiSra. Anumana-khaJ;.l~a-~ik~ by Vaoaspati ,Misra. Tattva-cintamal).i-prakasa by Haridasa Ny,ayalaIikara. Tattva-cintamaJ)i-dldhiti by Raghunatha SiromaJ;:d. MaJ)I-vyakhya by Kalfada Tarkavagisa. Tattva-cintamaJ)i-rahasya by Mathuranatha. Tatva-cintama~i-didhiti prasa-rini by K~~J?adasaSarvabhauma. Tattva-ciutamaJ)i-mayukha by Jagadisa Tarkalatikara. Tattva-cintamaJ)i-~ika by Bhavananda Siddhantavagisa. Tattva·cintamaJ?i-~ika by Harirama Tarkavaglsa. Tattva-cintamaJ;l.i-gug.hartha-dlpika by Raghudeva NyayalaIikara. Tattva-cintamaJ)i-vyakhya by Gadadhara BhaHacarya.

Sub·Commentanes. 17. .Aloka-darpa:r;ta by MaheSa ,+hakkul'a. 18. Tattva·cintamaJ)i-aloka-parisi~ya by Devanatha ,+hakura. 19. Tattva-cinta.maI).i-aloka-kaI).~akoddhara by Madhusiidana. Thakkura. 20~ Tattva-cintama~i-aloka-rahasya by Mathuranatha Tarks...

INTRODUCTION.

xv

21. 22. 23. 24. 25, 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.

Dldhiti.rahasya by M:athiiranatha Tarkavagisa. by K;'8~adasa Sarvabhauma Anumanaloka-prasari~i on Pak~adhal'a by K:r~~adi'i sa Sabdaloka-viveka by Gu~ananda Vidyavaglsa. Didhiti-trka by Ramabhadra Sarvabhauma. Tattva-cintama~i-didhiti-prakasika by JagadIsaTarkalailkiira. Tattva-cintamuJ)i-didhiti-gug.hartha-vidyotana by Jayarama N ya ya pafica,nana. 'l'att\a-cintama~i-didhiti-prakasika; by Bhay.ananda Siddhantavagisa. ,:rattva-cintamaJ)i-didhjti-parlk~ii by Rudra N yaya v8,caspati. Dldbiti-tika by Raghudeva Nyaya1ankara. Tattva·cintamaJ)i-didhiti-praka~hl\ by Gadadbara. Tattva-cintama~i-didhiti-~ika by Ramarudra TarkavagIsa.
Tattva-cint.ama~i-dfdhiti-prasari~I

Glo,sses
Tattva kalrsankarl-patrika by Kallsailkara. Tattva candti-patrika by Candra Narayal,1a. Tattva-raudri-patrika by Rudra Nal'aya1)a) etc.

.." '......;0.0

Of all the nations of the world the Hindus and the Greeks appear to have developed systems of logio to a large rxtent independently of each other. ~indu Logic in its rudimentary sta,ge can be traced as early as the 6th century before Christ. Greek Logic assumed a definite form in the fourth century B.C. though its germs can be traced a little earlier in the controversies of the Sophists and Socrates. But so far as the five-limbed syllogism of Hindu Logic is concerned the Hindu logician may have been indebted some way or other to the Greeks. WhilE:; the syllogism was definitely formulated as a logical doctrine by Aristotle in his Rhetoric, Prior Analytics and Posterior AnalyticB in the 4th century B.C." the Hindu logician shows but a vague conoeption of it as late as the 1st century B.C. It is not inconceivablt> that the knowledge of Aristotle's logic found its way through Alexandria, Syria and other countries into Taxila (vide Appendix A). This is rightly corroborated by the Hindu tradition that Nara.da who visited Alexandria (Svetadvipa) and became an expert in the handling of the five-limbed syllogism. So simple is syllogistic structure that it does not seem to require any tht>ory of gradual development to explain its growth. And Aristotle might have conceived the idea of syllogistic form into which all reason~ ing could be put as a complete whole. I am inclined, therefore, to think that the syllogism did not actually evolve in Indian Logic out of inference, and that the Hindu logician owed the idea of syllogism to the influence. of Aristotle (viae Appendix B). To me it is one of the most important en+.ke. ""OT.,..,.= I'\{! T n r l i a n · •
.;.."

xvi

INTRODUCTION.

doctrine of inference, which was an indigenous growth, was happily amalgamated with the borrowed art of syllogism into a common structure of logical thought. The Buddhist work Kathavatthu furnishes several logical terms, e.g. upanayana, nigamana, etc., of syllogistic reasoning. But we find not a "Single instance where these terms have been methodically combined so as to form a syllogism proper. An attempt has been made to discuss the point at issue in the Appendix B, and I leave it to the reader to take my views for what they are worth. Ancient logic was called Anvik~iki, or the science of debate. but with the introduction of syllogism or proper reasoning it qame to be called Nyaya from the 1st century A.D. The NyayaSastra in its earliest age flourished in Mithila with Gotama but it attained its high development in Prabhasa with Ak~apada. The mediaeval logic from t,he 4th century A.D. was caned PramaQa Sastra, inasmuch as it dealt with pramana, the means of valid knowledge, i.e. perception and inference. Ujjaini in l\lalwa and Valabhi in Gujarat were the scenes of activi~y of the Jaina logicians of the Svetambara. sect. The Di~~mbaras flourished principally in Pataliputra and Dravida (including KarQata) about the 8th century A.D Buddhist logicians flonrished in llniversi~ies such as Kafictpura Nalanda (vide Appendix C), Odantapuri, Sridhanya-ka~aka, Kasmira and Vikramasila (vide Appendix E). J n Bengal Buddhist Logic attained its highest development during the reigns of the kings of the Pal dynasty (vide Appendix D). Modern Logic commenced from the 10th century A.D. and was, in its first stage, called Prakararta or the Manual of Logic, but it~ real life began from the 13th century A.D., since when it has been called Tarka-Sastra or the science of Dialectics. It flourished in. the University of Mithila (vide Appendix F) during 13th. 14th and 15th centuries~ and afterwards that of Nadia (vide Appendix G) became its stronghold from the 16th century onwards.
CALOUTTA,

21.st April, 1920.

BATIS CHANDR.A VIDYABHUSAlS

FOREWORD.
Mahamahopadhyaya Dr. Satischandra Vidyabhushan came of a respectable Brahmana family of Faridpore. He was the third son of the weH-known Pandit Pitambar Vidyavagisa and was born on the 30th JUly, 1870, in the village of Khalkula in Faridpore. Satischandra was an infant four years old when he lost his fa ther. The family was large and yet had no earning member; and the eldest son Biswambe-r tJyoti~ar.Q.ava who was then only sixtt'en maintained the family under circumstances of grea.t difficulty. Satischandra first went to the village school at the early age of five and rapidly made his mark amongst his fellow students He stood first in the Minor Vernacular Examination from his Division and secured a scholarship which enabled him to proceed to Navadvip and take admission into the Hindu School. He passed the Entranc(=' Examination of the Calcutta University in 1888, and obtained a scholarship which helped him to come to Calcutta and take his admission into the City College. In due course he passed the F.A Examination and then migrated to the Krishnagar College. He took his B.A. degree with Honours in Sanskrit in 1892, and in the following year passed the M.A. Examination in Sanskrit from the Calcutta Sanskrit College. Meanwhile he had distinguished himself at the Sanskrit E~mina­ tion held by the Vidagdha Janani Sabha of Navadwip and had obtained the title of Vidyabhil~a'J'ja. It may be mentiened here that while still an undergraduate student in the City College he had married in 1889 the youngest daughter of Babu Gangadhar Acharyya, the first Principal of the Midnapore College. In 1893, Shortly after Satischandra had passed the M.A. Examination in Sanskrit, he settled at Krishnagar as Professor of Sanskrit in the local college. Here he had special opportunity to study Sanskrit Kavya from Mahamahopadhyaya Ajitnath Nyayaratna and Sanskrit Nyaya from Mabaroahopadhyaya Jadunath Sarvabhauma, each the recognised authority on his special subject. Some years later his services were lent by the Government of Bengal to the Buddhist Text Society under whose auspices he edited a number of useful Pali Texts and published several original papers which attracted the attention of scholars in Europe and America. About this time he came into contact with Rai Saratchandra Das, Bahadur, C.I.E., the distinguished Tibetan Explorer at whose request his services were again lent by

xviii

FOREWORD.

the Government for thrfle years to assist in the preparation of a Tibetan-English Dictionary. He was in DarjeE>lmg for this purpose from 1897-1900 and utilised the opportunity to acquire a thorough master.V over the Tibet,an language with the help of the celebrated Lama 1?'~~;::C~l~lOg VVangdan of Lhasa, then resident at Darjeeling. In December, 1900, Satischandra came to Calcutta as a PrOfeRSOl' in the Sanskrit College. At about this ::>eriod he acquired a thorough knowledge of Pali from B.ramanas of Ceylon and Burma. In November, 1901, he appeared a second time at the M.A. Examination of the Calcutta University and chose Pali as his special subjee,t. The University authorities were placed in a difficulty to find a suitable examiner. Ultimately Mr. C. H. Tawney and Prof. E. B. Cowell who had for many years heen connected with the University arranged w~th Professor T. W. Rhys Davids to conduct the examination. Satischandra achieved high distinction and his atta.inments were specially praised by the distjnguished examiner. In March, 1902, he was transferred to the Presidency College as ProfesRor of SanElkrit. In December, 1905, the Tashi Lama came to India in order to visit the places sacred to Buddhists. Satischandra was deputed by the GovE-rnment to accompany him to act as Interpreter and to explain to him the histories and customs at the old Buddhist holy places. The Tashi Lama was highly pleased and presented Satischandra with a Khatag {silken upper garment) in token of high regard. On the 1st January, 1906, the Governor-General bestowed upon him the coveted title of Mahamahopadhyaya. In 1907, on my nomination, Lord Minto, then Chancellor of the Calcutta University appointed him an Ordinary Fellow. At the same time he became a Fellow of the Asiatic Society of Bengal and Joint Philological Secretary., In 1908, the University conferred on him the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy and awarded him the Griffith Prize for original research. About this time the question of Principalship of the Sanskrit College had come under the consideration of the Government of Bengal and the s~estion had been put forward that a European scholar should be appointed. The Lieutenant-GovE>rnor felt doubtful as to the advisability of such a step an~ discuRsed the matter with me as Vice-ChancE>llor of the University. I expressed my etnphatic disapproval of the coufse proposed and expressed the opinion that Dr. Satischandra Vidyabhushan would be found admirably qualified for the Principalship if he were offered facilities for further training. This view prevailed and during 1909 and 1910 Satischandra was placed on deputation. In June 1909, ~ went to Ceylon and studied for six months with the venerable High Priest Sumangala, Principal of thE' Vidyodaya Oollege at Colombo.

FOREWORD.

xix

The first six months of the year 1910 he spent at Benares where, under the guidance of Dr. A. Venis, then Prinoipalof the Queen's College, he studied under Subrahmanya Sastri, Bhagavatac.haryya, Sibakumar Sastri, Jibanath Jha and Bamacharan Nyayacharyya. After his return to Calcutta from Benares he studied for six months unde.r the guidance of Dr. George Thibaut and acquired a good working knowledge of Frenoh and German. On the 1st December, 1910, he assumed charge of the Prinoipalship of the Sanskrit College. In 1912 and 1916, he passed with great distinotion the Preliminary and Final Examinations in Tibetan held by the Government, and carried off the sanctionE'd prizes on both occasions. He also acted as Lecturer on PaU and Tibetan in the University. His fame as a profound scholar of versatile attainments had rapidly spread and he was eagerly sought after in literary conferences. In 1913, he was the first President of the All India Digambar Jain Conference held at Benares. In 1914, he was President of the All India Svetambar Jain ConfE-rence held at Jodhpur and of the All India Sanskrit Conference held at Hardwar. In HH6. he was President of the Bengal Literary Confere-nce held at Jessore, and of the District Literary Conference at Krishnagar. In 1919, he was a Vice-President of the Fit'st Oriental Conference held at Poona and President of the section on Pali and Buddhism. During aU this period he worked strenuously as a scholar, and the value of his contributions to Sanskrit, Pali and Tibetan studies cannot be easily appraised by a single individual. In the University itself he was a leading figure, and from 1912, acted~as a Member of the Syndicate. His services were invaluable in reorganising Sanskrit studies of the indigenous type and his work as Secretary to thp Sanskrit Board and the Sanskrit Association founded by the Government will be gratefully remembered by Pandits of the present generation all over this Presidency. There can be little.doubt that he overworked himself, and in 1919 the first signs of failing brealth were indiCated by a mild stroke of paralysis. Friends and well-wishyrs implored him to spare himself, but he was deaf to their entreaties, for as he used to say, it is better to die than to remain invalid. Two other mild attacks followed and the reoovery was slow and gradual. At last on the 25th April, 1920, he passed away as the result of a sudden attaok of apoplexy. The publication of the present volume has a melanoholy interest for me. In 1901 I had come across a monograph on "Hindu Logic as preserved in China and Japan ,) by Sadajiro Sugiura who had offered it Bra a dissertation for _the Degree of Doctor of- Philosophy at the University of Peimsylvania. The work seemed to me of fascinating interest as opening up a

ASUTOSH MOOKERJEE. The present volume was the result.plore the materials available from Tibetan sources.xx FOREWORD. . A list of his many and varied writings (complete as far as it has been possible to make it) bas been compiled by several people and is herewith appended. He was however not content with this preliminary survey and continued steadily to collect fresh materials. new field of investigation full of untold possibilities. I suggested to Satischandra who at the time was engaged in the study of Tibetan that he should undertake to ex. The substance of his first researches in this direction was embodied in his thesis on " Mediaeval School of Indian Logic" which brought him the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy and the Griffith Prize. Professor Taraporewala has with -loving care seen through the press all that had not been printed when Satischandra passed awa. At his request I read through more than half of the work before it was finally ~rinted off and this made me rf>alise the true value of what he had accomplished.y.

Maitri or Ma. Vol..na s Pali Grammer (Edited in Uevanagari cbaractern a." 2.A LIST OF THE WRITINGS OF THfiJ LATE MAH... Ser. History of the Mediaeval School of Indian Loglc-1909.) The Nyaya-sutraa of Qotama. 20. Iud.ra. Bhavabhiiti and bis Dramas {in Benga. Ser..B. . 3. 1. Amarako~a: a Metrical Dictionary of the Sanskrit Language WIth the Tibetan Version (BIb. 16. I. 11.ra. 5.n and Mm.1902. Ind. Ser-1911-12). 4. by Lama Wangdan -TranscrIbed into Roma. Vidyabbushan from (19131916 ? ) Nyayabindu: a Bilingual Index of Sanskrit and Tibetan words (BIb. Ser. original or edited. Old Indian Alphabet-1904. Ind. 17. Tib. 13.ph of Lhasa and Sanskrit MS. Cowell. Tib.S.cts also printed in 1. 1902. J D. A History of Indian Logic-1922. by K~emendra. Ind. 10. 3. (In progress. 7." (lxxi. Mahayana. Fabei. Uddyotakara-1914J Influence of Aristotle on the Development of the Syllogism in India. Sahitya-Parii?at-Patdka-Edited by Mm. Edited from a xylogra.nd Lak~mika. Sans. S. 1. 18. A. 12. Ser. B.-19l7. M. Tibetan Primer. LailkAvatara Sutra-1905. Notes on Ratnavali. Vidyabhushan (Bib. Buddha-dev (in Bengali)-I904. and Hinayana-1900. Articles contributed to various English Journals. of Nepal by S.lad. i-ii -1900. 1913-1919. S. 8)-Allahabad. 4. Atma·tattva pl'akaA (A Bengali work on the Nyaya Philosophy)-lS97. Vidyabhushan-1902. 15.-1888-1913). 6..-1908): Parikfi\amukha-sfitram: a Digarnbsra Jama work on Log:c (Nyaya) by Manikya Nandi (Bib. SATISCHANDRA VIDYABHUSHAN. Vldyabhusba. C. 14. S. Works. (BIb Ind. C. Vratya and Sa.society. Lankavatara·siitra. with its Tibetan version by Souton Loohava a.nka. Ser. Ind.. 9. C. Tibetan Primer. Sans. Tib. Ind. 1913.nd trauslated into English)-1901. 2. 21. 1. C.O J 1 This list has been compiled from several sources and though extensive is by ------- means <!omplete. S. The Licchavi Race of Anoient India' 2. 8. 6. {i} "The Journal of the RoyaZ Asiatic .. translated into English (Sacred Books of the Hindus. H. Avadana Kalpalata: a. A Report on the Revival of Buddhism. 19. Sat. Bauddha-stotra sangrahah: 8.) Abstra..n Logic-l 91 8. Vol. Brahmanic References to the BuddhlSt Philosop'hy-l901.itrayal).1I Translations-1903.-1912). II.A~MAHO~ PADHYAYA DR. Tib.l A. collection of Buddhist Hymns. edIted by E. Das. Revised and translated by MM.li)-1899.n Characters. Second edition revised by Mm.-Edited with an Enp:lish tr~nslation-I902. Tib. Collection of Legendary Stories about the Bodhlsattvas. with English and Benga. Amaratika Kamadhenu'l} (Bib.-1909).·· Tht JoW'tl4l of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Urimm's Phonetic Law: of the Indo·European Languages-1905. 5. Kaccaya. Ratauautta (a Pali work}. Vidyabbusban (Bib. I. C. Theories of Caste Proc.iya Upanif. (il). 22.-19I7). B.

.) 14.. (v. xi. or a Code of Buddhist MonastIc Laws (edited and translated. 3. 9 10. most advanced Work on Hindu Logic (Summarised in English.gs 0/ the Asiatic Society 0/ Bengal.(iv.-2 13.S..S. Dinnaga and his prama"!-a.) {N. 1. (N S .D. 11. On the Date of a COP! of the Svayambkfi-pura'Y!-a. A. a) 1.• v.) . The Madhyamika School of Buddhi!=lt FtJlo$ophy. 8.l D. a.D.. Godfrey in "J • Ladakh. Boss and Mm. Aphorisms-l (~'he Examination of the Skan· dhas J the five Aggregates of -aaing or Existence) .• .. iii. Romaka.tion. one for chaaing away EVll Spmts and the other for compelling Fortune 20. as mentioned m the Ancient Pall (N.) 2." 1.) Organs) 7. SODle rare Sa-nskrit works on Grammar. 6. The Madhyamika Aphorisms-3 (the Examination of the Sense.An Analysis of the Laf&kavatii..) and Sanskrit Works Hetu-cakra-hamaru.. 2.) (iii) CI The Journal of the Buddhist Text So'}iety oj India. A LIST OF THE WRiTINGS. The MaCihyamika Aphorisms-~2 5. together wlth a. A. Sarilkhya Philosophy in the Land of the Lamas 16. A Descriptive List of Works OLl the Madhyamika Philosophy \ 18.. the 12th centurv A D. On Certain Ttbetan Scrolls and Images lately brought f~om Gyantse (it 1. . (iii.) . Srid-pa-ho: a Tibetan-Ohinese Tortoise Chart of Divina. • A nuruddha Thera--a learned Pali au thor of Soutlflern India. S O. Yaaovijaya Ga~i (about 1608-1688. n. Sanskl'jt works on Literature. Proceedin. b) •• Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.) Sarvajiia-mitra: a Tantrika Buddhist author of KMmira in the 8th cent. 1. A Brief Survey of the Hindu l?hl. Nyaya-pravesa 15.D..S. by Alexa~der Csoma de Koros. recovered from Labrang in Sikkim Indian Logic as preserved in Tibet- f l 1 J J f (ii. MaMvyutpatti. A.. x ) 24. RhetorIC and Le~ico­ grahy as preserved in Tibet 17. &. The Tattva-Ointama'Y!-i." 1. 4.!.S. [See also items 1 and 2 under headmg ii.] (ii. SO-8or-tha-pa. " " " .xxii 3. 12. 23. . Edited by [in·pro~ress. Short Sketch of the leading Indi.) 21. The Madhyamike. or the City of Rome. in . Row Buddhism became extinct in India. a Ruler under Sabyapa Hierarch in thfl L4th cent. Stuart H. being an edition of the ~ (iv 1-2) . above. Vldyabhushan 3. .. (N. Lexicography and Prosody recovered from Tibet {N S iv} Two rribetan Charms obtamed by Lt. ') .-3 (N. . Maharaja Kanika Lekha } (N S vi) 22. 5. Brahmanic References to the M~ddhyamika School of Buddhist Philosophy.S. The Localisation of certain Hymns of the lJgveda. (iii. 7." The Saraka Caste of India identified with the Serike of Central Asia (1903. or DiimagaS Wheel of Reason.namuccaya (N . \ .) :5anskrit-Tibetan-Engliah Vocabulary. 2. (N. xiv.) 3.S.an Schools ot Philosophy. 2.) The Buddhist doctrine of" Middler Path" (1904:). Grammar.ra-8iitra. A Tibetan Almanac for i 906-07 The Gyantse Rock-Inscription of Cho~'rgyal-quis-pa.) 25.losophical Doctrines of Salvation 4.-Col.

The Madhyamika Aphorisms-7 (the Examination of the Sa1ru. 12. The Philosopher Diimaga. 7. Continuance and Extmction) • v.tion (vii. 4 ) ments) IV. The Influence of Buddhism on the Development of Nyaya ~ Philosophv . The Story of Mahakaayapa } ( . 2." 2. The University of Trudla (1901).t ( 3) karas. The Madhyanilka Aphorisms-8 19. (v. The Buddhist VersIon of the Nyaya Philosophy 3 (iv) "The Journal of the Mahc:'hodhi dociety. • (190 I) The Ancient History of Magadha J' 3. 1.) 23. or the Buddhist Doctrine of Dependent ~ OrIgina. 5. 13. xxiii 8. 3.) 18. 10. PhIlosophy The Northern and SOl1'Ohern Schools of Buddhism Nagarjuna l J' (v) " The Dawn. • 16. Life of Dmnaga Buddhist Convocations l (1901) Buddhism in IndIa J • The History of Samkhya Philosophy Alexander Csoma de Karas Ratanasutta PrajiU~paramiti or Perfection of Wisdom Conversion of the People of Lanka by Bllddha (1902) Upasampada. 14.) 13. The Ancient City of Taxila 6." 1.) 9. 8. The PhIlosophy of Prainaparamita. .A LIST OF THE WRITINGS. (iv.nda ~ 4. The examination of " Fire and Fuel" 22. The Buddhist Doctrine 01 the" Ego" or th~ 't Sou}" 20. Nirvana 17. (VI. Pratitya-samutpada. 3. 9. (viii) "The Open OC/urt" (America). The Story of Harltika. I. SynopsiR of the Duties of a Buddhist according to Bodhicaryavrata ' (vi. The Madhyamika Aphorisms-6 12. 6. (vi) "The BengaEee. U. or Ol'dlnation ceremony of the Buddhist Influence of Buddhism on the Development of the Hindn Nyaya. . The Conversion of Raval)a and of the People of Lanka by Buddha (1002).) 15. Philosophy (1902).(. The Madhyamika Aphorisms-5 (the Exammatino of the Ele. • 11. Absolute Knowledge. 2. 5. ~e Law?f ~arma } (1899). Origination. 3. 4.I." History of the Grammatical Litera~ure of India. 1) VI. The Influence of Bengali on the Nyaya. 1. An Apology for Aavaitavi. or Forest of Justice (1902). Philosophy !~III (1897). a Contemporary of the Poet Kltlidasa ~ 10. The Age of the Poet Magha (1902).ida or the Vedanta. Dharmaranya." 1. History ol the Madhyamika Philosophy of Nagarjuna (v. 4 ) \ 21. The University of Nala. 4. 3. (vii) "The Indian Mirror. History of the Pall Language (1900). 1.

C." 1." Anuruddhasthavira (1901).. (iii) "The Bangadarsan.ar:' 1..tEsop's Fables (1902). The Mahaparinirvana of Lord Buddha (1901). 4.t-ed into English. The Study of Sanskrit in the University (1894).! (i) "The Bi8hi. 3. Bhavabhuti (1899). The Nyaya Philosophy of the Hindus (1902).kRfa (1913). The Suhrid . or the Chain of Ca.. (vi) "The Bharatavarl!a:' (vi~) "The Janmabhumi! The Nyiiya Doctrine of the SOll1 (1896). l The titles have been transla. Bauddha-da. (x) U The Sahitya Pan~ad Patrik(i.i.mgaha C< Metaphysicai l r(1002).. a Tibetan Story (1899). The Pali Source of ." 1. 2. Life of Lord Buddha (1900). 1.clane. Uddyota. Samkhya. (xiz) "The Sahitya Samhita. Roroaka (1905)." 1. 2. The Foun4ation of the BUilding for the Bangiya Sahitya Pa. " (ii) The Pantha!' 1.li Pj~ak8S (1901).xxiv A LIST OF THE WRITINGS. Jataka. Fruits of Karma.uses 6 Abhihammattha·sa.mutpada. (viii) "The Kalpa. Vratya and Sankal'a Theories of Caste (1906). Departure from Lanka: (1910) I." 1. 2.." 1. Articles in Bengali contributed to Bengali Journals. Kliyastha ChakadaS:l. The Theory of the Soul according to Western Philosophers (1896). Nyaya. StorIes or the Pa. 1. 2..: a series of articles on the Basket" of the Buddhist Scripture 3. 3..aa.risad (109~J (iv) "The K&yaatha Samac." 1. (ix) . Pratitya-sa. (tI) •• The Bii1J. (xi) "The Sahitya. 5.~an 5.~dar8an 4. . . 1angadas and Bhuvanakar Sarma (1907) Bauddha-nyaya (1915). A Buddhist Picture from Tibet } (1905) 2. The Sixteen Mahasthavil'as of Tibet .

Je'3501'e. } (1895). The Existence. Notes on the Dhammapada (1899). 14."qsore). Nyaya·daISan. Samme'lan at . Bauddha Dharma (xiv) "The Bhlirati. 5. 25. t 12. . Sammelan at Jl. Analysis of San. 21. 8. 2.nar Ot BengalI} (1904). Ratnavah The qran. Birthplace of Kitlidasa (Sahitya Sammelan at Calcutta.ha-c. 13.1:arxs. Na~ariija. NicchlVi J1tti ::::i<qjory or the ~yaya. (1899). 23. 4. Travels in Slkkim ~ 24.ma in India (1906)." t. 9. Travels of the Tashi La. Sarvaliia-mltra ( 22. 17. Kumara~Jlva 20. The Hindu Theory of RebIrth (1896). LIST OF THE WRITINGS. 15. n. History of Nyaya Philosophy} (1902) • . S. Panca-kandha (1897). History of the AJphabet 26. 3. The Science of Language The Benga. 7.tideva's Bodhicarvavralia. 1 J . lK [9. Prati:mok>}a} (1903). xxv (xiii) .' The Nat1yabharat. Presidential Addresses) etc. Immortality and TransmIgration of the Soul 2 The W orId Pain and Emancipation 3.hitya Sammelan at Bhagalpur). 4. 6. The Birthplace of the great Poet Kalidasa. 10. PresidentIal Address (Siihitya. 3.t. 4. Buddha's Tooth in Ceylon (HHO). A brief History of the Pali Language (1900). The University of Vikramaaila (1908).A. 7. 9. 27. 2.) 1. The Milk-drinking Swan of Sanskrit 'Poetry How Buddhi-·m bet'ame extinct in India \(1902) The Spirit of Self-help in Hindu Religion .). Sahitya.li Alphabet The Anment HlStory of Megadha. o." 1. t§iva in Ceylon (1911). 16. 6. Presidential Address (Literary Section. Philosophy Bandf. Amog~avaj~a 1 (1905). 5. The dharma-dik~a of Ra:vaQa (1901). (1901) The Letter kea The Relations of Grammar and Language The Missionaries of Ancient India Differences of Racft and Differences of Language Anguttara Nlkaya. and the place of his Death (Sa. D.

.'~IK1-THE f3CIE)oI(.-hich includes a Theory of H0asons Anviks'tki bi[urca.lC Doctrine Kapila.-lOO A. a Lady Ascetic. 1 2.. TIlL G10wth 0/ . . Cal'vJ. ~:{NvIK. thE' Rcience of soul . Punarvasu Atreya.te'l into Philosophy and Lr>gi(' Anvik?ilci ill its PhiLosophir. xvii A List of the writings of the late MahaUlahopadhyaya Dr.~iki par excellen ('(' to 11 12 13 16 9 9 17 Ohapte1·l1I. . .. The garl" Literature of India Problems' of the Veda~ l].pect called Da. a Violent Debater. h:s Matermhst. !).:Rl A:.t!iki in it'. 16. his Doctrine of 1Iiatter and Soul Dattatl'eya.eveJopment of the conception of soul Atmat.lmPR for Ano"i!. -4: . his Parable of a Tree . 12 1. The Technioal Terms used in the Council of Debate 22 23 . A Council of Debate (Pari. Portrait of the lute :VIM. n. Seltis Chandra Vidyabhul3han XXJ PART 1. 11. 7 ~.tion 011 the Senses Sulabha. Dr Author's Preface ~atischandra Page Vldyabhusana . 6. his Dissel'tn. 10.irlya. . how he Defeated a SOphIst Astavakra Solves Puzzles Me:dhiUithi Gautama the Founder of Amik. 15.ehe!''> of ~4nviksiki (PhilosDphy and Logic). SECTION I.3.D.ka. 16.nvik~iki.. Frontispiece ix Introduction xiii Foreword by Sir Asutosh MukerJee . her Oanons of Speech Astavakra.4.~.. l4. TH1': ANCIENT SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC.E OF INQUIRY (650 RO..). . OhapleT I. The Doctri1~e8 of An'l.~ad) 17.rSana Variou:-.l Logical Aspeot j 2 2 4 4 5 6 7 Ohapter 11 'The Te(l.ilc~iki.4nvik~iki into a/~ Art 0/ Debate. .CONTENT~.

11. The Arrangement of Categories in the N1/aya-sutra 30. Narada. Page 19. Purpose (prayojana) 5. Karyabhimrvrtti. 28 28 20. the Method of Debate Ohapter IV.• 10. 22. The Categories: their Definition 1.xxviii CONTENTS. (Jhapter I. The means of Right knowledge (pramii"t}a) 2. Example (dr~!anta) 6. Reception accorded to Antik~iki. Members of a Syllogism (avayava) 8. the first systematic work on Nyliyusastra 27. Anvik/iiki condemned in certain circles Anvik~iki held in high esteem in some quarters SECTION 36 37 II. the Standard of Examination iii. the Author of the Nyaya-sUtra 28. The Objects of Right knowledge (prameya) 3. the Terms of ScientIfic Argument 24 25 27 Medhat. 8u bjects of the N yaya-s'iUra •. Ascertainment (niT'f!-Uya) . Tantra Yukt~. The Process of Treatment of the Categories Ohapter II. 9. Confutation (tarka) .• 56 59 59 59 60 61 62 58 63 . 7. Nyaya-8utra. 21. 18. Akl?apada. Pariksa. Discussion (vada) •• . Phe Growth oj N yayaJastra.ithi Gautama's Doctrines as reproduced in the Carakasamhita 1. 29. Tenet (siddhiinta) •. Origin of the name N yaya 23. the Aggregate of Resources for the Accompli8hment of an ActIOn. Gontents 40 41 42 43 46 47 50 52 53 0/ the Nyiiya-sutrc 54 54 54 31. an Expert in N yayasastra 26. . The Antiquity of NyaYaBiistra 24. The Early Teachers of NyayaBQstra 25.• •. The Categories: their Enunciation . NVA.• 32. Sambhjj~a or vada-vidhi.yA-SASTRA-THE SCIENCE OF TRUE REASONING. Doubt (samsaya) •• 4.

Balancing the questionable 6 Balancing the unquestionable 7. Balancing the counter-example . . Balancing the presumption 18.(i) 13. nalancing an excess 4. 2.. 9. 8. 3. Repetition . < 72 73 73 74 74 75 7!) 7(i 77 78 7R 7B 7g :. .. 16. ~~3. 12.. Balancing the alternative 8 Balancing the question 9. Saying too little 12. 13. Wrangling (jalpa) . Ralandng the non-perception 22 Balancing the non-eternal 23. Balancing the non-difference 19. Shifting the proposition . Balancing the mutual absence ]1. The unintelligible . Balancing the non-pl'Oduced 14..Balancing the perception 21. Balancing the co-presence 10.. Balancing the non-reason 17. Balancing the heterogeneity 3. Rhifting the reason 6.0 81 81 82 84 84 85 8fi ~6 "34. 15. Opposing the proposition 4.. Balancing the eternal 24. 15. Silence 86 86 87 87 87 . Balancing the effect Application of the Analogues . The meaningless . xxix Page 11. Balancing the demonstration 20.. Balancing the point at it:lsue or the controversial Hi. Ca vi] (vitanq. Shifting the topic . 87 88 88 88 89 . Balancing the doubt.. 14. Six-winged Disputation (~a~pak~i katha) 67 67 68 68 69 6H 70 70 71 71 . 14.. The incoherent 10. Saying too much 13. 7. Balancing the infinite regrest:lion 12.CONTENTS. "Fallacy (kettabkasa) Quibble (chnla) Ana logue (jati) A Point of J)efeat (nigrahastkana) 63 63 65 65 66 63 The Varieties of Analogue l. Renouncing the proposition 5. Hurting the proposition . Varieties of the points of the :i}efeat 1. 'The inopportune 11. Balancing a deficit 5. Balancing the homogeneity 2..

• 101 Transmigr.. . 105 3. 112 10. Doubt (sainsaya. 99 100 Objects of sense Intellect 101 lVIind 101 Fault::: . Pa{l" 15 Ignorance..ii) 104 '36.ure of the Commentaries .. 37.khyailca. Word (pada) 110 8. Intellect (buddhi) .xxx CONT}t1~'TS. Evasion 89 18. Sound (8abda) 109 7. NOYl-inge:J. 89 89 16..yana.tion 101 Emancipation. Topics Incidentally Examined 105 1. Vatsya.nta) 114- Ohapter III. Memory (smrti) 112 11. The fallacies of reason also furnish point':> of defeat or occasion for rebuke 90 35 Categories: their Examination (parik~a) 90 1. Words and their Meanings (sabdartha) 106 5.uity 17.) 103 4. Devi<1Ling fIOm a tenet 90 22. ' 95 2. The Three Times (kala) .. Wrangling and Cavil (jalpa-vita'rfq. The eyes (cak?!U~6) •. The Means of Rh:~ht Knowledge (pramii1J-a) 90 The means 90 Perception 92 Inferencf. The Veda . Overlooking the censurn. The fixed signification of numbers (sa'f!/. Censuring the nun-censurable 90 21.· 93 Comparison 93 Verbal testimony 94 Other means . author of the Nyaya-bhiilma 115 115 . III 9. 36a Nat.. H Senses.. . OlYlmnentaries on the Nyaya-sifltra.l. Admission of an opinioil 59 19. Discussion (viida) 104 5. 107 6. 106 4. Atoms (paTamarpu) .. 102 3. Parts and Whole (avayava and avayavin) 105 2.. The objects of 'l'ight knowledge (p?'ameya) 97 The Soul 97 B~y .ble 89 20.

te of the Anvik. The Theory of Cause and Effect (ldirya-kjjrm. Srikantha 64. Pddyotakara... Author of the Ny?iya-vartika. A'II/hor of t.Jayanta's 1i~ . Udayana combats the Buddhists 56.a1'i 60. Vacaspati's Theory of B.5 . J.'ll1ci and the Nyaya 67 _ The Nyaya included in ~a9-dars:1na . . Uddyotakara criticises Dignaga :15. 52. Yacaspati's Theory or Conrlition (upadhi) 53b.OONTEN'1'S. Udayana's ](~t8urnaniaU 58. The Nyaya supports the VesIa 69. Uddyotakara criticises Vasubandhu and Nagarjuna 44.9. Udayanacarya. The Nyaya ndapts itself to Saivi8m " 70. 1~)2 66.)llIli:e(.~a) 53c. Jay::mta C1iticises the Doctrines of Knlyu. 5.c Leaming. Vatsyayana criticises other Doctrines of 'Jhe Buddhists to.ra's Explanation of Perception .ga 51.ut1'o. The Nyaya fer. Author of the Nyaya-vartilca '*2 Udrlyotakara's <:ontroversy with the Buddhists -1:3. savikalpaka 1tnd n'irv£kalpaka 53. Jayanta. The Buddhi~t and Juina Scriptures condemned 54. Vatsyayana's Explanation of certain Doctrines 41. Author of ~yaya-vjjrtika-tatparya-~ikiirparisuddhi 55. Other C'OlUnlE'ntntortl on the Nyaya-. Ahhayutilnlm UpadhyaYll 65. XXXI Page 38.na Rak~ita and Dharmottara 62 Javanta's Review of BeveTnl other Buddistic l)octrines 63. Vacaspati opposes Digna.{atparayatika 30.. 68. A comparative Estima.planation of Verbal Knf'wledge 61.he Nyaya-ma'n.~ a·~ (l Branch of Orthodo.prama) . 46. Uddyotaka.~a. Udayana opposes Kalval)a Rak~ita and Dharmottara 57. Uddyotakara's Definition of Inference 47.r. Udavana's A~ma-tattva-viveka 59. .. 117 l20 121 123 125 127 129 130 130 131 132 133 135 136 137 138 140 140 141 141 142 143 143 145 146 147 149 150 151 151 15l Chapte1' IV. The Popularity of Nynya I:'stablished 152 152 153 154 l!. Vatsyayana criticises Nagarjuna 39. Vacaspati's Explanation of Determinate and Indeterminate Perceptions. Uddyotakara's Theory of Verbal Knowledge 48 Uddyotakara's Theory of Sufferings .jght Knowledge and Wrong Knowledge (prama and a. Vacaspati }li~ra. Vacaspati criticises Dharmakirti .

Siddhasena Divakara alias K~apa~aka 11) Siddhasena's N yfiyavatara Pramii'tfa.lama Logic . Page The special Features of Mediaeval Logic. Logical Subjects in the Canons 158 159 159 160 161 Ohapter II.. The Jaina. Svetambara and Digambara 4 Indrabhiiti Gautama. The canonical Scriptures of the Jainas f). 2. Right knowledge 3 aya. Q 172 172 173 174 174 181 182 182 184 185 186 188 181 . a. SECTION 1. J aina fV riters on Systematic Logic.. THE MEDIAEVAL SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC CALLED Prama. Formation of the Mediaeval school. Jinabhadra Gani Ksamasramana . Bhadra bahu the Senior Bhadrabahu the Junior 7.• 2L Vidvananda. Umasvitti 10.. the Method of Descriptions lti. Umasvati's Explanation of Naya (the Mood of Statements) 164 164 165 167 168 169 170 Ohapter I I 1. JAIN A LOGIC. Bhadrabahu's Syllogism •• 8 Bhadrabahu's Explanation of Syiidvada 9. . THE SOIENCE OF RIGHT KNOWLEDGE.• .ii CONTENTS. . Akalankadeva " . Sumantabhadra's Aptamimamsa 20.. Siddhasena Qani .XXl. " . The written Records of the Jainas .. Ohapter I. 18 Samantabhadra . the founder of Jainism . Early Jaina Writers on Logic. Umasvati's Doctrine of Prarn. 22. 3. 10. Systematic . 17. Topics of Logic mentioned in the Jaina Ganons.. MahaVira. sects.• . l-!.. Mitriikya Nandi ..!-aSastra.a'tfa (Right Knowledge) 11. Disciple of Mahav1ra 5.. 13. 12. PART II.

48. 52.li Dharma Bhiisana Vinayavijaya '. 25. 52« 53. Reason. 47. 'rhe conciliatory Character of tTaina Logw 221 . Habhasananda . '36. 26.aON'rENTS xxxiii Page 24. hetu Example. 49.. 46. 29. 50 51. . 37. 41.aghusamantabhadra Kalyanacandra AnantitVirva Deva Surf Deva Surl's Pramann·naua·taUvfiloklilank5ta Fallacies of Nava ~ The Sou]. 38. RajaAekhara Sud Jfianacandra Gunaratna . Hemacandra Sud Candraprabha Siiri Nemica. 40. . Devabhadra Candrasena Sud Ratnaprabha Suri Tilakacarva Mallisena ~Suri . atmcf •• The Method of Debate . nickna. 34.ndra.nta Inference anumana Verbal Testimony.. 39. 27. 33.( 190 191 192 192 \ 192 192 193 193 194 194 195 195 196 196 197 198 198 19S 200 203 204 204 205 206 207 207 208 210 210 211 211 211 212 212 213 213 214 215 215 516 217 218 Oontinuity of Jaina Loyie 55.. 28. 31. Pradyumna siiii Abhayadeva Sud f. .{eferences to Philosophers Prabhacandra . Yasovijaya Ga9-i YaSovijaya's Works Ohal)ter I J. 32. agama .. 35. 30. 42... . viattya Fallacy. 45... Mallavadin Amrtacandra Suri Devasena Bhattaraka. ' i. Srutasagara GaI. 54.. 43.'. Kavi . .~nanda Suri and Amaracandra Suri. 44.. . fibhasa .• Scope of valid Knowledge.. dr~{f1.med'riger·cub and Lion-cub Haribhadra Sliri Paravadeva Gani Srlcandra .

.. Origin of the Sa. . Abhidhamma-pitaka: ]catha'oatthuppakaranq. •.. .• A Complaint in Complainant and Respondent A Judicial Council of Monks (sa. Buddha Gautama 60. 1:1 The Lalita'l1istara it. 71.. .cara.)atara-s?ltm "> .. Suttapi~aka: Digka-ntkaya: Brahmajala Butta 63. Suttapitaka: J-'1ajihernanikaya Anumana Butta 64. A Complaint (codana) .xx:x:iv CONTENTS. The Lankal.. . TOptC8 of Logic mentioned in tke old Buddk'/Jst Literat?tre 22. Ohapter I. THE BUDDHIST LOGIC. V inaya-pi~aka: Parivara Four kinds of Cases for Settlement (adhikarrpa) Seven Rules for the Settlement of Cases (adkikara1Ja-samatha-dhamma) . Logic mentioned in the Sanskrit Literature.\1eaning of Terms (vacanasodhana) "'~ Case presented through an Analogy (opamma samsandana) A Case presented through the four~fold Method (catukkanayasamsandana) The Doctrine of Impermanence (kha"!.sandana) .nskrit Buddhist Literature .. Paye 07. •. 67. Origin of the Pali Buddhist Literature 61. . Support of the Jaina Community 58..) 22.bkikkhu) The Judge or Umpire (anuvijjalt:u) 66. Jaina Logic will not be extinct SECTJON 223 ~24 II.!-ghu) Members of a Council (saingamavQ.) 22 i 227 22H ..!-a) A Case pregented through a. Methods of Disputation as illustrated in the Kathiivatthu A Case presented by a Dispute in a regular Form (anuloma) A Rejoinder by the Respondent (patikamma) The Rejoinder causing Entanglement or Defeat on the Disputant (nifJfJaha) Apphcation of the Reasonin~ of the Disputant to his own Case ('ltpanaya) (Ionclusion (niggama'. 70.l-Sutra . 22B 229 22fl 230 ~31 231 231 231 231 232 234 235 235 235 236 230 237 237 238 238 238 23H 239 240 241 242 242 243 243 . Milinda-pafiha alias the Bhi~l. •. 72. simple Comparison (suddhikasam. Suttapi~aka: Khuddaka N ik'iiyCb Udana 65. .50.eka /catha) t)~. . 'Definition of Terms (lakkhanayatti kath1i) Clearing the . Origin of the Mahayana . Logical Topics in the Pall Literature 62. V inaya pifaka: patimokkhu . 68.

.-au8alya·hrd(tya-8a8tra ~ise 251 251 253 2f)6 Ak~apada 255 82.lediaeval LogIc Life of Dignaga ....stra 84.. Chapter II-Inference for One's Self.ist W riter8 on Logic. . The Place of Debate .. Vasnbandhu'~ Tatka-sa. ~ 1..na's References to the Logical Do!"'triues of Na. A1. Points of Defeat (nigrahasthiina) 6.. Systematic Buddhist lVriters o?t. The Middle Term and the Major Term Fourteen Fallacies .. Arya Asanga 89. Perception and Inference 9ti. The Qualifications of a Debater 5. . i70 :!70 272 274 27H 280 282 286 ~Ri 288 ~~!' ~~9 ~no 291 293 ~!\5 :WS ::!9!l 29~ . 78. 77 . A Syllogism. The Subject of Debate 2.e 4.... Dignaga's NJiiiya-pravesa . Nagarjuna's Prama'Y!a-vihetan(!. . Page of Buddhist Logic Arya Nagarjuna Nagarjuna's JJUidhyamika-kiirika Nagarje.CONTENTS. 92.. or Prama'f}a mdhvamsana . U~1aya-J. Early Buddh.AI'va Deva Maitreva .garj una's Vigrrtlta-~.he (~ommeneement of Mediaeval Logic Acarya Dignaga... The Means of Debat. . . Pramarpa-. 9l.!.. the Father of . 80.<:. Vasubandhu 90. . :{.tending a Place of Debate 7. ..Mai tre)7a' s Abhisamayala:nlcam. 19...-lcii1'ika Maitreya's Treatise on the Art of Debate 1. . .yavartani-lcarika .~:' .. .. 93.I. Ohapter II. . Negation of the Opposite Chapter VI-Analogues or Far-fetched Analogy 95. The example . Dignaga's H etu-cakrallamaru 97. 8~~ 257 259 t61 262 . 85. . nyayavayava The Minor 'rerm . 262 26~ 263 263 :2 £)4 264 264 265 266 267 264: 264 Ohaptet 111. Chapter V-Apoha. Chapter III-Inference for the Sake of Others Chapter IV-Reason and Example . 86 87.... Logi'"C. Confidence of a Debater 88..amuccaya-vrtlt.. 94 Dignaga's Pramana-samuccaya Chapter i-Perception..

. Tarka-n. 107. 112.. 123. 104. 121. 108. 130. Ravi Gupta Jinendrabodhi 322 Santa Raksita. 117.. 129.. Trikala-pariJqii. 133. 116.XXXVI OON'l'ENT~ Page. 106. KalyaJta Rak~ita. 115. Sakyabodhi 118. Jfiauaari Mitra 137. 109. 101. Paramartha Sankara Svamm Dharmapala Acarya Silabhadra. 341 342 342 • 343 344 140. Prajiiakara Gupta.lJaya or Vada-nyaya Bantana. 99. Acarya Dharmakirti Prarnii. 131. 126.·vini8caya N yaya-bindu . 105. Ratna Kirti Ratna Vajra. Acarya Jetari Jina. Prama~a-vartika-vrtti 308 309 310 312 315 318 310 318 319 319 319 319 320 320 323 327 . 323 328 329 331 331 332 333 336 337 338 339 340 340 338 134.•pari~jj·vrtti Devendrabodhi Vhtlta De\"'a . Bambandha-pari~ii •• Sambandh(J. Muktakumbha Arcata Asoka Candragomin (Junior) . . Pramii1}o. 102. Kamalasila Dharmottaracarya. 110. JiianaarI Bhadra 138...• Perception Inference for One's Self Inference for the Sake of Others Dharmakirti criticises Dignaga H etu·bindu-t'ivarana • • . 125. 103. 132.. Jina Mitra 135. 122. 119. 124.. 127. Yamari . Danaaila 136. 113 114. Ratnakara Santi 139. Sankarananda. 128. 120.na-vartika-karikii.ntara-siddhi •. Alamba'J]-a-parik~a-vrlti . 300 301 301 302 302 303 303 306 308 301 111. llamba~a-parik~a 100.

:{. . Shelter in Foreign Oountries . PART HI. . Non-tried or Non·conclusive (anadhyavasUa or anupasamhiiri). 148. D. Unproved (asiddha) . Page 143. Balancing the Controversy (prakara~a-sama) G. 355 355 356 357 357 358 358 359 359 361 362 362 363 365 366 367 367 368 368 I.. Contentious Spirit of Buddhist Logic 144. E. !he ~ya. Fallacy of Reason A.. Oummentaries on the Nyaya-sara 370 370 :171 Ohapter II. The Decline of Buddhist Logic. Loss of Royal Patronage . N yaya·prakara~ developing the category of prama~a 5. Four Classes of Prakaranas 4.sarvajna's Nyaya-sa'l'u Nyaya-sara follows no particular Work 7 Contents of the Nyaya·sara Perception. mo~a .~a. xxxvii Ohapter IV. agarna Emanoipation. udakara'1}a Verbal Testimony. 146. Ohapter I The Nyaya·p1'akara'i~a reducM its categorie8 to one. Bha:. 145. Advent of the Mahomedans ..CONTENTS. The Brahmanic Preachers 147. Composition of the Prakara'lfas. Prakara~-MANUAL OF LOGIC. The Contradictory (viruddha) . Nyaya-prakaraTfaB embodying Vai8e~ik(J categories. • ~. . Manual of Logic ... Non-erroneous Contradiotion (viruddhavyabhic'iiri) Example.Se~ika .. B.. 348 349 350 351 351 353 THE MODERN SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC. Mistimed or Incompatible Reason (kiizatyayop{ldi~~a or badhita) F. Bhasarvajfia H. Inference. incorporates the Vai. SECTION I. 9. C.he Neo-Brahmal}ic age i. T. anumana H etvabhiisa. Extinction of the Buddhists and their Doctrines in India. The Uncertain (anaikantika) •. pratyakf!a •.

. Visvanatha Nyayapancanana . . 27... 374 375 376 377 377 378 380 381 381 381 382 382 . katha 12 Commentaries on T(j. Tnference as a Means of Right knowledge . Sa7vadar8ana-samgrana.p1'atyale~a Inference. . 32... 24. ava.a embodying the N yaya category of Prama'YJ:a. The Nya-ya and Vais~ika promiscuously amalgamated 29. pad(j. Vallabhacarya . Tarkamrta Laugak~i l3haskara Tarka-kaumudi Ohapter IV. 395 395 393 Wm'les treating of certain topics of the N yaya and certain topics of the VaiseJ!ika. prama1!.. . sabda 15. Commentaries on Ta1'kasaingraha 23.. Commentaries on the N yaya-lilavati . .. . Tarkikaraksa •• Valid knowiedge. Debate.i-tha Instrnment. upamiinii Word. anumana Syllogism. •. Tarka·bha~(j. 16.rkikarak~a 13. Annam Bhatta 21.. The Inference as a Means of Ri ht Knowled e cannot be 396 396 396 397 398 398 ... 30.. Page 11. .(t Inference. Saaadhara .. . Tarkasamgraha . Madhavacarya . 22. Ak/?apada DarSana.. The VaiSesika incorporates the Nyaya category 17.. . kara'YJ:a Cause..yana The Sign.. 28.xxxviii CON'l'ENTS. 26. anumana Comparison.. lingo. 20. Nya'l/a-siddhanta-dipa 31. Keaava Misra 14. 18. 383 :383 384 384 :384 The VaiBel!ika Prakara1]. Bha~a-pariccheda 386 386 387 388 390 392 387 388 392 25. N yaya-lilavati . Technicality of Logic Categories. Commentaries on the Tarka-hhiisii Ohapter III. karana Perception. 19..

8arrtttnaya-vada 414 The Invalidit\ of Xon-perception Anupalabillti or prama'Yl-ya vada. kkanq. .ni 405 The Text of 17ullva-cinlamani BOOK I. .a.CONTENTS. .. = Inference. • • 421 Definition of Invariable Concomitance given by " Lion" and " Tiger". 'J'arka-6'(isit'a-TUE SCIENCE OF DULECTICS. Ma1:~gala-vada 408 The Validity of Knowledge. Man01. the Author of the Tattva-cintanw.r"irllpa'l'fa . xxxix SEC'l'WN II. 419 BOOK II. Fine Definition of Terms The Us€ ' of Technical Terllls Page 402 402 403 403 403 402 37 38. Anumana-kharJ4a 419 The Determination of Inferential Knowledge-Anumiti. Purvapakf!a~ • . :. Pratyak~a-k1ira'Yfa-viida 416 The Atomic Nature of the. 417 The Doctrine of Self-consoiousness..1/avasaya-vada 418 Immediate Perception. 40!) Intercour::le between Renses and their Objects-Sannikarsa Ordinary PerceptIOn (laukika fJratyak~a). Formation of the Tarka-sastra. Vyadkikara1fa-dharmJj. . 40.. Importance of Tattva-cinlfimani 405 Gangesa. N i1'vikalpa-vada 418 Mediate Perception. Perc<'ptioll... 41. Prta.. PriimaJ.Mind. vacchinnabhavak .• . . Ohapter I I. . The Nyaya cannot he combined with Vaiselillka AdoptIOn of Pramiina alone . Vyapti-pancakam . Simha-vyaghrok[a-vyiiljtilak. 407 Invocation of Blessings.. •• ....ya-viiila 408 Invalid Knowledg('. 35.~(I. . 420 Five Provisional Definitions of Invariable Concomitance. Anu'IJ.yak. Adol)tioll of the Valse~ika Principles Subtlet~T of Meanings aimed at . 419 Inference distinct frolll Perceptioll . 411 Transcendent Perception (alaubkr: pratyak~a) 412 Inference.l4. . 415 Causes of Perception.• • • 42a Other objectionabie Definitions of Invariable Conoomitance. 1 424 . . 36. Oha1Jter I J.utva-vada .l. • • 423 :Non-exiRtence whose Counterpart is qualified by a Nature abiding ill a different Locus. 1 attm-cintama'f!i-tlte Earliest zlJork on Tarlca-sastra.. An?jaiha-khy'fih .. .. 8avikalpa-vada •. 39.~a'rfa •. 414 Non-existence (or Negation). Abltava-v5ria ../. 33.

Vidhi-vada~ Merit and Demerit.eable as they point out Inefficienoy Inference of God. Ii etvabhiisah •• Fallacies are servi£-. Samanya bhavalf . Sabda-kharula Definition of Verbal Testim~ny .vada7p . Paramar8a~ An Exclusively Affirmative Inference. Tarka . U pasarga . Saman?!a.. Pakttat1i Consideration or Know ledge of Premises. "BOOK IV : Verbal Testimonv.xl CONTENTS.l(ia •.. nam 434 435 435 435 435 436 436 438 442 442 443 444 444 445 447 447 447 448 444 .l Suffixes.Form.• Conclusion about the Intercourse whose Character is General. Bakti-vadalp .• Non-existence of" the General . . Akhya. Vpadhi-vada~ The State of Being the Locus or Minor Term. Page The conclusive Definition of Invariable Concomitance. Sva. Keval'iinvayyanumaAn Exclusively Negative lnfel. Akan!qa-vadalp Consistency. Pre~~es. Tlitparayam . I.. Pararthfin'l. Dhiitu-vadah . Kevalavyatirekyanumanam An Affirmative-negati\"e Inference . Lak~a1Jli.ea. B iddh'iinta-laksanam . Contiguity. Presumption..ma~ Intercourse whose Character is General.numana Inference for the Sake of Others. Compound Words.• Comp"ehensiveness of In variable Concomitance. Vyapti-grah()paya~ 424 425 426 426 428 429 429 429 430 431 432 433 434 Conclusion as to the Means of appending Invariable Concomitance. Samiisa-vadah Verba... Sabda-bodkal} Speech as a Means of Valid-Knowledge Expectancy..lalcl!a1J-a-8iddhiinta~ The Conditional Middle Term. Arthapatti Inference for One's self. Vy1ipti-grahopaya-siddhanta •. Reasoning (or Confutation).. 448 448 . Invariable Concomitance of Special Forms. The Roots.§varanumanam •• . 453 . Syllogism.. Vi. Upamal'fa. Implication. Avayavalp Fallacies.entiality.. Samanya-lak~a?J-a .khaJ. Verbal Knowledge.l. 451 449 449 453 453 453 ..§~a-vyiipti ...rtha. Y ogyata .. Nyayalp .'ence. Vyaptyanugf1.rva-vadah Pot.mana .viidCtlJ. Parts of a Syllogism. •. BOOK III : Comparison. Apu. The Non-eternity of Sound Inju'Uotion. The Means of apprehending Invariable Concomitance.. •• •. Asatti~ Intention.

. 8!.. 84. 69. . 73.da Tarkavagisa . 44. 66. 77.. 64. 57. The Popularity of Tattva-cintamani . 461 461 461 463 465 466 466 466 467 468 46S 468 46U Sabda. 68. 74. 75. . Raghudeva NyayaJankara Gadadhara BhaHacharya Nrsinha Pancanana •• Ramadeva Cirafijiva •. . 52. . l1padhyaya.. 54. Kr~J)ada$a Sravabhanma BhaHacarya Gu:tuinanda Vidyaviigisa Ramabhadra Sarvabhauma Jagadisa Tarka:lankara 454 454 454 . 47. I{udra Nyayavacaspati Jayarama Nyayapaficanana.. 63. 48. 56.. .83 483 Rajacu9imal}imakhin •• . .. 85..OONTENTS. 59. Ramak!. 72. .. 63.. Durgada tta Misra De\""anatha Thakknra .Jtakanta VidyavagiS& 470 47U 477 478 479 479 479 480 480 481 481 482 483 488 484 4. Hal irama Tarkavagisa Visvana tha Slddhantapancanana Ramabhadra Siddhantavagisa Govinda Nya. .. 51. 455 456 457 457 458 459 460 460 460 457 . Gaurikanta Sarvabhauma Bhavananda Siddhantavagi~a . Bhagiratha or Megha Thakkura MaheSa 'l'hakaura '. Vacaspati Misra (the Younger 01' Junior) Misaru Misra . xlI Ohapter I I 1.• Vasudeva Mlsra Rucidatta 1\1 isra . Vardhamana. 79.. 78. ... 42. . .. 70. 82.~1..~ Buno " Ramana tha Kn. KaJ)a. Misra . Madhusiidana Thakkura. 80. 484 484 485 . 71. 87.. The MithHa School .. 76. 60. 43. Chakravat'ti Mathuranatha'l'arkavagisa . 86.. 67. 83. . The Nadia School Vasujeva Sarvabhauma Raghunatha SiromaJ)i . Baridasa NyayaJankara BhaHacarya tJanakinatha Sarma . 55. 61.:vavagisa . 46. Paksadhara. Commentaries on eke Tattva-cintamani.. 45. 49 Page 50. . 62.1a BhaHacarya. :kamarudra Tarkavagisa Sr1kr~~a Nyayalankara Jayara ma Tarkalankara Rudrarama •• . Sankara 'Misra . 65. . 58.sakti-prakaAikii •.

Rise of Vernacular detrimental to Nyaya 97.ces of a Visit to Labrang.A uthors Index of Quotations Index of Sanskrit Terms 542 579 595 599 611 Tibetan Indexes. The Royal University of VikramaSila Appendix: F.. 92. Patronage of the Maharaja of Nadia .. III. 488 488 492 492 490 AppendIx A.Pala Dynasty of Bengal and Behar . Logioal Terms Tibetan Quotations . . I. 8S. Proper Names Place Names R... Reminiscences of a Visit to Pa1l1iyangchi Appendix: K.rin Goplnatha Mauni DO. Appendix: D..Tourney to Ceylon INDEXES.. II.. A List of Kings of the .xlh CONTENTS.esidualfl 634 638 638 . V. Reminiscer.. Books . 485 485 486 486 487 Ohapter if'. 646 647 644 . The University of Nalanda . . 93. . The Universities on the Western Model Appendices. Influence of Aristotle on the Development of the Syllogism in Indian Logic Appendix O. . . British Government encourages Nyaya 96.. Page Dharmarajadhva. lV[ahadeva Puntamkar . Appendix: E. . .. Pumi· 494 497 514 517 519 521 523 528 yangchiand Padangi Appendix J. IV.. Raghunatha Sastri (Parvata) . 89... VI. Present State oj the Science of Dialeci'ic~. University of Mithila . jrhe Portuguese to be an Interest in Dialectics 95.. 530 537 540 Index ()f Subjects Index of Books Index of .. 94. The Tashi Lama's Visit to India Appendix I.. . Krsna Bhatta Ade 91. The University of Taxila AppendIx B. Appendix: G The University of Nadia Appendix H. .

The U panil?ads which deal mainly with metaphysical questions are included in the AraI].C. are supposed to have belonged to a period between 900 B.-600 B.).European Languages. who do not admit the perpetuity of their existence.D. t 1 . while the Brahmal).c. to be the oldest records not only of India but of the whole Aryan \yorld. A. The Veda.. and 600 B.). The growth of Anviksiki into an Art of Debate.C. etc .-IOO CHAPTER 1. The AraI}yakas {Forest-treatises)." Compare Macdonell's '" History of Sanskrit Litera. Kausitaki. THE EARI.C. 1.C.as (Rituals.as such as the Aitareya.as maintain that their religion is eterna.A HISTORY OF INDIAN LOG rc. Anvik~iki-the Science of Inquiry (650 B.TURE OF INDIA.> The Vedas are regarded even by modern scholars.' Grimm'q Phonetic Law of the Indo.C.y LITERA.l (sanatana). etc. The Sa rhhita of the :?gveda which is the oldest part of the Veda is said by them to have come down to us f:rom about 1500 B.yakas and are as such older than 600 B. form the closing section of the Brahmalfas. (CIRCA 1500 B. THJ~ ANClENT SCHOOL OF INDiAN LOGIC SECTION I.ture/' p.C. 47. and my . It is based on scriptures which are said also to be eternal but revealed in different cycles of time to seers or sages called R~M.. These scriptures are called the Vedas which comprise the Sarilhitas (Hymns) and the BrahmaI}. The BrahmaI}. PART I. which are theosophie iu character.).

oharacterised as ajo bhago. 3. does not however find favour with Inodern soholars acoording to whOln all human civilizations. pp.la. 2. pra'l}a.lQ. Vide Muir's Sao.1so Muir's Sanskrit Texts.hhlta IX 113. x. V. grew up by a process of evolution The concepEvolution 111 the Doc tion of the soul and it.l. ANVIK~IKI CHAP. x. . vi.pa. is conveyed by the messenger of Yamu. 2. etc The BrahmaI). mention the soul as atman lay much stress BrahmaJ. and 000 B. breath.C.2 INDIAN LOGIC I ANCIENT SCHOOL.g-veda. .as hold that the doctrine of the doul and its destiny propoundec in the Al'al). The Sarilhitas of the ~g-veda I and Atharva-veda 2 tell us that when a person dies his spirit (called Spirit In the Vedas. The jnana-kat. Atharva veda sathhita xviIi.ta. the unborn part). 1 2 . -------------------R. 2. BrahmaI). 27. 14. 300-335. Vol. 3. As already suggested. . Sar.f:1krit Texts. (the Lord of Death) to the world of his forefathers where it obtains a delectable abode and enters upon a perfect !ife which will never cease. 2.11. . thing else. These stages may be cleady seen if we examine the doctrine of the soul as given in the Samhitas. 14. has undergone stages of development in the course of ages. pp. which Soul in the ~a. DEVELOPMENT OF THE CONCEPTION OF SOUL (gOt) B. the Brahmat). 10.C ).s destiny. Vol.). Rain. between 1500 B.a.C. 300-335. x. and x.C. 27. BdhmaJ. 2.as which treat mainly of the sacrificial rites come under the head karma. inoluding even the civilizations of the Indbn people. I 2. on its good work called dharma (righteous.tha.9. The Satapatha BrahmaIJa S and other later vedic 'workR. (Knowledge) Under 'ltpa8ana come the Saluhitas which embody expressions of wonder and a\y'e at the Po\vers of Nature such as Light.yakas (Upanif?ads) has existed in India from the beginn ing of time. 23.as and U pani~ads.-600 B. breathing. DarkneRs.-flOO B. like every trine of Soul. 7.8-10. 1. if.a as represented by the Aral). Wind. 6.patha. which leaves behind on earth all that is uncomfortable.) may be Prayer. RItuals and divided into three sections (kandas) viz Knowledge. From the standpoint of subject-matter the Vedas (composed . karma (Hituals) and jf1.yakas is concerned mainly with the nature of sou1 and its destiny.anu.C. or mana~b. Water. s ~ata. asu. PROBLEMS OF THE VEDAS (CIRCA 1500 n. whioh seeks to place the Brahmal}ic religion on a firm basis unshaken by the influences of time. Their view. O. Vide a. intelligence. 16. xi.C. upasana (l!rayer).

and 16• . comes back to this world. the mind and the senses. cribed as being distinct from the body. the Kathopani~ad says that some souls enter the womb to have bodies as organic beings) while others go into inorganic matter according to their work and knowledge. as great and omnipresent.nging among changing things. As to the destiny of the soul after death. while a person who has merely done useful work passmg through the path of his forefa~hers (pitr-yana) reacheR the moon whence he. after the exhaustion of his merits. ~~. 5. 2-1-4.d 1-1-20. I 'fRRl<{ ~fAq q~ Ifrf~ (BrhadaraI. Chandogyopanlsad 4-15.nslation of the Ka~hopa. 15. 3 BrhadaraI). and karma (work) Accord. and a person who has neither acquired knowledge nor has done any useful work traverses a third path--the path of transmigration (sa7iltsara)which leadH him to continual births and deaths The third path is more fully expounded in the Kathopani~ad 4 which gives a clear exposiijion of the nature Sonl In th!" Kathopa. 16. the senses are the horses and the surrounding objects their spheres of operation.yaka 3 a person who has acquired knowledge proceeds after death through thp path of gods (deva-yana) to the region of Brahma whence he does not return. It is eternal and everlasting and is not killed though the body is killed The wise man who knows the soul as bodile~s \vithin the body. Then the mortal becomes immortal and attains Brahman.DEVELOPMENT O'El~ TllFl CONCErTlON OF SOUL 3 ness) which is de~eribed as the strength of strengths (k~at1'a8ya According to them all persons are after death reborn into another world where they enjoy pleasures or suffer pains according to their good or evil deeds. The soul is comparable to a person who moves in a chariot.nisadl in the S. and 2-6-14. it doeR not die) it sprang from nothing and nothing sprang from it. k~atram).l ~ ~~. the mind the reins. V'I>ae a. series. 6-2-15.yakopaniltlad 4-4-5.B. Fools run after outward pleasures and fall into the snare of death. J-2-22. Such transmigration continues until all deRires that dwell in the heart cease.lso Max Muller's tra. body is the chariot) the intellect the chariot. thp.4.eer.. l-2-18. 1-3-3. 5-10-8. The soul is desnlsad. I 2 . 19.ng to the Chandogya 2 and the BrhadarnQ. It is not born. 5-10-3. Kathopanisn. 7. as uncha.E.of the soul called atrnan. The upani::. 2-5-6. never grieves.lyaka 10-14). The soul js called the enjoyer when it is in union with the body.ads offer a subtle treatment of the soul distinguishing carefully between jfiana (knowledge) Sonl In the U pamsacl:o. but wise men cognizant of the imperishable nature of the soul never banker after unstable things which give rise only to sufferings.

d (3rd cha. (CIROA 650 B. the soienoe of inquiry. the science of soul.C. .. I.C.yakopani!?ad.C. Manu 8 uses Anvikl?iki as an equivalent for atmaSatapatha Brahtnal. an abstract conception-regarding the soul Two ldeas regardmg the which developed pa1'i mf1.C. the essence which permeated the object in all its forms and changes. 7th BrahmaJ. which gave birth to the Vedanta system of philosophy.as.ssu with the first Sow. Atma-vidya was at a later stage. MU:Qg.I~fffi~t i." 1WfiA{ I .kopanif?l3. 1 2 1 I.called Anvik~iki. the spiritual sciepce. It (:Manu Samhl~8 7-43).. began to exercise considerable influence on the first idea which was supported in other systems of philosophy. Atmavidya--THE (CIRCA SOIENOE OF SOUL 900 B. we find that litma.rr. signified the essence of an object as distinguished from its outward form.i. .) which dealt with the soul and its destiny constituted 'a very important branch of study called Atma-vidya.lya. ' rIdea. In the previous paragraph there has been given some idea of the nature of the soul-a concrete substance-as it was understood in the ages of the Upani~ads as well as in those of the Samhitas and BrabmaI}. 8 ~flfii~ f'Ar" 1{.-IOO B.la). CHAP.. ANCIENT SOHOOL.1~f1I.C. Anviksiki-WHICH INCLUDES A THEORY OF REASONS . and a compromise between the two ideas was effected when the soul belonging to our practical condition (vyavaharika dasa) was stated to be of the first description while the soul belonging to our transcendental condition (paramarthika daia) was stated to be of the second description. which is the foundation of all other sciences. Klmandaka too in his Nitislra writes :- .. or Brahma-vidya. I BrhadaraQ. Adhyatma-v£dya. In the ages of the Upani~ads there arose another idea. .OIIfi1"I" ~ .akopaniJad I Bhagavadgiti 10-32.la 10-3-1 (Weber's edition). and 600 B. and as such was often designated as Brahman the pervading essence. This second idea of the soul. the Divine Science.NVIK~IKI. Brhadarat.m I .)..).~.INDIAN LOGIO."'km . 5..f.a. which referred not only to the human soul but to the soul of other objects as well.-SOO B. that is.C. 1 .pter. Thus In the Satapatha BrahmaI].~". . The Upanil?ads (composed between 900 B. X.~ etc.

Manu.. theory of reasons. ANVIKSIKI BIFURCATES INTO PHILOSOPHY AND LOGIC • (ABOUT 650 B.PIIilf1rlil 4< 1If1". viz atma.. the soul and the theory of reasons. Vatsyayana S observes that Anvik~iki without the theory of reasons would have like the Upani~ad been a mere fJtma-vidya or adhyatmavidya.l~ I WWt': 1'II'tfi '5f~ ~~f~: 'q'tU.. Kautilya'l (about 327 B.. 6). In The theory ?£ soul and so far as it was mainly cohcerned with the tha..~ The formation of Anvlk~iki must have commenced in the period of the Upani/?ad in which some of its tecnnical terms were forestt}l1ed. 1-2..fij~Jftlll!tf*ffl. Anvik~iki while comprising the entire function of Atmavidya was in fact differ~nt from it.".-rf( ~iifWi(: ~..C.~ii'Tfir I (ArthaAastra of Kau~ilya.atween .. 3 'C. Anvjk~ikI was developed Into PhIlosophy called Daroana 6. The Sarhkhya.. soul. 2 ~~ w ~ ~~~f« f1f1Ql: I (Arthdistra of Kau~ilya. soul. and in so far as it dealt largely with the 1 ~ift ifT'fll ~i(tfff. Sham Sistri's edition). . G). the latter contained reasons supporting those assertions.. Anvik~iki dealt in fact with two subjeets.ANVIK~IKt BIJj'URCATES INTO PHILOSOPHY AND LOGIC. . but it did not take any definite shapes until about 650 B. 6. that while the former embodied certain dogmatio assertions about the nature of the soul.rr: I (Nya:ya. and hetu.n ~: ~ 'l.(the Vedas). Vlirfta (Commerce) and Daf]. when it was recognized as a distinct branch of learning. as previously pointed out. viz.C. .I~ (Arthaaastra. in Pili ~J in Prlikrta. _ ..).. Tn Sanskrit ~. . p. 1-1-1). viz. ' describe it-evidently oonsidering it synonymous with the U pani!?ad-as a branch of the Vedas.C.~ ~.. ~1 and in Tibetan 6 W't\ I .._were included by Kautilya in the Anvikl.t of reasonmg.. p. treated of two subjects. and Lokayata. A~Vik!?iki and niti (Polity) enumerated in the _school of atnlarvldya.) recognized Anvikf?iki as a distinct branch of study over and above the three. 1-2.. 1-2..lm( .ri1T: ~f1'llPr.flf l1T1rlfr: I ~frit1fi . and consequently from the Up~ni~ad too.bha~ya.. and his followers) the Manavas. Yoga. Anvikf?iki. p.q.~q'I" \'!Jqf\SfJ-l! 11Nf "'uv(f~'I{ iPrt '''N!'''''1I'ft1lfl~ .liki.nit . The distinction between Atma-vidya and Anvikfliki lay in this. of Kau~ilya.. 5 vidya. in so far as they treated of reasons affirming or denying the existence of sou]. It is the theory of reasons "'which distinguished it from the same. Tra1ji The dlstinction be. 6.

. ~ ~~ IJJTiI1{ I 1IIfI*ff:~(11(.ifTifT i(i:Jii" tlri' II Ii (Bhigavatapuralfa..Anvik~iki treating of the soul was called Dar. ANVIK~IKI) CHAP. This bifurcation of .(1 Bhagavata Pural}a. ii. book i. Yoga and Lokayata which were incorporated in Anviki?iki were designated as Darsana or branches of philosophy.Anvik~iki or Anviksiki par excellence. t f.hi Gautama expounded the logical side of the Anvik~iki The An'\iik:. ANCIENT SCHOOL. 8-14-10). '(.C. all doubts are dispelled and all &'ct~forces are exhausted. verse 8).. 4- ~t~ 'if~"i( ~i: -croJri: tI (MU99-akopani~.~. (philo'.6 INDIAN LOGIC.'1 etc.qakopani~ad 8 we find that" when the soul is seen. The Brhadaral)yakopanif}ad I says that" the soul is verily to be seen.d.. 110-45).." The Sarhkhya. 1 :2 ~'!! q~' ~'iiT 1." It was about the first c€ 'ntury B.' into Philosophy and Logic commenced with the very formation of the science but specially about 550 B C. The word Darsana in this special sense occurs in the Mahabharata.-r ~'Sf1l. . 7. ANV!K~lKI IN ITS PHILOSOPHICAL ASPECT CALLED theory of reasons it was developed into Logic called pre-eminently the . "Darsana" literAll explanatIOn of the ally signIfies seeing' it is in faot the science term darsana.i"l~iJTm~i'if1{ (yajfiavalkya-samhitii.f'11t i(-al1f 'i'fil !(ffrflf~i (Nya:ya-bhii~ya.lophy).~:1.tT: ""ll.. "l1'CT .13 Vedanta. ~ifTift _~f~H l1l"'l~r 'ift1i~q~.. that the Anvik~iki dealing with the soul was replaced by the word "Darsana.bha~ya."I(~: (Brhadsl'aX)yakopaniiila.iki continued however for many centuries to be used in the general sense of a science which cmbraced both the subjects of PhilOFlophyand Logic. Santiparva. the knot of the beart is untied. when l\fedhatit...." and the Yajfiavalkya-sarhhita i declares that" the highest virtue consists in seeing the soul through me(iitation" In the Muq.li( ·f.. ii. '" II (Mahabharata. 3-2-35). ' • which enables us to see our soul.. 8 ~t ili{~: fllri ~a\~1tJ.r~T1Irf\... As already observed.w ~.ITfir ''''''T Vtr . 2-8).iana.!.5 Nyaya·bha~ya. ~\iI ~~ WlfT1:mf 1{1rr 1i~ ~Ter1!f I 'ifwT'iff 1ff~ O\ll ~n if \'J~ 'i'f~T: Ii .:\nvik~iki Darsana. 4-5).

7). a l\Ianl1salnlllta.!{ I . E.C.nil-r cn"hni{ I 1f'f.I <]tantshig§-rig-pa. ~~ ~ lI~ijll. pat't I.8 Ramaya:q. Manusalnhita: 7-43.ch as 'l'arka-vldya or VRda. I 6 lrl'llTlffRT 'ifVJIllI . adhyitya.the Manusa!hhita.T"Ilf: 'Jal1f1RT.t 1t.lled in Tibetan ~1:Il·ilI':t.)q"r~Tf«.. verse 22.• ~ L . sarga 100.~ lj. Indica seri~. Calcutta).hiibharata iidtparva. verse 47. 7 8.~ Mahabharata. D.tis Chandra Vidya. speech and action.'!:..A. lSO.f\tttr1{ I "~Tft1it .JTiI~ ~. inasmu. is oa.2 Gautama-dharma-sfitra.ha. verse 155. in virtue of the theory of reasons predominatHetu-sastra. folios 223-377). edited in Sanskrit. 1 The Hetu-sastra or Hett\-vidyA: is ca.lqm. kept thAir intellect unperturbed in prosperity and adversity.nd EngJi:sh by Dr. adhyitya 210. edIted in Sansltrit with TIbetan verSlon by Sa. Ross and Slltis Chl).. 5 l\fahiibharata.' Mahabharata. Kautilya 6. J.~(~Zl'j~'~Zl'j'!:. ONWARDS).& etc. Ayodhyakanq.. adhyitya 11. as i§l evident from . As already observed.1U~it 1i'lfT I (Artha sistra of Kantilya.Calcutta.. (vide the Ma. adhyliva 1 verse 67. was ~eveloped into Logic designated specially as the Anvik~iki-or Anviksiki par excellence.C. or Vadavidya. RamiyaI). Ativamedhaparva.1 rtsoO-pa.n~l:!f5Yul. The Anvik~iki.a'(I.Lled in Tibetan ~r..a. Tl~etan a. ·S5. used in this special sense of Logic in the Manusarhhita. Santlparva.1-39.1l etc It was also called Tarka-vidya. and 412.hly useful science which furnished people with reasons for the estimation of their strength and weakness. \fdo. to the art of debate. Vidyabhusana. SantiparV'a.bbusana.it dealt with rules for carrying on disputavldya. (Vide the Alllarako~~ Sval'gA. 'Ve find the term Anvik~iki 1 The Anviksild. Cf. 10 Tarl~a·vidyh. ( . p. Also ~ata.VARIOUS NAMES FOR ANVIK~TKI IN ITS LOGIOAL ASPECT. p 20. ~erse 27. in the Blbliotheca. Tho Anviksiki is called in rflbetan fl:\. was called H etu-sastra or H etu-vidya. .S 1~91-92. VARIOUS NAMES FOR ANVIKSIKI TN ITS LOGICAL ASFECT • (FROM 650 B.a. versa 36. oj.varga. Anvik~iki dealing with the theory_of reasom. tions in learned assemblies called pariE!(ld. Go. and infused into their intelligence. ing it.lldl·a. 3 Gautama-dharma·sutra. ~'lfTql~' II fifillT '1tR~ 'if -mft'- ~'q: ~~A1IQl1fffl'tTll: ~ai4'l. adhyiiya.7 the science of reasoning.j ~~ "~~~'i:lfflt1l{r "iJl.'. 9 Ma.vyutpatlii.a.tog-ge-rig (vide Amarakosa ~ 7' . 2-11. In about 327 B. in the Blbliotheca Indica sarles. 1.R. the art of discussion. characterised the Anvik!?iki (evide-ntly Logic) as a hi!?. pp. 1-2. subtlety and power.

adhyaya 4 Gautama-dharma sutra. verse 18.-----------------------------------------I 12 Manusatbhita./i Yajfiavalkya sarhhita. I.Vlahiivyutpatti. adbyaya 180. as we shall see later. . G Ritmayana 100 13-23. 6-50. D.• 17.a.avalkya-samhlta. 4 yajfi. etc . p. Santiparva. verse 47. 12-106. Anvik/?iki was.\a. 8-269. --------------------. folios 223-377).ta. Tarka.lt SkandapuraI. part II. edited in Sanskrit-Tibetan-Engltsh by Dr. and aribyaya 246. adbyfiya II. Calcutta. also 7 called N yaya-saatra. 3-292 . Go.vidya is referred to in the Manusamhita. (vide the :!. g Skandapuraz:la.. Ill.6 etc. 133. I Mahabharata. the science of true reasoning. Kalikakhar. Mahabhiira.3 Gautama-dharma-sutra/ RamayaQa. Ross and Satis Obandt'a Vidyabhusana in the Bibliotheca IndICa series. '1 The Nyaya is called in Tibetan ~zq~'Q Rig~-pa. CHAP. ANCIENT SCHOOL. The Nyaya-eastra. ANVIK~lKI.8 INDIAN LOGIO. 7-53-15. Mdo..-vidya or Vada. also-~atan­ hgyur. E.t(l.

/ etc.rga lO~.. In the B:rhadaraI}. water. W. The Lokiya.ed the atheistic doctrine of olden times.. ~t~ ~t . s 10. etc. CXRVAKA-HIS MATERIALISTIC DOCTRINE (CIROA 650 B. II. is widely known as Lokayata or that which prevails in the world. 8-70-7.danta. fire and air.). etc.q.f 'OW: '" II . For a history of the Lokayata compare Prof. a pupil of Brhaspatio Carvaka was perhaps not the name of any particular individual but represent. chap. Caraka-sathhita.Tt1& I \J (Ramayana. viz.O. 10-38-3.-HIS DOCTRINE OF MATTER AND SOUL (ABOUT' 650-575 B.C. just as an intoxicating power is generated by the comixture of rice.: "Wifrlf!tif "1('( (Brhadiiral}yaka. verse 17). vol.ta doctrIne yana 8 the same doctrine is elucidated by of soul. T. earth.tgveda. 8-71-8.i. The Vedic literature 1 refers to a class of men who did not believe in gods. They were subsequently designated as the followers of CarvAka. I 4< 6 'Sl'i"'~ tn{ lIl(tm -qt{'e. XI. after which our consciousness disappears. This doctrine. AyodhYiikllQ4a.logues of the Buddha. Rhys Davids' Introduction to the Kiipa.j 17@iI. 4:-5-13).).. In the Rama· . which is referred to also in the Caraka-saIhhita. The ear1i~st orthodox writer on Anv'ik~iki (Philosophy) as mentioned in the Svetasvatara IJ Upani~ad was Kapila who is tradition· 1 2 Vias I. and which attracted a very large number of adherents. KApILA. molasses. that there is no future life and that we should Dot believe in anything which cannot be proved through perception.~ lf~ ~if1r". The Teachers of 9 . ~~$1liInln S1I~~: l!ilf. Siitra-sthina.yakopani~adi (before 600 B.q 1if¢ 1ff1i iI. if i~ *'tT~ I s ~ 'iftRir q~ftm." 6 wftf 111i[1i "fli.) there is a reference to such doctrine according to which our soul (consciousness) is produced through the combination of four elements.nvik~iki (Philosophy and Logic). sa. Sutta in" Dia..C. The dissolution into those elements is our death..CHAPTER U. and would not perform sacrifices. • Javala when he says that our parents are our progenitors.

C w h' lC1 1 is the latest date of composition of the Brahma(las. . II. Kapila. 4-5).eya.a & that the A.a) C(Tit~1t':Jf ~ ~(ff I "~_T'l ~r~T ~1'ft\: ~'5 ~i1f f'fqtt:T'ii Il {Ml!f.C. but who according to the PadmapuraJ!.).treya. 215.C.rn'~l~: II "'lnftsiffilV¥. as a tf'acher warrants us to eH soul. purl!f.O.W6'J{t ------------------ s CfWt: ~'S!T: ~"'. eternal. It appf'lars from the MJ. pura1).la. 4111i~Titcwl ~~'ij1J.ha The fact that Asuri is mentioned in the Satapatha . both of which WE're..) we shall not be far wrong if we place the former at an age from G50 B.nvik~iki-vidya expounded by him consisted of 1 1 i:)ag~ named Dattatreya. 1NVIK~IKr CHAP. Prahlada anf{ others. DATTATREY A-HIS PARABLE OF A TREE (ABOUT 650 B. 16-12}. any known to have been born at Pu~kal'a near Ajmere. As the original work of Kapila has not come dO\Yll to us we can say nothing abrmt his doctrine beyond the fact that he treated of the soul under the name of P1t1'U~a and the primordial matter under the name of Prakrti. Seeing that Kapila peeceded Buddha (circa 570-490 B C. \'!if~17iTi1t ~~l. according to him.'Tiit ~.q. suppose •t h at I1e l' lve d b ef ore 600 B .\!H ~). ~1{ 'fIl"if ~'. !)ur'Upa. 11. The proper name of the sage was Datta while his family name was A.rkauQ.u preceded DatttLtreya. _\.s connection with matter.t. is stated in the Bhagavata puraI}." who as the Rixth incarnation of was junior to Kapila.The ::lamkhya tlo('trme Brahmana 11.tlTl 'I'f{>:ri' -irllWl1 t5'1~Sifi8' " \II ~ ~\Jil1lln"q~iii Iff I (Sveta~va.a to Samkhya kfil"ika. verse 70 Macdonell's History of Sanskrit Llterature.r~ ~~l~ 0 (Bhiigavata.a dwelt in Indr().lJ The soul which experiences pleasure and pain owing to it.OGIC.rkaQ. attains release when it realizes itself to be totally unconnected with the same. to 570 B. A Vi~Q. Kapila as the flfth iflcarnation of V1~Q.lT I "H1IfIit~illijttt~'1 "Si~rOi(Tf. p. 1-3-12).eya puraI}.pra~tha (Delhi) The doctrine propounded by him waR orally transmitted to form at later times a system of philosophy caUf'd the Siimkhya. He lived on the Glrnar hills in I(athiawar where a temple associated with his name still f'lxists.u have taught Anvik~iki to Alarka.&. imparted his doctrine to j\suri I ' : ho taught it to Pafi('a~ik.tara.NCIENT SCHOOL.10 INDIAN I.

C.:fif Ii ." The rule which Pal]. 11 a mere disquisition on soul in accordance with the yoga philosophy.nvik~jki system. as it exists at present.:l' j.).C.~Iq'~~~i{~lli QtTtfW~ni( l.PUNARVASU XTRl<~YA: HIS DISSERTATION ON THE SENSES. of a tree. The Carakasamhita. in Tibetan ~iI\' il~.J there is a dissertatIOn on the senses (indriya) l which seems to belong to the A. !treya was a countryman of Pal}. He preached the doctrines of transmigra. Pa.i). the original author of which was Punarvasu Atreya. p. VIII In which there occurs the name A~~haka . PUNARVASU ATREYA: HIS DISSERTATION ON THE SENSES (CIROA 550 B. Atreya's Ayurveda~ was dIvided into eight books called "sthtmas" or "places. but the most elementary doctrines of each book of the sarhhita are by common consent asmibed to him.ini lays down as to the use of the word Punarvasuin the singular number shows that Atreya whose proper name was Punarvasu was a Vedic sage. Khandhakas I. The yoga dl)ctrme of tion and emancipation under the parable soul. The eighth chapter of sutra-sthana Atreya is called. Dulva III. 22.ll Mahavagga. contains any genuine teachings of Atreya. From this summary \ve may conclude that Dattatreya expounded the philosophical side of AnvikBik'i and not its logical aspect. 1 .ini as both of them fl~urished in the Punjabone at Taxila (Tak~asila) and the other at Salatura Like the A~~a­ dhyayi of PaI). Blbliotheca IndIca). according to him.ve been delivered by a sage named Punarvasu better known as Atreya who resided at the side of the HImalayas. p. The sage was perhaps the same Atreya 3 who is mentioned in the Tibetan books as a Professor of medicine under whom Jivaka the Professor Atreya or phyt'lician of Buddha studied for several Taxila.. originally called. Cf.3 ~kah-hgyur. To identify a gross object with "T" or to look upon it as H mine" is. adhyaya I. Things when looked upon in their true nature do not cause affliction but thev become sources of great woes when we consider them as our own. 64. years at Taxila about 550 B. v 12. Vide RockhIll's Life of Buddha.T'lr li~~~: I (Caraka-sarohita. the Ayurveda) is said to ho. the germ of selfishness which grows up into a large tree bearing the fruits of pleasure and pain He in whom the tree of selfishness has not grown is freed from aU bondage for ever. In the Caraka-samhita. S ggyunosea-kyi-bu (vide Mahavyu tpatti. Sutra-sthina.ini. 2 ~wffll:f. It is not known whether the Caraka~samhita.

d'ff f h ' d 1 erent rom t ese senses. . ear.C. ANCIENT SCHOOL.dhyaya. contributed not a little to the development of the doctrine of soul which formed a part of the Anvikf?iki. should lead to a decision and indicate a purpose. . f -------------_. ANVIK~IKt.).-------------------------------------I Mahflbbiirata. II. tongue and skin.r and wide. discriminative and orderly.. Sulabha who wa. perceive more than one thing at a time. and wb:o must have come to his court as aspy. After the rites of hospitality had been duly observed she was led to the royal presence. It. . ether. vt'l'SeS 78-94. 320. sound.12 INDIAN LOGIC. Hence we cannot . smell. J anaka was not a little sur. improper and illapplied terms. represents the philosophical culture of the 6th century B. The five objects of sense are colonr. e. SULABHA--A LADY ASCETIC: HER CANONS OF SPEEOH (ABOUT 550-500 B. The mind.arth. water and air. seeing that her strength lay solely in her radiant youth tlnd beauty. It is related that once she transforming h~l'self by occult processes into a lady of blooming youth came to the court of Janaka the pious king of Mithila. CRAP. nose. Janaka pointed out the impudence of such a wish entertained by a lady whose ambition must be something gross and material. of the work contains a dissertation on the senses a summary of which is given below:There are five organs of sense. a. wherein lay the secret of final release of the soul. Though rebuked in such unpleasant. viz. the gustaHIS doctrme of the tory and the tactual. He concluded by asking in a taunting tone what business a lady could have had with the doctrine of Release. The five kinds of sensuous knowledge are the " visual.. whose fame as a philosopher was established ffl. Santiparva. In the 'course of her reply to the king she made the following observations. the olfactory. ' sonal interview with him. taste and touch. In the Mahabharata 1 there is mention of an old female ascetic named Sulabha who delivered a discourse on what constituted the merits and defects of speech as belonging to the province of Anvik~iki. which is OlenSGS.C. Dissertations on the senses. 13. the eye. on the canons of a sound speech :A speech properly so called should be subtle. The five elements of which these are made are fire. Sulabha was not in the least annoyed but maintained a tranquil and dignified attitude. IS one an as such cannot attend to them simultaneouslv. prised to hear that her sole object in coming ~ulabM s mtervlew wIth to his court was to asoertain from a perkmg J anaka.s in aU probability a fictitious person. like the one given above. the auditory.

Being prevented at the gate A"tavakra addre. abjectness. \Vith the object of defeating a famous sophist named Vandin.~8ed the king and said: "A road while there is no Brahmana on it belongs to the blind.NT UEHA'l'BR. who represents the culture of the 6th century B.Kahoq. produces no Impression in the latter.) is stated to have been a great logieian He wa:. shonld not be prompted by lust.'s debate wlth is opened only to the old I have a right to Vandm. '"' . is uttered without anv regard for the hearer. HOW HE DEl<'EATED (AEOU'!' £)50-1>00 B. under orders of Vandin lads were not. The warder in offering an apology said. but when a Brahmal). A speech.C.. gpeech again. ic. (16) not supcrfluow~. . while expressing his own mel1ning.C.u. the son of . tenderness or conceit .A speech is said to he lucid if ther"" is . known as the son of Suta or VaruQ. A speech which. A SOPHIST A good speech is (1) fraught with sense.ft. otherwiH(. 14. father of Svetaketu. Chaps. (14) not unsystematic! (15) not far-fetched. and. (11) refined (12) not too laconic. wrath.' shanH' fulness. the deaf. women. though clear to the speaker 11imself. (6) determinative i(7) not bombastic. (8) agreeable. (9) truthful.ween it 011 one hand and the speaker ana hearer on the other. Ai?titvakra while a mere hoy came to attend a sacrificial ceremony at the paiace of king J anaka ill Mithila. .-I ound speeflh. That. ' enter. (13) not abstruse. (5) smooth. (17) not inopportune.). A person 18 not old because his head is gray but the gOdH 1 Mahibharata. crookedness.a who wa~ a disciple and son-in law of Uddalaka. (10) not hal'mf~l. greediness. permitted to enter the sacrificial ground A?tavakra said: "Ii this be the condition 0 warder) that the door A~~avakra. there it belongs to him alone. (3) fair. is disingenuous and faulty.-"greement bet. I am old: I have observed s:1cred vows and am in possession of energy proceeding from the VediC' lore. 132-134.. that Ai?tavakra was stopped because he was still a lad. are also understood by his hearer. which does not convey the meaning of the speaker himself but is uttered solely out of regard for the hearer. In the Mahabharata 1 the sage A~tavakra (" crooked m eight parts "). He alone is a speaker who employs words which. . A~1'AVAKRA-A VIOLIJ. if it is to be freed from the faults of J'udamcnt. (2) unequivocal. Vanaparva. carriers of burden and the king re&pectively.cterlstlC~ of . (4) not pleonastic. fear Chara.A~TAVAKRA-A VIOLENT HERA'i'ER and (18) not devoid of an object." Hearing these words the king gave him permission to enter.

(4) Vandin asks: What things are slgmfied by four 1 A~tavakra replies: Four are the sta.h III . who move together.kra threatened him and exclaimed: H Do thou answer my quest-ions and I shall answer thine! " l (1) A~~avakra asks: What thmgs are slgmfied b~r one 1 Vandin replies: There is only one fire that blaze. named Yama. at three t. the sages are seven in number. six stars constitute the constellation krttika. and five are the rivers of the Punjab. and the wile and husband are likewise two that live together. (2) Vandill asks: What things are signified by two 1 A~~avakra replies: There are two friend.maras. and three also are the divine lights.s a grfttuity on the occasion of establishing the sacred fire. is possessed of knowledge. world. various shapes. and six: is the number of the sadya8ka sacrifices. and foul' is the number of the legs of a cow. the metre pankti possesses five feet. the sacrifices are five and there are five senses. the seasons are six.ges of a Brahma:ga's life. and the lord of the deceased forefathers is also one. there IS only one lord of the gods named I ndra . twms are the Asv'iniku. though young in years. . (3) A~~avakra asks: What things are signified by three 1 Vandin replies: There are three classes of beings born m COllsequence of their acts.s named Indrn and Agni. the wild animals are likewise set"'en." "Who is Vandin 1 Where is he now? Tell him to come here so that I may destroy him ev.etres are used in completing a sacr'i/ice. CHAP II regard him as old who. three are the Vedas which perform the Vajapeya sacrifice.s the sun destroys the stars. (7) ~~avakra asks: What things are signified by seven 1 Vandin replies: Seven is the number of domesticated animals. "Vhile he arrived there A~tava.14 INDIAN LOGIC. two is the number of wheels of a ca. seven m. fort. (6) Vandin asks: What things are signified by six 1 A~~avakra replies: Six cows are paid a:. the locks of celestial nymphs are five. . six are the senses. (6) A~~avakra asks: What things are signified by five 1 Vandin replies: There are :five (ires.:. .imes the adhvaryu priests commence sacrifioial rites) three is the number of the world.' Vandin was summoned to be present in the assembly of debate on the sacrificial ground. ANVrK~IKr. ANc[ENT SCHOOL.en a.r. sacrifices are performed by four orders. there is only one The doctnne of thmgs sun that illumines the whole fixed III number. the two celestial sages are Narada and Part1ata. there are four cardinal points as well as colours.

topp('(l A~~avakra completerl the reply thu"l . ot a .r.llth:. a foot ot the metre Jagali Con::llstR of twelve leiters. lutf' Vandin asks What things are signified b? ('ight . mght I'a~l(.s eX1Sl. Thirteen sacrlfice~ arc preSIded over h.lenses.re elcv"en Rudra'S among Lhe gods in hea von Vandin asks' Whn. there arE' twelve m-inor . eIght is the numher of lege.r.t things are .v twelve 2 A~~avakra replIes' Twelve months complete a year. eleven are the elba-nun.Tanaka rC'maining Rpeech~ less.as in controverRY u:-:ed t. and twelye IS the number of the Adityas. A~tav~l.A~'fAVAKRA-A VIOLENT DEBATER.lake ill a S!1eflficlal 1'1 to Asta vakra a':!ks 'Vhat thmgs are ::aglllncd by nine 'I Vandm replIes' NJIlC Ie.ngnified b. and thirteen let tors compose the aticclwllrla3 metre A~tavakra Seeing Al?ta.t things arc signified by thirteen? Van din repllC~' The thirteenth l?.re the nwdt/icaAions of '. tho DumhC'r of ?n(lI1tras used III kindling fire for the manes. 15 (8) (H) (10) (11) (12) seven forms of paying homage are extant in the world.: and thirtfren ?·81and.sac1·ifice." . Brahmar.vakra speaking and Vandm silent. and eight are the nn'ller. Vandlll asks \Vhat things [Ire sIgnified by ten 1 A~tavak·ra rephes rren is the number of ca1'dinal points. of the slug that prt'ys upon a lion.SkH: \Vhat thmg-. ~ue ~lgnified by eleven 1 Vandm rE'phes' Eleven a.i ~n<::!)icio~<. 'The Astavakra.~~. the number of yupa8 (stn. of the natural strtte: and tlH'J'e ft. as elephantR by the . '" This Vandin defeating the BrahmaQ.£nar day is considered mo::.. n. and lllne IS ('vel' the number ot fiUUtfS In calculation..hers of true kno\\ ledge. on earth Having proc~edcd so far VandiJl :-.\' J( e. Let him to-day meet with the clamo fate: seize him and drown him iuto water. ten IS the numhcr 01 month'S during whICh women bear and ten are the tert('. Astavakra replies Eight are the hemp-thre((d'J whwh carry a hUllllrpd weights. A~tavakra reproached him thus: "0 King. (13) asks: '\Vhn.vakra to pay him their homage. nme are Lhe appomted functIOns 10 the process of fircrtlwl1. nine letters compose a foot of t lit' l11('tre 1 ?'lutti. and seven are the strmgg of a.kra fHUd. As~avakr[\.l) IS eleven. ten times hundred make up a tholl'Jand. the assembly broke into a loud uproar indicative of vicS~outs of victory for tory for one and ddeat for the other.ke'. has flattery robbed thee of thy sense so that pierced by my word~.tas present there bemg p 1 ea~e proached A~Nl.~godH are among the celest.o cast them into water. d ap· .

yea even in the house of thy enemies.. begets them. chaps.. As you have defeated Vandin in debate. days). .e." Thereupon the king said: "What is it that does not close its eyes even while sleeping.ra in the 16th century A. an acqllamtance of the debaters with all branches of learrung known at their time. 4 4 • 1 The dialogue. &"11 _ . 12 peripheries (i. it i3 a stone that has no heart." Janaka asked: "Who amongst the gods beget those two which go together like two mares yoked to a car and swoop like hawks ~ " A~~avakra said: "May God.. 0 King. ANCIENT SCHOOL. new moons and fun moons). forfend the presence of these two (i. which shows besides thelr ready wit. He (Le. 132-13.e the signs elicits applause. It bea:rs to a certain extent an analogy to the novice's quest. young Buddhi. 12 parts (i e. " • • en ~~ • •. new moons and full moons).'onstituted the dictionary of numbers called Ankabhidhama. what is it that has no heart.e.. and what does increase even in its own speed" ~ A§ltavakra said: "It is a fish that does not close its eye-lids while sleeping. degrees or days) protect thee. I place him at your disposaL"} 15.~ha.ions (Kumara-pa?iha) WhlCh appear from the Pali oanonlCal works to have been a necessary part of the training of a. nay <... »' J"~'" '.. who lived at Kiirpara to the west of the Goditvari in Maharas!. the sun) that has 24 joints (i e.e.. . ANVIK~IKJ.e seasons). . hooks. six naves A~~avakra's ingenuity (i.. is neither" enigmatical" nor" puerile.. whose charioteer is the wind. • v-e.. a commentator on the Mahabhitrata.16 INDIAN LOGIC. and 24 joints (i e.-sUtra (4-1-41) under the title of Samkhyaikanta-vada.. and it is a river that increases in its own speed. At Mithila King Janaka to test the ingenuity of A~tavakra2 once made at statement as follows : "He alone is a learned man who knows the thing which is possessed of 360 spokes (i. . 2 Mahabbarata.D. A~l'AYAKRA \ SOLVES PUZZLES. the cloud). The dialogue is quite simple and natural. CHAP. the doctrine of the fixity of things signified by numbers. II..." when we conslder that In olden tImes the names of things stood fot' numbers.st monk_ '1'11e doctrine involved in the dialogue was critwised by Aksapada in the Nyiiya. I of the zodiac or months) and 360 spokes (i. months) of 30 subdivisions (days) each." A~tavakra who fally understood the significance of the statement replied as follows : "May that ever-moving wheel (i. thou heedest them not!" Janaka replied: "Your words are excellent and superhuman.. and I do not find in it an exposition of the doctrine of unity of the Supreme Being as supposed by NilakaI}.e thunder and lightning) in thy house. what is it that does not move even when born.1. it is an egg that does not move when produced. Vanaparva.

(ft!l'i. etc. and then applauded him thus: "0 possessor of divine energy thou art no human being. I'> The author of thiS book viSlt." 16. 2 Uttarakhan~a.C.). a'3 the place of his birth.flWif ifot1Qifi.Q~"i( li"1l' if'" f~ I (Skandapurilna. too. Naii?adha carita. the credit of founding the Anvlk~iki in its special senRe of a science is to be attributed to a sage named Gotama or Gautama.kl.) ~ ~: f3T~nq!~ m~ ffi~T~Jfif: .1! curaed by her fll~if 'ij" ~'T'Ri ltTlf.. Gotaml1 or Ga. The people of Mithila. w-rm~T liTf'iTi-fIlf"lr: ~f~nn: ll!iJ~"~~ II (fiandhul"\''l h'}tra rplott:'d.ed Gautama-sthana in October fi-ff?J~q-q~ ifll "'-li~il ~"RT ~'f. a Gautama.. ~'5if" 1l'f f~ . for her flirtation with Indra.S Kusumafijah. was. m PI'anatos:l!i tantra. chap 263) mifil: '@1If "~~ .rcU I u. the water whereof is like milk to the taste and feeds a perennial rivulet called on thi" account "K~irodadhi" or "' Khiroi " signifying literally the sea of milk. Kahkakhanda.' Nyaya-sut!'av:rtti.. 17 The king amazed at A~tavakra's mgenuity remained silent for a while. I Ska.ndapuraq." Gandharva tantra. ! ~~ Tq~ <'1* :::.'f ~. ascribe the foundation of the science of AnviktJiki or IJogic to Gotama or Gautama The blrth-place of and point out. n (Nai .1cfi il~"i! I ~~if WltJT ~Tci ~t~ Cfi~~if ~ I a (Padmapursn(\. chap X'·ll). . 1\ ~l7ftnirmm~nuf"i[~r.MEDHATITHI GAUTA::'HA.auha canta. canto xvn).a.CIRCA 550 B. MEDHATITHI GAUTAMA-THE FOUNDER OF ANvrK~IKI par excellence . II .'RI ~'STVW 1jfifSl'tn{" \.s the founder of the science of Anviki?iki (Logic) or Anvikt:3iki par excellence. While the teachers mentioned before dealt with some particular topics of Anvik~i. There is a mud-hin of considerable height (supposed to be the hermitage of Gautama) at the base of which lies the celebrated Gautama-kunga (" Gautama's well "). It is situated on the outskirts of Mithila at a distance of 28 miles north-east of modern Darbhanga. Gautama lived with his wife Ahalva who. according to the Ra. village named Gautama-sthana 6 where a fair is held every year on the 9th day of the lunar month of Caitra (March-April).utama is mentioned a. 6 S~ firircY 1.'f 111!Jt • .mayaq.n3.a. I n the Pad rnapuralta .f !JtifTft.

one being his proper name and the other his family name Therefore the lull name of the founder of Anvik!?iki was Medhatithi Gautama ---------------------------t:~:ilrl!rt1~cnw Aifl\'(i( !fm~ I . ' . U The dramas of Bhisa: a literary study" in ~f~n-r)J11ft ~Tml~ f~"fP I ~ h . Ahalya in her accursed state is at present Gauta~a _ as descnbed ropresd:'nted by a slab of stone which lies In the RamRyana... pardoned his wife and dwelt from that time forward in his hermitage without ever separating himself from her. 56-26.t.. mentIOns a son of Ahalya named Cirakarin . Gautama. . ~~ S!ii~IIQq '\If I (Bhisa's Pratima-naFaka. ANCIENT SCHOOL.nifi.~m~. sarga 48)." . but who) being of a reflective turn of mind. who is believed to have flourished during the Kusana period.b there is a temple which commf>morates the emancipation of Ahalya by Ramacandra The Mahabharata 1 which gives a different version of the story . Then she regained hel' human form and was admitted into heaven .OGIO. +i~r-rn~. 11'< ~ If ~ • 3 Vide A. Meerwal'Lh's J.. -. Gautama_as . "I! I I Ssntiparva.J{~i. in consideration of the natural weakness of her sex. between a paIr of trees 1'1'1 a vIllage caned Ahalva-sthana (Ahiritt) two miles to the east of Gautama-sthana a1re~dy mentioned In the vicinity of this sla.A S..ii1 ~w ~~1~~1lIfif: I (~ II ~'i) f.(.~~ ~fq 'IlfSffl: II \ ~ II ~ ~ 1f'q 'l!trfirWii(~~f~: ~: ~ l~it"'lfif ~~ ~"'11l1(: 1 Mababharata. In the Mahabharata.. liT: ~q'~S~iI" I ~i"cnT... mif~tj ~'«f!ll~ ~~ ~1U~ IIft~q: ~'\!lIUWf." we find that l\1:edhatithi and Gautama were the names of the same person. a later appellation for the Anvik~iki. M. 272-9.M....pati Sastri's edition). speaks of a sage named Medhatithi a'S the founder of the Nyaya-sastra.~. In the Pratima-nataka Z the poet Bhasa. M.18 INDIAN I..ri'1r 'q1QT: ~lWT~f8:nq lMahibh1irata.· Medhatithi of Bhasa. Ga9a. 79.B. I' .?lentloned who is said to have been ordered by his' In the Mahabharata. II husband and transformed into a stone She remained in this stony state for some time until she was emancipated by Rama-candra.. reframed from carrying out the order. p.. Adikii~~. '. .."trI~f1:r \liI~ ~l~al ~1~'~11n II . father to kill Ahalya. 1917. :2 II (Ramaya:Q8.. . -... Act V. and A4vamedhaparva. ANVIKfJIKf. CH_\P .

'\. from the dha!athl Gautama.jltU m \I mlff~lfw'~ 14"fr~rt'liff{:i~ ilffllfT mft-i~ I ~~t ~Tf~\1f{?f ~'!!iT<{~ .tion of certain hymns of the J.MEDHATITHI GAUTAMA. called Got~masal. H." In J.. verse'll 14-Hi.ra.a (m Piilj Angirasa. \I.tgveda-samhlt. verse (I. Bangavasi editlOn). Brahmana of the White Yajur~.A. sukta G2.pida.. Oldenberg's edition) Aogiraso Sakyamuni sabbabhiit.l! and the ~atapatha-Brahmaf. Calcutta.. pat. adhyiya 4. Catu~~aya 6 The story of Gautama as related above seems to be historlcal in so far as his family and native place are concerned. verse 13. p. ka.anLlkampi.i'fif iJiif'i II ~"" ~ t:<t \ltfV.Famllv and trIbe of Me. verse 1. edited by Dr. verse 3. Bukta 62. (Parivara III.a kli. The descendants of Gotama 5 wert.utama.praka. 25.. 265. In the Mahabhiirata and Bra. tribe:- ~.havagga Anglrao.r f4 ilita I'itct ~q'tlit II (Ma.. 19 Medhatithi Galltama seem:::. 77.. t q. .T51' "I"fii "itif.liza. 6 -------~-- -----------------------1«'i'tw l!iH[ -=. Bukta 61. ma~4a!a L.ry 1914. Gautama (hu<3band of Ahalya. lIke Buddha Gautama. verses 2-4.i'i. Oldenbel'g). . ~~'Q7u.have RprUn!!. -w. 1. puru~a.la 4 of the WhIte Yajurveda a~ havmg settled in a place the description of Whl('h tallies with that of Gautama-sthana in Mithila.tda I.hamam pii~ihiirlya'U.:.hmat:.rn i{~r'Sfr'ifT m-'ifil~{l.S.me of Buddha Ga. 'if ~~ . occurs 9.l.(l. Ii 1Ji 1J~~lf4i:J'Iii WA'iilf ~qfW I \!ii '!liT fcf:s'fTlIlif ~UWi ~l!. 2-4-15.. The Loca.<3 a na.~tlm: Pittltw ")iiit~ I (Kiitantl'a.. 2 In the Plill Me. 85. descended from that Gotama who is described in the I:tgveda. sukta 64. verse H...~hnfFlffl~T1i ~iifilll ~ Mfr~~: is-g) il'wlf~r OiJTff ~iTlI~l! I ff. aatapa.Rtfii ~~"fIJ. chap..I4{ iNR1ri" '5~ mlfii "Til if~lI II (Brahma!}4f1. and 2-5-6).tha. I 157... Februa. Miidhyanduliya roce0'3ion..tgveda. anu~anga.B.) and his son Cirakarin are descrIbed 8"1 having belonged to the Angirasa.eda. 1-1-10. Siil1tIpanra. siik til. sukta 81.l4a pur§na. Gotama or Gautama. sukta. chapter 23).l)s). V ide also my article on . Dr. verse 5.ye anekavaiwa acclyo hontl(Mahiivagg~t. 1iiii'Tififl{ t 'fl(td ~ . ~t!~ n karaka. who.'f'l{ Uif: I f~l:1{ ~~l1fifQlTfU. ev JdooUy velonged to the Angtms& trlbe:AngirMas<.hlbharata. to have belonged to the family and school of N aciketas Gautama I and to . . 1\ (Kathopaml?ad. ' Anglrasu ~ tribe His remote ancestor was perhaps the sage N odha Gotamu. but the legend of Ahalyi associated with the story is untrustworthy.~~ ~~i& eTllfTfm 1i~ " f'R..

Id\.n traditions entered tht'l scriptnre of the Perslans.D. adhyaya 243.lapati Sastri's edition.sanian period that India. The fragments that survived were put together by Zoroa.20 INDIAN LOGIC. Moulton. Mok~adha.lring the raigns of Ardashir and Shapur of the Sasanian dynasty. We do not therefore know whether he treated of the soul and reasoning together in one volume. In the Santiparva of the· Mahabharata. We t. its prototype the Anvik£?iki. 141. Gotama: Gautama and Medhatithi Gautama were the names for one and the same person.D. Santiparva. Medhatithi Gautama is more often called simply Gautama. M. revealed to the world the Upani~ad-doctrine of emancipation. . 79. As previously noticed.hus find that Medhatithi. Vide the 13th yasht. para. It is suggElsted that It wa. According to Arda-viraf·narna. verses 14-17).(. and Early Religious Poetry of Persia. or dealt with tlrem separately. . CHAP. Cf. p. along with certain other sages. This Medhatithi seems to have been the same as our Medhatithi Gautama.s in the Sa. ~"~T"lW")S~. 6 Vide the 13th yasht. Geldner's" Persia" in the Encyclopaedia Britannica. we read £. 4. ~T~~fwfin I iMnfw r¥. by J. autama as a great master 0 f teart. existed in its original form for 300 years until it was burnt by Iskander Rumi (Alexander the Great) who destroyed Persepolis about 325 B.a) etc. 0 debate seems to have spread as far as PerRia In one of the yashts 3 of the Khorda Avesta edited 4 during the reigns of the Sasanian Kings Ardashir (A. Medhatithl'S work on and by "Nyaya sastra" he really m. who His work on Anvik~iki founded the A. para 16.C. the Avesta written on cow-hides with golden ink. p.vlksiki was best known in the Padmapurana. MatsyapuraI}. The fame of Gau~ama mentioned In G h f the old Persian scrlpture. Gat. and given to the Persians by Zaratusht (Zoroaster). II.nvlk£?ikl par excellence h~s not come down to us in its original form.M.. !l ~~i\qfif~ l4~ '1Un~: ~Hf I 'if(if)f~. K. Dr.£ there is mention of a Medhatithi who.\ (Mahabharata.. while we may gather some idea of his theory of soul through the Sttme sources as well as through the Mahabharata and the PaU Brahmajala-sutta. eant Anvikslki. and his art of debate is still designated as Gautami Vidya (Gotamide science). ~htif:fltl ft ~f""i<r ~~ iff" 'fif!if.strian priests under the name of Avesta. 21]-241) and Shapiir I (A. which was edited and proclaimed canonical d. IS .rma. Act V.JiI 'tl': ~ -.. ANCIENT SCHOOL 1 ANVIKI1:?KI. and in a developed form through the Nyaya-sutra. Bhasa 1 speaks of Medhatithi's "Nyaya-sastra" The term Nyiiya was prevalent in the day of Bhasa. His theory of reasoning has reached us in a crude form through the Caraka-samhita.. Gautama was the name under which the founder of AI). H. 242-272). 16. how the Fravashis cause j Bhasa's Pratimii-n!1~aka. I ••• ~if ~ t!\"ifq1lfU II • .

havmg hac! a. ThIS order age.. Piill Text SOCiety. cQmmunity of Bhlksu':l named after him" . W RhYf! Davld" in hli! Introduction to the Kassapa-siha-nada sutta 10 tho Dialogues of Buddha. is here referred to a. 29. 65. W Rhys Davids a.MEDHATITHI GAUTAMA. edited by Dr Morns. T. 1 "Gaotema.me as Medhiitlthl Gantama. wIth the Buddha Gautama. . chap. descendant of Nodhii Gautama "YO Naidyaonho Ga. 1-32 included 10 the Digha Nlkaya. it will be difficult to resist the conclusion that he was a senior ~ontemporary of Buddha Sakyamuni We may therefore fix the date of Medhatithi Gautama at about 550 B C.nd J. H Moulton." who is Identified by Dr. E Carpenter. pp 220-21. belongmg to the Gotamll-gotta. London. part III.. p.ot~mahe pal'o-yiio parstihtavalt. referred most probably to the followers of Gotama or Gautama the founder of Anvlk~ikL Thu Brahmajala8utta 4 describes a sage desIgnated as takki (argumentationist) and vimamai (casuist!) who maintamcd that certain things were eternal and other things were non-eternal. Haug and J. (Ya'lht 1 '{. II Prof. para lG) 2 Anguttararukiiya.. so that he comes away from debate a victor over Gaotema 1 " In the Anguttara-nikaya lt of the Pal! Sutta-pi~aka we nwet with ten orders of non-BuddhIst recluses of Medhatlthl Gautama's which" Gotamaka" 3 was one. 2t a man to he born who is a master in assemblies and skIlled in sacr~d lore. T. IS more probably the sa. edIted by Dr. the wellknown founder of the art of debate and a. obborveR: "the only altornative is that some Brahmana. The Brahmajiila. pp 270-77. If this sage was identical with the leader of the Gotamaka sect or the founder of tht" Anviksiki. sutta.

.).CHAPTER III. 6-2-1)." Suoh a council was called samsad. Kausalya Asvalayana. In the socia-religious institutes of Manu) m~ Council of learned Parasara.. 111). 1-9). 5-3--1). pari~ad or par€ Jad.cq "fT 'Sf<rlffrtrT I (Para~ra.g. ~ ~~T efT llwr: 'Itf{llfT'(T -qf. e.mn: 'Cf~1f ~fi41Q" qr I ~ 11"': . which formed an important subject of Anvik!. 8-19). sabka. ti ~ Jff '" ~'IIf. "''''''lTm'1'q{: ~ 'l'f<tnJ: .yak.. ten or twenty~one Brahma. Praana 1-6. Saivya Satyakv. A COUNCIL OF DEBATE (Paril!ad) (CIRCA 900-500 B.rl1(~: 2 Qr•• 'iI1ff 'flfiffifhN (C'handogyopani{lad.q. who were learned in the Vedio and secular literatures and could give decisions in matters on whioh bifilli . 16.I Gargya. The Doctrines of Anvik~iki.s. g 4 PrMnopanirr-ad."liki. The theory of reasons (hetu)." "how IS it sustained" and" how does the life-bJ:'eath come into our body. samiti. approach the sage Pippalada and ask him a series of questions such as "how has thiS' world been produced. grew out of debates in councils of learned men.l~ 'lrtVRIJFrllIi: II (ya.T~i~q s .o. . i1I.6 Yajiiavalkya II and others. M"x Muller's History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature.samhitii.C. In the Chandogya I and Brhadaranyaka!l upani~ads there are references to cOllncils for the discussion of metaphysical subjects.1frNif(Qm its~ ~~r"r~m: I ~fq~ ftfI~m iJ1f:1fiT ~~qiiICJ: I II (Manu-samhita. pp.lk~·a.ma SauryayaI). the nature of the soul and the Supreme Being.~ 'IJIlTm: Ql"T'fTirt qf'(Ill~ilTQfffl (·BrhadaraI]. in which Sukesa Bharadvaja. 128-132. The Prasnopani~ad 3 reports the proceeding") of a council.jnaya. we find that the council consisted gellerally of four. Bhargava Vaidarbhi and KabandhI Katyayana. 12-110.samhita.

6 Yu/cti occur. pramatta 12 (prDof). 4-57-10. 8-49. Mahibharata. 12-105). and (4:) anumana (inference)..C. there occur such terms as tarka 4 (reasoning). which had to be used in special senses to carryon debates in the councils. 2-453. 3-133. 5-S7-23). ~~f1. 7 . _ I~ Pram-ana occurs in Manu-samhltfi.TECHNICAL 'fERMS OF DEBATE.ta. prameya 13 (the object of knowledge). The debates or dialogues. 3-292.valkya-sarilhit~. and Ramayal. Ka~hopani~ad.quibble).l1nl. viida Ii (debate).a.ulo. etc. l2-106. Me.habhitrata. 2-1-13. and IGi:mandakiya-nitasAra. and Yiiji'iavalkyasamhlta. viz.1a.cilhlta.. anuJniina and sastra..yaka. 8 Vitat~da occurs In l\fa.Jalpa occurs in l\fahabharata. Bhigavata pursQa. jalpa 7 (wrangling).ta. These terms recur in the Ramayana it with a little alteration as (1) a'iti1~ya (tradition). (3) aitihya (tradition). Some of the technical terms used in the councils of debate Some of the terms used had grown up a. (2) anumana (inference).l-5805.ir advice." f~~ill{ I '" Tarlca occu!'. we meet with four terms. s SHllilj'ijt'!J~Tif" ~ ~fqf7(li . vitarp!a 3 (cavIl). _ 18 Pr(JIfMya oocurs in BaJl\ityal.). in Kaphopani\?ad. constituted the technical terms of tho Anvik~iki. 1-52-13. 6-50. 23 people might ask thp.. 7-100. etc. and Pa). 3-31-15. nir'flaya 10 (ascertainment). and (3) sastra. . Mahabhiirata. 1-13-23 and 7-53-10. _ . such as those described in the Prasnopani~ad. 1-49. Q ~~ffTif~ 'Sl~~fq 'qT~iT~ I ~ f~ 'iRl~ 'q'~ ~~rff~~(iT II (Ramayar. 13-5572. Ramiiyana. 13-4322.long with the Upani~ads.~. prayoiana l! (purpose).. 10 Altareya Bt'ahrnana.a. m. 17. ' _ 5 Vada occurB in Manu-samhita.. were in all probability the precursors of the theory of reasons (hetu-vada) treated in the Anviksiki The words. yukti II (continuous argument). 10 Nirnaya occurs in Mahabharata.hiibharata. 1-157 and 8-14:49. scripture Three of these terms. (1) Smrti (scripture).. 2-37-21 .rt'V1fr 1\ (Manu-samhita. RiimayaQa.. the Chandogyopani~ad and the Brhadaral). 2-9. THE TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THE COUNOILS OF DEBATE (900--500 B. 7535. 2-13.ed in the Manu-sarhhita. and Mahabharata. 6-23. chala 9 .. In the Brshmanas and For instance in the Taiitirlva Aral). purar. Kau~ilya 3-1. Similarly in the Aitareya Brahmal). and Bhagavata. 2-1310 and 7-3022..yaka I Upam~ads. (2) pratyak~a (perception). are u<. 8-21-2. Ramayal]. 13-7533. II PrayoianainManu-samhita. 'tnd yajiia. Manusa. 4-4-10i? II Ohala occurs 10 Manu·samhltii.3 as (1) pratyak~a.

fi(ffij f~ f~ ~1Si'" * if.nil. KautHya gives a list of thirty .j I f.than in those on Polity or Medicine. chapter LXV.ful I W~T~ti'(m ~TJi1 ~iJI. OHAP... G\. ~m~i!:fif~C1it cr!~: ~~1iiifill{ I 1\ I . The Tantra-yukti which literally signifies "scientific argument" was compiled possIbly in the 6th century B. 1-1-4).ilifT~'O'f.repared neither by Kautilya nor by the authors of the two sathhitas.l embotlted Ul the Sm!it'uta... I ''lEr~ttfTifif. The terms inolud~d in the list are found to have been employed Tantra-yukti for the more widely in works on Nyaya Philo'-3ophy systematIzatIon of de.trimiadakara8tantrayuktaya~).). This list appears also in the Caraka..rfoiff'ftfT. il~~i~r?lo:lcrfir: II \l. In the last chapter of the Artha-sastra (a work on polIty). Defibates.ya-bhQ~ya of Vatsyayana.~1 . I ~qsr~~.lifT ~fi" 11ojil'I{ f'3fiW"fq ~ f~~~ 'ifiilt~f'fti?l~ It >..t "" " 'q'l1WCll'~IOifqjT"'iI'1 ~p~'q ". . to systematize debates in Pari~ad8 or learned councils. nitions of some of those terms have been actually quoted by Vat1syayana 5 and other commentators on the Nyaya-sfitra. I Tcrq'llTQ: 't(~ 'Q'~llrifTir1=iii~T~rif~2t~T.4 .r1fritwr ~4'il'r ~~'J~l4T: ~wii '. HI 18.samhita 1 and the Susruta-samhita.C.. ANCIENT SCHOOL..ve been added to the Susruta-sarhhita by the redactor NagarJuna.ra..'antra-yukti !\>. In the Su€ !ruta-sarhhita 4 it is distinctly stated that by means of Tantra-yukti 1 Vide Caraka samhits. The IJttara-tantra is salll to ha.!fiif'!(: I 11".~f.r.~lii'r fCTCfiiiClifl{ \I . In the Caraka-samhita the Tantra-yukti consists of 34 technical terms as enumerated in the following verses:- ~fii~ fqf'~r~nnl~f!6J-. Siddlusthana. two technical terms called Tantrayukti or "the forms of scientific argument" (dvo.. 'i'P~~rf.-Ramhlta consists of 32 technical terms:- 'tT~1t~ ~.'lifRsrfw ~iI... The !1.j'. Uttaratant.24 INDIAN LOGIC. ANVIK!?IKI." 'Ilil\1~"i1':JT~t \i'r~rt'Tfif eiq:~w:l' It l V'ide Susruta-samhitEi.C.1fi: (Nya. !rrij.{ilifrJiW I ~~T Ii3R1. 2 two authoritative works on medicine. but by a person or persons who wanted to establish debates on a scientific basis. Tantra-yukti-THE TERMS OF SCIENTIFIO ARGUMENT (QUOTED BY KAUTILYA ABOUT 327 B.fijl.f fi"'t3ftlf.crrqif ~f. :::.. chapter XII.~rt{)~n~.'TS~: 'ti'1C(~ 'i:J II " 'IS1l~'lJ{Tffft~T~Ttrfrlfif~tTT: ::. The Tantra-yukti along with other matters was added to tho Caraka-samhlta: by the redactor Drdhabala of Paiicanada (t116 Punjab).~'fiilrrt ifi. It was evidently p.

.ia (determination from a st.ini. (anticipation).ing the Tantra-yukti are the following : (I) Adhikara1Ja (a subject). 225. and (32) ilhya (elhp::. (2) vidhana (arrangement).. p. according to PUl)..MEDHATITHI GAUTAMA'S Doc'rRINES. Caraka iR a general name for thE' ancient Mlkhas tbranche::.rde\a (declarat. 350. I As Atreya.-(1) Prayojana (purpose). t\ia'''tR'~~if. (26) elcrl'(/'ta (ct>l'tain).. series).ed application). Agnivesa IS called In TIbetan ~·q~iIi·a. (1 U) vyakhyana (descriptIOn). The word .. (24) pitrva-paksa (queKtlou). (3) yoga (union of words).x iVlullet's Hlf~tory of AnCIent Sanskl'lt LIterature. bhav(t (probabilit.\BOUT 78 A D. 25) utir"tra-pak~a (reply). 25 a 'debater can estabHRh his own point::.Carakal) " signifies. (7) n1. MEDHATITHI GAUT4. (29) 'n'i. (k) upadesa (instruction). (15) prasanqa (a connected argumcnt). (6) udde. (30) vikrtlpa (alternative). (:11.ioIl). and (6) sarnCaraka-salllluta. Blbliotheca. communIcated his Ayurveda'':lamlutfi at first to AgmVt.kya-. (23) 8va-samiiia (a Hp~cial term).tlspection). (Pa!}ini's A~~a:dhyiyi.:lsibly as propounded by Medhatithi Gautama. 369. 1n t. (4) padartha (catc 6 ory). (20) ni1'vacana The tlllrLy-two terms (etymological explanation). I 2l) mdarsana of Tantra yuktl \ (exc1mple).se~a (context).('nt). (4) pratyu. (9) apade~a (specification) (10.-tantra.y). alide1a (extcn<J. includes the following .raka ? trine~ of Anvlk~iki pO.~~ Me-bshin·bjug (vide Mahiivyutpattt. (2) nztnaya (a~cel'tainment).sa (enunciation). In the Caraka-sarhhita. (27) ani1galtJ. the Caraka-samlllta is also called the Aglllvesa.. The technical term~ conRtitut.2 the person!:! who study the Veda (i.) of the Yajmveda as well as for the teacher of thobe ~akhas.e. (22) apavarga (AxceptlOn). aya (doubt). IndIca.he department of Hetusastra (Logic) there is indeed no work older than the Tantra-yukti which is a little manual on the systematlzation of arguments or debates. (3) an(~­ The lIst of Kautdya kanta (uncertain). 2nd edition.MA'S DOCT'H.tvarlha (implication.auCJ.ra (repcti(hffers from that of the tion). 364.ion).) samuccaya (aggregation).INES AS REPnODUCED IN THE CARAKA-SA~IH1'l'A {. (13) arth(tpatt~ (presumption).iR). Ma. (17) v{j. (5) w:ldhrira (Cl tat.cca. (11) prade. (16) viparyutja (reverfSion).~a. 4-3-107).. I 19. ~ .). (28) atikta nlU:vek8amt (n'L). pp. The Caraka-salhhita I gives a :mmmal'y of the prmcipal docWho wal> Co. which consists of thirty-four terms.vek.yoga (injunction). 23. (5) hp.1tement to be made) (12) upamana (analogy). and set aside those of hifl opponents who indulge in unfairness. part I. the Tantra-ynkl'i. (14) sam. (18) anurnata (aR~:.

rct 'fliIT~~t Nf«tt'1~f(f: CilT~(wf~ ~~qfi:l4iJ. Syivain Levi main. and the Chinese Tripitaka 3 describes him as a physician at the court of Kani!?ka." pp 62-6~. quotea. The date of Kanl~ka has not yet beeu finally fixed.vIds in his" Indian seclis or sohools in the time of the Buddha. See a. p. 24. 7-10. . viz.S. VIII. In the Journal ASlatique (1896).qr.R. 8 Jolly. part lii. MahFivastu iii.ANV!K~IKI OHAP.§ect or by a physician named Caraka. is unknown. T. Thel:3e doctrines soem to have been the Caraka-samhitii incorporated into the Caraka-samhita by the redactor Caraka in whose time they were widely known and studied.A. 11. edited by Gangadhar 8astri.26 INDIAN LOGIC J ANCIENT SCHOOL~ . the aggregate of. but he held his Buddhi'St oonvocation at Jitlandbara. Ratnolka dharaX}. or the Ayurveda-sarhhita as redacted by a member of the Caraka I . 447-451. According to the' Nyaya maiijari 2 Caraka was a physician.D. Some say that the exact meaning of "Caraka. the Kusana king of Gandhara. Vide my "HIstory of the Medieval School of Indian Logic.A S.. SuaH fixes the date of Caraka at about 100 A.samhlta lived in the court of Kani~a.lao Prof.reya (about 550 B C ) was the original author of the Caraka-salhhita called Ayurveda-samhita.pura (Peshwar) in Gindhara. The doctrines (with the exception of those relating to Karyabhinirvrtti) seem to have been the productions of Medatithi Gautama who flourished in the 6th century B. for 1901.D.9. The doctrines as we find them in the Caraka~sarhhita are treated under three heads. and (3) Sambhas1i-vidhi. The expressiOII "Caraka-samhita" may.l.. Ka. 28). p.ni~ka·s capital was at PUi?Pa.ll's observations in the J.tams on the authority of Chinese books that Caraka the author of the Cataka. :(1) Karyabhinirvrtti. pp. the sakhas of the Yajurveda) enonnced by the teacher Caraka. (Filosofia Indiana f p. Vizianagram SanskrIt ser18S). p.R. 276. III. 10). the standard of examination.. etc. or vada-vidhi. Ak!1!apada pruned them thoroughly before they were assimilated in the Nyaya-sutra. Mr. 0 Benda..fc1iii1"1f~lf 'CRifi1~tl: ~'QR: if (J it ~." in the J.C. Punarvasu At. according to them.if: It I (Nyaya·maiijari. iii. chapter IV. But while Carara accepted them in their crude forms. by Prof." as applied to the Caraka-sarhhita. mean the '!yurveda-sarhhita of the school of Carakal).hler's Grundriss. 4 Professor L. for 1898. 4t The doctrines of Anvlk!?iki did not evidently constitute a part MedhiitIthi Gantama's of the original Ayurveda of Punarvasu doctrmesre£lectedthrough Atreya. Rhys Da.resources for the accomplishment of an action. Medwin (Bt:. the method of debate 1 Fot' an account of the wandering sect named Caraka see the Anguttara mkaya. Medhatithi Gautama's doctrines were embodied in the Caraka-samhita 6 of Caraka as well as in the Nyaya-sutra of AkE?apada. 412. but I provisionally take it to be 78 A. i . (2) Pariksa. and the physician Caraka was perhaps the redactor of the Sarhhita at the beginning of the Christian era.

ted from Medhii. emana. (4:) Karya-the action for the accomplishment of which the actor moves. which co-operates with the actor to accomplish the. uttara. Perhaps it was a part of t. Some of the t~rm~ coming under the sn. anumana and yukti reappear with of the CaraKa-samhlta a little modification in the names of abda. samanya. (7) DeAu"'.8a-vidhi. vi)e~a and samavaya were borrowed from the Vaise~ika philosophy in its first stage and incorporated into the v:lda-ma'l'ga by Caraka himself Ther~ are other terms such as prat~jnii. viz.MEDHATITHI GAUTAMA'S DOCTRINES.u is redundant as the four term~ coming under this head. (10) Upaya-a favourable circumstance or that condition of the actor instrument and the material cause in which they can wen 'render facilities and aids to the action being accom· is lished. (9) Pravrtti-the activity or exertion put forth for achieving the action. Winch of the doctrines pratyaksa. anumana and aupnmya under the tlthl Gantarna ? sub-head viidamarga of sambltJi. sthipana. (5) Karya·phala-the effect for the attainment of which the action is undertaken. hetH.utama Sambhasa-vidhi or vflda-?Jirlki wag u~doubtedly the principal topic of . that pleasurable or pain~ul condition which resulting from th.iira'Yfa or ketu-the actor. 27 As regards _Karyabhinirvrtti. karma.:!ika ph!losophy in 3n early stage. (2) Karrt'Yfrt-the instrument. A person who determined to accomplish an action successfully should examine the following resources : (l) X. prati~thipana. Parikfi.e action attaches unavOld~ ablv to the actor.the time of the action.he Vaise.D. (8) Kala-. (6) Anubandka-the adjunct.L~n~lk~iki­ vidya. (3) Karya-yoni-the material cause which while undergoing modification is developed into the action. upanaya.b-head viJda-marga dirt not however form a part of the original sambhasa vidhi For instance the terms dravya" gUrj. or agent who accomplishes an action.: aptopade~a.pratyaksrJ.nirvrttl-the aggregate of resources for the accomplishment of an action. KaryabhJ. action. nigamana.dki of Medhatithi Gautama. The terms coming under the three heads are explained in the Caraka-sarilhita as follows :I.the place of the action. . dtslanta and siddhanta which in their technical senses were perhaps unknown to Medhatithi Gautama and were introduced into the vada m"irga by C~1faka while he compiled and redacted the Ayurveda samhita in the first century A. it does not appear to have been a part of the Anv'ikt. I t is uncertain as to whether the first four 01' the last four were included in the Anvlksiki of Medhatithi Ga.a. that is. .

Besides. Caraka '1amhlta. For instance.riifJ'iJ~. viz (1) aptopadesa. and the truth of whose words is never called in question. Vim!ina·sth~na.ftrfa t:~~ I ~{If~~~1. acts that are done bear fruits. etc. existent or non-existent. If there was any misapprehension in a subject -----------------------. 11th adhyaya :_ ~1l 'Si'mfit: ~af~~'ifi(!: S'ii~~ 1f~T'hi.. adbyiya 8 I . Sutra-sthana. noble. are tested by four standard(4. senses and their objects Inference is preceded by perception and refers to three times..TTiJ.T~ lfC{ ~ I if?! '.. a fire is inferred from smoke. it increases their knowledge and happiness. ANVIKl:?IKI. fire. ANCIENT SCHOOL. ~Tli~ I n~ ~?i~T q'~'iifT I . Continuous reasomng refers to the knowledge which beholdl:! conditions resulting from the co-operation of many causes and abidmg in three times.. CHAP III. acts result from the union of an agent and certain means..28 INDIAN LOGIC. the soul alone is related to the next life. Caralta-l:-athhit5.irqli~it .1 Caraka·samhitii. or pranaj(W 3 (means of valid knowledge). Reliable assertion is the assertIOn of a person who is trustworthy. sambhal?a OR vada-vidh14_THE METHOD OF DEBATE. The~e are C'o/(ectively called par? k~a I (examination). acts not done bear no fruits.. adhyaya 8 : - "'{I1I"t~Tq~fat. lIth adbyaya : - ~ ftfi~fif . water. it produces dexterity.. and one kmd of seed cannot produce another kind of fruit. Things. whose perceptIOn rUllS unimpeded.. Perception is the knowledge which is produced through a union of the soul with the mind.e and freed from evil propensities..-sthlLna. good or bad fruits correspond to the good or bad acts that produce them..il@mTit . II. inference. one's birth in the womb is due to a combination of the soul and the five primal essences of earth. wi:.g.m~: ~~~Tij I . air and space. Siitra. there can be no sprout where there is no seed. hetu 2. perception~' (3) anurniira. bestow~ eloquence and brightens reputation. Vimana-stbsna. e. reliable assertion (2) p1'atyakEfa. Parik~a-THE STANDARD OF EXAMINATION. III.2 f~f~ 'lIlIti ~~. Utility of Debate (8ambha~a-pra8arh8a). fruits are inferred from a seed.. versed in the same science. Caraka-sarnhita. and (4) yukti: continuous reasoning. (reason). If a person carries on debate with another person both beme.

The assembly (pari~ad) in which a debate is to take place may be of two kinds. viz. paraM In consideration of the merits and demerits mentioned above the respondent (or opponent) may be of three kinds. Three claS8e. Moreover some precious mystic doctrines. (b) indifferent or impartial. or to introduce before him matters which are irrelevant. owing to a temporary excitement and ambition for victory is impelled to expound them in the course of the debate. Such an examination should settle the opportuneness or otherwise of entering upon the debate. and the second a hostile debate (vigrhya 8ambha~a). (I) learned. Th~ congenial debate takes place when the respondent (or opponent) is possessed of erudition.'nt and sweetspeeched. one should' keep in view the subject of debate.e.SAMBHA~A~vrDHI-THE METHOD OF DEBATE.ted to one side. wisdom.ertain matters which were unknown to them. sb~llowness. 29 already studied it removes that misapprehension. While using persuasion with gentleness. is not wrathful or malicious. Hence wise men applaud debate with fellow scholars I Two kinds of Debl!'te (dvividha sambhasa). A debate with a fellow-scholar may be carried on either (1) peacefully (sandhaya) or (2) in a spirit A congenial debate of opposition (vigrhya). ingen· uity and eloquence. The demerits considered as bad are irritabilitv. One should not be alarmed at suffering defeat from him nor should one rejoice in inflicting defeat on him It is improper to show obstinacy towards him. and is patiE. The first is caned a congenial debate ~anuloma 8ambha~a). i. and equal A Oouncil of Debate ('Pari~ad).s of respondents (trividhalJ.e:an assembly of wise men) and (2) ignorant. i. The merits considered as good are erudition. viz. an assembly of fools. which a preceptor imparted to his favourite pupil. In debating with such a person one should speak confidently. This kind of debate IS called a peaceful or congenial debate. come out in essence from the pupil who. and (c) hostile or c9mmit. superior. inferior. interrogate confidently and give answer in confidence. shyness and inattentiveness. Each of these may be subdivided as (a) friendly. . and if there was no misapprehension in the subject it produces zeal for its further study. is well versed in the art of persuasion. Before entering upon a hostile debate with a person one should examine one's strength through a casual A hostile debate. memory. conversation with him and observation in any other way of his merits. eloquence and readiness of reply. It also makes debaters familiar with c. wisdom.

one should speak with great oare marking the merits and demeri~s of one's opponent. one should. in debate with him. nor is held 1n esteem by respectahl(' people. An opponen~ devoid of ingenuity should be defeated th. defeated through the jeering imitations of his half-uttered speeches. one should at once defeat him An opponent.\.suming a delightful countenanCA and now indulging in ridicule one 8hould engage the assembly in 'mch a way that the opponent.loquence. In a friendly assembly one may enter upon debate with an opponent who is inferior or equal. If the opponent utters an unusual word he should be immediately told that such a word iR never used or that his original propositi~n has fallen to the ground.sesses erudition. It is not advisable t. Now a<.P. sitting at the feet of your preceptor: this much that you have done to-day is enough. In an ignorant assembly.rough the use of same words bearing different meanings and different words bearing the same meaning. son of blazing fame friendly or indifferent.30 INDIAN LOGIC. Some Ray that this procedure may be adopted in debate even with a superior opponent. no matter whether the assemhly is learned How to vanqlllsh a.harp should be defeated with crooked and long-strung word bolts. memory and ~. wisdom and eloquence. Tn debating with sueh an opponC'nt one may employ crooked and long-strung word-bolts. wisdom. van quished" has even once been uttered. but experts do Respect fot' an old man not approve of its adoption when tbe opponent happens to be at:. An opponent devoid of erudition should be defeated throu~h the employment of unusual words and phrases.or ignorant. one may enter upon d('bate with a perRon who is of blazing fame. If tlte opponent appears to be superior. In the case of his' attempting to offer chaBenge he should be stopped with the observation: "Go and study for a full year. old man. An opponent whose lmowledge is shanow should be defeated by heing put to shame on that account. In an How to argue witll an indifferent (or impartial) assembly consistopponent of superior. An opponent. should be. It on the oth~r hand the opponent happens tv be inferior. The Expedients of 'Debate (vadopaya).o enter upon debate in a hostile a~sembly. never engage . who is weak in the scriptures. in ing of members that are endued with atredor or equal merits tentiveness. should be defeated through citations of long passages from them. hut who neither po:-.. per. ANCIENT SCHOOL. erudition. who is devoid of eloquence. An opponent whose memory is not a. An opponent of irritable temper l . ANVIK1?IKr~ CH." If in the meantime the shout of "vanquished. Ill. no further debate need be held with the opponent. without expressing one's inferiority. does not find an opportunity of speaking.

An opponl?nt who is timid should be defeated througb the excitement of his fear. Here is the assembly which will fix the subject and limits of debate agreeably to its wishes a. mind. should never be adopted in a fall' debate. or there is no rebirth" It is of two kinds.3-1).nd sense of propriety.oa. (3) Quality (gu1fa)-that which inheres in a substance and i~ 111active. 3 The explanation of a?. this should not be said. touch. attack. Vldyabhmlana 2 Udayanaciirya (lO[h century A. and space. ~T~fi=TU~ w~.SAMBHASA-VIDHI-THE METHOD OF DEBATE 3l should be defeated bv being thrown into a ~tate of nervous exhaustion. odour. The following are the categories g which should be studied for a thorougb knowledge of thf' course of debate:(1) Debate (vada)-a discourse between two partIes agreeably to t. ether. viz. Influenoing the assembly one should cause it to name thab as the subject of debate with which one is perHow to influence a f ' I i a1' and w h h presents an inConnell. sound. as: "This should be ~aid.use.- tion of the rema.qrfiit1f~: II (KusumiiiiJali.ibatance« quality. When the assembly meets one sbould observe silence after saying to one's opponent: "it is not now permissible for us to make any suggestions. The terms (2-7) were evidently ta. generality. an absence of whICh may provoke t. Sutra-stha.·samhit~.ken from the Vaise~ka philosophy snd not from Anviksiki of Medhitithi Gautama. etc" i The Oourse of Debate (vada-miirga)." I The Limit8 of Debatp (vada-maryadil). Even in a hostile debate one should speak with propriety. water. heavy and 1 This trick.he opponent to say or do any thing . (2) Substance (dravya)-that in which actions and quahties inhere and which can constitute a material ca. The limits of debate consist of such directions. earth. the knowledge of which is useful In guarding oneself agamst a.ta1!4a) which is a perverse debate for the purpose of a mere . and the explana. e.te obsen"ee tha.ining terms in ijhe Vimana. fire.g.t an objection may be removed by debate> but on no account should It proceed beyond the limit of practical absurdity. ectIY f amI 110 surmountable difficulty to one's opponent. adhyiiya 8. air.he scriptures and in a spirit of opposition on a subject such as "whether there is rebirth. taste. e g.-S O. soul. colour. . An opponent who is inattentive should be defeated by being put under the restraint of a certain rule. and (2) cavil (vl.-sthana.D ) following the old lawe of deba. if this OCellI'S defeat follows . action. cunning debat£'r. particularity and inherence is giveu in the Oarak8. (1) wrangling (jaZpa) which is a debate for the purpose of defence or attack. adhyiiya 1.

dissimilarity. (i) The soul is eternal (a proposition) (ii) 'Because it is a non-product (reason) (iii) Just as ether which being a non-proll-uct is eternal (example) (iv) The soul similar to ether IS a non-product (application) (v) Tht"'refore the Roul is eternal (conclusion). UnIty. e.t which produce. 1 The word reason (ketu)." stable as "earth. CHAP. desire and averl'lion. scripture (aitihya) . etc Action (lca.lly late time. example.. is not exactly identical with the reason (ketu) which constitutes the seoond member of a syllogism or demon. which inheres in a substance and representf! the fUllctIOn whi0h is to be performed. (12) Application (upanaya)-as shown a. HI (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) light. and the word hetu used in oonnection with this . contrariety. and comparison (aupamya. Particularil~1 (vi8e~a)-that which produces diversity.tration.. (U» Example (dr~fanta)-the thing about which an ordinary man and an expert entertain the same opinion. (ii) Because it is cognized by the sen'3es (reason) (iii) Just as a pot which being cognized bY' the senses is noneternal (example) (iv) The soul similar to a pot is cognize:l by the senses (appltcation) (v) Theretore the soul is non-eternal (conclusion).). (10) Gounter-rlemonstration (pratt~~hCipana)-the establishment of the counter-proposition. the soul is eterna~ Demonstmtion (sth'lipana)-the establishment of a proposition through the process of a reason. which in the old Br5hmanic and Jaina works signified a source of knowledge. hot as "fire." etc . e g.fl2 INDIAN LOGIC.t the doctrine of syllogism or demonstration was introduoed into Hindu Logic at a comparativE. or just as the "sun!) is an illuminator so is the text of the Samkhya.g. intelligence. e. (i) The soul is non-eternal (a proposition).g. It seems tha.. (14) Rejoinder (uttara)-the proposition in a counter-demonstration. and whICh is not dependent on any other acton Generalt'ty (8amanya)-tha. union. and which des· cribes the subject. measure. application and conclusion.c:. (11) Reason (hetu} I-the source of knowledge such as perception (pratyalqa). separation. number. cold and hot. ANCIENT SCHOOL.rma)-that which is the cause of both union and separation.hove. pleasure and pain. e g. (13) Oonclusion (m:gamana)-as shown above. ANVIKI?JKl. inference (anumana) . Inherence (samaIJaya)-a permanent relation between a substance and its qualities or actions in virtue of which they cannot exist separately Proposition (]JratiiiiCi)-the statement of what if! to be estah lished.

3hed examinatIon by e'\perts and on PJ'Oot by reasons. e g n. of the mmd \\ hile sound. whnt 1£ thE" rC'flt:mn ?.:...3idrlhfintrt )-f\.. and the lIke are ohject..l hf'r8uSt' . (17) Word (~Qurlf1 }-a cOl11bmation of let~{>rs It 1" of four kmds (16) Tenet or 011 dz. that \'(l11Ch refers to .. t hs..\' ~hot1t !:ll1otht'l inquiry. etc aI'e ob]ect~· of the fh·e senst'!': (lU) Inference (anumlinrl)-a rea"30t1mg ba.saya)-deterll1inMIOn.'3erl on the knowledge of connected facts. aversion.e.~Ce'rt(liniJIent (vya~·a. (80) Sou-censurable (rtl1r7.. truth WhlCh b estabh. nccepted hypothetl c. that dl. e g when it IS . It is of four kmds Y1Z a truth accepted by . (' g when n pel'~on rls:c::el'tc. the six mgredif'l1t5 (JlIFitus) con~titHte nle originating cause of the foetus 111 thet womb.l.e:l tlOn (20) Comp(llllSon (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29) ((mpamy<~)-the knowledge of a tlung ncqulcect through its RimilaJ'it.death" ['l1cel'lain (srwyabhicara)-going astray.!. e g tIu.ally. hIt' 1 b.IJltnllllo(la)-an mqul1.' . person ma. and that a. I:'tl'l'nl.§aya)-uncertl1jnty f'. TIllS in'{uil'y i~ an intenog. and that. e. t..> hy a per.\'("1'8(' of tIlt" l'("n.e 1" (m'd.g 1~ the] tJ ()l'lS tlwl'C' II ot untime1 \ death t Purpose {plrlyojana)-that for the nccompli'3hmf!nt of whirh actions are undertaken.oll \\ ho studif'R it.' one should say' tIm.t speech \\ hich i.. t the s:oul is eternal hb fenow-~('hoIHl' Inquil'es ...). r one IS required' instead of saying .1 statement wIatt' 11 pl'trtlt'lllp.SAMBHX~~-VIDHI--THE lHETHOD UF D-EBAT[. matt'?r \\ hlCh i::. fraught wIth fault.llui/o}ya)-tIlf' 1'(..\t IOU Re-inteu'o!lafion (praf. it is implied that he should eat durmg the night The originatir?'g cause (8ctUtbhava)-that from \\ hich . medicine may be or may not be '5Ulted to this diseaBe Inquiry (H)i'iiida)-examination.111" is its medicine. tha. whwh dops not correMpond to" hat IS rcnl. e g..n (.lsc is:.ble :t.se is emallIe hv an einetic medicine or a purgative medicine.. ('oncl/. thiR disea!'.on acquire~ by hUllself through Ill':> mmd conjoined with the fi n' senses Pleasure..1. pain. Kecn that which refers to a matter whirh lS not seen that whIch corresponds to what 18 real.. e g fire IS mfel'l'erl fl'Ol11 the pom"!' of cha. ( l~) Perccptinll (pratyak?a) -tha t knmdedge wl11ch a . Presumption (artka-pl'apti)-the kno\\ ledge of [t thing implred by the declaration of another thing. disea.cccptE'Cl by 1111pliC'a. due to the disturbance of "Iyjnd m the stomach ""ud 1. a ~nbJ(\d mC'\lh.terrogatwn (anllyo(jft)-an inqnil'v ahout.ke8 a genel'a.tlOl1.v to another thing 1'radltion (a'thhya)-consl"tmg of relw..g the Veda etc Doubt (srdn.:.refllll \ to 8.('11 the &c1001s. e..aid thM a person should not eat during the (by..' g when OUt' Sa)'f..omething springs out. Censurable (anllyun.. that accepted 0\' a particular 8c11001 that. \Told tllltllneh. A.serbon~.::..a)-.:.ttrnhh: (:31) in. e g I shall Ii ve e.g. dAsire.t t h~ saul is.medicine..l~·lr.

as both come under the genus ' disease. Any thing uttered inconsistently with the occasion is contradiction.NCIENT SOHOOL. the So. or (ii) "repetitIOn. combination of words which do not COllvey a connected meaning.tion. the medicine which cures phthisis should also cure bronchitis. though he really intends to.g. )IeaninglessnesR "-consisting of a mere grouping of letters without an~t senRe. This is another form of "begging the question" {C) "Balancing the Rubject" (" var~ya·sama ") occurring wl1er€ :' the € :'xample i~ not rlifferent from the subject . and the soul heing. (e) "Contradiction "-consisting of opposition to the example.g.has studied a portIOn of the science of medicine' hence he is a physician.. e. plausibility and diversion of sense." e g. race. exalllp:e. etc. as bhaisanJa. con tra. has studied nine scriptures.' ega person u~es the \yord 'navatantra' to signify a man who.. the body is non-eternal. meaninglessness..nH be . wheel. this person . is fraught with weU-expressive words and is otherwise uncensurable. when a person repeats a word or its meaning several timeR. . Excellence of speech (vakya-prasamsa)-when a speech is freed from madequacy. au~arlha.g k. (b) "Redundancy" or Raying too much which consist':! of (l) "irrelevancy:: e.. signify a man who has studied his scripture recently. : (a:~ "Begging the question" (" prakaraJ)a~sama ") occurring when that which is to be pro'\'ed is taken as the reason. it IS doubtful whether a persen "rho has studied a portion of the science of medicinf' 1~ a physician. IH. the re-interrogatIOn .g. etc. I t the . on the occasion of sacrifices. morning. it is non·prodnced. why it is non-produced 1" (33) Deject of speech (1Iakl. etc. it is applauded as excellent. tenet or occasion. (d) "Incoherence "-a. all of which signify medICin€ :'. etc. thunder. il. perfect or merItorious.it is of two kinds. e. kh. (a) "Inadequacy" or sa~Tillg too little which occurs when there is an omission of the reason..1 canse of duubt is regarded as dispelling the douLt. sadhana. " ~ "II t" . a person talks of the polity of V:rhaspati or Sukra whlIe the subJect of discourse is medicine.ur is eternal because it is distinct from the body. (c) . bodv must be et.ern:tL ring when that whieh i~ .\. viz. CHAP.ern:tl heing.34 INDIAN LOGIC. -. animals should be offered up. e.. or (2) 'quibble in respect of a generality.& . etc.h~tero~en~ons from the hodv must be et. e. or conclusion.' e g.chction. rtpplicn. . ANVIK~IKI. gh.Ja-clo~a)-consisting of inadefJua.' (36) Non-reason or fallacy {n:hetu)--which is of three kinds.g. I .h~tero~eneolls from . (35) Quibble (chala)-a speech consisting of mere werds fraught 'with cunnmg.g. e.. whey... incoherence.cy. (1) 'quibble in respect of a word. dz. g. redundancy.. .

e g. as a.ble to appreh." The reply of the opponent iR an admission.SAMBH:\~X-VIDHI-THE METHOD OF DEBATE. that which io. the slgns of life are notlCeable.nu)'na)-thf:' acceptance by a person of what IS attributed to him by hlS opponent.~ppr(~hending. (38) Attribution of censure (upalambha)-imputatlOn of defect to the reason adduced (39) Avoidance of deject (parihara) which occurs when the defect is corrected or amended. or being una.. His opponent replIes· "you too are n.g.. . e. questionable as that of the sound.g. e g. abandons the proposition first advanced bv hml. he abandon'S it sttymg. being atta0ked. A person advances first a propoRition. the soul is not eternal. sound. the mtellect is non-eternal. (37) lYlistimed (atita-kiila)-a fallacy whICh arIses when that \\'hlCh should be stated first is stated afterwards. from censuring that which is censurable. the soul IS f'tel'Ilal . viz. A persoll cites the symp toms of gonorrhoea while he was to ha ve cited thosE' of fe\"er. when the soul resides m the body. A disputant says: "you are a thif'f .cter. but when the Roul leaves the body those signs are no longer notlced' hence the soul IS dlstinct from the body. and being attacked by an opponent. (40) Abandonment of a proposition (p. fiomething repel'lJed thrice l!l an assembly thE' members whE'rC'of have apprehended It.g. tluef. because It is intangible. (42) Shifting the reason (hetvantara)-whlCh occurs \\Then one mstead of advancing the proper reason adduees a different one (43) Shijting the topic (arthantara) .nt. whether agreeable 01' disagreeable. e. [t may also occur \\hen one censure::.end. (41) Admu?swn (abhya. (44) A point of defeat or an occaswn for rebuke (nigrahasthana)whieh occurs when a dlsputant suffers defeat at the hands of his opponent It consists in the disputant misl. Here the eternahty of the mtellect is a-. e. 3fi In respect of their '1uestlOnahle ehara.atijiiii-hani)-which occurs '" hen a dlsputa.: not censurn ble or abstain:-.

r~~ )1cr~f'. who could never think of calling in question the authority of those injunctions and prohIbitions.. tn th~ (:. adhyaya 2. .va l!1O).r+1Tl:llfr: ~Rnm ~~<fitil\J (Quoted Pranato'lmi t.:m ~ K 49 II (Mahabharata.lltl'a we find:m(ii"il ~!l!ii{~ri!miTT: '(fGf~ ~"lf N I It in 'i{i.. Santlparva.. regard lese Anvikslki opposerl to of the works on Sacred Law (Dharmathe Vedas.' by a certam sEction of the Brahmar}.a.. > v ~" 1'rllil:H: I II (Manu-sambita:. the general principles of which might be applied to te~t the validity or otb€'r~ wise of the injunctions and prohibItions laid dO\'rn in the Vedas and Dharma-sutras.: 'Q:J{T~~ .antra'. II ~~nFt "Sf<ITC(ffT <Frfjf ~~ ~iI~ I ~Util~ ~rf+i~T 'q ~'n'~l!" \J ':q' 47 II f~Tii II 481\ ifr~: ~~ifit 'i!f~: 1fflliffilT~. (FROM: 650 B C ONWARDS) 20 . j ~t~T~'lf ~fq~Tf!~ .(.UN CIRCLES Anviksiki known as H et1... 36-39 II (RamaysI).-lyodhya ka~da. adhy&.. fi{l'"-saffiTlf . .t~.amlhm'vl' tJ..lff ~ II .. sastra) which thev should follow as their guide.\. verst' It) lf~T~ tI~ f'2f'lQ'lTTit~ lffc1:rT~ftr~ '5f1'Ql r.G. .. Similarly Valmiki 2 in his RamayaI}a discredit~ tho~e persons of perverse intellect who indulge in the frivolities of Anviksiki. the science of Logic.NVIK~IKr CONDEMNED IN CBRT.sfrn or Logic. Vyasa 8 in the Mahatharata.ZT~~ ~Tf.HAPTER IV Reception accorded to Anvik9iki.as..bOfn castes who disregarded the Vedas and Dharll1a-sutras relying upon the support of Hetu-<. relates the doleIf\"S'CflTo:ijw %~ ~1{T~i'!'f~T'( f~: I ~ ~'N~r~·~'!I!fi"ni{T • ~ iflfCif1iT ~fif~. I i'l~ti ~fil!f".mstra Dr Tarka-lJidYfl. sarg<'t 100) "'Jirr~ ~rr~T ~tfCfi'T ii~fil~Cfi. "Ve are therefore not surpri~ed to find Manu: enjoining excommunication upon those members of the twice. Santiparva. was not rereived with favou"!.

t aceoullt turned mto a jackal in his nc'(L birth a~ a penalty. adhyiiya.f . carried on debates divorced from all fmth in the Veda5.:S'1'E}<':M.!T"iTii'l'.k81.~T~ \l'f~1fllii II ISkandapul'ana. Si'f~fiI'T. -r "fIlfi-lrT~"i(nrl~ ('Joe. adhyaya 17)..a 4 we find l(ali satirising the founder of Anv. 246}.TUll 'fa.. I "" . high e~teet\l There were ai::Jo people who could appreciate the value or l'flaSonmg for ascertajnmg truths.:r II I t) \I IMahiibhiirata S!intlparva.yit (Logic). i\. it has not been recognized by any worthy sage. Btories of infliction of penaltIes on those given to the study of Ta1'ka-v~dya are related in the Skandapurana ~ and other works . .*W. and was on th&.lghl to the authority of the Vedas.rfirf~~ lrl-rT~""~ "'l1fif'il~ft. repentant Brahmana who. ~if lAI1It 1JII1iIif'$. Kiihkiikhanda. M "(jo-tama " the most bovine among sages 21.a. 11).:. In another pa.s:::age of the ~antiparva. Thus the Gautama-dharma-sflt.. tiW~ 11: fi(ta1"r~ 1IT"~ q~l7Jfiv: I 1I1"~ 'It'. addlCted to Tarku. I ~0Cf ~11fi"1'q'.rkika or LoglCian. was held in ver\.k1.. :~infff.and acknowledge.fi! 4l~ !f"l f~ t 1tlffsli -. while jt attached due w{. the utility of Tarka (reaHoning) ill the adnunistr!:l- ----------================--==-==------=. 37 tul story of a..ANVIK~Il{1 HELD IN HWH I<. On thE" other hand Anvi~iki. q fq1l i n'$.! Wll-q ~: II 75 1\ (Kai'ila. dharma.utRma. Vynsa I warns the followers of the Vedanta philosophy against commum· cating their doctrines to a TD..l'?hi'rsit '5IfWl13"..dhaca.acal'lt.d~.NvIK~IKr HELD IN HIGH ESTEEM IN SOME QUARTERS.ra b prt-'lcribe~ a cour~K> of traimng in Anvfksiki (Loi4ic) for the ktnl. canto xvu) (Ga.. care even to rf'view H etu-s(istra in the Brahma-Hutra seeing that.j~lf ~'fll finJ'f.-vui. adhyliya. Vyasa 7 does not.-sutra.rlta._ and in the Nal::.

p.. OHAP.--~T.!le was able to arrangeand classify the Upani~ads with the help of Anviks1. " adhyiiya 12 verse Ill) ~T"'!I~: 13~~~T'qfl 'W::WC{r-cff'e'~l1ffT II (Artba-sa.ta 1 Nyuya (Logic) is included among the fourteen principal branches of learning promulgated hy God Vi~Q.t~-. the resource of a.ir~ 'ij 'Q"rm I 10 . Yajfiayalkya 5 counts Nyaya or Logic among the fourteen principal sciences while Vyasa 6 admits that . adhyaya 12. IV. while in the :\~2.a quot<"d by Vls\-anatha 'IIti'Tlfiij' 'qij'tT ~~T~ S 'fllf.ll actlOn<.. -----~----------------- \oJ (Manu-samhIta.. I ~~r: ~Ti[rfir f~T-rt ~~~ "€f ~a~W II (YaJnavalkya-samhita..Ul17fCf~~Iif.. verse 106) 'Stfli"ff11f ~ ~rciU~~~" fflJl1t ~~ii1 fw~ I adh~ l!fiT'.8 Nyaya vidya (the science of Logic) together . ~hap.~apcl:·rna. Vide Mmr's Sanskrtt tex. . mir1~t ll~T~ qft~~n~ '31~01{ II ~rlI~~qlli. ANVIK~IKI..iT~'!T~lWfl:if~ifT. be ooposed to the injunctions of t.Jf1~'l ~T~ ~7H"CR::T 'S{~I'Q": ~OCfrq'arilf~qT~: ~6C{ifi'lillfT1{ I ~ (~lann-sal1lhita. adhyaya I.u. 3-2). 'ii~·qfil''.. 27). Manu I admits that dharma or duty should be ascertained by logical reasoning (tarka). according to him. ANCIENT SCHOOL. II) S~T<tf~~~fltqT l." ~ -gil: (fi~T~~<tifiiK I (Palho!1pllriil)a. fiya 7. in the Vedas.. :.: II - tion of ju~tice.Hff~{lll'ril'~~ ~ ~ "'4~ ~~ ifrr.ts.------.he Vedas He recommends Anviksiki (Logic) as a necessary studv for a king 2 and a Tarki'& (logician) as an indispensable member_of a legal assembly.Padmapurar. <.~ "ffT<'f -qf. Vol.firr'Cf~~ <q ~~anfRTfq~TN'iTT I ~.~itT~r i1'ir~T iil'ff ~vr ':qT~~ q'ql{ \I (Mahiibharat. 'ifil'if~~ ~~RI'r ~~T~~ f'Cffif:~'flT: I ihllT4ilT ~flIfq~r "Ci )ji1T'Ilfti(fi~~1fT 11 (MatsyapursI.38 IND!AN LOGIC.Hl. 1-1-1). In the. ~.ki or Logic. but the reasoning should not. l~ ~ 1.J and the permanent shelter of all virtues. I hIs Nyaya-vrtti.r~T~fff<tf. though in the case of conclusions proving inco:upa.tible. verse 43) I II :I ~f~ VQCfI~~ ii~"i'!ir ~~'CfTirCfl: ~l. the ultimate decision is directed Anviksiki useful for to he made hy reference to persons versed <tscertammg truths.iift~ifi1lfll'iT~?qt q{'ffh:~t1i ~Ti!fii'{: 1\ (Manu-samhIta.stra of Kautllya.:. Kautilya'" in his Artbasastl'a charactf'rises Anvik~iki (Logic) as the lamp of all sciences. verse 3}. III.

In thr: Adiparva I of the Mahabharata. it accepted the authority of the Verla'3 and propounded the doctrmc of syllogistic reasoning thE' validity of wlnch was never challenged.ANVIK~IKI HELD IN HIGH ESTEEM. The Santiparva 3 refers to numerous tenets of N yaya supported by reasoning and scripture.s'f~1ifC!j': II 27 II (Mahiibharata.q-T~Ffif. udhyaya 'Ill) ift~if ~ '!n!~ a C!j'rf~iIT ~a'C!j'rf~ir: I ~Q<lfri(Tif 4J~iIT$': 'tR~~-f. while 111 the Asvamedhaparva ~ we find that the sacrificial ground of Yudhisthira wal.) crowded by logician£ (Hetu-vruZm: who employed arguments and counter-arguments to vanqUlf'\h one another.. adhyiiya. SlIniL11' oihp.D. adhyaya 70) . W~.{1lirfif .nf~: . the Nyaya (Logic) is mentioned along with the Veda and Cikltsa (the science of medjcine).ya-taUva (categories of Logic).fT~if~rf". and who knew ~hc true meaning of a demonstration. when. I).. 8:. terminated practically in the firF. ~miif3iil:q~q~ 'fl~tfr~fn~ I~' 22 II (Mahaol1"ata.. under the name of Nyaya8iistra. In fact so widespread was the study of N yi1. (l\'Iafia11tiiratn.t century A. ASlramedhaparva.ya that the Mahabharata is full of references to that science. 39 with the Vedas is said to have emanated from the mouth of Brahma hunself. I .r mstances of the popuhuity of N yaya (Logic) may be cited from the Mah:1bharata and other works which were composed in their present forms about the beginning of the Christian era . and the hermitage of KMyapa 2 is described as being fined with sages who were versed in the N Y/f. Adlparva. II - o:t{~':! if'ii!{tlWfq'ifTif~~qnJt: '~lqifT~qf~~T"iI 'f~iiTli'if'i'ft lI~: I 44 ~ . ~~T f~fiil\'ij'lJr ~ C(Tif 'ffVJtr('f 'i'f?lT I . . adhyaya. Achparva. Santlparva. objection and cnnclusion.) .. It seems that the unfavourable crIticism to which Anvik~lki (the science of LoglC) had long been exposed.-gii~ ~ii ~iti ~~i1riP1 ~f'if'i'f1{ n ~ ()7 II 42 It (Mah8bharata.

observed that Nyaya! was one of the various names bv ..:Iff<3i·Z::t'!"~ Rig!i-pa. E'dited by Dr E. Ui's Va. nyaya functions neither with regard to things pr~viou. part h. (Nysya bbal}ya.t t1rIr~ ~mitsif !Nyaya.D. sp~Clal topJO. 84..' The N yiiya-fJfLstra is therefore the science of right of ~. Calcutta. Yuan Chwang (Hweu-thsang) tram. . but m the second stage it \vas..oning)-t'ide Professor H. That the word nyaya actually signified a syl1ogi~m is E'vident from an observat. "dwn nyaya constituted its of NyCiya. The word nyaya poplllarly signfies 'right' or 'justice.D. the science of right judgment-vide :M:ahllvyutpatti. p..va.].bhiays. 22.son (01' rea::.iogic wa~ generally designated as Anviksiki. 1 The Growth of Nyay&.) CHAPTER. widely known as Nyaya-Utstra.yhich the Anviksiki waF.l~·l.lka Philosophy. and the Anviksiki was called The tech'llcal meamng Nyaya-Mlstra.choo1 of Indian Logic entHed upon the ~econd stage of its development In the first stage I. .-1200 A.a. The Anviksiki-vldya del)ignated 10 its'logical aspeJt.hat .!'i\'>f:>.-sastra. triJ 1f~'tf" If i"+iI~~'1' 'Sfm~ • wt<'fJl\t. The Chine~e Oan-li 1 and the Tibetan Rig~-Q§tan-Qco§. flfift S~~: 'S/1f'.8 a~ equiv~lents of the Sahskrit Nyaya-qastra.{YA. p 133.ion quoted by Vatsyayana. H ef'U-sllstra or Tarka-vidya. S The 'Syaya-sGstra is callea' in Tibetan ~tl'/~·l:..a::'PUlar meanmg judgment or true reasoning. .. as we find in the Nyaya-bha~. :Nath Jhii's Translation of the N ii a- .nd Dr. Technically the word nyaya signifies a syllogism (or a speech of five parts). {CIRCA 1 A.'31y I Va..'It'lfT. With the deslgnated as Xyayaintroduction of this word. ~ t.. (OaY}-li) by trlle rea. express exactly the same meamng..SECTION 11 :'\fyaya-sastra-the Science of True Reasoning. the ancient ~8stra. 1-1-1: alqo 'Or. Ross a.l§el. ::. 1-1-1).lates Nyay. Gan.ts~·Ayana It has been observes:- )... D.n­ b('o~. Sat:s Chandra Vidvabhusana in the Bibhotheca Indica s. ORIGIN OF THE NAME NY.bi-b~ta.

an 'example' based on perceptIOn) an 'applicat.lson based on inference.nOWl'oot fol' the statement. It does not find place. 1(T~ fifsrfj. '..'ide As!8.W 'Slf..qt ~yaya did not formedy ceutury A D Pamm 4.lapatha. not know the word" Nyaya" m the sense of Logic) and even Patafijali 6 (about 150B. Bha"ya The Ga. but he takes evidences to signify a ~yllogl~m which consists of a 'proposition' based on verbal testImony. ius A. 0alcutta edition.l1{ 'ij.. 41 unknown nor with regard to thing:-.lnilil' ~iffOli:lC{ I 'i1i~. understands by the term nyaya an inference f01' the sake of others In wluch 11 syllogism is speclalty employed In view of this technical mea. chap. n!JufJottarl1nya aud nyayiisralla are defined The five parts 01 nyaya (syllogISm) w1l1 he explam~d Jater . Goldstucker In hiS :PaUllll.he s~nse of Logic doe::. presuppo::.&/lga~!a In hi::.!. 1-138 and 1-1-40m WhiCh nyaya-lfVarupa. 4-4-92. 151. that al. the science of demonstration. 11 're. adhlkaral)ll: 3." f> Pataiilab did not use the wvrd na~yiiy~ka (loglCum) as nyiiya was not meluded in the ukthiJ.:. und~l the head Aksapikla-da~ana. p 114.. 1-1-25. ~ya. samgL. In this sense. For nyayya t. " .li~'ij' 'i~.. says that both Katyayana "nct PataiiJah knew the Nyaya-sutra There 1$ however.ion ~ based on comparison.ya " in t. explams nyaya sl)arfipa as the essential form of a syllogism which consists of it') five parts. and a 'conclusion' based on all the previous four. lI~ II (Artha ~iistra. and Madhavacarya:.:.) did l:>lg111fy LogIC. however. not appear to ha\~e been used in literature before the fir... equitable or eqmty .dhyayi.lS a lnter work.{T~T~ HIS A~l adhyiiy j.C. Liidhyiiyi . o N1Iaya siglllfies just or JustW6. nyaya as an examinatIOn of objectH by evidenct's. which mcludes it.C ) does not seem to have been conversant with the word. 3.ga. that is.'" 'liciT r.-122 as foUows :-'lIlf~Tflifn1ft. i-1-3i.THE. 1 no doubt.(about 350 B.1~ ~ . LogiC. P loo) . from the root ni lll.gisrn or the science of mferencEI tor the sake of others.ning we may interpret Nyaya-sustra as tho s~ience of Ryllo. whlCh does 'not occur In his Bha~ya on ukthadi-galJ-a.. THE ANTlQUITY OF NyAYA-$ASTRA (FROl\{ CIRCA 1 AD). The term .I'here IS no doubt that PUllml den"\cs the word nyiiya (ovldently in the senso of Justice.t! in the ArtLta- l Vuie VIsvanatha's Nyilyasutra-vrttt.rv""r. Vi~vanatha J.e nyaya ill the sense 01 . p. 1.'E' d{'finlLely known. lHidhavacarya:s Sal'Vadanidn8. but It £unctlcns only wIth regard to thingFi that are doubtful~' Vatsyayana defines. . </. 23. ANTIQUITY OF NYAYA-S\STRA.. 4-2-l3u ~O-?tH~'" <=IliftTl{ aea: does not. nyaya·pii.

. pural).na (about 400 A.a. Adlparva. that is. 3 Visl)U pur ana." "analogy" or "maxim. In thE" Adiparva of the l\iahabharata 10 we find that the hermitage of Ka~yapa .j. a ~~it~~. verses 42-44 and Sa. 1.ohers of Nyayasastra.yava called in Tibetan 'rlga-p£l. tion of the doctrine of syllogism under the name of sthapana (demonstration). 1-3. ~§tan·bgyur.:1(<(: i . 10 III 1'El(ti$lllllfcrm-. adhyliva 1. Uttaro. Vlmana. oS Ylijiiavalkya-sarilhlta.2 Mahfibharata.s Matsya pural)." "method.d. SMlluccaya. adhyilya I. third part..elf an the five parts of a syl1ogism.'d I":> • 24. .va.)..q~Cfi: II ~ '{ ~ m. (Tshad-raa-kun laa btur!-pa..ntiparva. I (Artha-s§.a.khanq.:rr~:~: I" . 6 etc.tsyft purana. ~ I bha~ya> 1-1-1).....2 Vi~I).f~-.l!i-yan-la.) explicitly mentions the five parts or members of a syllogism as Nyaya. VI. vi. used in the sense of LoO'ic for the first time in the Mahabharata. edition} • . it is presumed that the word N yaya as an equivalent for Logic came into use about the composition of that Sarhhita. 3-2 b Padma puriil)a. about the opening of th~ Christian era The word became very popular about the second century A. Ma. Vatsyaya.r~fQ.rT~'\ iIiI+i:t:lIEi f<i1Q.r fil'nti-rf'ifrr qrs~ q~i{l~: (Ny/iya. 42 Il . chap.. The term "Nyaya.l. THE EARLY TEACHERS OF NYAYA-SASTBA (ABOUT 100 A. chap.a.5 Yajnavalkya-samhita. As the Caraka-saUlhita. adhyiiya 210.g' occurs in the Pram ana. Dignaga (about 500 A." if:.:. in passages which are presumed to have been written after the beginning of the Christian era The Nyaya-sastra was not so CR-ned before the subject of "Nyaya" (syllogism) was introduced into Nyaya. Sham Sast!"!' . ot Kautllya. a.. CHAP." which previously signified "right.D. 379. used in the sense it.u puraIf. adhyiiya 6 .42 INDIAN LOGIC) ANCIENT SCHOOL. verse G7: adhyaya 70.vaR filled with sages who knew the true ~'el'~~ ~"'IiI .stra. when the Nyaya-sutra was composed.a.-sthano. Mdo. Oe).ka-samhitii.) uses the expression" parama-nyaya "g for thE" conclusion (nigamana) which combines in ito. ver"le :22.:rCf(it ~!'1~~w.40 Padma. 1 Cara. contains for the first time an exposi1st century A D.D. NYAYA-~ASTRA. etc. p.D. Nothing is definitely known about the early tea. ad1llkalana II. Nyaye.m'ieftlf~?J: ~llffr lfW5iif!1a~'N ~'ii<i"f'q'tir. chap..vayava.YTil'T~I~. 2()3.7 so far as we of LogIC from about the know.D..dhyaya 8.C).S follow"! :-~l:Il~·I:lq:·UlC\·Qlz:q'OJ·~l:Il~·tI~3i . sasti'a I of Kautilya (about 327 R.

~~ II ~( • lt~r tfll~ 'fi ilIcrtl': CfiTltJ'tJlf.NARADA-AN EXPERT IN NYAYA·SASTRA. 1\ 2 II :1 11-''': il''ifiT 'SI'~~l11 ~"T~ mffii11lfll'rcrq.clever in a~cHtainjng the validity and invalgisilC reasonmg. refutation and conclusion. 2 Narada is called in TIbetan 54'~'~d\'~"'2. . p 23.n \l[~"'pir fq <r I I. 25. and it is interesting to note that Narada.:j'lll{~. 3 He was skilful in distinguishing unity and plurality... are the technical terms of Nyaya·sastra as used in the Caraka sarbhita. 11'\ the Blbhotheca Indica series."fffiRi~: Il 4 \I 'Cj"~rq ll'qt 'ftiW <rretiHY . edIted by Dr E. D.t (Mahiibhiirata. . it may be reasonably inferred that the sages who dealt with them in the hf'rmltage of Ki1syapa were the early exponents of that sastra. 43 meanings of demonstration.rf~"'1Ifi~m{ II ~~ n (Mahabharata. fcriIlljiiTdf. adhyaya 5}.ide Mahavyutpattl. NXRADA-AN IExPERT. 'i1Tf~it~f~fiT ~ra'lit i1C(T sqmt V. genus and species r etc. idityof a speech of five parts (pancavayavaviikya). As sthapana. part I.adlparva. Ross and Dr. In the Sabhaparva of the Mahabharata we find that a sage named Narada 2 was an expert in Nyaya-sastra. which are the Sanskrit equivalents for demonstration. chap 70).:ii!if~~ 'i11"el:lf'iltRT~~: I II 43 n \ltITqil'liiqf'3~T'ifI' lr~l1rWiJ1ft ~w: I -~:::.a) .existence (inberence).habharata.). II 44 11 ~qr!i~~lI{i~ ifiTl1Cfi1\:~fC(~: I I. S ~i{l-q~~t 'ij''ijT IlJifli: ~~~[ltrJf. Calcutta). adhyaya 70). The" speech of five parts" refers undoubtedly to a syllogism of five members.ijif: I U~T~S~I'II£'if: S~lifiqqTiJir~f.J l1iHlIfil': I ~l~ijWl~ "(~ l1. conjunction and co.t \J ~'Ti~""{qWiT "q' qi{msfq 'i{~~a-: I "'iJriCfir~rTji~q ll'~ICjq: ~"ij~: Il " (Ma. Adlparva.:fiT~ifTill ifl{r'{C(: ~:::. capable of deciding que~· tions through evidences (prama. refutation and conclusion. Kftsyapa 1 lived on the river Malini in the district of Saharanpur midway between Delhi and Hardwal'.llfifq: I ~TtRfq~T~I'if' ~. ak~epa and siddhanta. 1:!fii{~ ~ I "111 iti'iJ: .1J.n! \I ~111 fiJ"~~i'ftiI'iJ: llj~lfq~i'nr: \ ~CIif~)lr iiTiI'j(q' l3i1CjTll'fclitr~. and Niirada'f? skill III syllo. <! . IN 'NYAYA-SASTRA (ABOUT 100 A D. Sabhaparva. Satis Chanda Vidyabhusaoa.' Mi~ abym-gYl-bu (".

. Bhiigavata purst. No work on Nyaya·sastrl1.. the philosoplucal culture of the 1st." m~ ~ if~ ~nr'fiU \lilf II ("Nyaya-mafijari.. who." Oomparative studies In . etc.udiei\ for another two years under the third wife of Kr~~a named Rllkmini to attain mastery over the notes of the musical scale. Cursed by Brahma he wandf>red :)ver earth without staying at any fixed habitation. and chanting alway s the name of Hari the Lord.la. p. 1.44 INDIAN LOGIC. XU. verse attributed to him which gives an expositIOn of a logical" point of defeat" (nigraha-sthana) technically known as "the abRndonment of a proposition (pratijna-hani) The personality of Narada is shrouded In mystery. Once he left heaven for a pleasant ramble on earth and repaired to the court of Srnjaya who ordered his daughter Sukumari of unrivalled heauty to attend upon him. Narada wa!. holding in one hand a staff of gold and in the other a beggar's bowl togeth€ 'r with a lute of tortoise shell. but owing to a curse he looked like a monkey to his bride He however worked off the curse by eeverf> austerities.t1. Bhavi!jlYa."ada consult the Mahiibhi'irata.D. puriJ. He was of an imposing figure with flowing braids of hair and a long grey beard--wearing a mendicant's garment. and they were married. on the removal of the curse.lQ. perhap" a written by him has come dO'ivn to us But fictItIOllS person of the 1st J ayanta I In the Nyaya-mafijarl quotes a century AD. NY'\:YA-S \:S1'&A. ~~ithl~T fl( ~: I ~ln ~ if11iU "Sff~ril'T r-~: I (Mahi'ibhiirata.: 1(t~~. as we shall presently see.\a. Santiparva.ahTaf. Of. ~T"~~ ~ ~ if \l~ 'lliif: ql(1{ t (Vi!jlnu purana. Narada fell in love with her. century A. CHAr. Adbhuta Ramayal. chap. travelled In Svet':vlvlpa (perhaps Alt'xandria). He 2 is represented in the Mahabharata and PuraQas to have been himself very quarrelsome and clever in exciting quarrels among other people. in judging the merit and dement of such a speech. ~iki). This Narada represent..a pudiIJ. 1-15..- ~ 1Ifi4'I~T'{f ~ 1¥iJ~'t'fT I fRT. B:. 2 For legends about ~gl. Vii?t}u pural}a. versa. was one of the earlIest expert.. Vadiha puraI). He visited Svetadvlpa 3 supposed to be identical 'with tho I I ~r. He Legends l'egardmg carried nlessages of gods to men and vice ~arada. £:40. ANC!E~n' SCHOOL.a. and Sukumari could with difficulty be reconciled to him when he appeared. 335-8). in his resplendent beauty Narada studied music for two years under two wives of Kr~l)a Jambavati and Satyabhama) but had to prolong his st.. Svetadvipa may also be identified with Svria.la. Vizianagaram Sanskrit series).

was a descendant 01' follower of the real Narada or wa!'! an altoWa.c. the succeeding members of which took up lus renowned name. pura:q. m the Blbliotheca Indlca serIes).xYA~S. puriina. and adh:yaya 3. xvhi Nftrada-smrti. and " The t. '* Chandogyopanisad. S B. l'hetortc 01' debfite.~ plUHshads 1-' translated by F Max l\!tiller. Our Narada. s Vako-vaJi:1Ja may signify grammar. and where he saw Visr. who offer~d oblat. the real auth~[ of which 1S nnlmowll.d 4< that he was versed in many sciences mclnding viiko-vakya & (perhaps Logic).ml tl {l\lmor Law bOOkSI in the S.E.NARADA-AN EXPERT IN NY. by the sage Narada. adhyfiya 2. prapiHhaka. The fiction about Narada seems to have originated from one The real Narada.u)\'/"l \\"1'11.da 1. J. an expert. . IIO. 1 Varaha. series.RE. verses 3-7.a. which is said to have been vrntteiI Narnda's work on Smrt1. J" Jolly.nd 9-104-u. K.. Vide a.lso Dr. Sankara intel'prets it as Logic.r:v of which the capital waR Alexandria where hE' became th(. a Sa:ya~a's comtnentary on the Bgveda. It appears from the Chandogyopani~a. Bibhothecu In(1Jca 'St'rw" Calcutta)..-smrt1 seems to ha. 01' the founder of a ~chool of thought.m (God) worshipped with fervour by devotees who attained their suitable end through His grace In the Varaha. khalJ. Joliy's Introduction to the NaraOa-. This real Narada is mentioned in the Sarvanukramika of Katyayana a8 a descendant of Kal)va S and a seer of certain mantras of the ~gveda. Narada whose existence is unquestioned. verse 2. there a logician gether fictitious person requisitioned by the name NJ1rada? compilers of the Mahabharata and PuraQ.ents tlw tlH:nl'ie-' 01 Smrti and Nyaya of the early centurIes of Christ.ions of water to his dead ancestorR in the lake of PUfjlkara at Ajmere There is 6xtant a work on Smrtl 2 dated about the 4th century A D. p. in the city of AvantI.xSTRA. 45 eount. ~ (Niirada-smrti parisls~a 60. the various followers of which were known to the world after him. edited by Dr. 8-3-13 !l. guest of a merchant in a town called Dvaidal-nayaka.~ thered upon him the sayings and doings of dIfferent ages and ('ountries to make them authoritative.as who f. tin an('estor of Kasyapa already mentlOlled.ve been composed about the fourth century AD as it frequently mentlOns dinara (the Roman com denarlus) whICh wa:" nnported into lucha about the ttme of the Roman emporors Compare ?f~sT~I!fl1f~ ~1'ifJ~ ~"'ill . p. 7.a I Narada is stated to have m a prenou~ birth been a BrahmaI). lepl'tJ-. in Nyaya-sastra. 2 The Narada. Other works such af' the Narada-pafica-ratra are also attributed to him. verses 63-83. series. He was either the founder of a dbtinguiRhed line. Sarasv"ata by name.

. antra.. sutra. perIOds.. A thing is neither existent nor non-eXIstent nor both." if \Iij'if if ~ 'ifNit if ~~~ ~ 'l4'fii:W{ (Nyiiya.ions). 1. NY~YA-SASTRA. chap. .'2 and other Buddhist works which were composed about the third or fourth century A.. Perhaps the Nyaya-siitra.. ! (Nyaya-sGtra...4-2-26) ." ~f . 1 ~ll1T fit~li4in"l ilT'ifCiiT ~Tl!iHIOT~~f..__.. Vaise~jka. ANCIENT HeHOOL. It seems that these passages were interpolated by Vatsyayana who is said to have written the first commentary called Bhasya on the Nyaya sutra about 400 A. 4-1-48)." il'N 1. I Madhyamika sutl'a.divided into five books. 3-2-11).. Even in the case of a crystal there is no cause for the production of one after another. Things ca. is net entirely the wcrk of one person.~fTnllf'iIT'Ilt 'iij'ru:lIt~ cri(~1{ n $I (Lankavatara-siitra. as it exists at present. II." H mcongrmty of existence and non·existen('e.. VI).. . There are in it passages which were quoted almost verbatim from the Lailkavatara sl1tra." ~"T ~~"Tifritt ~11fT iil'\!f\rl_it I (Lankiivatara-sutra. ThArG ca.. .. 26.-siitra. Mimamsa. 4-2-32) . 4-1-39)..nnot be self-existent owing to their inter-relations. NYAYA-SUTRA-THE FIRST SYSTEMATIC WORK ON SASTRA. NVAY A.. but has been enlarged by interpolations from time to time.concept " •t -~ . It contains references to the Sarhkhya. because all individuals are momentary.. Vedanta and Buddhist systems of philosophy.. ".~sf1f ~rq«t~'q'. I mean that It is not produced.D.nnot he production of a thing whioh is existent. chap.'H 1i~r~qiflfl:: ll:nIl!Ttll{<fi'f1f~ 1ft (Nyaya-l:Iutra." H . The Nyayasutra contains in itself the principles both of Logic and Philosophy. x) ..p I}. •. chap. cha.r: ~ftIlCfitiifl!£ tll'JitifTtl~a: (Nyaya-sGtra. We cannot ascertain the essence of things wInch are discerned by our intellect.. There is no essence in things inasmuch as they are dIscerned by our intellect. .. By saying that a thing is momentary." 2 H 'if ~Tcrf~fC~~t'! (Nyiiya.!lflfro m'CfTif'f ~fi{~ ~ 'I {MMhyamika-sntrR.l port. non-exii'ltent or both... the city of the celel'ltial quire --. trick of jtlgglery. CHAP. There is no self-existence_ of things owing to their mutual relationship.. each containing two views doctrmes of var:ous chapters caned ahnikas (diurna.D.'46 INDIAN LOGIC. . ~~ ~T ~itit ~ (Mlidhyamika. owing to the mutual ~'if:. Yoga. The first regular work on the Nyaya-sastra is the Nyaya-8utl'a or "aphorisms on true rpasoning" It is The NyRya~Rutra re. '!'he of things is like a. . VII)...

-sutl'a. edited 1n SanskriVflbetan-English by Dr..l~ "-:or iflqf fifiir. the existence of a pa. colophon. In the sutra.'~ZI'J':O~' IJ.. . . Satts Chandra Vidyabhusana.'a dream 01' the Clty of the celestial qUlre.D.: qm-'CJfffC'iCQ' ifil~1trq'~: (Nyaya-sutra.. Vizianagaram Sanskrit series) . .kan-mig-can.Nyaya-sastra in a systematic way.1f~ It (l\Iadhyamlka-sutra. p.PADA-THE AUTHOR OF THE NYAYA-SDTRA • I (ABOUT 150 A.rtika (about 600 A. ('hap." "The present tIme ~ if .. opE'lntug line.~:'H I (Nyayu-vartika.\' 47 27.nif~ fflfr ~T "?{r. We are not passmg a path 'which has already been passed.D..rtift mn~ mli't ~~m af~r~ I '!iil'l rei ifiTwriffifefff ~itr: ctif(tf. that which is yet to be passed. AKSJl.lli'iIf-':' '1~~-qj~'ij~~ r~t. I ." crtlifTifTllTCft qrn. " '.1ya-vJ. It {Nyuyo. part I." I Aksapada is called in Tibetan ~t. [n thE' early commelltanes on the Nyaya-sutra the author of the Sutra is distinctly nfnll8d a. (Nyaya-vartlka-tatparya-tika. continuance and CE's:"atlOn of a thmg are sa1(l to be like a trick or jugglery.fhe originatIOn.. I '!1~ WJ~T ~'tlr ~ ~~iT~ 11m I "~Ti(.( "~"~nn l\fI~rtiJ fif:~l1flcTI 1tT~ 'Sf1Ii'tit. 2-1-39) IS non-existent because the falhng down of an object relates to the time during which the object fell c).1YAYA-SUTR.th. nor are we passiw.ryaya. Ro"ls and Dr. • 'Iii'll.~r ·~. I) .. Calcutta} 1 m-~T~f"f '~n~: ~~lijT~i(t lR1{ I ~ qq~Tl1iI' i(~ llT~~fffijff~ It (:-.. 1 Vatsyayana ~ m the Nyaya-bhasyn. chap. (about 400 AD) HayH that the Nyaya philosophy manifested itself (in a regular form) before Ak<japada the foremost of the eloquent. openmg lines).) .~ "Irtqq Wl'ff{ ~ifif wrq ~ I .ft~ f4faffl11i uttiTlf if .) and the Nyaya-manjari/' Ak~apada is stated to have been the promul.-maiijari. chap.A. Blbhotheca IndICa series.J~~ 1\ (Mtidhyamika. VII).. Sir E D. II).D) affirms that it was Aksapada the IAksapiida credited as most exc211ent of sages that spoke out the the author of the Nyiiya.AK~APADA-THE AUTHOR OF 'fHE ::-. "with eyes on his feet!' (Vide Mahl:t-vyutpatti. 22.own and to the tIme durmg whIch it wtII fall down. Nyaya vartika tatparya-tika 4 (81. ~ '4((~'QT~: 'SI'~r ~.:>.15''CJTi(~~) fIT( fq'if1fT ~T~'CJT~tf: 0:..bha~ya. t ~ Pf. is beyond comprehensIon.s Alqlapada. which has neither hean passed nor IS yet to be passed.). while Uddyotakan q III his Nv..r'\'.

p 57: the commentator Ananta.>. . new pair of eves in his feet.fi ~ ilf""T~fqrlf~: "Q'''i!!f~~Tf~ II • J (N ytt-sUt. but with fl. CRAP I gator of the N ya.-\Veber s RlstOl'.ra-vl. and Oantama-dharmn sutra. a disciple of Gautama. one d<1y during his walks he fell unwit.tingly into a well.d Vedanta-sutra.. The Nvaya-ko~a 5 mentions two legends to account for the nftl1W Ak~apadft a.hat. "Ak:?a" (eye) and" Parla" (feet). ont of which he was rescued wUh great difficulty God therE'fore mercifully provided him with a Recond pair of eyes in his feet. l ~""--"-. i'f'f ii:q f"f "'~" rI ~~m 1(r~ titk~ if'=(r{ I iI"'itillf~T ~ti ~f~ a Cif-qiRif ~ n I (Skandrt plH'81!<1.s applied. Bombay).pada.P""T~ ~f?l'ifr ~iHlTlfq'qll(T I mt'i~ift ~1T{(Ni~ ~~i. 263.ya-Hastra. Kitlika khandll.- m'11 ~hr iittiir .l etc the ~:vii. Bmnf'll. .'ers(.a.. ChdP XVII) tf'lfT '!ir.t known to himself that Gautama (Got-ama) and Ak~apada were thE' same pf'fSon.vention of a later "generatfrHl of logicians.ClH'S. Anantayajvan" in his commentary on the Pitrmf'dha sutra suppoRes on grounds be. concludmg VE'l'5e) . lying prostratf' before his master until the latter condo:~cended to look upon him.\·a­ sastra is stated to have bet'n expounded Gautama too belIeved by Gotama or Gautama. not with his natural E'yes. .48 INDIAN LOGIC.~~ lr'rflti fl~fi'l: ~r. while Maohavacarya in Ill~ 8arvad.ko~ (2nd editIon. the sutra of Gotama" Now the question arises as to \"ho. roav be dismis8ed with scr. ANC!fi. PUl'Rr:. was the real author of the Nvaya·sutra.NT SCHOOL.tiana. Pltrmedh~. according to it. where the follo\\'mg . to Is Ak:::1apada the same Gautama If. "To t'h~ (h:h:'::Hlutl'aS of the Sihna n~da probably belong also Gautama... Visvanatha S in to be the author of the his Nyaya-sutra-vrtti calls the Nyaya-sfltra Nyaya-sutra as Gotamq. that i~. Jhi'ilakikLtrn. chap. hy M M Hhimecal'vB.\Ta philos-ophy as Ak~apiida-da1. NYAYA-':)ASTRA. Uttarakha9<la.' 01 IndIan Ljtel'l:ltlll't:'. I Skanda puraI). the philosophy of Ak$apada But in the Padma purana.-sutra.tti.yaJvan Hlentifie" the :l~thol' With ~ksa.l!:i'-lif.L. anxious to humIliateVvasa for the vilific'ation of the Nvaya system in the Mahabharat!-1 sl. th€ ' duthor of the Nyaya-sutra).' O(. to protect the sage from further mishaps This is a ridiculous story manufactured merely to explain the word " Ak~apada" "as composed of.nt ceremony as the h.~--~---------------- I Padma. is Raid that Gautama was so pet'clon as Gautama ? deeply absorbed in philopophical contero· piatiol1 t. Another legend which represents V :vasa.. tn. Gotama or Ak~apada. ~yi'tyo.&..gutfa.\r5I:ina salilgraha (about 1350 AD) designatrs tht' N~·. p S.

rr tlllitf{~: .ta. washed on its wesoorn side by the river Sa.l of Vdarbha intrJduces himself as the son or Jiituicsrn'i (tIlde l. 49 In fact Gotama or Gautama.D. p.B • '5!'wr~ ~S. The BrahmaI. the other flourished at Prabha.AK:?AP. Poet BhavabhGl..(Bl'ahmii!}4a puriI.i.Htararitma-carl ta.a puraQa I describes Aki?apada a~d KaJ). old times. a debate or discussion. The second and the third sUbjects. (4) avayava.:.ey of Weiltern India. ~.\q. and thare is no doubt that Prabhasa situated on the Sara. which m-.ioned in the Srimad Bhagavata thus. viz.pada. adhyiiya 6) (Bhagava. ffiiftlT ilfriW1~ !'~~ 1ill.sa Gautama. There are also some inscriptions in Gupt.rfi"fl~f\f~~fcr~~T~"T: I . It is by no means easy to determine who was the real author of the Nyaya-sutra Gautama and Ak~a­ Gautama and At·:sapada pada seem both to have contributed to the were both authors of the production of the work. Skandha II.· llT'f4Hi'rS iicr liT~ 11 'If lI.nd A40ka by names.~!\1 S m. Sltandha II.). sdllyuya 30).me of Vayu purana by A. wherd we come across all tho edicts of Asolca as well as an In'lcrlption of Rudradaman StlP~ posed to be the first in~cription in SanskrIt about 150 A.--• W{li ~firlilrfu mJ!:. Arch3. "R"c7t If .a books. an examination of contemporaneous philosophical doctrines.svati acquired celebrity in \rar\. is mant..ada as the sonA of a Brahmaq. Prabhasa was situated beyond the rock of Gil'nar in Kathlawar. and possibly also the first subject in its crude form. ample references to which are met with in the old Brahma~ic.taparik~a. Gupta a. ' in Kathiawar.piida dIfferent from in Mithila. Of."t1IT~ iiI'~f""ft: I Cf~ 'SHn~ llT~ ~ ~~. treats mainly of five subjects. and reputed as the residence of K~~a. Buddhistic. The <tflif'ijmrrit vr~ ~ ~~ I lS'IIGifI'lIfT ll1U 1Imi.eoio.. 128.a named Soma-sarma who H'as Siva incarnate.. was quite different from Ak~a.utions Candra.o\DA-AUTHOR OF THE NYAYA-SUTRA. and well known for his practice of austerities at tll~ shrine of Prabhasa ~ during th') time of Jatukarl}. the objeot of right knowledge.il' q'Q ~ ~ • adhyaya 23). lif~ffr ~~: ---------------------.rasvati. (Bhagavata. and (5) anyam(J. (1) pramiina. (3) vada. the mean'3 of right knowledge. While one lived Ak~a. the members of a syllogism. were in all probability first handled by Gautama whose Anv'ilc~iki~vidya was constituted by them. 2 Prabhasa. ~ iI'ii '5!'~NW1~ml:JT1Q' 'I14l11ll1 ~r.f~: II it ~{ lff/ferfalr 'il'~iff: I "- \JI ~~: "i'. the founder of Anvik~iki.ya Vyasa.l~.la published under the na. The Nyaya-sutra N yiiya-sutra. (2) prameya..racters.1:\ chil.S. VoL II. and Jaip.

p.ds : (1) Pramii'YJ'a-the means of knowledge. Ak~apada 'was tlw redactor of the An1"ik~iki of Gautama Hencf> Nl/Cty("t is ('aBed Gcwtami-vidya as wen as Ak~ap1da-<lur.as a.l). NYAYA S:.A-SUTRA.ya widely prcvttllt'd III V Hlarhha (Horal'). and Ak~apadc1. 14). t.D. was one of his contenlporarietl The Nyaya-sutra.):anaJ' We know nothing 0"£ . Akl?apada was therefore the real author of the Nya. The Italian scholar Professor L. . The principal snbject-. . sfl~ra which derived a considerahle part of its material:::> from the Anvihnkividya of Gautama..nd 3nO A..leelUS to he bettveen Ni'igarJuua (the second-third century) and Vasubandhll (the fourth century). . Dr. L fourth and fifth ~Ilbjects. It sorlUR that after kmg Kani~ka ha.Jatftkn.l'Q. H. (The VailiH~ika Philosophy.. sabda (\Terbal testimony) as defined in the Nyaya-sutra combines in Itself the ! ~r:iii~ '5fT~T'11(nf ifif'SlTi(lq~i'SJTifl'llff({ . the Br'a. f'x('cpt 'lhc1. ()Jyaya-sutl. referred perhaps to the Cal'nka-saUlhita under the name of Ayurveda. Suali places the da.bont 150 A.'y'a V'yd.apd:da."a.hma.t t he name JMJukarI).JEerS OF THE NYAY.Ia ldndhttl'H III the first centul'y A D to colled.(STRA.Ill' word Vyasa usually signified a eornpllet'.}w PUl'ft. and 450 A. a.50 INDIAN LOGIC. and 8abn. Ui observes :-The date of . Indiana.D. . By~tematic 28.Jato. Age of Ak.OUps to compile t. . were lntroduced by Ak:.D. p. but does not a.! the' 'Ayurveda 'Of Atn'ya..~q.nd other sastras. upa'nliina (comparison).D. SUB.)l§'ya-sutra li-ttacks Sunyavadtt.tyled the Nyaya-sutra. CHAP. on the O't'ound that the . 42.D. ::. was probably one of the COlllpiler8 at Vidarbha. 2-1-69. Jacobi places the da. p. Sacred Bookq of the Hindus seI'le~.l~ic sages too in the followin~ centnries met togther ln gt.d held the fourth BuddhIst Oouncil fLt . treated in the Nyaya-siitra may bE' grouped under the following he3.( The Japanese scholar Professor H. and possibly also the first Rubj~ct in its form. embodies logical doctrines of a cruder form than those of the Nyaya-siitra The date of Ak~apada l\ may therefore be approximately fixed at a. Ju~t as Caraka .D. ANCIENT SCHOOL. Allahabad) .t the teachmgs. . 1 Ak~apada seems therefore to have flourished befor~ Nagarjuna (circa 250-320 A.a (verbal testimony). 16). tmd that. anumana (inference).of Buddha.te between 2QO A.apada into thp Anvik~iki· ?Jidya which in its final form wa:=. the compiler of the Nyaya-siitra.te between 300 A.yR. which cOll1prlses praty(lk~a (perception). which was criticised by Nagarjuna.) who employs many l0gical terms presumably from the Nyaya-sutra.. (Filosofia. and after O&raka whose Samhita compiled ctbout 78 A D.karnya. Of these.llude to Vljiiana-vad:. was the redactor of the Agnivesa-tant:ca o.Nyaya sutl'a '.

viz.va-sutra. nigraha-sthana" (the point of defeat or occasion for rebuke) was a technical term in the Caraka-samhita:. hetvfibhasa (fallacy) and nigrahasthCina (the point of defeat) are includer:. pari~a. 51 meanings of aptopadesa (reliable assertion). mind. Mahabharata. "We do not find the fiv('" parts combined together in. The grounds covered by the two sets of terms arc however not exactly identical.a (cavil). objects of sense.. it does not there refer specIally to the twelve objects enumerated in the N'yaya~siitra. as already shown) is mentioned in the sense of an object of knowledge. uttara" (rejoinder) and "hetvabhasa" (fallacy) is the same as" ahetu" (non-reason) mentioned in the Cal'aka-samhita. syllogism. pain. The term" nigraha" in the sense of . intellect. but not in th{'ir technical senses nor aH members of a.rilhitn. traHsmigration.~aya (doubt) 8Jee subsidiaries to vada in the carrying on of which the.naIiga· eutra and PaH Kathavatthnppalmru.sthana" att. and the C. In the Caraka-samhita vada as a substitute for katha (discourse) includes ialpa (wrangling) and vita't}q.\' are to be employed. fault.on) ex· plained in the Caraka-sarilhita..~a-'!)idhi (the method of debate) as explained in the Cataka·samhita. The term " prama~a" in the sense givf'n here was not widely used even in the days or Caraka (about 78 A.. body. which comprises the soul. The word.D) masmuch as he employed three terms. and pramarylt.sain. also in the Ramayal').'ras extensively used in the Pali literature. to signify the means of knowledge.. It covers the same ground as sthapana (demonstrati. SOIDe of the five parts seem to have been known bv nftme to the old Brahmanic writers as \ve11 as to the autho~s of the Jaina sthIT. The subject of vlida as treated in the Nyaya-siitra represent~ the 8ambha. .. aabda (word). senses. The categories of the Nyaya-siitra beginning with . The doctrine of "nigraha.SUBJECTS OF THE NYAYA. hetu. activlty. fruit. (2) Prameya-the object of knowledge.ya-siitra! but when it was introduced it incorporated in it "ahetu)) as explained in the Caraka-samhita.a. (4) Avaycwa-consists of five parts or members of a syllogism. and . and aitihya (tradition). The term "jati " in the sense of "analogue" or "futile rejoinder" does not occur in any work anterior to the Nya.-SUTRA. and Manu-samhita. Jati (analogue). Aupamya or upamanrz (comparison) included in the Tantra~ yukti and mentioned in the Jaina works is accepted here as a means of knowledge (pramarpa). {3) Vliria-a discussion.~1a. and release. It corresponds to Xtma vada of the An vlki!jdkI Though the word " prameya H in the sense of an object of knowledge occurs in the Carakasamhita. defeat" '. the form ot a syllogism before the composition of the Nys.ained a high development in the ~yayaHsutra. as explained in the Caraka-samhita. in the subject of vada "Jati " is the same as .ll'i1ka-sa.

The third category.hA M-I-. Robert Adamson in hi. I Va..ining th@ sixteen C'ategol'ies. THE ARRANGEMENT OF CATEGORIES IN THE NYAYA-SUTRA. he will have to enter upon (10) vada (discussiont whieft will necessarily assume the form of (11) jalpa (a wrangling) and (12) vita1J. etc. advances an antithesis. Dr. wh tIe expla. n there is a criticism of the Samkhya doctrine of intellect (buddhi) and the Raugata doctrine of momen1x1.... The first of the cate· gories is ( I) prama/Yj. 29.tion of the Nynya. t. chap.. I there is a review of the (Buddhist) docttine of voidne:ss (S-p. 9 . Nyliya·bhi~ya."' .i . .nllata) and the Vedant.. That the case is valid is further shown by an analysis of it into five parts called (7) avayavo. and (15) jati (analogues)."'.t t. . The case is then shown to rest on (6) siddhantas (tenets) which ure accepted by both the parties. Failing to establish his antithesis..52 INDIAN LOGIC.Hl~tory of Logic" (pP. chap. NYAYA-SASl'RA. e g.O'n .the Caraka-samhita.. which constitute the basis of a debate. (3) sarhsaya (doubt).a.. the exposure of which will bring about his (16) nigrahasthana (defeat) . .t/li (a cavil).. ".. Ballantyne in his transla. supply the thesis or case which a disputant is to prove.".. which refers to the objects of knowledge. noint out t. These two categories.a doctrine of the tranSfO['nHttion of Brahma (Brahma~pari­ 'r!ama-?:lida). (members).. While there is apparently no order among the topics of the Caraka-sarhhita. accordin~ to the commenThe categories repre· taries 1 on the Nyaya-sutra.-sutra. There is m the N'yaya~siitra an examination of various philosophical doctrines. which signifies the means of knowledge and the second is (2) prameya.. Having carried on (8) tarka (confutation) against all contrary suppositions the disputant affirms his case with (9) nir1J.tsyaYl\na in hi. and ViSva·nntha in his Nyaya-sutra-vrl ti . CHAP 1... The Nyaya-sutra treats of sixteen categories which comprise aU the topics of vlida-mnrga (the course of debate) as enumerated U1.riness (k~a'1!ika-vada). in Book III. systems of philosophy. supposed to sent thastages of s debate represent stages in the course of a debate between a disputant and his respondent... having roused a conflicting judgment about the case. in Book IV. ANCiEN'f SCHOOL. justify the gradual order Clf their succession. If his respondent. (14) chala (quibbles). and Dr. 165-IG(n.. not he 1ng satisfied with this process of demonstration. the disputant in pursuance of his (4) prayoiana (purpose) cites a parallel case called (5) dNtanta (a familiar instanoe) which is not open to such a doubt.hA..aya (certainty). there exists evidently a regular arrangement among the categories of the Nyaya-sutra The categories are. he will employ (13) hetvabha8a (fallacious reasons).

ya-sutra. definition (laks. definition tion (uddMa). THE PROCESS OF TREATMENT OF THE CATEGORIES. amination (parik/iii). 1-1-2). Book T of the Nyaya-sutra deals with the enunciation and definition of the sixteen categories. and ex. of the question whether the definition of a certain category is really applicable to it. defin'ition consists in setting forth that character of a category which differentiates it from other categories. 53 30.l the Nya. ).and examination. 1 Vatsyayana observes:- ~ "T~ 1tAifQl "fifi'll I ~~m ~'1{ ~r iffly I (Nv8ya-bbii~ya.ana. As pointed out by Vatsyayana. Enunciation is the mere mention of the categories by name. and examination is the settlement. while the remaining four books are concerned with a critical examination of the categories. .THE PROCESS OF TREATMENT. by reasoning. treats of itA categories through the prooesses of enunciaEnunciation.

(13) fallacy (hetvabkasu) .i"i'~·~i2l·l:.~. (IS) ~·W:. (6) CEi'-I9~' cha~a~ (member of a syllogism)~ (7) 9.1l::r!:l~'~l:lQ.TJ tshig-gidon bca-drug). (6) tenet (siddhanta) . comparison (upa mana).'' tshig-dor (quibble). reductio ad absurdum). (15) analogue (jiiti).. Benal'es. (~l:trilr'(. (9) a'3certainment (nir1}aya) . Ballantyne's translation of the Nyaya-sutras. (8) ifl:l"f'~ rtog-ge (corroboratmg a p. 133. (4) ".Ir~'Q brjod-pa (wrangling). THE CATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION. (3) doubt (sa1rh4aya). (11) l:. inference (an'umana).Z:. are the means of right knowledge. also Dr. and (16) o:. grub-pahi-I!-t.tn:.'qQ:'tq"i~ chad·pabi·g!la~ (a reason why one may be declared unfit to continue the contr<r versy). (7) members (avayava). also ~~tan'h ur. and (16) the point of defeat (nigrahasthana).~·'I§·~t.s of the Nyiya-sutra. gshal-bye (object of right cognition). (10) . 1 Vide . a full summary of its doctrines is given here.I' sun-hbyin-du-rgol-wa (cavil or reducing a proposition ad ab8urd~. (4) purpose (prayojanu) . Ak~apada says that supreme felicity.c.tm without caring to establish one's own view). !l In. and word or verbal testimony (sabda) . p. Content.gl:\'C! rtsod-pa (discusslon). summum bonum (n'i~dreyasa). (5) ". (12) ~iIi·Q. Perception (pratyak~a). part II.1 dgo~-pa (motive). (12) cavil (vitu1J. Bibliotheca Indioa series. 32.i) gpe (example). THE CATEGORIES: THEIR ENUNCIATION. Definitions of the sixteen categories are given below:(1) The Means of Right Knowledge (prama~a). Tibetan the sixteen categorles. (2) zq~I'.asa pada:rthalJ. (14) ~zq''(.:n.:~J::':l:l rgyu-ltar-~nan-wa (fallacious middle term). (14) quibble (chula).-s5tl'as of Gota-ma H translated by Dr..hah (established tenet).qii). poq.l'e. Allahabad.l. (10) discussion (vooa) .! 31. .-Vide Mah&vyutpatti.CHAPTER II. (15) ~zrr7t~ ltag-chod (evasive answer). The categorjes'Z are enumprated a~ follows'(1) The means of right knowledge (prama~a). (5) example (dr~tanta). (3) ~·'t64· the-tshom (doubt). (II) wrangling (ialpa). Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana In the" Sacred Books of the Hllldus n serle::!.oposltion by showing that its denial IS impossible. As the Nyaya-sutra iF! the foremost 'work on Nyaya-sastra. Mdo Go lobos 233-3 . The Nyaya. first four books. (2) the object of right knowledge (prameya). are designated respectively as follows:(1) dl"i'~ tshag-ma (source of right cognition). is attained by the true knowledge of the sixteen categories treated in his Nyayasutra. (8) confutation (tarka). (9) ZlJ5a'\'i2l'l:\tt'l'C! gtan-Ia-dwab·pa (demonstration or ascertainment).

\·zq5"i·~·i. that we can pOl'C'OIVO a thing although we may not k~ow Its name.~a. Whenever a thing is l'erc~ived: It.sya. Ml'lha· vYutpat. j~ produced D.t the name of It thmg IS not necessarily present and operative at the time when the thmg IS percEllved. [The Sanskrit Biitra daiining perception may also be tra. 'l'lms our perC'eptlOn of ct thing IS totally independent of lts name..p.from verbal representation.s follOWS : . and the essence of which is certainty. Th~ cannot ('()mpl'ehond our tfpl'ception unless we give a name to It. [which isl not contamed in the word.n~­ lated as follows : Perception i<:! knowledge which arises from the contact of a se'l::)e with its object.lrely Lll~tmct from it.. p . I?art ~~~. 134.. unnameable. It IS. however. pleaHul'e. accol'ding to th(' Hhil~.t 1--1-4 of Vtlt. Calcutta..valla. and which is non-erratic.\qt. tllere IS no perception entlreh' ft'eo. I In Tibetan the definition is stat-ed o.THE C<\TE(iORm~: 'J. It l~ therefore concluded tha. ttl-:) for Instance.don-gphrag-pa·la/S-byuu-wahi-t:1et!.apada dool:l not accept tll€ l allOWI view on the grounu. and l1on-errat..i'Q' 'f'fl Q~' l:I"~'. not perceptwll (. a man looking f.li!"i·ija:.. anti when we know the nflrno we pel celve the thing as ent.' mind Tlw KllO\df'dgc of the soul. as explained m the Bhiisya 1-1-4 of Viit&yayana. bping dptrrmiuato.·t:l~ .. 05 PerceptIOn 1 IH the knowledgp whieh aris('f:l from the intcrcour<. na'oe The thmg being inseparably connect~ wIth Its name.pa-bphrul. lJelerllmwle-' thi~ epithet dH)hll!luiHllP~ perception from indeteI'minette (douhtful) knowledgp.·Zi·"t.\.o.c with its object. Ak<.\ thell' llltetCOlll'Ht~ with the mind which. t 11<1 t the Imowledg0 of a thing dcrlvp<l through perc0pl1011 ha~ IlO COllH('ction \\lIth the name which the thing bears.pa-med-pa-!:t9g-paQl-bdag-iild. ]<. To eliminate such catJes the epithet non-err<:ttic has been used. being either Indeterminate (" ninrikalpaka n as "this is something") or determinate (" savika]paka " as "this is a Brahmn.eful 10 commumcatmg our perceptlOn to our fellow-men.hout the aid of language. II mOl'uu!Jlc-signlJle<.ic.ti. Bibhotheca Indica. Henqe there IS no pelceptlon . l:3ome ~ay that.:FINf'l'ION. pain. as N on-erratic-In summer the sun's rays coming in contact with earthly heat (vapour) qniver and appear to the E"yes of men as \\ater.~12l ~ ~ Q'i'tt.t.Il<. also ~§tan'hgyur .lo.·c:.blv accompamed by a name. The knowledge of water derived in this way is not perception..ted by Alexandor Csoma de Koros as follows: Perception IS cognition [which IS] produoed through contaqt between an organ of sense and its objt:lct." :Qwau-po-dan..whlCh I. His kllo\\ h'd!. Al! things have namo'3': th(:lro 1'3 nothmg (reVOlt! of a naml~.pa-.!. etc. Sen <:e-mcludeR t.uC'rtuin whether there is smoke OL du!'-t. series.ii~' Wc.'~~~·~iI2PWe.g}non-snm-gtan-dh-mpg. l"! pOI Celved bear mg a. \\'llIcb IFI of n doubtful charact('I' .. not mvaT. 1t al'U:i('~ ill fact \\ It. is a sensC'· ol'gn n.'lIEIR DE. ") ]. It has been transla. admitted that the name i'3 u..lt. tho pelceptIon of the thing Involves that of the name also.'om a dhtnlle(~ eallllot [lo.. not discrepant frorn its object.i'I:rQ.p of a sem.

a religious. e g. 'a priori.56 INDIAN LOGIC) ANCIENT SCHOOL.g.patti) . (2) The Objects of Right Knowledge (prameya). ' Word or verbal testimony is the instructive assertion of a reliable person. not commonly seen" (samano/at<> lldrfta). takes the last to be .. arya or mleccha) who as an expert in a certain matter is willing to communicate his experiences of it. or one infers the pt'esence of water from the presence of cranes. Inference is knowledge which is preceded by perception.he knowledge of a thmg which is not commonly seen. comes and tens him that the river is ear. Rumour (aitm.lily fordable: the assertion of the old man is to be accepted as a means of right knowledge called word or verbal testimony. This is" knowledge derived through comparison. which he interprets as t. one seeing a river swollen infE'rs that there was rain.ya) . teacher's assertIOn that one conquers heaven by performing horse-sacrIfices. e go observing afiectlOn. presu~ptiol1 (arthfi. . Having recollected what he heard he institutes a comparison. Suppose a young ~an coming to the si?e of ~ river cannot ascertain whether the river IS fordable or not. e. senses (indriya) . known. one infers that it posse'3ses also a tail. e. II. by which he arrives at the conviction that the. 'A reliable person' IS one (a r~i. NYAYA-SASTRA. and Immed\ately an old experienced man of the locality. Wold is of two kinds) viz (1) that whioh refers to matter which is seen. body (iarira) . e g. Comparison is the knowledge of a thing through its similarity to another thing previously weI). animal which he sees is b08 gavaeU8. probability (sambhava) and non-eXIstence (abkava).. averSion and other qualities one mfers that there is a subc. the first commentator on the Nyaya-sutra.' 'a posteriori. objects of O . and (2) that ~hich refers to matter which is not seen.' A priori (purvavat) is the knowledge of effect dE-rived from the perception of its cause. one seeing clouds infers that there will be rain . a physician's assertion that physical strength is gained by taking butter. A man hearing from a forester that a bos gavaeu8 is like a cow resorts to a forest where he sees an animal like a cow. e g. who has no enmity against him. The soul (atma) . 'Commonly seen' (samanyato d?'~ta) is the knowledge of one thing derIved from the perception of another thing with which it is commonly seen or seen together. seeing a beast possessing lwrns. and i!:' of three kinds.g. CHAP. are not separate means of right knowl~dge as they are included in the four stated above.' and' commonly seen.tance called soul]. viz. [Viitsyayana.4 posteriori (8e~avat) is the knowledge of cause derived from the perception of its effect.

colour. Desire is a sign which proves the existence of "soul. and emancjpation (apavarga). onf soul. pain and cognition are the marks of the soul.. light. and sound the quality of ether is the object of the ear." A soul. pleasure. etc. eye. Intellect is the same as apprehension or knowledge. the eye as light. whioh consists jn a series of births and deaths. the tongue a. having experienced pleasure in a certain thing. according to the Nyaya-bhasya and Nyaya-vattika. tongue. Transmigration. Desire. de8ires again to acquire it through recognition of the same. Now. etc. The nose. Perception does not arise merely from the contact of a sense-organ with it. 57 fault. Smell (odour). senses and sentiments. the mind. inasmuch as the soul feels aversion against a thing from whioh it suffered pain Similarly volitIOn. and ether-these are the elements. The nose is of the same nature as earth. while their mutual separation is its death. water. It is also the site of senses for the latter act wen or ill. aoccording as the former is in good or bad order Sentiments which comprise pleasure and pain are also locate<l in th€ " body which experiences them. Body is the site of gestures inasmuoh as it strives to reach what is desirable and to avoid what is hateful. is the source of all our sufferings ·When our desert is completely exhausted. aversion. etc. proved on the basiq of recognition involved in our desire. Smell whioh is the prominent quality of earth 18 the objeot of the nose. which are produced from elements. The mark of the mind is tha. The connection of the soul with a body is its hirth. pain (dulpkha) . Aversion is another sign.. These are the qualities of the substance called soul. skin and ear are the senses. (do~a). air. The soul is an eternal entity which is from time to time connected with a body suitable to its desert (merit and demerit). taste (savour).s object> but it requires also a conjunction of the mind.t there do not arise in the soul more acts of knowledge than one at a time. attain:=s emancipation or release (mok~a). wlour the prominent quality of light is the object of the eye. Earth. volition. are also signs or the soul. fruit (phala) . touch and sound which are qualities of the earth. aversion. The body is the site of gestures. 1-1-10. touch the prominent quality Qf air is the object of the skin. are objects of the senses. . It is impossible to perceive two things simultaneously. the skin as air. transmigration (prelyabhava) . The existence of soul is thus. are the (principal) objects of right knowledge. freed from transmigration. and ear as ether. taste the prominent quality of water is the object of the tongue.THE CATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION.s water.

There are three kinds of action. A soul. (C EmanCIpation or release is the absolute deliverance from pain. (2) protecting. II which is an atomic substance. and (4) reading sacred book" J1ental actions "hich are bad are :-(1) malice. CHAP. which is no longer subject to transmigration. is the cause of its experiencing pleasme and pain. Vocal actions which are bad are :-(1) telling a lie. It is the enjoyment of pleasure 01' suffering of pai'n. which consists in the souPs leaving one body and taking another.-~peaking the truth. It is affliction which everyone desires to avoid. ')"11e soul attains emancipation as soon as there is an end of the body. Transmigration.ncc to the soul.bout the precise . A~CIENT SOHOOI. Pain is that which causes uneasineRs. (2) generositv. nnd (4) indulging in frivolous talk Vocal actions which ~'\. Mental actions which are aood are -(I) compassion. viz bodny. All activity and faults end in producing pleasure which is acceptable and pain w'hich is fit only to be avoided. Deat. is freed from tlll pains. They are affection (attachment). (3) sbndering. NYAYA-SASTRA. (2) using harsh language. Bodily actions which are good a.re (food are . aversion. Fruit is the thing produced by activity and faults. (3) Doubt (sanibsaya). The Sanskrit Butra defining pain" may also be translated as followE? : Pain is the mark of hindra. Faults are those which cause activity.. vocal. and consequently of pleasure and pain. and (3) clevotion. mind and body begm their action. which js a. it is a series of births and deaths Birth is the connection of a soul with a body which includE:>s the sense·organs. hence there cannot occur more acts of perception than one at a time Activity is that which makes the voice. (2) stealing.re :-(1) giving. (3) and servmg. and mental each of which may be subdivided as good or had Bodily ~ctionb which are bad are :-( 1) killing. intellect. (2) speak· ing what is useful. mind.h is the soul's separation from them. conflicting judgment a. and stupidity TransmigratIon means rebirths As already explained. and sentiments. (3) speaking what iR pleclAant. cannot b3 conjoined with morc than one sense-organ at a time. and (3) committing adultery. (2) covetousneSI::i and (3) scepticism.58 INDIAN LOGlC. Doubt.

THE OATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION. It refers to the thing \\lhich one endeavours to attain or avoid . A question arises. while another system states that it does not." the example is a kitchen in which fire and smoke abide together. Recagnition of propert1:es not common-e. to the satisfaction of an 'ordinary man as well as an acute in vestigator ( 6) Tenet (siddhanta).t are non~ eternal nor in atoms which are eternal. vVith regard to the general proposition" wherevBf there is smoke there is fire. PU1~pose' is that with an eye to which one proceeds to act . nor on dry land 'vhere jt does not exi&t. lrrer. Gonfiictmg te8t~m()ny-e. or of properties not common to any of the objects) from conflicting testimony. one questions whether it is eternal or not. A tenet 1~ a dogma resting on the authority of a certain school. hypothesis. or implicati.. we perceive water in the tank where It really exists. hearing a sound. etc.g. (1) Recognition of common properties-e. but water appears also to exist in H. An example is the thing about which an ord.inary man and an expert entert&in the same opinion. 59 common ~o many objects. A rlogma of all the 8chool8 is a tenet which is not opposed by any school and is claimed by at least one school .g. merely by study one cannot tleci<le whether the soul exists. (5) Example (dr~tanta. tha.A man collects fuel for the purpose of cookmg his fooa. beast. Irregularity of rlUn-perceptwn-e. mirage where it really does not exist.on. for the property of soundness abides neither in man. and 'an implied dogma' (abkyupagama). for one system of philosophy affirms that it does. .). A question vrises.g. and from irregularity of perception and non-perception. or also when It does exist (4) Purpose (prayojana). 'a dogma peculiar to some school' (prati-tantra) . seeing in the twilight a (2) (3) (4) (5) tall object we cannot decide whether it is a man or a post for the property of tallness belongs to both. 'a hypothetical dogma' (adhikara1}a) . The tenet is of four kinds owing to the distinction between ' a dogma of aU the schools' (saJ'va-tanlra) . whether \Vater is not perceived only when it does not exiBt. we neither perceive water in the radish where it really exists. whether water is perceived only when it actually exists or even when it does not exist.g. .g.ularity of perception-e.

which is the reason given. A hypothetical dogma is a tenet which if accepted leads to the accep· tance of another tenet. whatever is smoky is fiery. (7) Members of a Syllogism (avayava). e.ive) character of the example.ogma is a tenet which is not explicitly declared a'S such. e.60 INDIAN LOGIC.riably gOE'S N. because it can recognize one and the same object by seeing and touching" If you accept this tenet you must also have accepted the following :-(1) That the senses are more than one. a reason (hetu). etc. (2) tha. The members (of a syllogism) are signalised by a proposition (prati. because it (the hill) is smoky. Here "kitchen U is a familiar instance which possesses fire. II. A reason is the means for proving what is to be proved through the homogeneous or heterogeneous (affirmative or negat.M) .a) . e. e. Here " smoke H is the reason. . CHAP. A dogma peculiar to 80me school is a tenet \\. an application of the example (upanaya). A homogeneou8 (or affirmative) example is a familiar instance which is known to possess the property to be proved. the discussion whether sound is etenlal or non·eternal presupposes that it is a substance. (3) that the soul derives its knowledge through the channels of the senses.B.-An affirmative example may: according to the Nyaya-bha~ya. which being similar to the m~or term (subject) possesses the property of that term as copresent WIth the reason. "A thing cannot come into exi~tence out of nothing" --thIS is a peculiar dogma of the Samkh yas.s n.g the hill is fiery. (4) that a substance which is distinct from its qualities is the abode of them. familiar instance. ANOmNT SCHOOL~ NYAYA-~ASTRA. and which im· plies that this property is invariably contained in the reason given. and wit!:t smoke. an explanatory example (udaharatz. A proposition is the statement of what is to be proved.hich if::.t each of the senses has its particular object.g. im~lies that fire inva. The existence of five elements or five objects of sense is a tellet which is accepted by all the schools. but which follows from the examination of particulars concerning it.g. but rejected by (lpposite schools. 1-1-36> be defined a. and a statement of the conclusion (nigamana). An implied d. accepted by similar schools.g. "There is a soul apart from the senses. as a kitchen.

he example have been mentioned Conclusion-Therefore the hill is fiery. as a lake Here the lake is a familiar instance which is known to be devoid of fire. Application is the winding up.er the reason has been mentioned. 1 which is carried on for ascertaining the real char/acter of a thing of which the character is not known." occurs when the example is of a negative character. (ii) Rea8on-Because it is smoky (iii) Example-Whatever is smoky is fiery.'l'RE C. Oonclusion is the re-st. Negative application-This hilI is "not so" (no t smoky). C hypothetical .'" occurs when the example is of an affirmative charaoter. viz. and implies that absence of fieriness is incompatible with the 8m. <i> The five members may be fully set forth as follows:(i) Proposition-This hill is fiery.tion is of two kinds: (l) affirmat1've.s (or negative) example is a familiar instance which is devoid of the property to be proved. It is the confirmation of the proposition after the reason and t. (8) Confutation (tarka). wIncll is expressed by the phrase" not so. . Applica.g. which is the reaf':on. to undergo transmigration.' reasoning. In ascertaining the character we reason as follows: If the soul were noneternal it would be impossible for it to enjoy the fruits of its own actions. whatever is not.atement of the proposition aft.oke. 'I Confutation. which is expressed by the word "so. (v) Concl'll3ion-Therefore this hill is fiery. fiery is not smoky. and which impUes that the absence of this property is incompatible with the reaRon given. The negative appUM cation. with reference to thE:' example. and to attain final emancipation.ATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION • 61 . of what is to be proved as being s9 or not so. is not known. whether it is eternal or non-eternal. and (2) negative. But such a conclusion is absurd: such possibilities are known to belong to the soul: thereforet we must admit that the soul is eternal.' etc. e. as a kitchen (homogeneous or affirmative). is reasoning which reveals the character by showing the absurdity of all contrary characters.' • reductio ad absurdum.' 'reasoning. The affirmative application. Atfirmatil'€ application-" So" is this hill (smoky).A heterogeneQU. Is the soul eternal or non-eternal 1 Here the real character of the soul. (IV) Application-" So" is this hill (smoky)-(affirmative). I Parka may be rendE"red a:1so as • argumentation.

for instance. Therefore soul is non-existent (conclusion) Discutient-The ~cripture vlhich is a means of right knowledge declares the existence of soul.62 IN DIAN LOGIC. II Ascertalnment is the determInation of a question throngh the removal of douht. Because it is not perceptible by any of our senses (reason). ANCIENT SCHOOL. and are supported or condemned by any of the meanR of right knowledge t and by confutation. Soul is not so. doubt must precede ascertainment. as a hare's horn (positive example). But in the case of investigation (inference). that is. it w. discussion (vada) which aims at ascertaining t. of two opposite theses which are each analysed in the form of five members. and ca'vil (vitandii) which aims at finding mere faults. Whatever is not perceptible by any of our senses is nonexistent. Opponent-There is no soul.tiol1 or controversy (katha) i~ the adoptIOn of a side or thesis by a disputant. Therefore soul is existent (conclusion) Opponent-Soul is non-existent (proposition). but opposed by the other party His doubt is not removed until by the applicatIOn of reason hE' can vindicate one of the parties.ciousness. Di~cutient-Tf thete \\'€ 're no ~oHl. soul is an abode of consciousness (negative application). It is of three kinds. disputa. Discussion is the adoption.0uld not be p~s~dblfl to .lw t.rnth. :Because it is an abode of coltSciousness (reaqon). by hearing two opposite sides. A discutient is one who engages him~elf in a disputation as a means of seeking the truth An instance of discussion is given below Discutient-There is soul.. NYAYA-SASTRA (9) AscertaInment (m:rr)aya).he authority of scriptures. without deviation from the establiRhed tenets. A pf'rson wavers and doubts If cert<1in st£1tement:-. Opponent-The scripture (of certain ROctS) denier:. A dialogue. advanced to hlm are supported by one of two partIes. by two partie=. 'Vhatever is not existent is not an abode of conf:.in things directly by t. as a hare's horn (negative example). CHAP.qling (jalpa) which aims at gaining victory. In the case of perception things are ascertained directly. the existence of soul. wran. (l0) DiscussIOn (vada). The process by which the vinuicat10n IS effected is called ascertainment Ascertainment is not.ve aRcerta. . and itR opposite one by hi"3 opponent. So also . however in an cases preceded by doubr. Soul is so (is not perceptible any of our s€ 'uses) (positive application). Discutient-Soul is existent (proposition). viz.

is the defence or attack of a proposition in the manroer aforesaid by quibbles. pervaded one . Conclusion-Therefore sound is non-eternal. and other processes which deserve rebuke.ve hold. and the mistimed {kaliitita}. the counterquestioned (sadhyaaama).nd t~ltL~ sound is nOlleternal. viz. Wranghng. Therefore there IS sou] (11) Wrangling (ialpa). the controversial (prakarana-sama). Example-'Vhatever is intangible is eternal a~ atoms. that there are eternal things. Enatic reason-Because it is intangible. being indIfferent whether the arguments which he employs. Fallacies of ranson are the erratic (savyabhicara).here have been drawn two opposite conclusions.). analogues. The reason (or mlddle term) is erratIC when It IS not. 63 Opponent-If there were soul. aims only at victory. Erratic reason-Because it is intangible Example-Whatever is intangible is non-eternal. the contradictory (viruddha. that everybody enjoys plea~ure or suffers pain accordmg to his own actlOns. etc. (12) Oavil (vita'YJ-q. Application-Ro is sound (intangible). engaged in a disputation. The erratu. as cognition. t~lat sound i~ eterna. IS the reason which lec'1ds to more conclusions than An instance of the erratic reason is given below :Proposition-Sound is eternal.ngihle) t.THE CATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION. A wrangler 18 one who.a) Cavil is a kind of wrangling which consists in mere attacks on the opposite side A caviller does not endeavoUL' to establish any tJung. Discutient-The doctrine of soul harmonises well with the various tenets which . but confines himself to mere carping at the: arguments of hi~ opponent (13) Fallacy (netvabhasa).l. support his own contention or that of his opponent provided that he can make oilt a pretext for bragging that he has taken an active part in the disputation. Conclusion-Therefore sound is etermtl. ApplicatlOl1-S0 is sound (intangible). Here from the reason (intu. a. there would be no change of cognitions. which aims at gaining victory. viz. Again: Proposition-Sound is non-eternal.

and the sound must.kes place at a subsequent moment when the union has ceased. Intaugible' is pervaded neither by' eternal' nor by 'non-eternal. ANCIENT SOHOOL. the analogy between colour and sound is not complete. - . therefore. the manifestation takes place just at the time when the jar comes into union with the lamp_ As the time of their rna. Hence sound is durable. for instance.erm. after the analogy of the colour.he major term and middle term. NYAYA-SASTRA. Proposition-A pot is produced. That which possesses quality and motion is a ~uhstance. but keeps the parties in suspense as before. and to continue to exist after the union has ceased.son-Because it possesses motion. In t. . however. . . be presumed to have existed before the union took place. as per vader and pervaded. J>roposition-8hadow is a BU bstance. when there iq no connection uetwE'en t.64 INDIAN LOGIC. ~ The controversial or balancing the point at issue is a reason which is adduced to arrive at a definite conclusion while it is reallv one which can give rise to mere suspense as to the point Proposition-Sound is non-eternal.station of salIDd does not take vlace at the time when the drum comes into union with the rod. Proposition-Sound is durable. '" . M·istimed reason-Because it is manifested by union. Rea. bv the major t.' The Oontradictory is the reason which opposes what is to be established. The mistimed is the reason which is adduced when the time is past in which it might hold good. The colour of a jar is manifested when the jar comes into union with a lamp. but tt tn. as a colour. lIenee the reason stands as much in need of proof as the proposition Itself.is eternaL HAre the reason i~ contradictor v because that which is eternal is never produced. The counter-questioned or balancing the question i~ a reason which not being different from what is to be proved stands in llE'ed of proof for itself. Similarly.Reason-Because it is not possessed of the attribute of eternality. n. the reason is mistimed. the sound of a drum is manifested when the drum comes into union with a rod. This is a oounter·questioned reason or a reason which balances the question. (Son:e intnpret the aphorism as follows: The mistimed is a reason which jg adduced In a wrong order flmong the five members. Oontradictory reason-Because it . To say that shadow possesses motion is the same as to say that it is a substance. if the reason is stated . CHAP.nifestation is ~ifferent. The reason adduced here is mistimed. but the colour existed before the union took place. and will continue to exist after the union has ceased.he case of colour. because the manife. The reason that" sound is not possE'8sed of the attribute of etet'nality" does not throw any new light. that IS.

md 1:iceversa.he sense of "nine. 65 for a word bOd." An objector replies: "it is impossible for scaffolds to cry out. It i~ of three kinds. Here the word nava.her hand. and quibble in respect of a meta. Analogue t also called an analogous rejoinder or far-fetchf'd . A quibbler replies: "this boy is not certainly nava-kambala (pmisessed of nine blankets) for he has only one blanket. quibble in respect of a gentls (samanyudhala). by taking it literaHy while it was u~ed metaphorically.phor (u'pacara-chala). A speaker says: "this boy is na'/Ja-kambala (possessed of a new blanket).re BrahmaI.l as.las. but it was ascribed to "this" palticular BrahJnaI)a who lived long enough in the world to render it possible £01' him to pursue studies and acquire good morals Quibble in respect of a 'metaphor consists in denying the propel' meaning of a word.'I'HE CATEGORIES: THEIR DEFINITION. (14) Quibble (chala).v..f'S its logltimate connection with another word (In a San'3krlt sentence) even if they are placed at a dIstance from each other.. . consists in wilfully taking the term in a sense other than that intended by the speaker '\\"ho happened to use it ambiguousl. A speaker says. and. on the ground that It belongs to a certam genus which is very wide. A speakel' says: 0 the scaffolds cry out.s." An object or replies' "it is impossible.. for they are inanimate object." Here the objector is a quibbler) for he l\:new well that the word " :-3c~tffolds" was used to signify those standing 011 the scatlolds. qUibble in respect of a term (viik-r:hala) . proximity 1.. (15) Analogue (jati). H this Brahma~a is possessed of learning and conduct. for how can this person be inferred to be pOBsessed of learning and conquct from his being merely a Brahma:Qa 1 There are little boys who a. even tho clos6'3t. yet not possessed of learning and conduct. Quibble is the opposition offered to a proposition by the assumption of an alternative Ineaning. analogy. viz. whICh is ambiguous was used by the speaker in the sense of "new/' but has been wilfully taken by the quibbler in t. for he knew well that possession of learning and conduct was not meant to be an attribute of the whole class of Brah maJ." Quibble in Te?pect of a genus. MOleover the plaolOg of members in a \vorng ordf'r IS noticed in the Nysya~utra. a Ylitgraha-sthana called aprlipla-kala (mopportune)]. a. on thfl at." Here the objector is a quibhler. consists in offering opposition founded on mere similarity or dissimilaritv .."> of no use If the words are dlsconnected In their sense. Quibble in respect of a term. oonsists in asserting the impossi· bility of a thing which is reaUy possible.

unlike ether.atever 18 a ~a. bears similaritv to ether as being all-pervadmg. but to turn him out or quit his company. it. rebuking him as a block-head or a knave." .uditory perce tion" and" not eternal. jf the soul is inacth:e because. (quality). and there is nothing left for his opponent.n~l because. it is dissimilar to a pot ~ Tp. or wilfully misunderstands. Opponent-But the evidence of touch disproves such a state ment. If a person begins to argue in a way which betrays his utter ignorance. l or again: Disputant. He is quite unfit to be argued with.arguments of the opponent.t of union is not necessarily active. as an object of auditory perceptil)~./"1 a product. !l::r'he OPPOSltlon 18 futile because It overlooks the disconnection between t~e mlddle term and the absence of the major term. bu~ wanting in the . it is of no avail to employ counter~arguments. Opponent-If sound is nOllRete. A pOint of defeat. why IS It not etefIlal because. 3. CHAP. and yet persists in showing that he understands well. because It bpars only a farfetched analogy to that of the disputant. why IS It not active because it bears similarity to a pot as being a seat of union" 1 The reason of the opponellt is futile. II.. Another instance: Dispntant-Fire is not hot. for his reason (which admits only quality) opposes his proposition (which admits both quality and substance). because there is nothing except colour. Whatever is allpervadmg 18 mac~lye~ ~ut wh. also called a clincher. A person who argues in the above way is to be rebuked as a fool. as etlef. 1 The opposition is futile. an occasion for reb11k Por a place of humiliation. A di:::!putant says: "the soui i:::.e reason employed by the opponen~ is futile because the analogy which it bears to that of the disputant-Is far-fetched (16) A Point of Defea. NYAYA-S1STRA.-Sound is non-eternal. because. .t (nigrakaathana). 'because it overlooks the universal connection between the middle term and the major term which is existent in the arguments of the dis?ut!l'n~. l" mg His opponent replies: . etc. An instance of the point of defeat:Whatever is not quality is substance. it is a product.66 INDIAN LOGIC. it is dissimilar to ether." but there is no such discollllectlon between H an object of a. There is an utter disconnect!on between" a product U and u not-non-eternal. ANOIE~T SOHOOL. arises when one misunderstands or does not understand at all. inactive beCltl1Se it is all-pervad.

(8) balancing the question (sadhya-8ama) . like a pot. IS .on the ~Ueged . (I) Balancing the homogeneity. because it is incorporeal..ble (avar1)ya 8ama) . 33 THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. (18) balancing the non-difference (avise?Ursama). The analogues are as follows: (1) Balancing the homogeneity (sudharmya-8ama) . (13) balancing the non-produced (anutpatti-sama) . (11) balancing the\infinite regression (prasanga-sama). in order to gain the confidence of the assembled people. (6) balancing the unquestiona. (4) b~lancing a deficit (apakarf!a sa. (3) balancing an excess (utkar?a-sama). viz. (12) balancing the counterexample (pratidNtania-sama) . (7) balancing the alternative (vikalpa sama) .reason (ahetu-sama). argues a':l follows:Sound is non-eternal. (16) balancing the non. (10) balancing the mutual absence (aprapti~8ama). (5) balancing the questionable (var1)yasama). like the ether. on the groundof both bemg products. The argument.ma). patti-sama). I do not say that fire is not hot. (17) balancing the presumption (artha. because it is a product. the opposition. against an argument based on a homogeneous example. (23) balancing the eternal (nitya-sama) and (24) balancing the effeot (karya-sama). (15) balancing the point at issue (pl'q-kara1J. futile as it is. is based on the h0n:-0 geneity of sound with the non-eternal pot. says-" 0 learned audience." A certain person. ThIS sort ot OppOSItIOn. (20) balancing the' perception (upalabdki-sama) . is said to be based on the homogeneity of sound wi~h the etel'nal sk:z. will he called "balancing the homogeneity.a-sama). to prove the non-eternaHty of sound. It is only meet that the opponent should quit the company of a man who argues in this way. (14) balancing the doubt (sa'lhfaya-sama) .gr?un? of both being incorporeal. . (2) balancing the heterogeneity (vaidharmyasama) . listen.'rHE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. viz." etc. A certain other person offers the following futile opposition:Sound is eternal. (19) balancing the demonstration (upapatti-sama). (9) balancing the co-presence (prapti-sama) . (21) balancing the non-perception (anupalabdhi-sama) . 67 Disputant. sound is eternal. (22) balancing the non-eternal (anitya-8ama). sound is non-eternal.-If. one offers an opposition merely based on the same kind of example. The opposition. futl1e as It 18.

because there are things. I The opposition 18 futile because it is based on a mere homogeneous example. because it is incorporeal. like a pot"the homogeneous example H pot" exhibits a universal connection between productivity and non·eternality. as the ether. futile as it is. CHAP. because it is a product. is called "balancing the heterogeneity. to prove the non-eternafity of sound. as a pot. because it is a product. like a pot. This SOl't of opposition. futile as it is. to prove the nOll~eternality of sound. II. such as intellIgence or knowledge. is said to be based on the heterogeneity of sound from the not-incorporeal pot.:. :. which are in~ . whatever is not eternal is not incorporeal. because there are thmg&.~ (3) BalanclDg an excess. argues as follows:Sound is non-eternal. 2 In the oppositH'm " sound 1S eternal. one offers an opposition based on an additional character thereof.l (2) Balancing the heterogeneity." which aims at showing an equality of tlie arguments of two sides only in respect of the homogeneity of examples employed by them. sound is non-eternal. ANCIENT SOHOOL. whIch are incorporeal but not eternal. sound is eternal. NYAYA-SASTRA. 1n the argument-" sound 1S non-eternal." the heterogeneous example H pot" does not. becanse it 1:. whatever is eternal is not a product. like a pot (which is non-eternal as well as corporeal). A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus:Sound is eternal." which aims at showing an equality of the arguments of two sides merely in respect of the heterogeneity of examples employed by them. viz. all products being non eternal. because it is a product. . 1S l". but in the opposition •• sOtLnd is eternal. argues as follows :-Sound is non-eternal. futile as it is. exhibit a unlVersal disco~nection bet\veen incorporeality aud absence of eter~ nahty.sed 011 the heterogeneity of sound from the eternal ether. the opposition. beca.1 incorporeal. A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus:Sound is non-eternal (and must be corporeal)." A certain person.Iuch as mtelhgence or knowledge. called "balancing the homogeneity. The argument} vi~. whatever is not eternal is not incorporeal. The opposition. the opposition. as a pot. will be called "balancing an excess. will be caned" balancing the heterogeneity.-If against an argument based on a certain cha$cter of the exaluple.use it iii incorporeal hke the sky" the homogeneous example " sky" does not exhibit a universal connectIon between incorporeality and eternalIty.68 INDIAN LOGIC. because it is a product." A certain person.If against an argument based on a heterogeneous example one offers an opposition based merely on the same kind of example.

becaus p it is a product.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE." A certain persoD.ad on a certain character of the example." which aims at showing an equality of the arguments of two sides in respect of a certain character wanting in the example (and supposed <. to prove the non-eternality of sound. because it is a product. The equality alleged to exist between "sound" and "pot" is not warranted by the reason (viz. and if sound is still held 'to be audible. pot. wiU be called" balancing a deficit. futile as it is. because it is a product. It is based on the false supposition of a complete equality of the subject and the example. such as intelligence or knowledge. like a.. This sort of futile opposition is called "balancing an excess. the opposition. like a pot (which is non-eternal and not audible). (4) Balancing a deficit.-If against an argument ba. Thus the eqnaHty supposed to exist between the pot and sound in respect of corporeality. which are products but not corporeal.. argues as follows :Sound is non-eternal. futile as it is.. like a pot. the opposition. it must also be corporeal like it: if it is not corporeaL IE't it be aI&o not. is not warranted by the l'eason (viz. argueR as follows :Sound is non-eternal. being a product) because there are things. one offers an opposition based on another character wanting in it. (5) Balancing the questionable -If one opposes an argument by maintaining that the character of an example is as questionable as that of the subject. let it be also not non-eternal. it cannot be audible) for a pot is not audible." which aims at showing an equality of the arguments of two sides in respect of an additional character (possessed by the example a.nd attributed to the subject). wHl be called "balancing the questionable. there is indeed a great difference between them in other characters.onsequently to be wantingalso in the subject). non-eternal. The opponent alleges that if sound is non-eternal like a pot. to prove the non-etemality of sound. Though there is no denial of an equ~lity of the subject and the example in certain characters." A certain person. A oertain other person offers the following futile opposition ' Sound is non-eternal (and cannot be audible). 69 The opponent alleges that if sound is non-eternal like a pot. being a product). rrhis sort of futile opposition is called "balancing a deficit. .

\NCIEN'£ SCHOOL. because it is a product. the opposition. why is not that of the pot too called in question. NYA'YA-SASTRA. to prove the non·eternalit~T or sound. The opponent alleges that if the non-eternality of Bound IS called in question. because it is a product. A ce"ttain other person offers a futile opposition thus :A pot is non~eternal. and thus puts an end to all kinds of inferenee-..70 INDIAN LOGIC. It puts an end to all kinds of inference by ignoring the difference between the subject and the example altogether. A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus :-Sound is eternal and formless. why is not that of souna too held to be so." . This sort of futile opposition is caned "balancing the questionable:' which aims at showing an equality of the arguments of two sides in respect of the questionable character of the subject as lovell as of the example. to prove the non·eternality of sound. II. if the non-eternality of a pot is Ito bt:. as the potr and sound are both products? This sort of futile opposition is called "balancing the unquestionable." which aims at showing the equality of the arguments of two sides in respect of the unquestionable charac~ tel' of the example as well as of the subject.tive character to the su~€'ct and tl1e example. the opposition. futile as it i8~ will be called" balanoing the alternative. is a product. will be called" balancing the unquestionable. CHAP." A certain person. (7) Balancing the alternative. because it is a product. (6) Balancing the unquestionable. . argues as follows :Sound is nOD-eternal. It ignores totally the difference between the subject and the example. like a pot. argues as follows :' Sound is non-eternal. The opponent alleges that. ' because it is a product. like a pot. like sound. . as the pot and sotmd are both products ~ His object is to set aside the argument on the ground of its example being of a questionable character. A certain other person offers a futIle opposition thus :A pot is non-eternal. unquestionable.-If one opposes an argument by alleging that the chara~ter of the subject is as unquestionable as that of the example. because it. futile as it is. A certain person. like a pot (which is non-eternal and has forms). --If one opposes an argument by attributing alterna. like sound.

one offers an opposition based on the same_kind of co-presence.d This lead<:. argues as follows : The hill has fire. being a product) (8) Balancing the question. This sort of opposition is called H balancing the question. being eternal) which h:.rgument to a standstill by alleging the reciprocity of the subject and thE" example It is based on thE': false supposition that the example stands exactly on the same footing as the subject. Sound is to be proved non-eternal by the example of a pot. a "pot" being known to all as a product and non-eternal. Olle requires proof for its llon-eternality as much as the other does.ernal by the example of soun.because it is a product. Sound is non-eternal. The example does not in fact stand in need of proof a<:l to its characters." which attempts to bring an a. to prove the non-eternality of sound. yet one has form and the other is formless: why on the same principle is not O-lle (the pot) non-eternal and the other (sound) eternal? This sort of futile opposition is called "balancmg the alternative. It introduces an equality between the pot and sound in respt'ci of a character (viz. futile as it is. . like a pot." which aims at showing an equality of the arguments of two sides ill respect of the alternative characterR attributed to the subject and the example.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. 71 The opponent alleges that the pot and sound are both products. (9) Balancing the co-preaence. A cer~in other person offers a futile. will be called" balancing the question. will. Hence the opposition is futile.-If against an argument based on the co-presence of the reason and the predicate. the pot anci l:5ound being both products. to a reciprotJity of the pot (example) and sound (subject). . be called" balancing the co-presence." A certain person. not warranted by the ren. 1'he opponent aUeges that. on account of the reason being non-distin guished from the predicate. and the pot is toJ?e proyed non-et. futile a"J it is.opposition thus :A pot is non-etel'naL because it is a product" like sound. to prove that there is fire in the hill. resulting in no definite conclusion as to the eternality or noneternality of sound. the opposition. " A certain person. because it has smoke like a kitchen. an argument by alleging that the example requires proof as much as the subjeot does. argues as follows : .-If one opposer:. the opposition.~on (viz.

then the fire could be as mnch the reason for the Rmoke as the smoke for the fire. "Balancing the co. and the fire to be the predicate. OHAP. like a kitchen. just a lamp cannot exhibit a thing which is not within its reach. 0::Seeing that an exorcist can dest. according to the opponent.euce. Thi8 sort of futilE" opposition is called" balancing the co-presence. A certain person. establish the -predicate withmJt.\T of RltE'~. This sort or futile oppo~itjon is called H ba lancing th.e mutual absence H which aims at bringing ~n argument to a close on the alleO'ed ground of thE' mutual absence of the reason f}nd t. it is affirmed that a thing is accomplished somet. the opposition.• . NYAYA-SASTRA. because it has fire. on account of the reason b(>ing non-conducive to the predicate. be called "balancing 'the mutual absence . like a kitchen.blish the latter. If a reaRon unconnectE"d with the predicate could eRtA. futile as it is.e. being conneqted with it. lS therefore a totally futile opposition. Seeing that a potter cannot produce a pot wit.) occupied by the fire or lR absent from that site.ile opposition thus:- The hill has smokE'.--If against an argument follows:- based on the mutual absence of the reason and the predicate. If the smoke hi present with fit-e at the same slte.mlCS by the cause being pref'ent at its sIte.'· which attaches an undue import~nce to the proximit. 'file arguer has taken the smoke to be the reason. no criterion to chstinguish the reason from the predica. The smoke is.he 'P't'edicat. ont" offers an opposition based on the same kind of mutual absence.te.roy persons bY' administf>ring spells from a distance." The reason cannot.ion is indeed absurd. in Ius opm ion aR much a reason for the fire as the fire for the smoke.hout gettjng clay \vithin his l"each.>' which aims at stopping an argument on the a. IL A certain other persoll offers a futile opposItion thns'Thp.72 INDIAN LOQIO. (10) Balancing the mutual absence.1~e as . ANCIENT SOHOOL'. al'gnes as The hill has fire because it has smoke. win. to prove that there is fire in the hill.I1ege-d ground of the co-presence of the reason and the predicate. The opponent raises a ques1 ion a. The opponent asks: "Is the smoke to be regarrled as the fE'aSOn it. hill has smoke.prr:-. like a kitchen. there remains. A certain other person offers tt rut. it is affirmed that a thin i~ accom Bshed sometimes nv becal. is absent from the site of the fire? " " Such a Bupposit.R to whether the smoke is present at the same site which il. because it has fire.

a futile opposition thus:If sound i~ proverl to be non-eternal by the exa. (U) Balanoing the infinite rogression. A mere counter-example without a reason attending it cannot be oonducive to any conclusion \Ve can rely on an example attended . 'rlds gives TIse to au infinite regression which injures thE" proposItion" sound if! non-eternal" not JeRs than the propo." which aims at setting aside an argument by the introduction of a mere counter-example. Reason-because it is a product. ho\. (12) BalanCing the connter-example.: "ell a~ to an expert. win be called "balancing the I counter-example..'rHE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE.he cause hE-ing absent from its site. futile as it is.mple of a pot.'. why it should not be held to be eternal by the example of the ether ~ If the example of the ether is set aside.--lf one opposes an argument on the ground of the example not baving been established by a series of reasons. let the e. Iutile as it is.sltion "sound is eternal. "Balancing the mutual absenee.. the opposition. 73 t. Example-like the ether. t.If one opposes an argument on the ground of the existence of a mere counter example.. will be called "balancing the infinite regression" A cClt. at stopping an argument by introducing an infinite regression which is said to bcqet the example. to pl'ove the non-etel'nality of s(lund. argues as Proposition-Sound is non eternal. serie~ of rea'30nR to reveal itr-.her perHon offer. A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus:Proposition-Sonnd is eternal. character. is therefore a totally futile opposition.xaml)le of the pot too be set aside. Hence the opposition called "balancing the infinite regression" is not founded on a sound hasis. pot A certain ot..' which aimr-. Now." whieh attaches too much importance to remoteness of RiteR. argues as follows :Sonucl IS nOH-eternll I bf'('ause it IS a PI'O<iuut. like a. " follows : - A certain person. the opposition. It does not require <1.ain pl"rSrm. This sort of futile opposition is called H balancing the counter-example." This Slort of opposition is called "balancing the infinite regression. Example-like a pot.o pI"OVe the nonoetemality of sound. is the pot again to he Pl'ov('(l as non-eternal 1 The reason which proves the non·eternahty of the pot l~ itsolf to he establieh~d by further -reasons. an e'Xample i:-: a thing the characters of which are well known to an ordinary man af. The opponent alleges that if sound is held to be non-eternal by the example of a pot.

becau." A certain person. consequent on the example and its general notion being equally objects of perception.l. to proye that sound ll:! llon-eterna. to prove the non-eternality of sound. 'because it is a non-effect-of-effol't.la. is not predicable of the subject. of effort. but not on a counter-example unattended by reason. A c~rtain other person offers a futile (Jppmdtion thus Sound is eternal. This sort of opposition is called "balancing the non-produced. Hence the opposition which is founded on a Dlere counter-example is to be rejected as futile. H. since we do not take the sound to be the subject before it is produced. will be called "balancing the doubt. because it is an effect. The \opponent alleges that the property connoted by the reason." which pretends to show an equality of t:\le arguments of two sides assuming the thing denoted by the subject tb be as yet non-produced.ncing the dnubt. NYAYA.. "sound (while non-produced) is eternal. is certainly an effect of effort. by reason.-If one opposes an argu- ment on the ground of the property connoted by the reason being absent from the thing denoted by the subject while it is not yet produced. Sound. d that there i:. CHAP.It. (13) Balancing the non-produced. The opposition. while it is produced. the opposition. Consequently sOWld is not non-eternal. like the sky. and as SllCh is llon-etelnal (14) Ba. because it is a product. then. It is= file because the subject can beoome such only when it is produced. sound (while it .~n be eternal. an apparent agreement between the two sides as to the sound being eternal on account of its being a non-effect-of-effort.se it is an obJect of perception. argueR as follows :Sound is non-eternal. . argues as follows: :Sound is non-eternal. certain other person offers a futile opposition ~hus ' Sound is non-eterllal (or eternal). it DlUst tQ. viz..iii not yet produced)." A certain person. ANOIENT SCHOOL. viz.-If one opposes an argument on the ground of a dOllbt arising from the homo~eneity of the eternal and the non-eternal. the opposition." carries no weight with it. futile as it i~ will be called " balancing the non-produced. pot.-SASTRA. like a p04 . no obstacle to the property of the reaso:q bein predicated of it.74 INDIAN LOGIC. according to the opponent. There is. like a. viz. futile as it is. bein&i an effect of effort. because it is not then an effect of effort.

This sort of opposition is called " balancing the point at issue ') which hurts an argument by giving rise to suspense which was to be removed. as to whether tht> Hound is non-eternal or eternal. A certain person."! (the general notion of all pots) beIng eternal. A certain person.1'1::)ing from the homogeneity of the eternal and the non-eternal It iH futilC" because sound cannot be said to be eternal 011 the mere ground of iL~ homogeneity with potness. (16) Balancing the non-reason. 15 The opponent alleges that sound is hom. because It is audible. but the pot being non~eternal and potnes. cannot be proved because the reason. The opponent alleges that the proposition. s:Sound is non-eternal. a~ well as heterogeneIty from. like soundness. Though on the score of homogeneity we maventertain doubt as to \vhethel' soul1d is eternal or non-eternal. serves only to give rise to suspense for the removal of which it was employed. however.u~t be pronounced to be non-eternal 011 the ground of lts heterogeneity from the same in respect of being a product. that doubt will never end (15) Balancmg the POiUli at issue.·--It is an opposition which is supposed to be based on the reason being shown to be impossible at all the three times.rises <.o be non-eternal In this Ctl. because it is a product. there a. This sort of opposition is called "balancing the doubt. viz.. other things If even then there remainB any douht as to Its tI'ue nature. on the score of heterogeneity pl'Onounce it undoubtedly t. doubt. like a pot . argue~ as foUm. because it is a product.ogeneous with a pot as well as potness ina~much as both are objects of perception. like a pot • A certain other person offers a futile oppo~ition thus :Sound is eternal.se we must bear in mind that we cannot ascertain the true nature of a thing unless we weigh it in respect of its homogeneity with.1. J t is futile and canllDt set aside the main argument because it leads to a point which .happens to support one side quite as strongly as it is opposed by the other side. to prove the non-eternality of sound. audibility which is homogeneous with both sound (which is non-eternal) and soundness (which is eternal). sound is non-eternal. but it nl.It is an opposition which is supposed to be conducted on the ground of homogeneIty with (or heterogendty from) both sides." which aims at discarding au argument in consequence of a doubt 0.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. to prove the nou-eternality of sound. viz. or the controversial. argues a)$ follows:Sound is non·etel'l1al. we can.

lsC a rea. II. eternal) because it is incorporeal. futile as it is. 'the opposition.d like the right and left horns of a cow. .76 INDIAN LOGIO. This sort of opposition is called .-If one advances an opposiI tion on the basis of a presumption.. Sound is. The opposition is futile because if things unsaid could come by presumption) there would arise a possibility of the opposition itself being hurt on account of the presumption being erratic and conducive to an unexpeoted conclusion. This sort of opposition is called "balancing the non-reason.. exist simultaneously for they will then be recip~ocally connect<.. ANCIENT SOHOOL. Here" being a product" is the reasun for "being non~et('rnal ' which is the predicate. take place from reason. which must precede that which is to be known and established.g 'in respect of its being a produot). because it is incorporeal. The opponent alleges that if sound is nO~Metemal on account of . A reason whwh is df>pendent. (c) The reason and the predicate cannot.ernal because it is a product. CHAP. why then is not the opposition itself. it may be ooncludE'd by presumption that sound is eternal on acoount of its homogeneity with eternal things (e. NYAYA-SAS'1'RA. on the predicate cannot establish the latter. held to be so 1 In the event of the opposition being impossible.nce againflt it. A certain other pt'rFton offers a futile opposition thus :Sound is presumed tOI be eternal. (a) The reason does not precede the predicatE". (b) The reason does not succeed the predicate bec<u. There is in fact no impossibility for the reason to operate The knowledge of the knowable and the establishment of that which is to be established. to prov~ the non·eternality of sound.its homogeneity with non-eternal thing. in l"es'P~ct of its being incorporeal). (17) BalanCing the presumption.son would be useless if the predicate could be eRtA:bh~hed without it. like the ether. like the ether." which aim" at setting aside an argument by showing that the reason is impossible at aU the three times. which depends on reason. like a pot.g." A certain person. argues as follows :Sound is non-et. because> the former is called a reason only whcn it establishes the latter It is impossible for the reason to be called such before the estahlishment of the predicate.. win be called "balancing the presumption. If the reason is held to be' impossible. 'e.." which aims at stopping an argument by setting presumption as a bala. balancing the presumption. the original argument will hold good.

there being no difference betw. a.l a. Tl1erefore. Sound is non-eternal.'. it does not abide in the same." and vice versa.re all existent: this sort of opposition is oalled "bala.s nnn.lancing' tbe non-dlfierence -If the subject and example are treated as non-different in respect of the possession of a certain property on acoount of their possessing in common the property connoted by the reason. inasmuch as'all of them are existent.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE 77 If by presumption we could draw So conclusion unwarranted by the reason.use it is a product. If one says that "sound is non-eternal because of its homogeneity with non-eternal things. we could from the opposition cited above draw the following conclusion :. it foll()ws as a conclusion that all things are mutually non-different in respect of the possession of every property inasmuch as they a. while in other instances." A certain person. I Here the pot and sound possessing ih COUllllon the property of being a product.und. like a pot. On the same principle if all things are treated a.Sound is presumed to be non -eternal.rgues as follows : Sound is non -eternal. which aims at hurting an argument by assuming aU things to be mutually non-ditTer'ent. happens in certain instances to abide in the reason. This would hurt the opposition itself In fact tne presumption as adduced by the opponent is erratic.ClIlAnClA 0 • •• • . Hence the opposition called balancing the presumption" is untenable. This sort of opposition is called " balancing the non-diffeI'ence. and sound are treated as non-different in respect of non-eternality in consequence of their both being products. sound may be treated a. It is futile because tne property possessed in commOll by the subject and the example'. There is no rule that presumption should be made in one case and not in the case opposed to it. and in the event of two mutually opposed presumptions no definite conclusion would follow.nd the non-eternal. H (IS) Ba. A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus: If the pot." the presumption that naturally foHows is that" sound is eternal because of its homogeneity with eternal things. like a pot.een the eterna. beca. because it is a product. it follows as a conclusion that all things are mutually non-different in respect of the possession of every property. . to prove the non-eternalityof so.ncing the non-difference. like a pot. because it is a product.rliff"'T'Pnf: in {"lOllRp.s eternal. are treated as non-different in respect of the possession of non-eternality.

has admitted the reasonableness of the first demonstration which supports the non-eternality of sound. he can avoid incompatibility by denying either of the reasons. 110n-eternality abjdes in some existent things and does not abide in other (>xistent things. because they are eXH~tent. like (~). we would ask why does he not deny the other reason which supports the eternality of sound.ncing the demonstration. ANCIENT SCHOOL. like the ether. In this argument" all thl.. then the argument would stand thus :All things are non-eternal. If they are treated us non-different in respect of non-eternality. balancing the nondifference" is unreasonable. NYAYA-SASTRA. ":l:. for the want of a. he now denies the reason which supports non-eternality.~~e A part of the subject cannot he cited as the example because the example muc:.-If an opposition is offered on the ground that we perceive the charaoter ()f the subjeot even . (20) Balancing the perception. Tn other words. Hence aU things are not mutually non-different. because it is incorporeal. The opponent having asserted that both the demonstrations are justified by reasons. This sort of opposition is called "bala. while that in the second demonstration supports the etternality of sound. opponent advanced the second apparent demonstration as a balance against the first to create a dead-lock.at:Etjustified by reason~. the opposition will be oall~d "balancing the de-monstration. II. exists bet'ween the two demonstrations. H A certain person demollstrate<s the non-eternality of sound HR follows:Sound is non·eternal. CHAP.-If an opposition is offered by showing that both the demonstrations--." It is futile because there is an-admission of the first demonstration.. The reason in the first demonstration supports the llon-eternality of sound. A certain other person offers an opposition by the al1eged demonstration of the eternality of sound as follows : Sound is eternal. (19) Balancing the demonstration. for. The. If to avoid the incompatibility that.n example> Jeads to no conciu'5ion. there is nothing left which may serve as an s.ng~" heh~g the subject. and the opposition called . In fact aU things a. because it is a product like a pot. know in what respect they are non-different.re not non-eternal since some at least are eternal. Hence the opposition called "balancing the demonstration H is not well founded.t be a well-established thing: while the subject is a thing which is yet tlO be establishecL The argument. yet both the demonstrations are alleged to be right.78 INDIAN LOGIC.

because it is a product." "I have no doubt. The non-perception of non-perception which signifies a mere negation of nonMperception cannot be interpreted as referring to an existent thing. The opposition is futile.he reason that it ill a product. H ' A certain person. Perception refers to that which is existent.. Hence the oppos~tion called H balancing the perception" does not set aside the mam argument. etc." "I have doubt. the non· perception of the non-perception must. suchoas perception.ims at counteragtlng an argument by setting up non-perception as a balance against it. while non-perception to that which is non-existent. moreover. There are internal perceptions of suoh forms as "I am sure. for we perceive that sound is produced by the branches of trees broken by wind. A certain other person offers a futile opposition thus . This sort of opposition is called "balancing the perception. the opposition. one offers an opposition aiming at proving the contrary by the non-perception of the non-perception. because the character of the subject can be ascertai. prove the e." If the non-perception of a thing proves its non~existence. to prove the non-eternality of sound..-." which aims at demolishing an argument by setting up an act of perception as a balance against it.. It does not deny other means. futile as it is." "I am not sure.-If against an argument proving the non-existence of a thing by the non-perception thereof.If one finding that things which are homogeneous possess equal characters." which s. argues as follows:Sound is non-eternal. will be called" balancing the perception . whioh prove that we oan perceive the non-existence of knowledge as well as the existence thereof. like a pot. This sort of opposit~on is called H balancing the non-perception. The argument) viz "suund is non-eternal. because it is a product t lik~ a pot. well.:' The opposition of this kind is not valid because non-perception is merely the negation of perception." implies that sound is proved to be non-eternal througb t. ? Sound can be ascer·tained to be non-eternal even witliout thereason that it is a product. will be called "balancing the non-perception. in the opinion of the opponent. and as there is no non-perception of non-perception. an internal peroeption of the existence as well as of the non-e:dstence of the various kinds of knowledge.. (22) Balancing the no~-eternal. which also may prove sound to be non-eternal. (21) Balancing the non-perception. Hence the non-peroeption itself is peroeptible. the opposition called" balanoing the non-perception" falls to the ground. . opposes an argu- . futile as it is. Henoe opposition called '( balancing the non -perception" is not well founded.X1stence of the thing." etc. the opposition. There is.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE 79 without the intervention of the reason.ned by other means as.

the opposition. If ~ound is non-eternal on account of its being homogeneous with a pot which is non-eternal it will follow as a consequence that all things are none-ternal because they are in some one or other respect homogeneous with the pot-a consequence \\thich will render aU inferences impossible for want of heterogeneous example8 This sort of opposition is called "balancing the non-eternal.in other person offers rl.he non-etcrnality.s therefore not founded on a sound hasiR. A <. for instance. does not prove aU things to be eternal. ~ound (23) BalanClng the eteru/.tributing eternality to aU non-eternal things on the ground of thes'e being eternally non-eternal. to prove the non-etel'naHty of sound. the opposition. will be called .y of Round. n.llegecl ground that all things are non-eternal. ANCIENT SOHOOL.eternality to ali things.blished from a mere homogeneity. then too the sound must In the ahsence of llon-eternality be pronounced to be ~te~·nal. Does thiR llon-eternalitv ex:i~t in sound always or only sometimes? If the non-eternality ~ exists u. Similarly a mere homogeneity of an things with the eternal ether in one or another respect. futile as it is. futile opposition thus. argne$ as follows :- is non-eternal. By s € 'a. sound is eterna.ht" € 't. futile as it is.'ertaill other person offerlS a futIle opposition thus :You say that so-und IS non-etel'na.racter of a thing from its mere hnlnogeneitv \'rith anoth~r thing: in doin~ so we must consider t. because it is a product. non-eternal pot in one or another respect. balancing the eternal. Sound." which seeks to counter::tct an argument on the a. argues as foHows:Sound is non-eternal. It is futile because nothing can be esta. of opposition is caHen "balancing thE' eternal." A certain p<'r::lon.AYA-8AS'rR_\. to pt'ove th~ non-('tcrnajit." w~leh prete~ds ~o counteract an argument by Retting up eternalityas a balance agam~t It. Of in other words. NY.el'nalit. Thifi sort." Hence it will be unreasonable to conclude that all things are non-eternal simply because they al'e homogeneous with n.lvxtys.Il.he logical connection between the reason and the predicate. The opposition called" Lalancing the nOll-C'ternal " i. like a pot.kin<r . is llOll-eternal not merely because it is homogenE'ous with a nOll-eternal pot but because there is a connection between "being a product" and "being non-eternal.I.80 INDIAN LOGIC. OHAP.y of the nOll-otel'na1.." A c(>rtain perSlon. hflcause it IS a product: like a pot. The oppo~ition is haseless because the thing opposed is always non~ ett'l'nal on a('count of t. A cCl'tn.] I~ the non-eternaIity exists only sometirnes. We cannot ascertain the eha. will be called "balancing t.-If one opposes an argument by at. meI\t by attributing non.. the sound must alro be always existent.

viz (1) the production of something which was previously non-exlstent. That sound did not exist previously is proved by our non-perception of the.~ition of the opposition just as it attaches to the 0 osition itself. e.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. argues as follows :Sound is non-eterna." why is not the opposition too set aside on the same ground 1 The reason in the argument is as erratio as that in the opposition. but if it is of the second kind it will be eternal." _ It is futile because in the case of sound effort does not give rise to the second kind of effect. it is not possible to conclude that sound is non-eternal." so also there is no special ground to suppose that the word in the opposition signified a thing revealed and not produced" Hence the opposition called" balancing the effect" is seU-destn.l. Is sound an effect or the first kmd or of the se:wlld kind? If sound is ." A certain person. futile as it is. 81 of eternalityof the non-eternal you have arlmitted sound to be always non-etemltl. and cannot now deny Its non-eternalitv The eternal and non-eternal are mcompatible with each other: by admitting that sound is non-eternal ~vou are precluded from asserting that it is also eternal. (24) Balancing the effect. because it is an effect of effort A certain other person offers a futile 0pposltion thus:The effect of effort is found to be of two kinds. the opposition. This sort of opposition is called "balancing the effect. will be cll. a pot. You cannot say that our non-perception was caused by a veil because no veil covered sound. Hence sound is an effect which is not revealed but produced. Just as there is no special ground to suppose that the" effect" in thE' argument signified" a thing produced and not revealed. (ii) Defect attaches to the oppo. to prove the non-eternality of sound. . If an argument is to be set a3ide owing to an ambiguous meaning of the word" effect.ctive.lled "balancing the effect. We cannot say that sound is revealed by our effort because we are unable to prove that it existed already. Hence" balancing the eternal" is not a sound opposition.-If one opposes an argument by showing the diversity of the effects of effort."tn effect of the first kind it will be non-eternal. e. e g the word" effect" should be used in one and the same sense by a disputant and his opponent. and (2) the revelation of something already existent.g. H Apphcatioll of the Analogues.g. In showing the futility of analogues we may test them in the lighi of the feHowing principles :(i) If a special meaning is to be attached to a word in the opposition~ the same meaning will have to be attached to the word in the original argument. water in a well. same at the time. Owing to this dIversity of the effects of effort.

The disputant's reply consisting of this kind of interpretation is called" admission of'an opinion. offers an opposition thus:- Sound is eternal. a thing revE'aled "]. certain disputant. argues as follows : Sound is non-eternal. Six-winged Dlsputation (~atpaklfi kafka). offers an opposition thus : Sound is eternal. A certain other person." (iv) H Admission of an opinion" also ooours when the disputant. the disputant. ' The first wing. By overlooking the four principles stated here a person may entangle himself in a six-winged disputation. A certain person. because it is an effect of effort. says:- Sound is non-eternal. The opponent rises again to say that sound cannot also be concluded to be non-eternal because the reason "effect" is erratic (which may mean "a thing revealed "). it will be called "admission of an opinion" (matiinujiUi). goes on charging the disputant's opposition of the opposition with the same defect..ean "a thing produced "). is ambiguous. The counter-charge which the opponent brings in this way is interpreted by the disputant to be an admission of the defect pointed out by him. The arguer replies that sound cannot be concluded to be eternal because the reason" effect" is erratic (which m. e." but he did not make his meaning clear]. to prove the non-eternality of sound. . instead of employing reasons to resoue his side from the defect with whioh it has been oharged. because it is an effect of effort. A.ay m. eternality of sound. that the reason is Arratic. with a defect. II.. [Here" effect" signifies .g. The opponent instead of rescuing his opposition from the defeot with whioh it has been charged by the disputant. may also be pointed out in the case of the opposition of the opposItIon (iii) If one admits the defect of his opposition in consequence of his statement that an equal defect attaches to the opposition of the opposition. viz. seeing that the effect IS of diverse kinds. CHAP. because it is an effect of effort. The first person. charges the opposition made by the second person. proceeds to admit the defect in consequence of his statement that the same defect belongs to his opponent's side as well. [The disputant evidently too'k the word" effect" in the sense of" a thing produced. An opponent. to prove the non. A certain person lays down a proposition which is opposed by a certain other person. because it is an effect of effort [Here" effect" signifies" a thing produced "). viz the opponent.82 INDIAN LOGIC. seeing that the word" effect" The second wing. So the defect which is pointed out in the case of the opposition. ANCIENT SCHOOL~ NYAYA SASTRA.

admission of an opinion.31 repetition of the meaning of the fifth wing. The first. viz (1) a thing [that did not previously exist but 18 1l0\vJ produced. h e E'Ct ' IS erratIC. J . because it is an effect of effort He alleges that the rlefeet (viz the erraticity of the reason) with whid1 his opposition (VIZ. a thing revealed" ' d .mg.Sound is also not non-eternal. charge brought against him amount::.. charges t e opposition with a defect thus : Sound is not eternal. 'fhe opponent finding that the disputant instead of rescuing his argument from the counter-charge has The sIxth \\ring taken shelter under his opponent's admission of the charge says:The disputant by saying that "sound is also not eternal" has (by the force of the word "·a]so 5') admitted that it is also not non-eternal. that i!-:l. In other words. The sixth wing is a repetition of the fourth while the fifth wing is a repetitIon of the third. The disputant findmg that the counterThe fifth "" ing. fourth and sIxth to the opponent." All th wi ree e unessential. sound is eternal) 18 charged. brings a countercharge against the disputant thus . The third and fourth wings involve the defect of . it has indicated t. seeing that the reason TI 16 th lr .hat the opponent admits the disputant's opInion. third and fifth wings belong to the dIsputant while the second. He means that sound cannot be inferred to be eternal from its being an effect.g." which It! erratic proves neither the eternality nor the The fourth Wl1l. The dispntant. non-eternality of sound.. to his opponent's admission of self-defect says:The opponent by saying that" sound is alHo not non-eternal" has (by the force of the word" also ") admitted that it is also noli eternal.THE VARIETIES OF ANALOGUE. The sixth wing is also . IS non-eternal).. admIts of two different meanmgs. the reply to the counter-charge proves the counter-charge itself.. if the counter-charge proves the charge. The reason being erratic the conclusion is uncertaIn. Tht' opponent findjng that the reason "effect. sound is not eternal. because it is an effect of effort." which is the reason here. and (2) a thmg [that already existed and is nowJ revealed. that is. "ff' .. In other words the counter-charge has proved the charge. also attaches to the OpposItIOn of the oppositIOn made by the disputant (viz. because "effect. 83 Here the opponent evidently took the word "effect" In the sense of .

-----. are the follo\ving :(1) Hurting the proposition (pratji'liil-hani) .\ ord "effed ..a) ." arises generally from a misemployment of the proposition or any other part of an argument and may implicate any cliRputant ." H a place of humIliation" or "a point of disgrace. (16) non-ingennity (apratibha) ." "an occaSlQn for rebuke.f"d SfTmTf<irmq m1f . CHAP.17) eva'3ion (vik~epaL (18) admission of an opinion tmatanujiia). Th0 points of defeat. II." 01' If they had agreed that the . "a thmg produced" or "a thing revealed.~. .-_.: I :~nir~i"fl~fir~ if Q ~T ~.---------" .--.-----------. (15) ignorance (ajiiana). NYAY A-SASTRA._------I Viele Nys)s-siitra. ANCIENT SCHOOL. (2) shifting tht' proposition (pralii'iiantara). (13) n'petition (punarukta). (ll) saying too little (nyuna). (9) the incoherent (apftrthaTca) . oell1g ambiguous no conclusIOn could be drawn IIli'.a). 5-1-43.. (19) overlooking the censurable (paryanuyojyopek9a'l'J.84 INDIAN LOGIO. (4) renonncing the proposition (pratijiia-s(tnnyasa) . Bound is so (cognisable by sense). . Jayanta observes:~O!:. "A point of defeat. (7) the meaningless (nirarthaka) . it~1( qr(. (1) Hurting the proposition occurs when one admits in one's own example the character of a counter-example. The disputation \\ ould hay€ ' come to a fair close at the third wing if the dlsputant or the opponent had pointed ou~ that the \\ ord " effect" had a special meaning viz." which is t. (5) shifting the reason (hetvantara) .71irodha) . (21) deviating from a tenet (apasiddhanta) .-. (20) censuring the non-censurable (ni't'unuyojyanuyoga). (3) opposmg the proposition (pratij '10.he same as ' a clincher. occasions for rebnk€ > places of humiliation. (14) silence (ananubhasa'Y). whatever is cognisable by sense is non-eternal as a pot. (12) saying too much (adkl:ka). Hnd (22) the semblance of a reason (hetvlibhasa).vhether he is a di~cutieut. -. (10) the inopportune (aprapta-kalal.q~ 1~\l~f. (8) the unintelligible (avij H{Ua'rth a) .. therefore sound is non-eternal. 01' VARIETIES OF THE POINTS OF DEFEAT."'iI'JiTtft I . because it is cognisable by sense. also called clinchers.1 I 'q{""I5 'fI '(II fi'f fifl:i. wrangler or caviller.teac1 of ~topping at the proper limIt they have obstinately carned on their disputation whleh IS found after all to be totally futile I 34. (6) shifting thE' topic (arthantara). A disputant argues as follows ' Sound is non-eternal.

s?bstar:ce is non-dis~inct. etc. like a pot. is to be rebuked as a fool. '!'he proposition now defended is'Sound is non-aIl-pervasive. The defence thus made involves a change of proposition. Substance is distinct from quality. by importing a new character to his example and counter-example. :. A person who thus employs a reason: which opposes his proposition. etc .Iound is cognisable by sense) therefore sound is eternal thus admitting in his example (the pot) the character (the eterI:al~ty) of a counter-example (the genus or type). A person who hurts his proposition in tillS wa. that is. h.VARIETIES OF THE POINTS OF DEFEAT. A certain other person offers an opposition thus ' Sound is eternal.g potness or pot-type). A person who shifts his proposition in this way is to be rebuked inasmuch as he does not rely upon his original reason and example. is opposed to the proposItIOn. because it IS cognisable by sense. like a genus (or type). because it is cogmsable by sense. (3) Opposmg the proposition occurs when the proposition and its reason are opposed to each other. it must also be distinct from colour.v admlttmg that a pot is eternal. etc. whIch constitute the quality.v deserves nothing but rebuke B:r: (2) ShIfting the proposItion arises when a proposition bcmg opposed one defends it. substance.. IS dlstmct from quality. The proposition originally laid down was :Sound is non-eternal. A certain person argues as follows :Soun(l is non-eternal.. viz . A genus (e. The first person in order to defend himself says that a genus (or type) and a pot are both cognisable by sense. yet one in aU-pervasive and the oth('l' is not so: hence the sound which.. distinct from quality. VIZ. he hurts his own propoi'lition (VIZ sound is non-eternal). which is cognisable by senst'.. . f~om colour. In this argument it is to be observed that if substance is. IS found to be eternal' why cannot then the sound which il'i alISO cognisable by sense be eternal? The disputant being thus opposed says :Whate\Ter is cognisable by sense is eternal as a pot. because it is perceived to be non-distinct from colour. is likened to a pot is non-aIl-pervasive. The reason. 85 An opponent counter-argues thus :.

(6) ShIfting the topic is an argument which setting aside the real topic introduces one which isjrrelevant. as a defence against the opposition.rgues as foUows:Sound is eternal (proposition).l. it will be called "renouncing the proposition. Being opposed by a certain other person he attempts. " A certa. NYAYA-SASTRA. just as a genus (or type) such as potlleS's (or pot-type) is cognisable by sense and is Dot yet non-etE-rnal The fir::. to prove the eternality of sound. because it is intangible (reason). a. as a part .86 INDIAN LOGIC." A word. ANClENT SCHOOL. being cognisable by SE-nse. one attaches a special character to it. CHAP II. to defend his position as follows:Hetu which is the Sanskrit equivalent for "reason" is a word derived from the root "hi" with the suffix" Lu. A certain person. . which consists in shifting one's reason. viz. (4:) Benouncing the proposition -If one disclaims a proposi- tion when it is opposed. in the absence of any other resource. is to be understood as signifying that "Ithich comes under a genus (or type) and is as such cogniRable by sense. to prove the non-et. A certain other person offers an opposition thus: Just as a genus (or type) is cognisable by sense and is not yet non-eterna.l.' renouncing the proposition" which rightly furnishf's an occasion for rebuke (5) Shlfting the reason occurR when the reason of a genera) character being oppobed.in person argues as foHows:Sound is non-eterna.. Sound comes under the genus (or type) "soundness" and is at the same time cognisnble by sense. Such a defence. A certa. .in person.~rnality of sound. argues as follows :Sound is non -eternal. so sound is cognisable by sense and is not yet non-eternal The first person.t person defends hImself by saying that the reason. disclaims his proposition thus:Who says that sound is non-eternal 1 This sort of denial of one's own proposition is called . because it is cognisable by sense. because it is cognisable by sense. rightly furnishes an occasion for rebuke. non~eternal A certain other person say~ that sound cannot be proved to be through the mere reagon of its being cognisable by sense. but a genus or type such as pot-ness or pot-type does not come under another genus or type such as pot-ness-ness or pot-type-type though it is cognisable by sense.

is understood neither by the audience nor by the opponent. A certain person. A certain person being opposed by another person and finding no other means of self-defences argues as follows:Ten pomegranates. t. because k. The defence made in this way furnishes an in~ stance of defeat through non-relevancy. argues as follows :Sound is eternal. attempts to hide his inability in disputation by using words of don ble entendre or words not in ordinary use or words very quickly uttered which as such are understood neither by his opponent nor by the audience although they are repeated three times. six cakes. This sort of argument. gh. 87 defined as. as a kitchen (example). and d. and is there' fore rebuked.. bh. c. <lh and dh. the hill has smoke (application).. This sort of defence is called "the unintelligible" which rightly furnishes an occasion for rebuke. t' and pare j. convey no meaning. A oertain person." which rightly presents an occasion for rebuke Since the meaning of an argument is affected bv the order in which its parts are arranged. is called" the ineoherent/' which rightly presents an oooasion for rebuke (10) The inopportune is an argument. the parts of which are mentioned without any order of precedence. goat's skin and a lump of sweets. the hill has fire (conclusion).. As the letters k. A certain person being opposed by another person and finding no means of self·defence. q. argues as fol· lows :The hill has fire (proposition). to prove the etet"nality of sound. g. which although re- peated three times. (7) The meanIngless is an argument which is based on a non- sensical combination of letters in a series. the person who employs them in his argument deserves rebuke (8) The umntelligible is an argument. the person who overlooks the order cannot establish his conclusion. because it has smoke (reason). t. (9) The Incoherent is an argument which conveys no con. .VARIETIES OF THE POINTS OF DEFEAT. The person who makes it deserves rebuke. etc) etc. v. neeted meaning on account of the words being strung together without any syntactical order. which consists of a series of unconnected words. like jh. This sort of argument is called ~'the inopportune. c. whatever has smoke has fire. a bowl. to prove that the hill has fire. etc.

There is a difference between "repetition" and "re-inculcation" inasmuch as the latter serves some useful purpose In re-inculcation a special meaning is deduced from the word reinculcated. to prove that the hill has fire.ent the (( conclusion" is a re-inculcation of the "proposition" serving a special purpose (viz. In this argum. The hill has fire (proposition). II ( II) Saying too httle. as a kitcheu (example). etc. NYAYA-S. argueB as follows :The hill has fire (proposition) Because it has smoke (reason) And because it has light (reason). in f:!howing the fifth member of the syllogism). Repetition of the meaning-Sound 18 non-eternaL echo is perishable. (4) The hill has smoke (apphcation). e. Because it has smoke (reason) . it is called "'saying too little. And like a furnace (example)." (13) RepetitIon is an argument in which (except in the case of reinculcation) the word or the meaning is said over again. CHAP. ANCIENT SCHOOL. a person who omits even one of them should be scolded as "saying too little.. Therefore the hill has fire (conclusion). .If an argument lacks tWeI! one of its parts. A certain person. . A person. who having promised to argue in the proper way (according to the established usage)." The following is an argument whICh contams all its five parts '-(l) The hill has fire (proposition) (2) Because it has smoke (reason)." (12) Saying too much is flJn argument which consists of more than one reason or example. (5) Therefore the hIll has fire (conclusion). The h. . Like a kitchen (example). All that has smoke has fire. Repetition of the word-Sound is non-eternal.ill has smoke (application). employs more than one reason or example is to he rebuked as " saying too much.xSTRA. Repetition consists also in mentioning a thing by name although the thin has been indicated throll h resum tion e. In this argument the second reason and the second example are redundant. what is heard is hllpermanent. Sound is non -eternal. As all the five parts or members are essential.88 INDIAN LOGIC.g. as a kitchen (example). (3) All that has smoke has fire.

. . instead of removing the charge brought agamst him. 89 . (15) Ignorance is the non-understanding of a proposition.:>king the censurable consists in not rebuking a person who deserves rebuke. f~!ther l)rogress by saying that he has to go away on a very urgent business He who stops the disputation in this way courts defeat ann humiliation through evasion. it is the duty of the audienc e ." This person.. (17) Evasion arises if one stops an argume.v ARIET!ES OF THE POINTS OF DEFEAT . If his opponent understands it and yet cannot hit upon a reply. How can an opponerlt refute a proposi. stops it. (19) Overlo:.Jus argument if his opponent maintains an attitude of stolid silence? The opponent who takes un such an attitude is to be rebuked. ' A certain person having commenced a disputation in which he finds it impossible to establish hIS side. It is not at all unfair to censure a person who argues in a way which furnishes an occasion for censure. A certain person lays down a proposHion. This sort of counter-charge or reply is an instance of the "admission of an opinion" which brings disgrace on the person who makes it." A thing posscRsing the character of a product is non-eternal. throws the same charge on the opposite side whereby he admits that the charge against himself is true. tion the meaning of which he cannot understand.nt in the pretext of going away to attend another business. he is to be scolded as want. He is to be re· huked for his ignorance. (1 R) The admission of an opinion consists in charging the opposite side with a defect by admitting that the same defect exists on one's own side A certain person addressing another person says: " You are a thief.· ing in ingenuity. Seeing that the person himself does not coniess his tbortcoming." (14) Slienee is an occasion for rebuke which arise& when the opponent makes no reply to a proposition although it has been fE'p<:>ated three times by the disputant within the knowledge of the audi('nce HoW ::Can a disputant carry orr. A thmg whICh is not non-eternal does not possess the character of a product "-this is a mere repetition of the following. (16) Non-ingenuity consists ill one's inability to hit upon a reply. Ignorance is betrayed by the opponent who does not understand a propo'::lition although it has been repeated three times within the knowledge of the audience.

If the audience failed to do their duty they would earn rebuke for themselves on account of their ~'oYer­ looking the censurable" (20) Censuring the non-censurable consists in rebuking a person who does not deserve rebuke A person brings cliscredlt on himself if he rebukes a person who does not deserve rebuke (2]) Deviating from a tenet. Fallacies are mere semblances of fe-ason. and that no activity would eease if what is existent nmv could continne for evef.. .90 INDIAN LOGIC."n I+...l examination should be made of each case where there is room fqr doubt. and (2) what is nOll-existent never comes into existence. etc. 35. A critics. the objects of sense.fnination'is unnecessary. h ' knowledge are invalid a~ they are impossible The means 0 f rIg t t 11 th e three t' . it .. past and future times inasmuch as it can neither be prior to.. A critical examination of some of the categories is given below :-- ( 1) The Means of RIght Knowledge The means. In case of well-known facts admitted by all. nor post~rior to." A certain person promises to carryon his argument in consonance with the Samkhva philo.§.-existencc and non-existenoe from existence. nor sim~ltane~:ms with. is guilty of . to pass a vote of censure on him.. Some 1 say that perception and other so-called means of right . i .lmln.. deviating from 8 tenet. exa. A certain other person opposes him by saying that all human activity would be impossible if the thing now non-existent could not come jnto eXIstence in the course of time. CATEGORIES: THEIR EXAMINATION (parik~a).ho ~n. (22) The fallacies of reason also furnish points of defeat Of occasions for rebuke.. II. d'eption occurred anterlOriy It could not have arisen from the contact . P erceptlon IS Impos" irrvalid... then he will rightly deserve. CHAP... If per .c .n~.. If the first ~rson being thus opposed admits that existence springs from non.ophy which lays down that (l) what is existent never becomes non-existent.. NYAYA·SASTRA. sible at the pre!::\ent.. There are infinite points of defeat or occasions for rebuke_ of wb loh only twenty-two have been enumerated here. a. : knowledge are s id to be a a Imes.h_""' . 1J'\'ft ~he "oF smras from 2-1-8 to 2-1~19 of the Nyaya~sutra contain a critical extn. (pramat. ANCIENT SCHOOL.W/).rebuke for his deyiation from the accepted tenet. A person who employs them in a disputation certainly deserves rebuke. -A person who after accepting a tf'net departs from it in the course of his disputation.

for instance. colour and smell exist in a flower at the same time. that is. But this conclusion will have to be abandoned if perception is supposed to occur posteriorly to the object. one must give up one's definition or perception. If there is no means of knowledge to establish any thing. there would not be any order of succession in our cognitions as there is no such order in their corresponding objects. When we deny a thing on the ground of its not being perceived. are also means of knowledge.tance. perception cannot be simultaneous with its object. so t~e means of knowledge establish themselves and the objects of knowledge. it is asked whether the eolour preceded perception or the perception preceded colour If one says that perception occurred anteriorly or preceded the colour. we acknowledge by implication that perception is a means of right knowledge. . . so a means of knowledge is an instrument when it establishes an object.g. e. sometimes an illumination which succeeds the sun. but is an object when it is itself to be established. Just as a balance is an instrument when it weighs a thing. If perception is supposed to occur posteriorly.OATEGORIES: THEIR EXA. for inc. Perception and other so~called means of right knowledge are therefore not only invalid but also im: possible. we are thereby to acknowledge the validity of that means. 91 of a sense with its object. that perception arises from the contact of a sense with its object. nay. In reply it is stated that if perception and other means of right . Finally if a means of knowledge does not require' another means of knowledge for its establishment.. Various objects of sense can exist at one time. With reference to the perception of colour. lished. . Colour. onr perception of colour must be admitted to be simultaneous with our perception of smell. it cannot be maintained that· objects of sense are established by perception. this latter needs also to be established by another means of knowledge. They resemble sometimes a drum which precedes its sound. two cognitions cannot take place at the sa. if an object of knowledge is to be established by a means of knowledge. There is no fixed rule that t. is an object which is said to be established by visual perception. The means of knowledge are selfestablished like the illumination of a lamp.me tIme. but is an object when it is itself weighed in another balance. etc. the matter to be demed the demal Itself will be inoperative.MINATION. If we hold that perception is slmultaneous with its object. knowledge are impossible. we must admIt that the colour and the smell can be perceived at the same time.ns them is also impossible for owing to absence of of rIght knowledge estab. then the denial of V~hdlty of the mea. Moreover. Just as a lamp illumines itself and other objects. let an object of knowledge be also established without any means of knowledge. viz. Though a lamp which illllmmes . As there is an order of succession in our cognitions. This is absurd bE"cause two acts of percep· tion.he means of knowledge should precede the objects of knowledge or should succeed them ot' be simultaneous with them. If perception were simultaneous with its object. how is the denial itself to be established 1 U on the other hand the denial is held to be based on a. certain means of knowledge. Similarly inference. ' . and another time a smoke which is synchronous with the fire.

The soul. This characteristic is due to the mind. a person listening to a song does not see colour though It comes in oontact with his eye. there is also conjunotion of soul wIth mind. The contact of a sense with its object is mentioned as the special cause of perception. then direction ceptlondefended.g. Consequently in speakmg of knowledge the soul has. In reply it is stated that if the conjunction of soul with mind is to be mentioned as a necessary element in T~e deflOltion of per. n. e. which is conjoined with the sense. the contact of a sense with its object no knowledge arises unless. has not been excluded from our definition of perception inasmuch as knowledge is a mark of the soul. Some say that the definition ot perception as given before IS defective.92 INDIAN LOGIC. (Hd'k") ' ") t'Ime ('k-l") 1 . In our definition of perception we have mentioned only the speoial cause. ANCIENT SCHOOL. But such an enumeration is held on . we point out. by implication. Similarly we must admit a general notion of the me.all.ce. etc. an atomic substance. A sense coming in contaot with its object produ. Perception has been defined as knowledge. viz. An essential character of knowledge is that more than one act of knowing cannot take place at a time. Perception. Fron. and have omitted the commOll causes which precede not only perception.ms of knowledge as distingUIshed from that of the objects of knowledge The means of knowledge are therefore neither invalid nor impossIble. There are many kinds of knowledge. PerceptioUh.knowledge. :l necessary element in the definition ot perception. hands to be undesirable.Umerated among the cau. Conjunction of soul with mind is a cause which operates in the production of all kinds of knowledge. fectIve. Hence the conjunction 01 sou] with mind should be mentioned as. Hence in speaking of knowledge we have by implication mentioned the mind as a condition of perception. Moreover the contact of a sense with its object is sometimes not found to be the cause of perception. (2) the .as been described as knowledge. while the contact of a sense WIth its object is the cause which operates only in perception. we cannot deny a general notion of illuminator as distinguished from that of the objects illuminated. it is said. NYAYA-SASTRA. OHAP. The mind too has not been omitted from our definition inasmuch as we have spoken of the non-simultaneity of acts of knowledge. aoo knowledge implies the soul which is its abode. as it does not notice the conjunction The definitIon of per.the definition of perception. but also other kinds of knowledge. (I) th~ visual perception also called eye-knowledge or colour. aa and ether (" akasa") should also be e:l.of soul with mind and of mind with sense.space ("desa. other objects 18 itself illumined by our eye. ceptlon IS said to be dewhich are also causes of perc-optiofi. By saying that perception is knowledge which arises from the contact of a sense with Its object we have distinguished five special kinds of knowledge. such as perception. been mentioned as a conditlOn in the production of perception. recollection.::.s knowledge in our soui only if the sense is conjoined with the mind. when know'ledge is produced.es of perception.

These inferences are said to be not necessarily correct. for the latter is not natural. for a river may be swollen because of its being embanked. (3) the olfactory perception also called nose·knowledge or smelI·knowledge. Yet the instance does not prove that the contact of a sense with its object. derived from the knowledgp. Inference. some say. and if we hear a peacock scream. we infer that clouds are gathering. Oomparison. some say. The manner in which ants carry off their eggs just before rain is quite different from the manner in which they do so when their nests are damaged. We are said Is Perceptlon a mere to perceive a tree while we really perceive onlv mference ? • -. In reply it is stated that perception is not inference for even the objectors admit that at least a part of the tree IS actually perceived. rlght knowledge? r ill. on the contrary it is accepted as dIfferent from inference Inference Inference.uditory perception also called ear·knowledge or sound-knowledge. wood. IS not the cause of perception. ae the knowledge ot a thing cannot be € 'stablished Is comparison a mea. In other words. etc. (4) the gustatory perception also called tongue-knowledge or tasteknowledge. the former is attended by a great rapidity of cnrrents. The ants run away quickly in a steady line when rain is imminent. 1 \'e see ants carrying off their eggs. The screaming of flJ peacock which sugg€ 'sts gathering clouds is quite different from a man's imitation of it. as it errs in certain cases. is not a means of right knowledge. an abundance of foam. as a wholE). and the supposed screaming of a peacock may be nothing but the voice of a man.TION. 1S inference because it apprehends a thing by grasping only a part of the same. For Instance. if we see a river _ Is mference a means of swollen we infer that there has been a' 'f . Hence perception as a means or knowledge lS not altogether denied.ns thr h 't . a mass of fruits. because the song is more attractive than the colour Perception.CATEGORIES: THEIR EXAMINA. of a part of It. a part of It ThIs knowledge 01 the tree. the ants may carry off their eggs because their nests have been damaged. Comparison. con- . not in the process. we reply. for it is to be understood that his intent listening prevents him from seeing the colour. the fault is in the person. the auditory perception supersedes the vIsual perception. some say. but fear makes them fly in disorder when their nests are damaged.-hile listening to a song may not see colour though Ithe latter comes jn contact with hIs eye. is not a means of right knowledge. no matter whether the similarity is complete. is saId to be a mere inference. and (5) the tactual perceptlOn also callea skin-knowledge or touch-knowledge It is admltted that a person v. If in such cases any wrong inference is drawn. 93 a. as the errors alleged to be involved in it may be explained away_ The swelling of a river caused by rain is different from that which results frOID the embankment of a part of it. we infer that there will be rain. is reaJIy a means of right knovdedge. leaves. '1 't t th of rIght knowledge? oug 1 S SImI an y 0 ano er thOmg.

Hence comparison supplies us with knowledge of a perceived thing through its similarity to another thing also perceived. cated by it is not perceived but inferred. mere m er~ ceived object through that of an object which is perceived. 80 is a b08 gavaeus-" : this is an instance of comparison. mere a strange ammal one rea II v performs an act of perceptlon ? . The slmilarity in a high degree exists between such well-known objects as a cow and a bOB gavaeU8) etc. Verbal testimony. is inference because the object indi. between a cow and a bos gavaeU8. carry any weight. As is a cow. Comparison. a t fi r8t Sight t hrough't 1 s speCla Slml arlty to a cow which we have often perceived. On the ground of complete sImilarity we ne.l ference "gives us the knowledge of an unperenc~rr::ony a. In reply we maintain that it is not in a bos gavaellS unperceived that we find the real matter of comparison.94 INDIAN LOGIC.er say " a cow is like a cow". for both . on perceiving a bos gavaeus we notice its similarity to a cow. '1 . Comparison is not identical with inference because the former is est!l bhshed through the compendious expression" so/' c. for it has no precise standard.mpa. J~­ "word" or v~rfa. for comparison is estabhshed through similarity in a 111gh degreE'. I . and on the grouud of partial similarity we do not say" a mustard seed is lIke Mount Mera.ial. that is.g.rison a. e. The bos gavaeus in. This characteristic distinguishes it from inference which furmshes us with knowledge of an unperoeived thing through that of a thing perceived.~ . perceptlOn. This use of 'so' makes it clear that comparison is a distinct means of right know ledge. Verbal testimony. te!:.bers of the bos gavaeu9 class is not a result or perception. we maintain. We recognize a bos gavaeus Inference' . seek to establish the unperceIved by means of Is companson a. Some hold that comparison is not a separate means of knO\vledge. NYAYA. ll. on the ground of considerable similarity we do~ not say "a buffalo is like a cow". some say.-SASTRA. The matter of comparison is similarity. In reply it is urged that we cannot deny comparison as a separate means ot knowledge. mere the perceived. Just as in inference there is a certain conneotion .. IS not different from inference. but the consequence of a distinct knowledge called comparison. This knowledge of a previously unperceived object derived through its similarity to a perceived object is said to be nothing but inference. some say. In inference as well as in verbal testimony we pass to an unperceived object through an object which is perceived. ANCIENT SCHOOL. Verbal testimony too enables us tel acquire the kno'\Vledge of an unperceived object through that of a word which is perceived (heard). tor how otherwise does the name bos gavaeus convey the general notlOn of the ammal called bos gavaeus 1 That the name bos gavaeus signifies one and all mem. siderable or part.on is regarded by some as not a means of right knowledge. for when one notices the likeness of a cow in Is co. CHAP. which we notice the similarity is first perceived." Hence compari. This objection does not.

ho\Vever. presumpmeans of rIght' knowtion (" arthapatti").not inference. For instance. In reply we say that there is a great difference between inference and verbal testimony. seven islands.g.. In the case of verbal testimony there is no perception of the connection. ocean." \i\re think of the animal signifie:l by it. but because it comes through words spoken by a reliable person. of the same kind as that involved. for instance. The connection between a word and. The know ledge gained by verbal testimony IS correct. fire). inasmuch as rumou'l" is included in verbal testimony. fire). is obvious to perception. paradise. signifies the country of that name.. so in verba] teBtimony there is connection between a word and the object signified by it. is not obvious to perceptim). nevertheless the "Word and the animal are not connected with each other bv nature 'Or necessity. It is not a separate means of knowledge. which is the basis of verbal testirpony.CATEGORIES: THEIR EXAMINATION 95 between a sign (e g. smoke). smoke). it is said. . etc. but the connection between the word and the country is not perceived. e. . We accept them as realities not simply becaus£:' they are known through words. the inference that "the hill is fiery because It i'3 smoky" IS based on a certam connection between smoke and fire. The connection invoi ved in inference is not. and the thing signified by it (e g. but partakes of the gen-eral characteristics of verbal testimony and is a special kind of it. probability (" sambhava") ledge? and non-existence (" abha.herefore differ from inference. In the case of inference. for instance. Verbal testimony docs not t. probability and non-exibience are included in inference. the object signified by it. ultrtrakurus. originated. Otner means.Moreover the connection hetween a \\ ord and the object sIgnified by it is conventional and not a natural one We acknowledge that a word indicates a certam object.va "). which is actually perceived in a kitchen or elsewhere. The word uttarakuru. but we deny that the object is naturally or necessarily connected with the word. as the latter lies beyond our observation. The connection between a sign and the thing signified. therefore. Rumour is an assert jon which has come from one to another without R any indication of the source from which it first umour. Hearing. but because they are spoken ot by persons who are relIable Hence verbal testimony IS not inference. m verbal testimony. Hence verbal testimony is . There are. \he word "cow. In reply we say that the mE5ans of right knowledge are !eally four. Some say that the means of right knowledge are more ~han four because there are such other means of right Are there anv other knowledge as l'umour (" aitihya "). whICh i'3 the basis of inference. the connection between a sign (e. but the sign in one is different from the sign in the other. and the thing signified (e. not simply because it comes through the medium of words.g.g. human settlements. is natural and necessary. on this tree there live goblins. and presumption. In the case of verbal testimony the special point is to deCIde whether the sign (word) comes from a relia bIc person. The two agt'ee in conveying kno\vledge of an object through its sign. nymphs.

y~ the mark which characterises other objects. a5 there is no object ·which is known by it. from the declaration PresumptlOn. we reply. " If there is no cloud there ". the non-existence of one establishes the . said distinguish the object which is not macked. CHAP.vants to bring a pot which is not blue The absenoe of blueness is a ma.' Some say that presumption is not vc1lid as It leads to ullcertainty. Suppose a person . e g.iII be no rain "-from this we are said to presumo that if there is a cloud there \vill be rain But it often happens that a cloud is not followed by rain So presumption does. e. it is. In reply we say. Though a mark may distinguish the object which is marked. ANCIENT SCHOOL. If you say that the non-existence (absence) of a mark is impossible where there was no mark at all. mark. "If there is no cloud there will be no rain. Presumption is the deduction of one thing from the declaration of another thing. it ic:." From this we are e'lltitled to presume that if there is rain there must have heen cloud. because the non-existence (absence) is possible in reference to a mark elsewhere.ts in cogni~ing the existence of a thing from that of another thing in which it is included. Thus an object may be known through the non-existenoe (absenoe) of its. Probability is inference because it is the cognizance of a part from that of a whole with which it is inseparably connected. ill . that if there is uncertainty it is due to the objectors supposing t·hat to be a presumption which is not really so.96 INDIAN LOGIC. A pot is said to be not blue only in reference to its having been blue previously. talk of a mark being non-existent (absent) if it \vas previously existent (present)." one's so-called presumption will be an invalid one. not so. existence of the other.rk which will enable him to mark out the particular pot he wants to bring. But how can we distinguish an unmarked object by the nonexistence (absence) of the mark which it does not possess 1 In reply we say that non-existence serves to mark out an object ttnmarked b.t of a dro1fa of which it is a fourth part.t 'unless there is cloud there is no rain. Of two opposite things. NYAYA-SASTRA. Some Kay that non-existence is not a means of right knowle€ lge. In reply I When thure is an obstru('tlon of (>loud by wind. A blue pot is distinguished by the blueness which is its' mark. thn.g. It does not differ from inference smce both pass from a perceived thing to t\n unperceived one through a certain connection ProbabdUg COIlSi::. e g. We can. the non-existence (absence) of the mark cannot. Presumption is thus found to be the knowledge of a thing derived through the consideration of it from the opposite standpoint.' we deduce that' if there i~ ram there must h"we been cloud. of the cloud which was'to have brought it down. drops of water ('annat faU spite of thoir weight. kno\vledge of the measure of an Ci4haka from tht1. the non-existeno. :Cut if one pretends to presume that "if there is a cloud there will be rain. says an objector. and to exclude the other pots which are blue. ProbabilIty. according to the objectors lead to nncertainty. n.e of Non-exlstence or nega~ rain indicates the existence of an obstruction 1 tlOn.

smell of the nose. Moreover. . "Previously J saw the The soul 1S different from the senses. the "I " or soul is distinct from the senses. and (0) absolute nega. is different from the senses each of which can apprehend only one object.ya-va:l'tika." but that blueness mav exist elsewhere. A sense 1S 1 In the Nye. and so on.tlOn (atyantiibhava). 2-2-12. jar and now I touch it" : such recogmtIOn will be impossible If "I" is not different from the eye which cannot touch and from the skin which cannot see. eXlstence and non-exIstence are both spoken of as things. is an exclusive object of the eye.t apprehends colour. sound of the ear. 7 . but the "I" can apprehend many object::s. and (2) negatlOn of correla. as there is a fixed relation between a sense and its object. In other words. and there is DO necessity for assuming a soul distinct from the eye for the purpose of explaining the apprehension of colour. There is no doubt. which confers unity on the various kinds of apprehension.-~ika. e.For instance. In repIy we say that the soul is certainly distinct from the senses. (1) pragabhava. hea. a. we perceive non-existence as a mark antecedent to the production of a thing.tpal'ya. prior non-exiRtenoe.tence (2) The Objects of RIght Knowledge (prameya).r sound.g. and in virtue of such relation the sense cannot apprehend more than one object. for instance.·tS. negation (abhlivCJ) is divided into (1) negation of identity Itadiitmyabhava). and (2) pradhvumsabhava. In the Nya:'Ta·siiLra. I-I-I. a 'ilimg is said to be perceived by the satne m'eans as the existenc~ of it. that is. The Soul. 1-1-1. 2·2·9. it would have been seen. "Not blue" is no doubt possible oniy in reference to "blue. the" I H can see colour. Hence the" I" or soul. It infers one thing from the absence of another thing through the mutual connection of the two things. we can talk of this pot being not" blue in contrast to that pot which is blue. the non-existence of a thmg before it is brought into existence. It is the eye tha. a fixed relation between a sense and its object. as follows: If a particular thing existed. and the latter is subdivided into (a) prior negation (pragabhava) . When we say that there will be a jar. it is not seen' therefore it does not exist. the non-existence 01 colour is pelceived by the eye. that is.tion (sarhBargZibMi1)a). Colour. not soul beoause we can apprehend an object through both sight and touch. (b) posterior negation (pradhvamsabkava). the non·existence of.nd in the Nyaya-bhiiS\ya. posterior non-existence or destruction. Some say that the soul is not different from the senses. we perceive the mark of non-existence of the jar in the halves (parts) which are destined to compose it. In the Nyaya vartika. and so on. Non-existence or negation is not however a separate means of knowledge It is included in inference. 97 we say that it is not so. non-existence or negation (abhCiva) i'5 divided into two kinds 1 viz.OATEGORIES: THEm EXAMINA'l'ION. that 18 the disappearanoe of a thing after it has come into exi::.

in some cases.time. the mind cannot be the agent as it is atomic in nature. to be a quality of the soul. Henoe the sense is not the abode of knowledge. NYAYA-SASTRA. If the body were soul there should be release from sins as soon as . The soul is all-pervading. If we supposed this mind to be the abode of knowledge we could not call it an instrument in the acquisition of the same. we reply. sense-organs at a time. I can see an object by my eye and touch it by my skin. II. touching. on account of the absence of contact of the mind with many . tastes by the tongue. the body was destroyed But in reality a perThe body 18 not soul. An atomic agent cannot perform such diverse acts as seeing. it could not continue after the sense had been destroycd. you admit an agent distinct from the senses which are called its instruments. etc. it is to be concluded that the mind. CH"AP.. touohes by the skin and thinks by the "mind. J I . 'Hence two or more things are not perceived simultaneously although the soul which perceives them is all-pervading. Some say that the soul is not different from the mind inasmuch as the arguments which are adduced to estabThe sou~ IS dIfferent lish the soul are applicable to the mind as from the mInd. be identified with the mind~ Since an agent requires an instrument to accomplish & thing. knowing." The agent sees by the eye. Knowledge is not a natural quality of the body because it does t l' h not. affeot our position. Simi· lady knowledge does not abide in an object of sense) and does not belong to the mind. inasmuch as the sins purS'Ue him in his subsequent lives. says ~n objector. hearing. etc. can come in conjunotion with only one sense at it' . This verbal trick will not." Hence we must admit the agent (soul) over and above the Instrument (mind). and knowledge as a quality of an atom would in that case be imperceptible Knowledge must therefore be admitted. it is. smells by the nose. 0 y O?gs ne~ sense nor to Its object because It contmues even on their destruction. which is an instrument of our knowledge is an atom in dimension. a mere verbal trick to apply the name "mind" to that which is really the "soul. 1£ knowledge had been a quality of the sense. son is not freed from sins although his body is destroyed. Hence the body is not soul. But knowledge in the form of memory is found actually to abide even after the sense has perished. Though many objects can come in proximity with their corresponding senses simultaneously_ the mind. 110 doubt. continue quite as long as the T 11e sou 18 t e seat of b d d oes. If you call the agent" mind.. feeling. but it cannot perceive many things simultaneously. is. Know1edge b'e1 'ther t 0 a knowledge (cognitions). different from both the eye and the skin Let however the agent. hears by the ear. ANCIENT SCHOOL. As two or more things cannot be known (pereeived) simultaneously. The agent which sees the object and touches it. after all. by the principle of exclusion. well.98 INDIAN LOGIC." To explain the acts of seeing. The sense 0:(' instrument by whioh the act of thinking is performed is called the" mmd. which is ~n ' atom." you will have to invent another name to designate the instrument. Moreover.

Nothmg can offer obf.. grief \\ hich arise from the memory of t. receive obHtruction. If there had been only (me scnse.s of meriLcd action" AgalU. viz. H. heard sound. of thc past prove') thc pre-existence of the snm. being unable to come in contact with many senses at a time cannot produee many functions simultaneously. which is an atomic ~mb'::!tance. fiery.1 lof.e specml qualitIes of o b d' d f earth In other worlds there a.~ simultaneously. if we do not.ot perform different functions at once. ·/i}rlUma).n may not suffer its com. had there been only one sense. touch can perceive only those ) Compare-AU thp senses are only mochfica.>truction to a non-material all-pervading subs. ear. we often find a ma. all others being merely its forms It is. The senses are material subBtances inaf. not so because the objects of other senses are not perceived by touch (skin). Some 1 say that the sense.MINATION. etc. The things \\hich uged to e:\cite joy.} and are therefore matel'lal substances.nd unI!:'. But we can. Rut a blind man possessing the sense of 1.:.re beil1g~ whose eart~~ 0 Y IS rna e 0 bodtes are water. there is onh one senRe..unuch.n it. toueh (skin). then it could have seen colonr.ring. A maH who has committe'd a certain si. viz. hea. tongue are said to be mere modifications of touch (skin) which pervades them.il ing~ previously experienced A new-hom child manifests marks of joy. touch. This would be a " gain of unmerited action.'l. airy or etherea. touch (skin). Hence It is concluded that senses are many.1-ance. Our body IS Senses.CATEGORIES: THEIR EXA. This proves tha. smelling. Further. Moreover. that is.tions of toucb. Moreover. This is a . admit our soul to be eternal we shan be ('onfronled by many absurtlities such as "JoC)f'l of mer~ted action" (krla·hfi1I1') 811(1 "gain of unmE"ritedaction)) (akrtabl. tasting.equences m thIS hfe.-Democritus.. earthy because it possesses th. fear and grief in p[!'st lIfe continue to do so in tllls life The memor\. The senses receive obstruction from '\tall.. etc. and RO on. . are not many as all of them are depelldent on touch (skin). viz.n suffeL"ng the consequences of action which he never dIU m this life.)Uch cannot see colour. as they invariahlj The senses are materIal. 09 The soul ib immortal inasmuch as we find in a chud joy teul' Hnd Immortahty of the soul. we reply.(. The eye. Though our body i'3 composeu.. !lose and The senses are five.t thl:' ::senses are many_ The mind.." unJeR~ \ve believe tha.t hi~ ~oul did the action in his previous life."1. there is a soul continuing to his next life he will not suffer them at all. of all the fi ve el~ments we call it f'arthy owmg to the preponderance of earth .l. fear and grief This is inexpllCable uuJ('ss "e suppose that the chIld perceIving certain things in thIS hfe r('Hlembcl's the corresponding thmgs of its past life. Body. it wonlrl have in conjunction with the mind produced the functions of seeing.

n object which is in association with the body. viz. savour.g the visual sense apprehends a oolour by approaching it through the (ocular) ray.~e objects which are far off. the auditory sense on the ear-hole. Proceeding in this way we find that the earth. odour (smell). and jf the earth and water had -not possessed colour. the senses are five. while the tactual sense occupies the whole body. and touch which are cognised respeotively by the eye. NYAYA-SASTRA. (c) The processes-there are five senses involving fiye different processes. etc. and the skin (touch) is airy. it follows that they possess colour. nose. There are five object:" nz. viz. then it would have been impossible for us to see the earthy and watery things. that water does not possess three qualities but only oue quality. &Qund) smell (odour). and that the other elements too do. (d) The forms-the senses are of different forms. thE" ear is ethereal. Some say that the earth does not possess four qualities. VIZ. Had the earth possessed only odour (smell) and the water only savour (taste). the tongue is watery. why then the air and ether too are not visible ~ There is no rule that it is only the earth and water that can be mixed with fiery things: but that the air and ether cannot be so mixed. but it cannot percei. ear. and tangibility. olfactory gustatory and tactual. savour (taste). e.100 INDIAN LOGIC. There are therefore five senses corresponding to the five objects. The senses must be admitted to be five also on the following grounds :-(a) The characters of knowledge-there are five senses corresponding to the five characters or knowledge. visual. e. viz. however. the eye partakes of the nature of a blue ball. etc. We can. The earth possesses four qualities. the olfactory sense on the nose..g. li. Colour and tangibility are knO'\vn to be the qualities of fire while tangibility and sound belong respectively to air and ether. and the ear is not different from ether. how could we have seen them ~ Since we can see the earthy and the watery.~arious sites they occupy. that the earth really possesses four qualities. odour (smell). qual't" 1 les. ObjeetB of Sen8e. In 'waterthere are three · The 0 bJeots 0 sense: l' d t augl 'bil't their distribution.. colour. the gustatory sense on the tongue. which is apprehended by the nose. but of some other sense which can reach distant objects. In faot. do not each possess only one quality. (e) The materials-the senses are made up of different materials: the eye is fiery. In reply. water three. (b) The sites-the senses are five on account of the . air one. . an 1 y. auditory. If you say that the earth and water are visible~ because they are mixed with the fiery things which possess colour. savour (taste)~ f colour. perceive colour and sound from a great distance. taste (savour). each of them. co our. viz. the nose is earthy. which is apprehended by the tongue. CHAP. fire two. tongue and skin. and so on. We are competent to see only those things which possess colour. This is oertainly not the function of touch. oblects which are near (contiguous). and ether one. but possesses only one quality. while the tactual sense apprehends (l. The visual sense rests on the eye-baU. possess only one quality. ANOIENT SOHOOL. we say.

CATEGORIES: THEIR EXA. f ' mh' .~}" envy. Seeing that man does not often reap fruits proportionate to his "'1' • acts. P. Affection includes lust. that is. rna 19l1lty. The faults are divided into three groups viz. arrogance and carelessness. rUlts. As many cognitions are never produced at once.l 't would b e VIctim . J. mg to the soul.) IS not which was known before is known again no. the mind must be admitted to be one. Knowledge cannot be attributed to an unconscious instrument. the intellect. .. The series of births and deaths implied by transmigrat. caIIe d recogmtIOn .l\UNATION. Stupidity includes misapprehension. 1£ the mind had been possessed of magnitude.1. and stupidity.1UJmigrahon. it could ha'Ve come in contact with many senses at a time so that many The mInd IS an atom. .\'permanent. t his sort 0 f k nowe It is possible only if the intellect which knew an object in the past con tinues also at the present. . anger. Hence the intellect which recognizes objects is said to be permanent. 1.es . Bince this has been found to be impossible. Some maintain that the intellect is permanent. In reply we say that the intellect does not recognize objects. If there The mind 1$ one. the mind is an atom Faults. affection. Recognition would have been impossible if the intellect had been transitory.llinil. avarice. Aversion includes dlVlS1Qn.h~ faults: theIr sub· aviditv and covetousness. destruction of actions done by it (/crta-hani) . and suffering from actions not done by it (akrt'abhyagama). Transmigration belongs to the soul and not to the body.. TransmlgratlOn belong. 101 Intellect. hatred and' Imp]acability. A thing Intellect (buddh. Of the three. suspicion. Hence the intellect is not permanent. because it posses:-. If the 'bie. stupidity is the worst because it is only a stupid person who may be inBllenced by affection and aversion. but it must be admitted to be a quality of a conscious agent the soul. viz. . the capacity of recognizing objects. some maintain that the acts are entirely ~od IS the gIver of subservient to God (Isvara) 1 who alone can prohUlts. .ioll . I IS VIew IS oppose( . is possible only if the soul is eternal.·(J.t dees so. . had been more minds than one. aversion . I d ge IS .l. t 0 t wo sou I were d estructl unexpected chances. The mind being one. thev could have come in contact with many sen~es at a time so that lllany cognitions could have been produced simultaneously. 1 VIde t h em Wltr. but it is the sou] tha.. cognitions could have taken place simUltaneously. there are no simultaneous cognitions. if the intellect is persistent or permanent.. . .

~'l'eed from all debts. Emancipation. person who enjoys a sound M L The three debts are: (1) Debt to sages (r8i-rllrt)-which ('an be ('leared off nnly by tlndergomg a course of student lift".g. so the sacred fire \\ hich is maintained now will enable the maintainer to att. separation from the desirable. three debts which we must go on clearing off until the time of our d~cay and deat.t. '. death. because the sacrifices to be performed for clearing off our debts may be trusted to our soul. which BIrth IS pam.mancipation.h.. The fruit is not produced immediately because it is capable of being enjoyed after a lapse of time. and troubles are our constant companions while acti~ties pursue us throughout our life. I troubles and activities As soon as we pation. by others who say that if God were the only source of fruits. A person. II. there is no distress in . whose roots are now nourished with water. the senses are the instruments by which pain il:) experienced. of maintaining the sacred fire. B.iu heaven after death.102 INDIAN LOGIO..v so doing he will imagine that his soul is the sa. are addicted to the world which causes them various distresses through birth.th when the soul departs from our body Just as a tree.rlmt' of productIOn of e.crificinJ fire in which his physi cal actions are offered as oblations. He should retil'e from the world when he has trusted to his soul the sacrificE's which he used to perform to clear off his debts. TherE') is then no opportunity for us to attain emancipation.sure which often arises amidst pains Some persons. is the attainthe frUlts. etc.-hich pain resides. which is not possible until the time of dea. because it consists of our connection with the body. will produce fruits in future.. Some say that there is no opportunity for us to attain emancipation because of the continual pressure of our Attamment of emanci· debts. CHAP. (2) Debt to ods deva-rna -from . the senses and the iutellect.l. according to them. The fruit.~T for our emancipation. the senses and the intellect-fs necessarily a. Af. and the intellect is the agent which produces in us the feoling of pain Our birth-ns connected With the body. ANCIENT SCHOOL. In reply we say that there is no lack of opportumt. disease. does in reality pursuf' pain. ment of heavpn. Birth is nothing but pain. or in other worns. NYAYA-SAsTRA. thinking that pleasure is the summum bonum. bring us various distresses. are born we inrur. The body is the abode In . while old should refrain from all searches after sons. source of pain We do not altogE'ther deny plea. man could attain thou even without any acts Reconciling the two views we conclude that man performs <tcts which are endowed with fruits by (:od The acts do not produce any fruits by themselves: they become fruitful only through the grace of God. pleasure is a synonym for pain. connection with the undesirable. It is therefore clear that one who pursues pleasure. infirmity. wealth and retinue. he will liye on alms and find an ample opporhmity for effecting his own t..

but on the contrary there is conviction.conjointly or separately. . Likewise doubt about an object is said never to be produced if only the common or the uncommon properties are recognized. (3) Doubt (samsaya). of which the two kinds of tallness are attributes If there is ah:eady a knowledge of the man and the post. but with reference t:) itself it is a settled fact. In the minds of both a. 4. Tallness is certainly a property possessed in common by man and post. for knowledge is the vanquisher of doubt.OATEGORIES: THEIR EXAMINATION. if the irregularity is not settled in itself. Some say that doubt cannot arIse from the recognition of bt' 'd b common and uncommon properties. His opponent replies: there is no soul. if we see in the twilight a tall object which moves. the chance of an endless doubt owing to the continuity of its cause. It is said that doubt about an object is never produced.l0n properties con. When this is done. For instance. affection. for instance. if we see a tall object in the twilight we have no reason to doubt whether it is a man or a post. Emancipation is the condition of supreme felicity marked by perfect tranquillity and not tainted by any defile~ ment. . Hence there is no doubt. 103 sleep. for though tallness is a property posses'3ed in common by man and post. This is the way in which his emancipation is effected and supreme felicity secured. a cause of doubt. 1. A person. locomotion is a property which distinguishes a man from a post. viz. It is further said that doubt cannot arise either from conflicting testimonies or from the irregularity of perception and non-perception. On the other hand. The comn. Now the knowledge of similarity between the tallness of a man and that of a post presupposes a knowledge of the man and the post. by the true knowledge of the sixteen categories. but the tallness of a man is not identical With that of a post· it merely resembles It. it is devoid of its own ch:uacter and cannot ca·use douht. aversion and stupidity. . s ti n f doubt. The disputant and his opponent are qmte sure that their respective statements are correct. 18 Sa. Likewil'Je there is. For instance.l to e 1m. We at once decide that it IS a man. so there is no pres~ure of troubles and activities in one who has attained emancipation. does not arise from the irregularity of perception and non-perception. whether possY~le. D . they say. we do not doubt whether it is a man or a post. it is regular and cannot canse doubt. there cannot be any doubt about them. because In the irregularity itself there is regularity. In the case of conflicting testimonies there is. An irregularity may be designated as suoh with reference to something else. is able to remove hi~ misapprehensions. if both the common and uncommon propertieR of the object are recognized. according to them. 2. He is then no longer subject to any aotivity and is consequently freed from transmigration and pains. If the irregularity is settled in itself. Recognition of properties common to many objects is. Doubt. his faults. disappear. Suppose a disputant says: there is soul. a strong conviction on each side. they say.

the umpire and the audience are thrown into dOll bt by their conflicting statements. 3.104 INDIAN LOGIC. such as to hold disciples. Certain talkative people propound philosophies which are mutually opposed. It has been said that doubt cannot ari'Je from the irregularity of perception and non·pel'ception as the irregularity is settled in itself This objection is untenable. doubt must arise Similar arguments will apply to doubt arising from the recognition of uncommon properties alone. but is unable to penetrate into the precise characters of the statements Hence though the disputant and his opponent are both confident of their respective contentions. 2. while others violate all Rense of rectitude out of a bias for their own side. employ wranglings and cavils which do not tn themselves produce any profit or deserve any encomium. just as fences of thorny boughs are used to safeguard the growth of seeds. In the case of conflicting testimonies there is certainly a ground for doubt. 0 truth. NYAYA. we do not always recognize them. if there is no reference to the precise characters of the objects. (4) Discussion (vada). etc. ANOIENT SCHOOL. fellow-students and seekers of tho 8ummum bonum.. CHA. 1. It bas been urged that there is the possibility of an endless doubt inasmuch as its cause is continuous.. continue to exist. The recogm IOn 0 f propert' les common to many objects is certamly a cause of doubt. In reply we say that doubt does arise from the recognition ' Ii' 'bI of common and uncommon properties con~ D OUbt IS no ImpoSSl e. There is indeed a common (nondistinctive) knowledge about a man and a post suggested by the tall object. etc. as the irregula. • • tl 't' Jom y. preceptors. in our ~lsputatlOn agamst them.y submit his views for examination by simply expressing his curiosity for truth without an attempt to establish the views. When a disputant and his opponent make conflicting statements. such as common properties. II.rity cannot be con. there cannot be doubt. one is led to believe that both statements are worth consideration. A person desirous of knowledge ma. Wranglings and cavils may be employed to keep up our zeal for cavtr.8. With whom discussion? {5) Wrangling and Cavil (jalpa-vita.P. I The epithet "unenvious" excludes those who do not seek truth" but desire . Seeing that these people have not at~ t~ined t~ue kno:vledge. U f r d wrang lng an . but there is no precise (distinctive) knowledge about them Precise knowledge (that is. Unle~s there is recognition of the common properties. discussion may be held even without an opposing side. kno'wledge of the precise character which distinguishes a man from a post) being absent. (. 4.:'11ed by mere verbal tricks. In case of a necessity for the search of truth. and are not freed from faults. we may. The irregularity though settled in itself does not lose its irregular character until the objects to which it is related are removed.-SASTRA. One should hold discussions with unenviou8 I persons. In reply we say that though materials of doubt.'1J4ij).

lone a. or is enclosed by. Some say that parts alone are realities and that there is no whole Tb behind them. if there were no whole. it may itself be divided into parts. Suppose that the parts There 1S C'el'tam y So 1 I T hSlllce ' . Even at the dissolution of the world (praZaya). but an armv consistina of numerous soldiers or a forest con0 sisting of numerous trees is seen. be regarded as real.' the use of 'one' will not vani. . \ In reply Ak~apacla says thPut nothmg would be perceptIble 1£ tile . We say' one jar. is yellow said :. is not tenable because the terms "innerside" and " outerside" are not applioable to an eternal atom which is altogether different from an ordinary thing a oonstituent of \vhich encloses. we reply. whereas the atoms do not possess bulk and are individually not perceptible.rts a one are rea. and these atoms being called 'one jar. so a single atom may not be porceptible. Now the atoms which possess no bulk are not perceptible. Moreover. Hence the parts alone must. does not· hold good because the soldlers and trees possess bulk ann so are perceptible. we could not have held or pulled an entire thing by holding or pulling a part of it. it is stated that there can uevel' come a time when there will be an utter annihilation of things. The analogy. ( 1) Parts and Whole (avayava and ava?/avi n). . another constituent of it. 105 36.re in some parts and green in other parts.' 'one man. u (2) Atoms (paramattu). TOPICS INCIDENTALLY ffi'XAM}NED. In the Nyaya-siitra 4-2-16. Consequently the thing which is said to cons~st merely of parts is also not perceptible. aocording to them.bsurd to conclude that because soldiers and trees are perceptible in the mass. then -the contradIctory qualities of yelLowness and greenness could not have belonged to it simultaneously.sh. !f the tree were one whole. -6ea~!~l. . Those who argue that an atom must possess parts because it can come in conjunction with another atom only in some of its parts. but it neither obstructs anything nor is repelled by anything. If anyone were to say that just as a single soldier or a single tree may not be seen from a djstance. We must therefore admIt a whole beyond its parts. things will contiuue to exist in the form of atoms. until we reach the atoms which are the ultimate parts. . so that the question of inner side or outer side does not arise at all.t which is not divisible into parts: it is a whole without parts The view that an atom cannot be devoid of parts because it is pervaded by ether (akasa) in its inner and outer sides. An atom is tha. It is a. A tree.' etc This use of 'one' would vanish if there were no whole. a. It is no doubt admitted that the ether is aU-pervading. these latter again into further parts and so on.TOPICS INCIDENTALLY EXAMINED. for instance. en a part IS fixed dimension. should bea~ in mind that their argument gives rise to . to avoid this conclusion we must admit the existence of a whole beyond the parts. no t 0 f a whole beyond its pa. atoms too are perceptible in the mass. 1 whole were denied. but a jar consisting of numerous atoms will be perceptible.

. e.. 'I-. be any past or future time. the word' C?W 'deno t es t. The present time is indicated by what continues... ANCIEN'! SCTIOOL.1 (3) The Three Times (kala)..hA nhi"" . and in the absence of pel'ce-ption all kinds of knowledge would be impossible. In reply we say that there is the present time. and the future by what has not yet begun. If an :..:1 . Hence the present time is established by the principle of reductio ad ab8?1rdum..lthough repeatedly divided H. as the past and Th • future times are related to it.R t. A thing a.-sut1'3 by Viitsvii It • A.. and the future time which will be taken up by the fruit in traversing the remaining distance.ri :I:'h .(:! ""1". time ' • • When a fruIt. This would lead to the fallacy of an infinite regt'es" ::tion which should be avoided. tura is that which succeeds it.nd subdivided does not lORe itself. Some say that there is a fi:x~ connection between words and their 1..t. a tegresaus ad infinitum which is not proper.1 __ . If the past is dE"flned as that which is not the future and the future is defined as that which is not the past._1...::tmnr.. There remains a particle called atom \Iy"hich does not perish even at thc dissolution of the world. some 1 say.in."' .. because when a thing fans we can know only the time through which it ha. I The sutras from 2-1-39 to 2-1-43 which oontain a. CHAP It. "'+ .ween a word and its ell ar ~eanmg.. Hence if there iq no pre~e-nt time.".106 INDIAN [. and the fuhshed .. [According to commentators two at..h A.g meaning na.0010. critical examination of the pre!'lent time (vartamiina) seem to ha.. There is no intervening di$. Hence ...rhere is therefore a fixed connection between a word and its meaning. There is.oms make a dvya"l!uka (dyad or binary compound) and three dvyar. the dennit. NYAYA·SAdTRA.. there ca.that which precedes the present."ye must admit the present time to which the -past and future are related. Some deny the present fallen and th~ time through which it will fall.tukas make a trya. (4) Words and their Mea.... certain distance. Hence they say there is no 'Present time.s .ve been interpolated into the Nyiioya. The preAent time is indicated bv the very existence of things. those parts again must be supposed to be divisible into further parts.sare"!-u (triad or a tertiar:v com-pound).nings (sabiliirtlut).ion would involve a fallacy of mutual dep~ndency.... there cannot. the past by what has been finished.tural ? the ammal of that name.tom is held to he dIvisible into parts... • meanings.. The past is e present time estab..nnot be any perception which ('an arise only in connection with a thing which is present in time. A particular word bears a partiTs tue connectIOn be1 '.. ~n4> ___ 1. falls from a tree we recognize only the past time taken up by the fruit in traversing a. a jar or any other thing. AU things which we perceive are composed of f1'yasareYfus . but It does not denote a horse. If the present time is denied.tance which thE" fruit can traverse at the so-called present time. no present time."'~n .. for mstance..

So the connection between a word and its meaning is nOli everywhere unHorm. tS faults erIa S 0 sacr! ec . it declares" let the oblation be offered after sun-rise. etp A son is sure to be produced as a result of performing the sacrifice. and the defect in the materials consists in the fuel being wet. Let a person offer the oblation before sun-rise or after sun~rise. 1 f . the word" yava » is used by the aryas to denote a long-awned grain. H Let the first hymn be recited thrice." "let the oblation be offered before sun-rise. indicate that the time agreed upon should not be altered. he can perform the sacrifice before sun-rise or after sun-rise according to his agreement or desire. is eaten up by the motley-coloured dog. (5) The Veda. there are many contradictory mjullctians in the Veda." etc." "let the last hymn be recited thrice. if he has agreed upon doing it at either of the times. which never occurs in the Veda. that the oblations are eaten up by dogs.fi ceo nef t 'ill th e ac t conSIS . word is understood. but by the mlecchas to denote a panic-seed. or for explaining a matter briefly expressed. In reply we say that the so-caned untruth in the Veda comes from some defect in the act. but there is no tautology in it. I It is interestin to note how tre N"sva·dastra defends the Veda from the . ween a ward and' Its meamng l~ co~ven lana and not natural The connectIOn IS fixed by man and is not inseparable.t . Besides. If there is any repetition there. If these defects are avoided. defect in the operataI' (officiating pdest) consists in his not being a learned man.l Some say that the Veda. is unreliable.TOPICS INOIDENTALLY EXAMINED. The Veda cannot be charged with the fault of contradiction if it enjoins such alternative courses. There is therefore no untruth in the Veda Neither is there any contradiction. The rt!is ~ aryas and mlecchas use the same word in different senses. and at the same time" the oblation offered after sun-rise. butter being not fr-esh. For Illstance.. Moreover there is no universal untformity of connection between a word and its meaning. the Veda affirms that a son IS produced \\ hen a sacrifice for the sake of a son (putresti) is performed. The deprecatory texts. 107 In reply we say that it is through convention that the meaniit"Rg • of a. 1S eaten up by the brown dog. remuneration to the officiating priest being small. e.. in sacrificing not according to rules. contradiction and tautology. it is either for completing a certain number of syllables. t' 1 ventional. There is also tautology such as "let the first hymn be remted thrice." etc." "let the last hymn be recited thrice" -such instanc. Two alternative courses being open to him." "the oblation offered before sun-rise. as it involves the faults of Is the Veda unreliable? untruth.es embody a useful repetition. etc. Tautology means a useless repetition. operator or ma• 1 Tha V e da mvo vas no t . The connection beThe ('onnect. It often happens that a son is not produced though'the sacrifice has been performed." etc. lOn 18 con. There may be re-inculcation m the Veda.g.g. e.

there is nothing so efficacious as the Sarvajit saorifice.s recited the Sama hymn. e. the life of fire. The valedictory {stuti) is a speech which persuades us to adopt a certain course of action. it enables us to obtain everything and to vanquish everyone.108 INDIAN LOGIC. The authors (lit. tion of all injunction or the repetition of that which has been enjoined.t which exhorts us to adopt a certain course of action [as the means of attaining good]. but alas! the Caraka priests first took the sprinkled butter which was. and (3) they had the desire of communicating their knowledge of the truths. perform the fire-sacrifice. valedictory. e~crlp lve a1 ava a . viz. who wer~ reliable persons. The deprecatory (nindii) is a speech which persuades us to a. "Non-eternal. e. who desires paradise. by acquainting us with the undesirable consequences of neglecting it. An injunction (vidhi).an tlve (anuvada). Re-inculcation may consist of the repeti. (2) they had great kindness for living beings. viz. . ANCtENT SOHOOL. the medical science prescribes correct remedies. illustrative. as it were. etc. ] caspeech. The two main divisions of the Veda are: (1) hymn (sainh£ta) . t' (th -a) d re-mcu . The first is called verbal re~inoulcation and the second objective reinculcation. not eternal" this is a verbal re-petition. and . IS tha. (2) ritual (Brahma~). .g. the obstruction of which by some particular person led to .'ells or mantras and the medica! f science because of the reliability of thelr · b'}'t Th re1 1& 1 l:y 0 the auth ' Spe11' . The illustrative (parakrti) is the mentioning of a course of action." Re-incnlcation (amtVlida) is the repetition of that which has been enjoined by an injunction. and . . "By this the Brahmana. etc. The Veda. Vedaeestablished ors. deprecatory. The narrative (puralcalpa) is the mentioning of some thing as oommendable on account of its antiquity. "By the Sarvajit sacrifice gods conquered all. H Non-eternal. the injunctive . but the Sarvajit sacrifice is extolled in such a way that \Ve are persuaded to perform it. The ritual portion ad~e princIple of claSSI.dopt a certain course of action.s are reliable like the &t. s count eract pOlSon." Here there is no direct command on us. which may be either mandatory or pJrmissive.ticatlOn of the VedlC 'dl. the w . the sages. on presenting oblation one is to take the fat first and the sprinkled butter afterwards. etc.mits of three sub-divisions. CHAP II. e. Here the foolish course of action adopted by the Caraka priests should serve as a warning to other priests who ought to a void the course. "let him. . ') d ." This is a mandatory injunction. NYAYA-SASTRA..g.g. one who performs any other saorifice neglecting the Jyot~~oma falls into a pit and decays there." Here one is persuaded to perform the Jyoti~~oma sacrifice the neglect of which brings about evil conse ql1ences. The sages themselves were reliable because (1) they had an intuitive perception of truths.The anthority WhICh belongs to them is derived from their authors. possessing the character of extinction "-this is an ohjecti ve repetition. and narrative.bad consequences. Description (arthavada) is of four kinds. e g. by extolling its consequences.. e. et c.g. (~t fbt.

b ' 'feste d by t he concus. (2) is cognised by one of our senses (the ear). Hence the non-exIstence (destruction) of a jar. Some say that the so-called beginning of a sound is merely a manifestation of it. that which is really eternal belongs to thl'ee times. and (3) is spoken of as possessing the properties of an artificial object. You cannot suppose the concussion to be the manifester and sound themamfested. We do not say that whatever is cognised by our sense is non-eternal: our intention is to say that . acute. Others agam sav that sound arises from the conCUSSiOn of elements. cussion of two hard substances. eternal and capable of beiuCf manifested. that is. according to the Nya. But the proof is impossible a'S a sound is heard at a great distance. arises from the conSound IS non -eterna. is a quality of th~ substance in which it abIdes. is not really eternal.g au axe and a tree. It is however legitiIDa..Ya-sutra 2-1-14. and that one sound produces another sound. is eternal (indestructible). require~ no abode. Rut the non-existence (destruction) of a Jar does not belong to three tUlles as it was impossible before the jar was broken.ed as 8. When. In e terIla . unless you can proye that the concussion and sound are simultaneous.l. d by replv we say that not a 11 t h'mgs cogmse our senses are non-eternal ~but only those that belong to a certain genus'! A jar.uthoniative. e. is non-eternal because (1) it has a beginning. ut IS mere1 y mam SIon of two hard substances.e. There are conflicting opinions about the nature of sound.the medical SCIence Hence like the spens and medical science the Vedas mnst be accept. ). it is aU-pervading. for instanc~. I. e. which began when the jar was broken. sound does not really Sound havmg a begm. jar-ness) which is eternal.1 . and so on until the last sound is heard at a great distance. and. So sound is not manifested by the concussion. is subject to production and destruction. Others say that sound like smell.its genus (Le. (6) Sound (aabda). In reply it IS said that the concussion doE'S not manifest but produce sound. Sounu. . etc. \ve perceive a jar. is non-eternal because we peroeive it as 1 The aphorism (Nyiya-siitra 2-1-17) may also be interpreted as follows:Sound is nOll-eternal because it is inferred to advance in a serIes. Whatever is cognised by our senses is non-eternal this is also said to be an unsound argument. we perceive also b Y oU1f senses IS non. and is capable of being mamfesteu Sound is said by others to be a quality of ether and to be subject to production and destruction like knowledge.te to suppose that sound is l)roduced by the conoussion. even after the concussion of the substances has ceased. Sound bemg ~ognlSed stance. for in. Some say that sound IS a qualIty of ether and that The nature of sound. which has a beginning. nmg is non-eternal. etc. Look! the non-existence (destruction) of a jar. In reply It is said that.g i5 described as grave. Some say that It is not true ~hat whatever has a beginning is noneternal.egm. etc.

NYAYA-SASTR. Artlficlal propertIes at· It is often alleged that we attribute to eternal trlbuted to sound.xes are also words (PiJ. You cannot say that sound really existed before utterance. because it does not belong to a further genus named jarness-ness. Sound is cognised in that manner (i. If sound were eternal it would be perceived before utterance.110INDIl. object to sound does not make it non-eternal. Hence sound is produced even in a vacuum which is devoid of smell.D. The letters ended with an affix 1 form a word (pada) which is of two kinds. II. according to them. Hence we do not in reality attribute to eternal things the properties of artificial objects. . On the ground of the inaudibility: reproducibilityand imitability.y be transformed. The reason why the sound produced in a vacuum does not reach our ears. is produced by the contact of two hard substances. are reproduced or imitated by his pupil. Similarly sound is non-eternal. I 0 b' t h' mgs t 1 Ie propert' les 0 f an ar] jcct. It IS saId that the attribution of the properties of an artificlctl . The transformation takes place by substitution things cognised by our sense as advancing in a. but was covered by some veiL for we do not notice any such veil Some say that sound should be regarded as eternal because there is traditionar-y teaching. But jar-ness which is cognised by our sense is not non-eternal. In reply it is pointed out that the sounds. belonging to the genus jar-ness.\. and air. CHAP. certain sounds which are found to be repeated by his pupil after a long interval. we speak of the extension of ether as we speak of the extension of a blanket. the sounds must be pronounced to be non-eternal.e.:l. This repetition. In reply we say that when we speak of the extension of ether. Sound has not for its substratum any of the tangible substances. would be impossible if the sounds were perishable. The fact of having an in· tangible substance for its substratum. t'fi CIa . we really mean that the extension belongs to an artificial thing which has for its substratum the ether. In assimilating an affix the letters ma. though its substratum is the intangible ether. A teacher delivers. Its substratum soJ!~. viz.ching. (7) Word (pada). sound advances like a wave). is that there is no air to carry it. One sound "produces another sound. is no bar to the sound being non-eternal. fire. and hence sound is nrmeternal.g. Sound is therefore non-eternal. nor do we notice any veil which covers it. and a verb. in the form of a lecture. . because neither do we perceive it before utterance.lini 2-4:-82). taste. ANCIENT SCHOOL. 1 The indeolinables (a?:yaya) which drop their a. water. earth. substratum of is ether which pervades all space. because it is ('ognised by our sense as belonging to the genus called sound~ness. series are non~etE>rnal. and touch-the qualitie-s of tangible substances. e.v iz. and so on until the last sound ceases owing to some obstacle.N LOGIO. colour. Sound. \vhich have not been audible after their delivery by the teacher. a noun. Trndltlonary tea. Sound is in fact non-eternal.

'J'he form (akrti) is that which is calleel the token of the genus. taste. pro-eminence is given to the genus (type). III (ade-sa) . Cowhood is a genus (or type) whbh Genus. and connotes th~ genus (type). An inrlwidual (vyakti) is that whjch hag a definite form and is the abode of particubr qualities. the eye. It IS asked wlut is the real signification of a word-an individual. In other words. tremulousness. a. an " that cow is going "-here " that" can be used only in reference individual cow.:lS its function is limited by its oontact.havati).g. uecauf:io it is only in rel:lpect of iudl viti uall-) that we can make any statement e. " The eye is said by some to be a material substance inasmuch • -. certain collocation of the dewlap which is a form. In order to convey a general notion. co\'\ hood for instance. a form and a genu. velocity or elasticity. We cannot recognize the genus of a formless substance A genus or type (jiiti) is that whose nature is to produce the same ~ conception. In practical concerns much importance is attached to the form. word-a genus. denotes the individual. In reply we say that the word signifies all the three. Others say tha. e. The F genus. 0 vacat~s a place which is occupied by its substitute avo What does a \yord signify ~ A word presents to us au inrZinidual. touch. Some say that the eyes are not two: the conceit of duality arises h t? from the single organ of vision being divided by the bone of the nose.TOPICS INCIDENTALLY EXAMINED. exeroises it. An mdi vIdual Indivldual.g we use such exprcssionq a'3 'this is a cow' and • this is a horse. because the destruction of one does not cause the destruction of the other.'J (t~1pe). smell. like any other material substance. In reply we say that e t e eyes wo the eyes are really two. and not by modlfication (vikara). for if we did not take genus into consideration the word cow might denote any individual of any kind. Others hold that the \. though prominence is given to one of them For the purpose of distinction the individual is prominent.s Ar .dual or a form? = remind<. Seeing a cow somewhere we acquire a general notion of cows (i e. solidity. is c1n~1 sub3tance which is cognised by the senses as a limited abode of colour. is recogmzed by a orm. As ~" {<tct the word ordmarily presents to us the form. e g.ord must denote genus (t'ype). Now. an in- What is expressed by to (8) The eyes (cak~u~).' only with reference to the forms of the cow and the horse. its form (limbs) and i~s genus or type (cowhood or cow-type). The word 'cow' dIvi. weight. us of all indIvidual (a four-footed animal). derive knowle~ge of COW)lOOU) This general notion enables us on all subsequent occaSlOns to recognize individual cows. in blw + ti (bhu + t£ 1.t the wor(1 denotes form by which an entity is recogni"ed.. substance t but it is not seen when the eJ' e is not connected. underlies all cows. a form 01' a genus (type) ~ Some say that the word denotes an individual. A Is the eye a materIal thing is seen when it has contact with the eye.

by personal experience. . present aI. sound. That is to say. Hence in spite of the eye being .ll to mind other.t which pa. then various sorts of knowledge could have as permanent entities existed simultaneously. 0 king. NYAYA SASTRA. called to mind their previous births-or by outward aid as when others eontmue to remind one who is by nature forgetful-or by the impression made by the greatness of some occasion. Nagasena.ined him. as when one by nature I 2 . possessioq" relation of protector and Vide Nyaya-siitra. that such and such a colour. ANCIENT SCHOOL. A thing which was known before. or as we remember the day of our convel'Sioo-by the unpression made by joy.ercise. Compare-The king said: < In how many ways. as when the Venerable Ananda.anent entity and knowledge a luaotion bf it. it could have apprehended only those things which coincided with itself in bulk. 3-2-1. awakened by such causes as attention. a.rti) belongs to t.112 INDIAN LOGIC. CRAP. Akf?apada opposes them by saying that the intelleet. (10) Memory {smrti). there is no impossibmty for it to apprehend the great and the small (9) Intellect (buddhi). So it is contended that the eye is a non-material substance. or on seeing a camel or an ox Or aD ass we ca. or any others who had that power.he soul which possesses knowledge of the past.s like themor by difference of appearance as when we remember. that is. context. and there would have been no cessation of knowledge or recognition.or from similantyof appearance.rk or some other sign-or from effort to ~ecollect. as when Olle remembers tha. But we find it can apprebend things of greater and smaner bulk. This sort intellect? of identifying knowledge is called recognition. if the intellect is permanent. n. as when one remembers that which gave him pleasure-or by the impreSSIOn made by sorrow. the soul. If knowledge were not different from the permanent intellect. Others say that If the eye had been a material substance. we cannot a4mit the intellect to be a perm.. ex. Memory is Memory. marks. yet the rays issuing from the eye reach the things to their entire extent. is tion of the permanent known now as the Identical thing.a material substance. KnowJedge which is a function of the inte11ect is not different from the latter. whioh is possible only if the intellect which existed in the past continues also at the present time. smell.t Memory (8m. as on seeing one like them we call to mInd the mother or father or sister or brother. as when one who is by nature forgetful is reminded by others and then himself remembers-or by a. Finding the absurdity of snch contmgencies. function only in virtue of its contact with things.s when we recognize a draught bullock by a brand ma. which is an unconscious instrument. does memory spring up?' 'In SIxteen ways. Some philosophers 1 [the samkhyas] maintain that the intellect is permanent as it is capable of recognizing ob Is knowledge a. cannot recognize objects recognition being really a function of a conscious agent. taste or touch belong to such and such a thing-or by the knowledge of speech. likeness.td future. signs. sign. as kings remember thell' coronation day. In reply we say that though the eye does not coincide with things which are greater or smaller in bulk. or the c(lvoted woman Khajjuttara. funcjects.

Intervention-such as a sheath reminding us of the sword. E:'Cerdse-is the constant repetition i!lthich coniirms an impresSIon.12 a kmg an'! his attend&nts. or an odour because one haa smelt or a touch because one has felt it.E. P08se. AUen:ti~n-enabl~s ~s t. Sign-may be (I) connected. . l:J' :. and merit and demerit.o fix our mind on an object by restraming It trom wandermg away to any other object.B. Entreaty-reminding . tear. Desire and aversion-re:ninding us of one whom we liked or hated.say: . Naga.s percoived 1t. U3 protege.ss-as the image of Devarlatta dravm on a board reminds us of the real person. or(4) oppJ2ite. chapter 7. Rhys Davids. separatIOn.nd the non-existent is a sign of the bxistent by 1/he relation of cD"!:.pt-remmdmg us of one from whom some thing has been or will be receivbd. at nhe sight of goods deposited.tIOn. Brmg the book here:~ and remind themselves out of that-or by a pledgE'." . the memory of that which exceeded. 122-123.vhen.g.18 of that whioh was . Context-Is the connection of subjects such as proof (pram-ana) that.bsequency-a'3 sprinkling the ric~ and poanding it in a wooden mort:' r Seliu..Dd :1nd. 8 . . Protector and Proc?!Je-wch . mtervention.USOO them.1.TOPICS INCIDENTALLY EXAMINED.e oue has seen it. an arm is a r:. v as writing.'.. or a concept because one ha.tion. etc. l. Bece:1.l. wife Similar employment-as of a. smoke is a sign of fire with l~hich it is connected. (2) inseparable (lntimate).ltation. or a sound because one ha. as when accountants do set sums by their knowledge of figures-or by learnmg by heart J as the repeaters 01 the scriptures by their Rkill in learning by heart recollect so much-or by mec. which is to be proved (lJ'lameya). W.ratwn-aR of hu"IJ[l. forgetful is made to recollect by bemg urged agam and again: "try and think of it" --or by calculA. pp.)~ition. Pleasure and pain-remin. Mark-a mark on t!-'!e -LJd~· d a borse awa. desire and aver~lOn. S. pleasure and pain. as when one knows by the traming he has received In "t. thing bera. . letter ought to foHo'W after such a.nd such a.kens the memory of the stable in which it ~Nas kept Like'!!. entreaty. as when kings calling to mind a previous regula.t employment. V ety good.re. oneal' by arithm0tlC. fel~c\\ -di80:p!e Oppol)ition-as between a sm"ke and ich!leUmon.ign of a leg with whioh it is COl'rela. death. as . e.l when onE> remembers a. . OpposItion excess receipt. (3) COfrelated.e. l'. a· man recollects (the CIrcumstances under whlCh they were pledged) -or by aSSOciatIOn. simBo.yanted or prayed for. Immediatp 81. as when a Bhlkkhu calls to mind his temporal states 1n days gone by-by reference to a book.sena ! ' (The questions of King Milmda-Book III. i' g.u<. Ftar-reminding us of that which caused it.nslated by T. . Immediate subsequency.teu.~8ion-8uch a property awakens the roomory of the owner and ?J'1:ce vel 8(1. that such and such a. a hum is a slgn of a cow from which It If:! insepat'able. a<.:2 __ :-:. action.ding us of that which C8. Series). affection.s heard it.

In establIshing the fixed number.rva. !I. means of knowledge.. 1ilf'flTR: ~~~~tfif I What are four ? The four noble truths. there must be a reason. Vana. the doctrme of the fixed k bi b d k 1 'd sIgrufication of numbers. ~ ~ fcfi? 2. it is as unfixed as the number itself. 132-134 (vide ante). In thIS way philosophers mdulge themselves in a fixed number of things Ak!?apada opposes them by saying that the fixity of number cannot be established. the eternal and nonSamkhya~kanta-1)ada. etc. the fixity of number must be abandoned. etc. the knower. (Khuddakapa~ha of the Pali sutta Pi~aka)..114 INDIAN LOGIC 9 ANClENT SCHOOL. 1 ThIS doctrine.-siitra. object of knowledge and act of knowledge. viz. 5. Merit and demerit-through \vhich there is reconec+. 4.a. ifl'i\T~.":H I What are five? The five constituent aggrega. Some find the thinD's to be three viz. It bears a. 1ilf~ 'if1li fii ? 4. which occurs 10 the Nyaya. 'q\T i{ffl fti? 5. Brahma.T I Food is a thing on which all animals What is one? subsist. If the number and the reason are identical. (ll) The fixed slgmfi.tes. throws some light on the dlalogue between Astavakra and Vandin related in the Mahabharata. ~ i(Tf{ f~? 3. Some say that there is only one thing. _ _ that things are two.pe. NYAYA-SASTRA. Action-such as a chariot remmding us of the chariote8:. eternal. Now is the reason included in the number or excluded from it. ~. chaps. . there will remain no means to establish the fixity of number. CHAP. 2. the nowa e an -nowe ge. If the reason is excluded from the number. 4-1-41. q~{i. ~'flT ItQ'T~i1fff. the agent of knowledge. viz. ~ci ifTli' f4 ? 1. Others say . I N'ame and form.n analogy to the nOVIce's question (Kumara-paiiha) which runs as follows : 1. while others treat of fou?' things. f~ ~i(i1T t What are three? Three kinds of feeling.~on of the causes of joy and sorrow experienced in a previous hi. What are two? 3. or identical with it 'l If the reason is mcluded in the number.'o Affection-as recollecting a son or wife. viz.catlon of numbers 1 (samkhyaikanta).(li(~.

D.'. or anye (others). Chap. 2 Vacaspatl MIsra mentIons the name Pakslla Svamin thus:- ~ifT fifiiiq. 37. but a passing reference to .). the various theorif's of contemporaneous philosophies. VATSYAYANA. for several hundred years. -complete analysis of the commentaries. the fundamental work on Commentaries are store Nyaya Philosophy of the second century hou!es of mformatlOn. II.ta:tparyaFka. NATURE OF THE COMMENTARIES.n~ifT i'fI"Jil I ''flifiTf.CHAPTBR In Commentaries on the Nyaya-siitra.iierf~ "€(~~ qrMl~~ <:Jff ~ l1611fiU ~~qT~ fer ~~~(lfl mi>r ~ii ~l:fr~it 'i!f \l4f<:fiiT \f~~ (Nysyavartika. by any other original treatises on Ny[tya from the pen of the Brahmar.{n~~ \i~I6fif m~i{ II (Nyaya-vartlka. . The Nyaya-bha~y[l. m co::mection with hIs definition of !callit'ita. J n it there are references to pre. A D.tic writers But these writers brought -out numerous commentaries which served not onlv to elucidatp and develop the N yaya-sutra. the opinion of a preVIOt1A commentator by saymg- . crlticises. 1-2-9. opE'mng hnes). In the prevlous chapter there has been given a Rumnlary of Nyaya-sutra. vious logicians designated as eke (some). who were perhaps authors of commentaries 3 which have not come down to us. but to review critwal(y. AUTHOR OF THE NYAYA-BHA~YA (ABou'r 400 A. The Nyaya-sutrawasnotfollowed.sorne of their leading topics will be made in the following pages. The earliest commentary extant on the Nyaya-sutra iF! the Nyaya-bhR~ya by Vatsyayana J or Pak::ula Previous Commentarres Svami. 3Ba. 2. Jcec# (certain). 13 Vatsyayana In his Nyaya-bha~ya. last hne).. 1 The name Vatsyayana occurs In the colophon of Uddyotakara's Nyaya-vartika thus:- ~C(~-qr~~fcl~lT ~T1it <rnt~. Book V. The commentaries are therefore store-houses of valilable mformation on Philosophy and Logic. in the hght -of the sutra. It js not posRible to give here a.

so antagonistic to that of Akfjlapada.O. nay even referred to) by Vatsyayana in ilis Nyaya-bha~ya. H. and 8amanyato drf!¥Zm. 300. L an 'k-tra. lis explanation 0 t4 e mm sense-organ.ya-sutra] and were evidently interpolated into it before or during the time of Vatsyayana S who wrote Bha~ya. 4.116 INDIAN LOGIC. The Nyaya-sutra.tions of the terms tpilrvavat. quotes a verse from the Artha-siistra b of Kautilya (about 1 Dr. contains certain aphorisms which refer to the doctrines expounded '.7asci:)::''1Q~'':. S Dr.not beert controverted.. are supposed to have been composed. the dates of philosophical siitras. followe.i:-. was separated from the Nyaya-sutra by s.la·samucc:a. cbap_ II). further back-J. Vatsyayana gives two different. 1-1-4.vlilltJln~: ~t4ifi4\Q"i I ~: ~"~ijf~" (Nya:ya. Ii ''1'iI~~ ~~"'ffll1~~Tlfr "~: ~fcr.A. when the Madhyamika-sutra and Lankavatara-sutra Age of Vitsyiyana. se?avat. and it cannot be safely traced. Vatsyayana.er the latter date.." in the Indian Antiquary for April 1915. ~ Vide Nyaya-bhi\?ya. a.. 6. has . a yam} avatara-su These aphorisms do not constitute an essential part of the NY8. As Dignaga lived about 500 A. Hence the earliest limit of his age is A. chapter I. in extoHing the Nyaya-sastra (called the Anvik~iki). Vatsyayana who preceded them could not have lived aft. Vide my" Viitsyllyana.D. and Vasubandhu about 480 A. i and possibly also before Vasubandhu whose theory of syllogism. 1-1-5. d (rnanas) as a :9:gn ag:.? in suoh well-known Buddhist works as the NagarJunaandtheLankaM-dh 'k a-su -tra.2-3. Journal of the AmerIcan Oriental Society for 1911).).t lr-ast two cent. Taking the mean between the earliest and the latest dates we may approximately fix the date of Vatsyayana 41 at about 400 A.mc _l.D. the doctrines of which were interpolated into the Nyaya-sutra. the names of the three subdivisions of inference. on it. Hermann Jacobi observes:-The text of the sutras as we have tbem is at best that which the oldest scholiast chose to comment upon. C:6 . as we find in it explanations of certain toe-rilii:'> wbich bec.!'.. vatara.-bhisys. .'(>::. explana.h:lOst unintelligible at the time. NYAY A-SASTRA. commentary.c!". (The dates of the phIlosophical siitras. et c.fter the composition of the Buddhist works. Jacobi observes:-When commenting on Nyaya-siitra. as the lattf"f criticises him in connection with Vatsvi1vana 1)recec~d 1 ' f h ..ya. Vatsyayana must therefore have flourished a. .-bhi~ya. for 1911.:a:~s~iiyana.?. showing thereby that the meamng of these important terms had become doubtful at his time.! Vatsyayana must have flourished before Dignaga (q v. 1-1-1.nd Pramat.D. . III. as already observed. pp.D. ANCIENT SCHOOL. p. and Artba·sistl's.rr:::.S.. author of the Ny5ya...

5-1-10..mika.na.-bh&~ya. B. however.yan Tarka. interpolated into the trine of inter-relation. d cipura. The sutras 4-1-39 and 4-1-40 which seem to have been. Oa. called Vikramaditya. Ohapter I. We may a. Vatsyayana. and it was here that Dignaga (500 A. was king of Magadha. . also designated as Dramila ~ (same as Dravi4a).f I!i~T .:i. Hemacandra supposes Draaula to be another na.previously observed.me for VEitsysyana. In Pall books. and in giving an example of "the incoherent l' (apfu'thaka) extracts a sentence from the Mahabha~ya 1 of Pataujali (150 B.. verse 3. It may be of some interest to note that Vatsyayana 4 makes a reference to the boiling of rIce which is a staple food of the people of Draviga. This Vatsyayana who lived about 400 A. should not be confounded with the sage or sages of that name. but also of Buddhistic culture. 2 Jams. Butra. Vitsyayana would not have been caUed Dramlla. Series. 1-1-3). translated by Satis Chandra Vidyabhusa. I) The Nyiiya-siifl'a of Gotama. of which the capital was Kauyana.).-sGtra. The title .pailcina. had be b&en a native otVatsa. 19. who compiled the Artha--sastra and the Kama... VXTSYAYANA CRITICISES NIOARJUNA. S... Allahabad. aditio!!.ifiiT if ~ I mcrrf~1( 'iffIT ~ 'if fif.B.d' II (Mldhya.S.}.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-VATSYAYANA. 117 327 B.~T1. edited by Jaya Nara. the capital of which was Kausambi neal. 2-1-40.na.(the Deccan).) and other Buddhist logicians lived and flourished.lifT 11~~ \l1ftJ_4Qt({~~ ~: qffa~'n~ f1f~)S'f~" 1Il: II (Abhidhlna.D.) when Candra Gupta II. Nyaya-sutra 5 deal with the Buddhist doca?ek~a or pratyaya crititrine of inter-relation (apek~a or pratyaya) clSed. and MahabballlYa. we read of a sage named Vacchagotta or Viitsyayana living in Ayodhyli• • Nyiya. Bibliotheca Indica series. .) and Dharmapala (600 A. S Svamm is a common surname in Madras.. p.D. 6 "qlf~atlfir7i.H..lcutta).C. (Nyaya·bhasya.-cintlimaJ.D.C.dd that Kaiici was a famous centre not only of Brahmanic learning.li).T. ' .f1<t:q[f. as The Madhyamika doc. was in all probability a native of Draviqa Birthplace or Vatsya. evidently taken from the Madhyamij:asutra 8 (Chapters I and XV) of Nagarluna who flourished about ~'U~mfeT~: ~5'IlflMej ~t1N .' Allahabad.. 38. mo ern Conj eeveram.Svamin" 3 appended to n Pak~ila" in the name "Pak~ila Svamin" also points to the same country as his birthplace.

he Bha~ya on the siitras. Dvyardha-satikii.nslated mto EnglIsh by SattR Chanda Vidyabhusana. siitra. . p.ds to that of voidness (8unyata) Compare- t7' ~it~ qil'Cfri(' ~~"f 1ft '!iJ~d \. If the long and short are not self-existent.!t according to which our means and objects of knowledge are as unreal as things ap-pearing in a dream or exhibited in jugglery or as the city of the celestial choirs or as a mirage. etc).siitra.the Bha~ya on those sutras.. series. It will be impossible to establish a relation between them. B. the Madhyamika-sutra. Series.mika-vrtti.rqi{~ !!'ilTlIl'S!'~TflTljT1r It 4-2-31 ljT~~cfil~ ~. 't~q . vOIdness.JCifatJiIT'IfU II 4-2-32 (Nyaya-sutra tl'a.T Society's edition.nkilvatara. The doctrine of inter-rela.:tnc{ "'\il1tm~f~ I . Calcutta). 4-2-32 and 4-2-33. 1 ~ i$~~f~. La. of the Nyaya-sutra.. (Nyaya-sutra. 93.S. Vatsyayana trme of sunyata. The siitras 4-2-31.r~'( ~~tIT ~~q m~~Rr-f ~~cr I ~lTTif~ 1.hat things are not self-existent as they exist merely in relation to one another A thing is called short only m relation to another thing WlllCh is long.. edition. XV. t seem also to have been interpolations. ~"f ~ltiip~ro lTPITifT ~ ~ ! 17: ~~81i1JfW ~"'''''lfT if ?i~ '-'.118 INDIAN LOGIC. 250-300 A D.tion patyaya or apek~a) lea. B. S As explained in the Buddhist works (such as the Miidhyamika-sutra. evidentl V taken from crIticised. criticises the doctrine. p. 3 1f ~'il<r: l§~T~ ~'fIi 'SI~~: I ~ '§\1}'cr: 'ilif'lfr il'Tfi lT~fW ~: ~ I) (Madhyamika. Allahabad) ~T m-~T '-f$!fT nT ~""~ .. and in the absence of aU relations the doctrine of inter-relation will fall to the ground. Calcutta). iQNif~lf'Ri1l (Nyiiya-siitra.B H. but not self-existent. ANCIENT SCHOOL. J n the same Bha~ya Vatsyayana controverts the doctrine on the ground that ~t is seH-destructive. S. Vatsyayana summarises the doctrine as follows ' Some say t.H.~ t(?I'T I 1f~1q:tlT~~ ~lli ~llTl' \'!~m{ 1\ (Madhyamika-siitra..T. ill. NYAYA-SASTRA..B.. CRAP. Chap. In t. In The Madhyamlka doc. S.1 firfui'f\iTlfifT (f1!ft"Tfll-t e'lTir'f ~'ai~f3ritt II (Quoted in the I\Hidhya. and vice versa The long and Ahort are inter-related. 4-1-40. 57. 4-1-39). Allahabad). chapter VII).

140.. according to him..ta). to confirm the reason and reassert decisively the proposition which.. Vindhyesvari Prasada.. when first advanced. cites the opinion of a certam sage who held that the applIcation (upanaya) and concluslOu (mgamana) were not separa.. Uddyotakara too in hIS Nyaya-vartika. chapte-r I.. After an invariable relation . in the Bibliothece.~on Negarjuna's logIcal and an example ('ltdaharar}a) . c:tnswers theRe objections as follows:The application (upanaya) and conclusion (n:'Jrzmufl-(l.rm~~Tift 'qfffflT~~"C1i're1'if 'STtf'ffif wit-ftf "5ffW~ ~ if ~t/wt "1J:.i i(1'ii("lq~~"l ~'tIrt ~ml~lf1iJlhltt ~~ f rC{i(fqTl1: ~Tmiltl~'Clil~~nCj I ••• 'SIiilitRt.ij~ 'if ~lflA~ itfW (Nyaya bha:(!ya... .) '1' ~~ qjTifTfW ~:iTS"l"fl'fl II Uif II ij~f'EllahiifWrlfin'{ . viz application (upanaya) and conclusion (nigamana) being superfluous and not better than" analogous rejoinders" (jatyuUara). Calcutta.. very probably NagarJuna. p.l ~ ~~TQ111if if v "lli'ir. Compare Dr. The doctrine of voidness (sfinya·vlida) flourished between 200 A.r~firp~ if~1fT1tR "'~Tr~ it !!lilt I (Nyaya-viirtika. Chap. 1-1-39.COMMENTA.te members of a sy:llogl!:!nl. Calcut. Chap. "4~Cf'CTQJ. are essential parts of a syllogism inasmuch as they serve on the strength of the general principle jnvolved in the exa.D. 119 Nagal..~ .. "1~'fif'~rcr1{ 'S~l~~ir a'fT~'1 }J~qfi'l'~ ~~~ ij' ~ l:f1ilfJT "NfijTl(ii~~ "f~ . by name. 1·1-39. as they served no purpose dIfferent from that of the reason and the proposl tlOO : - vq-.fl1iITRli ~n'ifP1v. says that a thesis can be establi~hed through a rea. p.ra mentlOns Niigarjnna.ltjES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-VATSYAYANA. Suah's Filosofia..'juna in his Upayakausalya-sutra... whioh may theory of examples..tiil. 1 Vatsyayana observes:- ~ifVT1'f~ "Til~~ ~ntClir lIJirr 'iJTvJ ~T~ I fii. the last two members. critiCIsed. ~?l ~"1:Jfi(fir~IC{TWT "" "{jQi1{~i'( I g"Ql~ "EJ tit~ ~'i ~~l~if Q (Madhyamika vrttl. Bibliotheca IndIca series. 8.... publIshed under the name of Nyaya-darsana.mple. udabe either affirmative or negative. The sa.Wi1TlfrwfTt ~~T'4 ~rffct ~c.~T ~T '{fihrr tfir II rnmwIIAT~: ~~~"'T f-r .n(firiit ~ij'~iRf. L. Calcutta Buddillst Text Society's editIOn). consists of three members and not of five. Indica series).----------'fl: ~Vt'if ~ ~~ IS. Indiana. Buddhist Text Society's edition). It 1S however to be noted that neither Viitsy~yana.. nor U ddyotak. A sylloharana.D.. 1-1-39.. 160. . Vahyayana I in his Nyaya-bha~ya. and 500 A. 1-1-39. pp. edited by MM...ge referred to wa>..a. pp 34-35.. XXIV.... XXII. was of a doubtful character. p.RT_ ~)~ I trw II lfff ~'-1i (Miidhyamlka vrtti. gism. 184-185.

not so.D. VXTS'ZAYANA CBI.·~~~·~·~~·~ 1 fqfq~~t ~r~) 'ifrq~nit I ~·~:r:..O. In fact Dr. of tho Asiatic Society of Bengal L ~~~·~~·t!:r:. when Asanga lived. Jacobi J.. for 1911.·:(t.sspati and Vatsyayana observes that the NyiyaJsutr&. 2 Nyaya·bhii~y8. translated by Satls Chandra Vidyabhusana.q. Sher·batski on the autihonr. becam~e it is based not on a mere similarity or dissimIlarity indi~ated by its particle "so" .l chapters II and X. knowledge.el. I therefore conclude that though Ak~pada (ISO A. 4-2-26. 4-2-26 and 4-2-27. In t't~ Nyaya-bha~ya.O. knrJw ledge (vij-iiana) alone. Vatl:>yiyana (about 400 A. 39. evidently taken crIticised. 50. reality indepen1 Vitsyaya. H.) knew the doctrine and criticised it in his Nyaya-bhasya. ~her() is no occasion for an opponent to say that the applwation {'u. .~~ 1 i!·i:l·)~·~t. S.. 115." but on the genera] principle est. and that there is an expositIon of it in the Lankavatara-sutra about 300 A.\·'-1~ tI~3I\ II ca.y of Var. also 253).D. TI. folio 150.panaya) is a mere analogous rejoinder.·~·~zq·~f" ~.ablished by t. p.B. mamtalns that the Yogiclka or V~niana­ t'ijda did not commence untll the 5th co::ntury A. (middle t. NYAYAuSASTRA~ CHAP. from the Lankavatara·sfitra. 4:-2-26.·~~!!%j~·Oi·UJt.· i zqT~:~:r:. Mdo~ 3 The Nyaya siitras.TrCISE~ OTHER DOCTRINES OF 'raE BUDDHISTS. I daal with The Y ogiicara doctrine the Buddhi: Ii doctr'ine of the reality of of minana.·cilll:. (~kab~gyur.120 INDIAN LOGiC. Allahabad). ~'}r fd~ l1l1fT'ilft ~TmlPjqii!'lfa5J<ijI. p. IS directed agamst the school of the Vljnijna-vadms (J. 1:ictql~~ft 1f~~far I SerIes. and.na seems here to have referred to the Lankavatara-sutra.D.A. 4-2-27 and 3-2-11.S. 4-2--26. Vijilii:rta-vada-idealism The sutras 4: 2 26 and 4-2-27.A. p. which seem to have been interpolated into \he Nyaya-sutra. 29.D) was not conversant WIth the Yogaeiira or VijiUina 'vuda. Dr.ffi) and the predicat6 (major term) has been proved in the example. may be interpreted in such a way that they refer to the Miidhyannka philosopby rather than to the Yogacara. iiilJf ~Hn~ ~!ilrifN~i~i5 fif 19~Ti!fT~ itmr: n (LankivatS1'8-sGtra. ANCIENT SCHOO!.or .H. m... between the :reason. ('hap.he example. But we should not forget that Maltreyanath~ was a great expounder of Vijii'iina vlida about 400 A. chapter XI.S.qCfi. 4-2-26) Vatsyayana 3 summarises the Buddhist doctrine as follows:Some say that things do not possess a reality independenf of our thoughts just as a web does not possess a.D.

cri'laCised sutra.ndra Vtdyabhusana.me time by going on to separJ.. . K~arpika-vada-the Theory of L1~ permanence.\-S'0TRA-VATSY':\YANA. and at the sa. Reason (hetu).ksys. We feel the momentariness or entities on seeing the~r growth and decay 'which imply pr8ductioD and destruction. edited a. . Vatsyayana in his Nyaya. Vatsyayana cites the opinIon of k~a(~ik-vadiYJ. Hence it is our :~":'':~:::2 alone they say.rlVa.te of flux-Herachtus. ~~~ '$..-Because jt is smokv. j 121 dent of its threads. 2.\~ are incapaLle of being separated from our thought::.ts they cannot be unreal and on the other hand if thing!:! an. that are It'eal. ail'llff\'i~ift~I(Q[iqiiait I 3-2 13.a ~~ifi'{ ~. because II thing8 are C'apa. sta.kavatara-sutra. things are unreal. pp 86-87.te them from our thoughts. 1-1-32. VATSYAYANA'S EXPLANATIQN OF CERTA.OMII1ENT.'1an~ I 3-2-11. (Nyiiya-sutra. 2 Vide the Lar. Bengal Asiatic SOcIety's MSS Cf. waR evidently intermentarmes8. The holder of the doctrine commits. AU is in s. the external things are u. Vatsyayana eontr09"erts tbis Buddhist doctrine by saying that it is seH-destruct. Example (udiiharalfa). The sfitra 3-2-1 L wbich refers to the doctrine of momentariness (kEfarj.bha$ya. called K~atJ.H unreal. and that there is a connecting link between the origination of an entity and its cessation. 3-2-13! controvertS' the doctrine of momentariness by saying that there 18 no absolute certainty for an enti't:. Series. according to Vatsyayana.J1qT~iifll~trr I 3-2-12. Vatsyayana in his Nyaya-bha§lya. k.iRIES ON THE NYAY.H. is 1 1Yif~sfcr ~tRl-q(~'4. alludes to certain logicians according to whom a syllogism consisted of ten membe:r& as follows : F' d b lva or mary mem etf! 1. etc.nd translated by Sl1tis Cha.B.A 8yUog2:6m of Ten Member8.(." unreal the. Proposition (pratijiia). chap. a contradiction hy saying that... 99.ikatva) as explained in the LariThe doctrine of mo. . S.tdra sutra. l In his BluifIya-commentary-on the Batra. ~-2-12.8 according to whom all entities are momentary. Allaha.ika-pa. as a kitchen.!anikapolated by Vatsyayana into the Nyayavllda.rGa. 3.hou~b. VI.v to be replaced by another entity aftel' the lapse of a moment.b!6 of being separated from our t. 2 40.bad) . its they exist for a m'1ment.-WhateY~r smoky is fiery. only.-This hilI is fiery.ive.IN DOOTRINES . p.

CHAP. He is freed from misapprehension. ANCIENT SCHOOL.-Therefo!'e thIS lun is fiery. and sets the earth and other elements in motion. III. Anantavil'ya. 4. 2 (a) Questioning the reason (samsaya). NYAYA"SASTRA. (a) CapaC1ty of the example to warrant the conclusion {sakya-prapti). Apphcation (upanaya). which conforms to his will. be regarded as essential members or parts of a syllogism. (a) : Dispelling all questions (samsaya-v?jud(isa). Who can demonstrate the existence of Him who transcends the evidences of perception. Hence they cannot. par. casually mentions Isvara (God) whose nature is described by Vatsyayana in the Nyaya4-1-21.-Is It true that smoke is always a concomItant of fire '1 In a kItchen there are of course both smoke and fire. but m a. but they do not prove any thing. produces merit in each person. or such that one should maintain an attitude of indifference towards it. 1-1-22. the mediocre of five narti:t ann t. as it were. He possesses ~ight supernatural powers which are the consequences of his merit and concentration. verse 13. was a con'temporary of Chandra Gupta. and is rich with merit. In the Nyaya bha~ya. in his commenta. ann that smoke is an invariable concomi. 5.. red-hot iron ball there is no smoke.t. etc. II. or such that one should avoid it.-Purpose consists in the determination of the true conditions of the hill. the father of aU beings. in order to ascertain whether it is such that one can approach It.ant of fire. called Vikramaditya. 5. according to Vatsyayana. knowledge and concentration.-It is beyond all questions that the hill is smoky.-So is this hill (smoky). about 375 A. 4. His merit.122 INDIAN LOGIC.hA . carelessness.t the beat form of syllogism consists of ten parts. I suppose. or in a.ry on the Nyayavatara. says tha. as foHows : God is a soul specially endowed with qualities.' God-lsvara Ak~apada in his Nyaya-sutra. The Jain logician. 4-1-16. there is mention of certain philosophers who maintained that in emancipation there was manifesta1 Rere Vatsyayana.D. inference and scripture? bha~ya Emancipation-mo~a. Conclusion (nigamana ). God is. particular t2 F lVEl a dd ItlOna1 mem b ers. v The five additional members serve no doubt to make our cognition clear. ('1) Inquirvas to the proposition {j£l'nasa). 3.-Is thls hill fiery in all :its parts.-That WhlCh you call smoke mav be nothing but vapour. (a) Purpose for drawing the conclusion (prayojana). 1. refers perhapg to the J aina syllogism of ten members as Illustrated in the Daaavaikalika-niryukti of Bhadrabahu who.

candra Vidyisagara's edition). 235. the poet Subandhu.'f i (Har~-carita. iilT'l~f4i1f~.ce from pain. no doubt. but pleasure signified nothing but perfect freedom from pain. UDDYOTAKARA. 1-1-22. according t. . Hence emancipation or release was not.o hIm. p..a as a poet who lived at the court of King Sri Har~a or Harsavardhana and the manner in which the poet introduces him~elf "into the work leaves no room for doubt that he was very young while his patron the king was mature in age and 1 . UCChVAfl& II. lsvara. eternal pleasure but an absolute deliveran. 58.datta~ p. it was natural that the end of such activity was the enjoyment of eternal pleasure They also relied on the scripture-texts (upanisads) which. according to them. HaIrs edition). 41. closmg lines). The Har~~carita' describes Ba!}. .ifi'l'ft ~iY" "l~litif Cfrf~t{ II 2 ~i{"ql~~') ~T~ 'lTq""~ \fim I (Nysya-vsrtika. but there was no cause for production in the emancipated soul of any pleasure which was eternal. Vatsyayan~ in the Nyaya-bha~ya. ' .'i-SUTRA-UDDYOTAKARA. these.m~ (Vasava.:sa..D. 123 tion of eternal pleasure or the soul. U d dyotak ara .a as a classical work which humbled the pride of all previous poets. opposed the above~ mentioned phil{>s9phers by saymg that emancipation or release l mok~a). which was invariably mixed up with pain and which could merely bring about bondage of an intricate form.l The latest date aSSIgned The Vasavadatta 2 an immortal work of to Uddvotakara. declared that absolute pleasure belonged to the soul that attained emancipation.). mentlOns as a rescuer of the Nyaya.cessation of pain. ucchv.('@~qi m~fwn~ t.AU'l'HOR OF THE (ABOUT 635 A. He further said that human activity was directed towards the removal of pain and not to the attainment of pleasure. while the Ve(savadatta itself is mentioned in the Harf?acarita 3 by Ba!}.CO~IMENTAnlES O::s. .THE NYAY. spoke. ~Tft ~~ 3 ~~Jii~ ~ "f~fti{"I'3r I ~~!f 'q'l~Nt ~'ffllT ~~r-~ Q (Hal1!8. which was a condition of immortality freed from fear and change. was attended with a total. iJ. They based their view on the ground that human activity bemg alway~ directed towards the attainme'lt of pleasure. Nyaya-'I']'artlka Uddyotakara was the author of a sub-commentary on the . according to Vatsyayana. Nyaya-sutra called the Nyaya-vartlka.-carita. I). As regards the scripture-texts. of the eS'3ence of soul as being pleasllre.

B. 110-11.D 635. ~t'i1EJN1I'iiN I .a flourished about A. .. A. . (Nyliya-bmdu.. and a sastra-kara who seems to be the same as Uddyotakara.S. pp. lIT. pp.1"i Pra.trrit~: I '" 1-33.. 2 WtTfirf" qt~ ~.D.'a. 6~5. experience.thsang reached Srugh~ oD April 1.which seems to -be only another name for kat. i (Vada.P.·l:l~I.·~fl<"i·Qa:·§:a..T . 113. III.l s BU...OGIC.te that can bfl assigned to U ddyotakara.while he is caned Pasupataca. .5 (4 Uir~'R~'l1'U1"'qTQq~n~ :ilfi~V!ftll~'H~~l~~lf'. 629-644) that the Chinese pilgrim Hhen-thsang travelled through.).. Har~a reigned in Tha. while writing ~ ~~ ~ mifw ~'II~q'M1f I (Nyaya-vartlka. ~<M·£:rG-nru!iO:.rtika.u'lo] is shown by the fact that :r . It is reported that Vasubandhu too wrote a treatise called Vadavldhi. King. . for July 1914. . 41. M. Western J umna canal. 40 miles north of 7 Thanesvara. ftr (Nyiya-vartika. .. It seems to me that Uddyotakara. mentions a sastra which evidently refers to the NyaY:1~\ra.n-bgyur~ ¥do. 121) A. Peterson's edition). by him is Srughna 6 which is situated on the kara. ~ 'q'aIff: ~ at . Vindhyesvs. The only place mentioned Residence of Uddyota. 399).).. chap.t·a..'. 186-90) Cunningham. obsenes: The unportance of the positIon tof Sruglu..' as applied to Uddyotakara.-U ~~ I 'd'ir ~fq _few . ANClENT SOHOOL.... On the other hand Dharmakirti in his N yaya-hindu 9.. S For the date of Dharmakirti see my" Uddvotakara. ('Vtde Bea. the Vadanyaya by Dharmakirti. NYAYA·SASTRA~ CHA.}@ to conclude that BalQ. which is no longer extant. Nothing is definitely known as to the place where Uddyotakara was born.iIlt'q( if~.. 1-33. India This leads 7.. a. Dvivedin's edition) (Ny&ya-varllka . Ce.M..".D 635. Hence we conclude that DharmaklrtJ8 and Uddyotakara were contempOldries who flourished about A.nyaya of Dhamakirti in ~§ta. is derived from the family to which he belonged. The name Bharadvaja.sKda. Various names of Ud.nesvara during the whole of the period (A. which is the latest da. In the Nvaya-vartika Uddyotakara mentions a Buddhist " treatIse on Logic caned the Vadavidhi i The date of Uddyota.D. lilNmr.· it: .rya 5 on acdyotakara count of his having been a preceptor of the Pasupata Saiva sect. colophon) It was very probab!y this ~ute by which Riuen. £01... contemporary of Dharmakirtl" in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic· Society of Great Britain and Ireland. pp.d?hist :&eeords.124 INDIAN I.

" J Dignaga is throughout designated as Bhadanta i (a venerable Buddhist monk) whose definition of perception (p. p.. to the Upper Panjab and commands the passage of the Jumna By this route Ua.-wT ~ FfT ~~ ~ ~'I'14Ai1. 1-1-6. Thu main object which prompted Uddyotak:1ra to write his sub-commentary was to oppose Dignaga. His tum was 1. 1:25 the Xyava-vartika. and by thIs route Ba. agarJ una.rr 1t~ 1tr~ ~~ anne( I prftf'4im~fm· ii~ lRf.cfya!:.3 Uddyotakara points out a cerof the soul criticIsed.B.).. opening lines).:. It is not unlikely that he received SOlne time iT! h.0 refute N ' . and Ambala. pp.(.:J~ mqiQa m~: (Nyaya-vartika. 3-1-1.. the Buddhist doctrlD8s. t' d b mam ame y Bha d an t l\. an d 0 tlleI' B uddh' 1St Iogwlans that preceded him. Do Buddhists deny the Soul ~ In the Nyaya-vartika.me work (1-1-6. (Nyiiya-virtika. resided at Th[ine~vara which was connected with S'rughna by a high road. A. ~na ~!lrat.S.. Saharanpur.sfJ. 3-1-1. '!TflTllnf~. .T 1Nf fir1p:f: It (Nyaya·vartlka. Uddyo t a. UnDY!JTAKAIL\'S CONTROVERSi WITH THE BUDDHISTS. p.. and I shall write au expository treatise on it to remove the veil of error cast. and whose nadal ~~ the evidences of comparison (upamana) and verbal testimony (sabda) is reviewed in the sa. 61. by quibblers.7). 341-42). This is evident from the r-peni~g Bces of the Nyaya-vartika in which he says: "Ak§apada t~e rOIeill0SiJ of sages propounded a sastra (body of doctrines) for the peace of the world. 347) 1 ~~~~. 42.d career patronagr at the court of Thanesvara.k ""ara observes: "If you (Buddhists) say that it stands on the high road leading from the GangetlC Doab. The BuddhistlC denial tain inoonsistency among the doctrines . 2 .) is criticised in the Nyaya~vartika (1-1-4)..ber advanced to the conquest of DeIhL" (AncIent Geography of India..OTh~MENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SOT":tA-UDDYOTAKARA...hmud 01 Ghaznl returned from hIS expedltIOn to Kano}. by thIs route Timur returned from his plundermg campaign at Harldwar.

'there is no atman. 573. ----~----------------~ 1 'i{~T ~~~" N~ ~ltf1!:I'&ITfil' \=lT~ ~ ~T"(' 'Q~~ailT ~T"{'. and the pudgala is the burdenbearer' He who says.spati MISra. Udavana...-Several months ago I mVIted my friend Professor SatIa Chandra Vldyabhusana. NYAYA-SASTRA.-samutpada.' is a heretic.o philological or historical accuracy and exhaustlOn of the SUbJflct-of course j We intend to show onlv the pra. We shall first publIsh.r~iTfif ~'=:Jt{ . quoted from the Journal of the Royal ASIatIc Society of Great Britain and Ireland for 1901. Your scrIpture declares.nth mterest:- . he senti me COpIOUS materials: their pUblIcation will. and of the polemical relations bebween these schools s. The first is the follow.nd the orthodox adherents of the DarSanas. Vaca. Pall Text Society's edltlOn). 25. The text quoted above about the existence of the soul cannot l be denied) as it actuallv occurs in the Sarvabhisamaya~sutra.. I am not rftpa nor am I ~)edana. there is no soul. It is therefore clear that if Bhadanta says. you make an assertion contrary to your own doctrine. WIthout any claIm t. chap. Dear Mr.tiiit \lR~rU I 'SqJ~) fir~ Cf~'€i I " (Nyaya-vartlka.11"'1ij s~~ t:fW I ~1Q'nilT ifT~ftf ~ f. and neither am I mjnana) ' The" I . and p. just at the same tune.' he hurts his own I system. sarn8kara is not mvself. III. etc. cbapter of the Sarva-daraana-sarograha.lng :-The' Sahstamba~sutra quoted bv Candrakirtl In chap..r1'ijrmitit . two dIscoveries of Professor S. p.cticability and usefulness of such mqmries. 307-308. our observatlOns and references to the Bauddhe. CHAP HI. aarnjna (sens~tion) sarhksara.342. (impression) and vijnana (knowledge). Your doctrine is that "[" is identical npither with ri1pa (form) nor with Ivedana (feeling).''' 2 •. 0 Bhik$us. 52 The following correspondence. ANCIENT SCHOOL. Vldya~ bhusana deserve actual notice in a more oonspicuous journal. if trained scholars would but care for it. in the Museon.r knowledge of the great schools of the Mahayana Philosophy. A few weeks ago. I heard from the Pandita that. quoted from Samyutta mkaya part III. is quoted (without any mention of ItS name) WIth remark- . 3-1-1. w1l1 be read -. Buddhist 8ut1'as quoted by Brahnana autiwr8. prove itself a contribution of some importance to 0'l1. pp. 'there IS no atman. ~~ ~ ftt~ ~f~Tf"1l ~~~~ "Ej' I C&'ffifr fi:r~ \lRT I q~qTi{Tiltfiialr f~ 'q'~~ I Cfi1f~ "€f f~<. scattered m the treatises of Uddyotakara." " A further text speaking of the soul is a.126 INDIAN LOGIC. p.ot' of the BuddhIst 7'ext Society's Journalwhose essays are euloglsed in the last Bulletm of M. by Santideva in the Slksasamuccaya. Barth ['oi ParisJ-to collect the numerous references to Buddhist savmgs or tenets. '0 monk. I am not 8amjna. C. 1}e had been urged by yourself to devote hImself to that work. no doubt. on the Buddhlstic denial of the soul. the burden and the burden-bearer: the five skandhas are the burden. xxvi of the Madhyamakavfttl. Nevertheless. the jomt edlt. Rhys Davids. which is not identical with the five akandhas (aggregates of being) is in fact the soul One who does not admit the soul can make no sense out of the philosophy of Tathagata. also by Prajiiakaramati in the Bodhicaryavatfi..ratika as giving a complete expose of the Pratltya.s follows :-' I shall teach you.

. was one of the most deCISIve authorltles referred to by the . the TIbetan a 1lthorltles. p. Dear Professor Rhys Davlds. it is just the other way. is synonymous and simultaneous with the laying down of the Bearer (Bharamkkhepana =h~ranl. is actually to be found in our Pa1i Pj~aka. in his use of the sutlia. cntithree parts of a syllogism as defined by cised.RZBURG. 19. dear Mr. 25. 1901. Ak~apada were not 80 ingenious as they able fidehty by the celebrated author of the Bhamati. but you know. 127 43.' Such IS the sntra. 308). Ii. . the Bodhicaryavataratika. E. and indeed states so 1U so many words. Far from being entitled. Pudgalava. __ THE SUTRA. For we have m it a proof that puggaZa in the sense of a soul (atta) waS unknown to the author of the sutta." This very sntra 18 cIted by Uddyotakara agaInst its BuddhIst opponents: -" therefore. WU. refers to as quoted by the Pudgalaviidins as an authorIty on theIr side. a 8ub reptio. The illusory relatIon between the fivefold aggregate and the soul as a burden and Its bearer WIll contmue until their absorption into SiinyaiS or nirvana.dms.] .' he hurts (bIS own] system. is guilty of what we call.and hiira. 1-1-~7. VALLEE POUS$IN. Burden and Bearer. and 'LOUIS DE LA January 7. If [a Buddhl8t] says.A. Fragments of t.kha satya and the law of karman tha. 1'0 him ohara. you.n the na~ratmya1)ada.-It will probably not have escaped yournotioe that the "Butra of the Burden and the Burden-bearer.' bearer H as well known from t. it hus been saId: • I shaH teacb. The second also IS curIOUS :-The sutra of" the burden arld the hurden. )u the ground of this Butta. OF THE BURDEN-BEARER. that I cannot help thinkmg that the pudgalavCida IS more in harmony WIth the dul). Thls seems very hard. of the Samyutta Nlkliya..kkhepana). The manner in which t. Bhiksus. in his letter In your last issue (p. Uddyotakara." Are these last words authentIc? . HAEDY. In his Vartika on the Nyaya-sutra. April 22.hIS ancient sut"ta was appealed to by the opponents of the Bauddhas as being agamst the Bauddhas' doctrme of the nqn-a~an is very InStructive.na. form one inseparable unIty." whiyh Professor de la Vallee Poussin. that is of the slrandhas. ad Brahma-sutt's. the burden and the burden-bearer: the five s'kandhas are the burden.he Abhldharmakosa. Yours smcerely. Uddyotakara refers to a Buddhist philosopher (identified The Bu1dhist theory of with Vasubandhu) who remarked that the example. He uses the word quite clearly as referrmg simply to the five 8kandhas..• GHENT. at vol. and the pudgala IS the burdenbearer' 'Who says [there] IS no iitman lS heretIC. 2.KAfl. Rhys Davids. [From the point of view of absolute truth the soul 1S unreal. etc .. UDDYOTAKARA CRITICISES VASUBANDlIU AND NAGARJUNA. 19D1. • (there] 18 no atm-an. to consider the pudgaLa'!)ada as a genume portion of the ancient doctrine. in logic. ill.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-UDDYOTA. dr8~nta.he same sutra are to be found in the Sarvadaras. but froro the empirical standpoint it is real. and the laying down of the Burden.

128

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOuL, NYAYA-SASTRA, eRAL ;;t.

3,ppea;rea. 1 Vacaspati Mi~ra in his Vartika-tatparya,-tika 2 on the Nyay;t-sutra, 1-1-37, quo~es Lhe same r8~al'k which he explains by saying that "heH~ Subandhu revir.lently the same as VasubandhuJ 0b;:;erves that the three parts of i.'. syllogi~m beginning with "proposition' as defined by Ak~apada are badiy confounded.') UddyotakeX?lli does not examine the remark, but satirically says ttat the person from ,,,hom it emanated. was a mighty logieian!!! In this connection there is however an examination of the definition, given by a Buddhist logicla,n~ of an example (dr~tanta) sin '.vhich, aceording to him, the rea>son. (middle term) and the predicate (major term) co-abide, e.g. in a syllogism, viz sound is non-eterna.l, because It ~s a product, like a pot-the non-eterna,lity and producibiHty co-abide in a pot. Uddyotakara asks: how can a Buddhist, a holder of the doctrine of momentarineR9, maintain tlu;,t non-eternality (which refers to posterior non-existence) and producibllity (which refers to prior non-existencf:) co-exist, ;n a pot (which possesses a mere momentary existence)? On similar grounds Uddyotakara attacks the Buddhist logician Nagarjuna', who in his Prama'l~a-vihe­ N agjirj una. c:ritlclSed. tana or Prama.q.a-vidhva,msana (q.v.) defines an example as the place in which is decisively shown the relation between the reason (miadle term) and its invariable companion the predicate (major term). It is impossible for a Buddhist to show the correlation of the reason (e.g. the fact that it is a product) and the predicate (e.g. non-eternality), since the two cannot, according to him, co-exist.
I

1

~~~'iif1iTlI'r.T:
9. 1IQ1it

,,~~~ 't(Cf ~'eI"lqq"~ itTf(

.mrt -.:rq", I

'Pit ~~~m tfii'

I li!!i~ii ~'"

(Nyaya-vartika, 1-1-37, p. 139, Bibliotheca IndlCa serles).

~~ ~ft:mr~~~Slf'tarr ~~f~i ~~~~ W~~"' I
\.II

(Nyaya-va:rtlka-tatparya-~ika.

1-1-37. p. 203, Vizianagaram Sanskrit series).

...

'"

3~N~1~~'
(Nyiya-vartika. 1-1-37, p. 139, Bibliotheca Indica series).
4 In the PraU1iina-vl.he~ana (vidhvamqana). an example gpe) is defined by NagarJuna thus:(dr~~an.ta.

in Tibetan:

"i\' ~~·tt· ~.1t!~11\' ~rq~' ~.~~~. ~~·I'.r ,,::.' Q,.~Q.(·tl· "I'IIj·Q(·".qtl·q~·"l~~· ~ ~"'Qf I
m§tan-hgyur. Mdq, ha, folio 417).
Uddyotakara opposes the above definition as follows:-

dit' it..): ~~ fif'li-r ~1'PfI1::11i ~1{ I \.II (Nyaya-varlTh;a. 1-1-37, pp. 139-140. edited by M. M. Vindhyehari Prasid in the Bibliotheca Indica series, Calcutta).
t

,

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-UDDYOTAKARA. 44. UDDYOTAKARA CRITICISES DIONAGA.

129

Uddyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika I mentions a Buddhist logician Bhadanta (same as Dignaga) i who The theory of percep- defines perception (pratyalcsa) a.s a knowledge tion, pratyk~a, controvertwhich is free from reflection (lcatpana),3 that ed. is, which is not connected with a name or genus. Perception is in fact a pure sense-knowledge which is not expressed by a name or specified by a genus, which is specific in itself and cognised by itself. This definition of perception is declared by U ddyotakara to be absurd. If a certain knowledge were not expressible by a name, how could it be called perception ~ The word perception would be meaningless if the knowledge corresponding to it were not capable of being expressed by a name. In the same way if perception referred to a specific individual (svat'upa) and not to a genus, it could not, according to Uddyotakara, be grasped in our mind and expreseed to our fellowmen, since our cognition of an object invariably assumes a generic form.
~~ ~ ~~ ~ ifi\NifTlf)~fifftr I ~~ f.1iiN4JT iifffi 5fTrn1!iT~iffi'1: ~tt flW~ iif i{lfiHf~~'-I'a- if 1liil ~[~rfC(f'1;;ijqf'{q& fcI''i~~qT~fq''!:ilf;q lff'(~~~­ fiTlffliifhi "1l 5(~liIf.,ft:r I ..... ." .."'f"l~ 'Hqa~ cfitsitr tlf~ -srnrllj Cflllilff: 'lfiil.i' "SI'~ ~i,p;fi?Ef«frt cql~i{ 'iT","ifrf'1~;qa- if ~rfil;'Qtlffifli ifi)S~ ~C{otrr~Wi'~ftrf ,
1

.'i.f

.

~

(Nyaya-vartlka, 1-1-4. pp.44-45, Blbliotheca IndIca series).
10

2

Vacaspati MISra

his gloss on the above observes:1-1-4, p. 102, Vizlanagaralll Sanskrit
RaneS}.

~ fcorT~ liI"'A: lf~fc:f 'Ifl~ t:frt
(Ny1iya-vartika-tatparya-~Ika,

3 Vacaspatl and Jayanta observe that kalpana, reflection, IS the connection of an object wIth its adjuncts enumerated below:(1) Name (nama), e.g. dittha, etc. (2) Genus (Jatl). e.g. cow, etc (3) Quality (guna), e.g. dark, etc. (4) Action (kriya), e.g. walklOg, etc. (5) An adventitious entlty (dravya), e.g- a load (on the back), etc A knowledge unconnected with any of these adjuncts 1S perceptlOn. For instance, our percept,lOn of an mdlvIdual cow consists of a speClfic knowledge into which the name. genus, etc.~ of the individual cow do not enter.

Cf.

~ ~: _~T

IT'ff.rr

~m'N1IJT ~1I'{'WII T flltlT1li~T ifTii~ifT

.ift~art ~ftr I
(Jayanta's Nyiiya-maiijari, chapter II, p. 93, edited by Giln!:!;5d 1lat· Sash'!, Vizianagaram, SanskrIt serIes; compare also Vacaspatl MiSra'R ~:.-;i;',a-vi'it't'ka-t3t­ parya-~ikl:i, 1-1-4, p. 102, edIted by Gangadhar Sastri, Vizlanagaram SanskrIt series). The word kalpana seems to have been nsed 1Il a dIfferent semel;) by Dignligd (q.v.). The idea of genus (iiiti), quality (guna) , action (fcriya).and name (nama) ' .... as derived from the Mahibhasya of Patanjah.

9

130 INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA-SASTRA, CHAP. III. 45.
UDDYOTAKARA'S ~XPLANATION OF PERCEPTION.

Perception (pratyaksa), as defined by Ak~apada, is knowledge which is produoed by the interoourse of a sen"e with its object. The intercourse (sannikarsa) which is of six kinds, is explained in the Nyaya-vartika (1-1-4:) of Uddyotakara as follows:(1) ConjuncLlon (samyoga)-e g a jar if' perceived through its conjunction with onr eye. (2) Conjoined-inherence (sainyuk~a-8amavaya)-e.g. in perceivmg the colour of a jar there is conjunction of our eye with the jar m which colour inherefl. (3) Conjoined-inherent mherence (sainy~~kta-samaveta-8amavjjya) -e.g III perceiving the generic nature of the colour (colourness) there is conjunction of our eye with the jar III whlch inheres colour wherein again colourness IS inherent. (4) Inherence (samava,ya)-e.g. we perceive sound which inheres in our ear-cavitv. (a) Inherent-inherence~ (sama~'eta-8amClvjjya)-e.g. we perceive soundness (the generic nature of sound) which inheres in sound which in its turn lS inherent in our ear-cavity. (6) Quahfication or pa.rticularity (vi.§e~aYJ-aia)-e.g we perceive the non-existence of a thing through the particularisation of the spot which the thing could occupy on earth.
46.
UDDYOTAKARA'S DEFINITION OF INFERENOE.

Uddyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika, 1-1-5, defines inference 1 (anumi'ina) as that knowledge which is preceded by perception of the reason (middle term) and remembrance of its invariable concomitance with the predicate (major term). For an instance, I perceive that this hill has smoke which I remember to be invariably concomit-a.nt with fire, and hence I infer that this hill has fire. The form of inference is as follows : (1) Whatever is smoky is fiery. (2) This hill is smoky. (3) Therefore this hill is fiery. Inference is divided by Uddyotakara as (1) exclusively-affirmative (anvayi) , (2) exclusively-negative (vyatireki), and (3) affirmative-negative (anvaya-vyatireki) . . Exclusively-affirmative is the inference in which the m.iddle term abides in the major term as well as in things homogeneous with it, there being nothing which is hetero~ geneons from the major term, e.g. this is nameable, because it is
J

~~itit ~l""<Rri!i1~i{Ti!'~

I

(Nyaya-vartika, 1-1-5, p. 47. M.M. VindheSvari Prasada.'s edition). InIE'renl"e is linga-paJ'amar8a (a syllogi·nn from sign) as aided by remembrance.

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-UDDYOTAKARA.

131

knowable. Exclusively -negative is the inference in which th~ middle term abIdes in the minor term alone, there being nothing else in which that term IS known to be present, e g the earth is different from other elements, because it posseRses smell. Affirmative-negative is the inference in which the middle term, while abiding in things homogeneous wlth the major term, does not abide in any thing heterogeneous from the same, e.g. sound is non-eternal, because it is cognised by our sensE"s.
47.
UDDYOTAKARA'S THEORY OF VERBAL KNOWLEDGE.

The sign£ficatwn of letters.
If a word is a mere combination of letters, how do we cogn'se a thing on hearing the word ~ Uddyotakara in his Vartika on the Nyaya-sutra, 2-2-55, says we become cogDlRant of a th ing on hearing How does a word sIgnify the last letter of its corresponding word as a thmg? The N yaya theory of aided by the recollection of the preeeding Uddyotakal'a letters, i.e. when we hear the last letter, there is a coUective recollection of all the prevlOus letters. For instance, ,the word "cow'" cannot prer..;ent to us any thing until we have heard its last letter, viz. w, as aided by our recolleotion of the preceding letters, viz. c and o. The letters c, 0 and w by a conventional association produce in us the cognition of the thing called cow. This is the way in which things are siglllfied by letters or rather words composed of letters, in accordance with the Nyaya philosophy followed by Uddyotakara.

Sphota-vada-the doctrine of phonetic explosion.

Uddyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika, 2-2-55, alludes, however, to certain sages who held that things could A rlval theory not be signified by letters. These sages, as Spho~a the outbur:;t of pointed out by Vacaspati Misra in his Nyaya. a conglomerate sound vartika tatparya-~ika, 2-2-55, were sup~ porters of 8pho~a-vlida, the theory of phonetic explosion. According to them, a thing is not signified by letters -no matter whether the letters are taken in their separate or collective form. No single letter of a word can produce cognition of a thing corresponding to the word. Neither c nor 0 nor w as separated from one another can produce in us the cognition of a thing called cow. The letters in their collective form too cannot produce the cognition, because each letter, as soon as it is pronounced, perishes and does not continue long to form a whole word. 0,0 and w not being able to exist simultaneously oannot. produce the cognition of a cow.

132

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA-SA:STRA, CHAP.

m.

We cannot also, they say, derive the cognition of a thing from a word on hearing its last letter as aided by the recoUection of the preceding letters, because the recollection of letters can bring about only the letters, but n.ot the thingd corresponding to them. Yet nobody can deny that on hearing the word "cow" we become cognisant of the thing caned " cow." Hence there must be something over and above the letters wnich produces the cognition of the thing This soreething is a conglomerate sound which bursts out after each lette:' !la.s been uttered. It is distinct from the letters but revealed by them. This outburst of a conglomerate sound, that is, of a word as a whole, is called sphota, which literally signifies an explosion of sounds. When we utter the first letter of a word there is revelation of the sphoea, which becomes more and more explIcit along with the utterance of the following letters, until at last we become cognisant of the thing signified by the word. Apoha-negation of the opposite.

In the Nyaya.vartika, 2-2-65, Uddyotakara mentions t,he
Buddhists who hold that what forms the denotation of a word is really apoha, 1 exclusion of the opposites. A word bears, according to them, a denotation of exclusion; that is, it denotes exclusion of what is denoted by other words. Thus the denotation of a cow is the exclusion of the denotation of a non-cow, that is, a cow is that which is not a non-cow. This theory is controverted by Uddyotakara on the ground (1) that we cannot conceive of a negative denotation that is, the denotation of exclusion, unless we have previously conceived of a denotation of Sa positive character, e.g. a man can form no idea of a non-cow until he has formed the idea of a cow from which the former idea is to be excluded, and if he has already conceived of the denotation of a cow, there is no necessity for a further denotation of exclu~ion; (2) though in the case of two opposite (contradictory) words the denotation of one word Illay exclude that of the other, the exclusion will not be possible in the case of such a word as "all" which has nothing to exclude.
Does a worn denote aptlha, exclusion?
I

48.

UDDYOTAKARA'S THEORY OF I SUFFERINGS.

Uddyotakara in his Nyaya-vartika, I-I-I, says that pain or suffering (dulJkha) is of twenty-one kinds, Channels of sufferings. viz. (l) the body, (2-7) the six senses (the
1 For a. full criticism of the Vaiyak~t'a.~a. doctrine of apoha consult the Nyaya.maiijari, chapter VI. Cr. a.lso Nyaya-virtika. 2-2-65, Bibliotheca Indica, Mimalhsi-virtika. and Vaiyaka.raI).a-bhu~~a.-sara. of KauJJ4.a BhaHa.

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-VACASPATI MISRA.

133

eye, ear, nose, tongue, skin and mind), (8-13) the six objects of sense (colour, sound, odour, flavour. touch and desire, etc.), (14-19) the six cognitions (visual, auditory, olfactory, gustatory, tactual and mental), (20) pleasure, and (21) pain. Of these the body is regarded as "pain" because it is the abode of all painful experiences; the senses, objects and cognitions are called "pains," because they constitute the channels through whioh pain reaches us; pleasure is designated as pain because it is always accompanied by the latter; and pain is by its very nature painful.
49.
VXCASPATJ MisRA., AUTHOR OF THE NYAYA-VARTIKA.TATPARYA-rIKA (ABOUT 841 A.D.).

Dharmakirti and several ·other Buddhist logicians 1 having compiled treatises subversive of the inter~acasp~ti su;pports the pretations of Vatsyayana and UddyotaBrahmamc mternreta• • d' tions. • kara, a Brahma~a logtman of great eru 1tion named Vacaspati Misra wrote, in support of the RrahmaQ,a commentators, an elabora.te gloss on the Nyaya-vartika called the Nyaya-vartika-tatparya.-~ika.i Vacaspati, who is reputed to be a native of Mithila (modern Darbhanga in North Behar), must have Vacaspatl's place and flourished in the ninth century A.D.. as he time. compiled his Nyaya-sUci-nibandha. 11 in the year 898, which evidently refers to the 8amvat era. and corresponds to 841 A.D. He preceded the Buddhist logicia.n Ratnakirti' (about 100\0 A.D.) who quotes him.
~;qftr lfTliiflr ~~iqr~it"?{ 1i'!!JTN~;mr ~ftmt,...ro.: "S"hl'EJlffti'EJ-

I

~fl"ITqifirr~Tf~w 1tT~ 'if ii"iffertf'Eml lfVrllll{ I (Nyaya-vi'irtlka-tatparya-tika, openmg hnes, edited by M.M. Gangadhar Sast.fl in the Vizianagaram SanskrIt series).
2 III ordt-l' to prevent mterpolatIOns mto the Nyaya.-siitra. Vicaspati compiled an Index of ttte siitras of the work caned Nyaya-eiici-mbandha.

s

';ijT'fl \!;~fifqairs~r~rf<{ ~llt f l l

~Cf~ftifil~ ~1'CfWft'6~ ,
(Nyaya-siici-nibandha., colophon). The year 898, if it refers to the sarilVat era, eorresponds to 841 A.D .• but if it refers to the 4a.ka era, corresponds to 976 A.D.
4 Apoha-siddhi, p. 7; K~nabhai:tga-siddhi, p. 58 (inr1uded in Six Buddhist Nyaya Tracts, edited by H. P. Shastri).

134

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA·SASTRA, CHAP. III.

Vacaspati Misra, whose patron was king Nrg a , 1 received iJlstruction in philosophy from a teacher J'riIoca~a. preceptor of named Trilocana. 2 Vacaspati plainly ad~ Vacaspatl. • I t' f pratyalCfta 1. IDlts t h at h' IS exp ana IOn 0 (pe!'cept:o:::). it: so far as it refers to its division into savikalpaka ~ tile de~erm:nE,te), and nirvilcalpalca (the indeterminate), is derived neither from the commentary of Vatsyayana nor from the subcommentary of Uddyotakara, but reflects directly the teaching of his preceptor Trilocana. This Trilocana, evidently a writer on Vaise~ika philosophy, must have flourished before 1000 A.D. when his doctrines of generality 3 (samavaya) and causality 40 (karya, sahakarikara'fJa), etc., were criticised by the Buddhist logician Ratnaklrti the famous author of Apoha-siddhi and Kl?a~abhanga­ siddhi. Rajasekhara (about 917 AD) mentions Trilocana [) to whom is ascribed a poem called Partha~vijaya. Vacaspa.ti Misra's Nyaya-ka:r;tika,R a work on logic, is not now available. He is said to have written comVacaspatl's other ·works. mentaries on the works of all the schools of philosophy. His commentary on the Vedanta-bhai?ya called Bhamati-tika and that on the Samkhya-karika called Samkhya1

'if{7f-U 1?'Ilft~m{ ~f"" ~~. if 'if -qn::~f1tl1

...~~ ","lit i{~1?ril~T ~hl~iJS1lTft if'.1T~: II
(Bhamati, last line)
~Tfl:r:

fll'tf1'\!fif

~'iihi'iI'T~~~iiiJl,!:;:

I

1??ItiiT;;f ~~ ~.n'~~1tt{ II (Nyaya*vartlka-tatparya-tika, 1-1-4:, p. 87, M.M Gangadhar Sastl'l'S edition) .

.~ tl"ij f.iJ~iJ: I ~.CCI ~it.~rifT ~m;r01lfqiAT1ftt '-iT"" ~wrr1f: ~TI1~ .•...
(Ratnakirll's Apoha-siddhi. p. 13, included m the" 8n' Buddhist Nysya Tracts," edited by M.M. Hal'a Prasad Shastri m the Bibhotheca IndIca serIes, Calcutta).
~ f~~~~ ~arir: I

.rdr'itq- ~ ~_ tf(~iI""eJ'il' ,
1S

if

lIyi{ri\lf"ft ~: I

(Ratnakfrti's Kl?alJabhanga-siddhi, p. 58. included in the "SIX Buddhist Nyaya Tracts ").
I) The following stanza, which RiijaSekhara, refers to Trllocana:-

said to belong to the Si.'ikt,i-mnktavah of

ri' .., f"l'i.l~~~: l(r. -qri ~~ ~: I
ifi{-.i: ~ ~~ .~ftJf~: ~1{

n

Who else but Trilocana is able to compose a Piirtha-viJaya? How can its purport be perceIVed by the two-eyed? [It took a three-eyed Trilocana to compose the poem, how can a two-eyed mortal understand it?] (Sanskrit Poems of Mayurs, Int.rodu('tlOn, p. 53) Columbia University series edited by Dr. G. P. Quackenbos). •
• 6 Mentioned In the Nyaya-vaL'tlka-Hitpal'aya-~ika, StlrIes.

p. 395, Vizianagram Sanskrit

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-VACASPATI MISRA.

I3!)

tattva-kaumudi occupy a most important place in the philosophical literature of India Being equally at home in all the sVRtems of philosophy and yet follf)wing no one of them as his own, Vacaspati was designated as Sarva-tantra·8vatantra, "master of aU systemR but reliant on no one of them in partICular." In the Nyaya.vartika-tatparya·tika Vacaspati mentions four schools of Buddhist philosophy, 1 viz the Reference to the four Madh.~7amika, Vl)'nana-vada" Sautrfmtlka Buddhlst s c h o o l s . ' and the Vaibhii.~ika including the doctrine of the Vafsiputriya sect; and repeatedly criticises Dignaga and Dharmakirti.9. 50. VXCASPATI OPPOSES DIGNAGA Vacaspati Misra,"in his Nyaya-vartika-tatparya-tika, criticises the definition of the analogue called « balThe analogue (1iUi) called " balancmg the ancing the effe:;t," karya-sama, as given effect," ldirya-sama, critI- by the Buddhht logician Dignaga, about cised 500 A D.s ,. Balancing the effect,'" is defined by Dignaga as an opposition which one offers by Rhowing that the eiff"ct referring to the subjPct is different from the one referring to the example. For instance, a disputant argues as follows:Sound is non-eternal because it is an effect of exertion, like a pot. His respondent oppo'}es thi~ argument by sayin~ that no conclusion can be drawn from it, because a sound is not an effect of exertion of the 'Same kind as a pot, the former being caused by a vibration of winds, but the latter by a lump of clay. This sort of futile opposition is, according to Dignaga, signified by the analogue called " balancing the effect." Vacaspati 5 controverts Dignu.ga by saying that the latter's
1-1-23; 1-2-~, 3-1-1, 4-l-33, 4-2-35, etc. Nyaya-vArtika-tiltparya-tikii,·I-I-I; 1-1-4, 1-1-5, 1-1-6; l-l-8, 5-2-5, etl" .3 VacaspatI MISra's Nyii'ya vartlka·tst.parya-tIkii. 5-1-37, pro 488-489, Vlzlana garam SanskrIt series, where Dlgniiga IS called Bhadanta 4 Dlgnaga defines karya-sama (balancing the effect) as folJows:I
Nyl.i.ya-vartlka-ta.tparya-~iks,

2

'Ii~(iff~itit;r
WCf
~1ff1~
~

q

'3Nlr~filf~WiRt I

II

(Pramana-samuccaya, chap VI, quoted by Vacal'opati)

5 The Tlbetan verSIOn runs as follows:-

A.!:!~'~"'~~"'~'of,.~~.~ I
l:l~z:r~·o.I·~tnp; ~1'r::..'4Jr::..' I

~)·r:,S~·-;'(r::..~·A. ~·UJr::..·~ I!
(Pramnna-samuccaya. chap. VI, bgyur. Mdo, Ce, folio 13).
Tshag-ma-kun-la~-btu~-ra,

chap VI,

~!it,an·

136

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA-SASTRA, CHAP.

m.

definition of "balancing the effect" is untenable, inasmuch as an effect of exertion, in so far as it signifies" coming into a state of existence from that of non-existence,» IS exactly the same in the case of a sound as in that of a pot. MOl'eover, if Dignaga '8 definition were accepted, then the Buddhi'3tic denial of a Maker of the universe would be futIle. Those who believe in God argue as follows : The universe has a ~Iaker,
b~cause

it is a product, like a pot

If Dignaga were to oppose this argument by saying that the universe is not a product of the same kind as a pot, his opposition, continues Vacaspat.i, would constitute an analogOlls rejoinder called "balancing the effect." In fact Vacaspati prefers the definition of "balancing the effect" as given by Ak~apada I (q.v.) according to whom an effect of exertion, even when it refers to the subject alone, may be of diverse kinds.
51.
VXCASPATI CRITICISES DHARMAKfRTI.

In the Nyaya-vartika-tatparya-t'ika V~caspati says that according to the Buddhist logician Kirti (D harma.The po;nt of defea.t. kirti about 635 A.D.) there are only two ntgrahasthana. • • . kinds t of the pomt of defeat (n'tgrahasthana), which occur respectively (1) when one adduces a reason which is not a proper one (asadhananga-vacana) , and (2) when one alleges defect in that where there is really no defect (ado~or1bhavana). It is not, continues Kirti, !Jfoper to say that there are twenty-two varieties of the point of defeat inasmuch as all these are included in the two main kinds just mentioned. Vacaspati controverts the above criticism by saying that sage Akl?apada too laid down two kinds of the point of defeat which OCCU"f respectively (1) when one misunderstands an argument ( V ipratipatti) or (2) does not understand' it at all (apratipatti). While in respect of the division of the point of defeat into two
Kirti or Dharmakirtl gives a. smlliar definition:-

~T~T'~rnlT({ lItu1;;rTflT~ ~T'fil' I 1:i1f~1{T'''' ~\(Tfiti~l": 1I11li~ 1{1{: II
(Quoted by Vacaspati in the Nyiy8rva1'liika-tltparya-~iki. 5-1-37). 1 Nyiya-sutra. 5-1-37. 2 Vacaspati says :-Af'cQrding to Dharmklrti there are twenty-two varieties of nigrahaathana which come under two main heads.

~IfTT'~ifiI~~R1i '1fT~ I filq~4!lI'li(~'" if ~wfil'f1r-WJir '5Jftf ~ • ~.. ' (Nyaya*vartika,45tparya.-!iki. 5-2-1, p. 492, Vizianagaram Sanskrit series).

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SVTRA.-VXCASPATI MISRA.

137

kinds, the view of Dharmakirti does not differ from that of Ak~apada, the two kinds as laid down by the latter are clearer than those laid down by the former. For instance, non-ingenuity (apratibhana) , which consists in one's inability to hit upon a reply, is recognized as a point of defeat, but it is included rather in the two kind'3 of the point of defeat laid down by Ak:;;apada than in those laid down by Kirti.' A person defeated on the score of noningenujty may remain speechless or may ta.lk irrelevantly This speechlessness (til~1Jimbhava) and irrdevant talk (praZapita) are not new points of defeat, although they are recognized as such by Kirti Kirti further observed that ., renouncing the proposition" (pratijna-sarnnyasa) as a point of deft'at, is identical with a fallacy of reason (hetvfibha~a), because it involves a reaRon wInch is uncertain. Vacaspati opposes him by saying that the uncertainty of reason being pointed out after the proposition has been renounced, the point of defeat must in this case b.a designated as " renouncing the proposition " \\ Considering their special cha.racters even Dharmakirti 3 admits that there are twenty-two varieties of the point of defeat.
52.
V.xCASPATI'S EXPLANATION OF DETERMINATE AND INDETERMINATE. PERCEP'!'IONS, Bavikalpaka AND Nirvlkalpaka.

Vacaspati 4 following his preceptor Trilocana & divides perception into two kinds. viz. determinate or Savikalpaka and Nirvi- mediate (savikalpaka) and indeterminate or kalpaka defined. immedia.te (nirvikalpaka). The determinate
J

Jayanta simuarly observes:-

~ ~ rm:T"if 'ifTfcil{"fW~T fiI"~lTlifrfii tt1~~
2

..

(Nyaya-mafiJari, Bhnika 12, p. 639, VlZianagaram Sanskrlt series). Vacaspati says:-

tRln'ct ~~ citf~T fiif~~ ~1~~'fR:mm~rqF4'11lf!lT tm m~ifT ~11T~ llq ~~ f'iJq-'{5~li1f4'irn ii'i(IiT~l{ I (Nyaya-viirtika.-tatparya-~i:k&, 5-2-5. p. 499. Vizianagaram Sa.nskrit series).
3

Jayanta says:-

l!iM' ~itifUq '" .,. fCl'ifmf~1RWfif"~l~ I
04-

(Nyiiya.-maD]ari, p. 659. Vizianagara.m SanskrIt series).

Vicaspatl wrItes : -

f't~~iiiij- l!if
Ii

t'i8lif...n.~1{ I ~ ~

~Ji1l'Cfi'~ ~l"l'T'ij" vf~w
"flH1H

trn ~~iY(f~r1{ 1IiI1FIT1EflTm{ I .-.mv f@f~~if;)~~til~~;rwi't.n: I " ""'J ...
....~ 1I'f(1'Cf'l ~114!llTnf'i~~mt n

'ifT'IJiIi, W1f1fie' 1If1f(im MiI"i~T firlfi~ ~ \'f~ 'ffCt ~fir.ftQ1i ~t{ I ~ftC~"i~
(Nyaya.-virtika.-ta;tparye.-~ika"

p. 87).

(Nyiya-vartlka-titparya.-~iki,

p. 87).

138

INDlAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAY A-SASTRA, CHAP. nI.

is knowledge which admits of -,pecification: it is the knowledge of an object aR particularised by its genus, etc., e g. this is a man (an mdividual commg undel' the genus' man '). The indeterminate perception on the contrary is that knowledge which admits of no specificat,ion: it is the knowledge of an obJect derived through it'S first intercourse with one of our senses, e g. this is something. Vacaspati further observes that the doctrine of determinate and indeterminate perceptIons is very ea-,y Nll'uktakaras crltlCl'.,ed to comprehend, and has not on that account been explained by Vatsyayana in hls Bha~ya or 'Uddyotakara in his Vartika.. The Niruktakaras I who flourished before Vaca~pati used the term nirvikalpaka, but they explained it as the knowledge of an object in which its general (samanya) and partIcular (visesa) features were combined. Vacaspatl controverts the view of the Nirukt.akaras by saying that if, in the nirvikalpaka stage, an object were to combine in itself its general and particular attributes, how could, in the Aavikalpaka st8Jge, the two, viz. the general and the particuL ", be separated so that one might be predicated of the other in the form, "this (particular) is man (general)."
53.
VACASPATI'S THEORY OF RIGHT KNOWLEDGE AND \VRONG KNOWLEDGE (Prama AND Aprama).

Right knowledge (Prama or tattva-jnana) defined in the Nyayavartika, 1-1-2, is the knowledge of a thing as it is, while wrong knowledge or error (aprama, bhrama or mithya-iiiana) is the knowledge of a thing as it is not. There are conflicting theories as to the exact nature of the wrong knowledge. Vacaspati Misra in his Nyaya·vartika.tatparyatlka t 1-1-2, mentions five different theories which may be summarised as follows : (1) Atma-khyati (manifestation of the self)-is a wrong knowledge in which our cognition, which exists in our mind
alone, manifests itself as a thing existing outside of us. The Yogacara Buddhists, who folklw this theory, say that our cognition (or knowledge) alone is real, and its manifestation as external objects is a wrong knowledge.
I

~~l~

f1i "Wli!fi~r: I

(Nyaya~vartika-tiitparya-tika, p. 89, Vizianagaram Sanskrit series).

.

fir~.WiIi.rriif \Ull1t'lI'ITlfi:r "~iIT \l~ I w-.u"iifI": -q'~ S1f~ 'fll~~~f1Hr~r , iJ1UTq~hrit ~fq ~.... ~"l II ...

Vat.syayana and Uddyotakara did not treat of the doctrine of nirviJcaltpaka an.d 8av~kalpaka pratyak?a. The Niru'ktalc(i:raa who treated them cannot be identified. Kumarila Bhatta. author of the Mtmalnsa~vartika (about 630 A.D.), was per-

COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-VACA.SPATI MISRA.

139

(manifestation of the unreal)-is a wrong knowledge in which a thing, which is non·eKistent or unreal, manifests itself as existent or real, e.g. when A, piece of shell is mistaken for a piece of ail ver. The piece of sil ver, bemg non-existent or unreal, its manifE"station is a wrong knowledge. The Madhyamika Buddhists, who hold this theory, say that all a.re void and the manifestation t') us of our internal states and the external objects is a wrong knowledge. (3) Anirvacaniya-khyati (manifestation of the undefinable)-is a wrong kno\-Vledge in which a thing manifests itself in such a wav that we cannot define it either as existent or as non·exi;tent, e g when a piece of shell is mistaken for a piece of silver, our knowledge is neither that of a piece of silver (which is not present) nor that of a piece of nonsilver (there being an apparent presence of a piece of silver), bllt that of a thing the nature of which we cannot define. rrhe Advaita-vedantins who hold this theory, say that if we regard the external things as real, it will be a wrong knowledge, inasmuch as the things are undefinable, that is. neither do they possess a real existence nor are they devoid of an empirical or apparent existence (4) A.khyati (non-manifestation)-is knowledge in which the difference of one thing (subject) from another thing (predicate) is not manifested on account of certain defects of our senses, etc., and owing to this non-manifestation we say that the one (snbject) is Identical with the other (predicate), e.g. when a piece of shell is supposed by us to be a piece of silver, in the form" this is silver " there are perception of " this" (shell) and recollection of " sil'~'er" together with a non· manifestation of theIr differ ence caused by the defects of our senses, etc. This theory is upheld by the Prabhakaras. (fi) Anyatha·khyati (a converse mamfestation)-is a wrong knowledge in which one thing is mistaken for another t.hing on the percC'ption of those properties of the first thing which are possessed in common by the second thing. and a thing possessed of these common properties is partlCularised not as the first thing (whose special properties are not, owing to certain defects of our senses, etc, cognised by us), but as the second thing ''''hh3h presents itself to our recollectIOn at the time, e.g. when a piece of shell is mistaken for a piece of sil ver in the form .' this IS silver," the properties common to both (shell and silver), are supposed, by the person who commIts the mistake. to abide not in "this" (shell), but in " sIlver" which he remem bers at the time. This theory is propounded by the Naiyayikas.
A8at~khy(jti

(2)

In a wrong knowledge when a persoll mistakes one thing (e.g. a shell) for any other t.hing (e.g. a piece of Rilver), there is an actual

140

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA.-SASTRA., CHAP. III.

perception, through imagination (1na1U1rlalc~a1Ja), of that" other thing,'~ because if he had not perceived it at all, he would not have exerted himself to pick it up. In fact when our mistake is discovered we :r:emember that we actually perceived the thing. Hence the omy rational theory. according to Vacaspa,ti Misra, is that or anyathakkyiUi which satisfactorily explains the origination of wrong knowledge.
53a.
VXCASPATI'S THEORY OF

Oo'lUlition (upadki).

Vacaspati Misra-, in his Nyaya-vartika-tatparya-tika, 1-1-1, says that an inference is based on the invariable concomitance (vyapti) of its middle term with the major term. Now, what is the nature of this invariable concomitance? The Buddhists say that t.he middle term is in invariable concomitance with the . major term, if the former stand to the latter in causa1 relation (karya; kara1}a) or the relation of identity (svabhava). Seeing that the Buddhistic definition is too narrow and too wide, Vacaspati sets it aside by saying that the invariable con(;omitance is that relation of the middle term with the major term which is freed from aU conditions (upadhi). A condition is inustrated in the following inference!The hill is full of smoke, because it is full of fire. This is a wrong inference, because smoke always accompanie8 fire, but fire does not al ways accompany smoke. The inference will, however t be right if we attach a condition to its middle term in the following ~vay:The hill is full of smoke, because it is full of fire (fed by wet fuel). Here' wet fuel' is a condition (upadhi) , which is attached to the middle term' fire.' A fire by itself may not always accompany smoke, but when it is fed by wet fuel it is always attended by the Bame. This kind of condition should not qualify the middle term, which must be perfectly free from all conditions. If an inference is to be right, a disputant must remove from it all conditions which are suspected (.~anlcita) by himself or with which he is charged (samaropita) by his opponent.
53b.
THE THEORY OF CAUSE AND EFFECT (ha?"ya~~ratta).

In the Nyaya-kaI}ika as also in the Nyaya-vartika.-tatparyatika, 3-2-17, Vacaspati Misra criticises, on one hand, those who hold that an effect (karya) springs up from notWng (asata~ sajjii..

.

SUTRA-UDAYANA(. Atma-tattva-viveka. edited by M.ic scripture legislates for men divided into four classes and passing through four stages of life. THE BUDDHIST AND JAINA SCRIPTURES CONDEMNED.rrC . 54. Vacaspati Mlera in his Nyaya-vartika-tatparya-~ika.:iRYA. .-tlka-parisuddhl.kshman Sastri." 1RIf lff{i: • (Atma-tattva-Vlveka.mlfe: f$ll'N ~q'lINif~ I 1IfAf~1t~~li 'ii1!fT liCf ~~ifT ::.t.a·tatparya-~ika-parISuddhi.avali and Nyaya-parisi~ta (also called Bodha siddhi or Bodhasuddhi).ARYA. . wrote a sub-gloss on Vacaspati's work called the Nyaya-vartika. Buddha and ~f?abhadeva are not so.: Wif'iiT~~ r.tparya-~ikii of Viicaspatl Mmra whose words Udayana proposes to elucidate by the grace of the Goddes~ of Speech.2 KiraI]. a Brahma. while the tradition of the BrahmaI}.ya-va:rtika-tatparya-~i. ~. 2-2-68. How can we then place any confidence in the latter? While the BrahmaI)..a-parisuddhi embodies elaborate notes on the Nya:ya-vSrtik8rtii.rfffl' -q-f?r~~ ~T~CfT~if lll'l'i7{ I «fJi{'l ~ iIf'(1'f . in the Bibliotheoa Indica series. UDAYANAC. .. . At the dissolution of the world the Buddhist and Jaina scriptures will dis· appear.ffi ~"lit II .M.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA.). Vindhyesvarl Prasad Dvivedin and M. and it was to vindicate him against their Udayana's works. . 53c. Ls.Wi( '1~~ 'STPfR. 141 effect pre-exists in its cause (8ata~ sajjayate). Qt (Nyiya-vartilr. the scriptures of the Buddhists and Jainas do not concern themselves much with the regulation of practical life. says that the author of the BrahrnaQic scripture js God. tiHparya. last lines).(I{fifT 'lJfff:Uifij1(1f'l 1Iff . I-I-I. AUTHOR OF THE NYAYA-VARTIK'ATATP..ARYA-1'lKA-PARISUDDHI (984 A D. while that of the "Buddhist and Jaina scriptures is Buddha and J. He expounds the doctrine of the N aiayikas that an effect does not pre-exist in its cause. Vacaspati MIsra was criticised by a host of Buddhifolt logicians.M. thus:- 'UW: ~rn~: ~ -.. 1 The NylS.b. ~~ ~ -.. but that from a cause something originates which did not exist before such origination.. :2 If.li.t~abha­ deva While OUt God is omnh!cient and all-powerful.ta logician of Mithila. attacks that Udayanacarya or Udayakara.ic scriptures will be kept up by God. 1 Hewrote several other works such as the Kusumaflja.

It is said of Udayana that he frequently defeated the Buddhists 1.a and a Srama:Qa (Buddhist) with him.lJq(f. ANC1ENT SCHOOL. the BuddhIsts causeg hIS • death. but the Udayana's VlctOl'y over latter did not admit his victory over them. One day.t. as that deity did not show any mercy towards him in consideration of the services he had rendered to maintain his glorious existence Udayana. colophon). He was born in Man-rol!i. 5 ~~'fi{ ifTl: ~~ "1. Not being able to make them believe in God by arguments. in religious discussionR.. When falling down on ~hp ground. NYAYA-SASTRA. the Brahma1}a cried aloud c there is God.him until he was cleansed of his sin.' It so happened that the Sramar. he was told in a dream that Jagannatha would not appear before .tllne. 984. Vdayana ascended the top of a hill. ciq\i(~.~!'lt ~~II(Il4~t{ II (Lakf(!anavali.' work caned Laksanavali. part I. It is said that Udayana was not pleJ. This fact was considered as a convincing proof of the existence of God Udayana gained victory but was blamed as a murderer. Udavana. thus addressed Jagannatha:" Proud' of thy prowess thOU despisest me-upon whom thy existence depended when the Buddhists reigned supreme! " 8 ?r". 2 Vide my article on "Buddhism in IndIa" in the Journal. Ion t 0 w h' lC h he . where he put an end to his life by tu~anala) i. slow fire. was the author of another . 55. he proceeded to the temple of Jagannatha at Puri After he had lived there for three days and three nights.fiffJCf~ij I m-dli{tfri!tlll' . CHAP III. better known as Acarya. while dying. th a t h e compose d th e ' .. UDAYANA COMBATS THE BUDDHISTS. while the Brahmat:la came to the ground unhurt. Becoming penitent. He hurled both of them down from the top of the hill.D. a village 20 miles north of Darbhanga in Mithila on the east bank of the river Kamala.' while the ~ramal)a exclaimed 'there is no God.e by burning himself in a.says book in the Saka year 906 corresponding to A. BuddhIst Text Sodety. 1 in the introducHIS place and t' . 1896. by performing the penitenItiary rites of tu~anala at Benares Accordingly he went to that city.i~fct li~~T l1Cf f~ftJ: II . taking a Brahma1).8ed with the decision of J Rgannatha.a died of the fall. there was a very hot contest between him and the Buddhists on the question of the existence of God. l(~Iff?r: I 'Sif~T~ f.142 INDIAN LOQIC.

place and object.a and K!?aQ.lyaq. c. it produces in us pleasure or pain. there is. Rak~ita in hifl !Svara-bhailga-karika to refute the existence of God were controverted by Udayana in his.ernal like a contmued series of seed and plant. The arguments advanced by K alyaI) a. were opposed by U~a:vanacarya. (b) A cause agam IS only an effect in relation to I~S preceding ?ause. "no harm in carrying on a logical investigation about Him which may also be called His worship. the latter would have been found everywhere and always. But an effect IS only occasional and hence It is dependent on a cause.l8'vara.ction. srutyaprama'Y}ya (denial of the authority of t. 57. treats of the supreme soul (Paramatma) or God ([svara) whose worshIp enables us. Udayana says that there is an unseen cause called desert (adr~ta) 1 Proof of the eXIstence which determines our happiness and of God.he Veda). to its first beginning. it is to be admitted that there is a Supreme Agent called the All-powerful God who bestows on us pleasure and pain as the effects of our desert." says he. etc. to attain paradise and emancipation. critlClsed.a-bhailgasiddhi. Tho desert on which Ollr happmess and misery depend cannot also be traced.a Rak1?ita in his Anyapoha-vicarakarika. sruti-pariksa. In the Atma-tattva-viveka Udayana criticised the thE?ories of apoha (the knowledge of a thing by the exclusion of its opposites). UDAYANA'S KUSUMANJALI. Our happiness and misery are'depenrlent on a cause called adl's!a..terdependence of a cause and its effect. The KusumHnJali (literally" a handful of flowers"). The world havmg no begmmng. 143 56. which is divided into five chapters called clusters. misery. the merit or demerit that ensues therefrom resides in our soul under the name of adr~ta or desert. God-18vara. two Buddhist logicians whose accounts will be given hereafter. k~a'l'}a-bhanga (the momentary existence). etc. UDAYANA OPPOSES KALYA~A RAKf?ITA AND DHARMOTTARA. (a) An effect proceeds from a cause. according to Udayana. The doctrme of apoha. 1 That there IS an unseen cause called adrsta (deHert) is proved on the following grounds:.D) and Dharmottaracarya (about 847 AD). Although all men worship Him alike under various names. the succession of cause and effect 1S et. Kusumafijali. propounded by Ka. Associated with a suitable time. kBana-bhnga. etc. . When we perform a good or bad . If there had been no ll'l. Since a non-intelligent cause c-annot produce its effect without the superintendence of an intelligent spirit.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-StlTRA-UDAYA~ACARYA. and by Dharmottara m his Apoha-nama-prakaral).a. which IS linked wlth another cause and so on." In the course of the investigation. KalyaI)a Rakf?ita (about 829 A.

A right knowledge. be defined as an independent apprehension which corresponds to its objeot in the external world. God is not ordinarily perceptible. knowledge of any kind. concerns itself with an object unknown before. in his opinion. . Udayana meets the contention by saying that the description of right knowledge cited above iF. The trace of a good action 18 called merit while that of a bad actioD. which is not limited by time and space. The desert reSIdes m (the soul of) the person who performs all action and not in the thing from which he derives happiness or misery. God is the source of such knowledge and is therefore the supreme authority to us.. which have come down to us from time immemorial. 3S eveI'ythin~ in the world is subject to creation and destruction. CHAP. The actions themselves disappea.toms together and to support them.n~ ~~ i'Q(ilfl«~: " (Kusumafijali. as we do not perceive Him.144 INDIAN . oannot come under this description because it never refers to an object previously unknown. and hence our non-perception of Him does not prove His non-existence. God's knowledge. etc.. ANCIENT SCHOOL. They must be due to the diversity of our deserts. ~. It is He who introduced the traditional arts such as carpentry. nay. There are many proofs to establish the existence of God. weaving. SI~ltllf . is called demerit and the two together are called desert (adrf~). do thereby overthrow the authority of the Veda.l. incorrect A right knowledge should. relying merely on the efficacy of sacrifices. but they leave behind them certain traces which operate in bringing about happiness and misery. N on-eternal as it iR. Some say tha. The earth being a product like a pot must have a maker. (d) It is a umversal practice to perform good actions and avoid bad actlOns as the means of gainmg happiness and avoiding mIsery. inasmuch as He does not possesE. right knowledge. (e) The effects which are diverse in character imply a diversity of causes. NYAYA-SASTRA.t there is no God. The maker must be an intelligent being possessing a will to bring a. As our happiness and misery are diverse in character> we cannot say that God or nature alone is their cause. That intelligent being iR God. That perRon iR God. enjoined by the Veda Udayana asks them: whence does the Veda derive its authority? The Veda is certainly not eterna. The above reasons are summarised thus : - ~liNJt'lW{lfrf(ati' '~1QT1{ f~!f1f"if. etc.LOGIC.r. It has been contended that God is no authority to us. stavaka 1). it cannot be a source of right knowledge unless we suppose its author to be an infallible person. III. Some people deny God.. Udayana silences them by stating that· the non-perception of an object can prove its non-existence only if the object is one which is ordinarily perceptible. Those who deny God.

10 .tma-tattva-viveka (lit.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-UDAYANA. fil''ii. UDAYANA'S A.93. . pp. Calcutta).53. at the concluding part of his Kusumafijali.89. Tarkapancanana. 145 God having made this world causes it to collapse. (2) vahyartha-bkanga-that things possess no external reality. .. 24. 30~ :n. 32. Udayana offers prayer to God." I " As for us. 38.An analysl~ of th& dhadhikara (a discourse concerned with Atma-tattva. though our minds have been long plunged in Thee.ed by Jaya NiiriiyaJ. 45. . that. (3) gU'f}a-gu1J. His will manifests itself unhindered in all actions Perceiving suitable materIals (atoms} for creation. Thou in Thy goodness wilt save those people too.-Vlveka.e ocean of joy. because even in going to controvert Thy existence they have earne'3tly meditated on Thee.92. stavaka 5. C. 10.T:M:A-TATTVA-VIVEKA. 34:. Nyayaratna.la. 'CIIf~ntil'fl . our minds being fixed only on Thee. etc. as follows: "Iron-souled are they in whose hearts Thou canst find no place.ibkeda-bhanga-that a substance is not distinct from its qualities. 0 Thou Essential Beauty.ud. and conceiving a desire for the same. It 3 proposes to refute four Buddhistic theories in order to establish a permanent soul. 2 ~ 3 The Atma-tattva-viveka. _ . and having destroyed it remakes it as a rna/gic-show.69. etUt. The four theories are: (1) k~a'J'}a-bhanga . the BuddhIsts) or Bauddha-dblkkara (FIe to the Buddhists).that every thing is momentary. The l.dited and translated by E. Coweil and M. though repeatedly washed by the inundations of ethics and sacred texts. 39. still in time. tp.~~ f'il'U~"ift fir~~ tqf~ CiI'~~fif"til W"Tf1l W~~ 'ifiiQ'Tfq ~lIflQf~ I WWT" ~ ~fiw C!Ii~ ~iI' (if~llI'<ft tnit ir'ffil ifT'ifcrrfl1{(i~) "-1~: ~fflirT: II (The Kusumai'ijali. 9. we may no more be subject to the afflictions of death ~" 58. B. 46. a discllsslon about the true nature of the soul) is otherwise called Ba. I. 0 MercifufOne.. He made this wonderful universe which is supported by His will. haste to display thy mercy. yet are they verily l'estiess still and unsatisfied: therefore. 47. Oh Lord...

D. called the world. It is this net of relations or conditions which constitutes the veil (samvrti). Nyarya-mafijari... These theories are set aside by Udayana who maintains that there is a permanent soul (atma) whose U dayana' s contention. Shaving the head. the interrogator may consult the Upanifijads or appeal to his own heart. invincible in debate and well . and that the world is void.g. in antagonism to our religion.la lqgician who fought hard against the L'f f J t Buddhists was Jayanta. Jayanta. Certain Buddhists go so far as to say that there is no substance distinct from its qualities. Another BrahmaT. into five sections of which the first four are concerned with the refutation of these theories. A seed.' 'making magic circles. and the substance and qualities are both to be denied if they are supposed to be identical. the YOfJacaras or vijnana vadins) maintain that there are no external objects correspo~ding to our cognitions and that the cognitions alone al'e real. Alaya-vijnana. controverts the doctrines of our great men and persuades people to build caityas. By the principle of apoha differentiation. are the special practices of the Buddhists. for an instance. the abiding-cognition (or the abode of cognitions) called "ego" is the continuous flow of momentary cognitions called pravrtti-vijnana. The Buddhist scripture is disregarded in so far as it opposes the Vedas. A substance could not be defined if it existed apart from its qualities.. etc.g. The Naiyayikas are satisfied if the sour is completely freed from the sufferings which are of twenty-one kinds. ANCIENT SCHOOL. wear tattered robes. . an independent commentary on the Nyaya-sutra. e.). NYAYA-SASTRA.. a cow is cognised as that which is not a not-cow.146 INDIAN LOGIC. As to whether the soul is a principle of selfillumination and essence of bliss. of which the essence is voidness. and (4) anupalambha -that the world is void The book is dividb. while the fifth concerns itself with the establishment of a permanent soul. Some of the Buddhists (e.. The consequent cannot in fact come into being until the antecedent has ceased to exist. emancipation consists in getting rid of sufferings for ever. we cognise an object as different from other objects. AUTHOR OF THE NVAYA-MAlIlJARl (ABOUT THE 10TH OENTURY A. The Buddhists say that whatever is existent is momentary. cannot continue up to the time when a plant springs out of it.' etc. In fact a substance exists in relation to its qualities and the latter exist in relation to the former. CHAP. Udayana says that the injunctions such as H do not kill" are respected by the followers of the Vedic as well as the Buddhistic religions. JAYANTA.. 59. author of the 1 eo ayan la. III.

p.D).lfl: if f'{ ~'1T~'llt ifirol ~. In explaining verbal knowledge Jayanta reVIews two theories 7 called respectively the Oonnection of the Abh~hita'Ywaya-vadaand E xpres8 ed (a bh'h 't-d) d th e E xAnvitabhidM:na-vada.2 minister of King Muktapida. b ~1 '!if '5fll'. 60.ita Candra. he must have flourished in Kasmira in the lOth centurv A. \V ords and their meanings. 84. author of Upamltl-bhava-prapafica Katha. ~ll i{f*Ri ~Nit 1i'Wtf!l'~ ~'I.-T ffif ii1tfifT if~ ~ri II (Syadvada-ratnakara.u the 9th and later than the 11th century A.sekhara Siirl's SaduarSa.D. and in-the Syadvadaratnakara lJ by Deva Suri (1086-1169 A. l If we supp'ose him to be identical with his namesake the great-grandson of Sakti Svamin. Vizianagaram Sanskrit eerwR).•••••••. RaJaSekhara SUfI quotes Jayanta as follows:- ~'ifll~~f'i:f<fr ~P4(ifitTs~r.D as he quotes VacasDate of Jayanta. pati Misra B (841 A. III the Vlzianagaram SanRkrlt Senes). oj.Uibhidhanavada) The Bhat~a Mimamsakas. colophon.cft fif&:nft ~1I'f~ -t:fir 1fcU\f 'qf~m~\) ~n:i 'if ~q'~ ~~: ifiTta t:fci ~fu: Ii (N. ~yaya-mafiJal'i. chap. II).iijari. C'haptel' VI. He could not have lived earlier th. Gangadhar Sastri.r~q'~f~ I 6 ~~ij 1(8ili m'Ri'. 659. chapter on Saiva darsana).3 ~~fq '3~ . . 7 Nyaya-mafijari.YA-SUTRA-JAYANTA.. :\Higha 1$ said to be a consm of Siddharllll.) and Magha 4 (about 905 AD) in the Nyaya-ma. JAYANTA'S EXPLANATION OF VERBAL KNOWLEDGE.f: ! 1.D. pp. who uphold the first theory.'qf~'f:n~r ~ 'JJi~ !iftft{ tI . 147 known as V rttikara.: I (Maladhari Raja. ••.).ed by l\f. was the son of Pal:}Q.na-sarnuccaya. Vlzlanagaram SanskrIt.C'OMMENTARTES ON THE NyA. 2 The Imeage of J ayanta is described in the opemng verses of the Kadambarikathasara which was composed by lus son Abhinanda . In 1348 A.••• (Ratnavatlirika.a. chap. IV).D. 402-403. 2 2 anvaya-va a an pression of the Oonnected (anv.va.j. and is himself quoted in the Ratna-vatarika 5 by Ratnaprabba (1181 A D. mainCfT~<iiiJt~~ 5l~ ~fff ~~t ifqef'f!~71( '(ftr 'l: ctlt1f: ~~: (Nyaya-maiiJari.M. 312. 'if" li 1i~'Pfl 'ifT~n 'iil:lT: I \I ~~lhrfi(~~ ~~lIin "4Ief~ "'1M1f1 ~ ~tCj'iii ~. p. series. edit. verse 100. chapter XII.iflfil6Q"{fI 1ijiCf.8 '5f1l'fJ "'tllif . p.ya-manjad.

CHAP. Jayanta opposes sphota-vada. define 8phota (explosIOn) as the essence of sound revealed by a letter.. As there is a constant relation between a sound and the thing signified by it. of Indian 1 Nyaya-manjari.l the theory of phonetic explosion.a~v~da-the. As soon as we hear c. the words of a sentence after conveying their . .sara and Sabda. there is revealed to us the sound-essence cow in an indistinct form.kaustubha. if it is to convey a consistent meaning. .148 INDIAN LOGIC. reminds us of a thing corresponding to the same.la. underlying it. word or sentence The sound-essence. and that revealed by a sentence is qaHed vakya~ sphota. kaIJ. a word-explosion. The Spho. until we hear the last letter w which reveals to us the sound-essence in a distinct form. theory grammarians (V aiyakarana) who propound of phonetlc explosIon. 0 and w. and then the meanings themselvAs produce in us a knowledge of their mutual connection which is called verbal knowledge. The Prabhakara Mimamsakas. as soon as we hear it. and produce in us the knowledge of a mutual connection among those meanings called verbal knowledge. It 18 mdeed absurd to suppose that a word bears no definite meaning. ahnika 6. word or sentence.-bhii~al. tain that verbal knowledge depends upon the connection which is automatically perceived among the meanings expressed by words individually in a sentence. say that it is only in a sentence that words can express to us any meanings. NYAY A-SASTRA. Jayanta examines sphota. III. Suppose a person utters the word cow composed of the letters c. and Max Muller's Six Systems.. J ayanta dismisses the second theory on the ground that it _ . Bhal'trhari's Vikyapadiya. as is evident from the fact that a sentence composed of disorderly and ungrammatical words does not express a systematic meaning. . that is. that revealed by a word is called pada-8phota. Vaiya~ PhIlosophy. ANCIENT SCHOOL. • . Cf. presupposes a word to bear various mean_ The Nyaya dootrme of ings in connection with various words in a tatparya mtentlOn. a letter-explosion. is called var1J-a-sphota. a sentence-explosion. As an amendment of the first theory we must assume that a sentence. He also does not completely accept the first theory inasmuch as words alone do not produce verbal knowledge. _ which he pronounces to be untenable. . and then as we go on hearing 0.respective meanings disappear. the sound-essence of a letter. which is revealed by a letter. must have.da 1. This revelation of soundkaralfa. the theory. 402. p. sentence. who uphold the second theory. a power called intention (tlUparya) over and above its component words. the same sound-essence is revealed though still in an indistinct form.

VII. 149 essence of the entire word in a distinct form is called 8pkota or phonetic explosion. significant of a thing. a sentence is the beginning of speech. unless it is a complete word. words or sentences. but the sound-essence cow. .BOUT 829 A. (the knowledge of a thing by the exclusion of Uvara-bha. According to the latter. others. w. IV and Ill) . Now. sfutyaprama'fJ.D.nga.) AND DHARlYfOTTARA (847 A. nothing would have been signified by letters. produce in us knowledge of the thing called cow. If in this way the letters themselves (as constituents of words) are sufficient to signify things. bearing a permanent relatlOn to the thing signified by it. what is the necessity for admitting an additional entity called sphoea. While some. why do we not perceive it in all times and everywhere ~ If. persists to signify the thing called cow. It is revealed by a letter. on the other hand. opposes the above theory by saying that it is a most cumbrous one. cannot signify any thing.hat is the nature of a sound-essence (spho&a) ~ A sound-essence is eternal and self-existent. the advocates of vakya-sphota. word or sentence. 0 and w may successively perish. can be revealed only by a word (pada). It is therefore superfluous to assume a sphota over and above letters. k~a1Ja-bhanga (the momentary existence). hold that it is a sentence (vakya) alone that can reveal a significant sound-essence. the advocates of pada-spho(a.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA-JAYANT. • . no doubt pass away.A. etc. but is not produced by any of them. heard. Its opposites). sound-essence. • Jayanta in his Nyaya-mafijari (chapters V.ya (denial of the authority of the Veda). J ayanta.D. A single letter. Had there been no sound· essence. When we hear the word cow. it requires a cause for its manifestation. the letters c. the words are mere parts of a. it is asked: Is the thing signified by a 8phota manifest by nature or does it require a cause for its manifestation 1 If it is manifest by nature. which can neither be perceived nor inferred? Moreover.Apoha~ ~!}aQa-bhanga. but they leave on our soul (which is eternal) impressions which coupled with our audition of w. In the case Jayan!a's crItlcism of of the word "cow" c and 0 after being sphota-vada. say that a sound-essence. which is eternal. what is that cause 1 Jayanta says that the cause is not other than letterR which constitute words. " . 61. sentence and the letters are parts of words. as a N aiyayika. CRITICISES THE DOCTRINES OF KALYA~A RAKSITA (A. severely criticises the doctrines of apoha .). JAYANTA.

void as our cognition is transparent and formless. chapters I-Tn. .150 INDIAN J. CHAP. yet you construct . (q/v) in his Anyapoha·vicara-karika. It ig perhaps the disputation with Dlgnaga that is referred to by the expression Bhadanta-kalaha in chapter III. . and by Dharmottara (q v. and Sruti·parik~a. JAYANTA'S REVIEW OF SEVERAL OTHER BUDDTSTIC DOCTRINES. In chapter XII J ayanta observes that even Dharmakirti maintained that Points of Defeat (nigrahasthana) were of 22 kinds. vehement crusade against the Buddhists that in the Nyaya-mafijari he actually reproached them as follows : - " You) Bauddhas.after death' you say that everything is dhlstS.. Sautrantlka and . and Madhyamika.1 . yet you build monasteries with the hope that they will last for centuries. etc.Yogi. are mere species of our cognitions fr?m which they are not di~tinct.k H Vaibhaslka.1H\. Yogacara. propoun~_ed by KalyaI}. e tries also to refute the Buddhist theories that . NYAYA-SASTRA. hold that there is no soul. by Dharmakirti who is designated as a cara.ch of the Bud.) in his Apoha-nama-prakaraq.a K~ax. Jayanta carried on such a. In chapter XII the Vaihha~ikas are mentioned as holding that the external objects are hoth real and perceptible. . pain.if.. there are only two means of right knowledge (perception and inference) and that pleasure. and you say that the WI" • 'VAn t. III. jivara-bhanga (the non-existence of God). Baudd a or a ya. etc. h S' .momentary. ' . Jayanta cities the metaphysical views of the Vaibha~ika. In the same chapter we find that the Sautrantikas maintain that the external objects are undoubtedly real.ta-bha11ga-siddhi) etc l 62.JOGlC. [svarabhanga-karika. Bh~k~uJ Saugata. In the same chapter as an instance of the incoherent (aplirthaka). caitya8 (towers) to enjoy pleasure in paradise ~eproa. In the Nyaya-mafijari. Sautrantika. Jayanta criticises the definition of p'ratyaksa (perception) as given _The Madhy~mika.. but they are not perceptible. ANCIEN'l' SCHOOL. The Buddhistic objections against the soul aq a separate substance are mentioned and criticised in chapters VII and IX. etc...a Rak1?ita. The Madhyamikas are said to hold that the world iS. as we can know them only through inference The Y ogacaras are referred to as saying that the so-called external objects are mere forms of our cognition which alone i~ real.n An~. In chapter IX there is also a criticism of the doctrine of those Buddhists who hold that the external world is unreal.

the junlor.D. p 467.) . L.-tattvaloka. OTHER COMME~TATORS ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA. What a strange character the Bauddhas pos"Sess.r tl.(~ ~~fi{ 'II!fr~ .. a Jl.natha.}.COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYA-SUTRA--VISVANATHA.(f'ifffT: U 00 I (l.ina phi~osop. II~ p."m ~f .tha 2 who wrote a commenta.: 'TUII (Nyliya-l1'afiJari. These are the principal BrahmaQ. 94.her..a commentators on the Nyaya-sutra.D. edited Ly Dr.rFcttl~ ~. ABHAYATILAKOPADHYAYA' (BEFORE 1409 A. 2.f~ ~~~ flf. Subsequently there arose a number of commentators such as Vardhamana. 1fr~r~rr q~Jn:rr:fl1'1 'q ~mT"l ~r-cif ~'lil'(r: ~.~~~-ttT~~ftrfi1-. . Gangadhara Siistri's edltIon). 64.. In the Sa4darsana-samuccaya-vrtti the Jaina philosopher Gur..llTlil" 'frf.nd method of interpretation.ifi1f~.l­ darsana-samnccaya-vrtti mentious a BrahmaQa logician named Srikal}.ry on the Nyaya-siitra called Nyayalankara.. Vacaspati Mu3ra.>addarSana-samuccaya-vrtt1 called Nyfiya (Tarka)-rahasya-diplkiI. author of Nyaya-vrtti. In the Blbhotheca Indica). chap. whose names are not mentioned here as they belong to the modern school of Nyaya in respect of their style a. About 1409 A." 1 SRIKA:&THA {BEFORE 1409 A D. Gu~aratna. Visva. GUt)aratna observes:- ~ ritl:ilqT ~T'fi4l:'if .. author of NyAya.fir .r·~~~if-~1 ~-~'lfW­ ~l:fi'rqr~ftr r<f".a logician named Abhayatilakopadhyaya 8 who wrote a commentary on the Nyaya-sutra called Nyaya-vrtti.T-ifl1fC{'Qi qf('J~ ~TtlrEiJTT~­ P14: t ~ ~i!l:Tq'T'(-qT'f[~r~if. 151 guides.-yu: 1fflr: I \f '1~ ~~flf{ ~S:liIt "'~ f'fiffw. etc. 6:3. 65. in his S~<. Suah.... 7th ahmka. author of the Nyaya-nibandha-prakasa.taratna mentions a Brahmaq. d -.l. they are verily a monument of conceit.J".iji$"..

156. 66. .:rl%iI1~ ~ ~.nskr!t Manuscripts for 1883-84.na an r b _ .divergent systems of thought were desig. Dr. the Jaina.. . IV The Nyaya recognized as a Brauch of Orthodox Learning. Sir R.-3. 67. &11i ~'ti wen . as we read in the writings of Yltjfiavalkya 1 and others. 1. Bhandarkar in his Report of Sa. THE NYAYA INCLUDED IN Saddarsana.0_ ~~l~. S About the date of Jinadatta Siirl. the Sarhkhya (including yoga). tical and heterodox.!l\ author of ~a4dar­ sana-samuccaya (about 1168 A D. After the term dariana (philosophy) had come into use at the beginning of the Christian era.q . widely a The Ja:n :vrlters tn. p. but it is generally agreed that the Nyaya system is included therein. elude N yaya lD Saddar• • lana. in gaining recognition as a branch of orthodox learning. observes: "Jinadatta therefore lived ~n the first half of the l:3t h century of the Chrlstian e!"8. The Indian Logic at its first stage called Anvik~iki was often looked upon with positive disfavour and The means for gainmg subJ'ected to adver~e criticisms..) reviews the same six 1 The Yijfiavalkya-samhiti. nated by thIS common appellatIOn. G.L the six systems were the Buddhist. According to the Jaina philosopher Haribhadra Suri. Opinions differ as to which six of the numerous systems constitute ~aq. t . 44.. On account of its intrinsic worth it became the most prominent of the six systems of philosphy called ~a4dar8ana.) ft ($agdarSana-samuccaya. verse 3. maintams on the authorltv Ot Suk ta-sarl:lkir:Ja. Jinadatta Suri S (about 1220 A. Buali's edition).f~rfir ~iffifl~'l:a.CHAPTER. nay it succeeded. tions were held apparently to be sophis. ~f. Attempti~g to prove the infallibility of the Veda and adapting itself to the Saiva cult the Nyaya got access into the orthodox community from which it received an unequivocal approbation. it gradually got a steady foothold and an increasing number of followers.. . the Nyaya.dar8ana. as its deducrecogmtion. But at the second stage when it was named N yaya. A COMPARATIVE ESTIMATE OF THE ANVIK~IKI AND THE NYAYA.D." Klatt in his Onomasticon) no. the Vaise~ika and the J aimiruya (comprising the Mimamsa and the Vedanta). We learn that at a later period six systems of philosophy were specially called Saqdarsana. .

THE NYAYA--A BRANCH OF ORTHODOX LEARNING. 4-5. This verse is qnot-ed in the Gurugits of the VlSva-s~ra-tantra. In the Hayasir~a-paficaratra.!u4darsana the BrahmaI). 13-36). the Jaimjnlya (comprising the Mimamsa and the Yedanta). the Vaise/?ika and the Saugata or Buddhist.) enumerates the same six systems in a different order.~it1iTfq t{1l'ifrfi. 2 ijii ~t~ ~fi.OIi'l)fa: ~1ir. Kapila (Sarilkhya) Patafijali ('Yoga). By the term . VyaRa (Vedanta) and Jaimini (Mimamsa).D.darsana. 4 The Nyaya-mafijari. Vizianagaram Sanskrit series.a stituent of Saq. p. a work WhICh 1S quoted by Raghunandana. a '" ilnr'i~ ~_ '1f'Q'@f~ ~ ~f4: 1l.lif)~ ~T.. the Yauga or Saiva (which is the same as Nyaya). In the Nyaya-mafijari 4 Jayanta observes that the authority of the Veda was to a large € 'xtent estabAuthOrIty of the Veda lished through the aid of the science of reaeRtabhshed. the six systems comprising $arJdarsuna are specified as the philosophies of <. viz.) as well as in the Guruglta of the Visvasara-tantra. Another Jaina writer named Maladhari Sri Rajasekhara Siiri I (1348 A. pp.ic work supposed to have been introduced into :J3engal by Raja Vallala Sena (about 1158-1170 A. soning called ·the Nyaya. THE NYAYA SUPPORTS THE VEDA. e(ilted by Gangadhara Sastri. KaQada (Vaise~ika). a Brahmal).a.• "~ii1~m ~~TiTSRr ~"ii"~ W~•••••• q~wi': I II (&yaSl1'~a-paficar!tra.j 'itfeni i!l'f4t I "J)ilW ~i(r~ iliRa_ 1I if ~it'll ~T~ 'Sf'i"'fnt ii q'flr"ltJlit lit 'ffflrT~~ if ". Benares). C(wiJierf q~ . the Sarhkhya (including the Yoga).. ~ '. The reasoning cmtamaQi that Jmadatta Suri was present at the pilgrimage of Vastupala In aam1!at 1277 or 1220 A.ic writer NarayaI}.*otama (Nyaya). In the commentary on thIS verse Niirl£yal)a says : - 1T'ftIT~W~'~R ~) 'lItifT 1'l1IT ':ISl~t 'if lllYr I .~ in hi~ commentary called Prakasa on the N ai~adhacarita.ic writers understand at present these six systems to the exclusion of the Jaina and the Buddhist which are considered by them as lying outside the pale of it. I (Ma1adh. 153 systems in his Viveka-vilasa under the }. the Jaina. 68. ~"t '{i' ~~~ fl!ftf") 1I1¥'f1f( "J~iffl~ ~ ~sftr ~r. yaaovijaya-gran· thamallt..Sekhar~ Suds !iiagdariana·samuccaya.lead of $a~darliuna vicara. ~~ N .D. I.. speaks of The Bramanic wrIters $aeJdariana in which he evidently includes recognize Nyaya as a con the Nyaya.: I (Na~hacarita. The BrahmaJ}.D. in his nevapl'ati!}~ha-tat'tva).• -.1iri RiiJa.

lrff 1f1m:..ya~grantha.malii series. I ~1f . pp. NYAYA-SASTRA. as well as in that of Maladhari Rajasekhara Salv!. published 1{fHt: llQ'".na-pids..ft. \I q \'1{IIGIII ~.. Suah.tacks of those who find in it untruth. Suri.). contradiction and tautology. Nalyiyikas are Suri S ( 1318 AD. the followers of the N yaya philosophy have been called the Saivaswhilc those of the Vai8e~ika system have been called the Paiupatas.~C{T f1{~~'RI(Cfj(f l:H1. According to the Devipura1]. Vidya~ bhusana. Benares.B. I••••• "~'{1ift ~'f: ..B.m-q~T~'"1ITiIt f'nrf\Vlm'lfct I . editflld in the f 8 ~aQ. Allahabad. ANOIENT SCHOOL... In fact it is the work of Ak~apada that should really be called Nyaya the supporter of Veda. but these being opposed to the Veda cannot properly be included in the Nyaya. one of the fourteen branches of orthodox learning.. CHAP.bha-niSumbha. The Mimamsa treats of the Vedic injunctions and prohibitions) but it does not examine their worth through the employment of reasoning.. - - .na-samuccaya of Maladhari RaJaSekhara Yat§ovija.. In the Vivekavilasa. pp.tnl ~ .D." filiJl~~~~: II (~addarSana-samuccaya or RaribMdra Sud.lltt.rl~ 1\ (Devipuriina. Jinadatta Sfin includes both Naiyayikas and VaiSe~ikas in the Sai"(ra ~ect. required for the establishment of such authority has been dealt with in the Nyaya more fully than in any other syRtem of philo'Sophy.-matha. 8-11. THE NYAYA ADAPTS ITSELF TO SAIVISM.t chapter XVI. I The Nyaya-sfitras.& 4. in the col- .Tfi. IV. It is true that the Buddhists and Jainas too wrote treatises on reasoning.l'l~ ~if 'C QI13"ffl filftr I • vm(t ~T~"Tit'f Jt.darsana-samuccaya of Haribhadra Suri 2 (1168 A. The Nyaya 1 alone demonstrates that the Veda is authoritative.{~: I ..f~~l~er: ~~'()'.Jjfef iiCfiir~~ I ~v~: I by Dr. 49-52). and declares the sacred text to be infallib Ie like a spell or the medical science. q(iI~lfiN lit ~~ 11.darSa... MSS. 69.. ~T'l~"~. The Nyaya-sutra actually defends the Veda from the at. 2 The Naiyiiyikas were also called Yaugas• ~t(f ~~ I "i'f'rl. because it was delivered by sages who were trustworthy persons.ltl1fT tflr I a1f ~rf~~I..-it~~ f!r~t "5ft~. Sum. S.154 I:NDIAN LOGIC.dM:J by Sat_handr. . tratJ5i. In the ~aq.1~iT fJ{q. series.vt.) Th . the Nyaya-sastra was promulgated by the gracious Siva himself. 2-1-59 and 2-1-69.

From the above it is clear that three distinct causes contributed to the popularity and predominance Ni:.THE NYAYA-A BRANCH OF ORTHODOX LEARNING.bha~ya with obeisance to the Pramii't)as (Means of Knowledge).caspati Mi~ra opens with salutation to Pinakin (Siva) while the Nyaya ~orks . there is no doubt that al~ the Brahmanic Naiyayikas from Uddyotakara downwards were Saivas.<vara) in a style applicable only to Mahesvara (Siva).Ak~apada. muttering the formula orit nama~ 8ivaya.the colophon of his Nyaya-vartika. Calcutta). as their tutelary deIty.describes God 2 (!.2 Nyaya-bhasya. 155 The N aiyayikas are called Saivas becau~e they look upon.i.of the Nyaya-sut~a. besmeared their bodies with ash and subsisted on roots and fruits. as is evident from .a­ ~4iIQ{iii"o( 1l'C(~~"Q{1'{ II (Nyaya-sara. Uddyotakara. I.1 Brahmanq.. Saiva by faith. . THE POPULARITY OF NYAYA ESTABLISHED.:eponc:r~~~s make of Nyaya as a school of philosophy. walked nude. edlted by Satis Oha. 4-1-16.. Vatsya. begin their works with salutation to Sambhu or Siva "the Supreme Lord and the Seer of all truths. 1I~ ~ ~ i5f~W: 'q'fa~~ ~~a'. p. They always meditated upon SIva and wprshipped his eighteen figurfs. 22 8 Kusumafijali.llo and Gangesa Upadhyaya.ndra Vidyabhusana m the Bibliotbeoa. Whatever might have been the faiths of Alqapada and Vatsyayana. author 9f the Tattva~intamaQ. was a leader of the Pasupata Saiva sect.j!fT~f'rct ~lerff: I m:fJSl4fl~ ~l1r~l:iI. last verse. but m the body of the book he . "hail' obeiRance to Siva. As es~ cribed py Maladhari Rajasekhara Suri the N aiyayikas. openmg hne. Indioa series. The Nyaya-vartika-tatpary~-tika of Va. and destroyer of the universe.apursna pubhshed under the name of VSY1. last verse. chapter IV. The first was the intrinsic worth of the system which was acknowledged as most useful in carrying on processes .of Udayana 3 contain abundant proofs that their author was 8. verses 200 f:ieq . author of the Nyayasara. was a son of SomaSarma I who was Siva lllcarnate. wore matted hair. identified with Saivas. author . Siva who is the creator CharacterIstIcs of the d Naiyiiylkas. etc. chapter n.lpurana by the Asiatio SOCIety of Bengal. 4." 70. chapter I. Bhasarvajiia. . adhyaya 23.NaiYSYlkas saInte Siva yana begins his Nyaya.

156

INDIAN LOGIC, ANCIENT SCHOOL, NYAYA-SASTRA, CHAP. IV.

of reasoning and which obtained for the system the foremost rank among the schools of philosophy called l/atf,da'tsana In the second place we notice that having supported the authority of thp, Veda the Nyaya was readily recognized as an approved branch of learning, and the charge of heterodoxy levelled against it at its early stage was pr<?vtd to be baseless Thirdly, the fact that Nyaya adopted the Saiva cult gave it a positive stamp of orthodoxy and gained for it an unquestionable recognition.

PART II.

THE MEDIAJVAL SCHOOL OF INDIAN LOGIC
PRAJIANA-SASTRA-THE SCIENCE OF RIGHT . KNOWLEDGE.
(400 A.D.-1200 A.D.).

-

CALLED
\-

SECTION I.

The Jaina Logic (400 A.D.-1700 A.D.).
CHAPTER 1.

Topics of Logic mentioned in the Jaina Canons
1.
THE SPECIAL FEATURES OF MEDlfEVAL I.lOGIC (FROM CIRCA 599 B.C. ONWARDS).

Termination of the Ancient School. In Part I a short account has been given of the Ancient School of Indian Logic which deaIA, as we have seen, with the doctrine of the soul and its salvation, as well as with the rules of debate and true reasoning. The Ancjent School, which reached the height of .its development at the hands of Ak~apada about 150 A.D., extended over a period of one thousa~d years, beginning with Gautama about 550 B.C. and ending with Vatsyayana about 400 A.D. It must not however be supposed that the Ancient School became extinct at 400 A D. A host of commentators such as Uddyotakara, Vacaspati Misra and Udayanacarya, who flourished subsequently, kept the stream of that Logic flowing. But the thousand years from 550 B.C. to 400 A.D. represent what may be termed the period of organic growth of the Ancient School.

of the M edic.eval 8ckool. Part II will represent a system of logic called the Medireval School, the foremost exponents of which were the J ainas and the Buddhists-two powerful sects that· were founded by Mahavira and Buddha about 600 B.C. At the time of the founders, and in
Formati~n

158

INDIAN LOGIC, lVIEDllEVAL SCHOOL, JAINA LOGIC, CHAP. 1.

subsequent times, the Jaina and Buddhist writers occasiona.lly handled the principles of pure logic in expounding the dogmas of their own religion and metaphysics. Some of the writers even brought out regular treatises on logic, but those were either fragments or resumes of the Ancient Logic. By about 450 A.D. the Buddhist logician Dignaga and the J aina logician Siddhasena Divakara, by differentiating the principles of logic from those of religion and metaphysics, laid the true foundation of what is termed the Medireval School of Indian Logic. This school covered a pe't'iod of nearly eight hundred years from 400 A.D. to 1200 A.D. In matter and method the :Medireval School conducted by the JBlinas and Bud'dhists differs' markedly from the Ancient School which was essentially BrahmaQic. The Ancient Logic dealt with sixteen oategories suoh as pramii/I)a prameya, etC' .. comprising such heterogeneous elements as doctrine of salvation and nature of the soul, etc. The' Medireval Logic, on the contrary, concerns itself with one category viz. prama'fJ,a, which touches upon other categories only in so far as these are neoessary for' its proper elaboration. The doctrine of pranUi'tJ,a is treated in such a way that it may be equally applied to the religious systems of the Brahma:q.as, Jainas and Buddhists. Inference, a kind of prama'fJ,a, which was briefly noticed in the Ancient Logic,. receives a full treatment in the Medireval School. Numerous technical terms are coined and great subtleties are intro'duced into the c\efinition of terms, the theory of syllogism! etc. Prameya, the object of knowledge, is rejected on the ground that it is useless in works on logic to treat of tht1 soul, birth, death, etc., which are comprised under this category. The Medireval Logic thus formed is called in Sanskrit P"am(1)a-aastra, the science of right knowledge The works on Medireval Logic written by the J ainas constitute the J aiI>ca Logic, while those written by the Bu'ddhists oonstitute the Buddhist Logic. Seeing that Mahav'ira, the founder of Jainism, preceded Buddha, the founder of Buddhism, I shall first treat of the J aina Logic.
l
I

2.

MAIIAVIRA-THE FOUNDER OF JAINISM. (599-~27 B.C.).

The J ainas maintain that their religion is coeval with time. According to their traditions there appeared at various periods in the world"s history sages whom they call Jinas, conquerors of their passions, or Tirthankaras, builders of a landing place in the sea of existence. These sages preached the religion of the Jainas. The Jainas hold that in every cycle of time (utsarpi1)i or avasarpi'lJ/i kala 1) 24 sages are born. The first sage of the last serIes was
1

Period of evolution or involution.

TOPICS OF LOGl(}- IN THE JAINA CANONS.

159

Adinatha. or Rsabhadeva. the 24th was Mahavira or Vardhamana, who was born: at K~atriya-kuI}.Q.agrama in 599 B.C. and attained nirvar),a at Pava in 527 B C.' The scriptures which the Jainas obey are founded on the teachings of Mahavira. No one disputes this, and scholars generally regard Mahavira as the founder of Jainism, and hold that the theory of the existence of J inas previous to him except Parsvanatha the 23rd Tirthailkara, was a subsequent- invention.
$

3.

TH:m

JAINA SECTS-SVETAMBARA AND DIGAMBARA (FIRST OENTURY A D.).
I

The Jainas are divided into two sects, the Svetambaras, those who are clothed in w~ite, and the Digambaras, those who are skyclad or naked. The S vetarnbaras olaim to be more anoient than the Digamoaras, whose existence as a separate sect is said to date from A.D. 82,2 i.e. 609 years after the attainment of nirva~a by Mahavira.
4.
INDRABHtiTI GAUTAMA-A DISCIPLE OF MAHAVIRA

. (607 B.O.-515 B.C.). The teachings of Maha vira as represented in the scriptures are said to have been collected S by a disciple of his, called Indrabhuti. i"his disciple is often known a,s Gautama or Gotama. He
1 qll("~~ " 'qtf{~ 6fi( ~ ~~N!(iC1(\ ~~T I (TrHokasara of the 1.,$ Digambara sect). "M:ahavira a.ttained nirva:~a 605 yearlY"5 months before the :§aka King (78 A.D.) came to the throne." that is, in 527 B.O. As he lived 72 years he must have been born in 599 B.C. According to VicarB.trem of Merutunga. Tirlhakalpa of Jina.prabha Suri,. Vicara-sira-prakarat;la. Tapagaccba-ps;~pltvali, etc., of the SveMmbara sect-Mahivira attained fl1:irvaT}u 470 years before Vikram.a Samvat or in B.C. 527. Dr. JacobI of Bonn. in his letter dated the 21st October, 1907. kindly wrItes to me as follows : ( "There is however another tradition which makes thIS event (viz; the ni1"VCif}a of MahaviraJ come off 60 year!'! later. In 467 B.C, (see Pari~ista Parvan, Introdue-tioJ;l., p . .4: f.; also Kalpaqiitra. Introdnction, p. 8). The latte.r date cannot be fa)! wrong because Mahiivira dled some years before the Buddha whose death is now placed bet,ween 470--480 B.C." 2 The ~vetambaras say :-l(iliff~ ';ij~rt iia't1U( wt'lT Nf't~ cfr~ it il'Tiltj''rt{ ffa"'1 i('\iifl(':g't ~ijcqlQ' I .. The Dlgambar& doctrine was preached in Rathavlrapura 609 years after the attamment of nirval'!-Q by Mahiivira)) (AVaSyaka niryukti-52). But the Dlgarobaras deny this and say uhat the SvetaQlbaras rose in Vikrama 136 or 79 A.D. Of. Bhadrabahncarlta IV. 55:

'fdt ~~~~ri ~i(~ 1{a-

I

;nts~ ~'ii ~lfI1ii"J~1{ II

s

"'l.f ~n{f~,cnf ~~ filfiNTflntlt I
1.,$

~m~' ~1irt- ~l ~
(Jaina

n'

Harl"'a~a Purii~a).

160

INDIAN LOGIC, MEDllEVAL SCHOOL, JAIN.\. LOGIC, CHAP. I.

was 1 a Kevalin 2 and the first of the Ga'Qa-dha,ra,s e or leaders of the a,ssembly. His father's name was Brahma'Qa Vasubhiiti, and his mother's name was BrahmaI}.l P.rthvi. He was born in the village of Gorbara it in Magadha and died at GUifava in Rajagrha (Rajgir) at the age of ninety-two) 12 years after the attainment of nhva'fJ,a by l\1ahavlra." Assuming that Mahavira attained nirva1J-a in 527 B.C., Indrabhuti's birth must be assigned to 607 B.C. and his death to 515 B.O.
5.
THE CANONICAL SCRIPTURES OF THE JAINAS

Those scriptures of the Jainas which are generally regarded. as canonical are divided into 45 siddhantas or Anga and Upanga. agamas, classified as Ii Arigas, 12 Upailgas, etc. "For the benefit of children, women, the old, and the illiterate," 6 these were composed in the Ardha-Magadhi or Prakrta language. On the same principle the scriptures of the Buddhistic canon were originally written in Magadhi or PalL It is maintained
1 Indrabhiiti Gautama and Sudharma Svami were the jomt compilers of the Jaina scrIptures. But Indrabhiiti became a Kevalin or attained kevalaJfilina (absolute knowledge) on the day on which Mahavira attamed nirvana. He did not therefore occupy the chair of his teacher Mahavira, but relmquished it to his >lpiritual brother Sudhatma Svami. Cf. {~lifij' ~itil't f"ifq'i("l qT'(~ ~~: 1\ (Rema~andra's Maha;viracarita, chap. v. MSS. lent by Mum Dbarmavljaya and IndraviJaya.).
2 Possesaor of a.bsolut,e knowledge. For a further reference to this title see R. G. Bhanoa.rkar's Report, 1883-84. p. 122.

s

t4l'{WiJT'>1~~sfffmf~fGf If'l.I1' mJ.Ji~~ar4T ~,('EI(~tfl1N l'f~T ~1Q': 1I'~: tfiTf&f(:

ar.rt

I

.mnrffVr~m ~~l1<f.w~l'-T.~oqrftq(t

~T5~ ;rI{1!'551~"f.I'~~~hir~t!f'if: ~
(SlddhaJayanti-caritra-~ika:,

11 IJ ft noticed in Peterson's 3rd Report, App. I, p. 38).

~tilillmif~ ;fri;f~ ~ VTmsf~T'I: f~

~qf{'3..reri'l'lifini ~'~"ll
1fT1:T)iI'ttU~"S'q ~~fft ~ Il
p. 110).

"

<5qTftr:~~l1~lmIf"1'(J.Tfq~~$jliQl i1iJ11ir~fli

(Gotamastotra by Jmaprabba Suri, extracted in KavyamaUt, 7th Gucchaka,

6 For particulars a:bout Indrabhiiti Ganta.ma, vide Dr. J. Klatt's Pa~~ava.li of the Kharataragaccha In the Indian Antiquary, Vol. XI, Sept. 1882, p.246; and Weber's Die Handsehwten Verzeichnisse del' Kdniglichea Bibliothek zu BerlIn, pp. 983 and 1030, in which are noticed SarvarajagaQ.l's Vrtti on GaQ.adhara-sardhasatakam of Jinadattasiiri, and Sri-pattavali-vacana of the Kharataragaccha. 6 Raribha.dra-suri, in his Daaa-valkalika-vrtti (Chap. III}, observes:-

1{T~-i{'('tfru 1!{Ct(t "i!fm::"'iifr\f~rt{ .' ;",.
...~~ ~, f~11Iff: ~n!iif: ~'i'f': II

1'OPICS OF LOGIC IN THE JAINA CANONS.

161

that originally the Angas were 12 in number. 'The 12t.h Anga, which was called Dr?tivada or the presentation of views, was written in Sanskrit. l The D:rl?~lV'ada is not extant. It consisted apparently of five parts, in the first of which logic Is said to have been dealt with. The Drstivada is reputed to have existed in its entirety at the time of S'thulabbadra 2 who, according to the T8,?B_ga.a:!:l2_:?&.:tf:,TV2.~::_ died in the year in which the 9th Nanda was Z:i.~~'2G. -~r Car::::ra Gupta (i.e. about 327 B.C.). By 474 A.D. the Dr~~ivada had disappe8.red altogether. Not.hing is known as to the way in which logic was treated in the D¥~~i vada. 8

.

6.

LOGICAL SUBJECTS IN THE CANONS.

The s'J.t ~ect..-:n.at'tc:, of logic is touched upon in several of the 45 Prakrta soriptures of the Jainas. In Pramana and N aya. thfl Bhagavatl-tliltra, i Sthan:1nga-sutra, etc. which are Ailgas, and in the Prajnapana-sutra vl"bich is a,11 Upanga, there is a description of ]Vaya, or the met/hod of comprehendmg things from particular standpoints. In the Sthananga-sutra, Bhagavati-sutra, etc. /' there is a. complete classification of valid knowledge called prama1}a, pam(1)a, jiiana, nana or hetu.
l Vardhamana-suri. in hIs Acara-dmakara, quotes the followmg passage frOID Agama:-

~ fUftn'~ ~ ~~~Jf f~Q I eo., 'l't~~~ qT'(~ 'tlt:~ f!!ll'iifCf~N II
2 Vuze Curnika of Nandi Sutira., page 478, publ1snod by Dhanapat Smgh, OsJcutta, and Peterson's 4th !~eport on SanskrIt MSS • p. C,XXXVI 3 For a full history of the Drstivada (called m Prakrta DltthlVi'iO) see Weber's Sacred Literature of the J ainas, translated by Welf Smyth m the IndIan AntIquary, Vol. XX, May 189l, pp. 170-182. oj, In the B'bagavar:-siitru and Prajt'ii'ipana-sutra, Naya IS diVided lUto seven kinds. viz. 11:zi9C.7n3, saf'l{jrara, vyavahara, ryu-.9i1tra, sabda. 8amubhiriJgha and evarhbhiita For an explanatIOn of these terms see Umssvatl, who instead of dlvidmg Naya mto seven kll1ds. first dhndes It mto five kmds, and then subdivides one of t.he five. ViZ. sabda. into three kmds. " In the Sthitnanga-siitra, knowledge (]niina) IS dlvided mto (I) Pratyaksa (direct knowledge) a.nd (2) Parokea (mdirect knowledge) P1'atllak~a agam IS subdiVIded as Kevala iMna (entire knowledge) and Akevala jiiJ.na (defective kuO'.vledge). The Akevala inana IS subdlVided a.s a1xx,dhi and m.anah-parya~(a The ParQk~a 1nCina is subdivided as abh~ntbodha (mati) and sruta. V~de the Sth<in:;:ngasutra, pp. 45-48, and the Nandi-sutra, pp. 120-134: both pUblished by Dhanapat Singh and printed,in Calcutta. See also what, IS said in the aecount of UmasvAti

8eq. ~,..~ 'CNW, ~~V 1f1~ 'q1(ofl, 7i ~~T q- 4~ oiiCl q~itt. ~cr I (Sthaninga-siitra, chap. 6. p. 45).

11

162

INDIAN LOGIC, MEDI-LEVAL SCHOOL, .lAINA LOUIC, QHAP. 1:

The word "Hetu" is found in the Prakrtra, scriptures, but. its uso in these works mo.kes It clC'ar that Hetu. it had not at thi...; perIOd acqmred a very definite significance In the Sthananga-sutra 1 it is used not only in the i:lense of reason, bnt also a8 a s-. nony~ for "ita-lId knowl('dge (Prama1)a) and inference (An.umana). Hetu, ac; identical with yahd knowledge (Prama7),(~) is stated to be of four kinds, viz. : (1) knmdedgc denved from perception (Prafyak~a); (2) knowledge derived from inference (Anumanfl) . (3) k:nc·;·:'c;~16~ derlved througl: comp;Wif3011 (Upa1Y/.an(~), and (4) lli."1owleQge derIved from verbal testImony or relIable authority (Agama)

When Hetu is used in the sense of inference (Annmana), It is classified according to the followmg types : (1) This is, because that ~s: There is a fire, because there is
smoke. (2) This is not, because that
a fire.
(3)
~8

It is not cold, because there
IS

IS

'rhis is, because that 1,,8 not. It is no fire. (4) This i8 not, because th!}t is not:

cold here, because thert'

There is no Siinsapa tree here, because there are no trees at all.

In the Sutrakrtanga ~ there is mention of vitarka (m Prakrta : Several terms of debate. viyakka) in the sense of speculation, tarka (in Prakrta: takka) in the sense of :reasoning or debate, pak~a (in Prakrta: pakkha) in the sense of a party~ and chala in the sense of quibble.
~~crr

VIi!fi "q~filiii(~

qlf~

tl a=r~T

"Cflffl W"SR'T 'Iiflfifl if "t1f~ ~l ~. IfiIfC1!l "fi I "q[~~ ~T ~ai ll{fi5?4 W~fi!l ~)
~\6i ({~ 'if l!{~ ~T II (Bhagavati-siitra. p. 336, and Sthananga-sutrd., pp. ;;}09-310,\ pubhshed b J Dhanapat Smgh and prmted 111 Calcutta).
2

"ll?1ifT ~~ ~~fSii{~

'q'~~ ~;nlrir ~it 'ilIfTJIif I ~

;-:ai

\ijf'fJI~il~ if f4f~T ~~, t"~ ~~ ~'Ilt11«CfTt I '(if ~~ l:ffqiiffl 'ItH~fg ~~rl:Tij1lt ';if ~~ II \t Q
.$ .,:,

" ~iilt II ~ ~ It ~ra:r'!ltT ~ ~~lf~, 'lii~ii~ f~ ~ Wtfjrf;r ~nf~wr, li~N~ .qfTfcT~T I ~ ~ 'iHl:atf'ii, ~~'(\' 1;f'a'J~ 5f"fT \I ~~ II (Suirakfta.nga. p. 62. l»ublished by Dhanapai Singh, CalcuLta).

lfCfitiJ

fq'-l'{(rf~,

iff 'lIl1f 'q~i~T

TOP:nCS OF LOGIC D{ THE .JAL';A. CANONS.

163

In

~he

Stbanailga.-siltra. I an exampie, called in Pri1krtR. ~~aa (in
klm!s of
San~krit f~1iita),

is divIded into fout' kinds, ' eX8,mple h ' VIZ. ( 1) a!lara<ea, a, complei,e w ion \'xample bears sF!:Hhrity to the thing exemphfied in aU respects. (2) iihaTafJc.-taddesa, a hmited eXfl,mple which. bears similarity to the tbing exemplified only in respect of a part, (3) aha,ra/rJa-taddo,~a, a defective example, and (4) upanyasopanaya, an anecdote used af' an example. In the SthQ,nu.nga-sutra'l (,he following are enumerated as expedients in a hostile dBbaLe or debate a l'ouEr.pedlentR in a oebate irunce. 11) Asakka'i..Uu, taking: some time (m,vada) \ ..... in makmg oneself ready (2) lt88akkaitta, gaining enthusial:lUl after t!1e enjoyment of leisure, (3) arpuloma'itta, propit.iating the authorities or making them favourabJe, (4) pra,tilOma1'tta. m.aking the authorities hostlk (aga.inst one'~ respondentL (5) bhaittfl, serving the an'&horitie!", (6) hheyaiUa, or-eatmg divisions In the Stnanal J gd.-3iltra 3 tae fc,HoWlHg are enumerated as the defects (do,~a) of a debate (1) TO}Jata-clo8ct, the defect ari'\lHr;; from a d.isput8,nt being agil.Jated ill. mind, {:2) m.at Lbka nlju-Josa, the The defot·ts of a df'hat(~ c!.ptect arl'Slng from the frttlul'El of his memory, (3) pra)·ij8t!-:lG~n.:, :~}oe df;[0-::t an'3mg; f~'om tile authorith.ls, e~. tne president. or the mem.iJerfi, showtns; ~t,Ll'tIahty, (-i) panh4rarpa-rZo8a, 8,voidance Cor t:w chaq:es bron~ht 1>y a. disputant, {5} lak~a~~a-dof.}a, thd defee\" of d~fimtion [wil1ch may be to) ,vide, too nauuw or altogether incom.prehensible], (\J) katana-do.cuI" the defect of arguing, (7) het1.~-do8a, commlttlilg fnll..1..'Jies, (B) 8amkramar;,a-dosa, diversion to other 8ubJeets, \9) rl,l.[jraka-dosa, the defect of understanding, and (10) vastu-dosa, the defect of the subject (of debate).
I

~~~ lifT{! 'tfif rt

~1ij''I.1f~ !

';

~~f<Rr ~TiJ ~Vr, fi ~if~T, ('f1iilr~T~. ~{~h!'{Tij, q~v.ri~c::1ii 'tff(~'C1l(<t;i,

l.f~"Q{·~f«~ ~T(r~. ~i;fi'r~, f;';;TJ:~crrr~~I~ I -.s (St.hananga-f>utm, p 560, l'ubhshed b~ DiMH tPtLt, Sm1',h. C"icllt t ti).

CHAPTER II.

Early Jaina writers on Log'ie.
BHADRABAHU THE SENIOR (CIRCA BHADRABAHU THE JUNIOR (CIRCA

433-357 B.C.).

375 A.D. OR 450-520 A.D.).

Thougb we come across some technical terms of Ancient Logic in the canonical scriptures or the Jainas, yet we have no proof that the Jainas undertook at that stage to write any regular work on logic. The early ,Jaina writers who discu3sed definite problems of logic, were Bhadrabahu and Umasvati. An elaborate discussion of certain principles of logic is found in a Prakrta commentary on the Dasa-vaikalika sutral called DasavaikaIika-nlryuklii. This commentary was the work of one Bhadrabahu 1 of the Pracina Gotra. For 45 years this sage lived the ordinary life of the world; 17 years he passed in the performance of religious vows (Vratas); ~nd for 14 years he was acknowledged by the Jainas to be the. foremost man of his age (Yuga·pradhc,na).'l He was a Srutakevalin,6 that is, one versed in the 14 Purvas of the Drstivada . . . . The above-mentioned incidents are generally accepted as faots in the life of the author of the commentary. There is, however, some doubt as to, the time in which he lived.' According to the records () of the Svetambaras he was born in 433 B.C. and died in 357 B.C. The Digambaras maintain there were two Bhadrabahus ; that the first (Bhadrabahu the sP'lior) lived to 162 years from the
1 For particulars vide Dr. J. Klatt's Kharataragaccha.-pattJ'ivali in the Indian Antiquary, Vol. Xl, Sept 1882, p. 247, Weber II. p. 999, Peterson's 4th Report on Sanskrit MSS., p. lxxxlV, and Dr. H Jacobi's edition of the Kalpasutra, Introduction, pp. 11-15. Bha.drabahu (senior) seems to ha.ve lIved between 380 B.C. and 314 B.O., if he waS really a contemporary of King Candra Gupta (Maurya), but about 375 A.D. If he lived at the time of Candra Gupta. II, called Vikramaditya.. of the Gupta dynasty. 2 In the Vicira~ratna-sarhgraha. by J ayasoma-suri noticed by Peterson in his 3rd Report on Sanskrit MSS., pp.307-308, Bhadrabahu is inoluded among the Yuga-pravaras or Yuga-pradhanas. " For further particulars about this title see R. G. Bha.n.darka.r's Report, 188384, p. 122. <j, In Webel.' II, p. 999, in which the Gurviivali-sutra of Mabopiidhyaya Dharmasl'igaragar;ti is noticed, we read of Sa.m.bhiitivljaya and Bbadrabahu ., Ubhau-pi l}~~ha.pa~Fadharau. " 6 . _ ; . : ~lIift ~cl\1!f;

~,,: f1t.1n1!l I IJ lPi 'q'~.ifc{«lff1i 11)(&)

~~~qf35"

~ ~ l{OOf~crtiir:' t.~ •

EARLY JAINA WRITERS ON LOGIC-BHADRABAHU.

165

ni'l'varpa of Mahavira, that is, up to 365 B.C , and that the second t (Bhadrabahu the junior) to 5 I n years from the nirva'tJ,a of Mahavira, that is, up to 12 B C. They do not state definitely which of these Bhadrabahus was the author of the Dasavaikalika-niryukti, but they hold the view that the second was the author of several of the existing Jaina works. The Svetarnabara records do not contain any mention of the second Rhadrabahu, but in the ~~imaI}.qala­ prakaral).a-vr~ti ~ and Kalpa-sutra-subodhika-v:rtti, g two commentaries of the Svetambaras, "and in the Caturvimsati prabandha, it is stated that Bhadrabahu lived in the south in Pratiijlthana and was a brother of Varahamihira. Now Varahamihira is popularly believed to have lived in th!3 first century B.C. It is possible therefore, even according to the Svetambaras, that the Dasavaikalika-niryukti was the work of a commentator who, if we rely on popular belief, lived about the time of the opening of the Christian era. As a fact Bhadrabahu could not have lived much earlier than 500 A.D. if he was a brother of Varahamihira. From the confusing traditions pr,eserved by the Jainas, it may be concluded that Bhadrababu lived in the reign of Candra Gupta II, called Vikramaditya, about 375 A.D. Whatever was his date, the author of the Dasavaika,lika-niryukti wrote commentaries (niryuktis) on the following Jaina scriptures :-A. ;asyaka-sutra, Uttaradhyayana-sfitra, A.carailga-sutra, S iltra-krtanga-su tra, Dasasruta-skandha-siitra, Kalpa-su tra. Vyavahara-sutra, Siirya-prajiiapti-sutra, and ~~ibb.a~ita-sutra.
7.
BHADRABAHU'S SYLLOGISM.

Bhadrabahu did not set himself to analyse knowledge with the object of evolving a system of logic. His object was to illusf1i~~ ftR~l~
'iPft~~: 'ii~:
f)...

~ ~ er'mt 1Ri'1f~ \~c I

~.""Ji. «Ttl ri II \11 1\ (Gurvivali by MUUlscindara-siiri published m the J aina. YaSovijaya-granthamils of Benares, p. 4).
1 Vide the Sarasvati-gaccha--paHavali in the India.n Antiquary, October 1891, and March 1892. 2 Vide Dr. R. G. Bhandarkar's Reports on Sa.nskrlt MSS. during 1883-84, p. 138. Bhadr~ba:hu must have lived as late as the 6th century A.D., 1f he wa.s really a brother of that Varaha.mihira. who was one of the nme Gems at the 00urt of Vikramiidit,ya. MuUls Dharmavijaya and Indl'aviJaya. mamtain that Bhadrabihu's brother was not the sa.me Varahamihira that a.dorn~d the court of Vlk.t'a.msclitya.

SI~cft I lf~l~ ~'l till: ~ ~ f'~ij'laRl ~Rm ~f~fff Pf fif~ ~m I
3

~rn;lifS( '<m~~~ ~

f11it

(Kalpa-sutra-subodhikivrtti printed in Bombay).

166

INDIAN LOGIC, MEDllEVAL SCHOOL J .LUNA LOGIC, CHAP. H.

trate the truth of certain principles of the ~Jaina religion. To do this) he, in his Dasavaikalika-niryukti, I ela,horated a syllogism consisting of ten p<lrts (da.4avayava-l.:akya), and then demonstrated how the religious principles of ,-1'ainism 88.tisfied the conditions of this syHogism. The following is an eXb1.mple :-(1) The proposition (Prat'ijnii) ,--" to l'efra in from taking life The Syllogism often parts. is the £:l'eatest of virtues," (2) The limitation of the'"'proposition (Prat£jiiii-vibhalcti)-" to refrain from taking hf~ is the greatest of Vil'tue8, a,ccording to the J aina Tirthailkaras." (3) The reason (Het1Jt),-H to refrain from taking Hfe is t.he greatest of virtues, because those who so refrain are IO'Ved by the gods and. to do them honour is a,ll act of merit for men. ,. (4) The limitation of the reason (Ii etu-vibhakti) ,_I ~ none but . those who refrain from ta.king life areaHowed to reside in the highest place of virtue." (5) The counter-proposition (Vipak~a),-" bat those who despise the J aina Tlrthankaras and take life are said to be loved by the gods, and men regard doing them honour as an act, of merit. Again) those who take life. in sacrifices are said to be residing in the highest place of virtue, Men, for instance, saJute their fathersin~law as an act of virtlle, even though the latter despise the Jaina Tirthankaras and habitually take life. Moreover, tllOse who perform animal saarifies are said to be beloved of the gods." (6) The opposition to t.he counter-proposition (Vip((,k~aT;'a­ t'i~edha),-Hthose who take life as forbidden by the Jaina TirthailkaI'as do not deserve honour) and they are certainly not loved by
~ ~ 'qt;1T

fq-,,;.-flt

v~~rcf~~ f~<l~q",i1'irt

I

~f~i!fiT iitQf~~T fiiil1i1ll "l!f II ~I.!~ Ii p. 74, published under the patronage of Dhanapat Singh by the NiI'l}ayaSagal'a Press, Bombay; and Dl'. E. Laumann's edition of Daaavaikalika-niryukti, p. 649). The JELinas characterise a syllogism of ten parts as the best (uttama), a syllogism. ·of Jive parts as the medillcre (madhyama). and a syUogismof two parts as ~he worst ~iaghanya). Candra Prabha Suri (1102 A.D.) observes:-

fli,(iriT

(Da~avaikalika,..niryukti.

.

&i~i lUf?cT<f~(ffil~~"if 1i\tl'llT, 1€iqqj ~Jtr~lejq'-ti"4iif1i'(f;U(f I
~,

'Ifl~~rih:;qr 1SiJ~ if~if111!HHf{f,"': ifil!Ji ~ijfflif

"(rff I

ii~ ~!f1l,iffi'lqlC(illii~

. .. (Nya:.y8vatfil'a~vivfti on verse 20 of Nyayavat81'a, p. 8, edited by Satis Chandra Vldyabhusana, Calcutta). Similady Ratnaprabha Suri (USI A.D.) says:-

~ffc:ttJ:\f!'I.T~ ~r~T:
...j ....

I

if" 'i!l{ftit l;(V(fCfl.1ci -qU~T~liTif1{ <::~W ~ I

'fI\ll;i' (f 'iiififTq~iif'~T~~ .~rcnl t.rl:Tii~~ I

~f«ql<;.Jr'iff li~~lnf(lf~tcfltr '~

I

a1~ Sit: ~r~ifitr='ITq~l1:J ~~~

I

.

(Syad-viida-l'atna-kILl'it-vatarildr, p. 20, Chap. III, edited by Hal's. Govind Das

EARLY .LUNA WRITERS ON LOGIC-UMASVATI.

167

the gods. It is as likely that fire will be cold as that they will be loved by the gods or to do them honour will be rega'ided by men as an act of merit Buddha, Kaplla and others. though really not fit to be worshipped, were honoured for their miraculous sayings, but the Jaina Tirthanlmras artl honoured because they speak abso~ lute truth." (7) An instance or example (Drstanta),-" the Arhats and St:tdhu,s do not even cook food, lest in so doing they should take life. They depend on householders for their meals/' _ (8) Questioning the vabdity of the instance or eX~Mllple (Asarikii),-" the food whioh the householuers cook is a,s much for the Arhats and Sadhu8 as for themselves. If, therefore, any insects are destroyed in the fire, the Arhats and 8adhus must share in the householders' sin. Thus the instance ciLed IS not convincing." . (9) The meeting of the question (A..lankii-pratisedha),-" the Arhats and Sadkus go to householders for their food without giving notice and not at fixed hours Hmv, therefore, C.ftIl It, be said that the householders cooked food for the Arhats and 8adhus ~ Thus the sin, if any, is not shared by the A,-hat8 and Sadhus." (10) Conclusion (Nigamana),-" to refrain from takmg life i::; therefore the best of virtues, for those who so refrain are loved by the gods, and to do them honour is an act of merit for men."
8.
BHADRABAHU'S EXPLA~ATION OF

Syadvaa(1,.

Bhadrabahu in his Siitra.~k!'taiJga.·nIryuktl! Irtention~ another principle of the Jaina Logic ca,lled Syadvaclu Syadvada. (Syat " may be" and Vada "assertion," or the assertion of possibilities) or Saptabhangi-naY f1 (the sevenfold paralogism) . The Syadvada ~ is set forth as follows :-( I) May be, It is, (2) may be, it is not, (3) may be, it is and it is not, (4) mfty he, It
...r'1~~ ~~Tlli .,f<fif~'-iprt 'lIEf ~'rl: -:er'iiif.etfw I .j

'OIIi~tfilr~ 'J'8Ir ~~ <q iifmr 1\ '? ~ II

(Sutre.-krtanga-niryuktl. "kandha 1. adhyaya 12, p. 448, edIted by Bhlm Smgh Manak and prmted In the Nlrnay~" :::Higara Press, Bombay) Of. Sthansriga-siitra, p 316, published by Dha.napat Singh, Benare-s editlOn Of. Sarvadarsana-sarogl'aha. translated by Cowell and Gough. p . .35. FOl'lull particulars about Sy§.dvaJa or Saptabhangi-n.a.ya v~de Saptabht"tngi-ta,j'angU;t1 b) Virosia Dasa. pI:IDwd in Bombay.
:2

168
IS

INDiAN LOGIC, MEDIAEVAL S(,HOOL, JAINA LOGIC, CHAP.

n.

indescriba.ble, (5) may be, it. is and yet is indescribable, (6) may be, it is not and it is a1::;o indescribable, (7) may be, it is and it is not and it is also indescribable.
~,.

UMASVATI

(1-85 A.D ).

J aina philosophy recognises Eleven ca tegnries, viz. (1) the soul (Jiva), (2) the soul-less (Ajiva), (3) action ,!heTe.tGVarthadh!gama (A\rava) '4,\ bondage (Bandha) (5) 1'esutra " \ ) , . straint (Sal1bva'ra), (6) destruction of the consequence~ of action (N,trja:ra) , and (7) relaase or salvation (Molc~a). According to the TattvarthadJ:llga,ma.-siltra I which wIth a Bhasya or commentary "vas composed by one Umasvati, these categories can be comprehended only by Pro'rn[j,~~a, the means of valid knowledge and by N aya, the mE-thod of comprehending things from particular standpoints. Umasv8,ti is bette!' known as Vacaka-sramaQ.a: he was also called Nagaravacaka, t,his title heing Umasvatj's hfe. probably a reference to his Sakha (spiritual genealogy), The Hindu philosopher Madhavacarya calls him Umasvati-vacakac~rya.2 He lived for 84 years, 8 months, and 6 days and ascended heaven in Sari1vat 142, i.e. in 85 A.D. In the Tattv3,rbhadhigama-sfitra Umasvati gives the following account 3 t>f himse1f :-He was born in a village called Nyagrodhika, but he wrote the Tattvarthadhigamet-sfitra in Patliputra or Kusumapura (modern Patna). He belonged to the Kaubhi~aQin-gotra. His father was Svati and he was consequently sometimes called SvatiI There are commentaries on 'the Tattvarthadhlgama-sGtra by Piijyapiida SV8mm called Sarv4rtha-siddhi. by Akalankadeva called Tattvartha-vartlkalaD.kara> etc., which will be mentioned later. II Vide Sarvada~ana-samgraha. chapter on Jama daraana.

3

~17~ifil'i.a1f fct.\tiT ~~ 1i~<iji{lfi;f I

~~f1lrirr mfttifil1tif ~Tq:~~'iJl~ II ~ II
.~~~'ii ~Rl~1(~~nt .1]'q''eildi I

~:,.!iI

'1q'

~~iif1f"lurftt 'fiI~~Tw 1\

!:t Q

"(il{ttiifT~'f.·cn'1$;r ~=ijli'r~CiI;q~ ~~ I

~T~~l1C ~1'§'i;l.lfciiJT 7UV1{ II 1. II
(Tattvarth8dhigama~siitl'a. chap. X, p. 233, edited by Mody Keshavlal Prem· chand:in the Bibliotheca Indlca series, Calcutta). ... A similar a.ooount is found in the commentary on the Tattva:rthidhigama~siitra by Slddhasenaga:Q.i. This ac('ount is mentioned by Peterson In his 4th Report on Sanskrit Manuscripts, p. xvi. For further particulars about Umasviiti see Peterson's 4th Report on Sanskrit Manuscripts. p. xvi, where he observes that in the Di ambara Pattavali ublished

r if~'(1Ii~'iflfir ~Wli!fif~fiffiiTiar?f II . Jambudvipa-sa. Umasvibti's Tattv81'thadhigama-sutra WIth his bMrYa. XX.(amI of indore. according to this Sutl'a..a. it is stated that Umasvati was the author of 500 Sanskrit prakaraIJ. !f\9 tanaya. In the Tirthakalpa of Jinaprabhasuri.ttvarthadhigama·sutI<a. 1 Mati lS knowledge of exil:lt~ things acquired througb the senses and the Mr: mind. According to Dr. which is acquired by the soul through externai agencies such as the organs of sense. comparison ParoksG. and (2) Pratyaksa. direct knowledge.15). Knowledge which is attained by Yoga (concentration) in its three stages of avadhi mana~paryaya and 1cevala -is a species of Pratyak~a.D. He was also known as Vatsi-suta. 351) the date of Umisvamin's acceSSlOn 18 44 A.&\'ati-gaccha. The rrattvirthidhigama-sutra has been translated into Enghsh by J.rthadhigama-siitra. because his mother was U ma of the Vatsagotra. for these are acquired by the soul through the medium of the senses and the mind.I ~T.a fluctuates between the meanings of va. published as Appendix C to the Tattviirthidhigama-siitra in the Bibliotheca Indica series)..as (treatises).. though it is probable that the distinctIOn between that sect and the Digambara8 had not in his time come into existence. In the ohawa on aphOl'lSm 12.'Uasa and Pra. the Ka!ilphasamgha arose In the time of U masvimm. L: .a (RIGHT KNOWLEDGE). Hoernle (vide "rEwo Pa~~a:valjs of the Sara~vatigaccha" by Dr. because it is acquired by the soul not through the medium of th~ senses. p. . p.. p. Hoernle adds. WRITERS ON LOGIC-UMASVATI. of Chapter 1 of the Tattva..samaratl. indirect knowledge.4vadM is knowledge of things b~yond the rang~ of our perceptIon. is of two kinds: (1) Parok~a.lli'!'qt1Tif1'irif1wTq-~~rcrritfq 'if ~~"1fti ifif~.. m one volume. Calcutta.. 8 months and 6 days. Ulf II (Jambudvipa-samasa. He is said to have belonged to the Svetambara sect. Dr. Parok~a. . 2 Kevala is unobstructed. direct knowledge. ~i~lf. 38. S'ruta is knowledge of things (past. V 01. indIrect knowledge. and <lila hved for 84 years.JrwJpparyaya is knowledge der!~ed from readmg the thoughts of others. Umisvati observes:~. has been published by the ASiatlC Society of Bengal. between Knndakunda and Lohacarya II. indirect knowledge. includes mati 1 and sruta. direct knowledge~ same as Umiisvatl) is included as the sixth Digambara Suri of the Sara. .. October 1891.EARLY JAINA.. and' Pratyak~a. 10. fn its former sense P'}'amar. together wlth Puja-pra karaQa. unconditIOnal and absolute knowledge.\~. ~ {Ta. present and future) acquired through reasoning and study.. Mf. Hoernle m the Indian Antlq uary.. In the Tattvarthadhigama-su tra Pramar.fl ~it~ "".. UMASVATI'S DOCTRINE OF Prama1J.lid knowledge and the means of valid knowledge.~~l~lf"CfI~". which ends thus:- 'Ilfff: f4:J"tiif. which is acquired by the soul without the intervention of external agencies.(I~'f.. Umasvati contends 2 that inference (Anumiina).

no d' /. p.l"tkika pratyaktfcs (vide PramaQ.erves:- "efg-f.he earlier Jaina philosophers an seuse-perceptions (visual perception. These fpur kinds of Prama'l'a seem to refer to those in the Nyaya~Scitra of the Hmnu logiCIan Aksapada.4gama).IJya on 1-6 of the Tattvarthadhigamarsutra. chapter II). presumption (i1rthapatti). ~4.l.. 9)." you are indicating a nu.direct apprehcpsion. In hts bho.~~ ..tiil"l?'fCl'q~ :5HH~I.tt.'q'. Umasvati obo. (5) Sabda.od by which an object is regarded as pO'3sessi n~ both general N aigaroa. when you use the word "bamboo. MEDI1EVAL SCHOOL. 309._ inasmuch as the soul acqlures them not of Itsplf but throug~l the m()\Hmil or the senses.ll.]. JAINA LOGIC. Accordlllg to 111"-' theory the majority of them are the r0i:lult of the cont:wt of the senses with the objects which they apprehend: and some of them a.ber of proper:. The words Pa'rok8a fmd Pratyak8(1. the verbal or nominal Naigama.Jlon emg made between them.re not sources of valid knowledge at alL It is mtere~ting to note thn.ffffiQili 1.. p.:1 mo. Naya 9. auditory perception.a~naya-tattvalokiilSonkira. (2) Sarngraha. the method of from particular st::tndpoints It is of fivt' descl'lptlvns or mood of kinds :-( 1) Naigama.. the non-distinguished statements. are thus u::.' b' and spem IS t' lilC'l. for p~ra. . publIshed by Dhanapat Singh and printed m Oalcutta.. (3) Vyavahara.ed hy these authOf'3 in senses quite Opposlte to those which they bear in Brahmanic logic and in the later Jaina. (4) f!.c propertIes.nd nOn-CXl:-3tcnce (Abhava).fr ~Cfr. the practical. (Upamana)~ verbal testimony (H' reliable authorIty (. is the metp.. ~ ~ ~ . Y'(fu de not distinguish between these two classes of properties.. 35). UMASVATI't:. the straight or immedIate. For instance. Naya (THE i\{OOD OF In the Tattv[trthadhigama-sutra.t accordin~ to Um~sYi1tI and i::.r~l:q iii ~ iff fiTm'q'fl:f. the four PramiiJ. are not separatE" sources of valid knowledge. or non-analytical.J: ~ifl"'fq '!StOll~T.ju-sutra.tl. the non-analytical. p..) are in. But the same foul' kinds are also referred to as subdivlsions of Hetu m the Sthananga Sutra of the Jainas.-~rS"f.1~ I (Tattvarthadhlgama sutra.varbhadhigama~sutra. IS described as the method by which tlungs are comprehended Naya.L '0.as thus:- crT ~ ~ '" S:a.l II. etc. Logic.. EXPLANATION OF S'rATE MENTS) . probabll·ty (Sambhava) . ~'\~I"(~t=fTif.w "fl1"lf1!:lcrr!(T Uii ~I (Ta. . he Inclndp~ them under Parokfia (indirect knowledge).ties some of which are peculiar to the bamboo~ while others are possessed by it in common with other trees.170 lli:i)iAN LOGIC. the collective. 1 Here ParokfG stands fo!' 8arhvyavaharika pratyalCl'!a while Pratyak!a... CHAP II. In his bh:zfya on 1-35 he mentlon<.

he must bring you a particular plant. Tho meLhorl of ~?ju-8iJ. kurnbha or kalasa. Samgraba 1 Umi. means "destroyer. p. For example the word" SatJ'U." Sarnabhiruij.he name implies.ta.ta . In SanskrIt a jar is called gh a." but itR conventlOnal meaning i~ "enemy. Evambhftta con&ists in applying to things such names only as their ~ctual condition justifies Thus a man should.vas my son .": ~ 'Ilii4'~ ~~:h1iil: ~~rfl1~<r: I i1lW~~~if~if e-. . and these are synonymous termt:i..gnorin2: -. the .::titated it (draL'ya). is the method which takes into con- sideration generic ~ propC'rties only.0 enJoy that body now..ftrr with a diffyrent body. Samabhirft4ka. the straight or immediate. but does not com~idcr its name (nama) or image (sthl1pardl) . is the method of correct nomenclature H is of three kinds.he future./8.rticuiar properti(-'\s. the subtle. a man who in a prevIOus birth . The fact that a cowherd IS called ! ndTa does not make him lord of the heaven8 An image of a king can not perform the functions of the king The causes. For jnstan('e. tn€"> practical. even if that s~nf".· Sabda able. he can not bring plant in gem·rat...Itf~lfrc:i ~: ifrfilf((~ '>Tfui'~k~T' ~~\" ~RJ~: ~n. If you sok a person to bring you 11 plant.S in the pust or as it wIll be in t. 8abda.TAI~A WEfTERS ON LOCIC-UMA~VATI.. l' 1 ra WIt lOut. All practical purposes are sei'ved by con:-3idt'ring the thing itself as it existFJ at the pre"ent m. and Evam· bltAi. the eoUective. ' VYGvahfira. or the CDm'JeS which con. the such-like.tra recognisfs the entity Ito:::df (bhava). which exist m me now and win necessitate my being uO£'n herea.e is not justified by its derivation.. i. 17t SUt'llgraha. 32}.:EARLY . not be called Sakra (strong).is now bora as a priH0e. ljju-8utra. the partICular IS a nonentity. but he is of no pnwtical use to me now. is the method which conbiders a thing as it exists at the moment.l the verbal. is the mi)thod whieh takes into eonsideratiol1 the particular only.oment. The geneV ayava1lara. unless he actually possesses the Sakti (strength) which t. Samprata COllRists in using a word in its conventional sense. can not enabie me (. pD.ha consistR in making nice distinctions betwe6n synonJIDs.tsvatl in hlS bh'fi8ya on 1-35 observes : - lI~TlI. lftt " (Tattvartha:dhigama~siitra." according to its derivation.. viz Samprata. wlthout l1n}T refef8!lCe Lo its past or Its future: It is vain to ponder over a thin'~ as it . selectmg in each case the \vord which on etymological grounds is the most appropriate.suit.

i'$ commentary on the Kalpasutra which quotes the following text:- "fic~ftl . 12. along with the similar works of the Buddhists~ contributed to the formation of the Medireval School of Indian Logic.dbi GSJ}i's redaction of the Ka. US.. . at a council held at Valabhi (near Bhavanagara in Guzerat).ra.D.as nor with those of the Buddhists and Jainas.~N" I s1it 'llllil'lRt ~ I ~ . 67) we read:SsmaQ.yBith vikkamta. 453. The teachings of ]\tIahavIra as contained in the Jaina Agamas are said to have been handed down by HistorICal penod. its principles being included in the works on metaphysics and religion. According to this theory the authentic history of the Jaina literature COll.riod in 453 A.D .1 otherwise known as Kf?amasrama:Qa. bhagavao Mahavira. among the Jainas of both the Svetambara and Digambara sects. ayam ad ima 8amvacchare kale .. 1 Vide Dr.~.D. 247: and Dr.TIC JAIN A LOGIC. These treatises.assa. 13. XI. Jacobi's edttion of the Ka. THE WRIT'l'EN RECORDS OF THE JAINAS (COMMENCING FROM 453 A. printed in Kathiwar by Hira Lal Ramsa.ssa java savva-dukJcha. ('Vide Dr. II (Sukhabodhika-tika to Kalpasiitra. With the commencement of the historical pe.). SYSTEMA.ja. p. Jacobi's Kalpasutra.~ ~ 'cf\(i'iS II \. p.~t ~fi 'l1fC ~.ppahiz.CHAPTER III. Vol. writers on Systematic Log'ie. During the era of tradition there existed no systematic J aina treatise on Logic.im dasaroassa ya vasa-sayasae. Jaina. 433. Sept.Klatt's Pattavali of the Kharataragaccha in the Indian Antiquary.lp~iitra. they were codified in writing by Devardhi Gat.mences from 4:53 A. Introduction. and all that preceded that period is to be regarded as merely traditional.~i'itra.\i. See also Vina)'a Vijaya GaQ. • ~ In Deva. They wrote treatises on logic the rules of which clashed neithel' with the religious dogmas of the BrahmaQ. a band of scholars who devoted themselves to the study of logic with great interest and enthusiasm..).t&ssa navavasas8. memory for several centuries until in Vira Sarrrvat 980 or AD. there grew up. 1882.. p.

LOQIC-SIDDHASENA DIVAKARA. p. s Moreover. Divikara see Dr. US.D.sed for the Bombay Qoyernment as notIced by Peterson in his 5th Report.i translated by Mi'. ? 1 Vide No.) in his Vicara~sara-prak:a. by Mum Dharmavijaya and his pupil Sri Indravijaya.261. reigned at Ujjaini 60 years before his arrival there.karat.. Sept.la.gara. V. XI.nQ. II. Prabhavakacaritra VIII. in 57 B. ~ "f mq~Q' fftii1£fi(tfT'lU 1f fff1Ati(r t ~~~ ~N.~ftRlIlI' II ~( 18 (Vieira sara-pra.·candra 3 at the time of S1 asena. 6 Vide Beal's Buddhist Records. Bha.a)1 and by Jina Sena Suri in the Adipural}. The first Jaina wrIter on systematic logic was Siddhas. 1882. who. SIDDHASENA DIVAKARA (ABOUT 480-550 alias K~APAi1AKA A. that is. For other particulars about Siddhasena. Vid. the Brahmat. in the temple of Mahakaia at Ujjayini. >$ 8 4 of the Kharata. and says that a very powerful king. and to have called forth an image of ParSvanatha by reciting his Kalya1].y.llcal symbol of Rudra. the Linga. s a e. 10-14. who visited India in 629 A. purcha. who was a pupil of V:rddha-vadisuri. on the authority of Aiberuni.D. p. Vol..a dated 783 A. series of Calcutta. ~. Siddhasena Divakara is also famous as the author of the Sammatitarka-sutra wnich is a work in Pralqta on general philosophy containing an elaborate discussi'9n on the principles of logic. 1 in thirty-two short stanzas. A)sI) the Prabandha-cintama. p.D.C. noticed by Peterson in his 3rd Report. 272).D. 57. by the efficacy of his prayers. A ma. 173 14. Siddhasena. p. pp. has been mentioned by Pradyumna Surijq. defeated the Huns at Korur in 533 A. with Viv:rti was procured for me from Bhavana.ndarkar's report on Sanskrit MSS • during 1883-84.ena Divakara. presumably Vikramaditya. Bomba. He is believed by Jainas to ha.?~iivali . as he has been identified by scholars with Yasodhal'ma Deva. pp. G. This author. KlaWs Pa.na is available in Caloutta and Arrah. Indica. 741 in the list of MSS. The Nyaya-vatara. received the "ddh d t name of Kumuds. It was he who for the first time laid the foundation of a science called Logic among the Jainas by compiling a treatise called Nyayavatard. 289. R. This view of scholars agrees well with the f. with commentary and trans-lation edited by Satis Chandra Vidyabhusa.v.~ But Vikram~ditya of Ujjaini does not seem to be so old. Tawney in the Bibliotheca.D.24-7.nuscript of the Nyiiy§vatirs. is known to hav:e lived between 505 A.a·mandira~ stava..raQ. who belonged to the Svetambara sect. Of. Vol. 140.. Varahamihira.ragaccha in the Indian Antiquary. king of Malwa.).e aJso Dr.JArNA WRII'ERS ON SYSTEM.ve converted Vikramaditya to Jainism 470 years after the nirva'Y)a of Mahavira. who was one of the nine Gems at the court of Vikramaditya.!tatement of the Chinese pilgrim H wen-thsang. or d' ma t" lOn H e' IS sal'd' to have spI' It.

edIted by Dr. (hl):.a i5.ditya and hit.. ~~f . SAINA LOGIC. iftllf 'e q'lf{ ~~t «i'efr 'if 'l!ftftlfT~~rC{ U ~ li? II . Tl~d(' Q 'l'rle' nme Gems are:-~ also Dr. be'en OUf of the nin.t Ujjainj about f):JO A .&lpal~. 1'mhaub and Sudhlkan. right kno·wledge which illuminE's Itself as wen as other things without any obstruction It is of two kinds: (II direct valid knowledge 01' PPl'ccptinn (Pral1laksa) and (2) indirect valid knowledge (Parok.i K~amasramana (484-588 A. SIDDHASENA'S NYAY].hcmt that i. 15. p..'tfm.D.method of compl'elwnding things from particular stand points).e Saka 427 or A D 505 as the Imtlal year of his astronoml:..l it it:.l:s Dvatrimsat-dvatrhnsika of which the ~yayavatara is a part..ho"l-nng thel eby t hat he hved a.~rti!'l¥~: ..vledge) and N aya {the.rfif ~ ~qRr ~ fEf.tme: ('.+fi ~nd li~CfiTfqi'l ~(C{r 9.H. : A. the ... Dvtvedl).:.I9~ <fi1~~rqT: 'I ~ 1ijlTi'l1 .llTIadltya Sltldhaserla Divakara seems to have been a senIOr contempor?tl'v of .kA-ra lived a.:i. The Nyayavati'i. I am mclined to believe that Siddhasena wa'i no obht.~~ 11 (.aparmka. 1ijlfffiz ~~t:i~ lfCfi'-fiI~il'qTW ~~~~rr{T I '.fOllc1l'tlOn to the Paiicaslddhanttl.) Whi) c:ritlci'..rnlid kn[)\vled~e (Pratyaksa) lS two-fold: (l) praotwal (VyCwaha'rUca) whi'lh is thE' knowledge acquired by t/he soul 1 Vurshalmhlf:3. Dired .J j otn·vlllabharana).r~f~tilr I t':!i ..).lI. xx::!.: \13~r~f ~. G. Pra.ihan/jika:..a (sources of valicl knm.ra written in Sanskrit verse gives an expo~i­ tion of the doctrine of Prama1J.:r~f~ ~~T C'.e Gems that adorned the court of Vdd'.] 711- INDU.fTij"~Sli'{f~iIf: ~ ~ i(~rHi~i 'al:. Pramu7J.l1TiJi 'WIifS'l" ~)~ t1tllf ~r ~ 1\ e: • (Paika. CHAP IlL and 587 A D.11 caj('\.ldh MlanH. JY0tJ<.:.." iffl f.lJat~on..~{ LOOIC'.~<1( w.Tama a~cetic's are DICkn . Thibaut'" Int.miitla-Hight Knowledge.krlt v(Ol'k~.: ~1.a. therAfore very prouabie that Vikram.D.e Hinrlu"l to hay\. in the P"\l1("ttantra and other H"tlllllrtnl(' Sanskut \~Ol h.:VATARA.TEl..i1qll{~: fi:rsT.vlld:inak(lipalata.Jinabhadra CaI)..iuf.r tium J(8a'pn.). f""I!"d lVl K.. RlJilff ". contrmpor::try Slddhp~~ena Dr'...nalca Z (a Jaina sage) who is traditionally known to th. Ii ~ II "if~ ~'&fififf 'l+f~r 17f~ <RTfjU ! (4.v.fJ~t~fffij.:.\.i-> SR weH Si':J in the uthel' Buddhist R?I1-. MEDllEVAL SCHOOL.fp'. uhap 1.

The first kind is the inference deduced in one's own mind after having made lepBated obt:lervations A man by repeated observations in tbe kItchen and elsewhere fonus the conclusion in his mind thslt fire is always an . noticing smoke. and lmmediatcly an old experienced man of the loca.hf' s0ul: it is.1t.u.ain .i':.:ll:fi:fil{ I il'i1. ~cn·. called Kevala or absolute knowledge. young man coming to the side of a river cannot ascert.here mus~~ be fire Oll the hill.rbaJ---testiy 01'bal 'feshmon~ mony (8abda).}h..Ll1anas. which hi not incompatIble with the trut.iina) a. tht' infinite knowledge that comes from the perfect en lightenment of t.. which Imparts true mstruction 111'11i whl.TAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEJYL LOGW-~JDDRASENA DIVAXARA ] 75 through '\)11e five ::lenses (iile eye.vhether the river is fordabk' or not.cendrntai (Paramatthika) which It:. N}ayaV. or LiiuJrJ" sign) which lS inseparably connected wibh it.nQ.ch iR profitable to all men and is preventive of the evil path. This is the inferenIJe for one's own self. Aften~':1rdM. he at once brings to mill't the inseparable connection hetween fire and 8Uloke.dge from Rcripture Suppose a. v Inference (Anumana) is the correct knowledge of the major term (Siidhya) derived through the middle Inference term (H et~L. Scripture is also R. ~md (2) tra.nd (2) v<:. it 1 ~~qW. Knowledge derived from thlS ~ource is cailed scriptural testim '"my or Sii8traja Sabda.. source of vn. IndIrect valid knowledge (Paroksa) is also of two kmds' (1) i!1ferenc~ (Anwm.lina) and (2) inference for the sake of others (Pal'arthau'urtfiina). reason. nose.. comes and tens him that the river !s easily fordable the word of the old man IS to be acceptwl as a source of valid knowledge calk·a personal testimony or La?JJci1ca I~abda. l .!rt is defined as that which was first eognised or composed by a competent person.a1'thanum. Verhal testimony is thfl knowledge derlVf'd from the 'words of reliable persons includin~ knowh:. It is of t<.ed to others 'through words.:ro..hd knowlf>dge for it lays down injunctions on matters which haffle perception and inferenee' fOJ' metl'tnce it teaches that misery is the consequence of VIce.ntecedent of smoke.vo kindp: (1) infvrence for one's own self (8~.sl·llh .-~r~:F=~"Uf. ear. tongue and to'lch) and thl" Blind (.. If the inference is communicat.fTq~~€ tt <ij'!i' 'J!TW ~Tql!ll!liil'1{ II (VOh(' 9. he is not certain whethel a hill which he ReeR has fire on it or not But. and concludes that t. derived from percpptlOn.lity J \vho has no enmity against him.h. whieh is not su::h as La he passed over by others.

nee. Terms of a syllogism. Thus in the proposition: "the hill is full of fire because it is fun of smoke. will assume the following form:HaVIng fire. Because having smoke. The middle term (Hetu) is defined as that which cannot ocour otherwise than in connection with the major term. is caned an inference for the sake of others. as a kitohen." the ltill is the minor term and fire major term. etc. as. ' . that is. A type of this kind of inference is as follows:(1) The hill (minor term or Palcsa) is fuB of fire (major term or Sadhya) .176 INDIAN LOGIC." In an inference for the sake of others the minor term (Paletta) must be explicitly set forth) otherwise the reasoning might be misunderstood by the opponent. is opposed by evidence t public opinion. and might mistake a lake for such an instance. MEDlJEVAL SCHOOL. This insta. (4) so is this hill fuB of smoke (application or Upanaya): (5) therefore this hill is fun of fire (conclusion or N~gamana). such as H the hill is fun of fire because it is fun of smoke.g. such as " where there is no fire there is no smoke. CHAP. e. by showing that the absence of the major term is attended by the absence of the middle term. e g. a kitchen (example or Dr~tanta) . the major term (Sadhya). if the minor term is omitted." 8moke is the middle term which cannot arise from any other thing than fire which is the major term. If that of which the major term or predicate is affirmed. (3) whatever is full of smoke is full of fire. Here the opponent might not at once recollect any instance in which fire and smOke exist in union.. This hin has fire because it has smoke. The minor term is that with which the connection of the major term is to be shown. In such a case the whole reasoning will be misunders tood. In a proposition the subject is the minor term (Paksa) and the predicatp. JAINA LOG!C. HI. one's own statement. It is of two kinds. In the proposition "the hill is fun of fire." and (2) heterogeneous or negative (Vaidharmya) which assures the connection between the middle term and major term by contrariety. as in a lake. (1) homogeneous or affirmative (Sadharmya). The example (Dr~tanfa) is a familiar case which assures the connection between the major term and the middle term. we have that which is known as the fallacy of the minor term (Palc~abhii8a) qf which there are many varieties. (2) because it is full of smoke (middle term or Hetu) .

(2) because it is full of smoke (middle term) . (2) because it is fu11 or smoke (mIddle term). (4) "There is no . or inconsistent with public opinion or incongruous with one's own statement. (5) . abode of the middle term (hetu) and the major term (8iidkya) . (6) "AU things are non-existent H-this is jncongl'uous with one's O'\vn statement.ch l's yet to b' term e proved . is called Vyiipti or Inseparable Connection.:wt that wh. is :i:. anses when one attri butes to ~t as a proved FaUa.I!. or when it is opposed to perception and inference.inas.r (samanya V181?')(J) things are without parts: are distinct from each other and are hke thernselves.b~c of bemg proved. which is incapable of being proved.)mdscient being "-thlS IS. opposed to inferen13e.cl6S of the mmor f. Ineepa. In the mference : "th~s hill is full of fire. thus:\1} "The jaris corporeal (paui!galika) "-thiS is a conclusion which 18 yet to be proved to the opponent J'- (2) "Every thing is momentary "-this is a Saugaba conclusion which.:. thus :(1) This hill is full of fire (major term). and (2) Extrinsio. i Here the inseparable oonnectlon hetweeb. Extrinsic inseparable connection (Bahir-vyapti) occurs when an example (drstanta) from the outside is Bahir-vyapti. Inseparable connection or invariable concomitance (Vyapti) is the constant acoompaniment of the middle term 'Oy the major term. introduced as the common abode of the middle term (hetu) and the major term (sadhya) to assure t. thus:(1) This hill (minor term) IS full of jiTe (major term) .c. shows the inseparable connection between them..he in~ separable connection between them. according to the Jainas. according to the Ja. Here the reference to the kitchen is no essential part of the inference.' the connection between fire and smoke.Hacy of the minor term (Pak~abha8a) .'i"'::. or . that is.JAiNA W l{lT. alone "_ this is opposed to perception. (3) as a kitchen (example). UN ::) ).:. fire and smoke iB shown by the hill (minor term) in which both of them abide. itself as the common Antar-vyiipti. because it is fun of smoke.1 LOGIC-SJDDHAS'ENA DIVAKARA. Intrinsic inseparable connection (Antar-vyapti) occurs when the minor term (paksa) .:':::lTl!Jl1.rable connection. but is introduced from without as a common instance 12 ' . the constant presence of fire with smoke. \3) "The general particula. . I t is of two kinds: (I) Intrinsio.::.1'1 The sister is to he taken as wife "-this is inconRisl:ient with public opinion. 177 The semblance or ~a.

JAIN A LOGIC': CHAP. . from Fallacies of homogene. and so it . that is. can be established by intrinsic inseparable connection (Antar-vyapti) only: hence the extrinsic inseparable connection (Bakir vyapti) is superfluous. because it is a skylotus. (3) The uncertain (Anaikantilca): a. III." H Sound is eternal. defect in both the major and middle terms (sadhya and hetu). for the jar is both existent and apprehended by the senses. (4) This person is devoid 0/ passions (major term). Here the example involves a defect in the middle term (hetu). like perceptwn (homogeneous example). Fallacies of the homogeneous example (Sadharmya-drl!fantiibklisa) are as follow~:(1) Inference is invalid (major term).ay arise in the homogeneous or heterogeneous form. vabhasa) arises from doubt.a defect in the middle term (hetu) or rna]' or ons of example term (sadhya) or both. because audibleness mayor may not be a proof of eternity. Some logicians hold that that which is to be proved. for the dream is not a source of valid knowledge. Here the example involves a defect in the major term (sadhya). like a dream (homogeneous example).- Here the reason (middle term). (2) Perception is invalid (major term). MEDIlEVAL SCHOOL. is unreal.]ways audible. of a place in which fire and smoke exist together. The fallacy of example (Dr~tantabhasa) m. . because he is mortal (middle term). or from doubt about them. body of water. (2) The contradictory (Viruddha): "This is fiery. because it is Here the reason or middle term is uncertain. The semblance of reaSon or fallacy of the middle term (H ei· . misconception Fallacies of tne mIddle or non-conception about it (the middle term. (3) The omniscient being is not existent (major term). I t' IS 0 f tufee Ind s : (1) The unpro"t"ed (Asidithrz) : This is fragrant. like the man in the street (homogeneous example). because it is a source of valid knowledge (middle term).:eaffirms the inseparable connection between them. because it is a souroe of knowledge (middle term). like a jar (homogeneous example). for perception is not invalid.178 INDIAN "LOGIC. the sky-lotus. the major term (sildhya) . IkO term). because he is not apprehended by the senses (middle term). viz. Here the example involves a. because it is a Here the reason alleged is opposed to what is to be established.

s a jar.ted in the Nylyivatlra-vlvrt1 tha. Falla." (3) Of inverted connection (Viparitanvaya). as inference (heterogeneJ ous example) Here the example involves in the heterogeneous form a . like the man in the 8treet (homogeneous example). because he 18 a spwkU' (middle term). Here the example involves in the heterogeneous form a defect in the major term (sadhya)." yet it has not been shown In the proper form as:"Whateysr 18 produced is non-eternal. beoause he is lull 0/ passions (middle term). like a certain man in Magadha (example). IS not a source of knowledge. bemg a. for it is doubtful whether the man in the street is full of passions and non-omnisoient. because it IS produced (middle term).use it 18 produced (mIddle term). souroe of knowledge. such as: ThIS person is lull of pas8ion8 (major term).sa1JUcalpaka. for it is doubtful whether the man in the street is devoid of passions (6) This person is non-omni8cient (major term).JAINA 11[IRJTERS ON' SYSTEM. thus :(1) Inference is invalid (major termL because it is a. because he is full of pa8S?:ons (middle term). as a jar (example) Here though there is an Inseparable connection between "produced" and " non--eternaJ. source of knowledge (middle term): whatever is not invalid is not a.ble connectlon (t'yapti) is shown thus•• Whatever is non--eternails prodllced a. speaker and full of passions. Here the example involves doubt as to the validity of both the major and middle terms. as a dream (heterogeneous example). viz. such as:Sound 18 non-stern&! (major term). speaker" and ' I being full of passions.. Here though s certain roa. such as Sound is non-eternal (maJor term). Fallacies of the heterogeneous example (Vaidharmyadrl!tantabhasa) are of six kinds. beca. Here the example involves doubt as to the validity of the middle term. LOGIC-SIDDHASENA DIVAKARA. (2) Perception is non-reflective or nirvikalpaka (major term) because it is a 80urce of knowledge (middle term): whatever is reflective or . for the dream is really invalid though it has been cited as not invalid. (5) This person is mortal (major term). yet there is no Inseparable connectlOtl between . Here if the insepara.." instead ofu Whatever 18 produced IS non-etArnal as a Jar. as a Jar. for it is doubtful whether the man in the street is devoid of passions. It is sta.:(l) lJnconnected (Ananvyaya)." (2) Of connection unshown (Apradal'sitlinvaya).cies of heterogeneous exa. 179 Here the example involves doubt as to the validity of the major term.cy of the homogeneous example (Siidharmyadr8~antabh&a). like the man in the street (homogeneous example)." the example would involve the fallacy of Inverted connectlOn.t some unnecess3rIly lay down three other kmds of falla.mple.n in Magadha 18 both a.

(3) Sound is eternal and non-eternal (major term). because he did not give kiB own flesh to the hungry (middle term): whoever is devoid of passions gives his own flesh. because he is not a propounder of the four noble truths (middle term)' whoever is omniscient is propounder of the four noble truths. as a jar (heterogeneous example). speaker (middle term): whoever is devoid of passions is not eo speaker.mpte has been put in a contrary way. as Buddha (heterogeneous example). is not full of passions. Rere the exo. though a.l is not an existence.e. (6) Kapila is not devoid of passions (major term). for the proper form should .. as a piece of "eone (heterogeneolls exam.180 INDIAN LOGIC.z.ple). ether" (3) Of contrary separation (Viparita-vyatireka): Sound is fl." yet it has n(')t been shown in the proper form.jor term).On. Here the example involves doubt as to the validity of both the major and middle terms (8adkya and sadhana). as Buddha (heterogeneous ex. because It is an existence (middJe term)' wha.g. such as: H Whatever is non-non-eternal is not produced. Here. HI. for it is doubtful whether Buddha. piece or stone is both "devoid of passions nand "not a speaker. as Buddha (the heterogeneous example). Here the example involves in the heterogeneous form a defect in both the major and middle terms (sadhya and sadhana) . because it is produced (middle term): what~ ever is not produced is non-non-eternaI. Here. (5) This person is untrustworthy (major term). to the hungry. because he is full o{ passions (middle term): whoever is trustworthy is not full of passions." yet there is no invariable separa. • (1) Unseparated (Avyatireki): This person is not devoid 0/ pas8ions (ma. o~hel' m.ternal (major term). defect in the middle term (sadhana)~ for inference is really a source of knowledge though it hBbS been cited as not such. Here the example involves in the heterogeneous form a doubt as to the validity of the major term (sadkya). for it is doubtful whether Buddha was omniscient.ample). for it is doubtful whether Buddha was devoid of passions and gave his own Besh to the hungry. e g. Here the example involves doubt as to the validity of the middle term (hetu)." (4) Kapila is not omniscient (major term).-vivrti that some unnecessarily lay down three kinds of fallacy of the heterogeneous example (V aidharmyad1'~~antabM8a) . as ethel' (example)." (2) Of separation unshown (Apradarsitavyatireka) : Sound is 1'WfV-eternal (major term). because he is a..- It is stated in the Nylyavatlira. JAINA LOGIC.tion (vyatireka vyapti) between" devoid of passions" and " a speaker.erm). CHAP.tever is not eternal and non-eterna.. MEDIJEVAL SCHOOL. for the jar is both" eternal and non-eternal" and " an existence. though there is an invariable separation between "prodt«. because it is produced (middle t. e. ether (example).ed" and " eternal.

to 588 A. Kno"\vledge which determines the full meaning of an object through the employment. both mayor may not be. doer and enjoyer. He was well known as K~ama.I - I Peterson's Fourth Report. author of a commentary on the Avasya~a­ niryukti called Vlse~avas. LOGIC--. cannot be traced to its beginning or followed to its end.. may not be. etc. It undergoes changes of condition and is self-conscious.D. thing possesspoints mg attributes which are peculiar to the rose as distinguished from other flowers. samgraha. r X'l:xix . Jinabhadra GaQi. The semblance of a refutation (Dusa1pabkiisa) is the contrivance to aUege defects where there are no defects at alL The immediate effect of Pramfirpa (valid knowledge) is the removal of ignorance The consequence of Consequence of pra.the transcendental perception (Pfnamal'~ mana thika P'ratyalcsa Pramii1J. is of seven kinds: naigama.faka Bha~ya. is called Syadvaaa-s1"uta. The N aya. 16.D.g born in Sanrvat 541 or 484 A:D. Thus we may conceive rose Naya or the method of comprehendmg thmgs either as a flower possessing the attributes from partICular stand. W(l. nimity consisting in salvation (}jIloksa or final emancipation). I t is the perfect knowledge of things taken from all possible standpoints. samabhirf((J. in the scriptural Syadviida. and continued to be pontiff from 528 A. This system of Prama1J.JINABHADRA GA~I. 181 Refutation (Du~a1Ja) is the pointing out of defects or fallacies RefutatIOn. with winch aU of us are familiar and which serv€ 's to perform all practical functions. riusiltra. method.JAIN A WRITERS ON SYSTEM. in the statements of the opponent in any of the forms enumerated above. Thus a thing may be.ka.). while that of the other kinds of Pramfina (direct and indirect knowledge) is the facility which they afford u~ to choose the desirable and reject the undesirable! things N aya-the method of descriptions.common to all flowers or as a. of one-sided nayas. iabda. JINABHADRA GA1S"I K~AMASRAMA~A (484-588 A. N aya is the method of comprehending things from particular standpoints. being different from the earth. etc.. vyavahjj/ra.a) is bliss and equa. and evarhbhiita.srama~a.a and Naya.D. according as we take it from one or other standpoint. water. The soul (Jiva) is the knower. the illuminator of self and nonself.

and Naya (the method of com· prehending things from particular ~tandpoints).D.dix III. has been noticed by Peterson in 1m 3rd Report.u~.l. MEDI. Siddhasena Ga. who flourIshed 980 year. Appen.182 INDIAN LOGIO.rva~a of Mahivil'a. pp 83-86.i K~amasrama1).!llVAL SOHOOL.a. himself a disciple of Dinna GaIfi. In 17.). pp. . Siddhahave been a contemporary of sena Gar. SAMANTABHADRA (600 A.R RoomIe. was famous as the author of a weH·known com mentary on Umasvati's Tattvarthadhigama-siitra called Gandha. Samantabhadra.. Camhay.ptamlmamsa. I am inclined to suppose that he lived after 533 A. a contemporary of Vikramaditya. CXXXI ' d '" (P sterson an CXXVlll) Muni DharmaviJaya and his pupu Indra-vljaya tell me that Slddha. verse 24). ha8ti-mahabha~ya.lgavapurina.JIf. . page 50.ti a is generally believed DevardhigaI}. Vide also Uvsssgadasao edited by A F .ika 1 in which the logical principles of PTa ma/(lU (the sources of knowledge). who belonged to the Digambara sect of Southern India. p. who belonged to the Svetambara sect. noticed in Peterson's 4th Report. :1 'ffi'Ifr. He . have been fully discussed.vas a pupil of Bhasvamin t who was a spiritual successor of Sirilhasuri. 157) • ••W1I11f!risfi:r m i. But as he has in his Tattvarthatika quoted Siddhasena Divakara and was posterior to Sirhhagiri or Simhasuri. or about 453 A. p.sena Gam Was a con~mpora.ry of DevardlugaI.).:pf1~1j'1f: ~ln~IJ1nJ~: ! ~J{T'ril1i'lf1Itrt ~ (Tattv&rtha~ika. who flourished 980 years after Mahavira. SIDDHASENA GA~I (600 A. Samantabhadra is extolled as the author of the Dave:gamastotra. Ii The Aptami1 A palm-leaf manuscrlpt of the Tattviirthatiki In the telllple of Santmath&.D or about 600 A. 85) g SlIhhasuri is identified by Peterson WIth Snhhagiri who was a contemporary of Vlkramadltya. : 'l1f'll'r\friT li1im ifijJ ~T~~1(lY{: ~~Tri"if il1rr'ltf •• 1 ~TiI('n '@iif: 1\ (pal. CHAP. 40 In the P'QQavapuriiI. was the author of a commentary on Umasvati's Tattvarthadhj~ama­ sutra called Tattvartba.l KsamisramaQa. The introductory part of this commentary is called Devagllmastotra ~ or l.q: nOf) notlced in Peter!:lon's 3rd Report. after the nt..D to 18. ' s 4th R aport. JAINA LOGIC.D. mii1Ff.(t ~i I . and is replete with discussions of logical principles besides a review of the contemporary schools of philosophy including the Advaita Vada.D.(~l~t f~l1mIlI ~""I'<t ~it 1 't~ d' {Aptamtmimsi..~i.

.!V~. verse 104.JAIN A WRITERS ON SYSTEM. p 458) The same verse occut's m the Aptamimamsa as follows:- .a"llf: \4 11 ~f~ ~i\'lIfI~" I 1fflflltf 1l.. 1525). is generally held to have lived in the 7th century A.la composed about 838 A. (or Upasaklidhya.. for 1892.ll'ifi'T ~r1fflliT ~~I~q ~"lIfAol~qa ~ffiI{~r.- mt1il film ~~iftmi 'qf~ WICIf+i"lflIfli: vifif'dlf: QTJiyurrihfiinJ: I ~ ~~ •• ( •• I~. Collection. Kumarila.mT. p. quotes the followmg verse:- . 183 mamsa has beep cited by the Hindu philosopher Vacaspati Misra I in explaining Sankaracarya's criticism of the Syadvada doctrine in the Vedanta-8u tra. Bhandal'kar'sReport on Sanskrit 1(88. of the Aptamimimsii.. G. p. Prabhiicandra yana) observes:In his commentary on the Ratnakarandaka.~mf~T.&ahasri) refet's to Samantabhadra thus:~ ihnt!if fI.D.~ . pp.B.B.T{J~: ~i~lil~r<llnt fit I!flritf~'W: I ~:.rtf"t!~~ftff: i'fd"Alif mflrWy: .~: ~~~r~mr fcQ-'ff~fi:'1: trn~l'ilflf''''' ~~f4ilrii?( I n (Bhsmati. 2 and HIS age Prabhacandra.B (called Apt&·mimithstilankrti-tika asta.\fii: ~. was also the author of the Yuktyannsasana. II (MSS.. at the closing part of hls commentary on the . borrowed from MI'. R.Pr: il $On's 4th Report.r.r\iTif~liAr .ilkrti-~ikli.B.aka (also called UpasakadhyayanaL the Svayambhu-stotra. Jain Vaidya of Jaipur).. Samantabhadra. during 1883-84-. LOGIC-SAMANTABHADRA. in the Asiatic SOCIety of Bengal. Aptam!mimsi1a. Govt. a contemporary of the Buddhist logician Dharmakirti. is supposed to have flourished about 600 A.t~S1R.-7i/T:t~ fqit1fifi1 I . 137-38) (Upiisakidhyayana with the commentary of Prabhacandra noticed in Peter g Vide Dr.D. and is referred to by the Hindu philosopher Kumarila. 2-2-33. He is men~ioned by Jina Sena in the AdipuraI. 227. an~ the Caturvbhsati-jina-stuti.Aptamimamc.B. j J Vicaapati Misra in hIS Bhamati-tikli on Sarikara'A eXpOSitIOn of the Vedanta Satra.A. t Vidyinanda. li8. the Ratnakaral)q.. No. who was styled a Ka vi and whose works were commented on by Vidyananda. Blbhotheca Indll:la. and J. .D Samantabhadra..l:lT1( fq~~"Tii fiAt~ •• st(tS1l'1fmf ~~ifTiilTllti'h II (Folio 218.

~ w~ ~.t~~~ in'( I . Syad-asib (" n1.\ " . e. abhava or nonexistence. The first and seccnd pa. JAINA LOGIC. For instance. HI.:. a jar and a post are mutually non-existent with reference to each other. and. a N On-eXl'3tence lump of clay becomes non-existent as soon as a jar is made out of it.rr.'I~'Ii if ~ "3llfq~1!il(t{ II ~ ~ II . or existence. viz. (2) subsequent non-existence (pradhvamsiibhava). if the aI1tec~dent non-existence is denied. in the course of which a full exposition of the sevon parts of the Sya.stence (Abhava) is divided into four kinds: (1) antecedent non-existence (pragabhava). beginningless. e g. ~ ~l1ifl'fl'" " "S'"tTfir.sa. the inanimate is no·t a living object. The Aptamlmam. bhava.rts of the doctrine.il-vada or Sapta bhangi-naya has been given. fh'~ided mto ten chapters caned Paricchedas.rf4:rr~i1f4 I 'Atmililiil'r~1'fI'1~q-i1\lRifil1l'.It II ~\ \I '-Ii 4. and in the absence of t1~~1~ :q\l:t~TiI'H1mifTil'T11'qlfCfitt itil~il\tilfi4PfTfo( ~q !(T. It is obserV'ed ! that. so the jaI' is an antecedent non· existence with reference to the lump of clay. have led to a "Most interesting discussi@n of the relation between asti.JT'''T~ sfq i1flft QIlf("1 ill I ~ifl1{ I .ay be. it IS not ").~':.g. 19.rr'l1f il3cf"lff II ~~ " . consists of i 15 stanzas in Sanskrit.. ffif« ~6ffct II . things becOlne all-pervading. SAMANTABHADRA ''3 APTAMIMAMSA. e g the lump of clay is a sa. ~ Ii fiiri I "" It ~tfi. e. indistinguishable and inconceivable.'">.bsequent nonexistence with reference to the jar.i f~if ~~~t iVi1!lr.'"' =fi~ " ~e~ ~ ~ ~S1Pf"t tfittt 11 ~ ~R'CITitif :qa'q~ ~~'f. action and substance become beginningless~ while on the denial of the subsequent non-existence. that is. l ~i~~lifil~ ~~~l~ fqf~~f\\i( I "6Tq'f9Jli~1II1~StQrmifl.184 INDIAN LOGIC~ )lEDllEVA. it is "). on the supposition of mere existence to the entire exclusion of non-existence. OHAP.L SCHOOL. (3) mutual non-existence (anyonyabhii/va or anyapoha).11)~.?~j. and (4) absolute nonexistence (samavayabhava or afyantabhava). that is.. and Syad-nasti (" may be. Non-exi. niisti.'f. endless. they become endless.g.

it becon~es mdescribable. AKALANKADEV A (ABou'r 750 A D. they become one and all-pervading. whiit" on absolute non-existenco being demed.c. Jain Vuidya of Jaipur early in 1907. s.) was based on another work on logic. (6) It is non-exIstent and indescribable-from a sixth point of vie\v (7) It 1. Laghiyastraya.-vyakhyallalankars. during 1883-84.: Tattvartha-vartlka.j. Akalail.(1) A thing is existent-from a certain point of view (2) It t8 non~existent-from another pomv.ka-stotra. dra.$' both existent and non-existent and indescribable-+l'Om it seventh point of view. .i. Svaru pa-sam b!)d~"!'d!1'. 217. was a famous logician who belonged to the Digambara sect of Southern India.". page 122. otherwise known as Akalankadeva or Akalankacan· HIS works. called Nyaya-vinlscaya.. -Therefore the truth is as follows.sLeni. MaI}. both existent and non-ex. p. written by Akalanka. Sevenfold paralogIsm of view. they are to be supposed El~ exiRting always and everywhere. " J For an ~xplanation of the term " Kavi" 'Vide R.manta. dealing mainly with logic. 2 A manuscript of the A~~a saH was kindly supplied to me by Mr. (5) It is eXIstent and indescribable-from a fifth point of view.'i)i or "the crest gem of the oirole of all logicians. are simultaneously ascribed to a thing. LOGIC-AKALANKADEVA."o. 135 mutual non-existence. Akalanka. 20. which are incompatible WIth each other. Bhandarkar's Report on Sanskrit MSS. (3) It is both existent and non-exiRtent in turn-from a tiIird po in t of view (4) It i& ~ndescribable {that is.ikyanandi's Pal'ikEjlamukha-sutra (q.multaneously)-from a fourth point of view.' and Prayascitta. G.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM.-bhadra. noticsd by Peterson in his 5th Report. Laghusamantabhadra 8 in his A?ta-sahasr'j-vi~ama­ pada-tatparya-tlka calls Akalailka . to whom the following works are also attributed.. S Vide Astasihasri-vi~oapada-tatl?a"'Y8-tlka by Laghusa. E'xi~tence~ it becomes impossible to establish or reject anything (since it is non-existent). He wrote a commentary on Samantabhadra's Aptamlmamsa called A~~a-sati jt which is a most precious work on the Jaina philosophy. He was designated as a Kavi I (poet)-a title of speoial honour given ~o writers of repute.as Sakala-tarkilca-cakrc-c'E.). If on the other hand eXlstence and non-existence. In the same way on the supposition of mere non-exIstence to the entire exC'iusion of.v.

lII"(1I(~~ ~ ~ 2 ifJ"f!fq1'lllfm~ir "'filfrItT~~~'lWTf. by Hemacandra.a-raja I... Govind II. 4 Vide R. noticed by Peterson in his 5th Report. Subhatooga is another na.. p. II ~ The closing lines of the Astasahasri are:- . though mentioned along with Dhal'makirti \l as a logician..~ __ -. 78.l..1S~'A.D. Vidyananda.r iR"Tlhl:~~~ l!l~:rm~." in the Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. Kr~I}..186 INDIAN LOGIC. II makes an indirect reference """". o Vide the <'hapter on the Jaina system iu the Sarvadarsana-sat:!lsraha tra. P 56. He was the author of the Aptamimfimsalankrtij otherwise called A~~asahasrl. VIDYANANDA (ABOUT 800. 79).~~ ~ I v 'qlt-t 1fTfTin iPr iml~T 1Rf~ II (PiiI>davapurir..6 was a Digambara logician of PataJiHIS works. 1892. It is reported that Akalanka and Ni~kaI8nk. b . putra.ta~ raja's SOD. Vidyananda.:.:=. _t_~ __ .~.thak's article on" Bhartrhari and Kum&rUa. . Akalanka forsook his father's palace and became an ascetic. Akalanka.~~ml" ftl1IJQ1U'lfl!f1{ I 'IU. Vol.. MEDI. Finding that the antagonist was effectively prompted by Mayadevl concealed in ajar.a. an exhaustive aubcommentary on the Aptamimari:lsa.A.." 2nd edition.1IFfr ~"l1( I !\.T . Buddhist antagonist. JAINA LOGIC. flourished at a considerably later His age time.. were two sons of Subhatmlga whose capital wa.g to which Akalailka was embarrassed in a controversy with a.ro<i 1. G Bhandarkar's •• Early History of the Deccan. lIT. lived in 8aka 705 ~ or 783 A. . must have flourished about 750 A. XVIII. p.D. !I. p.D. As Krf?r. II ~~~1~ f)J1IIi'1f~. (Vide Peterson's Report II.-mimiiIhsa.lEVAL SCHOOL..'l_I\¥U. He is held to have been a contem~ porary of Ra~traku~a king Subl}atunga3 or Kr~I)araja I. lr'tifi~"".. p. 148).carya.TSl!I5'q: ~ ifi..D. In th() PaI}-qavapurar.me of Kf~naraj& the Rastraldita king who reigned In the Deccan between 753-775 A. B. 21. in the opening and the closing lines of his A~tasahasri..a. and consequently his contemporary Akalanka.s Miinyakheta. noticed by Peterson :m his 4th Report.. t! The opening lines of the A~tasa:hasri are:- ~~1fi1'fuel~ ~1If. CHAP. Pa.nslated by Cowell and Gough. Akalanka is said to have put an end to that prompting or inspiration by kicking the jar over with his foot. mentioned by the Hindu philosopher Madhav8.ri!r~fi(~~fir~~~tft:Ii ~~'d" ~..llT I "- (PramaDa.). S Vide K..a i reference is made to a legend acoordir. 157). fit i£Tl"~ ~~T . containing an elaborate exposition of various logical principles.

~r X referred to <. I).-~lokavirtika.ka respectively.. ~h~i sftr S"i': ~ ~~~1f \.sri.l£fq~ I qnfq ~ "ilflFt " f{*ttl if~. Asiatic SOcIety of Bengal) ~ ~'1f. for 1892.A.. I).if ~.B Sabarasvami.. I MSS .t II.juiikara. chap.9 187 to Sa.. ~~~fitfit~ I (Quoted in A~~asiha. in Cha??J:.:~~~1 'SI'lM'1{lh«1 U ~ (A~~as&hasri. or else this Pra.ch. 2 5l"'-!~I(~tt ~~ : - ifi~i~?i .1 Bhartrhari. ~1a'fl~"1.. Bombay. p.rlk~a...Tlilflf 'fJfi{~ q W)"fT?{ -q-rU. Uddyotakara J Dharmakirti..is extract may he an mterpolatIO!l. I Prajfiakara.-. Prabhakara. is attributed to him..n1l1{ (This verse of Vakyapadlya by Bhartrhari J B.~rq "5f~i! I ~ . criticised the doctrines of the Sarilkbya.. Dignij.~asiiha.) ~1~ I (Quoted in..l.~~~~~~~~f~~~~~1 ~'(iiiJj.Bauddha philosophy.. ..lT'eljq!f~r.0. 4 .II ~~')~~ 'fJTS1lr ~f . (fif ~ ~lsfq.p. ... '..JAIN A WRITERS ON SYSTEM. must he different from the Buddhist logician PraJaakara Gupa to be mentioned hJreafter. chap. Vidyananda was otherwise named Patl'a Kesari or Patra Kesari Svami. AdYaita. vide ~n~~_1frf-8~:-.sri.S. LOGlC-VIDYANANDA... cha... 221).maI)a-pa. Suresvara l! and Kumarila.. I). :- 'IISlIffWq' tf<:11:if ..q'fl! (At."ifl -. I II quoted in the Aljta.ga. Mimalftsaka and Saugata.msh.. Another logioal treatise called Pra.:..A. c£.B. edited by :M:anohar Lal. Yoga. 8 m '!i~ II -ar ~Tsf@ ~ >ii~ \Ij ~: ~Trit IS ~~<r1<m-TTftr ~~ ~~ 'Sff..mantabhadra and Akalan. He was also the author of the Tattvartna sloka-vaI'tika and Apta-parik~a.l!asahasri). He has 1 in his AS?tas&hasri.. ~~~. while in chapt~r X of the work be distinctly says that he foBowerl the A~ta-sati of Akalanka in explaining the Aptamlma. Tathagata.sahasrl.R.. l'lLn thus:. Preface to Tattvarths.i11'f. . and .. Vaisef?jka.has mentioned.Yi{ "5fffflfl1NiJT ~fin I ifi'qfflt!lfi?{ S'iF= ~ ~lf: (Quoted in A~tas1ihasii. who has been praised by Jina j or The line.

is divided into six chapters thus.a I composed about Saka 760 ~ or A.rikelt-mukha-sastra Itself I have not come 101' . As his work is based on that of Akalanka. pp.s at Patalipu tra.3 Vide K. (2) direct apprehension or perception (Pratyak~a). notices Pat'ik~imukha. MaI}.vIr.. and (6) the semblances or fallacies (Abhiisa). MANIKYA NANDI'S PARIK~AMUKHA-SOTRA.S. for 1892. 838.B R..S.. The earliest commentary on the Parn~~amukha-srastra is the Prameya-kamala-martaI}.B. whose HIS Pari~a­ standard work on Jaina logic.SOHOOL.6 he must have lived after 750 A. Wl!.+ika is the Prameya-ratna-m~lli. JAINA LOGIC. He is believed to have lived early in the 9th century A. pp. Pathak's artIcle on BhaI'trhal'l and KUmal'lla for 1892.A. 223) In 2. in J.'t!fTfiEfi fii~!illiQ'~ m. 1892. 4 J.rhari and Kumarila.~ n quoted by Mr.S.R. I> A manuscript of the Parikf?a-mukha-sastra was kindly lent to me by Mr.B. Jain Vaidya of Jaipur (Rajputan~).S. 219. I fq~t ~1Il~~T ~l"(P!l.iifT~ (J.). Pathak has quoted Samyaktvaprakda to show that Vldyananda and Patrakesal'l were IdentlOal : - :. 222. 4 22. the cha. Vidyananda..188 INDIAN LOGIC. Poona.A. B.ll ~. hie of Patrakesari alias Vidyananda. 155.tta'a Kathiikoi?a. 221. Pathak says that Miil.he object of valid knowledge (Vi~aya). . I have published the work in the Blbhotheca Indwa series of Caloutta I) Peterson in his 4th Report. and subsequently another manuscript of the work 'Vas procured from the Deccan College.~~rril'ifT "f:I~ if~ ~~~ ii'.A. K B PatJlak..ikya Nandi and Prabhacandra have been pronounced to be contemporaries. (4:) t. .B.likya Nandi has mentioned Vldyiinanda. 227. B. ( 1) The Parlk~amukha-siitra ~~r". 222). whIch opens thus:- 'I Vide K. l\[A~IKYA NANDI (ABOUT 800 A D.. for 1892. but in the text of the Pa. Sena in the Adl Pural]..~: II 'i.D. Ma1)ikya Nandi was a Digambara author. (5) the result of valid knowledge (Phala).B.frsffffifi.7 So Ma:q.ikya Nandi seems to have lived about 800 A.D.R..racteristic of valid knowledge Subjects. Pathak's article on Bhart.B. The .D.D. (3) indirect apprehension (Parok~!l'). Vide Brahmanemida. or Parik!?&nlukhapafijiki of Allantavirya.B. Mr. CHAP. m~ llm~ ~1&IT: (AdlpUl'a~a. p. pp. 229. . J.m sa~ikam. MEDJ1EVlIL . p.B R A. Ill.220. (Prarnatta-8variipa). age mukha-sastra & or Parik~a-:roukha·sutra is a 23.cJa of Prabhacandra.

. LOGIC-MAJSIKYA NANDI. " Recognition is a knowledge which arises from perception through recollection in the forms. Recollection is a knowledge of the form ' h . Syllogism. pervaded or contained. the former is called effect (kii1'ya) .bsence of the latter. (Parik::}ii-mukh. Prama7ja is of two kinds: (1) direct knowledge (Pratyakfia) which arises through the senses. the major term is called 8adhya or that which is to be proved. argumentation (Tarka or Oha)." "this is different from that-. thus fire is the cause of smoke.. if this is not. and the latter cause (kara'fJ. etc" and (2) indirect knowledge (Parok~a) consisting of recollection (Smrti) ." which CODsists of a subject. so the Prama'fja exhibits the knower as well as the thing known.""iA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. ami the 1 :2 1I. an object.JAL. Inference is the knowledge of the major term arising through the middle term: there is fire here. valid knowledge. an act. however. Argumentation is a knowledge of the connection between the middle term and the major term based on." "this is like that. that is not. and an instrument.t Il (l?a.ikya Nandi as the knowledge which ascertains the nature of what was uncertam to one's self.ra. recognition (Pratyabhijiiiina) . .. and the scripture (Agama). th ledge. is defined by MaQ..a-siii.Q. and the latter vyapaka." "this is far from that. 189 VaHd knowledge-PramafJ." "the b08 gavaeu8 is like the cow. Right lmowledge. that is. but it cannot arise if there is no fire." etc. . It generally arises in the form: 'l I know the jar by myself. inference (An'Umana) . If the middle term and the major term exist simultaneously." thus smoke arises only if there is fire. pervader or container. term by the major term in simultaneity or succession: thus fire and smoke may abide simultaneously or the latter may follow the former. Ordinarily." " this is a tree. or het~l).US: "th a t Deva d a tt a. Just as a lamp illumines itself as well as the surrounding objects. the former is called vyapya.rik~i·mukha"siitl'a).Vyapti Pervasion 2 or inseparable connection (V yapti or A 1)'inabklwa) is the universal attendance ~f the middle Terms of a Syllogism. the presence or 2'.a Prarnit1)a. "if thIS is.Jt''fWm{ "'Nli1itrI"~fITir1{ Il t! I ~"ifi1rnA~s~a • ." " the buffalo is different from the cow." etc.). 0 f' ImpreSSIOnS. in the form.') "this is the counterpart of that. this is that. But if the middle term follows the major term. thus: "this is that Devadatta. that" which arises through the awaking K mds of rig t know. because there is smoke.

The middle term or reason (H etu) is divided as (l) perceptible (upalabdhi). (iv) prior (pUna)-the RODi~i sta. which cannot come into existence unless the major term exists.l\ce or kwus in which the major term abides. (2) imperceptible Different phases of the (anupalabdhi). No philosophers. For instance.190 INDIAN LOGIC.mrva)-the Roh4li stars will not rise shortly. heat: cold sensation. or in other words.s 8. because it has a particular flavour. or Dharmin.n umbrella: .n bas got intellect. or this mango ha.''1ctions in him: (iii) a cause (lca"a'l'pa)-there is a sh>l. here" this place" and "sound" are the minor terms.n t.hiR man. and the middle term linga. The perceptible reason in the affirmative form admits of six subdivisions according as it is :(1) the pervaded (vyapya)-sound js mutable.n:OOL .srt. and.JA!NA LOGIC. for the Krttika. Sometimes the major term is aJso caned dharma or predicat. Reason-net1J. thus: "this place is fiery" ~ 'c sound is mutable'~.Ued 13iidhana or that by which it is to be proved. the subject. Each of these again may middle teTm. . (il) an errec: n. for the Revatt fonlvl ha. because there are \i~ eJ.'ltm rise.i) or negation (prati~edha)..g have risen: (v) posterior (ulttaraj-the BharaJ?i steJr~ certainly rose for the Krttikas have risen: (vi) simultaneous {sahacara)-lihe mo.dow herE'. particular colour. who divide the middle term (reaso!!) into three phases. smoke could not come into existence unless the fire existed. e~10uld dispense with the min~!' term in an inference The middle term (lietu) is defined as tba.s ri . because it is factitious.ie':~:":E'~J ~-':. the pl.e. mark or sign The minor term is called PaI:. because there is a. middle term is c2I.s as follows:(i) the pervaded (vyapya)-there is 110 (li) an effect (kiirya)-there is_ no cold sensation beclmse of (iii) a cause (kara1Ya)-there is no happiness l. occur in the form of an affirmation (vidh. for he had a father..~::cl_:1::s ma. CRAP HI. MEDLZEVAr~ SC.-rs ~. bennuse of the shaft in his heart.t which is inseparably connected with the major term. because of smoke ~ (iv) prior (. The perceptible reason in the negat1:ve form admits of six subdivisiop.n had a mother.

because it is imperceptible. posterior (uttara)-the BharaJ.bsence of the middle term is indicated by the absence of the major term.ava)-there is uncertainty here. are ad~itted as parts of an inference The example is of two kinds: (1) the affirmative or homogeneous (an:vayi or sadharmya) which shows the middle term as covered by the major term. but the example ('1. !~l (v) posterior (uttara)-the Bhar:11)i did for the PU8va has risen. because he has no union with his beloved ones. Nevertheless for the sake of explaining matters to men of small intellect. because it is not perceptible . The imperceptible reason in the affirmative form may appear in the following ways :(i) as an effect (karya)-in this man there is some diseaset because there is no healthy movement in him.uiakara1}a) is Example is super£l.tive or heterogeneous (vyatireki or vaidharmya) by which the a.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTE~! LOGIC-MA~IKYA NANDI. (vi) simultaneous (salwcara)-there is no doubt of the eXIstence of the other side of thi~ wall. for the Krttikas are not perceptible.li did not rise a moment ago. not. The 'l:mperceptible reason in the negative form admits of seven subdivisions as follows : (i) identity (svabhava)-t. a cause (kiira'Yfa)-there is no smoke here. . the example (udahara'l]a or dr~tanta). nay. there is fire.here is no jar here. (ii) as a cause (lcara1}a)-this man is sorrowful. because certainty is not discernible.i stars will not rise in a moment. even the application (upanaya) and the conclusion (nigamana). and (2) the nega. for this side of it is peroeived. for the Krttikas are not perceptible. Example-dN~anta. (iii) as an identity (svabh. lake. beoause there is no tree at all . . as in a kitchen. there is no smoke. as in a. The middle term and the major term are the parts of an inference. not rise a moment ago. simultaneous (sahacara)-in this even balanoe there is no bending upwards. e. because there is no fire. because (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) there is no smoke.uous.g. wherever there is no fire. (iii) an effect (karya)-there is no smouldering fire here. prior {pUrva)-Rohi1). such as: wherever there is smoke. (ii) the pervaded (vyapya)-there is no Simsapa here.

ObjectR of valid knowledge are either general (sumanya) or particular (vi. e.-to m. (4) sound is factitious (application).. -) An in0 f 0 th ers (pa1'ar stanoe of the latter kind of inference is given below:(1) Sound (minor term) is mutable (major term)-pl'oposition . Inference is of t. and (2) heterogeneous (?1rddhvata).r. (3) whatever is factitious is mutable.kinds of Fallacies. (4) but sound is factitious (application) . the north pole exists. dog.~ r:ow " is a gePJo. (5) therefore sound is mutable (conclusion).rDIAN r.·. etc.. Testimony (Agama) is a knowledge of objects derived from the words of reliable persons or scriptures in Verbal Testimony virtue of their natural fitnesl'3 or suggestiveness-e. Inference-anu mana. 92 n.'Ja). (3) whatever is not mutable is not factitious. experiE"nced by the soul. such as the fallacy(I) of perception (pratyak~abhli.istake a post for a. (5) therefore sound is mutable (conclusion). as the milk of a barren woman's breast (negative or heterogeneous ex- ample) . inchlding many individuals of disR!mHar naturE"'.fe~a). neck]ace ear-ring. It is of many kinds.g. pain. is different from the real thing. "gold" is a general notion comprising a bracelet. etc.OGIC. (1) inference for one's own HeH (sviirtkanumana).Visaya. The result or consequence of valid knowledge is the cessation of ignorance. man. CHAP.. Verbal Testimony-agama.. etc. enabling one to choose the lte'3ult of vahd knowledge. viz. and (2) relating to action such as ple-asure. I Or. MEDLiEVAL SCHOOL ••JAIN A LOGIC. Scope of Valid Knowledge.ny individut:lol cows as ~abala" Kl:2. which SIgnifies ma. as a jar {affirmative or homogeneous example) . buffalo. ::"::::8~-.g. cow. are foul' particular things distinguished from one another.wo kinds. Fallacy or semblance consists of the knowledge of that which V(1l'louc. elephant. The general is of two OhJects of vabd know. . The particular is also of two kind s: (1) relating to things (vyatireka). as. deslrable and reject the undesirable.!'!1! POb0rl. including !f·dge.:-:&. I Fallacy--abhasa.thanumana.. many individuals of like nature) as the .~. and (2) inference for the Two kinds of Inference. e.kinds' (1) homogeneouA (tiryak) . (2) because it is factitious (reason or middle term) . sah:e 1_ • .g. III.

Parik~a-mukh8rsiitra. Prabha Candra. VI. Saugata Sarhkhya Yoga Prabhakara . run you boys" .. LOGIC-PRABRA 'CANDRA. because it is factitious. for they do not attribute impermanency to sound. MSS. MSS.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM.itra. styled a Kavi. Jain Vaidya. "the Jainas are allowed to eat in the night" [as a fact they are not so allowed by their scripture].tikya.. 193 (2) of recollection (smara'YfabhCisa)-in trying to recollect Jil1fJ. (8) of verbal testimony (agamabhasa)-" there is a heap of sweetmeats on the side of the river.is a tiger" . Nandi with me by Mr. (6) of the middle term or reason (hetvabhasa)-sound is eternal. chap.'f"8'~nv It ~ ~ n (Parik~B-mukha-sutra. ~~I~r4lil(~~ ~filqf~qt(t: I ~ ~ omtr: ~1Il1~q:at 1I!Q1fl1{ \I (Pa.Q. Qf Mih.ipur). References to Philosophers . because it is a substance as water. Jain Vaidya of the commentary of Anantavirya. PRABRA CANDRA (ABOUT 825 A. sect. has been edited by Sa. because it is corporeal. '10 . . lent to Jaipur). 24.tie Chandra Vidya. or fire is not hot. can dispense with the minor term (palct}a).-si. (4) of argumentation (tark'iibhasa)-" whoever is his son must be black" .. lent to me by Mr. of Ja. etc. like a jar. a member of the Digambara. who admits three kinds of reason or middle term (hetu). the earli1 ~n __ lf~" l'lrfcripr fir~ ~{J: I " 0 II cir ~ f.q.it'lH ~miwr ~fi'TifT 'If 't. " 1 He cQIlcludes his work by describing it as a mirror through which a man can see what is to be accepted and what rejected. • Ma:t. (3) of recognitlOn (pratyabh1'jiianabhasa)-on seeing a greyhound to say: " this. _' " . (7) of example (dr~~antiibha8a)-sound is eternal.bhusana. that. In the 3rd chapter of the work he observes-" no philosopher. Devadatta " .a (the sun of the lotus of knowledge).likya Nandi in the Pankfila-mukha-sutra (chapter vi) aph. (5) of the minor term (pak~abha8a)-" sound is 'jmpermanent" : This is a fallacy of the minor term according to the Mimamsakas. and published in the Bibliotheca. 56-57) has mentioned the Laukayatika. Jalmllllya. Indica Series of Calcutta..). t References to cantemporaneous systems of phllosophy.datta to say: "0. was the author of the famous logical treatise called Prameyakamala marta.rik~a-mukha.D. "there are a hundred elephants on his finger'.

.B.tikya Nandi. K. B.-martanda.jf . and before 1444 A. as a cont.S. MEDlJEVAL SCHOOL.RA.R. 222). Deccan College. ifiii(f ij t) 'il<l{\ ~ ~ ~~T. p.D.itfSiCJ1llll .a 3 composed about Saka 760 or A. II In the AdipuraI}a Prabha Candra is thus mentioned : 'EI~ 'Sf"~r~ ~ ~i I II (Quoted by Mr.S .A.fr".a. quoted by Mr. quoted by Mr..B. 838. 227 of the same journal. He has in. p. IS fixed at Saka 760 .A. . MSS. He belonged to the Svetambara sect and was the famous author of a commentary on the Buddhist logical treatise NyayaI Prabha: Candra has quoted the following verse from Bal')a's Kadambari :(. He himself has been mentioned bv Jina Sena in the AdipuraI).JAINA LOGIC. the date of the Adipul'ana or 838 A. when Dharmakirti lived. Dharmaklrti. Pathak in the J. his Prameya-kamala-martaI). 21a. CHAP. 227)..D. p..emporary of MaI}. probably a Digambara. Sabarasvami. thus : ~T ~f~ 'Siiff1(j'ifl"~ ~ 'ffiI'iif1tT ~f'fR:rq.B. p. The work must have been composed after 635 A. est commentary on the Parik~-mukha· sutra of Mar.ikya Nandi and Vidyananda..-rfC{W Si!{ • On p.flf-ilfTl(-Tfr~ I Iit~~ f"'~Q{mriT il11: II (Pl'ameya-kamala. Uddyotakara.).D.D. He was also the author of the Nyaya·kumuda-candrodaya (or briefly Candrodaya). :2 Prabha Candra refers to Kumlirila J otherwise called BhaHa.oJ. B.194 INDIAN LOGIC. for 1892.• for 1892. a commentary on the Laghiyastraya of Akalailka. K. 221). III.tQ. K.B.. is believed to have Hved in the first half of the 9th century A. 26.~ij' ~ t:~llT~ifi'Ei!tliIT. Pathak in J.~ Prabhakara.D. B..D. Rabhasa Nandi.l Kumarila. for 1892.). Pathak in J. Vidyananda and others. which seems to be a commentary on the Sam- of the Buddhist logician Dharmakirti. 25.R.B. wrote a work caned Sambandhoddyota.S. handha-parik~a MALLA VADIN (ABOUT 827 A. Dignaga. 1ifi~i'SN ll~ lT~Clir'(~'lit tlT"li I (Pl'ameya-kamala-rnartaz. BaI).B. Rhartrhari.qa mentioned Bhagavan Upavar~a. RABHASA N ANDY (CIROA 850 A.a.~ I5fiAfil 1ij~Tiit " "Sl~iff 'tJ1~~ 'ff'I':~ ~ ~~'-¥ ~. q: ~m ~ . Prabha Candra. which is the date of the copy of the work acquired for the Bombay Government.D.

etc. p. According to a J aina legend. App p. Atmakhyati.m~qJfi . On this supposition Mallavadin lived in 827 A. 2-2-39) b Peterson's fourth Report. On the other hand Mallavadin is mentioned 4 by Hem Candra Suri.{'R{T.\. 195 bindutika called Dha:rmottara-~lppanaka. ill:_ (5 Atmalrhyiiti.dha Hema SabdanmHisan:1-brbat-tikii.D.ialla was the son of King Siladitya's sister. p. p.D.l J. ~ ~~ ~ eI'f l5f. ' . cakra.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. or 962 A. II ~?! \~''{ ~ir 3 4. Bombay. He was caned vadin or logician.D.D. AMlJ-TA CANDRA SURI (905 A. and lived in Samvat 962 or 905 A. MaUavadin was also the author of a work called the Padmacaritra and lived in Vira Sam vat 884 or 357 A.). "his DamsaI}.). he re-established the Jaina faith and brought to its former glory the great figure of Adinatha on Mount Satrufijaya . was the author of NayaHe was born in Sarhvat 951 or 894 A D. on whose Nyayabindutika MaUavadin wrote 1-'ippanaka.. ~<n'l ~ ~~ \ ~"it ~r$ftF( 1. who lived during 1088-1172 A.6 etc. having vanquished the Buddhists in a dispute.5 who belonged to the Dlgambara sect.D. 12 {fij ~il1itifi ~i1"l!fl~T'. lived about 837 A D.Jfl1ii~~ ~: 'q'R~: ~ff11i: ~ if..7 a pupil of Ramasena. It seems therefore probable that the year 884 in which MaUavadin lived does not refer to VIra Salhvat.) Amrta Candra Sud . "¢f"i ~~ 1JfC{ ~~ ". According to the Prabhavakacaritra S. LOGIC-DEVASENA. 3). and wrote . A palm-leaf manuscript 2 of the Dharmottara-tippanaka is preserved at Anhilwad Patan and is said to be dated Sarnvat 1321 or 1174 A.3). as Dharmottara (q. 3-4.. was the author of Tattvartha-sara. 273).a-sara (Darsana-sara) in Sam vat 990 or 933 A.D. which is a commentary on the Samaya-prabhrta of Kundakundacar a h'as been edlted b Pandita Gajadhar Lal Nya.~Cli" l:if'fiITw ~'i'r.r 'fIl~_F I (SiCl. 1 Peterson 4. because. but to Vikrama or Saka Samvat. 67 ~~ ~.D.v.U~ ~i"&'. Devasena. (Noticed in Peterson 5.D. 13HAT':f:\RAKA.ci\ (Peterson's Report V.yaSaatrl. Vol IV"p.D. Vienna Oriental Journal. (in Kathiwar). 28 DEVASENA BHA'f1'ARAKA (899-950 A.tf~ t. In which is mentlOned the'legend from the Prabandhacmtamani (Ramacandra's edition. 27. But this is impossible. pp.-~tq~~~rfq'iil't{ II 'fI'iJ~~ ~"'T ~~: II Vide Klatt.

p. He was an eminent logician and author of Vadamaharl}.D. made his irrelevant opponent.. Pradyumna must have flourished about 980 A. pp.\i~lf'ltR:.196 INDIAN LOGIC.t~lif"'.ikyacandra Suri.).s to sweat and thereby to be cured of the fever of pride.D.r~~l. using sharp logical expressions. CHAP. a treat1 For further particulars about Pradyumna Stirl. see Peterson's 4th Report.D. . .lxxix.H!ft~': I iiif ~li{~ifT 'Sftl6il fl~@'t 'ff't5"'~f ~r.). III. ABHAYADEVA SURI (ABOUT 1000 A.) who lived a little before 1039 A. and was the pupil and successor of Prdyumna Suri of the Rajagaccha. 2 ~~1~: ~iili~ \l~Fi~~ "ST~. 30. MEDIlEVAL SOHOOL. 16 t II 1iT'U'IT"Tfil~ U<sJ1{"~~'q{inn:f'l: I ~.) 8 'ffei~~~m:r~~. He delighted the kings of various countries by no fewer than eighty.-:~: "ST~~htl: ~ ~: "OOS~ • ~r. who wrote his Parsvanathacaritra in Samvat 1276 or 1219 AD.:~~ I 1\ ~( 1\ as noticed by Peterson in his 3rd Report.D.: II ~"~T~<lfif~r'-llf«~lqPlTi[ I ~fI~lf(fl:flifil~ qT~~~TiI~ II t= It "ivreif(fttatj@r~~'i1(ilifm~<! (pmvanltha.! for he was the preceptor of Abhayadeva Suri (q.tff " ~il{f: mttHfCfiiT tfiffl~ ~~~ iflTI\!'l1iT: 1\ fit~"i~. JAINA LOGIC.v." In the same work reference is made to his victory over the Digambal'as of Vei1kapa~ta in the presence of the king of that province. He r belonged to the Rajagaccba of the Svetambara sect. PRADYUMNA SURl (ABOUT 980 A.ritra ~.Tifi'Iiii'lit~·qt ~~~ I ~~t m~~ fifCliT~~f.ava.~ fili~~'\~~~ 8 1\ 'Siat-t if~ 'I1'lmr~'iin ~.1t his prowess in logical discussions is referred to in the following terms:"There was born the preceptor Pradyumna Suri-the first healer of disease of the world-who entirely removed all corruptions rrom the body of men (or detected all defects in disputation committed by men) and who.~ca.four triumphs in discussion He was eleventh in ascent from Ma:Q. 57-164. 29.ikyacandra's Parsvanatha-caritra. In MaI). Abhayadeva Suri belonged to the Svetambara sect s.

~ ~tWT I fifellli~I~f1r'fiiq'( ~'e~Hi9il~~TS'ii{t{ U " .. see Peterson s Fourth Report. He 6 wrote a commentary on the A~tasabasrI of Vidyananda called the A~~asahasri-vi~amapada-tatparya·~ika 6 and seems to have belonged to the Digambara sect and lived about 1000 A.~'filflT ~~~ ~l~~it~ qr '€i~f. _ B Weber's Die Handschriften-verzelChmsse.bout Abhayadeva SiU'l. 4-5.ikyacandra. 31. It was probably ~his Abhayadeva Suri. R. 3 9 . See also Weber's Die Handschriften-verzelchmsse der KOnlghchen Blbhothek zu Berlin.lTiril'lll ~ II ~ '(t~ ~l.4 : 0 : . noticed by Dr. Bhandarkar in his :Report on Sanskrit MSS. . That the rivers of various conflicting opinions might not sweep away the path of the good.1 GIl ~'ti""ifi~Fw ~~: ~itin: I "I 5': '3JfnTif . and of a commentary on the Sammati-tarka-sutra called Tattvartha-bodha-vidhaYini. 197 ise on logic called the Ocean of Discussions. p..~ mCfiT ~ 'fiTiif. where we read :- m Wtr t~ lilfflif"~ f<f"I"~· 'ST.). .D. 1.~li'qT~~fll[4 fii~TSfq ~~." He was succeeded by Jinesvara Suri. 6 The Al?~asahasri-vii}8oDla-pada-ta:tpa. pp.lava. 216-219. . 851..ya. ~~ cUr-. LOGIC-LAGHUSAMANTABHADRA. for 1~83-84. 1 See R. LAGHUSAMANTABHADRA (ABOUT 1000 A. by MaI}.:: ~1{. 3 He was the ninth predecessor of Siddhasena Suri. etc.. 1 "He is described as a lion that roamed at ease in the wild forest of books on logic. and p. .rya-~ika: has been noticed in Peterson's Fifth Report. a contemporary of King Mufija. p.2 For particulars a. Suri was probably a s:plritual brother of Dhanesvara Surt..-.. . 158-59).(l.~ fql\q. vv.INA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. .narbrhadvrtti by Siintyicarya..fl: ~"s6~~1!f 1i~~f'fl""'~T. G. p.JA. 827.{T: ~~~~~itwT ~. Mitra's Catalogue...fiy ~~: ~~: I '1: '~iai2'l'lr"Cr'Si!iNlW1fer~rl: C\ ~ "'--.121. Jine~vara.D.~rit ~~flf: ~~qtfll. who was "world-renowned" and a teacher of Santi Suri 4 who died in Sam vat 1096 or 1039 A.. noticed by Peterson in his Third Report.D. X. ~.q'I't fif~ ~~m ~ ~ • t:: II (Parsvanatha-caritra. pp. xxiii.{ lmft tP!i iiW crr~il'iHllr'i!f lJ: II ~ II fq. pp.ftf: II (Uttaradhya.~ ~ I . .D. ~4). Abhayadeva 2 wrote his Vada-maharI. m. . p. p.~ 1€S~~~Nmr (?) ~~fcfcTT~ (r) 'tC'tlI'itU1i "QI ~Wif~! . who wrote Pravacana-saroddhara-vrtti in Samvat 1242 or 1185 A. 5 Vida Peterson's Sixth Report. V"\T..q~ic~q~: :g. 2.

mlY:(~~T~' ~ ~) li't~: I . during 1883-84. p. 1039. 7. JAINA LOGIC.a-naya-tattvalokalankara on which he himself wrote an elaborate commentary named Syadvadaratnakara:1. III.wn treatise on logic called PramaI. a Ananta-virya must have lived before the 14th century. 253: and Dr. (ParIk~a-rnukham sa~ikam.D. .. c.).198 INDIAN LOGro. KALY. 1 33.l. :sOm I lE~ f1f~ro~ifT 'SI'fiT~"rf~ ~I~~ mnrTSift14: II ' (RatnakaravatarikQ-~ippana. p. .). He was the author of the well-kno.ikya Nandi called Parik~a-mukha-pafijika or Prameya-ratnam aHi.lacandra was the author of Pramana-vartlka-1!ika which is a commentary on the Pramar. died in Samvat 1096 or A. CHAP.1~I~T~~~CJ'i:f. ANANTA-vlRYA (ABOUT 1039 A.~ Now Santi-~ena. XI.. Deva Suri. p.Q'l'E1"T: I liliW ~l'l?lir ililT~T~ f~ 'iftiit.D. DEVA SURl (1086-1169 A. He wrote the former for Santi-~e.a-vartika (probably of Dharmakirti who lived about 635 A. son of Vijaya.alled Vadipravara 01' the foremost of disputants t belonged to the Svetambara sect and was a pupil of Municandra Suri. for he is mpntioned by Madhavacarya in the chapter on Jaina darsana in the Sarvadarsana-samgraha. His contemporary Ananta-virya must. G. 34.D. p.. KalyaI. have flourished about that time. R.). 155). Bhandarkar's' Report on Sanskrit 1l.A~A CANDRA (ABOUT 1000 A.1SS. HIS LIFE.ifl~l({r-ilm~f ~~npiI-qfRT 1\ ~ U noticed in Peterson·s Fourth Report. therefore. supposed to be identical with Santi Suri. Ananta-virya was the Digambara author of a commentary on the Parik~amukha of MaI}.c~fiirff1'ii: 1\ 8: II Mal11dhiri Rijsekhara Suri's Paiijlki on Syadvadarratnakaravatarlk§:. It must have existed before 1350 A. MEDliEVAL SCHOOL. when JiUinacandra mentioned it in hIs Ratnakaravatarikatippana.. He totally vanquished the Digambara Kumudacandracarya in a dispute over the ~rcft\1 \14 INn -si'mit: ~f~~.D. and NaQamba. 129 . ~. 32. as also a commentary on Akalanka's Nyaya-vinisgaya called the Nyaya-vill1scaya-vrtti.D.D. Vol. -U~~~if' I I{lf.na at the request of Hirapa.. S Vide the Indian Antiquary.••.). Benares) 2 'it"m~. YaSovijaya grantham ala series.

vakacar. 1181.a or salvation of women [that is. his Gurvavali composed in Samvat 1466. 95. Klatt in hIS article on "HIstOrIcal Records of the Jams" m the IndIan AntIquary. holding that even women were capable of attaining nirva~a]. ~~fii'qf7i~~ -q'ti~sNiil' II !!:IS II ~{T~-. ~~i{00t~ ~~~~wUS~if: I (Gurvavali published m the Jaina YaSovijaya-grantbamaJa of Benares.1!R: ~~"fif~ 1\ ~ll'~~~ ~~~Pil~~fl~ I ~UlI)lll~fli: fitli: Munis1. m.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. 167). XI.. conquered the Digambaras in the council-room of King . a pupil of Deva Suri. who ~as the crest-gem of the pupils of the esteemed Municandra Suri and succeeded him in his pa Ha (sacred chair).f(4l'fl1lifi'fTfIl"'~T~f'Cl{: I ~qt~ii~itii fq~. 199 salvation of women [at the court of Jaya-sirhha-deva at Anahillapurap8Jttana in N. pp. Guzerat] and thereby practically stopped the entrance of the Digambaras into that town.~ composed in Sarhvat 1238 or A. 18-19). Vol.tm ~~~1! (Upade~amala:~ika.f~u~ln: -crt ~ f1rfifitfl{~ ~ 'i'1~~: ~: ~Wfif:q~.D. p 254) 2 Ratnaprabha SUrl observes:- ~~ ~~~~q. XXI.T8~1 ilIlft(imim iii crrfi{Qfflql~ II (Prabha.S~ ~rcif ~"lft{if I .D. writes ' H Lord Sri Deva Bud. account:In ~1i1'R ~~~ !'~~iflil'irr~ 1\ !.rT~if~u-oftffl' ". Sept 1882. LOGIC-DEVA SURI. The dispute I took place in Saluvat 1181 or 1124 A. p..1ndara SUrI. v.." ~~nrM'f'fl-.. gIves a slmilar i1.r \lI"~qlS\lqi[ ~~iIT: " ~~ 1$ ~'~~~~TAA .l~i~T ti~ ~ ~~ i1~ ~q~f~: I ~lAf~ltf1ni:f~i{-ri ~cr ii11in' fCffc{ii ~ II !!:I't • ::::.~Hfc{~'ifT­ ~~~~fiI~ifit\fJ(Itit I 'fl~I~~ '~i(eq"lft{a(1IJf~.q'€fiil~3CiN~T i{ifliiPli~T ir'f'l'll' ~co:q 'ii. Ratnaprabha Suri. in his UpadesamaHi~ika. notIced by Peterson in his Third Report.J aya-sirnha Deva and raised a pillar of victory by maintaining the nirvaJ}.':. quoted by Dr.

Cl tiaqqi!i!'.'flIfliltlq(f" ~~illl \. argumentation and infedence (smara'l}a-pratyabhij nana-tarkanumana-svarupa-n irrjaya) . p 254:). According to some authorities Deva Suri was bom in Samvat 1134 or 1077 A. f'l{N4C(f8:l.. I shall pass over the common points. Sept.D. Iv. recognition. The intercourse beknowledge. DEVA SURl'S PramaQ. XI.( 1) Determination of the nature of valid Subjects of the Pramlina.aya). also Klatt. mentioning only its special features. viz. Ant. ~ Th~ Pl.. As this work is written on the same plan as MaI]. Historical Records of the Jams» m the Indian AntIquary. vv. (3) determination of the nature of recollection.r ~'flIT ll:q:J1tt:st I ~~~1'i~ qi( ~~~q ~: I ~~ qi('I!iIT~ m~ l2iil~ I v . Klatt in his article on (Prabhavakaca.200 INDIAN LOGIC. attained the rank of Sud in 1174 Sarhvat or 1117 A.'amaQ. tween the sense-organs and ~he objects of 1 2 Vide Peterson's Fourth Report. The Pramal}. 1882. (7) determination of the nature of one-sided knowledge (nayatma8varitpa-nirrjaya). p.D.JAINA LOGIC. " seq.~?f ~~: II .·naya-tattvalokalankara. p. (2) naya-tattvaloklilanklira. and established an image of Neminatha at Arasana. (6) determination of the consequences and fallacies of knowledge (phala-prama'f}a-8varitpadyabhasa-nirrj-aya). ClIAP.~Ttfif~ tilifi m~ ~­ ~t ~ t 15t. Vo1. 1 He was born in Sarilvat 1143 or 1086 A. Ind. quoted by Dr. .. Pramarja or valid knowledge is defined here as the knowledge which ascertains the nature of itself Nature of right or valid as well as other things...s. In Sarilvat 1204 or 1147 A.D. In. XXI. 'P. raised a bimba at Phalavardhigrama.. 287 . and ascended to heaven in Sarhvat 1226 or 1169 A.j i5i.1l 35.D.. MEDlLEVAL SCHOOL.a-naya. Deva Suri founded a caitya..a-naya-tattvalokalankara Pramar)a-right knowledge.ikya Nandi's Parik~amukha-si1tra or Akalanka's Nyaya-viniscaya as well as Siddhasena Divakara's Nyayavatara. and (8) determination of the right procedure of a disputant and his opponent (vadi-prativadi-nyaya-nir'l}aya).D.. (5) determination of the nature of objects of knowledge (viE!ayawsvaritparnirfJ. determination of the nature of perception (pratyak~a-svarupa-nir'l}aya)..r.-tattvAlokiilankara has been prlllted and pUblished in Benares lD the Jaina Yadovijaya series. XI.knowledge (pramarja-svarupa-nirrjaya). 8 consists of eight chapters (paricchedas). (4) determination of the nature of valid knowledge derived from verbal testimony or scripture (agamakhya-prama'Y)a-svarupa-nir~aya). 254.

R. as given here is taken from Col. It is two-fold: (1) vikala (defective) including avadhi-jnanf! (limited knowledge). (3) argumentation (tarka). i. (3) avaya. one freed from all faults or obstructions. footnote.a) .a (valid knowledge).e. e g. LOGIC-DEVA SURl. ( 4) inference (anumana). it cannot ascertain its own nature. published by the Asiatic Soclety of Benga. i. distinguishing the type whether it be. Indirect knowledge (parok~a) is of five kinds: viz..ra Dr. 1 The eXPlanation of (l/vagraha. One who possesses that perfect transcendental knowledge is called an arhat. 190. perfect. collection (smarafJ. for 1883-84.e.l. Prama?J.: (1) avagraha. for though it can ascertain the nature of obj€ 'cts outside itself.e. since it has no consciousness. III. . outside the senses). p. (2) doubt (samsaya)-such as: is this a post or a man ~ and (3) uncertainty (anadhyavasa. 1 viz.>. horse or man. and (4) dharan. inquiring.fJ. (2) recognition {pratyIndire()t knowledge.. DIrect knowledge.. knowledge of special objects which.the laying bare of the secrets of the heart.. It'must also be defbite in character.a must certainly be knowledge. vol. as the portion related to prama~a in the Jaina chapter of Am-iMAkbari very . 93. perception is of two kinds: practical (samvyavaharika) and transcendental (pa1'amarthika) .JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. are not differentiated. e. Each of these passes through four stages. of his Report on Sanskrit 11. near or remote. but not discerning the characteristics. which is the unobstructed intuition of the entire aspects of a thing.e. for it is opposed to superimposition (samaropa). derived from the words of a reliable person or scripture (agama). 201 sense is not praman. (5) verbal testimony or the knowledge . definite knowledge of another's thoughts and .{88.ya) consisting in a mere cogitation in the mind as to what the thing might be. arriving at a correct identification of the above. The transcendental direct knowledge (paramarthika) is that which comes exclusively from the illumination of the soul and is profitable to emancipation.) (1) re. i. for it is capable of choosing what is desirable and rejecting what is undesirable.g. The practical direct knowledge again is subdivided as that which arises through the sense-organs (indriya-nibandhana) and that which does not arise through the sense-organs (anindriya-nibandhana) but through the mind (mana8). however. O. perception) and (2) indirect (parok~a. recollecting the thing particularised and keeping it in mind. etc. and mana~-paryaya) i.Mlanl::a. whence came the man and from what country came the horse. Bhandar· kal'a's explanatIOn of these terms given on p. and (2) sakala. abkijnana). Jarrett's translation of the Ain-i-Akbarl. is. (2) iha. The direct knowledge or Perception.. different. Pramii/f)a (valid knowledge) is of two kinds: (1) direct (pratyak~a.closely resembles that in the Prarniirp:rnaya-tactval. Superimposition is of three kinds: (1) inversion (viparyaya)-sui"'h as looking upon a pearl-oyster as a piece of silver.

la-naya-tattvalokalankara.racteristics of hetu as follows:- ~ S'iff'i1~ ~~~~ ... Here the hill is an integral part of the inference. MEDIEVAL SCEOOL j JAINA LOGIC. According to some. and (2) parartha.q~ t ~~ ~lf ~"lt1{ 1 -.. IlL Inference is of two kinds: (1) 8vartha. Why then should ample.luiiJ?a-uaya--tattvalokii. and in it may be found the necessary connection beUselessness of the ex.example forming the external inseparable connection (bahirvyapti) is useless. since the mind is liable to 'be confused when the unessential is brought across its track. Chap. \lI .vyapti). We must look to logical neatness. fire and smoke are found together there: but it is not an essential part of the inference. Chap.202 INDIAN LOGIC. Chap. and so for the purpose in hand the connection which it proves may be described as the external inseparable connection.2. w. as the connection or absence of connection betw~eD the middle smd the major terms can be shown by internal inseparable connection (aniar. III). CHAP. cannot but admit the necessity of using the minor term (pak~a) in an inference. because it is smoky (middle term») as a kitchen (example). $ ~. III).tween fire and smoke. the ..1'1i~-.lankara.ls-naya--tattvalok§lailkiira. III) . ~: . 11 ~~'Il1i'nfi{ I ~tl1TQ~H~ ~1il'Cff?{ Ii t \ it (Pramiir.. lfl . for the sake of others.rrtl'ij" W~~ fifl(\fllf: ~~ \I ~ ~ It II (Pramsr. and the economy of mental labour . is to be rejected as involving fallacies. H eiu Inference (reason or the middle term) is defined as that which cannot happen except in connection with the major term.fl1tt{ i2 f4(flni . Chapter II). we burden our inference with an example from without ~ The kitchen certainly SllOWS the same connection. The definition that the hetu (middle term) is that which possesses three characteristics.11f.m ~itci fiIf~ (Nyayabmdu. Thls is an attack on Dharmakirtl and other Buddhist loglClEtns who define the three cha.ITI:n "flT: ~~~ii: i(~Tff1tit 'l:Cl trf~TRqfCf"it ~'l t1 ~'L (Pra. s For instance : The hill (minor term) is fiery (major term). if 'q''flr'5P. J Those who maintain the threefold characteristic or division of the hetu (reason or middle term). for one's own self. . The application (upa'Ytaya) and conclusion (nigamana) as 1 fir~rI! ~ \tT~~~~~~N:.

{Prama!}a-naya--tq.:i<R1\ti <t:. altogether losing sight of its specific properties. (2) Hetu-prayoga (use of the mIddle termi-'because it is smoky (3) Dr~~anta (example)-whatever is fiery is smoky. etc.rTt:<7!~~'3R~f':r ~rfef II ~~ I " ~ . (2) Samgrah1i. a. as 'when we say a bamboo is real so far as it is a tree. III) . (3) Vyavah'iirabhasa (the fallacy of the practical)-e g. naya (sevenfold paralogism). bhava) .ttvalokalarudil'a" Chap. quality.sabhj~~}. but real (paramarthtka)... in estimat . Fallacies of N aya.abltasa) are enumerated thus :(1) Naigamabhaaa (the fallacy of the naigama)-e. its "existence') (generic property) and its "consciousness" (specific property)..! A vaya~la or parts of an inferenoe or Parts of a sy Uoglsm syllogism are therefore stated to be the following : (1) Palqa~prayoqa (use of the minor term. Non-existenoe (abhava or anupaZabdhi) is subdivided as (1) Non-exlStence.g.().!. (5) N igamana (conclusion)-therefore thjs hill is fiery. as a kitchen.·:. (4) Upanaya (application)-this hill is smoky.:l?!tuat. (3) mutual (itaretara . 1!~ 11' f N ing a soul we make a distinction between a. the fallacies of it (na. 1 ifi. and (4) absolute (atyantabhava).~~ ~~o. antecedent (pragabhava). The results of knowledge and the practical use made of them are stated to be not illusory (~uJ. Under verbal testimony (Le.. (2) subsequent ~·. LOGIC-DEVA SUR!. Various kinds of abhiisa or fallacy are also enumerated.ion. but it has no specific properties.. otherwise called proposit. The mediate and immediate results of valid knowledge (pra1na~a) have been clearly laid down.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. agama) as also under the method of one-sided interpretation (naya) . the Carvaka philosophy which makes a wrong distincbion of substance. I Under naya (the method of comprehending a thing from particular points of view). (4) 1Jjusutrlibhasa (the fallacy of the straight or immediate)-a. prat2:jfiii)-the hill is fiery. but these together with the example are to be employed to convinoe men of small intellect. 203 parts of the sylbgism are also useless.8 the Tathagata philosophy which altogether denies the reality of bhings..mvrti).mes 0 • aya. there is given an elaborate exposition of the Saptabhangi.bhasa (the fallacy of the collective)-occurs when we call a thing real if it possesses the generic property alone.'.

having got rid of the bondage of it~ karma (act-fruits). authority ~ forbearance and impa. Sakra.rtiality. in occasionally interrupting them for setting forth: some established conclusions. (1) the disputant (vadi).sa (the fallacy of the such-like)-occurs when a thing is discarded simply because it does not. but go on attaching one and the same meaning to a word in aU the three cases. and' possess genius. because he is not at present thinking. viz. present and future. at the moment. JAINA LOGIC. and in. if we now use the word" kratu" (sacrifice) in the sense o! "strength" which it signified a thousand years ago (6) Samabh"irui!habhaQa (the faHacy of the subtle)-occurs. the other side by means of proof. The disputant or the person who opens the discussion may be eager either to gain a victory or to ascertain a truth. attaJflS emancipation. his opponent with reference to the particular subject of discussion.sa (the verbal fallacy)-occurs when we reoognize the distinction of times into past. (4) the president (8abhapati). w~n we inMrpret synonymous words such as Indra.. signifying altogether different things. (2) the opponent R 1 s f D b te (prativaai). There are four constituents of a council of discussion. The Method of Debate. The last chapter expounds the method of debate. The President must be endowed with wisdom. (?) the members (sahkya) . possess the properties implied by the name. Rarna is not a man (a thinking animal). is of the same size as its body. in estimating the merits and demerits of their arguments and counter-arguments. The duty of the disputant and his opponent consists in establishing his own side and opposing.g.g. The Soul-atma. e. e. The truth may be sought either for one's own self as a disciple seeks it. His duty consists in judging the speeches of the . MEDllEVAL SCHOOL. The members must be acoeptable to both the parties in respect of the skill in grasping their dogmas. and ue 0 ea. (5) Sabdabho. CRAP. and an embodiment of consciousness. Discussion (Vada) consists in assertion and counter-assertion for the establishment of a certain proposition by rejecting its opposite. The same remarks apply to the opponent or respondent. In. etc. as far as possible.204 INDIAN LOGIC. In every person there is a separate sou] vhich. or for others as a teacher seeks it. The soul (iitma) which is the doer and enjoyer. (7) Evambnifltabha. Their duties oonsist in stating the assertions and replies of the disputant anp. Purandara. patience and impartiality. declaring the result of the discussion. they must have a good memory" be very learned.

JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. and not in the form of a prakara~~a (expository treatise). He was the author of a large number of works such as Kavyanusasana-vrtti.).l Utpid.tR-mimamsa.'l. LOGIO-HEMAOANDRA SURI.(f!5'lil~ qr ltPPril"'ftr . is written in the Sutra or aphoristic style. Anekarthasamgraha.TQ~~ I ~ (Quoted in Pe'Lef$oniS Fifth Report.m'ftiTft(~i{ -sr~" f~ ~t f~llr ~lIiIIiIT~r"'s~~r it~ Cf1'ef: I f\T1r if"q\~f~~rfii ~«I~T~ri{N~i{ifif fR(r~1i:~fcl li~"'it­ 'l-q{~ri: 't{"~: W:f~~~~«l~nW I t.ry 01. eto. 8S also in preventing quarrels. 82. 209). etc. Dvasraya-maha-kit vya.li or Namamala. HEMAOANDRA SURr.D..s was born in Sarhvat 1145 or 1088 A. Peterson's Fourth Report.. (Oandrasena's co~~nte. and p..D.fifT ~ ~"'T~Wiiflilil) ~fctt. Tri~a~tisalakapuru~a-oaritra (a part of whioh is called Mahaviracaritra and the appendix called Parisi~taparva).f~ if1ir .*.. He was also the author of a most important work on logro oalled Pl'ama:r. pp 147148. p. In the event of the parties being desirous of victory alone. but If they are eager to asoertain the truth alone. p cxh. This work..\tuse~a. Chandonusasanavrtti. a mllnuscript of which is notioed in Peterson's Third Report. He was a spiritual brother of Pradyumna Suri. Hemacandra in the first chapter of the commentary says:- ". Yogasastra.. 'i f'i~~*ifir~ ~ij~l':f\flf: • . 36. among them. (1088-1172 A.148). ~~p~~tI(fiffil: "SJ1!qftsr~· ~~~. NighaI. Hemacandra fSllri I (surnamed Kalikala-sarvajiia) .D. and also Peterson's lecture on the story of Hema Oandra published in the Bombay Gazette.fi. In explainmg why the PramaI}a-mimiimsa was written in the form of aphorisms.f'\l~ ~if{i. p. He was a contemporary of King J aya Sirilha and is said to have been the preoeptor of Maharaja Kumara Pala of Guzerat about Samvat 1199-1229. was a pupil of Devacandra or the Vajrasakha. Abhidhana-cintamaI. on which he himself wrote a commentary. see Buhler's·' Ueber dasLebens des JainaMonohes Hemacandra".asi4dhipr&k8l"a~a. took the vow (vrata) in 1150 Sarilvat or 1093 A. they may oontinue the discussion so long as the truth is not ascertained and so long as they retain their vigour.~ 1EI" ~~?{~"Rii£i{Nl. attained the rank of Sud in 1166 Sarhvat 1 For details about Hemacalldta.i11Ifu\{1irf~«':{~ I 'lfiW 'STiIT'Q{~m • • ~ 'ififl:ftf. they ~ay conti?ue the discussion with vigour as long as the members wIsh. 1895 Il A manuscript of the Pramlina-mimamsii with a commentary by the author himself has been noticed by Peterson in his Fifth Report on Sanskrit }ISS. which is divided into five chapters. August 29. 205 parties and the members. born at Dhandhuka in Ahmedabad.

L.ra-viv:rtl 'l. 1(8) are inchned to Identuy Slddha·vyakhyanaka with Siddharsi who lIved ill 8amvat 962 or 905 A.vas a great logician... p. There 18 another commentary on the Nyayavatflra hy Harlbhadra 8Url. vide Peterson 3..:f(~i!"l1f~~fij"fTS41~ 11 t n by Tilakacarya. xvi.)1{tS'-4 flii\ll~ iiffAlim: I W1ii ~~f"~: \i'ef.umagacoha:t in Samvat 1159 or 1102 A.Jayasirhha Suri and preceptor of Dharmagho~a.l3 ~if~ fu: (Da~avaikalikapika m ~ ~ ~Tmnrl:fi<tt 'TE1Il:. 1883-84. and W~~. l'emam an open questIOn In the colophon of the Nyayiivat1ira-vivrti It ls'stated that It was the work of Slddhasena·:Qlviikal'a-vyakhyanaka or SImply Slddha-vyakhya. has been published in Bhavanagara under the editorship of Dr.Siddhasena Divakara.es Candraprabha SUrl is thus mentIOned : "Sf~ ~ili. The Prameya-ratna-ko~a. Vol XI.206 INDIAN LOGIC) MEDlJEVAI.. cxxix}.ns Dharmottara. Ill. and ascended to hE'aven (died) in 1229 Sarhvat or 1172 A. b The Nyayavatara~vjv:rti is an excellent commentary on the Nyayavat&. XXII.D). t. 4 The manuscrIpt of Nyayavatara-viv:rtl. 1882. Sept.. In one of its openmg ver. 8uali of Italy.rttl ill Petecion's Third Report. 'l'he authorship must.. CHAP.D. S For Candraprabha Sun see also Peterson's Fourth Report. p.. otherwise caned Samyaktva-prakarar. J or 1109 A... for the present.naka whiCh was evidently a snrname. p.fHf'Vf~ ~~hn~fW I ~Tl-'§q'l 'S1~1iJh11f11ltl!1l1 ~if ?f~r II ~~. "" '" Nlflli{ ~~~ ~~'2l~N: n ~ II I "Wif(~"'i S~~~~5l~f~m~I."{'T7Cf<ijT'C!1rr~I~PC: ~'EI""~l'I..Tii 'ICl'Tiif'l1(~iiTitii'1 (quoted from Ratnapl'abha Sud's Upadesami.ta.D. p.h. who founded the Purr. ..\la-v~esa-"'·.JAINA LOGIC.1: if"ft i. In it mention is made of the Buddhist logicia.{ ~~finlT ~t1i'i'l~W I iJ~"~ ~~s"~fi111'1i:i(f \1~T' 0 (Prabhavakacar. p. Bombay. was obtamed from Bhavanagar. Candraprabha Suri (born in Guzerat). App.. 147. 851 seq.hrough Munis DharmaviJaya and Indravljaya In the Nyaya-vata. p.q~~rif~~ll1ffl c:..tsel£ there is no mentlOn of Candraprabha Sud. 254). . known to Qunaratna.ra of.. p. . xxvii.l1i~'l~ ~: ~-qj' 'Sfrif ir~r~ $ "I!:llll:.) ~t . v. He S was the author of Darsanasuddhi. Ant. and for the Nyayavatara-VlYrtl ?lide Peterson 3.D. 91.. p. Lowever. noticed in Petersonts Fifth Report. quoted by Klatt"m Ind. and in debate appeared as a lion before the opponents who resembled elephants. 4 He . SCHOOL. Bhandarkar' s Report. For Darsana-suddhi..D. 65) ~~~ ~ ~ ?fTi{Tml?l'~iif"6j'ilf~~ ~ftif~ ~~ ~ ~T~tiTiJITi{ ~f\1~~-4T~~n\1iVll. Arca~a ~ and others. Elsewhere I have seen it stated that it was the work of that author. whlCh I consulted.l 37 CANDRAPRABHA SURl (1102A... of Prameyaratnakolila and possibly also of Nyayavatara-vIVr t1 . was a pupil of .. I 2 For the orlgm of the Purmmagaccha see Dr R G. {as IS evident Irom Peterson's Fourth Reporr.~llft 6 ~ " . Munis DharmaviJaya and Indravljaya relying on the hne ii11. 1IIIi~ ~ if ~q~~it'ff(1 WflfT\TllTli'Ti:i1a.

was a great teacher of logic. Vt "4ilift3~f.. 207 there is also a criticism of the views of Saugata. Carvaka. For further particulars of Ananda Surl and Amru:acandra Suri see Peterson 4. notwed by Peterson in h1S Tlurd Report.i(lfi(­ II ~sfq fir~~~~ 6l. As Mal}ikyacandra flourished about 1219 A.<:Cf'. p. Vaise~lk31~ Sarilkhya.M:amkyaCfui.abhak~a Ak:~apada.ikyacandra. notIced i-d. II 'lliFiif.: "-f:J::'~svami and preceptor or Sagarendu (Sagaracandra) Muni (alive in Sarhvat 1200 or 1143 A. Sagarendu MUlli's pupil. p. SaRI.lxxi. '2 For Nemicandra.. in his Dharm~bhyudaye. . pp.). Saud dhodani. Bauddha.D. his preceptor's preceptor Nemicandra 2 must have lived about 1150 A. and were nicknamed respectively Vylighra-sisulca (Tigercub) and Simha-sisuka (Lion-cub) 4 They 5 were the twin pupils and suc1Sf~fltCti~~f~lQCNf'ij~"'miTs~qfti ~i\c(~. ANANDA SUR! AND AMARACANDRA.D. These two.).JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. Brahama-vadi. overcame their elephant-like opponents in dispute. who was the successor of Haribhadra Siid through Vljaya£lena. 1) See Dr. born in Guzerat. 38.q~iiT: ~if5ffir ~ff!~~tf: I The same verse is quoted almost verbatim in the KEivya-prakiisa-sari:lketa bv . were great logicians who.iJT~1itftlliim'I:J~r. see also Petifll'SOn 4.:rrn f~t~. in his Parsvanathacaritra written in Samvat 1276 or 1219 A.D. vii. Mimamsaka.. NICKNAMED TIGER-CUB AND LION-CUB (1093-1135 AD. 321. Nemicandra was styled a Kav~ d 39. notIced m Person 3.i:a'irf. as mentioned by MaQ. etc. SUrl. n g II p. Peterson 3. Naiyay:ika.D. writes:- fir:lir~n~iU~f1r ~~~ m~l1ii~: ~ 'lfitlt\i~.'i~ ~ . R G.-mahaka. born m Guzerat. 16-19.(: I liI'~~ ~tm trTtm'Vlf- ~. 122 '* Udayaprabha Sud.rlra Sfui.. LOGIC-ANANDA SURI. 1883-84. I He was a pupi. H ~ ~l. Bhandarkar's Report.r~ 6 ~'tft': m~): .D.{7.iT trfiTq1t~ mi rift': II 't ( (Partivanatha caritra. Nemicandl'a.i :. KaIJ. p.vya. who combated the views of the Hind~ ~~iks~::::er KaI}ada. NEMICANDRA KAVI (ABOUT 1150 A.:mw [~1I'lic:r] rn'liJ: ~TS'CR:: ~S~(!Ii!I~f. even in their boyhood.n ~~lif ~T ~ ronw.). p 160).

D. OHA. must therefore have flourished about 1120 A. Now the dharmaputra of Yakini is generally held to be a sur~ name of the first Haribhadra Surl whose disciples were Hamsa and Paramahamsa. Vicirsmrtar-samgraha. In the concluding lines of the DaAavaikiilike. In the Gacchotpatti-prakara. and Dharmakirti> whose logical doctrines have been referred to in the l. 24-25.D.l. As Siddharaja. e..tna's commentary on that work (dated about 1407 A.11 It(~~ii:~(t r.D.D . He must have been an eminent logician if we suppose him to be the author' of the *?a4darsana. the 'author of .D. Haribhadra Sud I. the Nyaya-prav9saka-sutra and the Nyayavatira-vrtti.. . There are strong grounds for supposing that the ~aq.sri.ika. pp.. is found in the opemng sentences of Gunal'a. composed in Sathvat 1405 or 1348 A. who was called" KalikalaGautama "3.i under Sirhha vya."~T~l''1fif "iiiQfit. (that is.. by Udaya.). as it refers in the 1 ti"l"l! ~~ f'l!f1ifi. JAINA LOGIC.Jac. MEDllEVAL SCHOOL. Kharataragaccha-pattlvali.darSana-samuccaya was not the work of the first Harihhadra Suri. Uif ~: II Ii n (Dharmiibhyudaya-mahlikavya. III. p. ~ ~ . One _died 1 in Samvat 535 or 478 A..~T ~lfi1W~~.. q'T ~f~'1~ft~"ffftmtt. A similar description of Hal'ibhadra. is stated to have flourished in Samvat 535 01' 478 A. was itself composed about 533 A.1}8. Now the Nyiylvatar~ which is alleged to have been commented on by Haribhadra SUrl I.. These facts prove that Hatibhadra. The CaturYlmSalil-prabandhe. 3 "f~ ~?iiITmfi'(fe. it is stated the. makes a lIke reference to Haribhadra. cessors of Mahendra Suri in the Nagendragaccha.. ~ mT<iijl'lf"'li!'fibf. Giithii-s~ha. ascended the throne in Samvat 1150 or 1093 A..208 INDIAN LOGIO. and were succeeded by Haribhadra SUrl. the author of Nyiiysvatara-vrtti. pp...a. dharmaputra of YClkini. TapagacchapaHiivali.i The second Haribhadra Surl.-3_-. etc.l'.D. they must have flourished at the beginning of the 12th century A.prabha Sari noticed in Peterson 3.-niryukti-pika.11 Klatt refers to BUhler's Sukrtasathkirtana. HARIBHADRA SURI (ABOUT 1120 A.g is evident from Prabhiicandra Sud's Prabhavaka-caritl"a darted about 1277 A.rEi~ ~~ f~frC1§i II " 0 Il II ". the author of l.P. Vicara-sara-prakaraI].D It is probably these two logicians who are referred to by the Hindu logician Gangesa Upadhyaya in his Tattva-cintamaJ.Jadda. 18).).nftrff~it ~::. see Peterson 4. ________ ___ III __ "i! ~ ~ 1!~ . lived about 650 A.lika-niryuktl~ika. cxxxix. 40.ghri-lak~af)a of Vyapti. AppendIx I. the Dasava.-samuocaya.D. •~"I~. «. (Gacchotpat&l-prakirQaka quoted in the Giithasiihasri noticed in Peterson 3.).D.D.t the author of that work was one Haribhadra Sud who was a. We find mention of at least two Svetambara Jaina authors bearing the name Haribhadra Suri.. p.t~~'if1f ~. from whom they received their nicknames. after 478 A. 284) . ex!.D. ___ "I 1"1.idaraana-samuccaya. while the other was a pupil of Ananda Suri and Amaracandra Suri of the Nagendragaccha who lived about 1093-1135 A. ___ _. by RajaAekhara Sari.ro: I irt ' 'If.D.D .I'l§anasamuccaya.1 "'''''' ..

It IS inexplicable why Vacaspatl MISra and Udayanacarya dId not refer to such an excellent compendium of IndIan philosophy as the Saddar~aY}a S8. according to them. PI'.hii. 91. the ~a<tdarSana-sanLUccaya. thel'Afore. (3) Samkhya. Samvat or H54: A. III. 131. 134. writes to me that " Haribhadra uses the word viraha in the Samaraweaka. Haribhadrl1 Surl is often descrIbed 3 as having protected the Dr Jacobl in hIs letter. etc. 192. 116. Bhartrh.5.ya.. 1." According to Dr. U6. . Sept. p.rl'!UC~ayfi If it existed as early as the 9th or 10th century A D.nekiinta-Jaya-patiikli. . 2 Anekinta. which IS aUuded to by Siddharsl who wrote in 905 A. 35. The six systems ($agdarsana) treatE"d by him are (I) Bauddha. 159~ 170.. also 'Peterson 3. (4) Jaina. p. p.bhi or Q'u.. I beheve.-inllCarita by ). wh!le the Samar<11c<takahii and other treatises might be the wbrks of the first Haribhadra.ika it attributed to Haribhadra SUrl. ] 92: pp. Al::. Samanta Bhadra. 127. we shaH not be far wrong if we place Hari Bhadra early in 12th century A. p. Dr . yet It 1'3 far from bemg (·onclush. Vol. pp.D..ti"iitll~~ I ~1[STlfi~1(aJl~)tlrn iiTIN( II '( \I Am81'8S. with Prof Lemnann.76. etc.>. 38. In the Anekanta-jaya-pataka-t. to have boon wrongly referred to the Samvat era mqteoo of the Vala.j8ya-patakii-~lka. 3S.ga.. p. 117). 19.. Nyayavl'ltara-vrtti.Jacobi's theory removes many of our dlfficultlo. "iN . 'Yft'V ifTft." "whose date. 247. 38).D. dated the 21st October 1907.! and o'lihers who flourished long after the 5th century A. This verse refers without doubt to the definition of Pratyak~a and Anumaoo given by Dharmakirti who lIved about 650 A. Dharmakirti. there are passages quoted from the works of Diona or Digna. I am t!:ereiore m':li. Mallavadm and Subha Gupt. 1882. p. pp. ~~~r~~T~~HilIl 8 Klat. chapter on Bauddhn-dal'§ana. . edited by Dr. "1£ Suab).t in hIS" Pattavali or the Kharatal'agaccha H in the Ind.D. and (6) Jaiminiya.D.ari. JacobI.D. 19. qi\fi/\lTiIfl ~'il'ffili I " fiq'$qrftlfYifT ftitnnif iI'~~fp~ I (eaddar~ana-samuccaya.{~if ~~ lij1fIWl I (. XI. p. (Anekinta-JaYI1-patiika. . Dharma Pala. who died in 535 Gupta. 150. he observes '-These are" unanimously ascribed to the first Harlbhadra.o: '4ftffi ~~ it ir.. or 478 A.nec to behave that Harlbhadra Sud II was the author of the ~addarsana·samucca.JAINA WRITERS ON SYSTEM. chap. LOGIC-HARIBHADRA SURL 209 chapter on the Bauddhadarsana to the views of such authors as Dignaga. 117..D. (2) Naiyayika..3. etc.a. 120. Dharmakirti. :3.pta errJ" whICh commenced m 319 A.D. as the Jainn authors very seldom used the GupLa era Moreover. wet'E\ wrItten by the first Haribhadra RUft. Ant.Iuniratna Sud noticed in Peterson 3. (5) Vaise~ika. 1 ~ $f.D " Regarding the dates of the i>acldar!1lana·samuccaya. p 35.79. p. Sun ' But I must confess that the modern Jama Panditas such' as Munis Dharmavijaya and Indravljaya firmly beHeve that the author of all theRe works was the first Haribhadra SUrl who. As the last mentioned two writers lived respectively in the 9th century and the lIth century A. flourished In 585 Vlkrarua Sathvat. Siddhasena Divakara..

named Hamsa and Paramahamsa. Two of his pupils. D.). . s 42. pp.400 works.2' He assisted Amradeva Siifi in Sa. p. word of the Arhats like a mother by his 1..mvat 1190 or 1133 A. 2 ~~h:li~tR: ~~ri~.i-ko~a of Nemicandra.D.a and was chaplain t. But there will be no inconsistency if we suppose him to be the second Haribhadra Suri. whose pupils were killed in Tibet.nd Peterson's Third Report.D. was the first author of that name.~ r. 81). for the religious intercourse between India and Tibet was more frequent in the 12th century A D. S Peterson's Fourth Pal't. Vide" Jainistic Notices" by Professor N. p. f) Vide PetersonSs Fourth Re ort. 'Xxvii-xxviii. MEDL'EVAL SCHOOL. series. lxxvii. a work on Logic called the Nyaya pravesa-1ti ppana. JAINA LOGlC. Parsvadeva was the author of a commentary on Nyayapravesa. CHAP. His Pradesavya. than in the 5th century) when Tibet had scarcely emerged into the ken of history.ciple of Hema Candra Suri of the Har~apuriya gaccha. The sorrow -caused by the death of these two pupils is said to have been symbolised in the word viraha. 35. called NyayapravesapauJika. He is said to have used the word m:rana (separation or sorrow) as his mark in the last verse of each of his works He was by birth a Brahmaq.' a dis. SRtCANDRA 1137-1165 A.210 INDIAN LOGIC. HI. Mironow published as a Bul· letin of the Imperial Academy (tf Sciences. . p. and to have been slain in the Bhota country (Tibet) by the fanatical Buddhists whom they sought to convert. in writing his commentary on the Akhyana-ma1). 1 Vide Introduction to Saddar4ana-samuccaya published in the Chowkhamba.i He was instructed in the . a.1Ii".ilqffi "«Ct ~1l{Rt I VflTErllTiht~fft 1T~ft \PtT~ )fi~ ~mrfq N 'qf~ihr~ 1\ (Quoted in Peterson's First Report. Benares. St. 1911.D. a super-commentary on the Nyaya-pravesa-vrtti of Haribhadra Suri.o king Jitari whose capital was Chittore near the Citraktita hill.D. wrote about 1137 A. Petersbourg.khya-~ippanaka5 on the Avasyaka ·Sutr~ appeared in Samvat 1222 or 1165 A.t. PXRSVADEVA GA~I (1133 AD). It is generally supposed that Haribhadra SUrl. (ABOUT Candra or rather Sri Candra. 41. are said to have left him as missionaries of the Jaina faith.Jaina do~trine by Jinabhata.

Dharmaklrti.q'l-. Mlrono. ~T ~1fU ~ .ava-caritl'a).D. In this work there R. in the Bt'uares Jaina Ya!§OY1).. Devabhadra..ren~ll~~itcr ~Rf~~1fffi'fu i ~Ti(J{'q~ltit1i ~fif~m ~~W tffiff\f: \I (Colophon of Sa!ika Utpa:da-blddhipr~tkarat..1i in which are quoted the views of the Buddhist logicians Arcat.vn's Thn'd /) "Sffllit ~ l&it~ 'if Ifllffiif't Iffii&:f~~. liv.atarika has been printed and ptibh:::hec!..tt'J. p.tQ'iil{ II (Prasash of panq.lfiji~~~ 1ij'i!iii 'ifr~<! I ?f1lf f~ 'fril'~:-1.. being the author of a light commentary (laghu-fika) on the Pramal}a-naya. 2 w~s~du«w~~r.JAI~A WRITERS ON SYSTEM:..?ya -:eries.f I In Report.D..imsti(' NotICes by Professor N. quotes Jiiana-sri llbtra thus ' - 3 ~ . 44. Ratnapl'abha Suri.n:t I fiI~ 1f1'fJ"''Effij~~~\1~if u ~N. I Tt~de" Devabha. CANDR. who seems to have been a pupil of Pradyumna Sfni. i-.'i.. i1t-1( ~'ff<. -'fir fitqj .. 43. a work called Utpada-siddhl-prakarat. LOGIC-RATNAPRABHA SORI.D:~ 45. in his ~yiyiyatira-~lppana. RA'INAPRABHA SURl (1181 A.v. A part of t. was the author of a iogical treatise entitled the Nyaya· vatara-~ippana.he SyS'dvada-l'l1tnike.ta with a commentary on the same in Sanskrit in Sarhvat 1207 or 1150 A. 99). 1911. Jfianasri MH!ra 3 and others.re quotations from Vindhyavasin. was a logician of repute. He lived about ll50 A.. who belonged to the Svetambara sect.t Ji .).:.ij"f'r l(. . ':I:1i' . \.D.-ratnakaravatarika...a (q.. 211 DEV ABHADRA (ABOUT 1150 A.).tattvalokalanki1ra called Byadvada.D. a super-commentary on the Nyayavatara-viv:rti.la quoted ~~ ~1lf.~ifi( ~ fis~N fiJ. Devabhadra.m~ttT II (Syadvida=l'atniikativatarika. 209). Muni Dharmavijaya's MSS p. St.. with the assistance of N emicandra.v published as a Bulletm of the Imperlal Academy of Sciences. .-r" ~".. Viae also Peterson's Fourth Report. wrote.7~.l'llfr:.)... p. D. Petersboul'g.).:r~ ~f~rai ~'\i( it"itit. PI. ENA S ORI (ABOUT 1150 A.) and Dharmottara (q. Candrasena.. Dharmottara.1 \I:' ml " ' .'i. I a disciple of both Hemacandra Suri and Sri Canrlra. .dra anrl his Nyiiyavata:ra'~lppana" m the Ja. .v.ri.r: f!.~ef ~iT~.

he wrote another work caned Upadesamalav:rtti 1 to p]ease Bhadresvara Sud and in . vide Peterson 4. tn. 2 46.a belonged to the Nagendra Gaccha of the Svetambara sect.D..ail~N~: i wf~ ~aa~fi4fiiill("l~ ~~re Il \ II (Syadvadamafijari. the brother of Bhadresvara. MALLI~EJS. printed in the Bena. and criticises Ak~apada's theories of Prama'lja.).:.D. and Fifth Report xxvi. etc. At the close of his work Malli§leQa describes himself as a pupil of U dayaprabha Suri and as having composed the work in Saka 1214 or A. Vedanta.:f".c:·n::. ~S' !:-2a2. etc" have also been his favourite subjects of attack. MEDIlEVAL SCHOOL.s 47. p.:=l Suri. (1292 A.) ?f""( 1f~ 1IifiifelWT <t!. There he gives his spiritual descent in the v!'h~Hlg-9.s::t of the debt he owed to Vijayasena Surl. noticed in Peterson 5.. Tilaka Acarya. the Pratyeka-buddha-caritra in 1204 A. II Vide Peterson's Fourth Report. p. ~~~~~): I f~: iAlI~nf~ 'J"~liit m~rfil1fl1[ n ". 922. Saptabhanginaya. who belonged to the Candragaccha of the Svetambara sect. etc. Compare also Weber II. a commentary on Hemacandra's Vltaraga-stuti or Dvatririlsika.OGIO~ CHAP.:s~·-!3. Madhyamika. was a spiritual descendant.' I 2 For other particulars of Ratnaprabha Suri.D. note 7. Jaiminiya. ..). JA!NA I. and edited by Dlmodara. of Candraprabha Suri through Dharmagho~a. The Syadvada-maiijari contains an exposition of the Pramii/j)a.nr~~ifl~ ('. Lal Gosvami • 11:"" .A SUR! l\iaUi§leI].ccha as follows: (1) Municandra Sud. p. III. He was author of several works such as the Avasyaka-Iaghu-vrtti written in 1239 A.D.· ~Si~.res Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series. Cakresvara and Sivaprabha. eJati. xlviii. Yogacara. Nigrahasthana. Aulukya. Bhattapada. (2) Deva SUfi. 220. p.f\r: ~'l. 124).212 INDIAN LOGIC. ~1tc. p. 1292.D. and (4) Ratna· prabha Sun. i ~ ilf'l'i(~~~etim: a'irq~. Cli..(~~~~ "CIlI'J(ii' 'ii1!iT Ii (UpadeSamala~vrtti. Car· vaka. (ABOUT TILAKAOARYA 1180-1240 A. While in Broach at the Asvavabodhatirtha in Samvat 1238 or 1181 A. and was the author of the Syadvadamaiijari. and.D.Chala. The doctrines of the Sarhkhya.

05 or 1348 A.1iiins.dal: under the guidance of Jinaprabha. A part of this work has been printed and published in the Benares .· 49.l a sub-commentary on the PramaI}. or Maladhari Sri Rajasekhara Suri. p.Js. which discusses many abstruse points of logic a. 273. published in ya..D. ~r.IN-ANA CANDRA (1350 A.te may approximately be fixed at about 1350 A. ~1fW~f+I"l~ ~ ~ lfqliU~HRlI1[ I fifqfff~ mw ~ tffi: ".ka.::~CfT1t . . Juana Candra's da. 3 ~'l~WI~")lItfif~iij <ilJ~~i(~~ r.urvimsatiprabanciha). also Peterso~ 3. 7.TfI~Tft41 Cf"U"iii Wi'[ .. RXJASEXHARA SURI (1348 A.lankara" as also of two other works called Syadvada-kalika and Caturvimsatiprabandha. 213 48. . ~'q~'Cfi1lil~(.'i He is also the author of a Panjika (9omroentary) on the Nyaya-kandali of the Hindu philosopher Sri-dhara.ina Ydovijaya senes..D. ~ \I (Colophon of Cat. p.)..ftI'¥{ I ?r~ f~ri ~. Ya'ovlJaya aeries.ippana.sovijaya. belonged to the Svetambara sect and was the author of the Ratnavatarika-panjlka.nd criticises the vjews of Dignaga 5 and others. chap. . d.candl'e!s Ramikarivatiriki-i. Rajasekha~a SUfi.).-granthamlli of Bena1'6s.rir~~~ ~fir: nli' I ilf""l1ll1ii' 1. 1207..D. ~ ailf~lc?Mrm~: 'i11lf.:INA.res Jams.~ II (Nyayakandali of $ridhara with the PafiJika of RiiJaSekhara notICed in Peterson 3. 28-29).JAINA WBI'l"ERS ON SYSTEM. LOGIO-J:&1".a-naya-tattvaloka.s and completed his Catufvimsatiprabandha in Sarhvat 14. lent to me by Muni Dharmavijaya. OANDRA.rr~~T: I ~ . of Ratnlkaravatirikl-tippana. 2 This work has been published by HITa Lal HamsaraJa at Jimanagara in Kathis. He composed this work 6 under orders from his preceptor Rajasekhara Suri~ who flourished in 1348 A.D.q~1 f~~ ~~i •• tl(l~ ~1t1frQI1l Quoted from the MSS. He studied the Nyaya-kar.D.. p. He belonged to the Svetambara sect and was the author of a gloss on the Ratnakaravatarika called the Ratnakaravatarlka~ippana. 6 ~. <: . '" Vide Weber II.~rq"~: ••• ~: II .war. pp. I. ~~ ~1lfJii~ \I - '4IIi~ ~r tarr~~~!ffi'lf . 1 A part of the Ratnskarivatiirlka-pailJlks has been prmted and publIshed In the Bena.

~':f~~'R'?:<f. by Ratnaaekhara Suri.aratna. ~~i:i~r~f~r II ~ Ii fc!~m~r e'f.D. has mentioned Sauddhodani. 1409. have lived between A. 4 ~ii~firfrq.f ~gc(~ ifir'l~~':\~ 'fi~~lfT'~T ~m~~ ~li~l II (1! " 'Ii'" l~lI .r:"(l?: 'F ~-rliT~ II ~ It i m.samuccaya with Vrtti.i'i l!iftf~il II .. 1439. GU:r.. Dharmottara. 1409. 1439. G. 1883-84.).author of the Gurvava11 4 composed in Samvat 1466or A. JAINA LOGIC.fYTf9'1<1~~~~~~fa~:~"p!n~~ "l'llft :I5l~~l{f "Sl"'l~TS~ "1~l'~'-if~ I lAY '" ~'IlTt ft(1iIl~~T ~~i~~r ~: I ~~ fi'\lf1~i.ana-Bamuccaya·vrtti or Tarka· rahasya-dipika in which the N~'aya (logic) along with other systems has been lucidly explained..D. 3091.a-sutra-vrtti composed in Sarhvat 1496 or A.:fCf ~~~~~"T~ I "1~ihr?. pp. also Weber II. H has been publIshed in the Chowkhamba series. was a contemporary of lVIuni-sundara Suri.. and was the distingnisr.U10US.D.s Report. edited by Dr. :2 The Srsddha-pratl-kramana-sutra-vrtti. 157. noticed in Peterson 3. was composed in. pp.. Sarilvat 1466 or A. Ant. R.Q.a4dar~ana.IARATNA (1409 A. p.D. September 1882. In the Ind.ma YaSOVL avtl. and published by theASlatlC Society of Bengal. . therefore. MEDIiEVAL SCHOOL.samuccayoJ t called ~a4dars.ij"t1f. 226-227. GU. in his elaborate commentary (Vrtti) on the Sagdarsana-samuccaya. . XI. Bhandarkar'.tn -samucea 'a a.~4{fl\{ifi'if.. p. Klatt on the Pattavali of the Kharataragaccha. :.. has been. 109).D.214 INDIAN LOGIC. called Laghuvrtti by Manibhadl'a. whence the following hnes are quoted:- ~ ~at.aratna belonged to the Tapagaccha of the Svetambara sect. l363. Jaina-YdoviJaya granthamal8: :. Suali. 11 3 Viae Dr. 1.20 or A. He is mentioned by Ratna-sekhara Suri in the Sraddha~ pratikramal]. 1363 and A. Vol. p.ys that his Kriyaratnasamuccaya /.i' In that work Gu~aratna is mentioned as a pupil of Devasundara.D. Gu~aratna himself sa. the fa. IlL 50. who attained the exalted posItion of Suri at Anahillapattana in Samvat 14. He also wrote the Kriya-ratna-samuccava. 255-256. 884' and Dr.:J Gu~a!'atna must. teacher of GUQaratna.61 author of a commentary on the Sagdarsana. ~.erles. rri ara.D. There IS another commentary on ~a'.dal'~ana-samuc­ cays.. t Rma. Devasundara Sud. u. GU1}. I (GurvQvali. ct. CHAP.li series.

a. The technica. Slokavartika-bha~ya. naya.rtika. Re has been mentioned in the Tarkabha~a by Yasovijaya Ga. :2\yayav3..cina..D. udayana and others. Ab:2. Samant8 Bbadra. !. specially of the Bud· dhists. are also m~ntioned '-PrameY8 kamala-martaQq. SrIRal}.) ill the ?hapter on the Bauddha system. Blta~ta. Kumara Nandi Bhanaraka. Prabhakara. author of Tattvirthadiplks.. ------------I Peterson's Fourth Report. of tht" Digambaras.d:3. pupil of VidYAnandin of the Sarasvatl Gaocha. recognition.t Ul50 or 1493 A.. who wrote in Samv&t 1583 or UJi28 A. nta. Vauaspati. Akalanka Devs" Salika Natha. Hetubindu. amrti.).?E ~::-" V3Jtsy~tya::la. parok~a" including recollection. DigI'1aga. The Nyaya-dipika begins with a salutation to Arhat Vardhamana.l terms of logic have been defined and minutely examined. and the method of comprehending things from particular standpoints. There are references to Sugata.~ha. and other Buddhist works on logic etc. Nyayakalika. m the Dhapter on the Nyaya.. cx. (2} perception. Mention has also' been made. 215 carya. d€lSori~ himself as devoted to the service of Srutasigara whose literary activity must be referred to ~bout Sathva.:.D.D. Dignaga.~i. Tatparyatika. Maq. agama. Saugata. SRUTASAGARA (ABOUT GA~I 1493 A. GaI].). Y:-'~:Q:'~§. Aroa1·a-tarkatika. 1 51. etc. argumentation.::~~.i. Naiyayika. of such Hindu logicians as Akif2. an'l~m. Tatparyaparls::::.yotakara.:'7£t!!akcpadnY&:·la Jay<. MImalllSaka. have been severely criticised.'a:2.ikya Nandi Bhattaraka. pramij.JAINA WRITERS O~ SYSl'E11 LOGIC-DHAR])IA-BHU~A1$"A. tradition. The Nyaya-s9Jra of Bha-sarva~fia and the eighteen commentaries on it such as NyayaJbhfi~a1?-a. was a Digambara who wrote the Nyaya-dipika about 30() years ago.D.rtika Tattvasamgraha. and the views of other logicians. Pramal)a-vo. (1) general characteristics of valid knowledge. Jainendra.:iu . Tathagata.~:i:. Nyayapravesaka. was a. rpratyabhijiiiina. and other Buddhist authors. tarlca. Yauga.! 52. and of such works as Nyaya-sf. Udd. Rajavartika. a disoiple of Vardhamana Bhat1iaraka. inference. Srutasagara. DHARMA-BHU§!A~A (ABOUT 1600 A. Prajnakara. Syldvada-\'idyapati. viz.: Nyayalankaravrtti. Arcata. Kamalasila. as well as Tarkabha~a. p. . have also been mentioned. Dhar:makiirti. etc. Nyayakusumanjali.a. Slokavartika. and (3) indirect knowledge. It is divided into three chapters (Prakaia).\::'E. Nemidatta. Bauddha. pratyak~a.:::e. Udayana.1}a-8fimanya-lak~ar}a. Nyayahindu.D. The following works. Dharmabhu~aI].

Vinayavijaya travelled over various parts of India until he came to Junagaq. CHAP. Tattval'tha-bha~ya. Marwag. Vinayavijaya was born in a Vaisya family in Guzerat in Samvat 1670 or A. on his pilgrimage to the Girnar hills in 1651 A.216 INDIAN Loorc. Tattvartha-sloka-vartika. 52a. ll'q'f ~ ~\lr ~ 'fr&I~~.a-p~rik~a.ic learning.tika-" an ear-ring of N aya.." which was composed at Diva near Junagaq.h in Kathiawa<J in 1651 A. for the satisfaction of Guru Vijayasimha Sfiri.. . etc..a..D.. and the last three under a group called paryaya8ti kaya. naigama. After undergoing a course of training for twelve years in Benares.h in Kathiawaq. etc. samgraka.aya. rju8utra. Pari1r~amukha.D). Pramal]. the well-known suri of Akbara~s time.. MEDLEVAL SCHOOL.D. Vinayavijaya) a:~-sL p:'. There are altogether seven standpvints. explanations of which have already been given.:If1il~1 ~JI ~~ . His spiritual teacher K'irtivijaya 1 was a disciple of Hiravijaya. q~~et ~lfif~fW ~. The treatise ends with the observation 3 that 1 fl Vide the concluding verses of the chapters of Vinayavijaya's Lokaprakasa. VINAYAVIJAYA (1613 A D.. Aptamimamsa-vivara:q.~ ~ 1fJ1fT ~ ~~~1lItft ~ ~ffiA1i ~.as Yasovijaya. The first four of the standpoints come under a group called dravyasli·kaya. sabda.. phenomenal or that which refers to an attribute. viz. Nyayabindu. He visited Surat. the method of descriptions. c.W. whose account will be given shortly. ~ \I (Naya-karxpkl) .D..a -niI:Q.::S'2~::tbg 1::3 studies in Jaina scriptures under Kirtivijaya. vyavakii/ra.1:tfqf~~fij'f~ :U~lll . ift~~ff: IQ'~ ~lf\l~ I ~ ~IA~: 'f~~~­ mm~~ fiftff"U~ . i N aya aims at describing things from all possible standpoints.ya Yiniscaya ) PramaI}. to i3er:~r~'5 to study the grammar and philosophy of the Brahmal}. 1613. proceeclea.. and died at Rander in Guzerat in 1681 A. Of the numerous works written by him the undermentioned treatise on Jaina Nyaya deserves a special notice: Naya-karr.-IoSI A. Ill.D. JAINA LOGIC. a-kAl"nika't .. Tattv-artha-sfttra. joined him in his journey to that famous seat of Brahmal). Nya. ___ \1f1Pil . . another J aina ascetic. nOllmenal or that which refers to a substance. samabkirft4ha and evambkitta.

He was a 'spiritual descendant of Hiravijaya Suri.l. touched separate pa-rts of its body and went home with the knowledge they derived in this way.D ). 21'1 though the standpoints are mutu3.D. ~... Yasovijaya Ga~i. and as s11ch caused confusion. Vijayasena Siiri VijayJeva Surl I I KalvanavlJaya.la ascetic.. .AINA. He said that all the dlffel'ent aspects of a thmg must be examined in DI'der to gain the 90mplete knowledge of the thing.Uy conflioting. .nd so forth. They quarrelled among one another until a person who was not blind came before them He took great pains to explain that their knowledge was only partial. "A partial knowledge. "leads to con£lic~ while a. he confessed that he was a Jaina and was asked at once to leave the Sanskrit academies of the BrahmaJ. 1 53. Nyaya~vi8arada and Nyayacarya..ll 't1ll~~!'ii<n'f[ II " • 'I _ . another man who had touched only the ear descrIbed it as a wmnowmg fan.". they serve collec- tively to establish the dogmas of the J aina scripture. YasoviJaya (TapagacchapaHavali).'fl'SfI.' 1 Vide Introduction to Nay&-kar. pp.~ I fJpq'Stl1Ihf'lT ~fcr. a member of the Svetambara sect.I I . ~ lIJitlri "1ft it ~it I .. KirtlVijaya VmayayiJaya i I I . and 1688 A. By about 1638 A.." 2 Hil'avijaya (1526-1595 A.'" continues he. YA. ~1"R~.l{ilf 11fSlI'VA" tfAi II (MandharastutI). complete knowledge establishes harmony.as.].~ ti.nt and blInd men. The man who had only . touched its leg described it as a huge column.t1f~~. On aocount of his vast erudition in Logic and Metaphysics he obtained the titles of Upadhyaya.q1~1"141q-( n. a.).\ . WRITERS ON SYSTEM. the well-known Jaina High~ priest of the time of the Moghul Emperor Akbar.D.D.SOVIJAYA GA~I (1608-1688 A.D. 3-4:The doctrine of Naya is often illustrated by the parable of an elepi'1a. He died at Dabhoi in 1688 A. '"" fiI'~~ ~Jft'fcf. he came to Benares.hl~T1ft~. LOGIO-YASOVIJAYA GA~I.nki edited by Mohan Lal DesaI.D.s where he studied Nyaya-sastra in the disguise of a BrahmaI. Vijayasimha SUTI I Labhavijaya Nayavijava .t m ~~.qa.. Several blind men desirous of knowing what an elephant was like. .l1. they discovered that there was no agreement among them as to the form of the animal.J. was a distinguished logician who flourished at Dabhoi in the Baroda State (Guzerat)~ approximately between 1608 A. In about 1626 A. i'i'if. Sittmg down to compare notes.D.

a. II .not have ventured to attack Siromar.a logician by saying 1 "woe to Bengal where there is Siroma1}..ter of that ocean capable of being drunk? Why not.'e than one hundred works (in Sa.ler particulars a?out Yaiiovijaya. Tarkabh. (A~fasahasri viva.lent.e 17th clentury A. Yasovijaya wrote mm.. prami1?J. f{~.s preserved 'a His review oi other detaHed oriticism on the Login of Mahna and Nadia as taught in the Benares academies of tr.aftla. There is also an occasional discussion on vyaptigraha. the great.i blind of one eye! " Conscious ot his own erudition he observes in another place: " The ocean of Logic IS hard to approac? owing to the uproar of waves of the Didhit.4tI~~"{ It ~fl(iJii QT ~It It'Wr.rma or Dha. p. can easily approach the ocean and ddnk its water pure and sweet' 3 For ?t. Yasovijaya was the autho~ of several rare works on Logicsuch as Nyiya·:pradipa.. 2 Silrl). 'miT~ ~fet:'iq~~"(1lt . JAIN'A LOGIC. MEDL£VAI.!. For his work:.D.ra~a. NyayamrtatarailgiQ. see Peterson 6.i).est exponent of . na.l'maviJaya Siid).Modern Logic in Nadia.j~lt'iitt I ..nf'q' 'tTt! iii' q~ ~'i~ t1t 1fTif' ~~1{ m\ol~~l"'.. which begins with a salutation to Jina. and (3) Inlposition. 54.nskdt and Guzel'ati) in which he he. of Vijaya-dharma SGri and IndravlJaya 'rfl1'lirRifti!~f~m~f"lni).3 The Tarkabha~i. CHAP. (I) Valid knowledge.. intelligent people.i--Commentary (of Si['oma1].'-iT~f"~~3iN I \$ 1$ The idea of the verse may be expressed as follows:Indian Logic is a veritable ocean whose water is sahne and which li:l unapproachable owing to the tumults and uproars of commentators.218 INDIAN LOGIC. 1ea143. xiv.i and Nyaya-kha:r. He satirises this Branmar]l. induction or the process of ascertaining a universal connection between the middle term and the major term. or else he would ..~ consists of three chapters. viz. yet: is not the water of that· ocean capable of being drunk by our cloud-like genius?" 7. Is not then the wa. Nyaya-rahasya. ~~t~ ~it~. He must ha.~ tIlq(: fiR)i1N: I (NyayakhaQdaklliidya.ve been a m3n of extrao:rginary ta. III.tq.'Ollege called Ja~ YaSQliTijaya-pathdiila.ti. To perpetuate the memory of Yal1ioviJaya there has been established at Benates a (.a-khadya. ni~lcll!epa. YASOVIJAYA'S WORKS. 4. like douds. SCHOOL. (2) Knowledge from particular standpoints. under the auspices of whioh the sacred works of the JaJ. kit-a the Jalnagama List publIshed In Bombav. Mf:lS m possession of Vijaya.nas are bemg n:'1@iStred hi a serif'S cal!ad Jaina Yasovi· jaya-granthamala. He also wrote a commen~ tary on the Digamhara work A~tasahasri called A~~asahasri-vrtti.dha. leaf 82. MS8.ya.

~ubstQnce (drav!Ja) . middle j (Nyuyiloka) 3 ii~ ~frcif4fli~ ~lOiR '(i1f ~_~ 40 ~~ 'EJ~" ~~'Sl"fiTif..'ence(samaviiya) . Dharmakirti. Jinabhadrl-1 Ga~i K~amft-al'&mitJ:!. Sammati tika.A151.lls are quoted :-Naiyayika. " . MaJ}. which are th~ causes of all sufferings.. Mi8ra Vardhamana.l ~ . Cintamal:'. validity of external things 3 (vahyartha-siddhi). Vedantin~ Nyaya! Yanktdra.LUNA .tred. The Nyaya khanq....Hqt. Ucchrnkliala N~iyaynm Samkhya.tises and syster. .'::.a khadya'* is otherwise eaUed Mahavin~ stava. JiianarI}. LOGIC-YASOVIJAYA G.i'rSlf~"'~f~ii'iftfu ~''ll . philosophical trea. Digambara.~:::.. It consists of 108 verses composed in eulogy of MahavIra and at the same time embodying solutions of the dee:pest problems of Logic.if it~ l{'1IT'if. direct knowledge (pratyak~a j'fiana) ..dvada. ether (alcal:ia). ~r(~l q(Jn~'€"~~lll~ll{(~~l'i17)1'i~i"~ I 1_1.if.. leaf 13... and Pak~adhara Misra..na. }_-.& There is an elaboy'ate commentary in prose by the author himself. origination (utpatti). destruction (clhvamsa).. The work opens with a salutation to Mahavll'a who is caned Samohu and ends wlth a. The topics -treated in the work. Syadvada-fl1t. sya. prmtf'd at Ahmed~tbad) The NyayakhanQ. elucidating many intrics)te points in the preci1:le style of modern logicians. Acarya..a-khadya has been prmtE'd ill Bombay 5 "" ~~~"Tfll:.. Bha~yakara. The work discusses the nature of suul (iiiman)) emancipation (mukt'i) .at Brhaspati. are :-Soul (atman). momentariness (klla?Jikatva) . testimony {r-":t. class and individual (jati and vyakti). - Mr ~~Tit ~TdHt\~rf~iit{ I II (Nyayaloka.~.' J' ~" jiliina) . space and time (desa and kiila).. Bauddha. etc. infer~nce (an/umana). negation (abhiiva) . Cal'yaka~ Tautatita."VItI'rETIS ON SYSTEM..akareJ.". philosophers. The undermencioned.ikrt. Syadvada-rahasya.!.ava. brier account of the author himself. 'I _-' .n. inhe!J.~r:. indirect :::-_:: .. 219 The Nyayaloka begins wi~h a sallU!taiion toO lViahavira 1 asParamatman (the supreme spirit) and ends with an entreaty~ that its author rna·v be freed from lust and ha. emancipation (mukti) .:::?:-:~~~~..

Mimamsaka.hasri.lda-khiidya. BhaHacarya .{isra. leaf 2. ~f~ «f'i'ifirn'f1T i31f~: ~\im't 'Sflfit ~'ifT if'tf ifW) "if'I(~ii: I ~~m iI~ f1fU.ananda. belongIng to Vijayadharma Suri alld Indravijaya Raghudeva is re!erred to in leaves 4.~n firirllEl'llfir It .fomaQi/1.. 35. Bhat~a.. Udayanacal'ya.rrt'lir 'I"AV!i: tmi1lii ~~ if f4i~ I (NyB'yakhal?-9-a-lihadya.{urari Misra. rika. Bhatta. Madhyamika t Prabhakara. Didhiti-kara.t ~'ffft:lvrtr t:f~ iTTU'fr'Il'Hal· I (~yayakhal}c. s The A~asaba8ri-vivaraI}.:-·akhat.ta-khadya.\l. Hemacandra. etc. 22 of AI?~ass. Silri).ii?~asahasri . Bombay). Muraribhatta.a. leaf ti~ Bombay). MaI}.220 INDIAN LOGIC. Bha~ya. opens with an obeisance to Indrabhuti Gautama. Vaidanti-pasu. Naiyayika. and GUI]. KaQ. NarayaI). Ak~apada. The Bha~af. etc. which is a gloss on the A~tasahasri of Vidyananda.vival'ana.abhak~a.i. KU8umaiijali.ana Misra.. The work makes reference to the undermentioned philosophers.Flophers.q. Naiyayika. Sammati. . Udayana. sara. Blluddha. Raghudeva BhaHacarya. ~. term and major term (vyapya-vyapmka).'Ii ~lfIi111 (~ya. 6 6 (A. CHAP. leaf 3. philosophical treatises and systems :-Vacaspati. Prabhakara.Jal'annaiyayika. S. Samantabhadra. 1188.a. Gautamiya. philosophical treatises and systems are referred t·o : Samkhya. HI. MEDL'EVAL SCHOOL. 6 Bhu~aQa06 e t c. knowledge and external world (vijiiano/vaaa. Vardhamana. VacakacakrfLvarti (Umasvati). ly. 3 '4~~ ~m 'ili1fit ~rq~ii1:V~ifir~rsTfifftr~T?fN ~~ l!fi I'tt1f~T ~~if· "" 'f!ii~ 'ii~ "5im"'i'f~ft!{ftr ~lifi~".la. The rmdermentioned philc. I ~~ ~~ 1ilfiCf. Gandhahasti. ~. JAINA LOGIC. Vartik?>.sara (Vylikaraf. Guru~ mata.: ~1lT ~refaUH\~~rf{~mfcr~ I ~Tii"~~~. Prajfiakara.1?ijhyartnavada) . Sridhara..l NarayaI}acarya. Bombay).la) is referred to in leaves 34.

u..here was no protracted qua. The special Jaina doctrines of Naya (method) and sapta-bha?igi (sevenfold para!ogism ).' 55. The Jainas.O.\ic authors:t generally in an academic spirit.nga-sutra and the Sutra-krtallga of the . Continuity of J aina Logic.ikakara) was attacked by Abhayadeva Sufi of Rijagaccha. and by Harlbhadra Sud in his Ssstravartasamuccaya and Anekanta-]ayapat.::_2. There was in the Logic of the Brahmai}-as a casual review of the syllogism of ten members as propounded in certain works of the Jalnas. In fact the logical theories of the JainaFl are in many inst. though occasionally criticised.rrel on that acuount between the two parties.1ika:.a~ta or udahara1)a.Taya-s. Nyayavatara. but t.r". Uddyotakara (Virt. The the BuddhlstS. of the Sthana.s and No confhct. tra. Eplgraphld Inc:ca \~ 0. wrote a commentary called Sambandhoddyota on the Sambandha parik~a of the Buddhist Iogicia.ition of "NyS:ya-sara " wIth the Nyaya.). Smith's" Early History of IndIa" and " ?_kba.as. chala (quibble). annmana (inference).D.JAINA LOGIC.A. Rabhasa Nandi. did not differ much from the Buddhists in No bitter Tlvalrv vnth respect of their subjec~ and style. their atta.. afJama (verbal test!imony).pamana tcomparison).ck on the J aina. (£>'xampic).6ha S.).pa::-ya-drplka of . .verses almost the same ground as the Nyaya pravesa of the Buddhist logician Dignaga (450-530 A.hat on the Buddhist Logic..". did not receive any rude ':ilows =-':<311 the BrahmaI}.D.-:a. 2 Ak~apa.hmaQ.'. if not altogether identical with.Jainas are m their meanings Rnn. aha. etc.n: Dharmakirti (635 1 See Satls Chandra Vldyabhusana's " Medireval School of Indian LOb~("" his ed. Logic wa.tion of the serviceR rendered bv the J aina.as._~~:'::1.ln: V. in so far as they wrote regular treatises on Logic. \Ht h the the Buddhists 111 the '"formation of the' BriihmalQas Medi~val School of Ind]an Logw.as did not in respect of their social practices differ so markedly from the Jainas as they did from the Buddhists. THE CONCILIATORY CHARACTER OF .lar t. and" JainaInscriptions" compded by Pul'an Chand Nahal'. by the Svctamb8Jra Jaina logician Siddhasena Divakara \500 A. The Jaina logICians quoted BrahmllI.CHAPTER IV. a DigambaraJ Jaina logician. Since tilE' Brahmal). the corn"~pl)ndillg tf>rn1 R of the Caraka sarhhlta and the NY8Jya-sutru J~ ~~L2 F1'§.ances akin to those of the Br..da was attacked qy Siddhasena Divikara in his Sammatitarka..s not so violent as t. II .i. In the previous pages the!'e has been given an mdic8. The terms pratyafc~a (perception).

D.D. contrary if he is the same as Candl'a Gupta II.Jraja Kumara Pala of Guzerat about 1142-1172 A.a. " . The Chinese pilgrim Hwen-thsang. ROYAL PATRONAGE AND PERSECUTION.D.pttr}.D. From time to time J ainism enjoyed patronage as well as suffered persecution at the hands of the Patronage rulers.D ) gave in his ~agdarsana­ samuccaya a complete summary of the Buddhist philosophy. In the latter half of the seventh century A. surnamed Kalikalasarvajiia. was 1 Ii we suppose this Oandra Q()pta to be identical with Candra Gupta Maurya.D. Cola and PaI~\(]ya kingdoms in 640 A.te of Bhadrabiihl1 W1U have to be determined a.roduction of Jainism into Mysore must be about' 309 B. in Southern India. the Jaina author Hal'ibhadra Suri (1129 A.D. was the preceptor of Mahi'i.C.) instituted in his Tattvass. found that J ainism was the prevailing religion in Draviq.C. The Digambara Jaina logician Akalanka Deva enjoyed favour at the court of the Ra~trakuta King Kr~Qaraja I or Subhatunga about 750 A. KalyaQa-candra is likewise a commentarv on the Pl'amana-vartika of the Buddhist Dharmakirti (635 A. IV.a. A.D. was 'a great supporter of the J aina religion whioh spread widely in Northern India and was introduced into Mysore by Bhadrabahu. King Kfma. MEDIJEVAL SCHOOL.mgraha an inquiry into the Jaina doctrine of soul. In fact there was no bitter l'ivalry between 'the Jainas and the Buddhists. Samprati. 1 who oarried on controverSles in the spirit of scholars.ditya in Ujjaini about 500 A. Mysore could not have welcomed J ainism before 375 A. Dhal'mottar~-tippanaka is the tjtle of a Jaina comment£'t'Y by MaUavadin (about 962 A.D. JAI'N"A LOGIC.. Sundara 01' Nedumaran' Palf.. however. King Candra Gupta. a grandson of Emperor . Displaying the zeal of a convert he persecuted with savage cruelty his late co-religionists of whom no fewer than eight thousand were' put to death. became a pupil of Saint Tirujiiana Sambandar and accepted the Saiva faith. who visited the Pallava.Asoka. The da.). On the. The Svetamhara Jaina logician Siddhasena Divakara {K~p.) on the Buddhist work Nyaya-bjndu-~ika of Dharmottara (847 A D. Hema Candra Suri.D. accepted the J aina faith wh!oh was welcomed throughout the Deccan about 215 B.}. The PrameJX:la-Var0]ka-tika of Jains. whose rule extended to Trichinopoly. Eastern Bengal and Southern Maratha country.).ka} was patronised at the court of Vikrama. If the Buddhist author Santa Rak~ita (749 A. CHAP. there occurred. 56.4ya. who had been brought up as a Jaina. 'CJhe date of int.ccordingly.222 INDIAN LoaIC. dynasty. and that it was popular in ~:Iathura} Vaisali. a terrible perseoution of J ainism Persecution. Mahendra Varman of the Pallav8.D. old Trichinopoly and Malakuta.

can be appointed.-=-_ to a certain extent during 51)0-750 AD.. 1 . Vljtoyasena Suri and Bhanu.of a:mmals on certain days.~-Q) ~d laywumen (sravikf. R:g~t~ 2. 223 origInally . It is on account of the mutual help of the monks and lay people that the J aina church has continued AId to literary men. undisturbed.Jaina teacher&-Hiravijaya Sari. Firoz Shah Tughlak (1351-1388 A. In the Calukya Kingdom of Vatapi. Through the influence of a Ta. SUPPOR1' OF THE JAINA COMMUSJTY.ya--were received with high honours atl Lhe court of Akbar who is Sl).. and so long as they continue.:. tfle laIty.mH saint he accepted Saivlsm. strength lav in the communitv of Jaina. and destroyed the large Jaina monastery of Pa~aHputtriam in South Arcot at about 610 A. The lay people. the Jaina logicians will never have to recede from literary pursuits for want of funds.CONTINUITY OF JAINA LOGIC. but placee! it.'Oe of their stay .y people exercise control in the fun me&.. Jlaina faith during 8!5-877 A.).D.t) s. It is at their choice and with their permission that the head of the chureh called Acarya. was kind ~owal'cls the J ainas. and the Moghal Emperors showed them great tavours.a Jaina.8ure. Though in aU periods the Jainas enjoy~d a fair share Of :wyal .s supplanted by SaiYlSm and Vail?t}.r J . . King Amoghaval'~& of the Ra~tl'akuta line.nd nun~ (stidhvi). Buddhism wa. who belong mainly to the Vaisya (merchant) community.canctl'a Upadhya. tiie main 60111.::. The management of temples and places of pilgl'irnage is entrusted entirely to the lay people. 57.av]sm.I:.Jainism and to have probibited the killing .t!'or.D ) mercilessly persecuted the Jainas and put their leader to death. ~ 1 f aymen. also in the hands of the laymen '>"~.. .D. In spite of such persecutions the Jaina religion went on :!-!o"1....D. Th e vf 9under OJ.\To hostlhty from the .. .:.:..id to have been a convert to . Jainism made a rapid progres.. followed.:. The Pathan King.::'lshi~g in the Hindu period up till 1200 :. who select the residence of monks and nuns.i) called r~spectively Lhe maar ?~nd female dev6tees.ge.s in his kingdom up to the 10th century A D. . J ainism remained unperturbed. Three eminent .ring the Mahomedan rule which :Mahomeda. They have uniformly f!:lpport. authors. In aU religious and social ceremonies the la.g. ::J:.. where J9-inism _~.2~)a. command the wealth of India.l pl'lVl1eges of and. a Saiva King of Guzerat (about 1174-76 A..ed Jaina. auusm e t t 1 Ie church not entirely at the mercy of the monks (sadhu) a.._. Ajaya Deva. whose capital was at Mauyakhe'~a (in the Nizam's Dominions) devoted the last part of his life to ascetic practices and patronised the Digambara.3... ::J.:.:.

We have seen that the Jaina monks were very seldom militant against the Brahma'Q. incurring the displeasure of their rulers.224 IND1AN LOGIC.as or Buddhists. JAINA LOGIC WILL NOT BE EXTINCT. as far as practicable. They also avoided. . IV. CHAP. 58. JAINA LOGIC. Under such circumstances it is not at all ~trange that Ja!l1ism has not died and there is 110 fear that the Jaina Logic will ever be extinct. MEDlLEVAL SOHOOL. and framed their ecclesiastical rules in liberal spirit to ensure the sympathy of the laity.

was born at Kapilavastu (modern Nlgliva in the Nepal Teral) about 570 B C.ved 80 yea. The Buddhists maintain that their religlOn IS eternaL [t was taught at dIfferent cycles by sages called Buddhas (the Enlightened One.. Wd. Buddha Gautama is said t·o have delivered his teaching~'3 in the Mu.' Roy. BuddlH~.gadhi or P<1li language On his death these teachingR were rehearsed by the Buddhist monks in three councils 3 held at Raja· .D.we statetuent In chapter V of the Mahi'i.--.~! A~iatIc /:)o(Jlety of Great Bntdln <tn. 59. CHAPTER I TOPICS of LOgIC mentIOned in the old Buddhist Literature. In the present cycle. Dr Fleet's at'tlCh~ on " The Date of Huddhn. mrvin!l.).. seems. four Buddhas are said to have alreFt.nd Ill.2 He passed almost his whole life in Magadha (modern Behar). Therl' I'! a posit. called Maha-bhadra-lcalpa (the very blessed cycle). yet to be born. otherwise called t5akya . " The exar·t date (1f Buddha IS unknown Accordtn~ to the ::\l.C.C. ~~ Asoka's mstallo.C. Januarv W1)4. The Buddhist Logic. Kanaka lVlullI.!"s. while his predecessors are considereJ as purely mythical 60. to have been born about 570 B C.past Buddhas the last.dy appeared. and G<tutama..C.refore. In 49) B. wa~ i'!'ltalled on tlle throne of Magadha 218 yedrs after the nirv:'ina ot Bu(ll!ha. He is regarded by modern scholar:::. wlw l. bo far wrong If we placo Buddha's bIrth In 570 B (' <l.).C.C. Kilsyapa.! lrehtnd.).'arnsa that . B.SECTION II. as the real founder of Buddhism.) or Tathagatas (those who have realized the truth). while the fifth..-76 B.khavamsa. i::.h " In tho Journ ••l of th.-490 B.tlOn took place about 27).1 Vtde Hurdy's :VIanual of Buddhi~m. Cf.a.C.l'.-1200 A.Muni. 'l:iz Krakucchanda. BUDDHA GAUTAMA (570 B. Cuila .C.wuen 470-180 B. ViZ Buddha Gautama. S Ill! vafia couM approxunately be placed m 490 B.tttl or Buddha's ntrvap!\ is placed by Eut'opean ::lcholar. We shaH nut. the dato of ·Buddba. and attallled nirlJazw at KU8Inagara (modern KuSimlr:1 or Kasia near Gorakhpur) about 490 B C. Buudhd.'R Deat.al. vtde YlOay~ Pll.:.\§oka. ORIGIN OF THE PXLl BUDDHIST LITERATURE (490 B. sec:ond edition. S For an a. (CIRCA 570 B C. t1lt.------.. uet.' Of the . pp 88-91.. Tho d. viz Maitreya.'l born m 623 B C unci attained nll'vamt In 54~ B.ccount of the first and second councils.

BUDDHIST LOGIC.C.. pp. 1892. which signifies' Three Baskets' It consists of the Sermon Basket (Sutta Pitaka). (vide Vincent A. XX. that is. p. and it was m the 17th year 01 his reign. and Dr. J The first counCIl was held In the year of Buddha's nirvana. p. 15. Subseq uently ten thousand monks of Vaisali having violated certain rules of Theravada were. vol. each of which embodies a large number of distinct works. grha. S. MED SCHOOL. 386 For an account of the third couuml as also of the first and second.C. (7) Cetiya.226 INDU. 14 other heretical Rects lP.C. by the decision of the Second Council in -··390 Be.. also Dr. that IS. ~ide Wijesimha's Mahavamsa.'le'S. (3) Gokulika. (12) Sutta. (9) Dhammaguttika. and the Metaphysical Basket (Abhidhamma Pitaka).N LOGIC. Of. Discipline Basket (Vinaya Pi~aka).l respectively. for the first tIme in Ceylon. Asoka ascended the throne in 272 B C. (8) Sabbatthi. K. translatlOn of the Mahiivarnsa. BesIdes the Tipitaka there were numerous other works written in Pali which have immensely added to the bulk of the Pali literature. (5) Pafifiatti. (14) Rajagiriya. tran:. Vaisaii and Pataliputra under the patronage or kings Ajatasatru.O and 255 B.. vide W IJeslrnha'1'.C. and the scripture canonised by them was the basis of Theravada. Alwis's Lecture on . (11) Sankantika. expelled from the community of the Theras.. 63). '2 For a dlSCUs'lion about the variant names and subdivIsions of these sects. Sc. These excluded priests were called (2) Mahasailghikas. (4) Ekabboharika.. in the' CounCIl of Kasyapa. chapter V. The texts of the teachings as discussed and settled in these councils form the sacred scripture of the Buddhists. In 255 B. within two hundred years from the nirva1]-a of Buddha. The monks assembled in the First Council. They made certain additions and alterations in the Theravada. (15) Siddhatthika. and (lR) Vajiriya . p.i during 104-76 B. 1-37.Just at the close of the Third Council about 255 B.hools of Buddhist Belief" In the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. in 490 B. the teachings of Buddha as canonised by the Theras in the form of the T~pitaka.oral tradition They are said to have been committed to writing!l-. chapter XX~III. son of Emperor Asoka.. ~ Vtde the M~havamaa. 1. part I. (17) AparaselIya. council took place 100 years Jater. pp. chapter V. to the island of Ceylon where they were perpetuated by priests in .. This scripture is caned in Pali Tipitaka or Pitakattaya and in Sanskrit Tripitaka or P#akatraya. arose J viz.alasoka and Asoka about the year 490 B. (16) Pubbaseliya. 25-29. as also chapters III and IV. while the second. chapter XII. 29). Rhya Davids' £.. that the third councl! took place (vide Wl]e"llmha's Mahiivalllsa. OHAP. in the reign of VaHagama:Q.. (13) Himavata. Afterwards.C.B. (6) Bahuhka. 390 B. Smith'sAsoka. 3 Vide th~ Mahavam'ila. were carried 3 by Mahinda. pp 370.lated by Rhy~ Davids and Oldenberg.E 8el. (lO) Kassaplya. were called (1) Theras. Vagga.C. 11th and 12th Khandhaka. who were the first heretical sect of the Buddhists.

of re8. Logie (BuddIn:>t.-Jala-sutta." which forms a part of the Digha. The only topic bearing upon Logic which has been tou.arn).re I-there is not a single treatise on Logic Patwca-8a.C.VHI. part.tpUr. thoee versed in reasoning. bearsed in the First Buddhi-:. _ _.or consclousues5 t sura as cak::h. Rh\""1 Olt'llds and J.H. sums up the tOpICS of the Abludhamma Pttaka. Carpenter.:. btuu. Vuie also the Dhal'mlasangrqu.J. nrUt h:J ('Ill t hc.consci?u~ness. . which represents the central teaching of Buddha. London The Brah.." The Brahmalala-sutta. of a Logic that deserves the name of science. T.ttl-!ar. Nikaya of the Sutta Pit aka and was rt"~ Casuists and e:ophists. (4) gustatory (jivha-mii.ta signifies ocuIa.maJala. 'V.angaha which. vide the Augnttara Nlkiiya HI.. Rhys DaVIds. but they appear to me to have been soplllsts w110 indulged in quibble and casuistry.ctuul (kayavin na 1J. It IS not known whether these men were Buddhists. (:J) olfactory (ghiina-vinnar)a/nb) .s and Brtd~m<l1). and (6) mental (mano-viihiii'ly.t is.vere reCl'lUCel~ f::.l"ir~~! of knowledge. t.:' :)1 thlt term.u. .r knowledge or eye. Rhys Davids' artIcle on.i hteratu. E.i1afJ.~. 1. an(t compare Paricoheda IV of the Abhldhammu.as and BrahmaI]. till' lloctl'H. edIted by T W. see Satl" (handra Vldya. (5) ta. I..TOPICS OF LOGIC MENTIONED IN OLD BUDD.b. there is mention of certain Sramar)a. ~-IIr. edIted by Dr.1nsa (casuistry) 'rhese SramaQ.muppaaa (the Ohain of Interdependent Causes or the Wheel of LIfe). They were not logicians in the propel' "'cn:::v. For tilt' Jl\. suttapl~aka: Digha-nikaya: BrahmaJ[Ua.)[n all communities.tTER. 227 61 LOGICAL TOPICS IN THE PALl LITERATURE.) ill Dr .a-m) . Vol VII.Al'URE.n(.SOl'1lng. sutta. In the Tipitaka-nay in the waole PaJ. chaps. )101'1'1"> i'l tt._ . perhaps they . 61. .ta. however occasIOnal re{erences to logioal topics and to a class of men who were ·calied Ta}. Hastmgs' Encyclopaedia ?f Religio~ and EthICS:.bhusana'~. but none on logic or processe~. throws some Ught on the doctrines fA self (or soul) and su:ffering~.). Jainas or Brahma~as. IS the division of know ledge iG.ched on In the PaIi works. (490 B. (2) auditofY (sola viii1Za~tam).to SJX k5nds In the Tlpi'yaka 2 knowledge (Vinnatta 3) has been clas~ified a~ (1) ocular (cakkhu-viniia'I'Jarh) .~ 6 ViiiiUina is translated as knowledge.m of mutual (iependence. am ).) i1~ld indulged in takka (argumentations) and vima.lavaram 1-3.sification has not been carried far enough to lay the toundation. London. mCluded m Dudugm'~ of the "tin~~hA. or Pratd ya-s'!lfou. R.aS who were takki (argumentationists) and vitnarnsi (casuist.J£. 2 For an explanation of PatlCca-samu?pada. translated by Prof.hough W)t Included m the Tipi~aka.t CO:'U1Cll about 490 Be.. But this elr_. In the Tipitaka there are. l 62. included in the Digha Nik~ya. * ..".:.ki (in Sanskrit: Tarkin) or Takkilca (in SanskrIt: Tarkiha) -tha.1:10:O..as from the standpoints of their philo1 Consult Mrs.1 bjE'ct in the Journal of the Buddhist Text SOcIety. In the Brahma.0 Pali rrext Society series of London.

steadfast. the destruction.ical views were divided Into various classes such as the eternalists (scp. and these living creatures. is a self which is permanent. destroyed on the dissolution of the hody. . who in seven ways maintain the cutting off. Buddha observes :rrhere are. the soul is~completely annihila. on four grounds. a. some r(>cluses and Brahmal}as who are eternalists with regard to some things.. recluses and BrahmaI}. and does not continue after death ~ and then. brethren.!.N LOG[C I MED. t~e 7. . and will remain for ever and ever. yet they arB for ever and ever. brethren. some recluses and Brahmar. sir. subject to change But this which is called heart. unstable. and knows no change. non-eternal' lsts. Bond the annihilationists (uccheda-viida) Wittl regard to the eternahsts . Buddha says:There are.""'o:_d. is built up of the four elements... they put forth the following opinion.fedbatithi-Gautama. Kapila. Buddha says :There are. and Etornahsts-non-eternal-. IstS. sopb." With regard to the annihilationists who were perhaps the followers of the Lokayata philosophy.?:iidii) . it is cut off. this soul has form. SCHOOL.Ssatdva). and is the offl:>pring of father and mother. or consciousness. or mind. though they transmIgrate and pass awa:y.that both the soul and the world are eternal. eternal.. BUDDHIST LOGIC) CHAP. brethren. hilationists. proclaim ." There art' other classes or Sramal}a~ and BrahmaI}as such as .228 INDIA.e. They are addicted to logic and reasoning [argumentation and casuistry]) and give utterance to the following conclusion of their own. the annihilation of a lIving being In the first place." With regard to the eternalist-non-eternalists who were perhaps the followers (of the Anvik~ik:i) of l\. gIving birth to nothing new. eternalist-n on-eternahsts (ekacca-sa88at~ka ekacCa/~a8(l.ho were perhaps the followers of (the Samkhya phIlosophy of.. sir. beaten out by their a!'gu.8suia. is steadfast as a mountain-peak. In regard to ot h ers.as who are anniAnmllllntiomats.nd casuistry]. fall from one state of existence and spring up in another. be8Jten out by their argumentations and based on their sophistry: "This which is called eye and ear and nose and tongue and body is a self which is impermanent. who on four grounds maintain that the soul and the world are partly eternal and partly not.mentatio!!s and based on their sophistry: "eternal is the soul. and give_utterance to the following conclusion of their own. as a pillar firnlly fixed. brethren.tas who are eternahsts) and who.ted. the following view: "Since. They are addicted to logic and reasoning [argumentation a. not eternal.

Nlkaya while the word vada in the sense of discussion occurs in the Upalrvada-flutta of the same Nikaya of the Suttapi~aka. \"01.J4 &t:lJlhantl H<l c'apl savaldt. " Anumana sutta. 5t11 .3)i11a Butta.(J.).C. {·dited by Dr.. VI. (2) anu?)adadhikara~'/. Parivlira. (3) apaltadhikara'l].a. In the Parivara. brethren.·pl~aka: Parivara (490 B.: (1) vi'ultdadltikararpa." 2 This passage leaves no doubt that t.l j 64. (490 B..pters IX-XIII.' which pre.J." is the title of a chapter of the MaJJhl1na .plt.:.he Taklcikas were fiophH:ltS. mcluded ill the V. appear. beaten out by his argumentations e~nd based on lu'J sopn?:stty· "Tbe soul and the world arose without a cause. 65. 15th Butta.C. a case in ---------" -----The ol'igmal of This passage runs as follows:Yiva samma sambuddhli loke n'uppaJjantl. a Judicial Oouncilof .. to...a is addicted to logic [sophism] and rea. cases for settlement. we read:"As long as the perfect Buddhas do not. dukkha pamuccaro'tl -Udanam.. 229 a class of fortuitous-oflginists (adhicca-8amuppann~ka) of. -255 B. " 63.C). and "oL n. a case pertaining to differenced of opinion.a. vol. . Suttapi~aka: Khuddaka Nikaya: Udp. duddltthi ne.3 a work of the Vinaya-pi~aka. cha. Suttapl~aka: MSJJhiman. ppeses the uee of the word anumana in the sense of .TOPICS OF LOGIC MENTIOl'lED IN OLD BUDD.na (490 B C. London. Four kinds of aases for settlement (adhzicara1). In the Udana. sorne recluse or Brahma!]t.::lUlit. whom Buddha speaks as foHows : "In this case.( inference» or rather" guess. th{~re is mentIOn of four kinds of adhikararj. na takl'dk.kam.ya. lil I V'ide MaJjhima Nlk§.. The. . Vide also the Patimokkha of th{' Vma:Ya. the Takkikas [sophists] are not corrected nor are the Savakas' owing to their evil view:3 they are not released from mlsery.son1:ng [casUIstry]. edlted by Paul Stemthal in the Pail Text Sodet) SOfleR.ikaya: Anun:. viz.inl~ya-pltakaro. a case in whICh one party accuses anothel' party of the violation of a rule of good conduct." He glV'es utterance to the following conclusio:a of his own.Monks. which is included m the Khuddaka N ikaya of the Sutta Pitaka and is supposed to have been rehearsed in the three Buddhist Councils during 490 B.l1. .C .a. LITERATUR:::!l. Vina. The logical proced'ure 0. V.). I.ya. H Oldenberg..a).

applies to a case in which a complainant and his respondent go on bringing charges and counter-charges against each other. SCHOOL. MED. covering over with grass. Of the four cases enumera. Such a case. which applies to a case in which a person while committing a crime was in an abnormal state of mind. . the council of monks (5.230 I!>.N L091O. If at the time of his trial he denies all knowledge about the crime. and the fourt.b~.. 3 and 6. applies to a case in which the person implicated admits his guilt and promises to refrain from committing it in the future.id down seven rules for the settlement of cases ({u. (2) Sati vinaya. BUDDHIST LOGIC.na. applies to a case which is settled by the majority of votes of the members.fhiko. and (4) kiccadhika'}'(i. a monk has actually transgressed an established rule of good conduet. The council of monks (sangha).. Seven rules for tht:" settlement of cases (adhikara'f)a-samatha dhamma). but will be welcomed into the conncil when the charge is proved false. (3) Arnu~ha-vinaya. Still to try him through sati-1. may be settled simply by askmg the Arhat to rerJoHect his past misdeeds. he will be exempted from the charge once for all.linayo3 is to settle the present charge a.':!Jmmii)~ viz : --- (I) Namm?dclt'5 vinaya. which applies to a ease that must be conducted in the presence of a council of monks (sangha). finding no easy way to settle the case.. settlement by a majority. being totally devoid of pas~ions.ted above the first may be settled by rules 1 and 5. hush it up without listening to either of the parties. 2. I. There arE' b.nd to grant him immunity from all further charges.a-samathii dll. CHAP. which is evidently false. is not at all liable to the transgression of any rule. . settlement from recollection. in accordance with the sacred procedure appropriate for it. settlement in presence. . and was therefore not liable to any charge for the committal Ot the crime.ss:ionless person) is implicated. An Arhat. which applies to a case in whioh an Arhat (pa.frJ/J..h by rule 1 alone. · (7) Ti'l'!-<:t vatthliraka. applies to a case in which.1 ."lith a view to awakening him to a sense of re8pC:lsibm~y. declares that he will be expelled from the council any day that the charge is proved true. case relating to the formal nrooedure of an eoclesiastical act. (4) Pa~'innaya kareiabbam. the second by rules 1. (5) Yebhu1lyasikli."rDL4. a.. (6) Tassa pijpiyyasildi. the re~pondent having neither admitted nor denied a charge. settlement by an undertaking. which. settlement for the insane. the complainant and the respondent. -. settlement with the prospect of further inquiry.. the third by rules 1J 4 and 7. if any. ~'.

heard or apprehended. hold anybody in contempt The Judge or umpire (anuvijjaka). Having the welfare of aU at heart.reminding him of the nature of his cnminal . The complainant or pla%ntifj (codaka) must institute his complaint at the proper time.vho are the parties of the case.:.able. e comp_aint may be wej ounad or unfounded. ft"':::'p~ndent himself will plead "not guily. complainant a. on account of theIr own superiority in knowledge or seniority in age. Member£! of a. whde the. The judge (anuvijjaka).. . It may arise from any thing seen. They must not be biassed. the nature of the breach of morality. must receive the arguments of the complainant and the respondent . The c~vnplamRnt will say that the respondent "is guilty. in its true detail. and whiCh may rous(" di~­ pute or ill-feeling. A council of monks (sangha) engaged in trying a case. the section of the moral code applicable to the case and the nature nf the personnel of the council and the parties. accused or defendant (cuditaka) mnqt speak the truth and must not show temper. A complaint (cA>dana) is intended for humiliating a person by A complamt.le and relevant terms and in good spirit The respondent. Deliberation (matUcflmma) must he shared in by each member of the council. must not talk rashly or in haste. or they may solicit their brother monks to speak on it. in gent.nd respondent.. have to say. when neceseary.in from talkin~ of a subject which is in it~elf unprofit.kkhu).t fefra.. the parti{':." anfi pall nd lnstead of .TOPICS OF LOGIC MENTIONED IN OLD BUDD LITERATURE. complaint (codana). 231 A. He must hear attentively what. A judicial council of monks (sangha)."l true. employ persuasion and exhortation towards the respondent and should at times expreR3 t.." apwmo.. They must not.he version of one party a. elected hy the council to act as ~n('h. or they may remain ahsolutely silent The member~ must ascertain the nature of the ca.. council (8amgumiivacara bhl. He mu<. he must not hastily accept t.heir sati8faetion at his conduct..v should. They must refrain from irrelc""ant and useless talk They may speak on good law. Th 1 • 11 f d actIOn.:e under trial. They must kn0w how to take their respective seats. The monks who constitute the members of a judicial counml (called in Pali 8arM}amaVacara bhikkhu) must approach the council with meekness of spirit. The.

h his :first statecnent The judge must. Pubba-karaTj.ram and SamantapAsadlka: of Buddhagho~a. W. name. As T0L'Uru::..he parties.0 respondent the judge must not put to him qu(>..'!. .?s. As an Im.. ·Old~nberg.. He must make the languid cheerful thE' tllllid hopeful. He mu-. ti:1C' Juugn. 1. hatred.t'''standR the natul'e of the complJ.he case in season and not out of season.l.t in\'E'~tig. and must not. Uposatba (Sabbath). of the Villayarpitaka. and the angry cool He must not act from a. and his judgment may he infiucncpcI hy (1. teacher.bba.• n. tradltion. must take note of what they say.a.."tp. fan111y.A. and also the tra. fear or delusion.discarding the statement of either ot t.or. Vinaya-pitaka: Patimokkha (490 B. for Justic(' and not for pl'ivat. lightiug a lamp. with good Vi'll! and \vltb his Hmb~ and sense-orgaus duly restrained He must control the complainant and the respondent. on which monk~ requisItes : are to assem bIe.i:->: he m~keq.nkha·vlte.)1e cDunrll ann not for a particular individnn.in the several. Compare also the Tlbt?tan ver~!1on of the Patnmokkha called So-sor-tl1ar-pa edlted with tha Tibetan text and an Enghsh tramlatlOn by Dr Satie Chandra Vidyabhusana in J.te t..nslation of.ka~a!. satisfy himself that the complaina.). C3. ~915. as it.y refer to his precept.11\. preparation. tl:.jjani. for what is really good and not for what i. is nnd not as It is not" gently and not rudely.tance of the method III which monks combined In a An ecelOSlastwaJ twt councIl (sangha) used to p('rform an ecclesiastical act (kiccadh£karana)t I ('xpla.ta and pubba-1cicca are explamed fully in the Ka. The judge must have respect for the ". stages and requisites of the Buddhist sabbath called uposatha I m accordance with the Patimokkhupadesa I of the Vinavaptiaka .twns \vhwh n'!::. if the uposatha is celebrated m the night 1 Vide the Pili Pitimokkha. add .'my thing that they do not say. 3 _an~ 4.C.nt U:IC.B . resident pupil. Pu. A judge who behaves himself In this way is a true followt'l' of Burldha and IS justly loved by all people 66.ffection. hrother-pl'iest. Rhys Davids and H.S. brooming or cleansing the ground.::-i()n 1'" that thereby the judge may bo bit1Asrd to\val'ds or prejudiced ng<1inst the respondent. fear or deluslOn.: agreea:lle t.e Interest. tho VlOaya texts by T. whICh refers to the following (a) Smnma. (b) Padipa. clan or native plaCf' Thl' re3.o a particular company in which he IS interested.fi'echon) hatred.. r"':ust see that each party is consistE'nt wit.

\'i'ah~r. do ye now express your purity. Sf'3. If nothing is said I am to understand that the brethren are perfectly pure.e iirocehi. called nidana. must inform it of h18 purity through a brothermonk. (e) Oviida. do ye convey my authorIty to the council (0) Parisuddhi.l1-<1v01dable cause. attend a council. viz ::12 \ ~::.. purity.!cQ. Ie) UtuJ:khana.ist of four five..4kicca.. I give authority. arrangement for the instruction to be imparted to a coupClI of nnns by a monk deputed for the purpose 3. vote by prox~'.:l. Pubba. ::a::::::ir:Q: t~e season In a year there are three seasons. lIsten to me.Inch monks are to ~!t.1S thus . III a council A council may com.. _t\s a monk gives an answer if a qnestion is put to him individually. is cited below : o brethren. chandam me hara.-e my authorIty. v£z those held on the 14th day or the moon. ten.he 14th (or 15th) day of the lunar month for the celebration of sabbath by the council of monks. Pattakallam. If there is no fault. HaY.e the preliminary acts been performed? 0 brethren. owmu. he li1:1V authorize I:t brother·monk to exereu"€ hI'" VOt0 The formula of authori· zatlOn fU. the council should see whether it was the right time when every thing was in order and there was nothing objectionable 4.h amity between two contending partie&. thos€ ' held on the 15th day of the moon. chandam m. so each monk is .~e!. to anx u. by the common consent of a councIl of monks to estabh<. let him confess it.he following :(a) Cluznda. If it is convenient to the council. let us celebrate sabbath and recite the (rules of) Patlllokkha. in season When the pubba4kara'lfa and pubba-kicca are over. for drmkmg or washmg one's face and le-g (d) Asana. the preliminary acts. 1 pray To~day IS t. The introductory part of the Patimokkha. (d) Bhlklchu-ganana. summer and rai. Patimokkhuddesa. and tho~e held on a. in each of which there are celebrated eight uposathas (sabbaths). say nothing what')oever.ny day.. If t1 monk cannot. \vhwh l"pfer to t. (} posathas a 1'8 of three kinds.t on v.{c} ~do. I shall recite the Patimokkha We shall all listen to it calmly and bear the same in mind. recitation of the' code of monastic laws. A monk who cannot attend a council of sabbath. do ye recen.s committed any fault.. \Vhosoever 3. cliandmn dl1m. 2. countmg the number of monk:.mong you ha. tV\'ent~7 or more monks. present.1Iti. The third and seyenth uposathas of every season are held on the 14th day of the moon w htle the remrdning t:lix are held on the 15th day of the moon.

aya patiiiiiaya hevatb. Whatsoever monk. Abhidhamma-pl'l. t.kavadisaa attano nissaya patiiiiiam paraYSdlSSa laddhiya. I~ the comrn~nta~y on the above passage even ekala (quibble). has been used. handly lent to me by Anagarika R.a. thus mterrogated three times. four rules regarding matters which must be confessed. p. proposition)) upanaya (in Sanskrit.O).la. TheKathavatthuppakara:Q. his mention of some of its technical terms warrants us to suppose that that science in some shape existed in India in his time. does not confess a fault of whwh there is recollection. 63). composed by Moggaliputta Tissa at the Third BuddhiRt Council during the reign of Asoka ahout 255 B 0 . In which the terms pa. one hundred and twelve rules which mU'3t be learnt (committed to memory). too: upanaya. Siamese edition.a.a and niggaha occur. thirty rules regarding sins which involve forfeiture. Smith's seventeenth year of hiS reign the Third Buddhist Council t.! mentions anuyoga (inquiry). should confess it if he remembers the same. patiiiiia (in Sanskrit: pratijiUi.l which are the technical terms of Logic. humiliation or defeat). 5.:fI. Having made confession he will reside m happmes. ehalena niggahe aroplte Idani tass'eva pa~iiiii9ya dhammena.wo rule. (vide Vmcent A. the throne of Magadha m 272 B. 1 Al10ka ascended A~oka. samena attavade jayarh daqseturil anulomanaye pucchii sa. been declared by Lord Buddha to be n.•.. he Will not be happy o brethren. therefore they say nothing.·a Jlitahivarilsa.C. okiaam adatva . 2 Niggaha-catukkam is the name of a section of the first chapter of the KathivatthuppakaraJ. The uttermg of a dell berate lie has. is gniltj' of uttering a deliberate he. 0 brethren.ook place (Wije~imha. niqgaha (in Sanskrit: nigraha.i:fl. who has committed a fault and del:lires to be cleansed therefrom. I have recited the IntroductIOn to the PatImokkha. Dharmapala). sin called obstacle Therefore a monk. . the monks should leave the sabbath hall with a feeling of universal love 67.. I now ask you whether you are perfectly pure I ask you a second time and a third time. Upa. s.la (ABOUT 255 B.aka: Kathavatthuppakarat. 3. lUnety-two rules regarding sins which require expiation. p. appplication of reason). The brethren are perfectly pure.tukkam is the name of another sectIOn of that work. about 255 B. tlUrteen rules of suspension from monkhood. :is quoted below:No oa mayaril tayi tattha het.naya-ca.l. which is another techmcal term of Logle. But if he does not confess or declare his fault. etc. ahara1'}a (illustration). p... Though Moggaliputta Tissa has not made any reference to a specific worlr on Logic. After the Patimokkha in its entIrety has been recited. 29). A passage. Evam tena. patijananti hevam niggahetabbo (KathavatthuppakaraJ.C.. In the .o do I understand Then are recited the four rules of deteat. a work of the Abhidhamma-pitaka. and seven rules for the settlement of cases If any monk makes any confession. it IS noted and considered.s regarding undetet'mined matters. in sueh a council.to give an answer when I repeat my questIOn three tImes in a council of monks like this.

published by the Pali Text Society of London.ylor and publlShed by the Pili Text Soci-ety. Rhys Davids. 1-70. published by the Pab Text Society. A rejoinder by the respondent (patikamma). it is not known. Theravadin: Is the soul known in the same way as a genuinely real thing? Puggalavadin. 13). pp.68. the following controversy (katha) between a Theravadin (a Buddhist disputant who did not admit the existence of the soul.a-aHhakatha. edited by A. (iii) If the statement (b) is not admItted. (ii) That which you say here is wrong. (iv) In admitting the statement (a) but in denymg the statement (b). Vtz (a) the soul is known in the sense of a genuinely real thing. the soul (puggaZa) known III the sense of a genuinely real thing 1 Pug gala vadin : Yes. Puggalavadin: Ac~nowledge the rejoinder. p. (Kathavatthuppakara!}. (i) If the soul is known in the seIlse of a genuinely real thmg. As a speClmen of the method of reasoning carried on during the time of Asoka. Puggala vadin: Is the soul not known in the sense of a genuinel. Ta. Compare the English translation called . unknown in the same way as & genuinehr real thing is known 1 Theravadin: No. then} good sir. METHODS OF DISPUTATION AS ILLUSTRATED IN THE KATHAV A1'THU. then mdeed the statement (a) cannot be admitted either. I. Puggalavadin: Is it. that cannot be said Theravadin' Acknowledge )TOUr defeat. 1 Kathavfltthu. London." by Mr.v real thing? Theravadin: No. London. C. Thel'ftvadin. pp. but not (b) known in the same way as any other genuinely real thing is known. vo1. I. I Points of Controversy.. No. Shwe Za.n Aung and Mrs. that cannot be said. . puggala) is quoted from the Kathavatthu I : A case presented by a disputant In a regular form (anuloma). 1-69. as a genuine reality) and a Puggalavadin (a heretic respondent who asserted that there was a genuine reality called soul. you should also say that the soul is known in the same way as any other genuinely real thmg is known. puggala. you are wrong.

you cannot admit the statement (a) either." . say that the statement (a) is to be admitted. you have. Application of the reasoning of the disputant to his own case (upanaya). We s!1id: '~(a) the sotlI is known in the sense of a genuinely real thing.ay as a genumely ff'aI thing is kno\\n. you should also say that the sou1 h unknown m the same way as a genuinely real thing li" known (Ii) That which you say here is wrong. The rejoinder cau.t the soul is not known in the sense of a genuinely real thmg. then. but the statement (b) is not to be admitted. hut not (b) unknown in the ''>ame way as a genuinely real thing is known. kno\'1'n m the sense of a genuinely real thing. then the statement (a) cannot be admitted -either. (i) Your statement--tha. do ye apply your reasoning to your own case. Puggalavadin: If the defeat we have inflicted on you is considered unfair. (b). then.ement (b) l~ denied. you are wrong." Now. gl)od sir. assented to the truth of our statement and have arknowledged defeat. (iii) Ii the stat. VIZ (a) the soul IS not known in the sense of a genumely real thing. but (b) unknown in the same way as a genuinely real thing is known. (IV) In admitting the statement (a) but in denymg the statement (b). (iii) If the statement (b) is not admitted. you are wrong. then the statement (a) cannot be admitted either." You observed: "if the statement (b) IS not admitted. :you say: "(a) the soul is not known in the sense of a genuinely real thing.sing entanglement or defeat on the disputa.nt (niggaha) PuggaJavadin: If in your opinion we should say that the soul is not known In the sense of a genuinely real thing but not unknown m the same way as a genuinely real thing :is known. then the statement (a) cannot be admitted either (iv) In admitting the statement (a) but m denying the statement." FoHmving you we observe: "if you do not admit the statement (b). but not unknown in the same way as a genuinely real thing IS known-is wrong (u) You should not.(i) If the soul is not. by your own proposition. but not (b) unknown in the same v.

with the statement (6). and is matter also known in the same sense 1 Puggalavadin. you should also have admitted one of the four alternatives. (ni) ~r E: :3~~tement (0) 'Is denied. (u) it lS \vrong to couplE' the statement (a).atement (b) must also be admitted. Theravadin: Is matter one thing and the soul another 1 Puggalavadin. vtz. pacca'lnka-niggaho) In which the respondent is a Thera. the soul is not known H1 the sanw way as a !7e:'. you should have admItted that they are distinct things. Fourth or Fifth Defeat the question runs respectively as foHows' « Is the soul known everywhere. it must also be knO\Hl in the same \\ av as a genuinely real thmg IS known. To say that the soul and matter are both known in the sense pf genuinely real things but that they are not mutually distinct things. Thera. the soul 18 known in the sense of a genuinely real thing. .:!Ee!v real thing is kno\\ n. viz.ConclUSIOn (1l1ggamana) Puggala vadm As for ourselves we <1. You are wrong to admit the former proposition and not the latter. Your posItion IS untenable. is wrong If the soul is known in the sense of a genuinely real thing. then.. good sir.hen the ~t.vadin' Is the soul known in the sense of a genuinely real thmg. good sir'. A case presented through a sImple comparison (8uddk"ka samsandana) . Yes. If you cannot admit any of the four alternatives then indeed. t. If the latter cannot be admitted. In the Third. . then. good sir. then the statement (a) must also be demed (IV) If the statement (a) 1S admitted. The defeat you propose to infhct on us is unfaH' But our rejomder is faIr and demonstration well done. always or in everything in the sense of a genu1nely real thing 1 " "In the Sixth.) not de3erve any defe~t The foHo\vmg assumptions whICh yon made are wrong :(i) 1£ the soul IS known 111 the sellse of a genmnely real thmg. The above is an instance of First Defeat (pathamo niggaho). you should not assent to the proposition that th~ soul is known in the sense of a genuinely real thing. neither should the former be admitted. No.vadin. C :' __ The argument is suitably repeated m the Second Defeat (adverse controversy. If the soul and matter be each known in the sense of a genuinely real thing.'. that cannot be said TheravaJlin' Acknowledge defeat. Seventh and Eighth Defeats not known is substituted for known :m the question.

is wrong. Vtz. a portion is known and the remaining portion is not known.. Feeling (vedanii) too is known as such. neither should you have admitted the first pair Your position is wrong. Thera vadin . Tberavadin: Acknowledge defeat. the soul another thing? Puggalavadin: No. Clearing the meaning of terms (vacana-sodhana). compounded or uncompounded. A case presented through an analogy (opamma-samsandana)..tion in admitting the first pair of propositions but not the second pair. etc. but of that which is known a portion is soul and the remaining portion is not soul. then by analogy. of the soul. they. . 10wn as genuinely real things. and is that which is known (predicate) the soul? Puggalavadin: The soul is knowll.. The extension of the subject in relation to its predicate is clearly set forth in the following controversy ' Theravadin. If you cannot admit the second pair. Puggalavadin: No. you have admitted l kno\vn as a genuinely real thing.y real thing '2 Puggala vadin Yes. that cannot be said. Theravadin Do you say this with respect to the subject also. eternal or temporal. that cannot be admitted. Theravadin: Then. can equally be two different things.DefinItIOn of terms (lakkharpay1. Theraval!in' Acknowledge defeat. Is the soul (subject) known. as matter is known ~ Puggalavadin: y~s. is possessed of form or without form '2 Puggalavadin: No. is matter one thmg and feeling another? Puggalavadin. Now. If matteI' and feeling dire both known as genuinely real things and yet are two differept things. Thera va-din' Is the soul related or absolute. good sir. if the soul and matter are both 1. these cannot be said. Yes. . Is the soul known also in the Rense of a genuinely real thing.tt~-katha). Theravadm Is the soul known ill the sense of a genumel. Your posi. IS matter one thing. Theravadin: Matter (rupa) is.

if the sense·organs are conjoined with their objects but not with the mind. C. Theravadin (1) Is matter the soul 1 or (il) Is the sonl in matter? or (iii) Is the soul apart from matter 1 or (iv) Is matter in the soul 1 Puggalavadin No. Thera va din : Do you mean that the sense organs are cQ.j!lcident in time with our sense-cognitions 1 Pubbaseliyas: Yes Theravadin: Do you accept the authorIty of the scripture which declares that there . grass. Theravadin: Therefore you can not say that the S4!lnse-organs are coincident in time with our sense-cognitions. pp 620-621. water. The doctrine of momentariness (kha1Jika-katha) I in its crude form is discussed in the following dialogue :Therava din : Do all things exist in our consciousness for a moment only? Pubbaseliyas. or with the mind but not with the objects. wind.lika~kathli XXII-S. Aung and M~s. Also MaJjhlma Nikaya. Sumeru. and that there will be cognition only when the sense-organs. 190. 1 Kathavatthu. Theravadin: Do you mean that it is in our consciousness that there exist the earth.li Text Society. Theravadin' Acknowledge defeat. Is the soul known in the sense of a genumely real thing ~ Puggalavadin Yes. I. Khat. Compare also the translatlOn called "Pomts of Controversy" by S.A case presented through the four-fold method (catukka-nayasa msandana ). Z. Rhys Davids. twigs and trees? Pubbaseliyas' No. Pubbaseliyas: Shl)uld we say that things do not exist in our mind for a moment only ~ Thera vadin: Yes. that cannot be said. The doctrIne of impermanence (kkarpt·ka-katha). Theravadin. their objects and the mind-all these three-are conjoined ~ Pubbaseliyas: Yes. Yes. Theravadin: Do you mean that our sense-organs have grown along with our sense-cognitions? Pubbaseliyas: No. edited ~Y A. . fire. ocean.vill be no cognition. Taylor in the Pa.

B. Sel.46. pp. . xxxv Menander seems to have LeloYlged to the fa:nily of Enkratldes ".lany were the arts and SCIences he Imew--holy tradltlOn and secular Jaw. harder stIll to overcome. no.'i. vol. ledged superior of all . Nyaya 18 taken as an eqmvalent for the orlgmal N'it~. cau8ation and ". but If you will discuss as a king. r. A scholarly debate well.". for FIettt. Nyaya or Logic. tht> Pura!)." bu. looked at the sun (to ascertain the tIme). xxx. p.E."leS.t placed between Yoga and Vawei?lkl1 it may s1!smfy Nyaya Cau"Ia.B.1.the founders of the varlOUS school". conveyancmg-m a word. and valour. magic.In -thmgs C'Clst Mlhnda-panha ahas THE (ABOUT In Ollr !lund tOI ~ muru'l'llt. called . who was versed in Logic (Niti 01' Nyaya) .E.a. Bhlk~u-sutra 100 A. vol.ne!~t . Reverend SIr. The Kmg said . He was rIch.Pubbasehvc1S Are all thmgs ete-rnt'd 2 ~wble pl'nn. The kmg.). causatMf1..nhu. 8oph~8t8.pells. 'Jerle'). The only Pali work 1)1 which an exphClt referonce to Lugic called Niti (or Nyaya) occurs is the ~!lhnda pJ.D. there was found none equal to Mllmda 10 all IndIa. 69. the four Vedas. the acknow. of thought. And as in wisdom so 10 strength of body. . arlthmetlC. This work contains questions of Milinda (the Greek King l\fenander of Bactria) and replIes of Bhik~u Naga Sena OIl various abstruse matters. mIghty m wealth and prosperity. How is It then that scholars discuss? ' 1 For dISCUSSIOns about date vI. 420.njlO'S Catalogut3 of the Ohrnese Tripltaka. will yo>U dlscuss WIth roe agam? ' ' If your Majesty Will dISCUSS as a scholar (Palf91ta). In it :Ylilmda. No 1358 3 Taken from Rhys Davids' translatlOn of the l\Itlmda-paiiha.D." 3 The following dialogue between MHmda and Naga Sena is quoted to show what was thought to be the proper mode of carrying on debate in the days of those notable persons 4 .z V2de BunylU Na. only N0 Thert:rore.. too.' ..tion. het1t. and eager for diScusslon WIth ca8uists. SWIftness. . the QuestIons of King Mllmda" 10 S B. is thus described : . Niti means" pohty. and the ltlhlisas. serIes. 317-. poetry. astronom. and gentry of that sort.de Rhys Davlds' IntroductIOn to "the Questlons of Kmg l\hlinda" 1n the S. Nyaya and ValSe"llka systems of Hetuvldyi:i or Nytiya piulo"lophy.E..:aiHt~8tll for Lokayata and SOph~8t8 for V~taf}t!a.J. vol xxxv. the SSlnkhya.Ulu HU- mutable Thera vadm Pubbasehva:-. who was fond of wordy disputatIon. medIC. very probably stands for Hetu-vu}.D a It was translated into Chinese under the Eastern Tsin dynasty A.ya..'\ Vide Rhys Davids' QuestlOns of Kmg Mllmda in the S. Yoga. As a dlsputant he \vas hard to equal. . the art of wal. and then saId to tUB mlms tel'S. the whole nmeteen.\'.. and the number of IllS armed hosts knew no cnd .ne. otherwi~0 known as the Bhlk~u-8utra~ which was composed about ~oo A. 2 In the Chinese collection of the Indian booKs it is designated as the Nagasena-Bhlk~u-sutra.". mUSIC.nd to have Invaded IndIa about 155 B C. 6-7.

G. discuss' • And how do kmgs dIscuss? • '\Vhen So klOg.ka. (vide J. that I wIll dISCUSS.. also Sat18 Cl'\andra Vldyabhusana's "Mahayana and Hinayina" m the Journal of the Royal ASIatIc SOCIety of Great Britam and Ireland.he view that the Saka erit dates from Ka. raIned I)'. Kani~ka.C.l of the ASlatlC Society of Bengal.ncent A. Beal. SmIth places Kamska lU 125 AD. J.usanas. vol I.' Dr. scholar. p.' . 400 veari! s.D . Indeed Kalliska was often taken as a general name for the KuSanB kmgs . and he adv. (v~de TradItional Date of Kamska m the Journal of the Royal Asiatic SOCIety of Great Brltam and •Ireland . Corea. Professor Kern and otherb adopt t. if anyone differ from hIm on that pomt..• showmg thereby that Kaniska was regarded as hIstorICal even at that time. Accordmg to Tibetan books such as the Surn-pa tp-cho 2-byun. p.2 Vide Takakusu's I-tsmg. Vj.• that IS. D. Inflict such and such a pllnlshment upon that fenow'" Thus.:. It seems that Kam:\lka..R A.l who was one of their chiefs. Siam.e. or a lay disCIple. 9. as you would WIth a brother. 52--53). then is there a wmdlOg up.hlOh IS !:'I' letter addressed. China. 16 . Your Majesty. or a novice. Kallll?ka flourlShed in 33 B. 'Very well. ORIGIN OF THE MAHAYAN A (ABOUT 78 AD).2 the Great Vehicle.nces a point.. not as a kmg. no. Turu~kas OJ' Scythians. Your Majesty.D.~.Her the mt"vana of Buddha whwh I'! sald to have taken place m 433 B. Gl. . At the opening of the Christian era the no'rth-western part of India was Invaded by the K. and yet thereby they are not angered. one or other IS convICted of error. 396.ke. xxv.C. dlstmctlODs are drawn. he IS apt to fine him. would be born: vide Beal's Buddhist Records of the Western World.ra (ASvaghoi?a) to Kmg Kanl!.lapan. ". for 1910. there 1S Maha1'(j1a-J. Bhandarkar places Kamska at the last q uarte \" of the 3rd cen tury A D.. He accepted the Buddhist faith and established a new system of Buddhism called M ahayana.overence talk unrest. Fleet holds that Kamska founded the Vlkrama era lU 58 B.. a:ld contradlstmctlOns. Kamska. The IJl ahayana gradually spread to Nepal. or even With a 8etvent Be not a:frald ' ' I 70. the Little Vehicle. The old system of Buddhism as promulgated in the Pali Tipltaka was henceforth nicknamed H"inayana.. an account of whwh has been pubbshed by Dr SatlS Chandra Vidyabhusana lU the J Durna. Tibet. Mr. conquered Kasmir~. Mon'golia. p.niska m 78 A. as appears from" A peep into the early history of Ind~a" in the Jo~rnal of the Bombay Brant h of the Royal AsiatIc SOCIety for 1897-9. Thus do scholars. It 18 as a. do kmgs dl"CU. F. 1 Hwen-thsang. etc In India bttj)th the systems prevailed.D. whIle line Hinayijna continued 1111 Ceylon and thence spread to Burmah. January 1900. racords a proI h"c. while Sylvam Levi assigll"i:l hIm an es-dler date of 50 AD. pp. Mdo. \Vhen scholars talk a matter over with one another.C. Let Your H. The same prophecy lS mentionefl by Fa-hlan about 399 A. was different from the king of that name under whose patronage the fourth BuddhIst CounCIl was held. But Mr. In the :§~tan-hgynr. Octob·er 1906) Dr R....ranika-le~ha. 0 Kmg. Palhava and Delhi.S ••Tanuary 1905. discusses a matter. etc. an unravellmg.y of Buddha that 400 years after his nirvana. and is said to have founded the era caned Sakabda in 78 A. La'3sen. 9). who wab a contemporary of A~vagho~a and Nagirjuna. and he then acknowledges hlS m18ts. by MatlCit. saying: . ill the 7th century A.

a ~f the Sutta Pi~aka.i?a of the VmaY. because there already existed many valuable Buddhlst books m that language.. 'viz Sntra. vide Takakusu in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic Soclety of Great .vol.TURE. p. translated from the Sumpah1-chol-byun" in the Journal of the Buddhist Text SOCIety of Oalcutta. of the works composed during or before the time of K. January 1905. Though Kani5ka was not thus the first lounder of the Sanskrit Buddhist literature. 1263.I. it cannot but be acknowledged that it was he. p.'2. (8) Lahtan'!:tara. t . (3) Da4a-bhiimigvara. RegardlOg the authorshIp of Abhldharma. 159.he nirval). the Abhidharma-vibha~[\'. and I have -'- --. The~e three.trmas 01' Nine Sa. Since his time there have been composed innumerable Buddhist works in Sanskrit of which nine called th~ N ava Dharmas S are speciaUy worshipped by the Mahayana Buddhists. 27 . who for the first time proclaimed Sanskrit as the language of the Buddhist Canon. It was composed 300 years after t.. (2) Gag. which was compiled at the council of Kani~kaJ was a mere commentary on KatyayanI-putra's Abhidharma-jiianaprasthi1na-suotra. were the earliest canonical books of the Mahayana Schoel It must not.. 19.-mahltvlbhiiSjla. in an art~cIe named "Some Historical facts cOnDected with the rise and progress of l\bhayana School of Buddhism. Vinaya Vibhfl. C.---- An account of this counCIL is given by Rai Sarat Chandra Das. ORIG[N OF THE SANSKB.-raja. Vide dl~ Watters' "On Yuan Chwang. I. or. Rhys Davids in his Buddhist India. pp.1r8va (or Pfll'l. rather the Abhidharma" mahavibha~a-sastra. p. .[. 18.qa-vyuha. . 1273 aVtd 1275..2 Vide Bunyltl Nanjlo'g Catalogue of the Chinese Tripl~aka.a of l3uddha or 100 years befc·re the time of Kani~ka..laka) and VasuMitra.ni~ka has come down to us in its Sanskrit original.l Pltt1ka. works written in Sanskrit..Dr. It consisted of 500 monk" who composed in Sansknt three works explanatory of the Piili Tipitaki:lJ..nd Abhldharma Vibha~a of the Abhidhamma PIt?aka.cred Work! are :. and (9) Suval'I)a-prabhisa.71. d The N ava Dlv.'.fl. I. observes that the three works composed at the Council of Kani~ka are extant In European hbraries. p 316. and also MOUler Wilhams' B41ddlllsm. a council l was held at . None \I. (1) Asta-sahasrika PrajiHiparamita. or simply ¥ahivibha~a. p.Jalandhara under the superintendence of P.Britain and Ireland.f BUDDH[ST LITERATURE (AROU'£ 78 A.D ) Under the patronage of Kanv.E. 68-69. (6) Saddharma-punqarika..:. 4. be supposed that there had been no Buddhist books written in Sanskrit before Kaniska held his conncil. however. nos. Upl1dci. LOGIC MENTIONED IN THE SANSKRIT BUDDHIST LITERA. part III. a. (4) Samadhi. vol. (5) Latikavatira. This last is a Sanskrit work explanatory of the Pali Abhidhamma Pitaka. Vide Hodgson's Illustrations of the LIterature and Religion of the Buddists. As a fact Kani~ka thought it expedient to introduce SanskrIt as the medium of Buddhistic communicatIOn. (7) Tathigata-guhyaka. 72.ka. For jnstp~nce.

D..vorks. tht"refore. vide Bears Buddhist Records of the Western World. 1 cannot.}(m~ .nl:it iH'i~(iQ ~l1Qif . was translated into Chmese in 221-263 A.::..D. Calcutta. Hwentrusang mentions the Lankivatal'a. d. Yo~.D.name of Hetu-v~dya.lmposed after the time of Kani~ka. THE (BEFORE Lalitavistara 250 A... as it is one of the Nat.. Satis Chandra.. the second under the Western Tsm dynasty A D. 1906. 6-83. 265-316. 1259. 159 and 160. 176 and 177.ions. Many of these work'!.). 1260 and Appendix I. and several works are even replete with logical discusc. p..D I The SanskrIt original of It must have been prepared in IndIa before that time. 175. :to . is mentioned along with the Salukhya. The Lahtavlstara.lf~~. the thll'd under the earlIer Sun dynasty A. say whether there is any mention of Logic in those '.D). such as some of the Nava Dharmas.. under the . In this work Logic. are (1) the Samkhyas who believe l The Lalitavlstara waS translated mto Chmese four tlmes. THE The Lankavatara sfttra 3 is a very sacred work. refuted later by Arya ·Deva. contain references to LOgIC.D.a Dharmas. Vldyabhusans. 40 Vuie Bunyiu YanJio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripita. etc.togue of the Chinese Tripipaka.n account of the Lanklvatara sutra by Satis Chandra Vldyabhushana in the J oornal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Brltam and Ireland. 179. . The first and thIrd translatIons were lost by 730 A D.had no opportunity of examining the Chinese or Tibetan verSIOn of the same. nos. I 6 Bhnyiu 'Nanjio's Cata.i~~ 11f.ro ~U~. • 2 ~ ~li feti~rllQQ \t~ 'fl'(~ ~-." The approxi~ mate date seems to be 300 A.ka. edited by Dr. 420-4:79.. Vide BunylU NanJlo's Catalogue of the Chmese Trlpl~ taka. for. ~ The Sanskrit origmal of thIS work has been publIshed by the Buddhist Text Sooiety of Calcutta snder the editorshIp of Ra... Book XI. no. ft Lahtavlstara. 74. The work also exists In Chmese and Tibetan. •. il'rf. 221-263.-af~. 73. in all of which the Bodhisattva (Buddha Gautama) is said to have acquired distinction.i Sarat Chandra Das and Dr. Lankavatara autra (ABOUT 300 A.. it mentions four heretical schools. 251. The exact date of it is unknown. b The four schools. nos. RaJendra Lal ::\htra in the Bibliotheca IndlCa serIes. But we have before us a very large collectIOn of Sanskrit Buddhist work3 c. Vaisei?ika. nos. Chapter XII.~ l!~ fiffw~~ friqjt fiI~if stJiJ ~Ti ~ 1FlTiI~ fitl{Wi f~'1t l{~Rl "ifCfi~ ISfiif~r­ .'J. and the fourth under the Than dynasty A. which is one of the Nava Dharmas.. p. Vide a..D. beyond the fact that it was translated into Chinese in 443 A..D. The first was prepared under the Han dynasty A. as mentioned in the Chinese Tripitaka.

~a1i1~t 5~~ ~~qihir 135:- Bunyiu )janjlO. ~~ "~~'!:m: ~f'ift ~J{iIT iI~1{ ? • i(.. Jeaf ll). 1259. if~~T: ifi''fl ~N wfi'flil~ ~ifTmn': II I Mdo.l (2) the ValsesJkas who believe in difference. MSS. (Sazhkhya-bhal?ya. I.ylograph) • • til f'( 'fJwffl rio 'Pi 'it1ii.yikas (loglOians) and Tarkikas (dialecticIans). V).s. Sutra 61). vol. Cf ~Cfiit1flf~-wtli 2 F~de JtiltiJ{firit1~i(~~~'t:f: I ~ t:fil' :l${fir~ftrsr~t'i(~ .E!fj·I:. .. vol. }Ido.~ I ~'~r:. no.. the author of Samkhya-bhasya.oC\·~·(Q(.~ ~Tl(..Tfiatiput.ra.).. 36. ~iTillr ~irf~ctiT qf ~m: "Qlnq"ffl~'. Buddhist Text Society's edition) . leaf II" A. - I (Lankavatara siitra. V.S.' :t. A. ~·W~·r!\r~·%·~·!i~·:~:t:l.he . Chap.B. (3) the Nirgrantha-putras who believe in both.7aiya.S.. Lankavatara-siitra.'atara sutra." 6 The Sam'I Here tho word Siilbkhya stan(ls for the Upamsad or Vedanta.~·~·'fI:tl·~·. Chap..sf~ qniin mif'ifiTW mf&1 m: \I .rried on 2 "4"What is the nature of the doctrl11e'that draws conclusion from a reason and an example ~ " 5 Tn Chapter X of the work we read:" Whatever is produced is destructible: this i~ the conclusion of the Tark-ikas. Asiatic Soclety of Bengal's :x.l'as who believe in neither.n I "iii~CU.B. leaf 143.hes the doctrIne of oneness Even ViJiHina Bhlksu. X. II. A.aIikavatara speaks in a prophetic style of the 11. - ~n{ crrfiii(mfi~ 1'f~. khya as mentIOned m the l\lahabharata really teae.in oneness.i (~kah-hgyur.S.·E·W·e. II. Chap..) The Sanskrit orlgmal runs as follows .2 The I. ASIatic SOCIety of Bengal's MSS. Lankiivatara sut.. Cf.. V).~'~~'1I\.~ . sutra. leat .t:1. Mdo.I·Q:. Chap. \I (Lankl. vol.. and \ 4) t.::.o.· I '" (~kah-bgyur. S~ q·~\S.c"::2.t.MSS.t. The TIbetan version runs thus:~·t:1·~~~·IJl. admIts that the Samkhya pllllosophy IS not opposed to the doctnne of oneness. (~kah-hgyur.B.z:. and how is It cn.~~t.9.. '5i'Cfilit (Lankavatara.:.).. " How is tarka (reasollmg) corrected.. p. Reference to LogiC and Thus in Chapter II of the work l\Iahamati LogICians.. MSS. asks Buddha : " Say how in time to come ~\"aiy1i y1 kas '" III flourish? " ..~:!:\ '" I Q.

but the ego or alaya viifdina continues. and par1kalpita: kun-brtag~. II. In emR. Chap.na changes but our ego persists.responding to Tibetan ~nfl.l­ bbyor-pabi-lta.q Chandra Vldyabhusana).l'l itself.crJ:ng .. of the :M§dhyamlkas. ~~'~S~:Q~'W'tl I Prat'rttt-vl.. reminiscences. ('vijiiana-!.o.:. alaya-1)ijf~ana. ~'~z::J.-vada IS called in TIbetan rnam-pa.-dartana.rq.- rnam. p.. tendencies or impressIOns tends to produce the so-called external objects. presentative knowledge which produces the external world drawing us towards it. This basic knowledge. and (2) the objectified knowledge (vastu-prativikalpa mjniina) or knowledge which is manifested as external objects through the act-force (karma) inherent in our aforesaid potentialities. : - 'Il'. ~sha.n~fer. doctrme IS noted m the f(.na). tendencies or impressions..119wmg pas<. According to this doctrine our Idt""al:s-rr. Knowledge (vijnana) is stated to be of two kinds. 'paratantra.:I1)"1~' fanCiful or erroneous. edited by Sarat C'handra Das and Sat. This contrast w_::. is otherwise called an ego (aham). A.or.\·tI"·~~' signifying knowledge as received.n ::nd Siimkhya.ana-vada) is explained..iana IS called in TIbetan: kpn-gshi rnam par-~e!:.u) . 81gmfymg knowledge whIch constltutes the basls or foundation of alL ParinH}pan1)-a I'l called In TIbetan! yon~-grub.. The sd:mkhyl\<. to be so.J'iiana is called in Tibetan: len-paUl. aC'cordmg to the Samkhyas. because while the for~~r look upon ula?Ja a" perfect (parmispar.fY'ft "ril5~'\'ff~(Cil@I'!IS1"'~r \I (Lankavat8ra sutra. 45.age of the Lankavatara suha. cor.r-~e§-pabi-lta-\va. dependent on others..! do however assume an add .:It:.layavij._---------------.-par-seli> ~ap.11) whiCh continues to exist.n-dwan.0 the vIJnana-viidlU'.a'rit Siff~~'QQiiT~ fiJ~fJ{~ ~Wi$~T~~~if '$. ---_. 2 It is perhaps not quite accurate to say that when emancIpated the ego 01 aZaya of the VI) nlina-vadins becomes identical wIth the VOid or sun/JaliJ..qa) o( thB Slirokhya phIlosophy. J:I'f~~ "l. The alaya of the vIJniina-vadins corl'esponds to ahamkara (and puru.-wa.nf'lpatlOn ahamkara. While the latter is compared to an ocean. reminiscences.. .In Chapter II. V'/:Z (1) the potential knowledge (khyatim'jfiana) which remaining in us from time immemorial as a mass of potentialities. The seat of pravrtti-vifnana is called alaya-vijnana.!-pa. It is designated in Sanskrit as yogacara. our pravrtt~-vijiiana totally disappears. complete l. Non-ego or the external world is false (par1:kalpita) and conditional (paratantra). the former is compared to high winds which agitate it.iti qTC(: ~T'l' I CfT~v. "'~~'~~''i'''~~. I t alone is perfect (jJarini~­ pa'ttv. These two kinds of knowledge combin~d constitute what is caned pravrtti vijiiana. By means of concentration (yoga) WB can understand the true nature of the ego.cia) knowledge alone is real and the so-called external objects are mere manifestations of it. disappears. As we pass on our pravrtti-vijiUi.. ~iJi·l. Ulz:. the doctrine of idealism I (vij1i.i persi'3 ts. 2 The 1 VIJiiana."d prinCIple called pur usa (:'01.i !fiI': l{".l~·~a. When emancipated. but aZaya e. the basic knowledge. ~&I·~P:"·~~·Q~'W't1'. the JattE'lr do not consider Siingatli.f'::.

and WijesiIhha'g Mahavamsa. Chapter V. 181 f. I.ms It" pnstinE" purity. p. p.ft 'f3'~r~ "if'{T. lA91. the orthodox priesthood called the Theras. xxiv and xxv. VI. p.Y calling tllll1gt> The doctt'lne of mo1 I lllentariness. 0 fools. 99..------1 fif<IJTqt~ "Neff fi4~. unruft1ed by the ('"'{ternal world and fr('ed from all potentialIties.D. reminiscences. Arya Sammitlya (8) Kurukullaka (9) Avantika (10) VatsJputriya Belonging to the V aibha~ika School of Philosophy.). a clear explanation of the theory that everything is momentary. part III. there i:-. pp. 2 Vide the Journal of the Buddhist Text Society of Calcutta. Benga. 18. In chapter vr of the Lank-tvatt"tr<1-Hl. 15. vol.Arya Sarvl1stiva.ses as follows:- I. sa:\' that they are des troyed after being produced" 75. momentalT. sutra.l Asiatic Society's MSS. 1-37. pp xxiii.:. di&tinct III It':iolf. . Tariinatha's Geschichte des BuddhismuB von Schiefner.* ~lI~f"'1f1{ I .-ago. p. 411. aftcl' the nirvuJ]. \ the Buddhists had already been divided into 18 sects 2 grouped into four clap.:. and 1892. ---. Britain and Ireland. Takakusu's I-tsmg. Rhys Davids' article in the Journal of the Royal AsiatIC Society of Great. ntta. EIGHTEEN SEOTS OF THE BUDDHISTS We 'have previ()u:31y found that within 200 year. Chap.~ f~ lililT1J.V"''t I 'IS iQ"'iEIif'. 270-274..e in India 17 heretical sectR beside:-.lff~ wi if' " ~fI' 1fT'fttTm: 1\ (Latikitvatara.da (l) MUla Sarvastivada (2) Kasyapiya (3) Mahisasaka (4) Dharma-guptiya (5) Bahusrutiya (6) Tamrasa~Jya (7) Vlbhajyavadin II.a of Buddha there aror. Rockhill's Buddha. about 78 A. pp. p. I moan t lat t leV are not produced I do not. This is its emancipation or final rest. and not liable to cE':. In a passage of the Butra the author observes as follows 1 : "A momentary thing IS thf1t which is inactlve. r .).l:latiol1 B. ."1tra entItled lc"anikaparivarla (a chapter on momentarines:-. tendencie-. part I.. the r(>sult being that at the time of Kani~ka. or llnpre~"ion". In course of time some of these sects disappeared while new ones grew up.

p xxi.tvata (14) Lokotta'ravRchn (15) Prd-ifiaptivKdin IV. 1 I Belongmg to I. eXIsts m Chinese and Tibetan: vt4e BunyIU Nanlio's Cd-talogue of the Chmese Tripltaka.Ar~'n Mahasarrlghika (Ill Purvn-saila (12) Apara-snila (I :{) Halml. . 121. though later on they joinC'd the ]1. nos.3 or simpl.hana-sastra. second edition.ponding external nbject were both reaL The fundamental philosophical work of thiq sect is KatyayanI-putra's Abhidharma-jfiana-prasthana-sastra. at any rate theu' subc]as". !2 V~de Takakmu's I-t~mg. llH) Abhayaglri\'a~:nn An the sects men tlOnf"d above belonged to the Hinayana.a vaniya and III. chapter on Ba\lrlrlha-rla. composed 300 Yflars after tlhe nirv1ina of Buddha The next work of this sect IS the Abhidharroa-mahavibha~a-sastra."Iika given by th':l Hindu philosopher . admitted the reality of the world -internal and external. This work.. 1275. translated by Cowell and Gough. nos 1263. 139 n. p xxu. part II.. 1273. were" follower<! of the Vaibha~lka plnlo'lophy The Hmdu phtlogopher VaC'agpaLi Ml~ra m hIS NyFiy'\ vartika-t1:itparyatikii 3-1-1 quotes the OptOlon':! of tilt) Valbhii'llka'3 who were c'tllcd Viitsiputrits 3 ThIS work eXIsts In Chmege and Tlbetan' v~de BunyIU Nanpo's Oatalogue of the Chinese Trlpitaka." and the II V~d(l H@al's Buddhlst Records of the Western Wodd{ vol 1. viz thr.r~::tnp.lcutta for 1895.1 ahayana too. too. 4 . compiled at the council of Kaniska. Arya Hthavlra (Hi) Maha:vlham (17) . The Arya Sammitlvas. as their name implIes. viz. about 78 A D It was from this Vibha8a thai the name Vaibhasika 5 wa~ derived. thf' (3) Mijd~yamika and YogflC(1ra So thGre were altogether bur schoofs of plulosophy) two of the Hinayana and two of the Maha- yana I Vaibkit. 1264 _ /) Compare the explanation of VaibM.ormulated into two schools. Madhavaciirya in hi" Sarvada.r~ana-sarhgrahq.u's I-tsmg. p 24 V~de Ftho Satls Chandra VJdyabhusana's " Miidhyamika School" in the Journal of the Buddhist Text SOClety of Oa.V Jfiana-prast.Jet.rc"intika. The Mahayana sect of the Buddhists founded by K<Lni.called the Vatslputriya'3.. Vibha~a means" commentary. FOUR SCHOOLS OF THE BUDDHIST PHILOSOPHY The phIlosophical views of the sects mentioned ahov~ were gradually f. who. 76. Inci Takalm<. <J.4 or simply Vibha~a.ka established two other schools of philosophy.(1) Vai~ha8ika and (2) 8al1(. pr.he Rautriintika Schuol of Philosophy.nka was a later appellation of the philosophy of the Sarvustivada (PaIi: SabbatthivlLrla) sect'! Vaihhasiko. In fact the VaihhlL~ika said that our cognition and its correc. . p.

herefrom infer the eXlstence of the external object::-.\. p 59 6 For the Dhammnttariya or Dharmottara. mt'aning "original text" The Sautrantika philo51ophy seems to have be-en so called. p.. }\V'idhyamlka School" in the Journal of the Buddhist Text Society of Calcutta for 1895.\.hs. called in P:1li Theras. vi.v..v. on which the Suut.mghikas . a~d Asvagho~a There was another very famous teacher named Srilabdha S who wrote Vibhalfa-siistl'a (or commentary on a work) of the Sautl'antl.ra-. sect. states tlU1. 143. 95.. 225. belongod to the sect of _3.i is a most learned work of the llaibhasika philosophy_ Sautrantika. p. Sanghabhadra's ~yi1yiinusd.nd TiraniHha. \'01.-kuraka-sastra. admit cognition and t. For Sangha-bhlldl'a..a Sthavlras." vol.lltted by Co\veU and Gough. p. p.ern World.ntika philosophy was based. II. given by the Hindu philo90phet' Miidhavacikya In the Sarvadarsana-samgraha. Vide BUl1yiu ~anJio's Ci\tnlogue of the Chinese Tripitaka. part Ill.nd Tiidintitha's Gt'SC'hll'hte des Buddhlsmtls von Schie£ner.he sect of the Mahasa. " VIde 'Watters' " On Yuan Chwang. who were the first dissenters in 390 B. vide Bunym NanjlO's Catalogue of the ChinesE' Trlpltaka. vlde Wagsilief's Buddhism.' during the reign of Kani~ka about 78 A. and T*lrAnfi.226. Arya Deva (q. p.pter V.dha. and pOf'isibly also to t.sika phIlosophy seems to hltve been so caned because it.). 302.3 was derived from Sutrant. was based on the comment9.t.}. 1. 67. who visited IndIa early in the 7th century AD.he FI1'st Conncil in 490 B. where Kumara-Iabha :stands for Kumara Inbdha. p.a. . i Vide Bt~al's BuddI-usc Records of the West-€ 'rn World. pl\tt II. 161. composed about 4SD A.a. pp 193-194. second edIt LOn • p. part I.D. Buddhist Recorns of the West. H wen thsang saw in Ayodhya the ruins of a Sailgharama where Srilabdha resided.a.t the renowned teacher Kumaralabdha 7 of Takt?asila (Taxila in the Prmjt1b) was the founder of the Sautriintlka school and wrote several very valuable treatises on it.. -"01 I . . no 1265 2. ~ rid!' Bears Buodhist RecOl:ds of the Westf'rn World. Wijesithha's foot note.-:.D. 4.t1·antilca.O . 6 But the Chinese pil~rim H wen-thsang.astra.1 otherwisE' called Ko'. a. vol I. p. He is supposed to have lived about ~~oo A D.. The philosophical prinCiples of tIllS school are said to have been formulated in Kasmira.. because it was based on the original text of the teachings of Buddha rather than on the commentaries thereon. tl'an. by a sage nt"!.e a180 Hwen-thsang's Trav01 in Bear::.. explanatIon at the term Sautr'lintifur. 18. 3 Compal'e th.>med Dharmottara or Uttara-dharma. 15. called in PiHi SuUanta. chapter on Bauddhadarsana..pp.Vaiblul.1'. [) Vic1t:) t. 19... 78.'s Geschlchtt" dl"S Bu(tdhismns von Schiefnt'r. p. ----. 26 Vide a1'10 Satis Chandra Vldvabhllsana's . a. who held t.1 This W0t'4 f'xists m Chinese and TIbetan. 168. as he was a contemporary of Nagarjuna (q. cha. pp.l'ios rather tnan on the original tE'xts of the teaehm~s of Bni'.ka school. and Mahavamsa.'s Geschlchte des Buddhismtls von S~hlefner. Vide Rhys DaVIds' Buddhist India..C.lH" Jonrnal of the Buddhist Text SOCIety of Calcutta. 233. voVII. The name Sau. and Beal's Fahian and Sungyun. no. The te-xt. Appendix II. p.

Sabs Chandra V.vamllia Philosophy. I) Vide Schlagmt'welt's BuddhIsm. second edlhon. 2 of the Lanka. chap. nor totany unreal. 11i f..' The yogacara or the contempbtrve s. Schlagmt\A. part IV. when the Lailkavatara autra etc." vol. and Wat. Tibet and Nepal as yogucarya For an account of thlS system.caras rnamtuinrd thfit the ex ternal obircts . no. no. chapter on Bauddhadaraana. P 371.\Ve. because it emphasised the practice of medltatlOn as the means of attaining bhfOlnS 2 or the seventeen st.pounded of yoga meanmg 'medit. V 6 Compare- l'liIlifr lJmltJ1~or. were composed.amgraha LXIV and LXV.vatflra !:'Iutra.. Calcutta Buddhi<.ages of BuddhIstic PerfE'rtlOH. p. and also Dr.ell and Gough. Vldyabhusana's note on p. which is the same as our' ego' or 'soul. 2 Vide Dharmar. p. 1\fadhyamikas held that our cognition and its corresponding external object were neit. chap V Compare explauatwn of the 'word fjogacara gHlen by the Hmdu philosopher l\Ifidhavscfirytt in tllC Sarvadarsana-samgraha. 226.he saIne . p 185. no. Vide sectIOn Mdo of the ~~tan-bgyur' Lama Taran:itha's Geschwhte des Buddhlsmus von Schlefnel'. chapter on Buddha-dar~a'la.q"R~lc! 1ifwi~i~RffTi~ ~ ~r '5Jfi'1q~m ~ ~""It It (Madhyamildi vrtti. p.ystf'm wa::.j..losophy IS generally known in Chma. The chief dogma established in it IS i1laya-oI1 ii{ma / tIl{' basls of conscious states. vide Watters' " On luan Chwang.samaya su. l\Iah£i. 1897. . p. I) p. Dr.ta. pp.nnrc-al hut tht" l'f'ahty of onr cognitIOn could not Yogt'kara. part II. Maitreyanatha and Arya Asunga \vere the eady teac!'ers of it.275. second € 'dltlon. ride also Satls Chandra Yldyabhusana's "t}'e Madhyamlka School" m the Journal of tht. be nemed Tbe word I ?jogaci11'a (caBed in Tibetan rnal-hbyor-wahn ~trt-wa) !~ con:. 1908 . I" in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. school. 'rhe yoglicara school seems to have originated about 300 A. translated by Co\vell and Gough.> Buddhl&t Text SOCIety of Calcutta. 4.tpZ'n \Yorld. 24.t Text Society't:! edltlOn) Compare the explanation of the term Madhyam~ka gIven by the Hmdu philosopher l\Iadhavacarya. Apper:dlx I. 7."'ork.. XXIV.' It IS not known who was the founder of the !JoguC{l. ~o caUE-d. vol II. Beal's Buddhlst Records of the . translated by Cow. J.tra.5 Bodhisattvaearya-nlrdesa and Saptndacia-bhflml-Mstr&-yoga. but in the Tibetan. The name . 45 of . vol. edIted by :Max Mulle!' and Wenzel. .8lt's BuddhIsm. Vide Dr. and also see p. Bunym NanjlO's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka.tel's' " On Yuan Clnvang. 356." vol J. 220. 24. pp.dyabhusana's History of the M6'dhyanuka phIlosophY of Nagarjnna In the Journal of the Buddhist Text Society of Calcutta. and Chinese hooks 40 the Lankavatara sutra. vilnana.vere. Satiq Chandra Vldyabhusana's "DeSCl'lptlve hst of works on the Madh. I. . 3 For an explanatIOn or alaya.Yogfi.carya have been named as the prominent old works of the system. p.is Chandra. pracbcp...7-20. chap.. Calcutta Buddn!5t Text Society's edition.hel' absolutely real Miidhyamlka.atIOn· and {zcLfiti mea 11tng .D. in the Sarvadar~ana·samgraha. see Sat. 1895.11 adhyamika t<) (caned in Tibetan: Dwu-ma) was derived from madhyama) the 1 The yogacara ph.

rikft by Nagiirjuna. The trans IfltlOll closes by mentioning eight expounders of the Miidhvamika philosophy. Mfldhyamika-vrt. was translated into Tihetan under orders of the great king I)pa.n official interpreter Klubi-r·gyal-!J.lw theol'Y of absolute . The J. by the IndIan ~age Jiiiinn-garbha and the rribeta. inculcating that the world had only a _conditional f'Xl~tf'nCf'.lgftrjuna about 250-320 A. Hastabala by Arya Deva. SCHOOl.. Madhyama-hrdaya-kftrika by Bhavya. .D In fact the doctrm!-'s of the school are contained in older works such as the Prajfif1ptt1'amita The Mftdhyamika kf1.l-lha-tsan-po.viz. eIf iP I. Sthavira Buddha Pithtu.tr hy Candra fOrti and Madhyamikuvatara-tlka by Jayananta. nor that of total unreality. MED.N LOGW. GUI). of th!' world.reality. 'Candrn Kirti~ Dev Sarma.l1adhyamika philosophy was so ('aIled bel'ause it avoided two extremes. Sthil'a-1llati and Bhavya (or Bhava-vlveka).lbhun. Arya Nagarjuna.~. advocated Iwither t.. Madhyamapratitya-saroutpada by Kr~!). work of Nagarjuna. i. The school is s"'~d to have been founded hy :\rya X.250 INDI$. . Miila-madhyama-v:rtti by Buddha Pfdlta.-are the prmclpal works of the Madhyamika School Mu]a-madhyamakt-vrtti-akutobhaya.a-mati.'Gu~a-sri. . BUDDHiST LOGIC. hut ('ho~e a nllddlr path. a. middle.a.

A D. 84. It was translated into Clllnese in 43!. 1883. pp. or rather Arya Nagarjuna. is contained In the ~~tan-bgyur.. A<:. RIS1~ OF THE BUDDlIls'r LOGIC. was a great logiclan He was born at Vidarbha (modern Berar) in Mahakosala. and SatlS Chanor'a Vldyabhusana s Notes on Ratnava.D. 78.li.vritings of Kftgilrjuna and Arya neva of the Madhyamika School. 77. p xi. oj. and BookX. n. and overthrew the Kanva dynasty in northern IndIa about 31 B C. gl. p. vol.J!2de Dr. Recond editIOn. a a~d passed many of his days in meditation in a cave-dwelling of th~ SrI-parvata/ that bordered on the river KrsIJ. 6 Vide Tsranatha's Gesehlchte des Buddhlsmus . Watters'" On Yuan Chwang. 25-37.a. The adherents of each of the schools consldered it advantag('olls to employ logical arguments in defending their own dogmas and attackmg those of their opponents. 69-73. and l\Taitreya.CHJ.-.-. The TIbetan version of 8uhrllekha. Tiiranatha.fner.maravati was erected. p. 210. Thi<:l letter IS called Arya Naga.anga and Vasubandhu of the yogacara.& to Buddhism. Book VIII. They remamed powerful up to 436 A. ARYA NAGARJUNA (ABOUT 250-320 A. and Wasszljew quoted by Scluefner in the Gescll1chte de Buddlusmns. act I.. named Bhoja Deva. d The Andhra kings ruled the northern portIOn of the Madras PreSIdency and the whole of Kahnga. called ~se§-pahi-~prlD-yi~ (sent by Nagarjuna to his friend UdaYlbhadra). Introduction. 66. and to produce a band of logicians among the Buddhists. pp. \Vith the growth of the four philosophical schools just mentioned. NagatJuna wrote an lORtructlve letter to Siitaviihana. pp 71-75. whose pllvate name in Chinesc was Sh'-ycn-toh-cla. pp. For an account of Sri-parvata or Sri-~alla see Hw(-n-thsang's Life.Vide Sewell's LIsts of AntIquitIes in Madras. I V~de . p. 14l-146. Wilson's l\IA'lati-Madhava. . by Beal. 97. 201-202. p.--. Bhandarkar's Early HIstory of the Dekkan. the founder of the Madhyamika School.D. 301 2 Sadvaha 1'\ the same as Satavahana.).'s Geschichte d~s Bud~hismus von Schle. pp 27-29.. MIlo. II. An Engllsh tranblation of thl'> letter has appeared m the Journal of the Pali Text Society of London. I during the reign of King Sadvaha or Satavahana 2 L of the Andhra dynasty].. whlCh is a general name of the kings of the Andhra dynasty . the study of Logic spread far and wide in the Buddhist community. Suh:rllekha.·on Schlefner. pp. This is clear from the .rJuna BodhIsattva..PTER II Early Buddhist WrIters on Logic. He was a pupil of Saraha and is said to have converted a powerful kmg._----~---'- N~garjuna Hwen-thsang-'s Travel in Beal's Buddhist Records of the Western 'World. They were Buddhists. The arguments (·mployed in the course of the defence and attack of the schools served to popularise the Ancient LOglC of Ak~apada. \'01. --.. R G.and It was by them that the magnIficent marble stUpa at L\." vol II.

pp 66. Candra I 1 }-Ruled in Magadha... while 'Candta Gupta. II. BUDDHIST LOGIC.~z::. vide Satis Cha.3. who was born 400 years after the nirvana..§da. he was one of the ertrly patrons or founders of the uni \·er.. 69-73. see Dr.ve l'eigned about 300 A. is descfloed as having been very powerful This Candra Gupta.e Introduction A J..4 The latest date that can be assigned to Nagarjuna is 401 A D.-stCrtra in tht'\ I( Bibliotheca. _ 6 For an account of some of the works on the Tantra by NAgiirJuna.C..252 INDIAN LOGIC..D. .i which had not.n . Indlca" series.ted into Chinese by Kumarajiva.t:!~~'I!fj~l!tJ~ q·~'~~"Irq~ I a!'~'I:1~ I:I~ a'i~·tI 0\ I ~~'ir. at this calculatIOn.:t4~ II (Quoted In the Introduction to Se~-rab-~don-bu pubhshed 10 Calcutta).nty of N:1lr"nda.. t:!~~'Q"~ ~. Xagarjuna called in Tlbeta. that js. XiigarJuna. who wlll do good to the belIovers in the doctrine. S Fahlan describes Na:land. Appendix I. perhap'"'.:ndra Vidyabhusana's Introduction to the Sragdhara.-t-hian came to visit India. p. the seventh king. Nagarjuna is said to have lived four hundred yearR I after the But he does not appear to me to have had so early a date. I I I .j.D when Il his biography was tran. 80-~3 6 V~de Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese 'I'ripitd.. Palmyr Oordier's .-Cf.:~r9~'~ Cl. come into existence in the 1st century B.j. CHAP. pp.--1 It IS prophesIed In the JIanJu-sri-mUla-tantra (caUed in TIbetan HJam-Opal. Ill. in the medical works. named XagarJ una.D. in :~3 R. Bala Candra I ! Candra Gupta The six kings. Nagarjuna was a contemporary of Kmg Nerol Cand.. beginning with Ak"la Candra to S~la... For the latest researches. when the Chinpse pIlgrim F.--.Klu-t:grub" is sta. Oandl'a. Nemi Candra may be assilmed to about 300 A.~~'!." may be the same who founded the Gupta. 2 Vide TaraniHha's GeschlChte des Buddhlsmus von Sci-neiner.ka. The relgns of his predecessors were ~ry short.ted by Lama Taranatha to lutve been a contemporary of King ~emi Candra. No. " It Elhouhl be noted that according to some books of Tibet. According to Lama Taranatha.ra. era in 19 A D. "Foul' hundred years after Buddha's departure from the world there wiil appear a Bhiksu. Buddha was born m 514 B.' 1 "" .. a-.. SCHOOL. Tilranittha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner.C.D. nirv(('I}a of Buddha.'Etude des Traite'3 Medicaux Sanscritas" J .. MED. must."" ~. and was in51gmficant...J aya Candra Nemi Candra Phani Candra } Ruled in Aparantaka. whose genealogy is thus traced ' Aksa Canetra I . as a mere vlllag-e Na-lo: vide Bears Travels of Fa-hlan and Sung-yun. who is supposed to ha. are stated to have been weak and inSIgnificant.• lived 81 years and attaIned nirvana In 433 B.} even in :399 A. of Nagarjuna. !tsa-!gyud) that:- ~. be placed In 33 B C.C.----------------------.--. who" did not take refuge in Buddha. J ! Bham&3.C.l. ---------.

's artICles on the subject published in the Journal of the Buddlust Text SOCIety.. The middle path doctrine-Madhyama-marga.a. Text SOclety's edItion. T Suzuki's artIcle named'" the :\Iadhyal1uka School 10 Chma" pubhshed in the Journal of the Buddhlst Text SOClOty.ra.TUNA'S ~adhyamlka-karika. is that of the middle puth 2 which is to be comprehended from four aspects. it transcends the extremes of bein2' llllddle path '-' and non~bemg which are umfied. The particular~ attain thelr cha. chap. (ABOUT 300 AD).EARLY BUDDHIS'f WRITERS ON LOGIC-NAGARJUNA 253 79. Calcutta). Buddillst. it will be takl11g an onesided view if we arc to say that the . No 7. The doctrine..'lka WIth the Vrttl of Candl'a Kirtl has been published by the BuddhIst Text SO('iety of Cc\lcutta. Petersburg BuddhIst Text SerIes under the editorshlp of Professor LOUIS de La Vallee Poussin.orld exists or that it does not e-xist. see Dr. does. and for Ius hymns such as "bf~rij{ffCf. No.!?atod-pa. The middle path furnishes a contrast to this onesidedness bv ayoidmg the two extremes of being and 110:1-beine. part IY. ow hich ulHfies all pal'tieulal's. and (4) in the sense of absolute truth As we cannot conceive of being (existence) llldepende. 1903.otly of non-being (non-existence)." by Satls Chandra Vldyabhue. For an Indian account of the l\1i1dhyauuka pllllosophy ot' the mIddle path doctrine. (2) as the abnegation of onesidedness.bhusL'tOd's tl<Ln. Nos. 1223. 1895-1900 For the Clunese account. preserved m '. For the phllosoplllcal \\orks of Niigarjuna. as notlCed ll1 Bunyiu )JanJI0's Catalogue of the Chmefoe Trlpltai.cters of pantwularity only through our conception of the um ty ftmong them printed in HanOI...al'a-tarka-sastra or Hetu-vidya nyiiya dvara sa"tra. For an account of other works. Fou!" aspects or the that IS.. .as WIth note::. AppendIX I. In the Journal of the ASIatic SOCiety of Bengal. no 3..latlOn of the Karl!. It has also appeared In the St. 12~4.1907. :2 ~ mql\ol~iil~f't?iiiHc:r ~rcc:liS~raT~1. VIZ (1) in contradist111ction to onesidedness. 1895-1900. 1898.:('!iliiT mq~ ii~filiiT~ ~a n (Madhyalmka vrttl. fii~q¥i~'f etc. This 1S the first aspect of the middle path Denying the two extremes the middlf' path reveals itself through a complete harmony bet'ween them.rlbe-t. Satis Chandra Yidva. mdc ~~an-bgyur 1 . vol. ] 83. is not a work of Nd:gsrjuna but of Dlgniiga 1 The l\la:dhya:tlllka-ksl. nut he beyond them. XXIY. Dr. p. (3) as unity in plurality. ~'~de the article" IndIan LogIC a<.. The Madhyamika-kal'lka 1 is the first regular work on the 1\1 adhyamika philosophy. vol III. new selIes. Ka.3.ff'ij~"aflln ~T . The Nyaya-d'l.. NXGAR. This is the second aspec{j of the middle pdth The middle path. appeared 1n several numbers of the Journal of the Buddlust Text SOCIety of Calcutta.ana. see Bunym NanJlO's Oatalogue of the Chmese Trlpl~aka. which permeates this work. see Satis Chandra Vldyabhusaua.

the p<1l'ticular. ~~. The absolute U11nljala or vo~d) 2 JS demon'ltratcd through t..v(> ceased to be such. 13UDnUI'iT LOG W.o:.a": II (Madhyamiksvrtti.ter exist in relation to the former.. So a whole exists in relatjon to its parts. of the nwlclle path Rv . ~~·l'l:r~~~·q f Paramartha satya lS called' don-darn-pahi-bden-pa. which diEcards a 11 1mlltatlOI1i-.he assumption of two truths-the conditional {sa~wrt~) and the transcendental (paramlil ilia) 3 Judged by tho tranecendental truth no object comes into being or dissolves into non-being. I'&i ~fITf~~i ~ lHJlf1fr: 'iIIl~fri ifT-itfw 'Sirsfq ~1\'fT: I ~"1ftr ~ll~fif l:itsN ~~r: II lfQlT~~S"" m. and the latter exist in relation to the former. Clark. ('n . 41.presses the human conreption of the absolute truth. V. Calcutta). II Had there been no unifying pnnciple. Buddhist Text SOCIety's edItion.wn c-xtremc'4.q~'l:\~~'q I Vide Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana's arbcle on th~ . This IS the third [t'lpcct.n: ~ton-pa-fild. '\fED SCHOOL.tsfq ~ if lfiufW ~: II (Quoted inlVIadhyamlka Vrtti.~ rThese conceptions. \. which are III es- ..~~lflC( ~~f{1{~1{ IIIiI~T~ifI'if1~ ~ifT~flfffi{i(lI1{ I . Buddhist Text Society's editIOn. coming and goingtranscennental truth. absolute" in Dr.~. Edinburgh. these are the eIght fundamental conceptions of relation or condition. the whole world is no better than an illusion. p. l The midd.( nllddle path" it IS not to he under.:e must avoid not only tlw t. 3 Calcutta). Origination and cessation.. This i~ til(' fourth aspect of the mIddle path.he la.As a fact no object has a nature or self-existence' objects come into existence in virtue of certain relations ot' conditiolls Taking a substance and its qualities we find that t. Proceeding in this way we find that the world i'l an aggregate of relations or conditions in virtue of which it revolves like a water-wheel.254 INDHN LOGIC. i~'w)". p. 180.\P... Chap. It IS from the point of view of the conditional truth alone that we can speak of the existence or non-existence of an object . chap. XXIV.~efo'!~'V ~iIt~ q-~T. 4< ~~iil ~~~N ir~TiIf ~~1{iI"T I -tr. These conditions being causes of confusion. J and T. hut al"o the middle. . Hastings' Dictionary of RelIgion. :2 Sunya-vada is called 1ll Tlbeta.t. persIstence and di8continuance. Samvrti satya is called in Tibetan: Kun-rdsob-bden-pa.. The condltIonal and the unity and plurality. . and the former exists in relation to the latter.le path. would ha.. ('X.tood that tlwrf' is something between the two f'xtrcnWJ of being <1nd non-bemg In fact."f~(Cff I ~i.

l which is an Ullconditional condition In which all contradictions are reoonciled." Eternal. 194). I 80." The answer will be that and NIrvana." "Profound. . conditionality must be completely cast aside." or The ab':lolute. Truth and conditionality a. Siinyata "the absolute." nay. 1ifi'i{~~~ lJ~~ ~: . their life is an everlasting prey to the pendulous feelIng of exultCLtion and mO. ." "Absolute" or " Blissful.\RJUNA 255 sence unreal. the thing which lie's beyond conditionality. NAGARJUNA'S REFERENOES TO THE LOGICAL DOCTRINES OJ!' AK~APADA. vVhen our mind is purified from the smirch of conditionality. It may be asked as to whether there is actually a thing cCLlled '8uchness.re incompatible Thercfore." rt avoids the two extremes of "being" and "non-being.• ~~l1iTSN f1Af'qi P l'lCfT'fl ~TlfifT I \Jr<ft\tR ~IT- " ~'lT fitCil'f~ tl""l?t 1\ (Ratnavali quoted 1U ::\Hidhyamika vrtti. and as people cling to them. Logic.1iii1T~T"(~ II • (Miidhyamikavrttl. Where there is conditionality." "Unco~lditioned. In the Madhyamika-karika Nagarjuna has occasionally :t:eferred to certain technical terms 'of Ancient TechnicalIties of LOgIC.i f1t~ ~~111T~ 1ii~~ Ofl~ if crc(rrT ~~l{ II (Miidhyam1ka-siitra. it unifies both by underlying each of them This so-called thing4unyata) is called NirvafJ.2. cannot be expressed In terms of \.a. there will come out the serene nIoon-light of "suohness" (tathata) or transcendental truth (parama'itha). V). chap I) . p. otherwise known as the void or absolute (6unyata). ~l(ifl ~ Cfif I \I l'l~ 1Rll ~~lfq. to attain truth." but in reality no language can give adequate expression to it. such as punarul(ita (repetition) in ~: 1jJ~ ~"f'qT~ ~"1'q 1I(. give rise to our prejudices and wrong judgments There nestles In them t he princIple of unrest and misery. is" and "is not" or "bemg" and" non-being." "tranecendental truth.EARLY BUDDHIST WRITERS ON LOGIC-NAG. 7.l'tification. Attempts have been made to express this condition by the teI!m "Infinite. there is no truth. chap.

pp. on quelling disputes. The work. st. NAGARJU. (Nyi'iya slUra) 2-1-19)..talogue of the Ch1ll6se Tripltaka.lT lfe:'1 • says : - (Miidhyamlka-kirlka.aplda's doctrine of Pramii1J. why could it not.her obJ'ects. does a pramaf}a establish itself as weH as other objects. was translated into Tlh~tan by the Iudian sage Jnana-garbha and the Tlbetan interpreter Ka-wa-gpal-brtseg§.ita Jayananta and the interpreter Khu-mdo-!2de-gpal. which had been composed by Arya Nagarjuna. Vigraha-vyavartaniksrlka is a work on the I\-Iadhyamika pllllmwphy WhiCh eventually criticIses the Nyaya-theory of praJna~ta.q. chap.mika Kariki.~flf II pIadhya. Prof.. . no. the evidence or means of knowledge. 1251.. Bllddhist Text Society's Ca. is called in Tibetan Btsod-paA~zlog·pahi tshig-lehur-bya§-ptt. and sii. Cf. NagarJuna says:- )T~'q '§'f". Ak~:1P..:ICiil ~1{f~ifT 1llllT I ~rij.fhya-sama (petitio principi-i) as wpll as par'ihafa lavoidance) in chapter IV There is also a critIcIsm of Ak. signifymg memorial verse.lcutta. 'M"do. Ul'S VaiSe~ika Phllosophy.at a lamp cannot illumine itself as there is no darkness in it. Suhsequently ~he translation was recast by the Ka::.t has already been established) In chapter III. Nagarjuna opposes him by saying th. 47. The origmal Sanskrit text. as laId down by Aksapada.lit ~I~ It it' ~ )T~t~ 'iff~: R ~1P. If a lamp could remo~e darkaess even without coming in contact with it.Y8 that just as a Critll'ISm of the' Nyaya lamp illumines itself and ot. !?~tan·hgyur.. so doctrme of Pramana.~krit original of which is lost. p. H.iilr~iiTU 5f~ tj'lI 'Ef~ ~fiiflil': II 1:"'~: ~~~)~ ~ if'll' fir".andmg here.mirian PaQ. chapter IV) . VII.:.NA'S VIGRAHA-VYAVARTANIKARIKX (ABOUT 300 AD). remove the darkness of the entire universe 1 i 81. ~anjlO's ~~~~ ~t\tir~" iff f. tsa. tsa.ii if1i: I edition) BunylU . the San. folios 27-28. 84:-85.a (evidence). Tho Tlbetan and Chme. It consists of folios 26-29 of the :68tan-bgyur Mdo.Hh sa.2 Ak~apada ~«f() lRfl~ii ~~ ~r"&. Ca.e 1 The follOWIng verse refers to the fallacy of sadhya-sama : - fqlf~ tr: m~n: . s£ddha-sarllwna I l demonstration of wha.chapter II.

but it cannot illumine itself inasmuch as a fire never co-abides with. which literally signifies '~the quelling or pramarpa.l" the evide. 17 . the pramafJ. or Ignorance. or PramaQa-vidhvarhsana. prajua an. ha. until you commit the faHacy of regreS8'US ad infinitum..s is untenable.ble. TI' h pada's pramaY}a critiCised. you attemnt to establish objects without a prarna. establish the latteh." 1 1 Caned by P. In the T~ligraha-vya. that objects are established through pr-ama'!). e~c.).D. on the other hand a pramarpa is dependent on prameya (objects). hut refers to those of the oommentator..tepptaka-vr tt1.(.a-vidhvamsana (ABOUT 300 A. Mdo. This work does not peillaps represent the '"laws of Nagarjuna. there would have been ill" compiete cessation of gloom The validIty of Ak~-.-vibf:fvana or Pramar. A Pramar]. darkness. A fire.D.·sambha~i\'a-v:rtti dated probably about 650 A.lavidhvamsana.tta and that again by a fresh pramii'!}t1. To Nagarjuna is attrib'utecl the composition of a logical treatise called Pramal.ta-vihetana.ls. The Sanskrit original ot this work is not availa.nd which was in fact a.The Chmese version of the Vigraha-vyavartani karika is noticed by B unyiu N anjio under the name of VI vadct-SamanaMistra. If. Oordie!' in his TIbetan Catalogue as Plamal!-8-vldhvatnsana. A pramij'flet ca." a.d others in 541 A. which literally signifies "a magic-stIck commentary on Pramaz.ace or means of knowieo. your tenet (VlZ.a. There is however extant the Tibetan version of a commentary on the work caned :Pramax.a is not self-established Had it been so.D.' 1 etc.nnot he so called..na. In Tibeta.ta.a-vlhetana OR PramaIJ. review of the definition of the sixteen categories as given by Ak~apada.ge. is CIted as an illustration. can iHumine other objects by removing darkness which besets them. It was translated into Chinese by the sa~')'e Vimoksaa .n the commentary is called Tsnag-ma-rnam par-njoID§l-pa mdor-"Qsag-pahi-hgrel. how can it. if it i'?J totally independent of rprarneya (objects). which. having no self-existence.u itself mus't be established through another :Dramii.·vil1e~ana. as foHows:If you establish objects through a pramarj. I 82. NXGARJUNA'S Pramav.a) faUs to the ground. It extends over folios 415-418 of the B~tan-hgyur.ta-Vldhvamsana.-~eppltaka-vrtti or PramaI. If.vartanl karika (as reproduced in Tibetan) NagarjuDil cI'ltimses the validIty of prarM/l!. on the other hand. 'ne Vlew t at a pra'mana establishes itself as well as other object.

~!oI'I:lz\'c\' l:~~·tt~ ~~'tl4~'S !It II (~~tan-hgyur. ~/t. avayava) -is shown to consist of three members. (3) the-tshom (sa?nsaya).-pahi-mthah (vita1J. An example' (gpe. Mdo.nce to Mafiju-srI-kumara-bhutaJ and introduces his work ag follows : To pleast' the learned people.1J5:1\·l~~·~·srlfJ~·fSl:I Q·r:.ioned.'~Z\ I . Beholding his superhuman greatness U pendra.21'r:.. bE\ a. and an example.i-mthab.258 INDIAN LOGIC) MED SCHOOL BUDDHIST LOGIC..·ztj53i·~I.-pahi-mthah (1alpa). (6) grub-pahi-mthah (siddhanta).·"~r.ana 01' vidhvamsana [i. a proposition J a reason. whose na.I'I.·tl~·~~·Qrs: II '" (~~tan-hgyur..e. pays obclAa. .21 ~~·Q·~·1. ydo. king of the Nagas.. (4) ggo§-pa (prayojana) .' The reasons 3 (gtan-tshig§. (1.~·q~l:I·Q·..lJ~·"r::. Mdo.·~/t.1J'!Ji·~·r:. (7) cha-sa§ (avayava) . offered him his daughter.. (8) rtog-ge (tarka) . (5) gpe w~~.r=. who bore special marks of greatness. ! dr~~anta) is defined as the place in which "'.l'ij' Q. folio 417). (14) tshig-dor (cltala). ha. hat folio 415). viz. 8vabhava). foUo 417).SJ:z::rr:.·r:. -viz. They took orders and coming to the region of men practised the austerities of monks.. later development known to the author of the vrtti. I t may be put in the affirmative or negative way.mc is not ment.' I ~41"~·a~rQr. S It is doubtful whether this was the original doctrine of Nagsl'juna... I -.1I\r=. and (16) tshar-gcog-pa (nigraka stkana). Pl'ami1q. The commentator reproduced Nagarjuna's definition of the (}ategories which are stated in Tibetan as follows:(1) Tshag-ma (pramatta). ha.. CHAP. hetu) may appear in one of the following relations.·)r:.l·~~·Q r:.bont Nagar.. (2) gshal-bya (prameya) . !oIF~' ~'~~"'l:I'l:I! "'I:la. 0f t h e juna. (2) an identity (rnam-bshin.a-vidhvamsana]. karya). It might ~ r:.a-vihetana or Pramat)..r=. t' .. (10) §mra-wab. while the other Nagas worshipped him in a befitting manner. (12) rnam-par-rtsog. (13) gtan-tshig§-ltar-§nail-wa (ketvabkasa) .'Q( ! (:§~tan-bgyur. (II) rtsog.~r:.nu'Palabdl~i).. (vada) . (9) ~tan-la-phab-pa (nir1}aya). I give an exposItion of the vihet. "" selnlna Ion 0f cu1ture to tlIe regIOn Nagas.·"Qal''c. proceeded once for the disA le orend 8.r::. l~·~~·~·~~·Q·~r::.ator.lja) .bra§-bu.l:Il:I'Qq'~~Z\'. II The comment.egorlesdefined in the (drstanta) .. A syIIogism (cha-sa§.1 Then he observes that the lnstructions on Kyaya delh-ered by Nagarjuna are put together to constitute the present work He further observes that Nf1garjuna. and (3) non-perception (mi-gmig§. (1) an effect (b. They exhibited their magical powers which could not overcome him. (15) !tag-gcog (jati).

(2) a tenet.-hrdaya-sastra. and (4) that which is implied or accepted on assumption (abhyupagama siddhanta). Vide Btlnyiu ~anjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Trjpi~aka. (4) the defect of speech (vakya·do~·a).EARLY BUDDHIST WRITERS ON LOGIC-NAGARJUNA. (6) the appropriate or oppor-' tune speech (samayoc't"ta-vakya). inference (anumanu). truth or conclusion (siddhanta).-sastra. undertook to write this book to give a clear exposition of the art of debate.).her the authorship of Nagarjtlna. This definitIon is criticised by Uddyotakara In his VSl'tika on :Nyaya-siitra.' (2) that accepted by a particular school (pratitantra siddhant(}. Nagarjuna. comparison (upamana). . no. 259 is decisively shown the connection between the reason (middle term) and its universal companion the predicate (major term). (1) The example IS necessary to clear the reasons o~ a disputant and his respondent. 83. perception (p?'atya~a). It is of two kinds: (1) the affirmative ot' homogeneous example (anvayi urZahararpa).1 the Essence of Skill in the Accomplishment of Action. (5) the knowledge of inference (anu'tItana or hetu-jnana). In Chinese this work iR called Fan-pien-sin-lun. 1 Some suspect that the work was not composed by Nagarjuna whose name. (1) that accepted by all tLe schools (8arvatantra siddhanta). vt"z. (II) an explanation of the points of defeat [nigraha-sthana]. Upaya kausalya.as (the F-onrces of valid knowledge) which are of four kinds. viz.ta).. The Upaya-kausaJya-hrdaYd. (2) rrhe tenet. (3) the excellence of speech (vakya pra~am­ sa). are called prama'J. In the absence of any mtroductlOn to the Chmese verSlOn we cannot deny altoget.yadikara~aJ.D. and (IV) the analogue or far-fetched analogy [iatiJ. does not appear 10 the Chme'l6 verSlon. It was translated into Chinese by Ci-cia-ye and Than-yao in A. and (8) the adoption of a fallacious reason (du~ta-vakyanu8ararpa). and (2) the negative or heterogeneous example (vyatireki udahararpa). and scripture (agama). 1257. though mentloned by some Chinese editors. is stated to be a work on the art of debate by Bodhisattva Nagarjuna. truth or conclusion is of four kinds. (7) the fallacy (hetvabhasa).D. (ABOUT 300 A. Spdng that the Vaise/?ika and other systems were obscure in their terminology. The book is divided into four chapters styled respectively as (1) an elucidation of debate [vada-vi. (I) The first ch~Jpter consists of eight sections which treat respectively of (1) an example (udaharar. 1-1-37. 472. it is reported.) . (:3) that accepted hypothetically (adhilcara'r}a siddhanta) . (III) an explanation of the truths [tattva-vyakhyana]. The means) by which the tenets) truths or conculslOns are established.

or which deviate from the scripture. one infers that the sun.g.g. we attempt to prove the eternity of the Veda on the ground that sound is eternal.260 INDIAN LOGIC. the sky is eternal.g. e.g. inference. e. (g) Showing absurdity (vyt"ighCila-pradarsana). (e) Balancing the point in dispute or begging the question (pralcara'Yfasama) . (1) a priori (p'urvavat). e.g. and its reason and example \\€ 'll expressed. the soul is eternal. there is doubt as to a certain tall object being a post or a man. (5) The inference is of three kinds. The respective examples are: on seeing a cloud one infers that there will be rain. e. e g. or redundant.k of the condition of the sky of the previous day.tlt possesses smell. e g.g. There are various kinds of fallacies designated l'espectively as follows : (a) The quibble in ?'espect of a term (vak-clutla). ~ause they are apprehended by the senses: the four elements being also 80 apprehended are llon-etel'naL If you t. (6) The appropriate or OP1Jortune speech consists in its being pertinent to the subject and occasion. (f) Balancing the predicate (sadhya-sama). CHAP.ay so it will follow that a tortoise possesses hair and l-. we commit the fallacy of false assumption. one may appropriately spea. because the sky is an external thing which is eternal. (c) Balancing the doubt or false aS8umption (samsaya-sama). (3) A speech is sald to be excellent if its words are neithf'r inadequate nor redundant. SCHOOL~ BUDDHIST LOGIC. II. because it is distinct f1'o1)1 the body [It is a. (2) a posteriori (selfavat)) and (3) commonly. matter of dispute if a thing which is distinct from the body il'l et. (b) The erratic reason or undistributed middle term (savyabhiclira). in the discussion as to whether there will be rain to-morrow. 01' if it employs the same word to convey dIfferent meanings or different words to convey the same meaning. because they are apprehended by the mind: this is absurd. must have moved. 'Viz. because it is intangible. on seeing a swollen river one infers that there was rain. when no proof has been given for the eternity of sound.ernal or not]. the five objects are non-etE-rnal. who rIses in the east and sets in the west. e. (h) The contradictory (viruddlw)-either ill respect of the ex ample or in respect of the conclusion.or comparison. (4) A speech is said to be de!cclne if its words are in<1dequittc. and on seeing a man move from one place to another. a man pretends to use the term na'Va-kambala in the sense of nine blankets while he really means a new blanket. seen (samanyafo dr~ta). . (d) The mistimed (kalatita). and yet if we proceed to act on the assumption that it is a man. l\IED. e. (7) The fallacies signify reasons which are derived from an imperfect perception. to say that all e:s:ternal things are non-eternal is to employ an erratic reason.

whose date is supposed to be about 320 A.8 Deva resided for a. Cf.rjuna. Appendix I. 227. p. He wrote numerous works on the Madhyamika philosophy~ such as the Sataka sastra.). pp.2 he visited the countries of Mahakosala.rthaka).' The latest date that can be assigned to Deva is 401 A. pp 186-190. pp.l siitras. __ 6 Vide Bunyiu Xanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Trjpi~aka. (4) saying too little (nyuna). 83-86 and 93. for 1911. 225-226. (II) "The points of defeat" are the following :(i) The unintelligible (avirfi/itartha). No. one will be thrown into difficultIes and disgrace. (6) the meamngless (nirarthaka).A. Kal)a Deva. II. (4) balancmg the non-reason (ahptu-sama). pp.tibha).D. and (8) balancing the counter-example (pratidrsfiintasamii). pp. (tV) The "analogue" or far-fetched analogy is of various kinds as follows :(I) Balancing an excess (utkar~a-samii). (6) balancmg the mutual absence (aprapti-sama). vol. 84. in all of which he won great renown by defeating the Tirthikas and preaching the true doctrines of Buddha.(ananubhlisana) . (7) the inopportune (apraptakala).lfipl~aka. where he was a Paq.l>uddhismus von Schiefner.cobi's "Dates of philosophica. Book X.o when his biography was translated into Chinese by Kumarajiva. Bhrama-prama1 Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chmese . Srug~a. Dr Ja. He was born in Southern India and was an eminent disciple of Naga. Nila-netra and Pitig. Deva. (3) balancing the unquestionable (avar1'}yasama).D.O S. (9) hurting the proposition (pratijna-hani).. l or rather . Book XIT.Arya Deva. Book VIII. IT." J. (5) saying too much (adhika). vol. Appendi~ I. ~nd Watters' " On Yuan Chwang. 261 (8) The adoption of a fallacious reason-If in the course of one's argument one commIts fallacies. Prayaga. 2 Vide Beal's Buddhist Records of the Western World. 98-102. Book IV. ARY A DEVA (ABOUT 320 A. (2) non-ingenuity (apra.--- . (2) balancing a deficit (apak(m~a-qama). p. (5) balancing tlIe co-presence (prapti-sama). 8 Vide Lama TaraniUha's Geschichte des . (III) "An explanation of the truths" deals mainly with the admission of an opinion (matanujna).01. No.EARLY BUDDHIST WRI'I'ERS ON LOGIC-ARYA DEVA. 321. I. He is otherwise known as KarQaripa. He flourished during the reign of Candra Gupta. '/. According to Hwen-thsang. long time in Nalanda. was the next writer on the Madhyamika philosophy. (7) balancing the doubt ('1amsayasama). 4:. (3) silence . (8) the incoheren~ (ap5. Cola and Vaisalr. p. 210." vol. Book V. 4. I.ala-netra. 231. According to Lama Taranatha. p 2.gita.-4.Vide :Nagarjuna. 302.D.

who lived 900 years after the nirviirj. . 355-56. 30. 5 lv. .}. MED.This is evident from the Abhisamayaness and Voidness. and Madhyantavibhaga- .ovel folit?8 1-14 of the ~~tan-bgyur.ita Amara.262 INDIAN I.D /' is reported by Hwen-thsang to have communicated the materials of three Buddhist treatises to Arya Asailga while the latter was residing in a monastery in Ayodhya. p.1 etc. Dr. BUDDHIST LOGIC. lailka:ra kfi. all of which bear evidences of his MAITREY A. who was an eminent teacher of the Yogacara School.D. Vide Watters' "On Yuan Chwang.OGlC. a Sanskrit text of which IS available in the libra.3" in the J oumal of the Asiatic SOCIety oft Bengal.Q. The three treatises are:~astra.7.ry of t~e Asiatic Society of Bengal. in Chinese' Mirok' and in Tibetan' Byam§pahi··mgon-pa. It extends.D. CHAP. knowledge of Logic 85 Maitreya. that is. II. 1.. 2 Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Trlpltaka. Saptadasa-bhurni~astra-yogiicil'ya. the Saptadasa-hhumi-sastra-yogacarya which was trans1ated into Chinese in 646-647 A. Profound indeed ar~ the eight characters of objects. Cordier's TIbetan Ca. Maitreya.ge. SCHOOL.. 6 d ~ 1()~ 1iif'JT 'q~il'" ~T . 1907. (ABOUT 400 A D.neither precedes nor foHows the same. about 400 A. Doctrines of Momentari. was called HIS life aod a. P.talogue.rika in which he says that when we attain perfect wisdom our thought neither precedes nor follows it. Appendix I.). and so are its 1 Vide Satis Chandra Vldyabhusana's "Indian LOgIC as preserved in Tibet No. and the Abhisamayalailkara-karika which was translated into Tibetan during 10591109 A.' He was the author of several works such as the Bodhisattva-carya-nirdesa which was translated into Chinese during 414 -421 A.2 or rather Maitreya-natha. tht:t.Iaitreya strongly supported the doctrines of momentariness (k~a'l')ikar-vada) and voidness (sunya-vada). 3 Vide" Hindu Logic as preserved in China and Japan. was. The author of the work is named lD SanskrIt as l\Iaitreyaniitha and in Tibetan as Byam~-pab:i·Q. ~lR"U~)iiif iI~U \f~Wlnr II . }fdo.' 86 MAITREYA'S Abhisamayala:flkara-karika..na-yukti-hetiu-slddhl. Sugiura. translated into Tibetan by Pa~Q." by Dr. pp. 273. p. no. voL III • No. Gomln an4 the interpreter ~lo-ldan·se§-rab during 1059-1109 A. of Buddha." Vol.1! Profound is the origination of an object. new series. I..gon-pa. The Abhisamayiilanklra--kirikl. ka. just as a lamp which removes darkness.D.D. Sutralankira-tikli.

i~r ~ '" "i~'Jf 'i 'a". there is no realIty underlying our existence and its emancination . 2 (Abhisa. one while practising charity.mayilaOkara. should be abandoned. MSS. 22. of the Asia.ylila. Chap. Taking one's stand on the dreamy character of objects.-karika:. The knowable. realizes that these are void. ~i(I"ll{td. Debate should not be entered upon in any and every place. VlI. The place 0/ debate..n~ ~ I ~1i)1r~ l(~r~4"iPf It ~{Unqiir q . vide its Chinese version Yuka Ron. 87. knowledge. means and expedients are all profound. we must first see that the S b· t f th t t· subject is a useful one. It consists of seven chapters styled respectively as follows :1.ma. MAITREYA'S TREATISE ON the Art of Debate.. etc. of the AsiatIC Soctety of iJeu-pl). .he objects partake of the character of a dream.tic Society of Benga. MSS. 2.ya. One perceives in a moment that a dream and a seer of the dream are not connected but are non-dual in their essence. of the AsiatIC Soclety of Bengal). in the palace of a king or the office of a minister or in a council (par~ad). A useless subject U Jec so e rea.tikara-kariki. IV.lanka:ra~ka:rika.'I. p. Sugiura. In the 15th volume of Maitreya's ~aptadasa.. Inasmuch as t.lif~ ~~~ f~:l ~T1i~~ iijii{. It should be carried on in the presence of soholars. is momentary .\lll1. i The knowledge of objects and their connection and separa. In beginning a debate on a subject. 3 It is perhaps this work \vhich is called yoga by Dr. p 14. Book XV. action.<fiil ~ II @'iIift'\f1iqcr ''tllTii'if ~ .l). Chap. MSS. Chap.. III. The 8ubject of debate. p.:J (Abhisama. 28.EARLY BUDDHIST WRITERS ON LOGIC-MAITREYA 263 cessatIon and suchness. tion. lBe.-bhi1ml-Bastra­ yogacarya 8 there is a treatise on the art of debate. lPi'1if ~r ~t~'Ef~ I ~ (Abhisa.

usl~' without any break. a~ follO'\\'~ (1) A proposition. II.he uffirma-t. he is defeated (c) If a debater tnlks irrele\'"antly (atita-vakya. in proceeding to a place of debate. (1) t. etc 7. he is defeated 6. )n~D. viz. and must be inteUigible to the entire audienC'c (e) They must speak in harmony-sometimes slowly and some· times aloud-to please the audience. ::unpk (L"li r171(7rv:f'l). The thesIS (sadhya or that "hich is to be estn hlish('d) 1~ of two kinds.~(!i. The means of debate. respectful language. and (8) scri!Jtln:e 4 The qualification.. tenet or conclusion (siddh'iinfa). CH. (a.. he is defeated (b) If a debater being unable t·o defend the subject which he has been (1iscnssing introduces another subject. consider whether the debate whether the debate will be of any benefit to him. (3) example (udahararpa). the oppo(c) He should consider whether the deb&ter and his opponent are persons worthy of carrying on debate through the process of a proposition (sirldhanta). (2) rea~on (hetu).) A person.~m.s it . an example ('ltd1iliara1"!a). a reason (hetu.ht"ffi (para-::. before proceeding there. 3. The proof (or that wludl help8 in establishing the the~is) ma~' be of eight kmd:-. Attending a place of debate. should consider {b) He should. RC'HOOL.rC. (5) the neg~l:tiye e .). nse . Points oj defeat (nigrahasthana). nent.. (7) m£erenc'(' \a-. (a) If a debater at" first opposes an assertion and afterwards speaks in ag:reement with it. employ words of dignit~r. (c) Thev must remain fearless (d) They must speak contiml(. a.1YE' l'xarnpl!' (agmna) (sa- dharmya). The debater should appear to the audience in such a way that he is. (4) t.P.:-. chs· In addr€ 'R3ing each other Uley should 01' (a) The deba. (u) perception (pratyalqa.\. the umpire. !n"DD~HST LO.hut concerning one's self (iitm.rij. Sllre to gain victory. Oonfidence oj a Debater.).l{-srnnbrmrllw) amI (2) that concerning Ot.ters must be versed in e[tch other's seriDture~ (b) They must not under any circumstances. He should be understood by them to be one who knows the scripture of both the parties. and the audience.264 l~DIA~ LOGIC'.vere.sordld. will exercise any good influence on the debater. who is selfpossessed and full of enthusiasm.). and who can speak without a break .nmbandhi1.'? of a debater. 5.).

) who lived about 480 A. 122. No.227 and 236.D. AppendIx I. U77.. Like a pot but not like ether [al. tJ Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka. _ _ _ 7th and 16th volumes of Mahayanabhldharma.tyak~a]. is to be supported by a reason [hetu] and t\VO examples [dntantaJ. a. .pproximately placed at 450 A. most of which still exist in Chinese and Tibetan ver8ions. A product like a pot is non-eternal. The form of his fE'asonlng is illustrated as foHows:(I) Sound is non-etel'nal. But occasionally there was mixed \vith the discussions some Pure Logic also A thesis [pratiiiia]. 227. See Bears Buddhist Records.ranslated into Chinese." Vol I. Vol I.). (2) on inference I arl'Umiinaj. Vide TadinAtha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiemer.D. p. 30. "Whereas. Ii . an eternal thing like ether is not a l)l'oduct.5." p. (ABOUT ARYA ASANG. Ii Asanga is a. (2) (3) (4) (5) Because it IS a product. Vol. No./l when one of his works.EARLY BUDDHIST WRITERS ON LOGIC-ARYA ASANGA.sastra. saw the ruins of Sailgharamas in Kausambi and Ayodhya.3-470 A.D. j He wrote 12 works. H1S hie He was at first an adherent of the Mahis sasaka sect and follo'\ved the Vaibhasika philosophy of the HinayiinaA Later on he became a disciple of Maltreya and adopted the Yogacara philosophy of thE' . 98.samyukta-sangiti. according to )Iaitreya.D. 357 . Asanga.i called in ChinE'S€ ' ~Iucak and in Tibetan Thog~-med. Vide Hwen-thsang's Travel in Beal's Buddhlst Records of the \Yestern World. Hwen-thsang in the 7th century A. S Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Trlpitaka. S Vide Watters' "On Yuan Chwang.\ 40.D. Appendix: I. 236. was horn in Gandhara (modern Peshwar). pp.-p. " volume of Prakaranarya vaca sastra \I and HIS loglcai VIews. 1l7~. NOB. was t.~ A short summary of the Logic of Asanga is found in the 11 th .::<18a1. Validity of the reason and of the examples require~ that they be based either (1) on fact or perception [pra.s he was the eldest brother of Vasubandhu (q v. 1 88. pp 98.D. called the Mahayana-samparigrahasastra. The first work called in Chinese u Hind14 Logic as preserved in Cluna and Japan. . 261) It is evident from the titles of the chapters just mentioned that l\Iaitreya mainly discussed the practIcal qtH'stions of Logic. ~ 1 Vide . or (3) on holy saying [aqama] Analogy or Comparison [upamana] is omitted. 1. where Asaftga resided for some years.s The latest date that can be assigned to him is 531 A.!tlahayana He is said to ha'Ve lived for some years as a panQita in Nalanda ~ He li~ed about 450 A. 9 Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tl'ipi~aka.

i 1 Vide Hwen. He began his career as a Vaibhaqika philosopher of the Sarvastivada sect.D. named Sangha. No. 172. B'CDDHIST LOG!C. in the last of which places he died at the age of eighty y. i2 Sanga.idest brother Asanga to the Yogacara school of the Mahayana.hsang (Yuan chv.225. which is somewhat differ€ 'nt from Maitreya's.ransla~ed mto. ThE" second \vork called in Chinese ~ Ta. (2) Because it is a product.hhadra translated Vibha!?a-vinaya into Chinese in 489 A. L p.ang) of the ThMl dynasty 1ll _-\ D. He was a contemporary of another V aibka. I.~ika teacher. a :sastra on E'xpoundmg the holy teaching ') was cnmposed by Bodhisattya A:-. that is before 500 A.dhaka or that which helps." Vol. who flourished in the middle of the thousand years after the nirva1}G of Buddha. The first five subdivisions const. Asanga follows Maitl'eya except in respect of the theory of proef (. (4) an application (upanaya). (ABOUT VASUBANDHU 410-490 A. is given below :(1) Sound is non-eternal. pp. Vol.thsa:o.anga.sii.l called in Chinese Seish and in Tibetan :Qwyiggfien.). SCHOOL. but was later converted by nis E.~ika Sastra.bhadra.in establishing a thesis). Appendix II. He was a friend of Manoratha. Vidlli Bunyiu N'~jio's Catalogue of the Ohinese Tt'ipitaka. a reason (hetu}t (3) an example (udahara~a). 105.itute what is called an inference (anumana). Kausambi and Ayodhya.D. (5) a conclusion (nigamana}t (6) perception (pratyak'la).tsa-t~l-lun was complled by Bodhisattva Sthltamati. It \vr~ t. I 89. 193. 645-646.e by Hwen-thsang of the Than d. It was t. 98. H46. and Watters' '" On Yuan Chwang. CHAP.g's Travelln Beal's Buddhist Records of the Western World.210.v'11a~ty in A. . Vasubandhu.D.D. a ma.ster of the Vaibha. (:hine:-.ears. II. (4) Because a pot is a product it is non-eternal.D. who lived about 489 A. In logical view::. (7) comparison (upamana). (2.D. (3) Like a pot (but not like ether) . 236.ranslated into Chinese by H\Hm-t.-~han o-phi-ta-mo. where a tablet to his memory was seen by Hwen-thsang in the 7th century A.:266 INDIAN LOG1C~. so is sound" as it is a product: (5) Therefore we know sound is non·eternal. Asanga's form of reasoning. was horn in Gandhara (modern Peshwar). and (8) soripture (agama). 95. A proof is subdivided by Asauga as follows: (1) A proposition (pratiiMi). His father's name was Kausika. Hhlen-yail-shan-riao-Iun (sIgnifying . )fED. Re passed many years of his life in Sakala.

cannot be accepted without further testimony. in a very learned artICle called" Paramartha's LIfe of Vasubandhu and the date of V8 '!ubandhu .6..A. January 1905. V.).l.D.6. died at the age of eighty years during the reign of Baladitya N" arasimha Gupta (485-490 A. 267 Vilmana. 1905. and Dr. Takakusu. p.. who \vas patronised by Vikramaditya (possibly Skanda Gupta).tol' of the Samantapasiid1i. ptlbhshed in the J oumal of the Royal Asiatio Society of Great Britain and Ireland.· sonle of which are available in H1S works.h century A. 170-171. A Smith's Early History of India.S. while HWE'n-thsang 'was travelling in India.:a of Buddhagho~ ioto Chinese in 488 A.D. was the transia. '1 ~ ~~l1f'itJ'Q1R1rTi! V(f. 32. Bena-re'! Sanskrit series). Skanda Gupta.. 85. No. He was therefore a contemporary of Kumara Gupta. January 1905.-~Sli \i'ilf" ~l~~illm ~crr ~~: I _Tift ~ftRl~: '!iirill''iJf ~ll 1l~'P. says that Sangbabhada.. K B. AppendIx I. there was a treatise on Logic called I\1r. 1463 and AppendIx I.D. (2) Ronshlki (Vada-marga-the course of debate). (Ksvyalailkira-sutra~vrtti. contemporary of Vasubandhu.Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka. and (3) Ronshin (Vada-ka~tiala-the expedients of debate).. Vasubandhu was the author of a large number of very valuable 'Works. 293 and 327 (3rd editIOn) . The statement that there was an older translatIon of the life of Vasubandhu by Kumarajiva A. Takakusu says that "some catalogues mention by mistake that such a work \\"&S then In existence": vide Journal of the Royal ASlatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Hoerole's correspondence in the Indian Antiquary for September 1911. .R. he saw three works on the art of debate attributed to Vasubandhu.D Paramartha.. No. Stlgiura's . pp. 39 I) S Vide Takakusu in J. p." p. quotes a verse alludmo to VaRubandhu as a couhsellor (possibly of Kumara Gupta during 413-455 A D.'ka-Sastra Besides theflle three works. . Prof. No.m~iIitlf 3-2-2. 401-409.D. pp. for June 1911.EARLY BUDDHIST WRITERS ON LOGIC-VASUBANDHU.). 6 The Sanskrit originals of these works as well as their Chinese versions are now lost The works ware styled in Chinese as (1) Ronkl (Viida-vidhi-the method of debate}.iif 1\ I 1IWfi:i1n'fiml. Pura Gupta and Baladitya (from about 410 A. li Vide Dr.D. A biography 2 of Vasubandhu was translated from Sanskrit into Chinese durmg 557-569 A. p. Hindu ILogic as preserved in China and Japan... Sanskrit and the ·rest in ChInese and Tibetan translations In the 7th century A.. 2 Vide Bunviu Nanjlo's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka.3 the translator of tbe biOgraphy (499-569 A. but that It was lost 10 730 A.D. VASUBANDHU'S Tal.. tells us that Vasubandhu. 264.D ~rmnn"tt ~r.D. Pathak In Indian Antiquary. I who lived at the end of the 8th and beginning of the 9t.. 33-53. pp. 90. to about 490 AD).

he analogous rejoinder (1ati). a Chine~e version of thi<:.lcutta). quoted by Kwei-ke.ejoinder on the ba"is of reversion (viparyaya-khantjana) which consists of (1) balancing the homogeneity (sadharmyasama).· refers to 'lasubandhu. Vasubandhu treats of a proposition (pratijiia) . Satis Chandra. stnfina).). and the middle term (hetu.~~ 1\ (Nyayavatara of Siddha-seIla Divakara.268 INDIAN LOGIC. which consist. BrnDHTST LOraC.' Tarka-~&str8.aya-sama) . and that. of defeat (n~'graha­ . an application (upanaya). which constitute the fi"t'e parts of_a svllogism.ra probabl. and a conclusion (nigamana).).yhich c'Onsists of (11) balancing the point in dispute (pm kara1J. (4) balancing the unquestionable (avar1Pya-sarna) . (1 2) balancing the counter-example (pratidr~tanta-8ama). Pal'amartha of the Chan dynasty m A. The Tarka-sagt. .. the mnjor term (sarlhya). and that drs~(1.\t?d by Y'asubandhu There exiRt::. (6) balancing the non-reason (ahetu-saml1) .he point. Vasnbandhu maintained that a thE'sis could be proved by two parts only. The Jaina logician Siddha.vith (l) the five parts of a syllogism (paJlcavayava) . and (10) balancing the efif'ct (karya-sama).nta or example 1"1 altogether useless. A r:. edIted by Dr. 1252. in the Ronki. is qmte enough in establishing a thesis. A contrary rejoinder (vip¢'trit~kha?J. a proposition and a reason. (5) balancing the mutual absence (apraptisama). (2) t. viz. and (3) t. an example (udiihara~w). the minor term (paksa). (9) balancing the non-difference (aviie~a-8ama). (3) balancing the thesis (sadhya-8ama).t~~· . Siddhasena Dlvikara writes:1 2 ~llr1"~~ ~ f~~m~T~' I bhusana and published by the Indian Research Society of Ca.. An analysi'5 of the The Chinese yer~ion was 'prepared bv. No. B. ~ _I'fl<:~il~~ e:mlrfi. SCHOOL. A reioinder on the ground of meaninglessness (nirartha~ kha1)dana) . (8) balancing the doubt (sarib<.\ist~ of three ch:1pter<:. the necessary terms in a syllogistic inference were only three..'t In chapter II there is an account of the Analogous Rejoinder (jati) which is subdivided under three heads as follows:A. C. 8adhya or major term and hetu or ~iddle term. MED. or mmor term.s of (14) balancing the non-produced (anutpatti-sama). dealing respectivel~' . (7) balancing the demonstration (upapatti-sama) . D. when he says that according to some lOglciaD.ra con/i..$ antarvyapti (internal inseparable connection) consisting of pak~(1. work cnlled ZU-Shlb lun. ~ Though according to the Tarka-saRtra a syllogism consisted of five parts.pter 1. (2) balancing the heterogeneity (vaidharmya-sama) .iJana).a-sama) . (15) balancBunyiu Nanjio's Catalogne of the Chinese Tripltaka. therefore. a reason (llet'U. CHAP TI Tarka-sastra I comp0/i. 'Vidya- .sena Diviika. 5GO. In cha. and (13) balancing the infinite regression (prasangasama). viz.

(1) Sound is nOll-eternal. The two forms are exhibited below:0) Sound i::.aJ}a) . (3) Product::.atanujJia). (14-) silence (ananubhft-$. A syllogism of two parts. (3) opposmg the proposition (prafAjiiavirodha) . (18) admission of an opimon (m. however. (~~ :he iaco!leren~ (aparthaka).ij·Jiatartha). A syllogism of five parts. (15) ignorance (ajJiana). (2) Because It IS a product. are non-eternal like a pot. (19) overlooking the censurable (paryanuyojyopek~atw).mg the eternal (n2tya-samii). (16) non-ingenuity (ap1'atlbha) . (4) Sound is an mstance of a product. non-eternal. (2) Because it is a product. (7) the meaningless (nirarthaka) . (5) 1'herefo1'e sound IS nOll-eternal.tll a patt i -sa rna) Chapter III deals with twenty-two kinds of points of defeat (mgraha-stkana) enumerated belm\"·(1) Hurting the proposition (pratijna-kam) (2) shifting the proposition (platljiiantara). viz a syllogism of five parts at the time of a debate and a syllogism of two parts on an ordinary occasion. to have used two forms of syllogi::im. and (22) the semblanre of a reason or fallacy (helvabhftsa) It is to be regretted that neither the Ronki 1101' its Sanskrit original is available. (17) ev-asion (mk~epa). (6) shifting the topic (artMintara). Vasubandhu seems. . which is a product and IS non-eternal. (5) shifting the reason (hetvantara). and (H1) baiancing the presumptIOn (at-. (20) cemml'ing the non-censurable (niranuyojyanuyoga) (21) deviating from a tenet (apaslddhanta). (4) renouncing the proposition (pratij iiii-8(J:Jiwyiisa) . (to) the inopportune (aprapta-kZtla) (I1) saying too little (n?junata) . (12) saying too much (adhika) (13) repetition (punarukta) . (8) the unintelligible (av.

who passed the . Both in matter and in manner his works marked a distinct departure from those of his predecessors. THE OO)DIENC. sophical schools in the 4th cent·ury A.. under the head" Vasubandhu -.D. tract on Logic which was a mere review of the common topics o(the Ancient 8choolof BrahmaQic Logic. folio I) which was put in lts present land of snow form by the celebrated Lama Bu-S!ton.D. there were no systematic BuddhIst works on Logic. about 300 A.). A portrait of Dignaga.1 Vade Book II. The works brought out by these writers. During 400-500 A. ACARYA DIGNAGA-FATHER OF MEDI. ~laitreya. but only a few stray references to that science in the works on philosophy and religjon. His likeness recovered from Tibet is reproduced below. Bu-!ton. Vasubandhu's three works 1 on Pure Logic mentioned by Hwen-thsang are now lost and consequently their ments cannot be judged. . last days of hislife-at the monastery of Sha-lu.. constitute the Medireval School of Indian Logic.:EVAL LOGIC (CIRCA 450-520 A. Chapter T.e close of the thirteenth '"'--~ ~ ----. Dignaga is the earliest known writer of this school. In the previous chapter we have seen that from the origin of Buddhism in the 6th century B.CHAPTER Ill. 92. Ce. being 'mixed up with the problems of the Yogacara and Vaibktuika schools of philosophy. began a period when Logic was completely differentiated from general philosophy. to its expansion into four philo. Dignaga is justly regarded as the Father of Mediooval Logic.D.C. twelve miles south-east of Tashl-lhun-po.D. The likeness of Dignigao reproduced here is taken from the Tibetan B§tanRecovered from the hgyur (Mdo. Asailga and Vasubandhu handled Logic.. Indeed he may fittingly be styled as the first and last of Indian logiCians.. The keenness of his insight and the soundness of his critical acumen combined to stamp him with an individuality all his own.e a.EME~T OF l\IEDL£vAL LOGIC (450-1200 A.). Systematic BuddhIst Wnters on LogIC. who lived at th.. and a large number of Buddhist writers gave their undivided attention to that branch of learning.D. along with those brought out by the Jainas. but their treatment of it was merely incidental.D. Nagarjuna. With 450 A... 91. No praise seems too high for him. wrot.

D. It is not known what. pp..t change Vi ag effected In the dr(:'~s of monks.q~. It is not known when the" Pan bta'''l Cf\p" wa. and eaps of varIOUS shapes \'I."hwa-dmar 1 or I< PanQ. It is said to have been taken to Tibet in 749 A..~(sCf] . The hat \\ orn here 1<. called Panchen.E'IWSS trom some earlier spC'CHnen.nk of the wearer.ere Invented. ~ m(r~q5r5tl1~f§I~·~·~. wlllch was taken to Tluet durmg her mtereourse with Incha bet\H~en GOO A.-~ tl~~v~~". and 1200 AD.. by Santa Rakslta.t have copied the hl. The lappets of the cap were lengthened m proportlOn to the re." WIth a pomtE'd pt>ak and long lappets. "Pal)rilta" was a degree which was conferred by the VtkramMIl" Umver"aty on its successful candida.century A D.it.rO{fuctlOn of Mahiiyana In the first C'entut'. 194-196.s first mtroduced. n11U. . _ .D.Y A.tes.:.t -H 1 Vide Waddell's Lamaism. a grell. A pecuhanty of this hkeness 18 Its cap In the earlj Ruddhl...i5.t Church monks were not allowed to wear anv hC'ad-dre~s ('m'de the Patuuokkha rule" of the Vmava Pitaka) WIth the mt. tItle the Umversity of Xalanda conferred on its distingUIshed .D by KaUlska.a's red cap..

He was specially versed in incantation formulas. remo\'er of aU evds. He is said to have died in a solitary wood in Orissa.carya Vasubandhu with whom he studied all the Pi~akas of the l'. monks like Brahmanic sages \WI'\) <lllo\\od to put on s.t Umverslty. the Buddhi~t god of learning. I. SCHOOL. 1905. of tha. /. too.uita. He miraculously saw the face of ):Iafijusfl.u:.Cd and . has been wrongly rendered as J ma by Japanese writers as \vell as by the Rev.\tED.ble wltI'rn clothe'S There 1" abo tn the pa. He lived a considerable part of his life in Andhra (Telingana) in the Madras Presidency. No. In Maharastra he is said to have resided frequently in the Acara's Monast~ry. By Nagadatta. tile tltJ.I30 -135 Lama TAranathol. He travelled through Orissa and Mahara~tra to the south.'" cap" waS pos::lluiy a dL<. disciple of A. No.nd 10 Tlhet. Since he had refuted chiefly the Tirtha controversialists he was called a.a Sudur~ jaya and other Tirtha dialecticians and won them to the doctrine of Buddha. :2 Vide Watters' On Yu.ra near Kanci.ontemplation. a PaQ. students.ttlVt~ of the l'lct tnat <Liter Buddhism had sprea. " Fighting Bull" or a "Bull in discussion" (Sanskrit: Tarka-pungava. to Buddhism. Vol.t famous Ull1\"erslty where Dignaga u. The Chinese name of DignRga.. or rather Acarya Dignaga. Afterwards he became a. is called in Tibetan He i wa~ born in a Brahma'Q. Phyo~-glan. Dignaga.. 122.'~ in the Journal of the AsiatIC SOCIety of' Bengal.elf III pllliosoplu<:al controverSies The woollen .an Chwang.tmctl\"e bad~e of the scholar:::. For a fuller account of Dlgnaga vide Satis Ohandra Vidyabhusana. .~ In Orissa he converted Bhadra Palita. and practised during his life-time twelve tested virtues. l\Ir Beal.Iahayana and Hinayana...~hawllll the figure IS m(.-samuccaya.q.lms (if the linage a thunderbolt CtlUed III Sanskl'lt Vava d. Pandltd.m IJ. 93.l . and Tibetan: Btsog-pagi-khyn-mchog)... Perha. He was a man of vast learning and wisdom. LIFE OF DIGNAGA. Vol. where Dlgnaga. 3 Vide Brnyiu Nanjio'::s Oatalogue of the Chinese Tripi~aka.9. Pandltll" was rl'L'0!:illlL. ("HAP.ita of the Vatslputriya sect. he was admitted to the religious system of that sect and attained erudition in the Trip£&aka of the Hinayrina. The halo round the head of t. p.t Dlgniig3..:. Willl'h l'>d.iga. Dignaga must have lived before 557-569 A. a saint.. App I. modern COlljeeveram in the Madras Presidency. Trea::ury-minister of the King of the country.dOlJe.tmgUlshed hllll.. pp. BUDDHIST LOGIC'.272 INDIAN LOGIC.d mto cold dllnes. meeting the Tirtha controversialists in discussions.hl'. It is stated that the stem of a myrobalan tree called Mu~tlharitaki 10 the garden of Bhadra Pahta 10 OrIssa entirely \vithered.B when two of 1 Fide Lama Tarinatha's Ges~hichte des Buddhismus von Schiafner. Dignitga and his PramaQa.ho image mdLCaee::! that DIgn.'s . A few years later he was invited to Nalanda where he defeated BrahmaI].er Dignaga had utierecl an incantation for its restoration.ps In tlla. II. \Va. but it revived in seven days aft. from whom he received inspiration in the Law (Dharma).t1 family in Shhhavakt. also relates tha.D. III. frequently resided in Orissa In a cavern of a mountain called Bhora411a where he u~d to give himself up to (. 10. l8 called Jma.

tI>e capital of the Pallava kmgs. Introductory stanza.into disputes "\'irith controversialists He attacked his opponents as frequently as he was attacked by them. 1-1-5. 1-1-4. The Digambara Jams. the Pallavas rose to power. I. 102. p.tTir if V'cir~f\V erti{Cf1{ I ~~fw ~. warns his poem to avoid the "rugged hand" (sthula-hq..-) <ff~if~liffii' II tffl' f~~ifT~-. etc. The early limit of his date is 480 A.D. Anurosnapariccheda of KumarIla Bhatta's vartlka on the 5th Sutra of J aimim 7 Vide the works of Prabhiicandra and Vldyananda referred to In the J. 1-1-1. Purva-megha.D. by KubJa Vlsnuvardhana of the Eastern Chalukya dynasty DUIlng 552589 A. Vol. 60-61: 1-1-7. 3 ~~'i!!fqn{: '5fq~T . pp.:fljr"~.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAGA 273 his works were translated into Chinese. in the Bibhotheca Indica series. of the Western Chaluk~ a dynasty. 141. 63. 52. 43-44. generality.229.. loglcian Dharma-bhuii\ana.S . I-I-G.ftil'f 1{"~ 'J{T~ ~m ~~11{ I 1i'ffi"f~"Tmilfif~f~: ~ft11ifct 'ffliJ ~lH m .• Vol.D. p. in controverting the Vaise~lka dodrine of Slimanya.la's Nvaya-diplldi..r. Compare also Nyaya-vartika.: Il Uddyotakara's Nyaya-vartlka. 212 2 Vide Meghaduta.\!fII(~'ii~~'iiI'~l'I"ii (Quoted in Dharmabhusat. Even his death did not terminate the great intellectual war in which he had been engaged: though he could no longer offer any violence. pp. pp. Orissa. 76-77. the kmgdom of Vengl.3 the eminent logician. P 135. K €inci. V~de Sewell's LIsts of AntIquItieS. p.. calls Dignaga U a quibbler" (Kutarkika) Vacaspati Misra 4. was captured byVikramadltya I.tta and Partha-sarathi Misra. 146. Uddyotakara. 148. 31: 1-1-4. Purva-megha. Chapter nIl . 6 Mallinatha's commentary on verse 14 of the Meghaduta. 1-1-6. p. ~he Vedantins and Jainas'l were not in1 On the downfall of the Andhl'as in 436 A D. 2 the prince of poets.· 97-98. Mark the volleys on his dead body coming from no mean warriors! Kalidasa. '* Vide Vacaspati MISra's Nylya-vartika-tatparya-tika. describes him as "an errmg "one" (bhranta) and ~peaks of his "blunders" (bhranti).. Maharafjltra and DakfjliQ. 1-1-5.B B. ifTm". 102. () Vide Partha sarathl's gloss on verRes 59-60. XVIII. when the Buddhist kings of the Pallava 1 dynasty ruled the eastern coast of Southern India. We have already seen that Dignaga travelled in Nalanda. Dignaga flourished possibly about 500 A. verse 14. 149 and 211. They were in theIr turn driven out of thelr northern possessllons. entering everywhere . Kumarila Bha. edited by Gangadhacft Sastri. II.6 turn their arrows against him. R A. His whole life was passed in giving blows and receivmg counter-blows. when his teacher Vasubandhu lived. p 1. etc.a (Madras). pp. pp. Mallinatha b compares him with a "rock" (adrikalpa). quotes In support of his own conclusion the following verse of Digniiga:if ~nfw if "tf W". Madras.sta) of Dignaga. his opponents continued to fall upon him with force.

Accordingly. 13.Isvarakr~l}a bere referred to was Yery probably tbe author of the Sirllkhya klirika. It is said to have been composed while he ~lftl ~.ttva (Dlgnaga. C. Thdn he devoted himself to profound study and explained the Hetuvidya-Ustra ani! the Yoga discipline. Hwen-thsang gives the followmg account of the composition of the Pramal. the god of learning.he country (Andhra) came near him and asked whether he was entering into nirvana. Dignaga receiving these drrections. 133.219 and 220. DIGNAGA'S PramaI). k:r~l}a ~ surprised at this wonder came to The same verse has been quoted in a little altered form by the Hindu philosopher Midhavlcirya as follows : 'If The PramaQ. pp. Dignaga must have been a very strongly built man.a-samuccaya.ma Tiirinatha's GeschlChte des BuddhlSffius von Schiefner.:\a-samuccaya. When the king spoke of the infinite bliss of nirvG1. giving up the purpose of saving all" Saying this he directed him to explam the YogiicaryabhGmH~astra and Hetuvidya-sastra. to some extent. III. 75. both physicaHy and mentally. pp. ~lED.LE •• pp 62. he resolved to collect them. Mafijusri. Even Dharmakirti. the ~ earth trembled and all the places were filled with light and a great tumult Dignaga and Uvara. putting together fragments from particular works. otherwise be could hardly have lived for a single day under assaults from so many sides. Those of his works which stili exist enable us to measure. Babadur. SCH. and the Tibetan !?pag-bsam-lJon-bzan edited by Rat Sarat Chandra. askmg him to spread abroad the sastra (Hetuvidya). the opening lines. chapter on Bauddhadamana). 'ifT\l~"" ~1fIftf: " 1f1'ffr 11' "" W1fN~ ~.ta-samuccaya 'Vide La. 218.'ta Dlgnaga resolved to enter into it.OOL. knowing his purpose was moved with pIty. attempted to oppose him. with narrow aims. BUDDHIST LOGIC.. A Brahman. :-" When Digniiga began to compose a useful compendium [presumably the Pramana-samuccaya] for overcommg the difficulties of the Hetuvidya-4astra. the vapour and -clouds changed their appearance. Das. CHAP. active in their hostility. the mountains and valleys shook and reverberated. 2 For an account of the composltion of the Pramar. 100 aud LXVII.a-samuccaya it: one of the grandest literary monuments of Dignaga. (modern TeIingana) in the Madras Presidency. ~t~ I (Sarvadarsana samgraha. 94. While he was writing. he engaged himself in compiling in verse a compendium called the PramaI}.a-samuccaya. He came to Dignaga and said: "Alas! bow have you given up your greau purpose. VoL II. Then the Bodhisa.was audible. Surprised at this wonder. and the SpirIt of tbe mountain appeared before him. 1 Vide the head" Dharmakirti" which follows. where the Chinese term for Dignaga is wrongly rendered as Jina. Seeing that the Sastras on Dialectics written earlier by him remained scattered about. respectfully assented and saluted the saint.i a Buddhist sage. 4.) caused a bright light to shine and illumine the dark places. S Vide Hwen-thsang's Travel in Beal's Buddhist Records of tbe Western World. a named Isvarakr~na. . and only fixed your mind on your own personal profit. his strength and his weakness.' was residing on a solitary hill near Vengi in Andhra s. the lung of t.274 INDiAN LOGIC.

167 . Bahndul'..·~·.a-samuccaya 2 is a Sanskrit work written inanu~tubl" _ .~rt'aq~r ti:!JliI'~~'l:Il~ ". .a-samuccaya when thc Bodh.bsam-lJon-bzan.§.~ ~ntJ.. pronouncing incantations over them.~.~.~.isattva.go-cha) and 8: TIbetan interpreter named Dad-pahi-se§-rab in the monastery of Se§-pabi-gge-~na. either staking his own doctrine.. The Sanskrit original of it is l03t.~~. Dignaga wrote them a third time and added: "Let no one wipe these out even in joke or sport.g.• p.~.·~·s..o accept the Buddhist doctrine.." 1 So saying Mafijusri disappeared..~·Q.·~·~.~.a wiped them out again.. he saw what was added and paused.dJ --.a : they began a controversy.'1i~ I I II ~.a again came to wipe out the writings. ~ !?pa.·' '/Jide Takolknsu's I-tsing.· !-~'''~.l01. and while the Acarya was kept back by fire.SYSTRM:ATIC WatTERS O~ BUDDHIST LOGIC -DIGNIGA 275 Acarya Dignaga. I undertake to be your spiritual tutor till you have attained the stage of perfection. Arya. since he could not work the salvation of this single indIvidual. The Prama:q. The . translation was prepared by an IndIan sage named Hema (or Ka. The_Tlbetan verSion of but a Tibetan tr<1llsIation still exists. e..a-samuccaya.a) several times and challenged him t. for none should wipe out what are of ~reat importance: if the sense of the words is not right..·S v ~". the Tirtha scattered ashes.·::: .~~.:. Dignaga came and rewrote the words and Isvara-kri?I).E . ~~'Q. the Tirth. C I. refrain: the intellect is infected by arguing with mean per~oDs. Thereupon Dignaga reflected that. Please know that when you have demonstrated it. ZfJ~!lJ' "il El·~·Q..a ran away. this Sastra cannot be injured by the host of Tirthas. ~'~'. So thinking he was on the point of giving up his purpose of compiling the PramaI). When he had vanquished the Tirtha (BrahmaI).~tq. In later times this sastra will become the sole eye of all the sastras.~ ~i'Sf~'~<J\'i'~ I iS~·~~·~·!4··€r:r~·qz:. and Dignaga.~z:. the BrahmaI). edIted by Rai Sarat Chandl'a DIlS.!!". and finding that he had gone out to collect alms.t:t~~. and one wishes to dispute on~ that account: let him appear before me in person. wiped out the ~ords he had written. refrain. he would not be able to work that of others.q~ ~.~'Q." When after Dignaga had gone out to collect alms. It occupies folios 1-13 of the :e§t. resumed his work and completed PramaI). Mafijusri miraculously appeared before him in person and said :"Son.naka) Varma (in Tibetan: Gser-gyi.t:t~~.Acarya returning from his rounds for a meal met the BrahmaQ.~ t:l~·t:ll!~·~·~-~~J. J.Ji'''~'Cl.-samuccaya. metre. !l Probably the same as "The S§gtra on the gronped inie. and burnt all the goods of the Acarya that happened to lie before him.rpnCt'li.an-ngyur. p.. The Pramana.

qj :.n-gyi-don-gyi·rje-gpag). Dignaga· states Prama1Ja. !J 1 The volume Ce of the ~~tan'l'ngyur..s put at Illy disposal by d~'04l:'~:. put togethf'r her~ varIOUS scattered matters. for the sake of expounding Pramaq.. in Chapter I of the Pramal1-a-samuccaya the India Office..works.. H Chapter I-Perception. compiled from my own works. (2} Inference for one's own self (Sanskrit: Svarthii.btu~-pa (=PramalJ.~...g-m:111i. BUDDHIST LOGIC. through Mr Thomas. Tibetan: Gsha. It begins thus:" Bowing down before Sugata-the teacher and protector-who is Prama'Yj>a incarnate. the subduer of controversialists in all regions and the possessor of elephantine strength.·l:..'zq~l!'f~'~zr~'~I:Xf'~d~'". (5) Negation of the opposite (Sanskrit: Apoha... Tibeiian: Tshan-selMwa).'l:tfaa:.'9t. _~ --.. MED.n'lbmana. '~~~QI~'q~~'Q " (~§tan-bgyur. Mdo.. London. In opposition to Ak~apada who propounded four pramli//}as (means of valid knowledge).!tan-ngyur.c.. Ce.' ~04~'" ~:." 8 It is divided into six chapters which are named respectively: ( 1) Perception (Sanskrit: Pratyalclta.'t1~~ . "'" -~~'Q'lqr."Q'''Sf~'Ii4~'Qz:. ~2!"~'~04'~. ~ .. (4) Reason and example (Sanskrit: Hetu. I. CHAP.'04'~iJi 11 Mdo.c.~ I dZ\·04·~t1·~z:. volume Ce. .."'~'f~'ij'~Q~' ~"'·04·"'1tJ·~·~:tiJi'~'\·~~~ .. t1Q~'~'~' 'tZlj ~:r" lx..:.a (valid knowledge). in Tibetan: Itag-~cog.276 INDIAN LOGIC. (3) Inference for the sake of others (Sanskrit: Parartftiinumana. SCHOOL.drlttanta.. C'tr. Blt-'/:IQ. 11 f.\'~'. wa.' Zlj~~ '~' ".~·1tJ~:..a-samuccaya) signifymg a compilation of aphorisms on PramaI~a) valid knowledge.Mdokun-la§-'Qtu§-pa (=PramaI)." \? In the closing lines it is stated that Dignaga. folio 1).l In Tibetan it is called TE>hC1.:J -- 1 "E042!o1'C.P:'·~~·Q1'Slt-'EfQ:-iq~·~~·'l " ~1tJ~.. section Mdo.:~~·1lI ~ . Tibetan: Ran-don~gyi-rje-gpag). III section l\Ido.§t."1tJ~Zlj'e. Ohapter I). Ca. '" '" ~lf!~·~ICf. compiled this from his own .a-sfttra-samuccaya) or briefly Tshagma-kun-la§. Tibetan: Mnon-sum). folio 13) (Tshad-ma-kun-]aa-btu~-pa.I~r~~'~·i:4~·~·ifjQr'rtV·I~ . d'\'~'''1~''''~'~z. and bene-factor of the world. and {6\ Analogue (Sanskrit: Jati. Tibetan: Gtantshig~-dail-gpe)..

Hat he descnbes PerceptIOn as that which. Dlgnaga.·~zq~·~'lf~·~·tI~ ~·tlq: n The Sanskrit equivalents for those two lines are as follows : ~~ilTq1~ ilTifi:iJTifWClt:f~'ff"l II \J (Pra. Chapter I). genus.Ii!cJi·~04 r~·'r~t:. a cow posses~ing the common characteristics of a class of cows. so that the perception of a thing consists of the knowledge of its individual characteristics alone. .·Sr<l·tI I ~t:. describes Perception a.. 277 tha. Pramii~a-samuccaya. Hence it follows that (a result of) Perception cannot be properly expressed by name. Suppose I see a cow.. . being freed from preconception. and Dlgnaga's whole theory of Perception severely critIcised. which I see. genus. Dignaga contends that Perception is not connected with the name. etc. _. l Suppose a man in twilight mistakes a rope for a snake: his knowledge of the snake is a preconception and is not. there is no other pramar). I can only convey to those persons the idea of a cow of a certain class. as we can perceive a thing without knowing its name It is also unconnected with genus. . that is.ga B descrIptIOn of objects derived through the channel of the PerceptIon.s (S. The Sanskrit original may be restored as follows:~cl. genus. is a peculiar one. etc. . is unconnected with name. an act of Perception. But very different is the case with inference. Knowledge derived through inference is general. This cow. genus.. etc. and is incapable of being properly communioated to others by name.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGiC-DIGNIGA. viz. Dignaga does not give any formal definition of Perception.ma:~a-samucca. which is well known as the knowledge of DIgna. Its infinite peculiarities can only be realised by me who have seen it.rilinr~liTq ')f11f1li f. sepses. and can be well expressed by name.a.as are only two. whereas that derived through Perception is particular.t prarnarj. . by the Hindu logICian Uddyotakara in hIS Nyayavartika. 1-1-4. but can never express to them the individual cow which I saw. perception (pratyak~a) and inference (anumana). m~ w:4 1 J n Chapter I of the follows :- f(3t\f N if 'SfiWf(1~ ~i<t " (Pramana·samuccaya. etc. etc.ya. All objects being known through them. Chapter I). according to Dignaga.·~t:.r f~q{1{ . The first of these lines has actually been quoted. If I proceed to indicate this cow to other persons by saying that I saw a cow which is named Dittha or which is red.

ro.~~·~~ 11 -- ~'~''1.)".ercourse of a. Vatsyayana in his Bha~ya.:tr." ~1{ I (Nyaya-sUtra. Chapter 1). viz the mind {manas) which through its intercourse with the soul.Jl:. Dignaga reviews the dortrines of perception of the Y ogins I (or Yogfu::.~.1. 1-1-4) tt~'ii1IPflill1{ 1ifiiarf1"i1':~f"i(. i f -- ~r.'.)~ 1 '" .. Vatflyayana observes that the mind 1S included in the sense-organs. As to the objection that the definition falls to enumerate even the special factor of perception.. '£'~8\''\t'. ~ ~·l:ro.. whOln Dignaga designates as Xaiyayika (in Tibetan: rig§-pa-can). are general factors and as such not mentioned in the definition...s given by Aksapiida and sense-organs with their objects. CHAP.·i..q~'t:1 ~ ! 5oIr!~'~~'QI?·cr~'E:'~%' II (PramaI.. J Grant:-can-pa) or Kapilas '2 (called in Tibetan Ser-5kya-wa) . ~ II .f~itqTOi{"lllr~ll{'tfT'iI'f.~T~~ft'iIf~~ f':{ 'iff<. Chapter I) • ~r.ilras called in TIbetan Bnal-hbyorPerceptlOns as uefined pa ') and the SamkhuaH (called in Tibetan in ot her schools. etc.T~ " ~filitNl': ""..r. being deterYatsyayana minate.q·~l. Chapter I) S The defimtlOn of the Naiyiiyika 1S quoted by Dlgniga..t. '-I.-samuccaya.. The soul (atm-an)..I\'~~'~'~~'~z:.m"'~~~iT~N. HI. it has been designated a sense-organ in the Vaise~ika philosophy. and the designation has been tacitly %'l:.rifl (Pramana-samuccaya.1ftr' '" ~I<mfc{q ru..1lif'UIIi~T"'1i "T'i(1=[lIl'qt.. The Sanskrit orIginal runs as follow" :- "" ~C\·!r~~·Qt· (Pramina-wLmuccaya. Ak'.fif t:~lI]tg ~ 'iff) ilii~ "~I'''' ~ ~~i(nt: 1 ~if'3~~~\n'i{r.?apada.278 INDIAN LOGIC) )IED.".'E:i E.~i.ij%'·!. SCHOOL) BUDDHIST LOGiC. as follows:Q'Q!!i'll'Q' ~. defines perception 3 as knowDlgnaga CritICIses the defimtlOn of perceptlOn ledge \VhlCh arises from the int.q{ qlfi~1{ I 1Iff.f.\41')"'¢3\'~ ~t:i. etc. unnameable and non-erratic.\I:.I\ " ~p.~fWi: N it a-bhis a.t this definition en umerates only the spemal factors of perception. EJ·. . pleasure.\'1t'..~~·'. which co-operate in producing not only perception but also inference.~. brings about their perceptlOn..tp"l·j..I\ I '" !4~ '1~i.f{fftr q~~~ftIf1f~~itl'ffiftr N iI.." admits tha.trt~''1'¢'" ~iJ4~'~ . ~ ~'e.cn~ '@'''tfll(liif(fflf'f I if1Wrlft~­ 'ftf~~J~ "il ~~.&. etc. commentary.\x:.·~~·~1) 'I' ~~'i ~·tI~·~~·Q·~·~~·~·Q·l:rf4·~~ Q.ls. 1-1-4 .

. Vizlanagaram Sanskrit Series). viz. it is to be understood that I accept it.1:fllliTflfl 'if(QlU~~~ffiJtN ~ I (Praaastapada Bhai?ya.'. substance (dravya) . ~nahabad)..fii')~~ft'~ ~f1f~..'''ii:.i .ttion should sta. ~""~·ij~·tH·~~·~X\·z:tx:. 121.. Sacred Books of the Hindus.q.fil~fcritlliriq'~ll{ iti~f~lf{rif~TC( ~Tl1lfi'if:~ftr~1f~ ~~'ff~ I (Pra8a. In another place of the Vaise3ika-siitra in connection WIth the perception of pleasnre...~:. Chapter 1). particularity (vi.~. etc. The SanskrIt original of this pQ.'lrfi.· . p..·~~·'5"i·Z\.. Chapter I). . the definition of perception.\&-samuccaya.."i." Dignaga laughs at Vatsyayana by saying that the Naiyayika. the mind (ffifij') is explIcitly mentioned as a.~~ ~ aetually found in the Valseslka-sutra as follows : "l1~r~l$'t1rf4rq'~ trfWlitI'li tril{iiillt{ I (Vaisefl\lka-sutra.. Oh! what a strange consistency 1 Dlgnilga quotes the Vau1e~lka definitIon as follows : - S'!::!~pr~~~'~'~~'~~ ~". quality (gu~a) and action (karma) on which.if~·IllI:l·c.. Allahabad).'~"i. is stated ~ follows : - .~". and the sense-organ witb its object. theory of my opponent.. that perception is knowledge which arises from the intercourse of the soul with the mind.accepted in the Nyaya philosophy according to the scientfic axiom.gram Sanskrit SEmes) Digniga quotes the explanatory portIon of the VaiSe~ika definItion as follows:c-.~ '::tI' '!If.·~·e..r~· ZIl~~' fit"i'~' ~~')lI\' ~ II (PramaJ. 1. "if I do not oppose a..ise~ikas.."·I2l~·1lI Qi~·q·~· 1·"ii:.nd thus:- QT"riil~1tanifq 1i~iI'iiTitef f~ 'Si~'iiTll1f11' 11' iftfVrif1( I Compare Prasasta. p.zq'''i&:.. I ir~'~i:. 181. 186...i:.:''il:l~ . 8eWle--Organ : - .stapada Bh~ya. :. In the Bhii~ya I (VaiSet}ika-sutra.. (Ak/?apada) takes pride in borrowing his definition of perception (pratyak~a) from the Sfi tra of the Va... p. the Vais€ J!?ika's intercourse Is dependent. The Naiyayika is however careful not to connect his perception with generality (samiinya). 186. as pointed out by Dignaga.~ ~·1. Sacred Books of the Hindus.' ! ~~.q.fel!a) .. of Praaastapida. 3-1-18. Vizlana..1~~Stlmi\J~" . whICh mcludes the mind. . The Sanskrit orIginal should stand thus:- """ But It 1$ ~mt~. the mind with a sense-organ.·~"i·qX\·~·z:tW~·q·~i:.-pada who gives a definition of perception (pratyak~a) which is similar to the one crItICised by Dlgniiga:- ... I viz. . " (PramaQa-samuccaya. 5-2-15.

1-1-4). smoke of fire.- --- .g. ran-Qshin)the mark may be in essence identical with the thing to be inferred.. "oiz.-siitra.L...5ga contends" if slienee was a proof of assent why did the Nyiya-siitra not remain silent regarding the other five sense-organa too! U il i~·"Clzq·~~·':rf~~:r:. The presumption from this silence is that the mind is not a. The mark or sign (reason or middle term) should possess one of the following three characters : (1) Effect (karya.ijf~~if 'f!"¥. says Dignaga.cl\ "~~'~'Zil~"'~'m'"(...Qt ~'~a'\'~l'~ '::!'i( II cha.". Chapter I)...rnuccaya.--.~·~". l . The original Sanskrit text of the verS& is quoted by Vllcaspati Mit1ra... .. tongue a..!·S·~~·tlQ. bbra§!-bu}-the mark.~vv 4". a 8imsapa identical with a tree.may be an effect of lhe Three characters of the thing to be mferred (predicate or middle term.. tacitly accepts it as such. 1 Digniga."'~ II (Prama~a~sa. infE"rence for one's self and inference for the sake of others An inference for one's self 2 (svarthan~tmana. ----- . .·r:r·I:t!~~·Cil~·~~·~Clt.A. Inference (called in Sanskrit an~l'Jnana and in Tibetan rje§gpag) is of two kinds. meant to say is : The Nyiya.g.'~ ! ~.. etc .'ll:r ~.IW "l:It. What Dip. thus:I( ~Tf1{ ~ 'liT 1i1'{1 err~~~ t 'IIIIf1J~""1~'ff ~~ ~... concluding therefroIX! that the mind (manas) is a sense-organ according to the Nyaya-siitra.. observes : - ~~·~Itf~·~~t:I..nd touch as sense-organs.ga.~'... the famous Hindu commentator on the Nyaya. e. l Chapter II-Inference for one's self..l~·samuecaya.·~ . not havmg opposed the mind as a sense-organ..J4J.. (2) Identity (8'rabhava. that the Naiyayika.. sense-organ according to the Nyaya.. _ _ • -------.c:L .. derived through its mark or sign of three characters.... _ . ear.rya-~ikl. If non-opposition was a proof of assent..tJ..-sutra.. --.~JI"".I'... a sense-organ. As to the mind it is not. e. are not objects of knowledge.. and pleasure (sukha) .. it was useless for the N aiyayika to have mentioned the other sense-organs. major term). 1:I"1~"r~"'~:'...-' . interprets the silence in a quite dtfferent way. But VltBy&yana.. ran-don-gyi-rje§rlpag) is defined as the knowledge of a thing DefinItion.. The view. nose.Il'f~.-'..-----.iT n (Nya:ya-vartika-titpa..pter II).-siitra distinctly m~ntions the eye. (Prama:t. Dign. is untenable. but !lays nothing as to whether the mind (manas) is a senseorgan or not. ". .J..

I f1'~l:fJ'l~.. the I n f erence..~.~ "r:. The Sanskrit or~gillals of these lines are as follows :~~ lol~l'Oifft it~ M~i~fit'lejr«r: I ~.\·tI·lJ.~it~CH 11 i . viz.S~·l::I'Q. hIy connee t e d maJor term.. is visible.(3) Non-perception (anupalabdhi.O\ .. His argument aga. W h' ICh' IS Insepara with it.·l~·<iO\·SJ'1 Q~'~~ ....·r~~·Q::'·Q...9~·"r:. . which is the middle term.f5lQ( Q'UI!:.. the hill. and also of others.·tP:.I'~' '. j::il'~·~O\·~O\·~~·ltJar:. but the other. i\'~O\'Q('~'~~'Q'l~ I .. mi-cJmig~-pa)-non.QQ(·~·~'" I ~~~'~. "" ~~O\'~~ ~·~ltJ·"tll:iP:P::. ~e.....®'a'\'''\tJ~'6.ii1lifti'lfi'r. ':l.f~ I "l~'~'~lI'!~'~'S1t:1.~. Dignaga mentions the views of some logicians who from smoke...·Q.:.. I "~Q(·c.perception of the mark may be due to the non-existence of the thing to be inferred.[9~'~ ~'\'CI~'~::...~::' II (Pramana-samucca.~" . f1·QltJ·Q. Ii NW 'f:iitf -sITiijt ~cr fCfiliiil<! ~ ~)\fi ~"4 ~~flq: "~Cf fiiffi~' . viz...~::' 1 ~ . whereas here only one thing. for connectlOn implies two things.~'.inst the other lo~icians is that they are not able to infer the connectwn. I 1 Dlgniiga.. fire. . ~·"r. writes : ~lX!~'~'Q.tj ~i'f:qfCi(~ftllff ~~iCI'T.. He argues against the first mentioned logicians saving that if they infer fire from smoke they gain no new kno\vl~dge from this inference. '" "1·Q(·. .~.~ ! .g non-preception of a pot is a mark of nonexistence thereof..~~::' I a.Q... for it is already known that gmoke is inseparably connected with fire.ya. is not visible What then do we really Infer from smoke 1 Dignaga says it is not fire nor the connection between it and the hill.."2'il:fJ'~'e. r. who from smoke infer the connection between fire (the major term) and the hill (the minor term).·'11~~·~·t:I~·Q~·a . ."':"il~·Q::..~'Q. but it is the fiery hill that is inferred.. chapter II)....rQ(' Ulr:. I ~'~'SJI:..\ ! ~'~'l~'<i8\'~'~ )" ! ~'~~'~~'ij.o~...'O\ I l~·~r:. infer fire.·ltJ ~~'2'i.

"'nr~l""TSr.1I1 . 231.~~.z:.rya-~ika. VindhYMvari Pruad Dvivedin. ·~~1fiIfr-.m...ke of others.·q...r {~ iUf.o.8. (Quoteq.. or major term (called in Sanskrit anumeya or sadhya and in Tibeta. Definition. inference or verbal testimony.J..~t~ r-ritiR: \il.. W r:t"i1l!'~ ~"i'~z:.·ii1~·illt.. The San..'ft: It (Pta. e. p... 'If'irfiarri flm U1I{1I "-=rlii~*I'''. Vizia. observes:::.Chapter III-Intera.. .. bya) is the object which is desired by one's self to be predicable of (attributed to) the subject (or minor term) and which is not opposed to perception... .nagaram Sanskrit Series)... Wn.. ~ f~~il': II f..Q:q' "it::. ~f1irf1{ I ~lIt-riiT~'iI' . An inference for the sake of others I (called in Sanskrit parartkanumana and in Tibetan ~shan-gyi-don. ~"·~'~rSl"l~·Q'1·a.~.skrit original should run thus : - .ff~. chapter III).r~T.·i!·~·F ~.·l ~'z:.·~CI\·l.n gpag-bya or Q~grub Predlcate. edited by !ILK. The Hindu logician Vlcaspati Mmra has quoted and oriticised these linea the Nyaya.r~~ I ~ 11m 'R!W ~-..{·~~~· r:t~ rI (PramifsUHamuooay..tJ~~·~"i·tit~ II (Pramii1.j irfifll'lm II (Pl'amal). gyi-rje1. .. l(it ~ lI'~fw I .-samuccaya.'i~'''iQ~'~ ! ~1:. 1-1-5. in Slokava:rtika-~iki. 252).i-gpag) takes place when a person demonstrates to others the conclusion drawn by him through an inference for one's self. The prerucate 2....'~'~~' ~&\.. 1 Dignaga observes :- n III ~~~'§'~CI\'. 2 Dlgniga.lINDuccaya> chapter III). Prda.-v8rtllm·titpa..ta1 1 "'?:~·~il·~~·"it::.stapida defines parirthillumiina thus:(Prdastapada Bhasya.ce for the sa...r«lWIIl1(il1{ I . chapter II). The Sanskrit original of thiS verse runs thU13:- 1fUWIi~ft( .....l& samuccaya..g. • ~sfi. p. the hill is fiery . ohapter ill).r:t~"" q'!~H4f~'iil' 1fT. ~.

chapter In) Tb. 1-1-35. Uddyotakara and Vacaspati MlI:~ra both severely criticize Dlgnaga's theory of Nine Reasons. quoted in Nyayavil'tika. whioh are wholly or partly present in the homologues but wholly absent from the heterologues~ are valid) their opposites are contradictory and the others are uncertain. ~:I\·.j~:.·~~·Ql·Ul'-..~~.spati run thus:- i'lfT ~r"i! ~~ ! "" .e 'lS&nskrit originals quoted by VAea.-sa.: ~'t ~.ni?l' .: Ui.1( Ii (P!'a.'ja. which refers to the local area of a reason or middle term In relation to its minor and major terms. :2 In the commentaries on Nyaya-sutra.· I ~i5-I'~~5-!'~ ?J4~il\ ~ltj~'Qj"'.I·ZiJ~~·~·it~·Qj·it~·1:I ! i\'~~~'~'r:l!~'I:l{~'lr~ q.la.1~~izt}~·Qj·~~ '\~. Nine Reasons.la-samuccaya.spati l{itira as follows :~ ~FIi'( i'tiJT "l4~ 'S1t~Vi' I '" ~ 1iitl1iifll ~'Q"'15 - ~~~ f~tiffl't It {PramiJ.~~~ U. is stated as follows. chapter III.. 1-1-35. The Sanskl'lt originals of these lines are quoted by Vsca.l~~. 198.' ~i5-I'li!"'?~'~ i. p.mana. chapter III).muccaya.~~·::rZll"'~·~·i5-Il?~·)~ 11 (PramiJ.-titparya-!ika on Nyiya-sutr8. in reference to their homologues and heterologues.. Dign1iga too reVlews the definitions of a proposition (prat~1na) as given by Ak.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAGA. The reasons or middle terms. ~if.pada and the Mimiirhsaka.-samuccaya. (3) The reason or middle berm must be absent from the heterologue (vipa~a) of the predIcate or major term.It is possible to conceive of nine reasons or middle terms i which are present in or absent from the homologues or heterologues wholly 01' partly.R"'''I:.\·~~·~~ '11¥j)~. 283 The law of extension.q'ft:·:Q.-The law of extension of the IDlddle term (called in Sam!!krit paksa-dharma 1 and in Tibetan phyogii- cho§). Vizlanagaram San~krlt series}..(I) The reason or middle term must coyer the subject or minor term (rYlk~a) (2) The reason 01' middle term must be present in the homologue (8apak~a) of the predicate or major term. is given below:~~~rl~ CJ. 3 A table of nine reasons.

--I i _I 6 l 5 The reason is wholly absent The reason is wholly absent The reason is (asatl from the homologue. . .milna-sa. contradictory.uooa. vahd.ya.a-samuccaya. ! The reas:)n is (sat) in the homologue.Nine reasons. I (sadasat) in the het. -_ 4 3 I.-tatpa. ________ The rea..-~~ 1 r The reason is wholly present i The reason wholly present \ The reason in the homologue I thl? heterologue. (asat) from the heterologue. (8adasat) in the homologue. The reason is wholly present The reason IS partly present. (sadasat) 10 the heterologue. 19 ~'--j----' ---.erol )gue. (4) produced m~)~~ fif~: 1\ (PramaI}. quoted in Nyayavartika. ----- pre~en~ I 7 rl 8 j I I The reMon is partly present The rea.son i s (sadasat) in the heterologue. • J -~. . (2) a product (lcrtaka). uncertain.m Sa..Jor term (t'ipak4la\. 198. 9 lI - IDustration of the ~ine raasons. as follow!'!:. chapter III. Vizia.m. valid . I HomologuE! of the major term (8apak~a) Heterologue of the ms. . ---- I II Nature of the reason.. p. IS (sae) (sat} In 2 i I 1 I 1 . No. 1 The Sanskrit originals are quoted by Vlicaspati Mi~ra from Pra. I uncertain. (8ada8at) in the homologue. uncertain.! (aeat) from the heterologue. I I. The reason is wholly absent \ The reason is partly The reason is (aaat) from the homologue.naga. . . ~~~Wi~ . contradictory. (3) non-eternal (anitya) .son is wholly present The reason i s (sat) in the heterologue. The reason is partly present The reason is partly present The rea.ra. uncertain. --------------1------ - j - The 1"eason is wholly present The reason is wholly absent II The reason is (eat) in the homologue. uncertain.ryar-tika on 1-1-35. chapter III. (aada8at) in the homologue... I 1 _ _ _ _ _ _- I r The reason is wholly absent (Gaae) from the ho~ologue. I .son IS wholly present The reason is (sat) 10 the heret"ologue.. I The reason is pat'tly present The reason is wholly absent The reason i B (asat) from the heterologue.nskrit Series).-The nine reasons 1 are illustrated by Diguaga in his Hetucakra (Wheel of Reasons) in which he assumes the following as reasons (or middle terms) and major terms respectively : Reasons or middle terms (ketu 1)_( 1) knowable (prameya) .

son in the 'Vheel of Law.:> ~fit"iij tl. Because it is knowable.·~3iSi·~~·'tt?.~'~'~ZIJ'~~' e. The Sanskrit originals are quoted by Vacaspati Misra from Pramil)a-samu. is wholly present in " sound" which is the subject and in "ether" which is a homlogue of " eternal" the predicate.i1Trfif~rsr~. Like a pot. and the remaining seven are invalid inasmuch as these are either contradictory or uncertain Take the case illustrating the first rea .rilrrWt1~~ij" f. (5) non-eternal (anitya) .. - . The Tibetan version runs thus:~~t?. chap.t the second and the eighth reasons are valid.!·t?. uulike lIghtlling and ether. p. Take the case illustrating the eighth reason which stands thus:This sound is non-eternal.on 1-1-85.S: If (Pramena-samuccaya..ernal. Here " a product of effort" abides in " this sound" which is the subject.~m f~"'Ifi(~ it 4i{q " ~ZIJ'lilf1~'~~~'Q!'~'1\. (8) non-eternal (anitya)." the reason.~·~%:. Because it is a product of effort. ccaya. 285 (krta). Here" knowability.!'e.1r~TfiJ(oll~'iili~ m'iir~ ~ll(l1'r: II (Nyayavartika-tatparya-!ika on 1-1-35). but does not abide in "li~~tning" which is also a \l~ l!fi'i. a pot" which is a heterologue of the" eternal. (4:) eternal (nitya) .~· 1 ~·~I:Il·tl'J.!~·e..{T-:WWT: I '" . (6) a product of effort (yatnaja). III). 198. Viziana. fii.Round is et.SYSTEMaTIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAGA. (7) a non-product of effort (ayatnaia) . (5) audible (Ira va 'lJ-a) .~. .I:Il·e. (8) a product of effort (yatnaja) . (2) non-eternal (an'ttya) .' knowability becomes an uDcertain reason.. chapter III. Predicates or major terms (sadhya 1)-(1) eternal (nitya) .'e. t'Uia' '!I'rq'q{ Q51T: I (Nyiyavirtika-tatparya-!ika..~am Sanskrit series).-Applying the Law of Extension to the Table of Nine Reasons or the Wheel of Reasons we find tha.... thus:1 r. (3) a product of effort (yatnaja).. (7) non-eternal (anitya). and in "a pot" which is a homologue of " non·eternal " the predicate.l·e. But being wholly present also in .!fl!li ll. (6) eternal (nitya). ApplicatIOn of the Law of Extenslon. Like ether and like a pot. It stands thus. and (9) tangible (sparsaja) . and (9) eternal (nitya).~·i:.·~iIi· -.

·~7!:.~~.. The affirmative reason signifies that the thing sig:.ll. e.g. certain point of view.:r~)~·~~·~~·q . viz. Calcutta).~·~z:q~'rl:l~.'1 negative (vyrttirek?"). . because it is not fiery. ' \l 'q'~ l1Tirfll'qff'if ~ -1t"!'""q"-'l~if: • t...l:t\~~. Buddhist Text Society.r~~ I . a ~. l 'lJiz... chapter IV)..q~~' ~ l:t\'Q{' ~~'Q'Qi ~·Q::1\·c!'~~·I:.. "'" I:Imz:re.. • (Nyiyavatiira.~~·z:r~::. S~~·~~· .-samncc&ya..ltJ ~ l! (Prarnana. chapter IV)..?~anta. .!i·Qi""'11j Q ~)~ ".\t: () "'. affirmative (ant1a.s0D and Example. Here the reason 'is partly present in the homologue and wholly absent from the heterologue and as such is val id Chapter IV-Rea...fi("lIi!H{~~ f1I~1~~ . chapter IV). Divakara : - . A similar idea is expressed in the Nyayivatara of the Jaina logician Siddha. the reason or middle term (caned in Sanf'krit netu and in Tibetan ~tan-tshigB) Affirmative and nega.aI}a-samuccaya.a. .~ I i~·Q. A person who desires to produce in others. z.yO kinds.homologue and in "ether" which is a heterologue of the predicate. From 8..'ui) and tive reasons.fi:t~.. a definite conclusion.·~~·~·8:t"·Q·)~ 11 '>Ii (Prami£:Q...ified by it is invariably accompanied by the thing signified by the predicate or major term. should state (in words) the subject. the hill is not smoky. the hill is fiery..-satnllccaya. e g. edited by Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana. The function of the negative reason is stated thus: \vherever there is absence of the thing signified by the major term~ there i'3 \ also absence of the thing signified by the reason or middle term. the predicate and the reason as also their mutual connection... ":0.is of t.Mna.'l:Il~'e"l:I:J~II\'~l:f\'!l~' " v (Pral. d. affirmative or homogeneous (ant1ayi or 1 'Ifj. because it is smoky (where smoke is an affirmative reason).· qtfcra.~E) ~.::'·QI·a~n~~~· r.·r. Sanskrit dr~tanta and in Tibetan gpe) which are of two kinds. in reference to the Law of Extension t In pointing out the connection of the reason with the major term he should state examples 3 (caned in Examples. as in his own self.

Et.~'~~~'l:l~~'~'~~'~~'~ I oIfJlO\". cha. Compare- i. §abda parlCcheda. . we really perform an act of Perception.·z:. An illustration of tha examples is given below:The hill is fiery.... in this connection. but is included in Perception. yon-tan).pter IV).ika. 287 sadharmya) and negative or heterogeneous (vyatireki or vaidharmya). an entity is defined as being the Apoha. I~1-6. chapt.ta-samuccaya. That which is smoky is fiery.. Credible Words or Verbal Testimony (sabda. He says that when we recog'nise a thing through perception of a similar thIng. whet' the Br§hmana Logician Uddyotakara defends the Nyaya-sutl'a and the Nyaya bh5~ya. knowledge. §pyi)~ a. Verse 15). ner-bjal) is useless as it 18 not a separate source of Comparison.·~f.z::t ~~'. yig-che~-tshig. kitchen (affirmative example).er V). According to the doctrine of Apoha 1 (called in Tibetan gshansel-wa). a review of the mutual relations of substance (d1'avya..-sarnuccaya.ta. jected as not being a separate source of 1 e.1I·&:f~~·~·~~·~~· Gr~ II (Pl'amar. or. upamCina. negation of its opposite. from the attacks of Dlgnaga. as a lake (negative example). quality (gU'fJa. rdsa§l). Rence Comparison or Recognition of Similarity is not a separate source of knowledge.It·q~·~·l'~·Cl~·~~ II (Pramat. But that Vlhich is not fiery is not smoky. Chapter V-Apoha -negatIon of the OppOSIte. (~loltavart.g a cow is that which is not a not-cow. According to Dignaga.3 ~'~~'~z::.s they both point out the connection of the reason with the predicate or major term. The "two examples are in fact identical a. ~::"Q. Because it is smoky..c.Q~'~~ ! .. hduwa). eabda. e. khyag). la§) . particularity (vi8e~a..SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAGA.·i5o( ztt~~ ~. action (barma. nag-don) is also reCredible word. §gra-Ia§-byun-wa. as a. There is. Companson Ii (upamana.c.:W~·~ !I (Pramana-samuccaya. ~~ifTiJ~ ifti~itf"~: fl!!l1f1{ " . generality (samiinya. bye-brag. Vide a very interesting diSCUSSIon on It In the Nyayaviirtika...nd inherence (samavaya. chapter V). or.

1)1' that tht> fact htl D. The Sanskrit original is quoted by Vaca::. prE'sent where the thing to be inferred (major term) or its homologue is l..l{1:').nvledge. Calcutta). Cha.T1TifT~lft~cn~ 13T1=!T~T~Tif"T It \II (Nyayavartlka-tatparya-tika on ~yaya·sutra.g.ra.: z::o. The Sa." Henc3 1)lcn.jR''Iii ~t{~~t{T~~?{ I ~ '4 ~:::. e. sabda pariccheda).. but. where there is no fire nor any thing homogeneous with l~nn'vde..'\W governing. •." ('\mtm.. p. q GfilfiJ11l' - II ~~ " 1 ~~·~~·~Zll ~ ~ t:l~ I ~·~~·~~·~·"'t1Zll "l!:l:'~'" 11 (Pramaz:!a-samuccaya.credlble. In this chapter there is an explanation of the Analogue S or Far-fetched Analogy (called in Sanskrit jati and in Tibetan !tag· gco~n which is of various kinds 3.~. 58.JTil''f. (..l1 t 1l:1 t ttl!' pf'I'son who spoke the word is ('n. (Nyiiyavartika.:f111~ ..~~t'.eparah' spurce of km...it nW.nskrit originals of these lines...patl Misra thus ' .~ .! ThE' IlHlrk (middle term) 2 i::. -==fttl4ijl fCflfm~l.H li' thp :-. :.l.dihli'. 1-1-5.ftlf II ~ l!) \I (Slokavattika. Vide Uddyotakara's rejOInder In the Nyayavartlka. but absent. homologue is non-existent.pter VI-Analogues or Far-fetched analogy. the present. \I ~1iI~~~Titt:fi ~ i{WifT'l{! ~a(~QT~ mq'f-rJf~tiT tr1f: 'Sf~!~~T~C{ifIT~ -. \Yh. smoke is present only where there is fire or any thing homogeneous with it. Crt'dlhle. chaptex II).~ ~ ! ~~·~t'. but absent where the thing or its m I dd 1t: term. 2 '" ~~'''''lI:lJ'~''''t'.!..icrni.e of Perception. the same. (2) apraplisama (ma-phrag-mtshull§). Bibhotheca IndIca. whICh have been quoted and criticised by Uddyotaka.tH'~ he.that Crpdlbl(> \Vord or Verbal Testimony is not a. .·it"·I24·itC. conclu(h~:-...ma::'::l a:-<1. (3) var'/'jJyasama ~~. On the other hand If til.. it i:-.1)i. run a.ficance of a Oredihk· '''''ord? PI )P:-. cflll'€ ftctT:ilf t::. is included in Perception and 1nh'rencp.a mert' ll1ference. such as (I) praptisama (phragmtshuil~). it i~ a en:-:. "i:-.It!J.> f:wt i:-. 1-1-7. 1-1-7). .\Tprrj·d is crE'diblE' 1" (.s follows:- ~1T~ if~Qir I ~ITq1 if'lfisins~fW . If the person.·Q~ 11 (PramsQa-samuccaya. S For an explanation of these terms vide the ~yi'iya-sutra. chapter II).

in the great Sa-§lkya monastery of Western Tibet. in the volume Ce of the TIbetan !?~ta. huil~) 80'11e other kinds of analogue are saId to be enumer~ ated In the Tirthika works..!. ~t. translation was prepared .ku8!l s I-tsing. Nyaya-dval'a-tarkasiistra": Vide Taka. The Sanskrit original is lost.·'1~:lf." It cpens thus :"Demonstration a.by the great Ka:~mirian Pc1... volume Ceo The. (6) Nyaya-pravesl1.the Sakya monk Grag~-pa-rgyal-m.l:. London I have also b~ouQ'r~t a copy of the Nyaya-pravesd. (10) upalabdh-isama (gmig§-pa-mtshuD. There exists a Tibetan translation of it which extends over folios 1K3-188 of the l?~tan-hg. 95. (8) vaidh. W:. 60.":& A Syllogism-Nyayavayava..nd 1224. or rather "Nyaya..vur.f~·raj~l) and in Sanskrit: Nyayavayava ( ~ilili'f~Cf ) I 19 .!)q. 36. (4) avar1Jya-sama patti 6ama (ma-§kye§-mt8huil~).". Parts of.J. and Perception and Inference together with their fanaci~8 are useful for self-understanding: seejng these I compile this Sastra...·lag (~ttJ~·Q~·. 1223 a." pp.. ~ ~~ ~r~Qltj ! W=-' ~t. ~~8\ ~OJ·~t.§). Dr Sugmra's .~<s~.:n­ hO'yur WhiCh was placed at my d\.§) and (14) prasanga-sama (thaI.. .. section Mdo. (7) sadharmyarsama (cho§-mthun-mtshmi§ l. 186. ~13) sadhyasama (Q§grub-bya-mtshuD.tshan-dpal-Qzail.. (5) anutkarya sama (hbra§-mtshull§).talog~e of the Chinese Trlpltaka.praveso-nama pramal~a-praka:raI}a. Syllogism. Thl::! IS probably the same as ." is another excellent work on Logic by Dignaga.q·~~·~=\ r I ~~'Q'I:l~3\'I:l~~'I:l~~'Q~ II " (Nyaya..:tj~Q)' f~~~:.-prave~a). No .. Hrndu LOgIC as preserved to ChUla and Japan.nr'l~:. from the monastery of Labrang m Slkklm whwh I vlstted m J-lay 1907. (9) mkalpa-sama (rnam-rtog-mtshun§).he Nyaya-pravesa. 2 ~'1·'i·~t. and BunyiU NarlJio's C'l.armya-sarnii (cho§-mi mthuu-mtshung).nd refutation together with their fallacies are usaful in arguing with others. DIGNAGA'S f~:rjod-mtshun§). (12) arthapatti sama (don-rtog§-mtshuDE!). where Sankara Svamin's Nyaya-pravesa· tarka·. Of. 289 (ma-brjog-mtshui1§).astra 15 notlCeJ.. (11) safnsaya-8ama (thetshom-mtshl. wa-mt . The Nyaya-pravesa.ita Sarvajna-sri Rak~ita and .·~S3\·~~ ..ui~). p.·~·~.a.S Some of the subjects discussed in the work are noticed below : - 1 I consulted t. is In Tibetan: Rig~-pal!i-ya:o.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDIUSl' LOGIC-DIGN'AGA. The work in TIbetan is called Tshad-ma-rig§paJ'-hjug-pahi-§go signifying the "Door of Entrance to Logic.posal by the IndIa Office.

Reasoning." (2) A thesis incompatible with inference. 1 In Tibetan: phyog~-lta. There are certain types of thesis which cannot stand the test The Fallacies of Thesis. in Tibetan: chofJ. ('q"'lfllt'N ) I . The Minor Term. 'smoke' the middle term.") (3) A thesis incompatible with the public opinion. The major term is otherwise called the predicate (in Sanskrit: sadhya or dharma. The minor term is also called the subject (in Sans~ krit: paklfa or dharmin. e." (Or. such as: "Man's head. linga or sadhana." (Really" A pot is non·etemal.290 INDIAN LOGIC. Thesis. product. in Tibetan: cho§-mthuu-pa) and (2) heterogeneous (in Sanskrit: vaidharmya. A minor term and a major term linked together constitute a proposition. The hill (minor term) is fiery (major term). (1) homogeneous (in Sanskrit: sadharmya.nskrit: pakllliibhlsa. and in Tibetan phyog§ or cho~-can). The following theses are fallacious : ( 1) A thesis incompatible with perception." but the world does not say so). and 'lake' a heterogeneous example. The example (called in Sanskrit: -dr~tanta.g.'~"':). The middle term is also caned the reason or mark (in Sanskrit: hetu. III. a middle term and two examples. 'kitchen' a homogeneous example. snoh as: "sound is inaudible. ( 1) (2) Here' hill' is the minor term. A pr0position which is offered for proof is a Thesis. 'fiery' the major term.P. "money IS an abommable thmg. Because it has smoke. This hill is fiery. b:cause it !s the limb of an animate being. a. SCHOOL.n (~zql$l'~1.l of proof and are therefore falla.. is carried on by means of a minor term. in Tibetan: gtan-tshig§ or Q§grub-par-byeg).r·t1na. because it is a. in Tibetan: gpe-Qrjog) is of two kinds. a major term. MED.nd in Sa. such as: "A pot is eternal.-mi-mthun-pa). (3) All that has smoke is fiery like a kitchen. is pure.cious. according to the N yaya-pravesa. CHA. BUDDHIST LOGIC. The form of reasoning is as follows :Form of a Syllogism." I or some men like me may say "money is an abominable thing. viz. and whatever is not fiery has no smoke. in Tibetan: Q§grub-par-bya or cho§). like a lake.

.' and the major term or predicate to bE' e P. such as: The Buddhist speaking to the Samkhya. such as : "My mother is barren. Three Characteristics of the Middle Term. In this reasoning.l The Middle Term (hetu) must possess three characteristics." (Sound is a subject well known to the Mimamsaka. If we suppose the minor term or subject to be'S.g. such as: "Pire is warm. such as: A VaiseS1ika philosopher saying" sound is eternal.anI'IIJt be offered for proof. e.TIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC--DIGNAGA. as ether.'3 a product.tan·tshig!!·ni-tshul·~sum ( ~r. (3) None of the things heterogeneous from the major term must be a thing denoted by the middle term.' then the above-mentioned three charact.SYSTEMA. "The soul has feelings as pleasurable. "product" whic~ is the middle term includes the whole of .~·~ZlJ~·~·~Q. : (1) The whole of th~ minor term (pak~a) must be connected with the middle term. (2) All things denoted by the middle term must be homogeneous with things denoted by the major term. "The soul is animate.. Because it is a product." (6) A thesis with an unfamiliar minor term. e. Like a pot. but not to the Samkhya). sound" which is the minor term." (5) A thesis incompatible with one's own statement. (7) A thesis with an unfamiliar major term. 291 (4) A thesis incompatible with one's own belief or doctrine.eristics of the middle term may be symbolically set forth as follows : (1) All S is R. No non-nan-eternal (that is.'eroo.g. but unlike ether." (This thesis \..' the middle term or reason to be 'R. such as: The Samkhya speaking to the Buddhist. viz. as it is accepted by all). All things produced are non-eternal." (8) A thesis with both the terms unfamiliar." (The Buddhist deals neither with the soul nor with its feelings). as a pot. Sound is non-eternal. (3) No R is non-Po Called in TIbetan: <. "Sound is perishable.I·ZlJ~~ Sanskrit: Lingasya trairiipyam (m'W q'il1 ) I 1 ) and in . no eternal) thing i. The Middle Term and the Major 'J. such as: The Vaise!?ika speaking to the Bllddhist. etc. (2) All R is P. (9) A thesis universally accepted. e.g.

'. . or inseparable connection between them is called in Sanskrit Vyapti and in Tibetan Khyab whICh was. viz. and exhibit the positive aspects as follows :(1) All S is R. The second and third of the characteristics mentioned above indicate the relative extension of the midRelative extension of dIe term and maJ' or term. and All S is some P. and (2) All l~ iti some P. All R is all P.nd the . Hence we find that Dignaga admits only two conclusions.OGIO. SCHOOL. or inseparably conne~ted with the major term. An S is all P. the negative aspect of the middle term. All R is some P. BUDDHIST LOGIO. the connection between the two terms may be symbolically set forth as follows :(1) All It is' ~ll P. Again. All R is an P. no R is non-P. Now. all R is P. m.292 INDIAN J. Major Term the mlddle term IS umversally. mvarlably. viz. only confirms the truth conveyed by one of the positive aspects. All S is some R. in the above instance 'R' and 'P' may be taken in their whole extent or partially. (3) All S is some P (conclusion) : Because All S is some R. Combining aspect (1) and aspect (2) together. CRAP. (2) All S is some P (conclusion) : Because All S is all R. The:y show that the lVIAddIe Term a. (2) All R is P. All R is some P. invariable. All R is some P. This universal. All R is aU P.. . MED. as far as I find. viz. we find that a syllogism may be of anyone of the following forms :(1) All S is all P (conclusion) : Because All S is all R. (4) All S is some P (conclusion) : Because All S is some R. So the two positive aspects mentioned above may be fully exhibited as follows :(1) (2) (a) (b) (a) (b) All S is aU R. and the major term or predicate is P. Hence we may put aside the negative aspect. first discovered by Dignaga Supposing that the middle tex'm or reason is R.

Because it is audible.:~r. (The' knowable' is too general.r-~na. Tibetan: l\!a-ne.l f oIIows:A. Sound is evolved.g. Sound is non-eternal. B.biding neither in the major t€ 'rm nor in its opposite.g Sound is eternal. The uncertain {Sanskrit: Am'scita.!-pa) which occurs: ' (5) When the middle term is too general.led in Sanskrit: Sadhara'r}a. {6) "'~en the middle term is not general enough. :Because it is visible. abiding equally in the major term as well as in the opposite of it.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAGA. 1 In Tibetan: gtan-tshig!·lta.:) and in Sanskrit: .. cl. (Neither of the parties admits that sound is visible). e. Because there is vapour. (Vapour mayor may not be an effect of fire. and mayor may not be connected with it otherwise).g. because it abides in the eternal as well as the non-eternal. The hill is fiery.!. Sound is eternal. Tibetan: Ma-grub) which occurs: ( 1) When the lack of truth of the middle term is recognized by both the parties. This is a fallacy of being too general. The unproveil (Sanskrit: A siddka . Owing to the violation of one or more of the three characteristics. (The Mimamsakas do not admit that sound is a product). and in Tibetan' Thun-mOll).n (1tf5"'1 dlll'f~·w. there occur Fallacies of the Middle Fallacies of the Middle Term which may be of fourteen kinds as Term.c. caJ.g. :Because it is knowable. (It is questioned whether ether has qualities). (4) When it is questioned whether the middle term is predicable of the minor term. Because it is a product. Ether is a substance. Because it has qualities. e. e. e. e. (3) When the truth of the middle term is questioned. e.Hetv~bhasa (urVltJ ) I .g.g. (2) When the lack of truth of the middle term is recognized by one party only. 293 Fourteen Fallacies.

( 10) When there is a non-erroneous contradiction. e. (The non-eternal abides in some of the things which are not products of effort. that is. (9) When the middle term abides in some of the things homogeneous with. Because it is a product. Because it is incorporeal. C. ( 8) \Vhen t. called in Sanskrit: ASlir)hara'f)a. Sound is not a product of effort. Tibetan: Ijgalwa) which occurs : (II) When the middle term is contradictory to' the maj or term. but others are not as intelligence).. (7) When the middle term abides in some of the things homogeneous with.. but as they lead to con. e. Sound is eternal." (Both of the reasonings are correct. and in some heterogeneous from. MED .et~rnal. and in Tibetan: Thun-mon-ma-yin). (Some incorporeal things are eternal as ether. Because it is always audible. m.g. (The non-eternal abides in some of the things which are not products of effort. . The Vaise~ika speaking to the Mimamsaka : "Sound is non-eternal.he middle term abides in some of the things heterogeneous from. (This is a fallacy of being not general enough. Sound is . when a thesis and its contradictory are both sapported by what appear to be valid reasons. the major term. SCHOOL.g. Because it is non-eternal. the major term. such as lightning. and in all things heterogeneouB from.g. e. e. and abides in all things which are not non-products of effort). The contradictory (Sanskrit: Viruddka.294 lNDu::N' LOGIC. the major term. BUDDHIST LOGIC. Because it is non-eternal. tradictory conclusions they are classed as uncertain). and in all things homogeneous with. CHAP." The Mimathsaka speaking to the Vaise~ika : H Sound is eternal.g. e. and abides in aU things which are products of effort).g. as lightning. Sound is a product of effort.

e.rsna. nor an action. serviceable to the soul which is attributeless. Like generality-particularity-(Samanya or generality does not depend pon one substance.'s Samkhya-kanka whiC'h is the oldest of the works on Ssrilkhya philosophy that have come down to us. :2 The universal proposition. syllogism of the celebrated Greek logiclan Aristotle. according to the Sarhkhya. The hill is fiery.'s theory of examples.l relatIon between the mIddle term and the major term. (13) When the middle term is inconsistent with the minor term.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC--DIGNAGA. 295 (12) When the middle term is contradictory to the implied major term. Samanya (generality) is neither a substance. Because It depends upon one substance and possesses quality and action. the apparent meaning of 'some being) is 'the body. The Example. serves as the major premise in a. . Like a bed. seat. nor a quality. Dignaga converted an example into a universal proposition. Objects are stimuli of action: Because they are apprehended by the senses. Like a kitchen (example). for. the proposition expressive of the universa. Because it has smoke.g. The eyes. DIgnagn. It was long unknown in India. Examples converted to universal propositions. meaning (1) things and (2) purposes. e. e g.' but the implied meaning of it is 'the soul' Though things 'made of particles' are serviceable to the body. invariable or 1 This exa. etc.. that is. l (Here the major term "serviceable to some being " is ambiguous.mple may lead us to presume that the author of Nyiiya-pravesa knew Isvara K. (" Objects" is ambiguous.g. Hence there is contradiction between the middle term and the implied major term). The middle term is inconsistent with the minor term in the second meaning). etc) (14) Wl en the middle term is inconsistent with the implied minor term. Digniiga. that is] a proposition' expressive 'of the universal. they are not. An example before the time of Dignaga served as a mere familiar case which was cited to help the understanding of the :istener.'s discovery of the universal proposition marks a new era in the .g. etc. e. Because they are made of particles. are serviceable to some beine:.

wlt (~~. becanse it is not eternal. That which is incorporeal is eternaJ as intelligence. .s example). . e. A heterogeneous example is thus given:Whatever is not fiery has no smoke as a lake. That which is mcorporeal is eternal. a~es 0 the homogeneous e:. e. This is caned a fallacy of the Excluded Middle and Major Terms). d . because they are not mcorporeal. history of Indian Loglc. Because it has smoke.l. Sound is eternal. Fa. BecauEle it is incorporeal. inseparable connection between the midrlle term and the major term.bhlsa { ~at~1Ii'il'TRnJ ) I . OHAP. That which is incor poreal is eternal as the atoms. BUDDHIST LOGIC.E!toh of these kinds becomes fallacious geneous example. Because he is a speaker. This is called a fallacy of the Excluded Major Term).g. The above example is homogeneous.~t:I'~lI\'~t:. (3) An example homogeneous with neither the middle term nor the major term.'l::I ) and in Sanskrit: Siidhartll ra-dr. (2) An example not homogeneous with the ma. beeause it is neither in. Sound is eternal. Sound is eternal. -.g..!-I!lthuniipa-ltar-!!nan. The hill iB fiery..jor~ tetro.ample a.re the following : (1) An exa. viz. and shows It great development of the principle of induction. e. corporeal nnr eternal. (Intelligence cannot serve as an example.. as a pot. ( I) Hornogane-ous and (2) Heterogeneous.g. Because it is incorporeal. (4) A homogeneous example showing a lack of universal connection between the middle term and the major term.tl~ant8.g. 1 Called in Tibetan: Cho(. SOHOOL.. t F a II' f un ar Oe.g. which stand to each other in the causal relation or in the relation of inherenoe. e.. (The atom" cannot serve as an example. Because it is incorporeal.296 INDIAN LOGIC. MJ!lD.WI>lft Clrcums anoes. (The pot cannot serve as an example.llacies of th~ homo. This person is passionate. AU that has smoke is fiery as a kitchen (homogeneou. nI.~~~. This is called a fallacy of the Excluded l\fiddle Term).m-ple not homogeneous with the middle term. e. Examples have already been stated to be of two kinds. .

as a pot. (The atoms are not incorporeal~ yet they are eternal. Sound is non-eterna. Whatever is non-eternal is not incorporeal. yet incorporeaL This is a fallacy of Included Middle Term in a heterogeneous example). "\Vhate'\el' is non-eternal is a product of effort. as a pot.g.n example. Called in Tibetan: ChQ~-mi-J!lthun-tlpe-ltar-!!!nan. (Though a cert.R a certain man in Magadha.q. e. as atoms. Whatever is non-eternal is not incorporeal.l.ain man jn Magadha may be both a speakpr and passionate. the connection between the major term and the middle term' has been inverted. because though it is both non-eternal and a product of effort.l are the following:(6) An example not heterogeneoll~ from the opposite of the middle term. there is nevertheless no universal connection between being a speaker and being passionate. (8) An example heterogeneous fro~ neither the opposite of the middle term nor the opposite of the major term. ~lhoever 297 is a speaker is pasRionate. Fallacies of the heteroFallacies of the heterogeneous example geneolls example.. Because it is incorporeal.~t:. e. e.llacy of Inverse Connection called in Sanskrit: Viparitanvaya. (7) An example not heterogeneous from the onposite of the major term.t). ~x:. A nanvaya. in Tihetan' Bje~-su-hgro-wa­ phyin-ci-log-pa).g. This is a fallary of included Major Term in a heterogeneous example).g. e.. Sound is eternal. This is a fallacy of Absence of Connection. \Vhatever is non-eternal is not incorporeal. Pecause it is incorporeal. in Tibetan: Bje§-su-hgro-wa-meg) (5) A homogeneous example showing an iuv('rfle connection between the middle term and the major term. a. Sound is eternal. Becc1use it is incorporeal. Becam:.wa (1'~'~'i5oI?l1li'a:. Sound is eternal. (The pot mmnot serve as a.e it is a product of effort. (Intelligence is non-eternal.SYSTEMATIC WRI1'ERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIGNAOA. This is a fa.. as intelligence. ~ . "!Iliffr\ll~' I • 1 .'~) and in Sanskrit: V8idharmya·~~antlibhasa. i e all products of effort are non-eternal: but all non-eternals are not products of effort. called in Sanskrit.

g.abhasa. as ether. This person is passionate. TIl. ledge for one's own self. e. Fallacv of Refutation (called in Sanskrit: DUt'aJ. (10) A heterogeneoup example showing an absence of inverse disconnection between the middle term and tUe major term. etc.l. Perception and Inference.in Sanskrit: Pratyaksa and in Tibetan' ence and theU' Fallacles. All the three kinds of fallacie-s-of the Thesis. • linon-sum) IS knowledge derIved through the senses. SCHOOL. fallacy of Included IvIiddle and Major Terms in a heterogeneous example). Inference (called in -Sanskrit: Anumana. Middle Term and Example-are fallacies of reasoning Refutation (called in Sanskrit: DUl$arj. Sound is non-eternal. eternal. and in Tibetan: Sun-b:byin) consists in finding out in the rpasoning of the opponent anyone of the fallaoies aforementioned.298 INDIAN LOGIC. as a piece of stone.. Perception and Inference are the two kinds of valid know. (A pot is neither eternal nor incorporeal. This is called 8. Because it is a product. genus. (9) A heterogeneous example showing an absence of disconnection between the middle term and the major term. CHAP. The example shculd he inverted as : Whatever is non-non-eternal.e. ' '. e. Whoever is non"·passionate is not a speaker.g. a. There are Fallacies of Perception as well as of Inference (called respectively Pratyak~abhasa and AnumanabhAsa in Sanskrit. BUDDHIST LOGIC. i. and in Tibetan: Sun-hbyin-ltar-§nan-wa) consists in alleging a fallacy where there is no fallacy at all. Perception (called PerceptIOn. is not a produot. I t is free from illusory experiences and is not connected with name. (This is called a fallacy of Absence of Disconnection of a heterogeneous example). as ether.a.je§-su-gpag) is the knowledge of objects derived through a mark (Tibetan: :J3.tag§) or middle term which has three characteristics. .sum-!tar-nan and Bje§-gpagltar-§nan in Tibetan \ . Because he is a ~pei1ker.nd lVlilon. and Infer. and in Tibetan: :J3.l. Whatever is non-product is not non~eterna. This is called a fallacy of Inverted Negation of a heterogeneous example. MED.

ga has analysed all nine possible relations between the middle and the major terms and has found that there are among them two relat. At t I brought a copy of the Tibetan version of the Hetu-cakra-hamaru from the monastery of Labrang in Slkkim whIch I vIsited in June 1907. section Mdo. The Sanskrit original of this work is lost~ but there exists a Tibetan translation which extends over folios 13-96 of the B§tan-ggyur.ions which conform to the three characteristics of the middle term already laid down.po.tq~o. Prama. . p. 299 96 DIGNAGA'S Hetu-cakra.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DIONA-GA. The PramaI. The Retu-cakra-hamaru 1 is another small treatise on Logic by Dignaga. who has destroyed the net of errors. by the famous Indian sage Vasudhara Rakl?ita. It is divided into six chap- ters corresponding . E04l.-hamaru. on the Ptamal}. and the remaining seven relations are at variance with those characteristics. The Tibetan translation was prepared by the sage Bodhisattva of Za-hor and the Bhiksu Dharmasoka. folios 193-194.iE~'8i~ I "'" ZlJ'8\·~oCtf~·~~·." 2 It begins thus :"Bowing down to the Omniscient One (Buddha). hut a Tibetan translation is preserved in the ~§tan-hgyur.samuccaya-vrtti.la. S o. The Sanskrit original is lost. who was as it :were the crest--gem of logicians. (Logic of Nine Reasons). 187 2 The Hetu-cakra is also called in Sanskrit Paksadharma-oakra and in Tibetal\ PhY°g§-cho!'!-dguhi-gkhor-lo.. :O~'6oIf58\'~'~l!J'Q.\~·~ !l . section Mdo.\'I'04t~·Cl~ I 5t~~. Accordingly he has concluded that only two relations are valid as will be evident from the annexed diagram.to those of the Pramat. In Tibetan it is called Tshag-ma-kun~la§-Qtu§-pahi-bgrel-wa.l:I~'QG\'5.. and the Tibetan interpreter Sha-ma-gge-Q§fien-siil rgyal.samuccaya-vrtti is a commentary." S In this work Digna.rF·~·~ I l:IJ?~·~·~t\'1·Q·'11~·l. The work in Tibetan is called Gtan-tshig§-kyi~hkhor-Io-~tan-Ia-cjwab-pa signifying" the Wheel of Reasons put in order. volume Ceo The Tibetan translation was prepared. at the command of king Rig§-ldan'"'rgyal. I explain the syst€ m of three characteristics of the Reason (or Middle Term).a-samuccaya by Dignaga himself.ta-samuccaya itself.Q. 97.'l:I'o. This work is probably the same as the Hetu-dvara sastra: 'll'tde Takakusu's I-taing.a.

volume Ceo It was prepared by the Indian sage Hema or Kanaka Varma (called in Tibetan Gser-gyi-go-cha) a~d the Tibetan interpreter Dag-pa-se~-rab in the monastery of Siwahi-gge -~na~. who edIted the Tib~tan version.' this work to Dignaga who dealt in it with fourteen fallacies besides other subjects. H..a-samuccaya-vr tti in TIbetan extending over folios 96-183 of the ~~tan-hgyur.la-parlk~a. section l\1do. The Bet'U-cakra. MED." .me as "Alambana-pratyaya-dhyana. but there exists a Tibetl:l." 2 The NyR'ya.her translation of the Prama:Q. 98.ulted the TIbetan xylograph of this work as contained in the IndIa Oftic~. volume Ceo In Tibetan the work is called Tshag-mahi-bdtan-gco§-rig-pa-Iahjug-pa si~nifying "An Entrance to the Science of J.8. m." The Chinese title of the work is Gyen-min-gshihi-cin-libi-lun. It was translated into Chinese by the Chinese interpreter Tha sam-tsan The Chinese version'l was translated into Tibetan by the Chinese scholar Dge-se§-siil-gyan and the Tibetan monk ~ton­ gshon in the sa-§kya monastery of 'Vestern Tibet.ga the grear. BUDDHIST LOGIC. and find that they are identilcal in their contents. the end of the work it is stated. I 99. The AlambalJ. wrote this sastra which is as deep as the ocean.ve cono:. .lika Philosophy. London This 18 probahly t.a-sastra Nyaya-pravesa 1 is another work by Dignaga. The orIginal Sanskrit work. 1223 reptesents I-tsing's translation of the Nyuya-praveaa.. of Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripi~aka.-sastra Nyaya-prav9sa.n translation which consists ot one folio only (folio 180) 1 At t. 1224 is Hwen-thsang's translation finh.. is a part of it. The Nyaya-prave!§a. A]ambaI.n-hgyur ascrIbe!:. 68h I have re-exa. One was translated mto TIbetan d1rect from Sanskrit and the other through the ChinE-se language. cOn'eElponds to Nos. The very venerable Chinese monk Dharmaratna (called in Tibetan Cho§-kyirin-chen).-praveSa.Jogic.300 INDlAN LOGIC.a-pl1rlk~a 8 is anot·her work by Dignaga. of which tbese two are translations... T..he kmd sug-gashon of Prof. No. p. . The Sanskrit original of the work appears to be lost but the Tibetan version still exists. which trea. brought out in 711 A..D. 'I' _ . . while No. dialectician of sharp intellect.ts of nine reasons. Pl'ama:Q. CHAP. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. 1223 and 122·:1. SCHOOL..he sa.hed in 648 A. It consists of folios 188-193 of the :B~tan-l!gyur section Mdo. The ~1l!ta. was perhaps called simply Nyaya-prave8G...8onama-pramana-prakarana) and Pramana-sa<ltra-Nyaya-pravesa (fully called Pramana4iistra-Nyiya-praveso-nama). Digna. compared it thoroughly with the Chinese version. and the Hetu-cakra combined together constitute Dignaga's "Logio of nine reasons and fourteen fallacies. Ui ('Vide hlS Vaiseij. Prilma:Q.mmed the Pramana-Nyaya-pravesc£ (fully entltled as Nyaya-pravp.D• • l! I ha.." There is anot. that" led on by the command of Mafijunatha (the god of learnmg).

folios 182-18:'5. He arrived in 546 A. 2 I have consultf>d the TIbetan x~ lograph of thlS work as contained In the IndIa Office.gyal-mtshan.njlO's Catalogue of the Chmese Tripitaka. Paramartha.la·parik~a. Trikfi. AlambaI). Of. section Mdo. at Nankin where he translated numerous works into Ohinese. 101." " Vide Bunyiu Na.va. volume Ceo The work in Tibetan is called Dmlg8-pa-Qrtag..vmg "An Examination of the Objects of Thought. He is said to have translated the Nyaya·sutra too. folios lRO-182. This version was prepa.3 born in 498 AD. Appendi:s: II.D.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-PARAMARTHA. (49)3 A.m. The work in Tibetan is called 'Du§-'Qsum-Qrtag-pa &ignifying "An Examin8J tion of Three Times." 102. 313.: a Buddhist ascetic He was placed by Jivita Gupta 1 or Kumara Gupta. p. Bunyiu Nanjio's Oatalogue of the Chinese Tripi~aka No. 104 105." It begIns with ::m invocation to Buddha and all Bodhisattvas.D.rik~a-vrttl. .D.'1'amaJ:la) at Ujjainl in Westprn India China in 569 AD. The Sanskrit orIginal of this work appears to be lost but there exists a TibE'tall version in the :6~tan-bgyur. ParamaJ'tha taking a large number of Sanskrit manuscript8 went to China with the mission which spent several years in India. third edItion.). 100. and was presented to the Emperor in 548 A D. In 550 A D. The work in Tibetan is called Dmig§-pa-brtag. It 1 I have consulted the xylograph of this work as contamed in the India Office. His death took place in U.. as an interpreter at the disposal of a Chinese nlission sent to Magadha by the Liang Emperor Wu-H in 539 AD. V. but there exists a Tibetan v{wsion which is embodied in the :B~tan hf4vur. Oanton in 546 A. PARAMARTHA The Trjkala-parik~a ~ is a work by Dignaga. 301 of the l?Btan-hgyur. He reached.D. A Smith's Early HIstory of India.. he trauslatpd Vasubandhu's Tarku-sastra. p. The Alambaq. into Chinese.-569 A. section Mdo. 187 The" worlds" evidently stand for" times. section Mdo.red bv the :great Pa.pahishgrel.pa slgnif.a-pa. Nos. volume CA. 1252. London This work is probably the same that IS called by Takakusu " The ~astra on the Meditation of the Three Worlds I t : vide Takakusu's I-sing. 'i.lita Santakara Gupta and the interpreter-monk Tshul hkht'lm~-!. Vide.a-parlksa-vrtt1 1 is a commpntarv on the A lamba~a-pariksa by Dignaga himself. The Sanskrit' orjginal of this work appears to be lost. volume Ce. London.

kara Svamin at all. '3 which was translated into Chinese by Hwen-thsang in 647 A.). as we have seen. CHAP. Sankara Svamin. p. ~ Professor H. is further reported that he wrote a work called Nyaya-bhal1ya 1 or an explanation of the Nyaya-sutra in five volumes. No. L9gic is said to have been handed down by Dignaga through Sailkara Svamin and ten other masters to Silabhadra. This work seems to be different' from the" Nyayapravesa" or more fully the "Nyaya-praveso-nama-pramaI)a. Sa.D.ed to entertain him at a feasb. Sugiura's Hindu Logic as preserved in Ohma and Japan. or NyaJ a-pravesa Tnrka-sastra. p. XED.-pravesa Tarka-sastra...D. pp. . He was admitted into the University at Nalanda in which he acquired great distinction. ca.a" which.. . Xu. In the evening of that day his heart was oppressed with sorroW" and.). Even Hwen-thaang in his Travel does not mention him.N:KARA.302 INDIAN LOGIC. who was the head of the Nalanda University. He was the eldest son of a great minister of the country. Ie. pp. in 635 A. According to the Chinese Tripitaka Sankara Svamin was the author of a work called Hetuvidya Nyaya-pravesa~sastra. DHARMAPALA. S Vide Bunyiu Nanjio's Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka. Dharmapaia. (ABOUT 600-~35 A. 11.. 1216 of BunylU NanJio's Catalogue. he left home and applied himself with unflagging earnestness to learning. and the favourite teacher of the Chinese pilgrim. seems to oofl"eapond to No. 37. The Tibetans do not know ~ail.lled the Expla..nation of the Can-luna All have been lost•••. From his childhood he exhibited much cleverness.nd 230.. ~ Vide Dr. 104. Ui observes:- .ka. Subsequently he became the head 1 He (Paramartha) also transla. Ill. 1. SVAMtN (ABOUT 550 A. fIwen-thsang. 13. may have been the translation of Nyoya ••••. He seems to have been a native of Southern India.). who VIsited India during 671-695. SA. SCHOOL. and he Wi'o{. 23: .n-shwo (or lun) tao-Ii-Iun .••.D. 229 a. vol. 1216.e a camm. and as he was a young man the king and queen of the country condescenq. (VaiSe~ika Philosophy. speaks of Dlgnaga and Dharmkirtl. was a pupil of Dignaga.. prakara:Q.dhyayas of Nyaya-sutra. No. 110-223. Appendix I.•• Ca.•.ry (5 vols. vol. and 8UO:"111 :SlillJio's Catalogue of tho Chinese Tl'1pi~a.nkara Svamin's NyAva. assuming the robes of a Buddhist recluse.D. 84). lvii.fi a logician.enva. 36. Vide also Takakusu's I-taing. 103. but does not mention Sankara Svamin.• the Can-shwo (or lnn-) tao-Ii-Iun (one vol.) on the last.ted ••. Is the originalSanskrlt text of 1216 different from that of 1224 'f Ii 'Fide Beal's Buddhist Records afthe Western World. was a native of Kancipura in Draviga (modern Conjeeveram in Madras).z as it appears from Chinese records. BUDDHIST LOGIC. and Appendix I. that the commentiary consisted of five volumes suggests the five a. The Chmese pllgrim I-tsing. is ascribed by the Tibetans to Dignaga. p.

in the Vedas and Vedangas.3 called in Tibetan Cho~-grag§..D. it is to be accepted that in olden times Trimalaya was called the kingdom of Cugamaq.D. was born in the south in the kingdom of Cucjamaq. p. ACXRYA SiLABHADRA (635 A. and since on the other hand aU the orthodox and heterodox alike name Trimalaya as the birth-place of Dharmakirti. and was the author of several works such a& (1) Alambana-pratyaya-dhyanasastra-vyakhya.D. and was of the Brahmaq. found in Kausambi the ruins of a monastery where Dharmapala had refuted the arguments of the heretics.qen only sixteen Qr eighteen years old. sages.' Since. Silabbadra 1 belonged to the family of the king of Sarna tata (Bengal). Endowed from childhood up with a very keen intellect he atta. 175185. and in all the theories of the Tirthas. and Takakusu's I-taing.D. He must have retired from Nalan?a before 635 A. The Chinese pilgrim. ACARYA DHARMAKIRTI (ABOUT 635--650 A. was his pUpilll in 635 A. . conjointly with Bhartrhari composed a Bega-vrtti on Paq. 106. 181. 303 of the University.D. xlv S Vide Lama Ta:l"ana~ha.Ougamani is probably the same as 004a or Ohola country in the Ea~tern Deccan. who visited India in 629 A. however. 105. His father was a Tirtha of the Brahmalta caste.). Ii! Vide Takakusu's I-taing. vol. 4. Hwen-thsang. according to the accounts of all earlier Darmakirti's life. The excellent Dharmaklrti.SYSTEMATIC '"\"EITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DHARJlAKIRTI.a caste~ He was a pupil of Dharmapala at the Nftlanda Univf}rsity of which subsequently he became the head. p. sastras. As a fact Dharmakirti was born in the Deccan. pp. Silabhadra was a great logician and master of. (2) Vldyamatra·siddhi-sastra-vyakhya. 110.. and found that Silabhadra had succeeded him in the headship of the University. Dharmapala. there is now no country of thatname. p. Hwen-thsang.D. in the art of healing. 11. W. He was a fonower of the Yogacara philosophy. Parivrajaka Korunanda by name.). .i.ined to great skill in the fine arts. he was already deeply versed in 1 Vide Bears Buddlllst Records of the Western 'World. . in grammar. when Hwen-thsang visited it.i.'s Geschichte des Buddhismuo VOll Schiefner.ini's grammar. and (3) Sata-sastra-vaipulya-vyakhya which was translated into Chinese in 650 A. Vide Pramana-vartika· karika.

Note on the Middle Count.dhyadesa 1 (Magadha). . induced the latter to enter upon the condition that whoever was defeated should accept the doctrine of the winner. SCHOOL. In this connection mde a very learned article named . and knew in all 500 sfitras and dharaI}ls by heart. Upon thls Kumarila was enraged and appeared with 500 Brahma~as. Prayaga in the east. five hundred male slaves and five hundred female slaves and many hundred men. desiring to become acquainted with the secret doctrine of the Tlrtha system. January 1904.fter entering their sel vice. But Manu defines Madhya-deSa as the country lying between the Himalayas on the north. during which he withstood all his opponents and converted many of them to Buddhlsm. Kumarila 8.. he left his house. MED. ill. CHAP. There grew 11p in him a strong inclination towards Buddhism. On inKumal'ila. and realised that the teachings of Buddha were without faulM.'8.ada. 'SfiIIislf '5Ifim~ fi\!l~: ~.for deba. Putting I In Tibetan literatnre ]\{adhya-deSa. When Dharmaklrti.)ffi1f: • (Manusarilhiti 2 : 21). Occasionally he attended lectures of the Buddhists.as in the night of his departure. Obtajning knowledge of the secret teaching from Kumarila. the Vin<1Lya Il!ountam" on the south. He donned the dress of a Buddhist U pasaka (devotee) When the Brahmaq. Gupta and other followers of the Tirtha system and entered upon debates with them The debates lasted fnr three months..Svati on the west: """~~~lii'i l. was received into the Sa.a Kumarila was an incomparable master of the same.N LOGIC.ngha (priesthood) by Acarya Dharmapala. Kumarila had received a large fortune from his king) owned many rice-fields. With the wages which he received from KUIDarila for his speda'! serdces he gave a great feast to the Brahmal].ll[ 'SfTat m~fq . he was informed that the BrahmaI}. the philosophy of the Tirthas. and the river Sal. They allowed him to hear the secret doctrines. donned a Dhannakil'ti and slave-attire and went southward. Dharmakirti. BUDDHIST LOGIC.as inquired the reason of this he praised the excellence of BuddhiRID for which he was out-casted. Dharmakirti) who did not desire the death of Kumarila.nd his wife were satisfied. He proposed the condition that whoever was dofeated should be killed. Thereupon he challenged the followers of the system of Ka~ada named KaI}. signifies l\Iagadha (Behar). Thereupon he came to l\fa. attained to great learning in the three Pi~akas. a. performed the work of fifty slaves indoors and outdoors.304 INDL4.te. The assertion that Kumarila was an uncle of Dharmakirti is unsupported by Indian authority.ry of Ancient IndIa" by Rhys Davids in the Journal of the Royal Asiatic SO{!lety. quiring who was versed in the Tlrtha system.

edited by Sal'st Chandra Das. The extract may b3 transla. If Dharmakirti. Dharmakirti toward. This Acarya (Dharn:. Returning to Dravali (Draviqa) he challenged by criers those who were ready for debate.) Dharmakirti must also have lived about that time. m pursuance of his extraordinary pledge. :followers of Buddha. which is recorded in the Cho!l!-byun of Tiirlinstha. (000:':'171e) up as the prize they began the debate. The majority of the Tirthas fled. CQpag-bsam·ljon·bzan.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DHARMA-KraTI.ij~. who lived within Dharmakirti's t. As the latter lived Dha.\·at~~ !! (!?pag-bsam-ijon-bzan. Those of his pupils) who by their lives had become like Brahma. sets and his doctrines sleep or die.l·~·'1~·Q·ijaf~~·~·O\~·Qx.s the end of his life erected a villara in the lan~ of Kalinga.lly confessed that they were not equal to the fight. lO6). 305 Dharma. Kumarila and his 500 follow· ers b~came followers of Buddha. 106). the range of the Vindhya mountains. p. 20 .ctua. and for for cremation. This date agrees well with the statement that Dharmakirti was a contemporary of the Tibetan king Sron1 This tradition. liz:.·~'~l:Il~ I .!·~<i2'. He reesta blished all the religious schools that had fallen into decay in that country.\·zq~.2.rmakirti's a.drti) and the Tibetan king Sron-tsangam-po are said to have been contemporaries.F ~ ·~t&1S·I::I~2t·r~~·d\~·1::I f~' al' .ted thus :-Upon thls Kumarila was enraged and _appeared with 500 attendants for debate Bemg defeated he and his attendants became.! Dharmakirti further withstood the Nirgranthas (Jainas). as follows : - ~7.ge.~' "(12l'Q~'l'~'~~'~~' ~·Cl. which statement might be accepted as authoritative. 2 While sojourning in the Vindhya mountains Dharmak~rti .in!ited by a neighbouring king who. is repeated in the :Qpag-bsam-ljon-bzSol1. and some :. and finally Dharmakirti was victorious.!!~. From this account it is evident that Dharmakirti was a pupil of Dharmapala. had the fol!owmg InSCrIptIon recorded on his gate : - F zq~·~·'l~·~·SlQj~·Q·~ I it''1~'l~'~'1'Q'~ ! &~·~!ol~·ttf~~·ayz:q·Ui~ iI\'~ I 'l~·!ol·~~·~!ol~·.was .i:'~'zq~i!\. the sun among disputaDts. p. and lived in the loneliness of the forest given up to meditation.~~. Rahuvratin and others. in 635 A. and after having converted many people to the Law (Dharma) passed away. the false doctrmes of the Tirthikas wul then rise. as a token of honour.' ~~·Q~·'\tf. Then there f€ seven days _the whole country was filled with fragrance and music. carried him to the cemetery -ll a heavy rain of flowers.riumph.D.

15 Of.. p. tsan. The Mimarhsaka Suresvaracarya.ta-vartika-karikii embodied in the ~~tan-hgyur. 107.. folio 239 Vide Louis de la Vallee Poussin's Le Bouddhisme d'apres les .ill"$tqftr 'if ~'. dar. p.~vlrtika.. m... Ce. 1892.. ~do....-vartika-kariki. The Brahmanic logician Uddyotakara g is a. vol.lVlli.:lr~ ~CJ\ H (Pramaz. Bhart:rhari and Kumarila. B.1i have on the contrary criticised the definition of perception (PratyakEfa) as given by Dharmakirti.~ after Dignaga. MED. 2-2-28)• ~ . 54.. The Pramax. p. p 229.~~ I 1I1aTf'f ~f'riili ~~ er ~i{l.-karika quoted in Madhaviicarya's Sarvadalianasathgraha.Ff: n tViicaspati's Bhimatl on Vedanta- . chapter on Bauddha." Journal 01 the Bombay Branch. SCHOOL.ttacked by Dharmakirti. .. author of the A~ta-sahasrika.yakavartika.ra.IN!~~: riti~t~lt 1\ (Pramana-vartika. The Tibetan version of the vel'se runs as follows:~~·~~·Cl~~'.4-author of the B:rhadaralJ.gam-po who lived during 627-698 A. p.D. CHAP. oj (he Bf>yf&Z A8iatiG Society. and Csoma de Ko:eos's Tibetan Grammar. 5 Vide Journal oj the Bombay Braf'Uih of the Rqyal A. sources brabmaniques t p. On the other hand I-tsing. xix. BUDDHIST LOGIC. Pram~~a. A verse 7 of this work was quoted by the Hindu philosopher Madhavacarya in the 14th Vide Wassilief. xvui.· QX\'tt'"'''lfl'l:. 34). Dharmakirti was very young as Hwen-thsang does not mention him.. tJ'fI" !iI~itf=rl:iffltilrT~ if 'i1f tf'1'it ~~TCir: I "~ ~fitf'l. I It seems that in 635 A.D.l?yaka.ta-vartika-karika is one of them.8iatic Boekty. who travelled over India during 671-695 A.rhada.D. 1 i Cf. Pathak's . vi.:g·r~·I::1·~"?~ \I oR. and the Digambara Jaina Vidyananda. 3 Vide K. declares eloquently how H Dharmakirti made further improvement in Logic . ]895-97. who is sometimes designated by the shorter name Klrti. . sana).4: I (Suresvara' s chap.. 56.) B.306 INDIAN LOGIC. The verae runs thus :- sutra. Dharmakirti is the author of numerous works on Logic. - ~ "~\lrofU« ~. Vac asp ati Misra 6 too quotes Dharmak"irti to criticise him.. vol.183 2 Takakusu's I-tsing.

" The work is divided into four chapters as follows :-(1) Inferenoe for one's own self (in Tibetan: Ran-gidon-rje§-su-gpag-pa. The work in Tibetan is oalled Tshag-ma-rnam-l!grel-gyitshig signifying "Memorial Verses explanatory of Prama'(l. Once at ~mposltlon 0 e wor. The Sanskrit original of the Prama:q.~4fQ .D.SYSTEMATIO WRITERS ON BUDDIDST LOGIQ-DHARMAKIBTI. Isvara Sena. The oolophon'* of the work runs as follows :-' '-Here is finished L'I_ • Vide Tiiranatha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner.sa. gro§. and (4) Words for the sake of others (in Tibetan: Gshan-gyi-don-gyi-tshig. The following story I is told regarding the composition of this work :It. told him that he was at Ii berty to condemn all the mistakes of the work and to prepare a critical commentary on it With the permission thus received he composed a metrioal commentary on the Prama:q. . leaf 258). the latter so far from being displeased.fnon~sum. ~. was not a direct pupil of Dignsga.~~.la.i a pupIl of Dignaga.q:a. for. he heard the Prama!)a-samuccaya Having heard it for the first time J he at onoe beoame as proficient as Isvara Sena who had minutelv studied the work. (3) Peroeption (in Tibetan: l\. and when he heard it the third time.numana). folios 194-258.a· vartika-karika.-vartika-ltiirika itl §etall..~.~·::r~IN~· :O"'I~' ~3\' !l'Q. When he mentioned them to Isvara Sena.a·vartika appears to be lost. while Dignaga lived abotlt 500 A. in Sanskrit: Parartha-vakya). in Sanskrit: Svarth5..·i~·Q f '" ~Ql'~ '~"l~.. . London.n-hgyur of the India. 176. the author of the work. This translation was prepared by the Indian sage Subhuti-sri-santi and the Tibetan interpreter Jdge-wahi-blo. Vide Dr. but there exists a Tibetan translation 8 Subjects of the work. is said that Dharmakirti studied many dialectic sastras...'Q. " bgyur I ~do.na's IntroductlOu to "Bltinguallnde:s: of "3i~' i·it~· QQ·i'N!*I:I!o1·tr i~' i:l'~Q'4'l' ~'~'~::q~' Q~' c. .31~·~·ii)a:a.'9Jz:q~'Q~' ~~'J!"'IN'~~'Q'~I:l'Q j ~ "' ..~". £"·IN·~i'N:I!o1·Q. Satis Chandra Vidyabhu. f th k but his spirit was not satisfied.3 I have consulted the copy of this work embodied in tHe ~Ita.samuccaya. he beo~me like Dignaga. volume Ce.u¥. . It seems that Isvara Sena~ in whose house Dharmakh·ti heard the Pramana. one -.a-samucoaya oalled the Pramaq.a or Sources of Knowledge.!SI:II.".D.·~~~·J:.qQ.~. ' t h e h ouae 0 f ..~.aJ:. Ce. he reoognized several errors in the work.a (in Tibetan: Tsag-ma-grub-pa. in Sanskrit: Pratyalctfa). p. section lVIdo. Office. 307 century A. Dharmakirti lived about 635 A. (2) Establish~ ment of PramarJ. in Sanski'it: Pramar)a-siddhi)..· Q' ~Zf!~'l'i It (Pramil. When he heard it the seoond time.~ I 1 2 -. of it in the ::B§tan-hgyur.D.

) ! 1Trti~"~filrf't1ii~'if '@~ II (~) (Pramana-viniscaya..$ \ll ~ ". 32 and 34} identifies the above verses with their Tibetan versIons as follows : _ Prof.ta-vartika-karika called PramaI].·~~ I! ~'~'~'~:l\''\~::)'\'I::l~Q{!l II zq~p:.l'Q'~' ~r'. wilo exposed largely the errors of aU the vicious texts (of the Tirthikas). 2 .·~!:.. %:l'z~r"iJ\'Ui~ it~ ~·~~·'!j""'~::q·. London.l·?j~·Q~·f3i·q:... whose fame fined the entire earth. i~·f·t1·Zll~~·Q:l\· iJlE~·Q~·~z:. quoted a by Madhavaoarya. the Pramana-va. pressing down the head of elephant-like debaters... Louis de la Vallee Poussin in his" Le Bouddhisme d'apres les sources if Ei:t~·3ao.:q~iJ\·Ul. MED.la..-vartika-vrtti.'l"" c6~'9JZI'J~'~~'%:l ..a vartika-vrtti by Dharmakirti himself...l\·~ltf~·Q·¢iJ\·~QQl· ~z::n. whose fame filled all quarters of the earth and who was.q. dar~ana. Pramat... ~!itan­ ~." pp. There exists.j-' trr'W~'~~ ~li ~~ Wll1{~ ~~~"11[ ..ph of this work embodIed in the h2'Yul' of the IndIa. There was a sub-commentary on the Pramar. II ('Pi') if1~i'lf~~l: II (.. and who as a great sage had no rival" 108. :d il'T~Sif~r<l1T ~nmf~ 'fl. Mdo.. however.. In the concluding lines of the work Dharmakirti i~ described as a great teaoher and dialectician..rtika-karika of Sri Dharmakirti who was born in a family of the Deccan.·~· ~2\.. Ill. The following verses of Pl'amana-viniScaya were quoted in the Sarvadarsanasamgraha. PramalJ.itift \$ ~fql1ri'rsfq il'ffl~r fcfqta~ff~iir: ... folios 420-535...-vartika-vrtti opening lines).:q~' 'ri~' Zi·lt~~"W:...·I11· ~ ~~·Wo.a-viniscaya. CHAP. In Tibetan the work is named Tshag-ma-rnam hgrelgyi-hgrel-wa.l~·'!iz:.!O:'1i1:. as it were) a lion. BUDDHIST LOGIC.308 INDIAN LOGIC.. chapter on Bauddha.D. The Sanskrit original of this 1 I have consulted the Tibetan xj<logra. by the Hindu philosopher Midhavicirya in the 14th century A. is another work on Logic by Dhal'makirt~. brahmal1lCJ.·R~·Crit"·tl~·~:l\ II ("l) ~~·~r. PramaI)8 viniscaya. The Sanskrit original of this work is lost..q·~~tlf~·Q·~~·qq·~" II . Ce. Office.a.. ."!t H 109.5§tan-ngyur.. a Tibetan translation 1 of it in the . ohap. I). SCHOOL.! 'Imnl~Tm' I >..l.- Yo I (Pl'amaJ.ues..

5-1 <i.). (2) Inference for one's own self (in TIbetan: Ra. !.\: aUlt 273 respectIVely)..:z:r~8\ ~. London. Satis Chttndi'a Yidya:bhu~. J. The tranRla· tion was prepared by the Kasmlrlan PaI)J~ita Parahita Rhadra and the Tibetan interpreter Blo-Idan-se~-rab in the matchless city of Kasmira. ana (3) Inference for the sake of others (in Tibetan: Gshan. (?ra!'!lt." The work is divided into three chapters as follows :-(1) System of Perception (in Tibetan: l\tlilOn-sum-gtan-laqwab-pa. in Sal1skrit: Pararthanumana). J. f'mbothed .ag-::?a. The work in Tibetan is called Rig§l-pahi-thig§-pa signifying "A Drop of Logic. folios 347-355.2 I have consulted the TIbetan xylograph of the Nyaya-billdu embodIed m the !?~tan-hgyul' of the India Office. as also the ex(!eUcnt.:ie 52:'>:5 -:f other~ (in Tibetan : (Jshan-gyi-don. Nyaya-bindu is another excellent work on Logic by Dharma- kirti.gyi-rje~-su-gpag-p!1. In the concluding lines Dharmakirti IS described as a great sage of unrivalled fame born in Southern India.~e "r_~)etf~n 1?§:-~<l-:l~~ Ul)' SlI~~·<.1·q~·". in Sanskrit: Svarthanumana). in Sanskrit: Pratyalqa). Compare a "Bilingua. 27-. Sher-batski.:. :::. Mdo.aki) IS al.? ~ . ANALYSIS OF THE NYAYA-BINDU.·t'l¢~·l:l~if\·r~~·~~x.~Z!J ~~~'~lN 11 tq ~ t:':::.a. 1 I have consulted the 'l'ibetan xylograph of this work embodied in the B~tanbgyur of the India Office.I~::. in Sanskrit: Svarthanumiina).a·· :. London..~-gi-d~:r:-gyi-:r~e5-~::-~!. II (rq) """ _d:. w~rk 309 appears to be lost. 110.u). Oe.r 0. II c~. lVldo. in Sanskrit: Pratyak~a-vyava8thfj. a~ cr"." It is divided into three chapters as follows: (1) Perception (in Tibetan: . io1108 27~.~ay::>.\~Z\·~~ ~J!: 11 a. edItiOn of F.j ~ ~.. in Sansril···'l~Z!J·~I&. AN b t S • U Jee s.J\!!ilOn-sum. The Sanskrit edltion of the Nyaya-hmdu and l'ika.ex of Nyayabmdu " by Dr. :111 tl.gyi-don-rje::::-su-gpag~pa. Ce."·l'\I:. Ce. There exists a Tibetan translation It of the work in the :B§tan-hgyur. Mdo.:q r. The Sanskrit original of this 'work h 1 was d' lscovered a~ong tepa m-1 eaf manuscripts preserved in the Jaina temple of S8Jutinat11a) Cambay> and has been published in the Bibliotheca Indica series of Calcutta by Professor Peterson.l Ind.. and. ... (0. folios 259-347.he1'e bat. (2) In terence for one's own self (in Tibetan: :Bdag-gi-don gyi-de~-su· gpag-pa.SYST'RMATIC WRITERS O~ BUDDHIST LOGIO-DHARMAKIRTI.>o avallable now. (by F.a In the Bibliothl'ctt lndic-a series. Nyaya-bindu. :::""lie~6:'_38 :')_. The work in Tibetan is called Tshag-ma rnan-parile~-pa signifying "Determination of Pramana or Sources of Knowledge. but there exists a Tibetan translation! of it in the :B§tan-hgyur.

etc.310 INDIAN LOGIC. This is the peculiar characteristic of an object of perception. Inference for one's self.. journey by boat. perception is individual knowledge while inference is general knowledge. Forms or characteristics The three forms or characteristics of the of the mIddle term: reason or n:id~e term are the following :_' (1) The middle term must abIde m the minor term. plished by perfect or valid knowledge. etc. In chapter II. for instance. and this characteristic also shows that perception is a source 'Of valid knowledge for it exactly corresponds to the object perceived. trees on both banks appear to move. (3) self-consciousness. and this characteristic proves the object to be absolutely real (paramartha-sat). Inference for one's own self (Svarthanumana) . which is knowledge derived through the senses. MED. work are noted below. a cow which I see is a peculiar one possessing an infinite number of qualities which distinguish it from alJ cows> whereas a cow which I infer is a general one possessing certain qualities in common with other cows: that is. SCHOOL. Demlltlon of Percep~ Valid knowledge is of two kinds: (1) PerceptIon.a).g: the shadow of a tree may appear as the tree itself or a rope may appear as a snake. BUDDmST LOGIC.' the knowledge of th. err'~'e term bearmg its three forms or characteristics. (2) perception by the mind. An object of perception is like itself (sva-lak~a1)a) while an object of inference is like anyone of its class (samanya-lak~a7J. m. Some of the subjects discussed in the Peroeption. because it has smoke.. e. as it shows that it possesses some practical efficiency. According to the proximity or remoteness of an object. perception of it varies. Perception is of four kinds: (1) perception by the five senses. and (4) knowledge of a contemplltJtive saint. e. .g. it is stated that aU objects of man are aCCOID. to a man journeying by boat. Preconception refers to the experiences of false images which appear real as if they were capable of being addressed and touched. krit: Parartkanumana).t.. quick motion. In chapter I. Perception. is defined as the knowledge of the inferable DefiDl tlon of Inference d ' d through th e reason or mIddle . In the instance c this hill has fire. tion (in Sanskrit: Pratyaksa) and (2) Inference (in Sanskrit: Anumana)..' hill as having fire is derived through smoke which is the reason or middle term. shaking. Error is caused by such causes as darkness. for one's own self. . is described as that which is free from preconception (kalpana) and devoid of error (abhranta). CliAl'. for instance.

thus:(1) Identity (in Tibetan: Ran. e.g. e. because it is not perceived (though smoke is of such a nature that it is perceptible if existent) . 311 The hill has fire. because there is fire. (3) Non-peroeption (in Tibeta.use there is smoke.use there is 110 tree at all (iv) Perception contrary to identity (Svabhaya-viruddhopalabdhi). Here there is no cold sensation. e. in the above reasoning 'smoke' abides in a kitchen which is homologous with things tha.TIC WllITlmS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DlIABJUldBTI.g. _ Here there is no Si. (v) Perception of the opposite effect (Viruddha-karyopala bdhi) . because there is no smoke here. Because it has smoke.viruddhopalabdhi). in Sanskrit: A'Aupalabdhi)} which is of 11 kinds as follows : (i) Non-perception of identity (Svabhavanupalabdhi).g. Here there is fire.ke which is heterologous from l'he middle term is of t bree kinds Three ldads of the according to the relation which it bears to middle term. Here is no smoke. in Sa. e.g. e. in Sanskrit: Svabhava). (iii) Non-perception of the pervader or container (Vyap~kanupalabdhi). e.g. Because it is simsapi. In this reasoning there must be ' smoke' on the' hill. Like a kitchen.ry conneet.g.t contain fire (3) The middle term must never abide in cases which are things that contain fire.ion (Viruddha·vvintopalabdhi).SYSTDU.st entity Js not certain. (vii) Perception contrary to the effect (Kiirya.g in the above reasoning . the major term.. la. Here there are no causes of smoke of unobstructed capacity. This is a tree.g. Even ithe destruction of the pa. because there is smoke.nkrit: Karya). (vi) Perception of contra.re no causes of cold of unobstructed capacity.g. Here there a. (2) Effect (in Tibetan: I]:bra§-bu.g. (u) Non-perception~of effect (KaryanupsJabdhi). but unlilte a lake. e.-bshin. beca. There is no cold sensation here.rilsapi. e. . smoke' does not abide in a. e. heterologous from the major term.' (2) The middle term must abide only in cases which are b:omologous with the major term. beca.g- e. because there is fire. because it is dependent on other causes.n: Mi-gmig§·pa. e.

.g.3£ others. A thesis is fallacious if it is incompatible with(1) Perception. .312 INDIAN LOGIC. No non-non-eternal~ i. Inference for the . because it bas smoke. constitute a proposition which. (xi) Perception of effect contrary to its cause {Kara!)a.ake of others th a t ' h the reason IS . Sound is inaudible. Here there is no icy sensation. CHAP. IS. III.sake of others. set f orth In . There is no smoke. In this reasoning t hill' is the minor term which is to be proved as having .:' "E. as foHows :(a) Sound is non-eternal: Because it is a product. (PalclJabhasa). eternal (thing) is a product as ether (negative). Inference for the sake of others is of two kinds: (1) positive or homogeneous (in Sanskrit: Sadharmyavat).g. Hair on his body does not sta. though they are not themselves knowledge. BUDDHIST LOGIC.-viruddhakaryopalabdhi). SCHOOL. they produce it..e. e. for. (b) Sound is non-eternal. e.nd erect. labdhi). Because it is a product. when offered for proof. (x) Perception contrary to the cause (Kara~a-vircddhopa. beoause there is no fire. A minor term and its corresponding major term combined together. Inference for the sake of others (Pararthanumana) is defined as the declaration of ?efinition of Inference the three-formed middle term in words: tor the '!. has fire. (ix) Non-perception of the cause (KaraJ?anupalabdhi).g. and words are here caned inference by the attrIbuting of effect to cause. e. is called a thesis. HED. . In chapter III. This place does not contain any person on whose body hair stands erect. it is said to be an inference for ~_::: ". fire' whioh is the major term. because there is smoke bere.g. The minor term (Pak~a) is that to which the relation of the major term is to be proved. . and (2) negative or heterogeneous (in Sanskrit: Vaidkarmyavat). e g. e. ('riii) Perception contrary to the container (vyapakaviruddho· palabdhi). because he sits near a fire. Fallacies of the thesis There are four fallacies of the thesis or Pak~ibhisa. as-This hill Thesis. Inference is a kind of knowledge. W en words with a view to ~"'-::'O~1~~~!1g a conviction in others. bAcause there is fire. All products are non-eternal as a pot (positive).

because it includes the eternal as well as the non-eternal). thusA. (6) A certain man is omniscient. (H efviibluisa) occur even if one of the characteristics is unproved. Because it is a product. because they die if their bark is taken off. (8) Sound is eternal. Because he is a speaker. e. because it IS visible. Contradictory (viruddha). Example is of two kinds: (1) homogeneous and (2) hetero-l1' f th 'h geneous. It has already been stated that the middle term must possess three characteristics. (Here' product' is not heterogeneous from' non-eternal '). Because it is a product. (The reason is not general enough.th of trees is not admitted by the opponent).jor term).SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DHARMAKmTI.' that is.}. (Visibility of sound is admitted by neither party). B. (The knowable is too genera. Uncertain (anaikantika) (1) Sound is non-eternal. source of knowledge. Fallacies of "the te!::lacies of the middle middle term. 813 (4) One's own statement. the middle term is opposed to the ma. (7) Sound is eternal. Because it is knowable. Inference is not a. because it has vapour. because it is perceived everywhere.CleS 0 . C. Unproved (asiddha). for speakers are not necessarily either omniscient or non-omniscient). (Here 'product' is not homogeneous with 'eternal. un certain or contradictory. Fallacies of the homogeneous e omoF QU8. (2) Trees are conscious. (This pecular kind of dea. (1) Sound is eternal.g. (It is a matter of doubt whether the soul is perceived everywhere). (Vapour as an effect of fire is questioned}o (4) The soul is aJl·pervading. (3) The hill has fire.

beoa. (5) This ma. Like the person in the street. (Actien ~can:not serTe as an example. passionate' a.s to the validity of the middle term.mple.use they are excluded from the middle term).ssionate. (This exa.l. that is. tha. . Like a pot. Like atoms. (1) Sound is eternal.is questionable whether the person in the street is pa.ssionate and aon. Because it is incorporeal. because it is not that is. oertain person. being (. .mple is unconnected (anantxJya). because they are not inoorporeal. Because it is a.te). it is questionable whether the person in the street is passiona. CHU.t is. (This example inTclves doubt a. Like the person in the street. speaker '). (6) This man is non-omniscient. roduct.nd middle terms. 'Beca. M:mD. (This example inyol"fes donl>t as to the validity of both the major a..l. Like the person in the street. BeoaUle he is a speaker. (4) This man is passionate. (Pot oannot serve as an example. for there is no inseparable connection betweeD. (The penon in the street cannot serve as an exa. eternal~ . that is. Becauae he ~ passionate.omnisoient). Because he is a speaker.314 IlflHAN' LOGIC. becauee it is neither eternal nor inoorporea.nd being a. (3) Sound is eternal.s to the validity of the major term). that is. SCHOOL.use it is incGrporeal. .. . (7) TlWs man is passionate.. (8) Sound is non-eterna. (AtolJks cannot serve as an example. tha~ i$.n is mortal. it. Like a. Beo&use he is pa. ':Because it is incorporeal. is e~mal. as it is questionable whether he is passionate. (2) Sound. BUDDHIST LOGIC. LUte action. Ill. becauae it is ex~luded from the major term) . it involves doubt a. because it is excluded from both major and middle terms).

. kind of fallacy called contradiction which ..ga and Dh armakirti.. a d't IS ml ted b y b 0 th D'. . 315 (This example involves the fallacy of 'connection unshowD. Refutation (Dil~a1ja) consists in pointing out in the reasoning of an opponent anyone of the fallacies Refutation. mentioned above. The fallacies or semblances of refutation are the analogues or futilities called in Sanskrit Jati. The opposition of the middle term to the major term is a.' apradaraitanvaya: the connection should be shown as follows: All products are non-eternal like a pot).r~~ t1 Q"Lt1·~·~·tr~t. 1 For Jati vide Nyiya-siitra. ~~'~'~ZiJ~'Q~'ij'~lJl~'fl'~ ~'Q 11 l~~·~ZiJ'~~'~zq~·tl~"Ii1~.. the entire Tirthikas as Sakyamuni had subdued the large army of Mara.ga.l In the concluding lines of the Nyayabindu it ie.t 19na.~·~l:. Opposition of the middle term to the implied major term (in the event of the major term being ambiguous) is noted by Dignaga in his Nyaya-pravesa S as another kind of fallacy called implied contradiction (in Sanskrit: i~ta-vighiita-krt·viruddha.!q·Q~·Q~.rt. vipa.SYSTEMATIO WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIo-DBA. a.stated by the translators that "Dharmakirti vanquished Concluding pa.rr. Because it is non·etemal. and in Tibetan: cho§!-kyi·khyag~par-phyin-oi-log-tu-§grub-par-byed. Ii d rad'· .BMAXIBTI.phorism 58. Book I.·~·~·Q·~ " r:.z -li·~r. (9) Sound is a product. r_.up e cont lctlon. the Nyayabindu has exterminated the !tmaka theory (that is.ritanvaya: the real connection should be shown as foHows: All products are non-eternal like a pot) Similarly there are nine fallacies of the heterogeneous example. and as the sun dispels darkness.I~:-'·)'" II ~ (NY'ya~bindu).·~·a. (The example invol ves the fallacy of inverted connection.. the Tirthika doctrine )-wonderful ! 'it Dha. ..rmakirti cJ:'lticises Digna. All non-eternal things are products like a pot.u.

{Ny a:. admit of only one meaning. inasmuch a.. Pa. See ante Nyaya. etc.S. ~CHOOL.y Branch of the Royal AsiatlC Society.g. The reasoning would then involve a contradiction of the middle term to the desired or implied major term.1friIi'I '<S"= f~l1Ii~~fV ~J{lTV1fCWi: 'D~~~. p. the body) or a noncomposite thing (e. 1!fi~1't iffffl"Rltf ~ ~ !I)s: I (Nyaya-bindu-t.cari called in Tibetai1: haal-wa-la.~6 "On 'the authorship or the Nyaya-bindu" in the Journal of the Bomba.s it may signify either a composite thing (e. I. ~nother " is ambiguous.g. fl. If the mea. seat. and if there is 2'Jmbiguity between the meanmg expressed and the meaning lmplied the real meaning is to be ascertamed from the context. leaf 185.-midlCtlOl1 ' -0 . XIX. tf4It "If mlifrm:r t:lfti'l1'l1ifi~ ft~~: I•••<e '(" ~~~t I 'Iij' ~~m~iif ~"""ltWf . Compare K. 113--114.!DHIST LOGIC. it-bmdu. Peterson's edltlOn.. hkhrul-pa) whic!1 !le includes among the I term.!=! such.ike a beel. BtrI. vol. pp.li p 84 . l An illustration of the second or implied contradiction is given thus :- The eyes. p. chapter III. Dharmakirti 1 in his Nyaya-bindu considers this case as an illustration of the first or natural contradICtion A word.:. 413...-prav<9sa.thaka.he soul). B.. Mdo.ning implied is the real one.ika. Peterson's edition. Here the major term . chapter III. Dharmakirti in his Nyiya-bindu rejects this view saying that this second contradiction is inch~ded in the first kind. OHAP. :MED. etc. ~ flfu ~r" I. Oe. there is a natural contradiction between the middle term and the major 3 Dignaga 8 mentions yet another fallacy called the "nonerroneous contradiction" (viruddha vyabkiN:m-erroneous contra. ~ ~ ~111£fIit~ fltUl~~f\T ~n~: I I . t.. A... which i:-:. 78). . BibHotheca Indica series. p. 51:2 Nyiiya-bind'u. -:0 ~~ lIIfll"'fril ~ ~Ti!er .U ~. III. '" I ~ tir 1fi~ml!fi: ~~Tm~'E!5. There would be a contradiction between the middle term and the major term if the word" another" were used by the speaker in the sense of a non-composite thing but understood by the listener in the sense of a composite thing.!?(!!tan-ngyur. Bibliotheca Indica aerleS 1 chapter III.. are fo:r th' use of another t Because they are composite things.316 INDIAN LOGIO. can. fallacy of tho middle term.B. pa)....j S'!'Riim I fi I ~lCU?C~. 8 Vide ~yriya-pravesa in the '.PT~r~~ ~~~~'it!: (Nyaya-bindu-~lkii. the major term of a Pl'oposition.

SYSTEMATIC WRITERS Oli BUDDBIST LOGIC-DHARM. tUfa too can not be of any help in the establishment of two contradictory conclusions inasmuch as a scripture (jan not over. Sher-batski's editIon. maintains that 'exThe function of an ex...:_-::~.~~il mNf« ~iil1f1.ample' is not a part of a syllogism. 193). The non-erroneous con~ tradictioll is therefore impossibie. IndIcs. casuality or non~per­ caption. pp. A Mimamsaka replies :Sound is eternal.j$y3::. as it is ample. and must lead to a correct conclusion. must stand to the -major term in the relation of identity.fe supposed both to be correct according. 1 Il Nyaya-bindu.·z:r~i:l·qQ' U(6)·i.. : A V aise~ika philosopher says :.'3l". U5.. and is authoritative only in the ascertainment ef supersensuous objects. U 317 fallacies of ::-:: :. included in the middle term. ~~. Because it is audible.l. " DharmakirtP in the Nyaya-hindu rejects this fallacy of "non-erroneous contradiction. The omission of if is perhaps an oversight. in the ai:Yov6 cases a. which is valid. respectively. . ride perception and inference.q·~·il!LiJ~·1Jlf!' ~. In opposition to Dignaga) Dharmakirti g. e g. :. series.indu.t :it does not arise in connection with inference and is not based even on the Ec:riph:re.. Petersburg." It takes place when two cQl1tractictory conclusions ai"6 supported by what appear to he vaiid reasong.1l5116). e.'zq~04·~"":~n:I'~·t04·~~·~~· r~~l'q ~~ I ::. A reason or middle term.g.Ir.~ II ~~·~·~~·~~·)~·at~~·~I:!l·~ i50l ql~·~·~0i·9·~a:·§~ If (Nyaya-t. Two condusions which are contradictory can not be supported by reasons which are vaHd. p. Because it is a product. St. fallacious." on the ground tha.AKIRTI. as su~h. but as they lead to contradictorv ~onclusions they are uncertain and.~.re.l1!: (if] \S"«l~ iBl'm"fiiJ11f I W'tfi! ~tTariT 'if1'if \Jnf1Y~~: ~ (Nyays-bindu. chap. ~~ 'tJ1t.~. iT f~r~ql~ijq: I crrcrnCi . The 1f or negation appears in the Tibetan version which runs as follows:- ~5~'lZlJ~ ~'.IIt.Sound is non~eternal. t.. p. Paterson's edition. to the tenets of the Vaisesika and Mimamsa Schools. lII. Two different sets of scrip. B!bliotheca. The reasons employed.:-:8.

SClIOOL. III. l\ldo. and started for Tibet in 1040 A.a is another excellent work on Logic by Dharmaklrti.2 I have oonsulted th" copy embodled in the ~~ta. says Dharmakirti.ve consulted the work embodied in the :§~lia.n-bgyur of the India Office. Like a kitchen. • d I ha. The hill is fiery. folios 384-416. and (3) Relation of negation between the middle term and the heterogeneous maj or term (in Tibetan: Mi. p. hence it is almost unnecessary to cite the exam.n-hgyur of the India. in Sanskrit: Svabhava-hetu). CHAP. The Hetu-bindu-vivara:Q.-hindu. The Tarka-nyaya or Vada. The translation was retouched by the great PaI]. (2) Relation of effect and cause between the middle term and the major term (in Tibetan: IJbra§-bubi-gtantshig§. MED. The Sanskrit original of this work is lost." The work is divided into three chapters as follows :(1) Relation of identity between the middle term and the major term (in Tibetan: Rail-Qshin-gyi-gtan-tshig§. BUDDlIIST LOGIC. l3:etu~ bindu-vi varaij. Because it is smoky.D. kitchen.nyaya or Vada-nyaya.i-glo-gro§. ' 112. in Sanskrit: A nupalabdkihetu).) and the interpreter-monk Dar-ma-grag§. Office. 116).' Nevertheless. . Ce.•• ~it~lI( i{Jiift~T81it I .-nyaya is another treatise on Logic by Dharmakirti. Tarka. . the general expression "all smoky things are fiery" is made more impressive by the particular example 'kitchen' which is smoky as well as fiery.g. 1 ••• ~ ~.pahi-gtan-tshig~. (Nyaya. . London. The Sanskrit original of this work is lost. signifying the "Method of Discussion.ple . but there exists a Tibetan translation 2 in the B§tan-hgyur." The Tibetan translation was prepared by the great Indian sage Jfiana-sri-bhadra and the Tibetan interpreter-monk !?ge-wab.a. lVldo.mig§.qita DipaIikara (of Vikrama:q. Ill.ipura in Bengal. the example bag this much value J that it points out in a particular way what has been expressed in a general form by the middle term: thus.' as well as other similar things. The work in T~betan is called Gtan-tshig§-kyi-thig§-pa signifying "A Drop of Reason.D. In this reasoning the term' smoky' includes a' kitchen. folios 355-375. Ce. born in 980 A. The work in Tibetan is called Btsog-pahi-rig~­ pa. in' Sanskrit: J(arya-hetu).318 INDIAN' LOGIC. but there exists a Tibetan translation S in the l}§tan-bgyur.

preter V ande-nam. Sambe.lived about 650 A. Sambandha-parik/?a.tan-hgyur of the India Office. Dev'endrabodhi. Mdo.Jlka.mkha§. was a contemporary of Dharmakirti. Che. pp.a-vartika-pail.ndha-pa. also called Tantrantara-siddhi. The Sambandha-parik/?a is another philosophical treatise by Dharmakirti. Mdo. 115. The Sambandha-parik/?a vrtti 5 is a commentary on the Sambandha-parlk~a by Dharmaklrti himself. Ce. ties in the PramaI}. but there exists a Tibetan translation t in the l?~tan-hgyur. . DEVENDRABODHI (ABOUT 650 A." The Tibetan translatJOn was prepared by the Indian teacher Jfiana-garbha and the inter. folios 416-420 The work in Tlbet~n is oalled ltgyug-~shan-grub-pa signifving H Proof of the Continuity of Succession. but there exists a Tibetan translation 5 in the B§tan-hgyur. He wrote the following work on Logic : The PramaI).rik~a-v:rttl. Mdo. is a philosophical treatise by Dharmakirti. The Sanskrit original of the 'Work is lost. folios 377-384. Ce.a-vartika of Dharmakirti. 3 I have consulted the copy of this work embodied in the B~tan-hgyur of the India Office. ~ Vide Tiiranatha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner." The Sanskrit original of this work is lost..i-hgrel-wa.D. I) I consulted the work in the monastery of Labrang in Sikkim in 1907. called in Tibetan Lha-gwa. but there exists a Tibetan version I in the Bstanbgyur. Mdo. London.4 and so . London. called in Tibetan Tshag-marnam-l!grel-gyi-~kah-bgrel. The t!'anslation was 1 I have consulted the Tibetan iTeraiOD embodied in the ~g. The Sanskrit original of the work is lost. The Sanskrit orIginal of the work is lost.n-blo. but there eXIsts a Tibetan translation in the ::B§ltan-hgyur. 2 r have consulted the copy embodied in the B~tan-hgyUl' of the India Office. London.). Santanantara. 116." The Tibetan translation was prepared by tbe Indian sage Visuddha Shhha and the Tibetan official interpreter Dpal-rtsegs.D. The work in Tibetan is called Hbrel-wa-brtag-pa signifying "Examination of Connection. 186-187. folios 375-377. The work in Tibetan is called Hbrel-wa-1?rtag-pab. 319 113..-siddbl. folios 1-380. signifying H An Explanation of Difficul.SYSTE~rA'l'IC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC--DHARMAKIRTI. Ce. 114. The Santanantara-siddhl.

e the majority of men are incompetent and time is fleeting. Vinita Deva/' called in Tibetan Dul-lha. 195-198. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.D He "Tas the author of the following work :The Pramana vartlka( -pailJika )-~ika. the latter erased it with water. . I have written this commentary for the people of lighter understanding. 1] 7. 272.320 INDIAN LOGiC.D.s !?pa~HJsam-l. son of Govi Candra.). After he had compiled it a second time. whICh is an annotation on the PramaI}. but there exists a Tibetan translation 8 which covers volumes Je and Ne of the ~§ta:1-t. r >.w. and Dharmakirti died during the time of Govi Candra.a-vartika-pafijika of Devendrabodhi.n edited by Baret Chandra Das t pp. The translation was ~repared by the interpreter j)ge-wa:Qi~lo-gro§.!l:-t::~grc~. Sakyabodhi ~ is stated to have been a pupil of Devendrabodhi. Supposing this Bhartrhari to be identical with the famous grammarian of that name who died in 651-652 A. •• 2 .. Dharmaklrti burnt it in fire.vartika-paiijika : Dharmaklrti chose Dever:dl'abodhi to write a commentary on his Pramana-vartika After Devendrabodhi had finished the commentary f~r the first time and had Rhown it to Dharmakirti.D .D. XlVlii~ 108.he observation. "Sinc. the father of Govi Candra) was married to the sister of Bhartrhari.. Ill. 187. He seems to have lived about 675 A.ion·b:lla.::1a. VOll Vide Taranath's Geschichte des Buddhiamua von Schiefner. VINITA DEVA (ABOUT 700 A. son of Govi Candra. ------------------------------------------------------1 Vide Taranatha's GeschkhtG des Buddhismus Scbiefner. lived in Nalanda. who sprang from the ancient royal family of Malwa. SXKYABODHI (ABOUT 675 A. Mdo.'s GesQhichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner.g:1'.D. prepared by the Indian -sage Suhhftti-sti and tbe Tibetan interpreter-monk Dge-va.Vide 'rarinatha.grel-Qsact.'~ This time Dharmakirti allowed the work to exist. This is exactly the time when Dharmakirti died.). 186-187. This story I is told regarding the composition of the P::09. pp. OHAP. Vimala Candra. 4.:r. Hence we may conclude that La/lita Candra. g I consulted thlS work in the monastery of Labrang in Sikkim in 1907. pp. during the time of king Lalita Candrs.. MED. 118. SCHOOL. He then compiled it a third time and gave it to Dharmakirti with t. called in Tibetan: Tshagma-rnam-hgrel-gyi~b.s we may place his conternporary Govi Candra in the middle of the 7th century A. p. BUDDHIST LOGIC.

The Sanskrit original of this work is lost. but there exists a Tibetan transla. called in Tibetan l:. The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Jiiana-garbha and the Tibetan interpreter Vande-nam-mkha§. London.seg~-raksita. Ze.r~ to be lost but there exist8 a Tibetan translation \t in the :'B§t6. when It wa. charity and self-restraint. The . which is a copious commentary on Ghe Sambandhaparilqla of Dharmakirti.ed it by pel'miSSlOn of the Government of Intha.a·parlkf?a. The work opens tllU:. lVldo} Ze. called in TIbetan: Rig~-pahi-thig§-pa-rgya­ chpr-hgrel-wa. b?ought down to Calcutta by the Bnhsh :\IIssion to TIbet. It 18 now deposited in the BritLSh Museum. and is yet designated as the supreme teacher of it-to him bowing down fully I explain the Sambandha-pa. :2 I examined thIS work. .. folios 1-43 The . The Sanskrit original of thi.trahslation was prepared by the Indian sage Jina Mitra and the intel'pre'ter of Shu~chen named Vande-ye-se§sde. folios 1-24. She. I p 1 This work was brought down to Caleutta by the Britlsh )118:. }\Ido. opens thu~: supreme in patience.. The SanskrIt original of this work appl'nr~ to be lost.nd \Tho is tl1e most excellent of logicians-to him (Buddha) bowing down I compose a commentary on the text of Vada-ny5. Mdo.. I examm. ~ Hetu-bindu-~lka.ts a Tibetan translation' in the :6~tan-hgyur. by permIsslOn of thE' GO\ ernment of Indll:t. contemporary of Lalita Candra. a view which harmonises with the date of Dharmakirti on whose works Vinita Deva wrote comment. 321 flourished towards the end of the 7th century A. which is a detailed commentary on the Hetuhindu of Dharmakirti.bindu of Dharmakirti. Hl04 3 I-have consulted the India Office copy.ya. aifeetion. who Was the famous author ot the Samayabhedoparacana-cakra. work is lost. which is a dptailed commentary on the Nyaya.vas prepa.nl!gyur. She. folios 39-65. folios 116-205. "Vada-nyaya-vyakhya.fbrcl-papahi-rgya-cher-Qsag-pa.:". but there exi::.~ik:a) called in Tibetan Dmlg~-pa-Ql'tag.red by the Indian teooher Prajna Varma and the irrterpreter-rilOnk . tion a in tlw l?~tan-hgyur. I have consulted the India Office copy. Ij. The translation . of Shu-chen named Dpal-t?tt.D. must also have lived about this time. which is a commentary on the Vada-nyaya (otherwise called Tarka-oyaya) of Dharmakirti.:rho is entirely unconnected with thE' world.. wrote the following works on logic :Nyaya-bindu-~lka. a. The Sanskrit original of thIs work appea. called in Tibetan: Gtan-tshig§-kyi-thlg§-pargya-cher-ngrel-wa.". Mdo. VinIta Deva. called in Tibetan: Btsog-pahi-rrg~-pahi­ hgr~-wa.lon to TIbet during 1004. Vinita Deva. but a Tibetan translation 1 of it exists in the :B§tan-hgyur.." Sambandha parik~a-~ika.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-VINITA DEVA.riki?i1.ork \Vho is self-perfected in sweet logical discussion.aries.." AlambaI}.

The translation was prepared by the Tndian sage Sakya-sirhha and the interpreter Vande-~PdJ·brtseg5 of Shuchen. 462. <:4 I ~~tci. who establIshed 12 great religious schools in his native country and l\-Iagadha. b Indian _'-ntJquary. Introductlon. p. 4 He must have lIved in the first quarter of the eighth century A. and saluting him by my head. III.gyur. 146. He Woi'. 147. The Sanskrit original of thIs work appears to he lO'3t. I have ccmsulted the Indlo. 00.ra Stotrs. ~!do. whicb is a clean work of the teacher Vinita Deva who weighed all sorts of alambaq. and flourished before Jayanta. 3 Viele rriiranatha's Geschwhte des Buddlusmus von Schiefner. called in Tibetan: Bgyu~-~shan­ grub-pahi-hgrel-bsag. XXXVii. Ravi Gupta 3 called in Tlbetan: Ni-ma·§ba§.. and i~ a lion of speakers confounding the brains of the Tirthika elephants" Sarltanantara-slddhl·~ika.D. pp. was born in Kasmira.a (obiects of thought). but there exists a Tibetan translation 1 in the l. 101.l 4 Ra if ~ ~ ffr sfq q~ f1IfrII"l lI1r.322 INDIAN LOGIC.Qpal·! tseg§. Ravi Gupta is mentioned in the inscription of Vasanta Sena /) as the 8arva-da?J. IX."Here is finished the Alambana-parik~a-tika.a-parik~a-tika. The work opens thus : "Meditating on the merciful Omniscient One.qa-nayaka and Maha pro Lthd1'a in the Gupta salnvat 435 corresponding to 754 A. pp. I . folios 1-21.l\1. 243 • and :Qpag-bsam-lJQn-bzan. Ze. He was a contemporary of king Bhar?a of Varendra. the author of Nyaya-mafijari. GangRdhara Ssstn). BUDDHIST LOGIC. Mdo. fo}ios 186-200. part·i. vol. chap_ VII. being a commentary on the Santanantara-siddhi of Dharmaklrti.nd for his ." It ends thus . the author 7 of the following work on Logic : j I ha. IU7. MED. a. but there exists a Tibetan translation ~ in the !?§tanb.>Jt1T~lIf~('~1l'{q-fQ'i1f: It (Nyi'iya-manjari. p. edIted by M. p. b VlCle Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana.ve consulted the IndIa Office copy . series of Cal~utta. He was a great poet. Tshe.D ). The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Visuddha-simha and the int~rpreter of Shu-chen named . The Sanskrit origmal of this work appears to be lost. 228. I compose the AlambaQ. xxx. 113. for his disciple the famous Tantnc monk Sarvajiia Mitra I) lived in the middle of that century. pabi-hgrel-bsa~L is an annotation on the AJambalJa-parik~a of Dignaga. CHAP. SCHOOL. printed in the Bihhotheca Indica.D.'B Sragdha. p.?~tan-hgyur.rak~l ta 119 RAVI GUPTA (ABOU1' 725 A. dialecticIan and Tantric teacher.. 7 Fot" Rtn"l Gupta's Arya ko:(!a see Rocklull's Buddha. Office xylograph of th6 TIbetan version.

. and was the author of the following works onLogic:Vada nyaya. an elaborate commenJ works on Ta-ntra. The exact date of his birth is unknown.Oj~ ?-'ide Caoma de Koros s Tibetan Grammar.m-yo was the first regular Buddhist monastery in Tibet and Santa Rak~ita was its first abbot. P 226. 28.a. that is. who was comparable to the Bodhisattva (Bodhic. of Dharmakirti.-vrttl~vipaficit§. folios 132-252.. 183.r1i: Stotru.D.he same person who wrote the well-known Nyasa on the grammar of Pal).).ini in thf" eighth century A.A. but it is stated that hE' was born at the time of Go Pala who reigned up to 705 AD.m-ye 3 in Tibet. there is the Tibetan version of work called Vll~aHlmala-vatl. a Santa Rak!?ita. with the assistance of Santa Rakf?ita.D. 2 Vide !?pag-bsam-lJon-bzan edIted by Sarat ChandraDas. C I. He worked in Tibet for 13 years. I I have consulted the copy of the India Office. see Sa-tis Chandra Vidyabhusana's Sragdho.ttva-desiya). called in Tibetan Egyal-gwan-glo-gro§.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-SANTA RAK§ITA. modelled after the Odantapura VIhara of Magadha. 1881. Mdo. D and died in 864 A D. London. Moo.. p. p. JINENDRABODHI (ABOUT 725 A. SANTA RAlt~ITA (749 A. and was a Professor at Nalanda. built in 749 A.~ called in Tibetan: Shi-wa-htsho. 121. and Waddell'l> LamaISm. until 762 A.E. Intl'oduction. Tshe. pp. p 112. the monastery of Sa.D. . The king.~carya Bodhisattva.D He followed the Svatantra Madhyamika school. Calcutta. and died at the time of Dharma Pala who became king In 765 A.I~.). was born in the royal family of Za-hor [in Bengal or near Lahor?]. called In the :B~tan-hgYlIT. d For Sam-yeo 1:!1t. but there exists a Tibetan translation I in the l?~tan-hgyur. He is perhaps t. This version was prepared by the TIbetan interpreter Edo-rjergyal-mtshan with the assistance of Dpal-!dan-Qlo-gro~. v-vii. He was known there under the name of . .. which is an annotation on the PramaQa-vartika. He visited Tibet at the invitation of King Khri sron-deu-tsan who was born in 728 . 120. Sa-rat Chandra Das in the Journal 0/ tlle Asiatic Society 0/ Bengal...D. Part I. Praman&-vartika-vrttl . 323 in Tibetan: Tshad-ma·rnamhgrel-gyi-hgrel-pa.rtha" called in Tibetan: Etso~-pahi­ rigs-pahi-hbrel-pa-don-rnam-par-hbyeg-pa. The author of the origmd work was Jinendrabodhi.narna·prarnana-samuccaya-tika. Sa. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.D. Re.

324 INDIAN LOGIC.R (frq~~iaf~ . Buhler. III.E . but there exists a Tibetan translation 2. Now.~:H!"~"f3\l!~~1li '. No. The translation was prepared by the Indian Pal}. G.n.st Text Soc'l. The real name of the work.ita GUJ)akara-sri bhadra (belonging to the religious circle first instituted by the great king Lalitaditya in the incOJpparable city of Kasmira) and the great Tibetan interpreter the Saksa l\lOnk Lha-bla-ma-shi-wa-hod in the province of Guge (S.8.. a work containing memorial verses on a summary of the Tattvas. BUDDHIST LOGIC.da-nyaya of DharmaKirti. thIS Tarka-samgraha.j ~ . in the n§tan-hgyur.ko~a in the temple of Piil'sva-niHha at JesaJmlr. For a detaIled aCCOl1nt of this work vide my" Samkhya Phllosophy In the Land of the Lamas" 10 the Journal of the A8~atio Sooiety of Bengal. Ije. CHAP. by Kamala Sila. s 1 I have consulted the xylograph of thIS work contained In the IndIa Office~ I.-W.-q~T~in~lT1{ • ~?i~fi.). d Tattvasamgl'aha herein noticed IS quite dIfferent from the Tattvasmmasa. C. part 11.fiHlf~(f'4f.tlc Soclety of Bengal. a manuscript of which 19 contained In the hbrary of the ASli.ety of Oalcutta. MED. etc. found in 1873 a Pothi. during hIS explorations of the B:rhat-l'iHi:na.f~~ I I. Vol Iii. folios 21-131. called in Tibetan: De-kho-na-fiidQ§du§-pahi-tshig-lehur-bya§-pa.8ila-tarka (vide Dr. is Tarka-sar'ngraha. The work reviews various systems of philosophy such as the Sarilkhya. is nothing but Tattvasarograha of Santa. x). Dr George Buhler. Mdo. consisting of 189 ancient palm-leaves shov.ondon. Sikkim. but there exists a Tibetan translatlOn 1 in the l2§tan-hgyuf. ~i~T~"i{-''Si~tIl{"'t~~lI II . WhICh I visited in June 1907. Mdo. Vol. as noticod by Dr. The work opens thus:" Who constantly dispersing darkness by the ray of the heap of various pure precious qualities. The translation was prepared by the Indian sage ~umara-sri-bhadra and the Tibetan interpreter-monks venerable Se§-rab and Bbro-sen-kar (who was a natlve of the province of IJbro or Do) in the holy monastery of :J2sam-ya§ (Sam-ye). and in the ~§tan-hgynr. Raksih with the commentary. Jaina. Buhler's correspondence with Rai Sarat Chandra Das. 1.. new series. The introductory part (Mangala) of the Tarka-samgraha. I compose this concise and stainless Vada-nya-v:rtti-vipaficitartha. Tibet). SCHOOL. folios 1-146. exerted himself in fulfilling the desire of various sentient beings and rejoiced to do good to the entire world-to that Mafiju-sri bowing down in reverence. accordmg to Dr.• publIshed m the Journal of the Buddh'l. 1\ldo. a Briihmalllc work on the Sarhkhya phIlosophy. 2 I have consulted the work in the monastery of Labrang..nl.q. Ze) folios 65--] 86. Bahadur. and bearmg on the outside corner the title kamala.c""'. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.samgraha-karika." Tattva. p.rrsnm~llT~l1rNfu: I ~~.I. runs as follows : - "s(fllmi{~~Tt'inf~ {fm~~TJ ~N?t ~ii!31{ I Cfi-. Buh leI.-mg the characters of the 12th or 13th century. Tshe. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. tary on the Va.

i!1itT~~~ ~rmt~ii i1~1~1!:i: II 1!:i: ~ "Sfm~ ~~..tJ~ /:.! :.~~ II ~~'L'.. ~fqil'mrifr"'-tT~r (exammatlOn of Kapila's doctt'ine of the !'lonl) .rlf~C'fi~r\W-q~'fiH (exammfttion of the 'lon1 aecordin~ to the Upam'lnds» \{TCf~T (.1Il~ ~c.'~I~~ ~ tl~'tlx. ~t:.·~ t:l?tlJ~·51o. a..j'~' tlQ.~ !f " ..SYSTE:MATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-SANTA R. -n .qr~ ~:~n~ -q~'ft q-.' \54 y<bill II ~ lIl~~·~·lZTf~'Q·.tfS~·i\·174 ~l:Il'~:£'~l'3i~ " ~'·~. ~-.j~·:. tl~~·~tlc.. '" II Dr..'J II ~·1~·~~·!j'~·q~·~c.hler further observe!'! that the first section of th€ ' Tarka-s.n (exammation of God).t$~'"'?~ ltj~Ql'~c. II t!~~'~~~'~~ ~c.mmatlOn of ermalle-nt ..rfJ{ II <1'::"~'I:!!:'~ ~ ~ :U:. 5. The mtroductory part In the Tattva'3amgraha is identical wIth the above.'~~'~Ql':O"'i l! .tIl~::.~·'tlll~'. ~·tl ~c.. BU.'~. o..' II Q.54 QX.c.'~..·~~·tq)l>. as eVldent from the Tlbetan vet'SlOn extracted below:- t!~~ ~'~Lll~ q~'~5\ l! Ul~'5~ E~·~t:..'~Ql Lllut·q 11 "J~'~c.'1~·qll. 'tl ~ !! ~tlJ~.r:.:f..P'·~~t:.rf'~~'Ei~'t!~tq !!~'Q II ~~·o. " ~~lfiTf~+li!I'Q"#! 'Slm~Tfi(. ~:~Sl~·\.'~~ \I i~·~c.t~~ l:'l~~'Q II Ci~~' Q'l3Jt:.AK~ITA. ~ L'.. ~~ II ~~.~ ~1:tJ~'!a~ QX...r:. all sorts of effects are produoed.'~O\ c.tIlr-' "t11~ •. ~ ~"..jfirli~ I ~~}fql$ ~~""Rrfit~?fi~~ll ~: " ~15!ft.:.l:~l2rcl'~Lll ..:trbgl eh~ contains t~-'tft::'1"...i'''(tlJ'&lS!\~'~~'Q':O!J\ II !tfal.'a.~t:."xa.c.: I II IS ri l1~if 'SlQf~~ fPfi'la ?fcfi~q~: x.. 325 The subject-matter of the work begins thus.l fT1 ~t:. ~f.t:Oi5\ ~ 11 ~r~t:.Ll1 ~t:.~~·q'I:tJ~~·~'q~tlJ·)~·~~ II ~'a....r~i5\.· II Q.r:. 7.." From Pradhana (the primo!'dial matter or nature) possessed of entire powers. ..fir:'3i'r ~il~Nm'lT I .~.l~3\'Ql ~1:tJ~'.

in Tibetan: Giii§-kabftag-pa).t : entity). in :ribetan: Dwail-phyug-brta~·pa). in Tibetan: Ran-hshinhrtag pa): (2) examination of the sense··organs (in Sanskrit: Indriya-pariksa. in Tibetan: La§-kyi-tshig gi-don-'Qrtag-pa). CHAP.hma the presiding deity of sound (in Sanskrit: Sabda-Brahma-pariktta. (10) examination of the Di2ambara Jaina doctrine of the soul (in Sanskrit: Digambara parilcalp1·ta-atma-par'ik~a. in Tibetan: IJgrowa-ran-bshin-du-§ml'a-wa-grtag-pa). (16) examination of the meaning of the word' quality'. (11) examination of the Upa. in Tibetan. in rribetan: Nam-mkhahi-go§-cangyi§-kun-tu-t?rtag§-pahi-bdag-brtag-pa).: (1) examination of nature (in Sanskrit: Svabhava parilc~a. in Tibetan... in Tibetan: Rig§pa-can-dari-bye-brag-pa§-kun-tu-9rtag§-pabi-§kye§-bu-Qrtag-pa). in Tibetan. These are the very sub 'erts treated m the . (13) examination of the permanence of entities (in Sanskrit: Sthira padartha-parikqa.'.. La§-dan-hbra§-buhi-hbrel-pa-!lrtag-pa). SCHOOL. Yon-tan-gyi-tshig-gi-donQrtag·pa). in Tibetan: ~kye§-bu-brtag·pa).Qda~-Qrtag-pa).'i'tha-pa?'ilc~a. (3) examination of both (in Sanskrit: Ubhaya-parikEfa. (6) examination of the soul (in Sanskrit: PUJ'u~a pa1'ik~a. (9) examination of Kapila's doctrine of the soul (in Sanskrit: Kapila-parikalpita-alma-pariksa. viz. III. in Tibetan: Ser-§kya-pa§-knn-tn-brtag§-pahi-bdag-Qrtag-pa). in Tibetan: U-pa-ni-~a-di-ka§-brtags-pahi-Qdag-Qrtag­ pa). and l particularity' (in Sanskrl. (8) eX9Jmination of the Mimarhsaka doctrine of the soul (in Sanskrit: Mimamsaka-kalpita-cUma-pariksa. pariksa. (4) examination of the theory that the world is self-existent (in Sanskrit: Jagat-svabhava vada-parik~a. (14) examination of the relation between Karma and its' effect (in Sanskrit: Ka1'rna-phala·8ambandha-parik~a. 7) examination of the Nyaya and Vaise~ika doctrines of the soul (in Sanskrit: N yaya-vai8e~ika-parilcalpita-puru/ia-parik~a.pa). The work is divided into 31 chapters. in Tibetan : ~pyog-pa-pa§-Qrtag§­ pahi-t?dag-brtag. (in Sanskrit: qU'Y}a-8abdii. (18) examination of the meaning of the word generality or genus (in Sanskrit. Samanya-sabdartha-parIkfila. etc.326 INDIAN LOGIC MED. in Tibetan: Bdsat2-kyi-tshig-gi-don·hrtag-pa). (15) examination of the meaning of the word' substance' (in Sanskrit: Dravya-padartha-parik~a .ni~ad-doctrine of the soul (in Sanskrit: Upaniqad-kalpita-atmaparik/ia. in Tibtan: Gna§-mahibu~. ( 19) examination of the meaning of the words' generality.po). l?rtan-pahigno~-po-Qrtag-pa). (5) ~xamination of Bra. (17) examination of the meaning of the word Karma (in Sanskrit: Karma-8abdartha-parik~a. (12) examination of the Vatslputra doctrine of the soul (in Sanskrit: Vatsiputra-kalpita-atma . in Tibetan : ~grahi-tshail~-pa-Qrtag-pa). BUDDHIST LOGIC. The last ('olophon appears to him to be ~W 'SlTi11'WifTiI{ (examination of the dootrine of self-evidence}. in Tibe~an: Bpyihi-tshig-gi-don-Qrtag.

part 1. in Tibetan' ijjig-rtenrgyug-pahi-brtag-pa).talf. p. and Waddell's Lama1sm. (25) examinatIOn of the doctrine of evolution (in Sanskrit Vivartav/ida-pa. (23) examination of mferenee (in Sanskrit· Anumlmapar'iksi'i. in Tlbetan : Gshan-gYlgwaIi-po-la§-hda§-pal!i-gon mthon-wa-can-gyi-§kye§-bu-brtag-pa}. iksa. called in Tibetan Rtg§. . in Tibetan: Tsh. and also the Journal 0/ the Bw:ldhist Text SocWy of Calcutta. The SanskrIt original of this work appears to be lost..:lc:-:-~-:-tag-pa). in Tibetan: Ugyur-war-§mra-wa-brtag-pa): (26) examm'ltion of the three times (in Sanskrit Kalatraya-parrk'3a.lg-ma-shan-1)rtag-pa).-pramarpya-pariktjii. part I.D. in Tibetan : Mnon-sum gyi-mtshan-nid-bttag-pa) . 1.nskrit: SVQ. was a follower of Santa Rak~ita He was for some time a Professor of Tantras in Nalandfi. (28) examination ot external objects (in San8krit: Vahyartha-parik~a. (21) examination of the meaning of the word 'sound' (in Sanskrit: Sabd{t'J'tha-parik/:lii..ary of cnticisms on the Nyayabindu of Dharmakirti. He was of wide fame and the author of the following works : Nyaya~bindu-purva·pak~e·sarhk~lpta. 112. vol. 10. (27) examination of contmuity of the world (m Sanskrit: Samsara-sanlali-pariksa. and (31) pxaminatlOn of the soul which sees thingS' beyond the range of senses {1l1 Sanskrit: Anyendri'Yatitartha-dar8ana-puru~a-parl ksa. (22) examination of the defimtion of perception (in Sanskrit: Pratyak~a-lak­ ~a1'Ja-parlk8a. \Vhile in Tibet ~e vindicated the religious views of Guru Padma-sambhava and Santa Raksita by defeating and expelling a Chinese monk named Mahayana Hoshang. in Tlbetan: ~gra-yi-doIl-Q!'tag-pa).SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-KAMALA SILA. (2-1-) examination of other kinds of valid knowledge (m Sanskrit: Pramiir. Kamala Sila. KAlI. in Tibetan: Tho§-pa-tn'tag-pa).D). 31.1. but there exists a Tibetan trallsla1 Vide !?pag-bsam-ijon-bzan. in Tibetan: Du§~sum brtag-pa).t Chandl'<\ Das. 327 in Tibetan: ~pyi-dan-bye-brag­ gi-tshig-gi-don brtag-pa). in TIbetan: ~~!:~:>---:.antara-paliksa.IALA SILA (ABOUT 75() A. in 'Tibetan: Ran-la§-tshag-ma-drtag pa). (20) examination of the meaning of the word 'co existent cause' (in SanskrIt: Samavaya-sabdarthapariksa.. whence he was invited to Tibet by king Khrisroil-deu-tsan (728--786 A. p. in Tibetan: Bje§-su-~pag-pa-brtag-pa). 122. (30) examination of self-evidence (in Sa.pahi-thig§-pagi-phyog§·§Iia-ma-:mdor-1)~du§-pa) a summ. I also called Kamala Srlla. edIted by Sal'l. (29) examination of Sruti or Scripture (in Sanskrit: Sruti-parik/:la.:-~~1::~-. Samanya-vise~a-8abdartha-pariksa. p. ~n rribetan: Phyi-rol-gyi-don-brtagp'a).).

for the Tibetan equi\'alent for Gupta is <I ~ba~.8arvajfia. She.stery of Labrang. p 114.. SCHOOL. KALYXtL-\ RAK~ITA (ABOUT 829 A. ~Ido.n equi\lalent for Sa. Folios 146-400. Folios 210-211. lVldo.a§-pa. . FolioR l06--115. and begins with a salutation to . The translation was prepared by the Indian sagp Visuddha Si rnha and the interpreter monk of Shu-chen named J)pal-rts~gB-rak~ita Tattva-samgraha pauJlka1 called in Tibetan De-kho na.' The Sanskrit original of this work appear" to be lost. III." . Ze) folios 201-' 202.y of external things. i..grel. :ThIdo. called in Tibetan phyi-rol-gyi-dong·rub-pa-ce§· bya-wabi-tshig-lehur. tion l in the ~~tan-hgyur.ika teacher Jina Mitra of KasmIra and the Tibetan interpreter-monk Dpal-brtseg§-rak~ita. He flourished during thE" reign of Maharaja Dharma Pala who died in 829 A D. does not seem to be correct.-b. which signifies memorial verses on the realit.B§tan-hgyur. MED. which signifies' memorial verses on the examination of Sruti or verbal testimony.he . . The translatIon was prepared by the Vaibha:. The translation \vas prepared by the Indian sage Devendxa.6§tanhgyur. a commentary on the Tattvrt-samgraha of Santa Rak~ita The Sanskrit original of this work ig lO'at.a Rak~ita.bzan. Mdo. Sikkim. pp. called in Tibetan Th~m:s-cad-mkhyen­ pa-grub-pabi-tshig-lehur-bya§:-pa. Ye. I have consulted Ka!yana Rakslta's works in volume Ze of the ~::!tan- 1904. CHAP.-3 Yide 'l'H'1'anatha's Ge>lchlChte de'S Buddhlsmns von Schiefner. 216-219: and 'Q pag-bsam-lj on. Ze) Folios 202-210.." It is contained in the ~§tan­ hgyur. Brutl parlk~a. 1 I have consulted \he copy brought down by the Brltish M1ssion to Tibet in ~ I consulted this 'Work In the mona. . Raksita.-fiidl1§dus-pahi-dkab. Vahyartha-Slddhl-karlka. signifying "memorial verses on _the attainment of omniscience. but there exists a Tibetan translation ~ of part ] of this work in the B~tan-hgyur. The Sanskrit original of this wor k is lost.. He was the author of the under mentioned works 4 . Ze. _ SarvaJna-slddhi-kanka. Folios 1-385." But Schiefner has taken lt as an equivalent for "Gupta. l\Ido." Thi!<.nskrit .S called in Tlbetan Dge'Qsrun. Bhadra and the interpreter monk Grag~-hbyor-se§-rab. and part II of it in the ~~tan-l.!gyur. Kalyal). !je.D. l\Ido. but there exists a Tibetan translation in the . BUDDHIST LOGIC. but there exists a Tibetan translation in t. which I visited in June 1907 .328 INDIAN LOGIC. 123. called in Tibetan Tho5-pa-b!'tag-pahi-tshigLehur-by. The p~l'ticle 'bsruri' SIgnifies "protected" and is o. was a great dialectician and teacher of Dharmottaracarya.

j. The Sanskrit original 5 of this work was preserved in the Jaina temple of Santinatha. o The palm-leaf manuscrIpt of the Nyaya-bmdu-tikli preserved In Cambay bears the date of sam vat 1229 or 1173 A. which signifies' memorial verses on the deter- mination of a thing by the exclusion of its opposites.a logician Sridhara Z about 991 A.vara·bhailga-karlk::i. Sherbatski and printed .) wrote a gloss caned Dharmottara. Anyapoha vlcara karlka. karavatarika dated 1181 A D. a detailed commentary on the Nyaya-bindu of Dharmakirti. Folios 214. 33). called in Tibetan Gshan-la brtag-pahltshig-lehur-bya~-pa. Mdo.. called in Tibetan Dwan-phyug-hjigpa. Dharmottara I (Acarya Dharmottara or Dharmottaracarya).RYSTEM.). J. 76. Dharmottara was the aut.v. of this work is lost.D. and has been published by Professor Peterson in the Bihliotheca Indica series of Calcutta.blDdutika. and is mentioned by the Brahmal). Mdo. p. Mdo. p. Jaina Yasovijaya series of Benares). but there exists a Tibetan transbtion in the ~§tan-hgyur. or 962 A. b I consulted the copy brought down by the British Mission to Tibet during 1904.Qpag bsam-ljon-bzan. called in TIbetan Rig§-pahi-thig. She. and . If. called in Tibetan Cho~-mchog. p 114 2 Fide Nyaya. (Peterson's Third Report. WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-DHARMOTTAR-:tCARYA.hor of the following works : ~ Nyaya-bmdu-tika. .D. Ze. Ze. was a pupil of Kalyana Rak~ita and of Dharmakara Datta ot KasmIra.ppears to be lost! but there exists a Tibetan translation m the 13§tan-hgyuf.i-pahi-rgyacher-JJgrel-wa. 3 The Jama I~lglClan l\Iallavadm (q. Folios 211-213.ravatiirikli. The Tlbetan varsion has also been edIted by F. 329 . ~ ~lI~T~ '!.hi-tshig-lehul'-bya~-pa. 225. which signifief5 (memorial versE'S on the refutation of God' The Sanskrit ongmal of this work a.D.l1?t '(fir 'if ~ I {Syadv8'da-ratnaka.iN I 'Sllf'r~"ilTf~T~i( 'il~l. There exists a Tibetan translation 6 in the l?f}tan-hgyur.-pippanaka on Dharmottaraclirya's ~yaya. The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Jfiana-garbha and an interpreter-monk of Shu-chen I Vide Taranatha's Geschicht~ des Buddhismus von Schlefner.D. On one sUpposItion Mallavidm was a contemporary of Dharmottara and on the other he flourished a century later. DHARMOTTARACARYA (ABOUT 847 A.' The Sanskrit original.D. Vlzlanagaram Sanskrit series.D and by the Jaina phllosophers Mallavadin the autho~ of Dharmottara-tippanaka about 962 A. He appears to have flourished in Kasmira while Vana Pala was reigning in Bengal ~bout 847 A. The year 884 In which Mallaviidm flourished corresponds to 8i7 A D. Folio~ 43-106. according as we take it to refer to Vikrama-samvat or ~akasarbvat. Cambay.s and Hatnaprabha Suri ~ the famous author of Syadvada-ratna. p.kandali. p 10.215 124.

~til ~~ I " ohap.' The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.qita Bhavyaraja and t~e interpreter-monk Tshab-ni-ma-grag§ during the lifetime of Sri Har~a Deva (king of Kasmira. cRlled in Tibetan Tshag-ma-grtag-pa.a-parik~a.se§-rab. " (Nyiiyabindu~ika> . called in Tibetan Ujig-rten-pha-rol-grub-pa.\ in the B§tan-hgyur.a. ~q ii'T~T li'if~~if01fifT~fiH II I have consulted the In. Folios 270-282. called in Tibetan Gshan-sel-wa. Folios 215 -253 The translation was prepared by monk :Blo-ldan-se§-rab. sigmfying 'proof of the momentariness of things. has overcome this world. ~IED. Folios 254·-2G6.sulted the India Office (lOPy. Mdo. Ze. Apoha-nama·prakara:Q..fd'fme. The translation was prepared by the Kasmirian PaI). The Sans." K~al~a-bhanga slddhl. BUDDHIST LOGIO. proof of the world beyond. named DharmaJoka." l PramaIJ.vords dispelling the darkness of our mind attaIn glory.dia Office ooPY. :1 oj.nrq-(l&. Folios 266-270. but there exists a 'ribetan translation:2 in the B§tan-ngyur. Nyayabindu-tIka begins thus :-" Sugata. krit original of this work appears to be lost. but there exists a Tibetan translation. The work begins thus : " Some say that the world beyond is possessed of the characteristics of a complete separation from the link of consciousness which began from before birth and continued after death.a or the sources of valid knowledge. Mdo. CHAP. a treatise on the determination of a thing by the exclusion of its opposit. etc. I).gyur. and afterwards recast by the Indian sage Sumati-kirti and the Tibetan interpreter-monk Blo-!dan-se§-rab. 1089-1101 A. signifying .' The work begins with salutation to Sugata.qita Bhavyaraja and the interpreter-monk l21o-1dan-se~-rab. but there exists a Tibetan translation & in the !. etc. Ze. The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Bhavyaraja and the interpreter-monk -Blo-ldan".' The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. The translation was prepared by the great PaI). Para-loka-Slddhl. signifying 'an examination ot Prama. the source of series of evils begin1 Ding with bIrth may his .!§tan-b. but there exists a Tibetan translation 3 in the l?§tanhgyur. 8 I have con. in the incomparable city of Kasmira. Mdo. SOHOOL. . called in Tibetan Tshad-ma-rnam~f1vt i$'ff~~if"iR"" 'SI. signifying .330 INDIAN LOGIC.) in the great incomparable city of KasmIra.D. the conqueror of lust. called in Tibetan §kag-cig-ma-bjig-pagrub-pa. lvldo. Ze.' rrhe Sanskrit origmal of this work appears to be lost. Ill. ~T.cs. Prama:Q.Q. Ze.a-vlDiscaya-tika.

.). published in Jaina yaaovijaya. Folios 282-30 t. MUKTA-KUMBHA (AFTER 900 A.tara lived.~ 125.c.a-bhanga-siddhi-v. In the concluding lines of the work Dharmottara.itr..a-bhariga-8ictdhi..rV I 1:>1{ ~Tcntt 5rUff.).qita Parahita Bhadra and the Tibetan interpreter JJlo-ldan.ve consulted the work belonging to the India Office. Mukta-kumbha must have flourished after 847 A. the author of it is described aR " the excellent subducr of bad disputants (quibblers) . London. which is a commentary on Dharmottaracarya's K~aI}. wab the author of a work called K~aI]. . Roughly speaking he flourished in the 9th century A..li~·~~·a.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-ARCA1'A.\~.D.~·Q.5 the famous Jaina author of the ~a4darBana· samuccaya-vrtti. GUQ. Suah's editIOn of the 8. Follo BS} . '1 "'~W'Ef?tf'=qa': Sif.. (ABOUT ARCA l'A 900 A.§e§-rab in the model city of Kasmira. The K~aI}.i g it appears that Arcata criticised Dharmottaracarya who lived about 847 A. I J have consulted the India Office copy. but there exists a Tibetar' translation I in the :Bstan b. This verSlOn was prepared by the Indian sage Vinayaka and the interpreter-monk Grag§l. folios 346.D .D.\~.D. We.::q I C§§tan-ugyur. S Vide Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana's Jalna Logic under" GUl:)aratna SurL" 6 Vide Dr.. is embodied in the :B§tan-llgyur. s Arcata is also mentioned by the Jaina philosopher Ratnaprabha Suri. Dse. and We.7 the well-known author of Syadvadaratnakaravatarika. p.s called III Tibetan Mu-tig-bum-pa.::q·~·r=.a-ratna Suri. Folios 1--188. mentions the Tarkatika of Arcata.vakhya. . chap. 17.. but a Tibetan translation oj. 8 Vide Satie Chandra Vidyabhussna's edition of the Nylyfivatsra with vivrtl which has been published by the Indian Research Society of Oalcutta 2 •j . dated 1181 A.\~·a. Ea.agdarsana·samuccaya-vrtti. I ha.a-bha:iJga-slddhi-vyakhya is called in Tibetan ~kag­ cig-ma-hjig-grub-pahi-rnam-hgrel.. lVldo Ze.hbyor-se§-ra b I 126. In the Jaina Nyayavatara-vivrt.gyur Mdo. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.::q l. oj. which is a commentary on the PramiiI]. The translation was prepared by the Kasmirian PaI].D. Mdo. 331 ile§-kyi--Vika. chapter on Bauddha dar!§ana. The name Muktakumbha is restored from Tibetan.a-viniscaya of Dharmakirti. ~1~ii~~f 01ffiIl••• I (Syadvadaratniikaravatarikti.D. who lived in 1409 A.D. i. The Sanskrit original of the work appears to be lost. when Dharmot. ~lukta-kumhha. granthamala of Benares).

Il\·l!lfE~~ ~pa. and from the concluding part it appears that he lived in Kasmira. It is divided into four chapters treating re:. (3) Non-perception (in Tibetan: Mi-gmig§.). Asoka quotes Dharmottara 4 (q.·::j f'~O: ~r:... . ~ Q. 95. f" fJfi""T'f~ PnnlJl ~T~i' \ \$ fi~lf ~~R~ \it~\f1iit"~~'1fi~ I 'I@f~q: f~1lTliftlf I .s's edition. :'lIED. and in Sanskrit: Karya). Arcata was the author of the following work on Logic : Hetu-blndu-Vlvarag.. In the city of Kasmira.. who was the be~t of sages.. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. CHAP.. .n·hgyur.~ f:.'~J:. ~fIl~·if·i~"q·"r:.~·J. The Tibetan version ends thus :-'.q.g-bsam·Uon·bzant 4 -. ::j·~~r~·I3l~~'l'QO:·!.·'a. otherwise known as Pa:q.. folio 375).·~I2:I·~I).. let the unlearned derive wisdom.~·~r:.fdo. (2) Effect (in Tibetan: hbra§-bu. SCHOOL.D. if~·"q3\·~·r:.D. -------1 The volume She." 2 127.·El ~~ Q " ~.:::.. r.·Ei·$~·~·tl~ x\'I:l'~~ II n 11 Mdo. It is stated that through his spiritual instructions 3 Candra-Gomin (q.. Calcutta).v.5~tan-hgyur... called in Tibetan Gtan-tshigB-thig§-pahihgrel-w[t. and (4) Explanation of Six Characteristics (in Tibetan: Mtshan-fiid-drug-b3ad-pa. She.~ 1 . was translated. the commentary (on the work) of Dharmakirti." ir:.. In the beginning of the work it is stated that Arcata was a Brahmaq.l.~~. Sarat Chandra Da.-pa. but there exists a Tibetan translation J in the .~ 4Zfl (\ .ita Asoka or Acarya Asoka.) was able to behold the face of Avalokitesvara the Lord of supreme mercy and Tara the saviouress. She. (ABOUT ASOKA 900 A D.. the Government of India. From this translation of Prama:q.... Asoka.·5-I~~·~'tl~~~·'l~· . and in Sanskrit: $aeJlalc~a'1Jta-vyakhyli). .. III...: ~ I 1If p. Folio~ 205-375.E..tpalabdhi). and in Sanskrjt: Svabhava).a. contaming this work.~·it"·!·~·QI·l~·~r:. was brought down by the BrItish Mission to Tibet in 1904. I borrowed it from.a the pIth of holy doctrines. is called in Tibetan Mya-nan-med. being a commentary on the Hetu-bindu of Dharmakirti..~'~.a. and in Sanskrit: An1.~~.~·iJ:.332 I~DIA~ LOGIC. ('~~ta.) and must therefore have flourished after 847 A.1pectively of (1) Identity (in Tibetan: Ran-bshiu.~ II ~F~·Q~·~r:.~~ . the pith of Jambuclvipa.v. BUDDHIST LOGIC.. itl·~q~·:g~ .1I"-i~f{ . \Ve may approximately place him at about 900 A.

and . 95-96.). 78). Calcutta. I have cleansed the broad moral path of our Teacher. upholds the theory tha. 2 'if-r \S ~f7fi'~flliQCll4<ft ~ftitfT~a. Samanya-dii~aI).t the whole (avayavi) is a mere collection of its parts (arayava) beyond which it has no separate existence. The second work.D. (ABOUT 925 A. as a generalit. "SjetiMiU{ I 8 "H~c:Il ~(fi''tf ~Ti1~~: . Prasad ShastrI In the Blbhotheca Indlca senes.fj~tl~f . The first .. music. I viz." . Varendra (modern Rajshahye in Bengal). That Asoka had to defend himself against the attacks of many BrahmaI]. begins with a resolution to oppose those who maintain that there is a category named generality (samflnya) which. move on by this path. 145-146. Calcutta.a.rrf1rcrw l(ll ~itTNoT~~ ~"~~rir1iW~1iitif \'Jfif' 'Sftl11I 1\ (Avayavl-nirakarana. A vauavi-nirakarana (Refutation of the whole) and Samanya-dfl~atw-d~'k-prasarita (Horizon of the refutation of generalIty extended).a which runs as follows :" Having uprooted the numerous thorns of criticism fabricated by wicked intellects..Qpag-bsam-lJon-bzan edIted in the origmal Tlbetan by Sarat Chandra Das." edIted by 1\1. Candra Gomin. viz. being one and eternal. p. viz.a-dlk-prasarlta.~ 1tilli "STrlli6~ I (Avayavl-mrakal'ana. ~~ ~~ "tliftl[Cfitti~~ I "'l~T~. t ~'5ft ~~T~: mrrti1~ II (Samanya-dGsana-dlk-prasarita. p.-dik-prasiirita are Included In the" Six Nysya Tracts." '" 128. He was endowed with a very keen intellect and acquired distinction in literature.. whICh begins with a salutatIOn to Samantabhadra. 333 He wrote two logical treatises. p. 148-158. (i4) ~ii ifllT if$'lf fiff~%~ . Let people removing their spites.vork.::\1.V pervading all fingers.a philosophers is evident from the last verse of his Avayavi-nirakara1J.en. 93) Ii Vide Taranatha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner. we cannot see fingerness. was born in a K~atriya family in the east as· His hfe. A vayaV'l-nlrakaraI). . It is argued that though we can see fingers as individual things. Hal's. fine arts I The two treatises Avayavi-mriikara9a and Samanya-dGsal?a..SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-CANDRA GOl\IIN. pp. abides in many individual objects.5 called in Tibetan: Zla-wa-gge-Q~fi. CANDRA GOMIN (JUNIOR).. astronomy. logic.~ There is no eternal relation 3 called inherence (sarnavaya) existing between a whole and its parts. grammar. pp. Calcutta. ~ftf ~.

ta a Afterwards he came to Nalanda-the store-house of knowledge-and met there Candra-kirti.. as pre~ served 10 Tlbet In the Journal of tke A&tahc Set-etll 0/ Bengal new series Vol. Candra Gomin with deep reverence offered a prayer to goddess Tara by whoRe blessing he got out of the chest He resided in the island.im's grammar. which was in course of time named Candra-dvipa 9. Introduc:tlOn. Gramm~r ~ Rh~toric and Lexicography. Candra Gamin's "Arya-Ta. I Rpag-bsam-ljon-bzan. he.:aQ& 'lJide Satis Cha.-stot~a.ndra Vidyabhusana's Kaccl£yana.inted ~ Germany. Finding that it contained . ~m LIterature.ra-antarbah-vidhi" vide Satis Chandra Vidyabhusana. or the island of Candra. falls lUto the ocean. BUDDHIST LOGIC. p. . xx:. " 3 Fo~ Candra-vyiika. and Sanskpt ~or~.:j"1~·q·l"1~·it~·"1~t. which was the name of his tutelary deity.q·"1~:::'· -. in the house of Vararuci. 2 Candra-dvlpa IS sItuated 10 the dIstrlCt of Ba-risal in South-eastern Bengal at a place where the ~a.334 INDIAN LOGIC. pp. S·1S. and the science of medicine.'s.r. '" 1 For . Vlirendra. Naga Ses. In whlCh Candra Gomin was born.( many words but few thoughts. The Candra-vyiikarar. The chest was carried down until it. Under Acarya Sthiramati he learnt the Sfttra and Abhidharma Pitakas of the Buddhist scripture.ta in the original SanskrIt has been p. Sragdhara. He had an ardent faith in the Buddhist god Avalokitesvara and the goddess Tara.\·Q. 96. thinking it improper to accept her hand shrank from her with fear Upon this the ~ing became angry and put Candra Gomin into a chest which was thrown into the Ganges. is identical with the Rajshahve divl~ion in North·eastern Bengal through which the Padma flows. the famous commentator on the Madhvamika PhIlosopby ot Arya Nagarj una.· 11 1 li!i'~~'~'I:i~~'~'3r. Candra Gomin himself was a follower of the Y ogacara system expounded by Arya Asanga. Being told that Ahe was named Tara. stopped at an island at the place where the Ganges flows into the ocean.~"1~·crm·~. and was converted to BuddhIsm by the Vldyadhara Acarya Asoka. but afterwards other people came to live there.a's (Patanjali's) Bhalilya on PaI). There was another Candra Gomin called Candra Gomin the senior who went to Ceylon and on his w~y bark found in Southern India. While Candra Klrti and Candra Goroin entered upon philosophical discussions people used to observe 4: «Alas! the text . 1007.dma..2. He as a Buddhist devotee (upasaka) E'stabhshed there stone-images of Avalokltesvara and Tarit At first only fishermen (ka£varta) settled in the island. "'" ~·~a·~~·~·I2l·l2la·~l:IJ I ~·rc:!4·Q.ini.. Gradually the island became a town. . which is a main outlet of the Ganges. iii No. XXI. MED. which was named Candra-vyakarar. CRAP. l He was offered in marriage a daughter of the kmg of Varendra. Ill. SCHOOL." he himself composed a oommentary on Paq.

thinking that it was not better than the one whlCh Candra Kirti had written.. but apparently to accord a fitting welcome to Candra Gomin. while in the third was placed an image of MaiijusrI. on a rough calculation. pp.v. p. whereas the text of invincible Axya Asanga is very ambrosia to all men. to have reigned in 700 A D.n Antiquary. saying that it was not proper for priests to welcome a mere devotee (upasaka).D. The other Candra Gomin called Candra Gomin the junior seems to have lived about 925 A. At that time Ta." It is further stated that Candra Gorom threw the original manuscript of his grammar into a well at Nalanda. two of whICh were occupied by himself and Candra Gomin respectively. attended by the whole body of priests who came really to recite hymns to :\laiijusri.ra and Avalokltesvara appeared before him saying: "Though Candra K'irti is overwhelmed with pride as a sage. Hearing this. howpver. . who died in 661-662 A. who lIved during 1088-1172 A.D. Jaina Hema Candra Sud. which was thence reputed as "Candra's well" (in Sansknt: Candra·kupa and in Tlbet:1TI: Tsal1drahi-khron~pa). when his contemporary Candra Gomin must also have lived. refers to Candra Gamin while Jayaditya. This may be explained on the supposition that Candra Gomin lived after Jayaditya.ed at a time when Sila. Candra K'irti brought three chariots. reigned in Kanoj and Silhha of tho Licchavi dynasty reigned in Varendra. 95-96. .) flourished about 900 A. son of Siluha. June 1886. is more useful than all others and Will do immense good to the world" They raised the manuscript from this well. His son SIla seems.pp. the Buddhist god of learning. as his preceptor Arya Asoka (q. Vol.. Vide Professor F.D.a. Klelhorn's "Indra Gomm and other grammarians" the IndIa. a gl'eat admirer of Candra Gomin. the author of Candra Vyakara"Q. Ivii 1 2 In . was identical with the sage of that name who was a contemVide !?pag~bsam'Uon-bzan. son of SrI Har~a. Candra lOrti was. your work. xv. The c harlot~ passed through the town in a great procession.. 'Vhen the latter arrived at Nalanaa the monks refused to give him a receptlOn.i It is not knmvn as to whether the Candra Gomin li"l. but preceded Hema Candra.2 the famous author of the Kasika-vrtti.SYSTEMA'l'IC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-CANDRA GO)HN. the water of ~hich was wont to be drunk by people in the belIef that thereby thelf intellect would become sharp. It is not known with certainty as to whether Candra Gamin.D. I 335 of Arya Nagarjuna is medicin~ to some hut poisor to others.D. The famous poe~ Ravi Gupta was a contemporary of Bhar~a.s does not mention him. 181. SrI Hal'~a seems to be the same as king Har~a Vardhana who was a c09-temporary of Hwen-thRang and reigned in 64:7 A. 184 .~ ride Takakusu's I-tsing.

lfJU\ prepared by the Nepalese PaI}. Mdo. 40 I have consulted the India Office copy.bsam-ljon-bzau. was different from either. But It may be asserted safely that Candra Gomin.336 INDIA~ LOGIC. III. The translation was prepared by Par. Candra Gomin was the author of the following work on Logic: Nyay~lLka-siddhl. The Sanskit original of this work appears to be lost. 235. 1907.D.q.ita Sr Sita.. but there exjsts a Tibetan translation 3 which is divided into two parts.ita Santi Bhadra ana the Tibetan ------. signifying" the ascertainment of objects and their knowledge arising together." The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.but there exists a Tibetan translation ~ in the B§tan-bgyuf..---------------Buddhismus von Schiefner.). Subsequently. folios 290-201. PRAJ:&:AKARA GUPTA (ABOUT 940 A." The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.D.q. and Qpag:. The translation has the advantage of having been assisted by nu merous sages of the great monastery of Vikramasila in ~id~le India. signifying "a lamp of logical reasonlng.9. SCHOOL. section Mdo. called in Tibetan' Rigs-pa-gr:lb-pan1-Bgron-ma.\(]. CHAP. 3 I consulted this work in the monastery of Labrang in Sikkir. it was looked through by Sumati and the interpreter Blo-ldan-se§-rab.ita Kumarasri of the model city of Kasmira. who died in 940 A. ::\IED. lived at the time of Maha Pala.D. Prajfiakara Gupta was the author of the following works :Pl"amat. ~e. p. pp.-prabha. porary of Candra Kirti. The t£anslation. in June. BUDDHIST LOGIC. The translation was prepared by the great Ka. Folios 30~--308. the logician. which is a commentary on the PramaI}. called in Tibetan Tshag-ma-rnamh~rel-gyi-rgyan. caned in Tibetan Se§-rab-hbyuil-gna~­ §ba§. which I visited. but there exists a Tibetan translation 1 in the :6§tan-ngyur. 116.ita Bhavya-raja and the Tibetan interp-reter J.o.-He was a lay aevotee and is quite different from Prajfiakara :Mati.a-vartika of Dharmakirti..smirian PaI). under the supervision of the great wise PaI). Prajfiakara Gupta. Sahavalambha-nlscaya.q. who was a monk and keeper of the southern gate of the university of Vikrama-sila during the reign of Canaka in 983 A. 1 I have used the India Office copy_ 2 V~de T8:t'iinitha'g Geschichte des . or Nyaya-siddhyaloka. and the interpreter-monk Vairocana 129. The first part extends over Folios 1-352 of volume Te.ita Sri Sunaya-sri Mitra and also of the wise PaI..?lo-ldan-se§-rab .tq. and the second part Folios 1-328 of volume She of the ~§tan-hgyur.la-v~~tikalankara. Mdo. 230. called in Tibetan Lhan-cig-gmig§-pane§-pa. Ze.

His father. lived in Varendra at the court of Raja Sanatana. Mdo. Folios 354-359. Folios 359-372." The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. PPM 230-233. was lent to me by the India Office. The work begins thus ~(. Ze. 3 The Volume Ze. 116. must have lived between those dates 2.8. by whose grace he became a perfect ma'lter of sciences He received from king Maha Pala the royal diploma of Pa!). The famous Dipankara or Srijiiana Atisa is said. who was a vassal to the Pala kings of Magadha. 2 Vide the" Journal" of the BI ~hist Text Society of Calcutta. called in Tibet~n ::Qgra-Ia§-rgyal-wa. 1\'Iaha Pala reigned up to 940 A. part i. Jetarl 1 or Acarya Jetari. Ze. 337 interpreter-monk Sakya-bog of the village of Seil-gkar in the province of IJbro CQo). of the ~§tah Ugyur. London . to have learnt five minor sciences from Jetari. BaHivatara-tarka. He was the author of the following works 3 on Logic . Being expelled by his khsmen. Tiranatha's Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schlefner." The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. Za. Jetari became a Buddhist devotee and worshipped M'1Iiijusr'i. 130.q. but there exists a Tibetan translation in the :B§tan-bgyur. who is a single 1 Vidt.\--~80 A. called in Tibetan Bi§-wa-njug-pahi-rtog-ge. Mdo. containing Jetari's works.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-JETARI.D. and [)pag-bsam-ljon-bzan. . 1. ftnd Dipankara was born in 980 A D Their contemporary.).ita Kumara-kalasa and the Tibetan interpreter-monk Sakya-hog Dharma-dharmlMvimscaya.ita of the University of Vikramasila. Who by the lustre of his sermon has completely dispersed and cleared the veil of the gloom of ignorance. was born of a BrahmaIj.Hetu-tattva-upadesa. caned in Tibetan Gtan-tshig§-kyi-df ·khona-nid-lH~tan-pa. signifying "children's introduction to Logic. ~CARYA JETARI (94.q. The translation was prepared by the Indian ~age PaI). p. signifying" determination of the minor and major terms.D. but there exists a Tibetan translation in the :B~tan-bgyur) l\fdo.a family. Garbhapada. but there exists a Tibetan translation in the ~§tan-hgyur. vol. called in Tibetan Cho§-dan-cho§can-~tan-Ia-gwab-pa. Mdo." The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Naga Rak~ita and the Tibetan interpreter of the province of Sum-pa (in Amdo) named ::Qpal-mchog-dan-pohi-rdo-rje. signifying " instruction on the real nature of the middle term in a syllogism. Jetari. when very young. p. Folios 344-354.

caned in Tibetan Tshag-marnam-bgrel-gyi rgyan-fZyi-hgrel-gsag. edited by Sarat Chandra Das. lamp to three worlds-may that Bba.utita.hat name who wa..D.) and the Tibetan interpreter.a Rak~ita of Vikramasila (who arrived in Tibet in 1045 A." 1 It consists of three chapters named respectively: (1) Perception.t:. The colophons of Apohasiddhi and K~aYJ. called in Tibetan J3gyal-wa-can. a voluminous work. '~~'l:lJr. is different from the sage of t.others .rtikalaDkRra-~ika.~' ~l:tl 2 (~It8n-hgyur. Kamarupa and Tirhut a.~ ~'-~'l!j~'!l:. and 172.). Byan-chub-se§-ra. Jina. 131. Vide Tirloliths:s Gesohichte des Buddhismus VQn Schiefner.D.abhanga-8iddhi run as follows:- .qf?q1f~litNi~T'i{r't II .v.338 INDIAN LOGIC. p. and (3) Inference for the sake of.b of Shailshun. S Vtde Tir§.. deeply erudite. University of Vikrama-sila.D. p 235. is probably the same as Jina Bhadra of Konkana. (2) Inference for one's own self.a-va.\·LT!~·~~ ft]~ II ~~·tI~·:I. Ratnakirti.m-ijon-bzan. SCHOOl.firfftli ".\l::r~. This Ratnakirti.D. was the author of the following work :PramaQ.) he must have flourished about WW A.·:I. As he was a. was a Prof€ 'ssor at the.·ifJ~·ztl~J:.g&. Calcutta. In.Lnut 650 A. Mdo.. designated as lrl a.~'lll~Qj II IJ £l'!~'~~'Cl. 132. about 940 A. section Mdo This version was prepared by PaQ.) Jina. Ze. teacher of Ratnakara S~tnti (q.2 who was a contemporary of Vagi.3 called in Tibetan Rin-chen-grag§!. 234-235.\Iq·rr~·~:I.s patronised by King Vimala Candra of Bengal. BUDDHIST LOGIC. the Tibetan version of which occupies volumes De and N e of the 13§tan-hgynI'.~s Goschichte des BUddhismuB von Schiafner.D.Nyayal:lp:. Ratnakirti criticises the views of Dharmottara)4. 105.Qita D'ipankar.hapar. MIW. 174: also !!pag-bsa. CHAP. (ABOUT RATlS'AX''"RTI 940-1000 A. the author of the original work.nltha.D.t:r~I~ ~~ l3J·'lr~E. svarakirti. pp.van long remain viotorious. folio 359). (ABOUT JINA 940 A.

). pp. Ratnavajra. 'upfisaka (lay devotee). 16-17). propounds that a word while denoting a thing po~iti ve excludes it from all other things diffE>l ent from it.) :i The Apohaslddhi and Ksiina bhangasiddlu are lncluLled III the " SIX Buddhist Ny~ya Traets.SYSTEMATIC "WRITJLRS O.!'iT~··~~~ti. His fdther. 11 J 14." e. mantras and SCIences.l.siddhi.!nef't1~T"'<t fllfi~ ~~tft'f J (Apohaslddhi. Calcutta.n. continuance and destruct. C~lcut. which deals with tJhe doctrine of apoha~..TRA 979-1040 A D. After this he came to Magadha and Vajrftsana (Budrlha-Gaya) tI~hr li~ llf~'fr{ -'!ItimfG'i'f~ iff~ f<fNfir~lf) t ~~~lf:fi~1f­ 'IlI. one of whwh begm:.1 called in Tibetan Rm-chen-rdo-rje. The second vlOrk 5 attempts. 'l. to prove ~hat aU things are momentary by showing that they do not require three moments for their prodrwtion.s born in a Brahma~a family in Kasmira. 1\ ~ \Apohasiddhl. Prasad Shastri III It. who was an. with a salutation to Lokanatha and the other to B.tmanta Bhadra The first work. 4. (ABOUT RATNA VA. Ratnavajra.3 viz. ~'Ri17 •. 1 1i~T":.\t1\lmql"'iC!ii~?~<.ta. 3. 58. Calcutta edition). a wO!'d bea.r llUDDHI81' LOGIC-HATNA VA.tra of the Tirthikas.On Rqtnaklrti is saId to have written two other treatises. eihtion. .if~l. serIes. 7.:. ~fQlf~fli.ngasiddhl.f1fril'f{f1 ~wrfctiiffter 'fi"'f~lf . Ht> wrote two logical treatises. Hari Bhadra.< \eX:':I("l~ sion) and kSa(Ul-blwizg(J. (ApohaSlddhi. 4.-bhange.he . 10). ~~UFr"'r~-ar CfT'li~fi:r :s=rrfiffl~. 1t~i4fTi[vl: U ifl~T~·r'('<it~~ fqf¥:J~q 4ier~1sfl1~nr I ifTftr ~~'<. pp. 6 Ksanabhammslddill. p. no liS. Apobasiddhl ~nd ~~:~gI}.M. (m01uentarmess). 8. pp.oT ~i~irif ~f~~liI ?'~. p. Also K~£u}a. HIS ancestors were dee-ply versed in the dac. p. wa.:::'}~ bhusana 1 and Vacasp8t! }"Iisra ~ on the subjects of apuJu. liar&.1iz.:l­ bhailgaslddhl. 77.:hted by M. through affirmative and negative infercnceR. 58 \ 'Sfr~TiJ(HI~ii'q~it ..~ ~N . Also Ksana-bhangasidd111. that is. p.• (A}10has 1ddhi. studied by himself up to the 36th year of hIS life an the Buddhist sutras.nr~ww . Calcutta edltlOn) ~ "SI'fi 'ij~\l'ifT1iIt \!l"iT~Tiif ~R ~if I ~ tlCf ~?1jf'il~TiI 'e1l(~W $f~1 rliw It (K"ana-bha. Sthlras1(idhldfu?aI}. was the first convert to Buddhism in his family. a negative denotation along with a positive one.a 6 and Cltradvaltaslddhl 133.BlblwLheea Indlca. p.

He flourished during the reign of Cana. CHAP.4 also oalled Danasrila. signifyIng "application of reasoning" The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.D. . was born in Kasmira about 1025 A.D. of Vikramasila and was appointed a gate-keeper of the university. where he beheld the face of Cakra-samvara. 134.ka. pp. together with Sarvajna Deva. visited Tibet and helped the Tibetans in the work of translating Sanskrit books into Tibetan. and 1040 A. Afterwards he canle back to Ki). (ABOUT DXNASILA 1025 A. He received the royal diploma of the University ..ha.. He was a contemporary of Par~hita Bhadra.D He waR the author of the foHowing work : Yuktl-prayoga. named Tiil-ne-hdsin-'Qzan-po. (ABOUT JINA MITRA 1025 A. Jina Mitra ~ was a native of Kasmira who. SCHOOL.smlra. Mdo.). MED. Jina Mitra lived about 1025 A.ios ?72-373. ~ Vide Tirinatha's Geschichte des Buddhiamus von Schiefner.OGlO. when his contemporary king Mahi Pala reigned in Bengal.. p. named Vande-yese§-§de. xcvi. 135. where he was known by the name of Acarya. She. 226. and his approximate date may be placed betwe~n 970 A. He wrote the undermentioned work on Logic:Nyaya-blndu-pi1}. Mdo. The Sanskrit original of this work is lost. which contains the purport of Dharmakirti's Nyaya· hindu. but there exists a Tibetan translation 3 in the l?§tan-ngyur.340 INDIAN I. III. Sarvajfia Deva and rrilopa. Jina Mitra. when Mahi Pala II was reigning in Bengal. called in Tibetan Rig~-pahi-thig§-pabi. Folios 115-116.D. by whose grace he completely mastered the Buddhist sastras.i-§byor-wa. 115. London.D. Vajravarahi and many other deities. Dana-sila and others.D . and the interpreter of Shuohen. He visited Tibet and co-operated in the propaganda t I have consulted the Tibetan version in the possession of the India Office. BUDDHIST LOGIC. Danasila. called in Tibetan Rig§-pab. Ze} Fol. and Qpag-bsam·ijon-bzan. The translation was prepared by the Indian teacher Surendrabodhi. don-Q§du§-pa.g. but there exists a Tibetan translation J in the B§tan-hgyur.ar{.). The translation was prepared by the Indian sage Sri Subhuti-santa and the interpreter-Inol1k of Shu-chen. whence he went through Udyana (Kabul) to Tibet.

Ze..Karya. Naropa 'While visiting Vikramasila~ got down from his conyeyance leaning on the right arm of Atisa and. .'sa... Folios 413--418.a bhava-siddhl. Subsequently.SYSTEM. Mdo.kramasila.na:Q 1 I have consulted the India Office copy '-it. pp 23.D. J:iiftna-srI Mitra was attached to the University of Vakramasila eV€ 'l1 in 1040 A. Mdo. ~(f .' The San'3krit original of thIS work appears to be lost. pp.. Vide Tiirinatha's Geschichte des BnddhlSll1nS von Schlefnel'. He was the author of the following work on Logic :-Pustaka·pa~hopaya. called in Tibetan . W~'iJT~~T 'i'f(i .karaI}. and :Qpag-l. Ze. 136.) is said to have been much indebted to him. 341 of the translations of Sanskrit books into Tibetan.Bgyu-dail-h1Jra~­ buhi-no-wo-grub-pa. called in Tibetan Gle§-bam-bklag-pahi-thabl?. it was retouched and published by the Nepalese Pal~\(~. signifying 'establishment of the relation of cause and effect.3-242. 3 Vide the Sarvadaraana-sarograha" chapter on Banddha-dal. when Dipankara Atisa left for Tibet. The Hindu philosopher Madhavacarya in the 14th century quotes 3 Juana-sri. signifying the method of reading books... 117-120. left arm of Jfiana-sri Mitra. but there exists a Tibetan translation I in the I?§tan-hgyur. WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-J~ANA-SRI MITRA.D. r-rhe translation was prepared by the great Indian sage Kumara Kalasa and the interpreter-monk Sakya-l!og. JNA~A-SRi MITRA (ABOU'l' 1040 A. was born in GauQ.f~~qf~:S:T iT ~ II \J iIT-Q:r~q fq"bTT~~i q~~hrrf~ fifi~.iV. but afterwards 'imbibed faith in the Mahayana.a He was at first admitted into the Sravaka school of Buddhism. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. Folio 270.)sam-lJon-'bzan. Jiiana-sri Mitra/' designated as a great pinar of the University of Vi. who is perhaps the same as Jfiana· sfi Mitra.l'T t!if~llI'" ~~~ lir~r 11l!lm I ~TlTi(f'm'~~riJCfi~ f~a.ita Ananta-sri and the interpreter-monk afore-mentioned.).naka who reigned in Ylagadha. Jiiana-sr7 MItra was appointed a gate-keeper of t4e university of Vikramasila by Ca. Dipankara or Sri-jiianaAtisa (born in 980 A D. He was the author of the~'following work on Logic. The translation was prepared by the author himself.H~~~Cf I " .in the ~§tan-hgyuf. but there exists a Tibetan translation 4. ~Ptreti 'f.

This Ratnakirtlls different from the sage of that name who was patronised by KinJ.J~XN.. and learnt the Sutra and Tantra a. (vide TAriiniitha'sGeschlchtedef'\ Buddhismtbl iIQn Schlefner.. ..342 INDUN LOGIC. No. p.lOe.235.th. He visited Tibet where he was employed In translating Sanskrit books into Tibetan. 234. Vimala Candra of Benga!.:ao.. was known to the Tibetans aR Acarya Santi or simply Santipa..t Vikramasila from Jetari.I. 138. The Tibetan equivalent for the muns Ratniikal'a Santi'lS ~~'~3i'~~.D.b called Kalikala-sarvajna. He waR the author of the followmg work on Logic:l'ramana vllliscaya-~ika . ~pag-bsam-ljon.'I"U' 6 .an Tshag-ma-rnampar-ile8-pahi-ngre1-"bsag..putants.ivada school of Odantapura..). MED. He . New serie~. but there f'xists a Tibetan translation in the :B§ltan-ngyur..1.D. pp 172. and my di$Oussion under the head Vinita Deva 'n th .-bsam-ljon-bzan. IT! 137. Calcut.7. pp.. where he defeated the Tirthika diF. 408.t. " IndIan LogIC as preserved 10 TIbet. He was the author of a work on 1 Jmfna-sri Bhadra was perhaps the same as Jfiina-siddha Bhadra mentioned m the :Qpag-bsam-lJon-bzan. Vide also Satie Chandra Vidyabhusana's.D.'s Geschichte des Buddhismus von Schiefner. Vol. . to I consulted the T:ibetan version of this work in the monastery of Labrang b Vide Tiirana. j .::"~~~"'Q i in Sil~k:un.) to be a gaie-keeper of the University of Vikramasila.3" m the Journal of the A&latic Society of Beng-sl.. which is a commentary on the PramaI)aviniscaya of Dharmakirti and which begins with a salutation to Sarvaifia. Mdo. . 1.as born in a BrfthmaQ. Folios 188-322. IS Vidt> ppa@. 117.:mt. Ratnakara Santi.174. At the invitation of the king of Ol?. Snana-sri Bhadra 1 called in Tibetan Ye-se~-gpal-Qzan-po..rnTY.A-SRt BHADRA (ABOUT 1050 A.. 1907.. BUDDHJQ7' LOGIC. . hl'nnO'h R . eX:. He was ordained in the order of the Rarvast.bgru§. about 650 A.ylon he visited that island where he ~pread the Buddhist doctrine. No.. In the land of the Lamas he was \vell known under the name of "Kha-che-jnana-srI" 6 or K[tsmirian Ji1anu-sl'i. iii. pp.l>. caned in Tibet..). p. :2 Vide the Colophon of Pramihla-viniscaYIl-tika. was a great logician. Ratnaklrti" and others. RATNAKARA SXNTI (ABOUT 1040 A. The translation was prepared by the author himself with the co-operation of the interpreter-monk Oho~-kyi~ brtson.... The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost.ta edItIon. and ppag-bsam-ijon-bzfI1l. CRAP. SClIOOL. As junior to Naropa he lived about 1050 A. 117. KAmarupa and Tirhut..a family of Kasmira 2 and became afterwards a convert to Buddhi~m. Thereafter he was appointed by King Canaka (who died in 983 A D.I.. We.D. p.

ita Santi Bhadra." Saying this. C IE. he uttered the Va. 6 The Sanskrit origmal of • Antarvyaptl' or mol'" fully • Antarvyapt. Once. He afterwards received the royal diploma of the University of Vikramasila. But he was' very poor. Sub sequently. nay. Mdo.3.']iifl1-lf{ W~ Sifiill!:l'i"q~r i!frff q~~Cifq'IEictifl'~Tl{iifn(ifll' I ~. sect.' has recently been edIted by M M Hal'a Pra<. (ABOl]T YAMARI 1050 A.' The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. or Ca. called in Tibetan Bnam -par-rig-patsam-fiid-do-grub·pa. TIbet. OffiCfl. Ze) FoHos 338-344. Rhetoric and Lexicography as preserved In.lOn lfdo. Folios. The translation ViaS prepared ~y the India. without the aId even of a mInor term in whioh we J.A. signifying 'internal inseparable connection' It is embodied in the ~§tan­ bgyur. IIr.l-samarthana.nd the major term can be conceived without the aid of an example in whlCh the things signified by the two terms co-abide. and the Tibetan interpreter. 4 He lived during the time of Naya Pala who reigned ill 1. The translation was prepared by the N~palese PaQq. It begins thus .335-338.y amari was specially versed in Grammar and Logic.sudhara benediction in virtue of which Yamari rose to opulence.ad ShastrI. 12Q. fiery because smoky.D. he came to Vajrasana (Buddha-Gaya).lcutta.-{~ ~~i{-elf1r~TfI'rf1:tif a.its despise Yogins and do not solicit dharma from them. it was published by the same PaQ4ita and Klog-§kyase§-rab-grtsega.t({1~'WfTi{ I It ends thus '-'ili~~rfF. Mdo. .n sage Kumara Kalasa and the interpre'ter-monk SakY!:II-bog.q. London. who replied: "Y 00 Paq. series. wa'! lent to me by the Indle.ew serIes. 343" Ohanda (prosody) caned Chando-ratnakara t and of the following WOl ks t on J. There he related his poverty to a Yogin.. 1907. Indica.S. e. being unable to support his family and children. The work argues that the inseparable connection between the middle term a.pti-matra siddhl.Iogic : Vi D. in the Blbliotheca.). no 2.050 A. Grammar." m J.t1'C i.nslation in the :6§tan-bgyur. -'. He was the author of the following work :1 For account of the Chandoratnikara see Satischandra Vldyabhusana's " Sanskrit_ works on LIterature. vol.-monk Sakya-hog of the province of IJbro (Do).D.n itfC{i'R:~l1tr1!1TlJTif I RTl. hence this has come to pass..g.8 called in Tibetan Nan-gi-khyab-pa. B. containing Ratn1ikara Stinti's works. Aptar-vyapti. M A . signifying' establishment of a mere communication of knowledge. Zf". '2 The volume Ze of the ~~tan-hgyur.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-YAMARI. but there exists a Tibetan tra.~ii~if ~m~ffifi't I 'i!ifif?~lf • .o prgye the uo·preset10e of the things.

104-342 and the whole of volumes Be.·i)"·l:l~ttllN·tI·!tJr.t:rj2i'" ~~ "l3J'Q. folio 303). tJ ~~ 11 - C!~"''''!ollN #." 1 PramaIJa·v&rtikalankara-~ika. and was above all an expert in Logic.344 INDIAN LOOIC. 247.v~.t.. MED. The volume Be ends thu'3 :-" From the immeasurable merit acquired by me by composing this regular annotation.ikii. an m . to be lost. .nes Pe.'·-TiiriniUba's GeschlChte des Bneldhismus von Schlefner) . SANKARA~ANDA (ABOUT 1050 AD. Be. SCHOOL. :>49 . CHAP.in 1050 A. born in a BrabmaQ.. Mdo. subduing its adversary death.rtika of Dharmakirti.~ called in Tibetan :6de-byed-ggah-wa. called in Tibetan Tshad-ma-rnamhgrel-gyi·hgrel-1. pages 103--354 and Phe. Pramar.a-vartika in seven chapters. .of Naya PaIa..'l'l:l'tI="Jfl:i1 II "'" (!?~tan·hgyur. :Mda. being an annotation on the Pramir.~·~ s~ 1". and Tse of the BBtanbgyur. but there exists a very voluminous Tibetan translation which covers volumes Phe."ti would be 8. Sankarananrla . much later tune.?sad. The Sanskrit original of this work appear:. but there exists a Tibetan translation 4 which covers vcJm. obtain the indestructible and perfected NirvaQa. and to call him a.·~8\·1:.a famIly in Kasmira. E~~'~ II ~'.El~.. Z Some ma.C!~C! !tJ"'?lN'~C.. III.and !. may the world. personal pupil of Dharmakil.lpag-bsam-Uon bzan. Mdo. The translation was prepared by PaQ. pp. He was learned in all sciences. who reigned . the time. called in Tibetan Tshag-marnam-l!grel-rgyan-gyi-ngrel-bsag. BUDDHIST LOGIO.1.~q. He was the author of the following works on' Logic :Pr8mana-vartlka ·t. great C'onfu.intaln that Sankarananaa.':rlon. but in a drealn he was told by Mafijusri: "Since Dharmakirti is an Arya (an elect). pp 107. The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. He flourIshed g during.·a. He intended to write an original work on Logic refuting Dharmakirti.D. pages 1-104 of the ~§tan-hgyur. Sallkarananda.a. was a per90nal pupil of Dharmakirti On this point Lama. which is an annotation on the Pramfu~a·vartikalankara of Prajfiakara Gupta.. pp. it is the mistake of thine own understanding" Tihereupon Sankarananda repented and composed a commentary on Dharmakirti'.. Tiirinatha observes:-" The Bra. 140.appeared at a. and if thou seest m stake in ~im.t.). one cannot refute him.gita Sumati and the interpreter l?lo-ldan-se§-rab in the monastery of ~fie-thai1 near Lhasa.l II ~~'~'QJ!!tJ'~8\. 120.hmanQ. Me. was (~·q~~·f·'B. 2 Vide Tarlin~tha's Geschichte des Buddhlsmus von Schiefner.

Ze.tl!\·~"'·fJ ~<Jj'~~t:. Ze. but there exiRts a Tibetan t.'{ II '(~ j04~d!'z:q~~ z:q~lTl~ cr~'I:l~~ ~ '" " l::\~ ~ •.he Samba ndhaSanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. self' and . but there exists a TIbetan translatiol1 b In the :FJ~tan·hgyur) IVldo."""""335. ~~·~~~·o. but there exists a Tibetan t. in whom there are no 'c I " and" mine. and the Tibetan interpreter· monk :Qgah-wahi-rdo-rje. signifying " establishment of a thing by the exclusion of its opposi teFl. caned in Tibetan tIbrel·pa-brtag- commentary on t.t2l·z:r ~!l:.6~tan-hgyur. The work opens thus. The translation was prepared by the Kasmirian Par.SYSTEMATIC WRITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC-SANKAR\NANDA. Folios 334. 4 c-.HJita Manoratha and the Tibetan interpreter :e-Io-Idan-se~-rab in th~ incomoarable City of Kasmira.Ill·~~·z:q~1H·'l'\~~·Q·\J..t. 12 ~~.je~-su-hbran wa.tIl1li~'i!\ ~'~~'l::\'~'Q~~'Qq 11 "'lr:.ranslation I in the .~ tn:p:''l'\·'''~·Q''''l]·~1t II 'l'\ar.' II ~~'1H~i!\ ~ ~ ~'l'\'o.~'~x." The Sanskri t original of this work appears to be lost. The translation was prepared by the great Indian Paq. The 1 I have consulted the Tlbetan version in the possession of Indla Office.~ ~·o.·r. The translation was prepared by PaQQita Bhagya -raja and the interpreter l?lo-ldan-se~-rab. Ze. 345 Sambandha·parikl?anusara.iSlll·9. -g 1 have consulted the IndIa Office copy. Mdo.!3121 Q~~'a~ '" II • OIl< "'" .liI·~'<it3\·"q·G·~ QQ. which is a p~rik~a of Dharmakirti. ¥do. pahi-!. called in Tibetan Sel-~va-grub-pa. 11do.nounced. Ze." 2Apohaslddhi. London. signif)Ting "establishment of the causal connection. " The Omniscient One who is free from all mistakes and who looks to the interests of living beings in all times. Folios 308-334." The Sanskrit original of hlS work appears to be lost. I elucidate the puzzle of . The work begms thus :" By whom connection with the world has been rco." who is called free from concerns-to that Omniscient One I bow down.. oj." PrutIbauoha-siddhl.qita Parahita.ranslation 5 in the :e~tan-hgyur..~.'Q II o. called in Tibetan trhrel-pa·grul>-pa. Folios 24--39. others' connected with the doctrine of A poha. folio 24).~t2l.9. i2i II m~tan-hgyur.:o.. salutmg him and relying on his mercy.

' q~ c:.. ~e.. p. CHAP. Bubhakara Gupta must have lived at the end of the 11th century A.o~' .tifica..~ 9. It begins thus . He flourished durmg the reign of Rama '{lata I and resided for some time at the shrine of Etapuri erected by Rama Pala's vvife.!?~tan-hgyur. highprkst of the monl.~of the rule of the Pala kings. waS Mokf?akara Gupta.D....!q q~~' o-l ~'~"I 1:IQ. III 141.S::"·~ii~·~~·qlSl·~:::' I:I~ I :. Das). (. ~I:I'e.\~.: !!do.:. and (3) Inference for the sake of otherR... called in Tibetan Thar~pahi hbyuil-~na§­ the High-priest of the great monastpry of Jagaddala 3 at the confluence of the Ganga (Padma) and the Karatoya (perhaps neal' Bogra in North Bengal) He seems to have flourished early in the 12th century A. Harlbhadra Sari observes:::::.. fqll~ ~rirTilT7 'iJ. ~ba~. His logiclal views are quoted and criticis~d by the Jaina logician Haribhadra BurP who designates him as Subha Gupta ] 42 l\fOK$AKARA GUPTA (ABOUT 1100 AD."~Q'lr .D.t ~ -- (Qpag-bsam-lJon.)..l..s.Tiliif' I ~ (AnekAntajay.·~'fJ:.). For the iden..' The Sanskrit original of this work appears to be lost. -""'.q..nslation was prepared by the inter:rt-e:e:-r-monk Dpal-ldan-bitt-g:ro§-brtan-po without the co-operation of any' Pa:Q.~".. Subhakara Gupta was a disciple of Abhayakara Gupta.qfiif~ 1l:. He wrote the undermentioned work on Logic : Tarka bhq~a! called in Tib' +an Btog-gehi-§ka!i. ~~ r:i~'~f. BUDDHIST LOGIC.q.~. U7) .tion of J aga.'I:I.IzaQ. He wrote a treatIse on Logle in which 'he closely followed Dharmakirti. fi ~)ifWi1iT"): ~ ~ "itinrrd ~ I if t!~ "Vr~T~ iI'If . . folio 413).'.. Ze.D. 2 C\ Yo '" . Pala commenced about 1080 AD. 120.:::.ita.l& see Rama Fila-carita. Folios 373-413. edited by. after the temrina tiOD. signifying 'technicalities of Logic. . The1 tra.l''..I:tj'~'QI~ If!(~·Ft':.'IJ'('~'e. SUBHAKARA GUPTA (ABOUT 1080 A.~ iii' ill ~~~'~t':.~..-patatiikipiki.q ~~..-~------------------~------ \'5. (2) Inference for one's own self. C.q!lb1·~~~· ¢t':. As the reign of Rama.' 'l.stic University of Vikramasila. -.. Ze.CHOOL.i'li.346 INDIAN LOGIC.. .dda. :...• .t j -.. but there exists a Tibetan translation 4 in the -B§tan-ggyur.. ~~ QX::~. lVldo. p.' ~.. MED.. ~lli 4lTf~~Tft1(T 'l1\1~]11' I ~Ql1IIfi~ ~tln't~if. The work is divided into three chapters named respectively: (1) Perception...

.~ ~~ q ~. 1I m~tan·bgyur.SYSTEM. '''BITERS ON BUDDHIST LOGIC--MOKSAKARA GUPTA.~ --- - -.S: ~~'~'~Cl'Zf!~~ 9. foho 373) . 347 " Bowing down to the Teacher.J~'I:I'j~t. T elucidate Tarkabha~a for the sake of introducing children of small intellect to the aystcm of Dharmakirti " 1 -. ? -cr::::r ~'1!4 Q ElI1·~~·'\tl~·tl~~·~~ ~~ Q U.i54~ - "" I ~~ ~ ::U~~''1~'~~~'1!43~ ~~ rCl1'~. Mdo. the Lord of the world. Ze.

part III for 1898.lita and others.D. A. the the Brahmana and Bud Brahma~ic logician Ak~apada brought out dhlst loglcians. Vol. in upholding their logical tenets. After U ddyotakara there occurred a long gap in the succession of Brahmaq. Areta and other Buddhist logicians} having attacked the Brahma~ic authors. who flourished in the 3rd century A.a of Mithila brought out. to refute the views of the Buddhists. at the close of the lOth .• his A. affirmed in opposition to Ak~apada that a syllogism cont. Phllosophy" in the Journal of the Buddhist Text Society..ta Raklj. by the Buddhist logician Dignaga who reduced the sixteen categories of Nyayasutra to one.as is evident from the Buddhist writings of Devendra . his comprehensive work on Logic called Nyaya-sutra in which there was an explanation of sixteen categories. Jinendra Bodhi. THE CONTENTIOUS SPIRIT OF BUDDHIST LOGIC. "It was to dispel the error of Dignaga" that the Brahma1}ic logician Uddyotakara wrote his Nyaya-vartika about 635 i_. a BrahmaI).. I.isted or three members only." 10 J. viz.1).century A.\as. including four means of valid knowledge and five members of a syllogism. offered a bold challenge to the Brah· Antagonism between maI. In the second century A.D . etc. Vacaspati Misra wrote his Nyaya-vartika-tatparya-tika.4. The BrahmaJ). No. on " Anuruddha Thera-a learned Pall author of Southern India m the 12th century.a writers 0n Logic until in the 9th century A.ic commentator Vfttsyayana (about 400 A.) attempted in vaIn to defend the position of Ak~apada untIl he was overthrown. l 143. The Decline of Buddhist Logic. By that time the Buddhist Logic had achieved a great triumph . Smith's" Early History of India. - .CHAPTER IV.S. Santa Rak~ita. prama~w. A." published in Bhandarkar Commemora. viz pratyaksa and anumana.. and the four means of valid knowledge to two. He in his turn was assailed by the Buddhist logician Dh~hrJlakirti who defended Dignaga.. Kalyar. and on '0 Ancient IndIan Logic: an outline.tive Volume. Udayanacarya.A." my H Indian Missionaries to Foreign Lands m the Buddhistic Age". BUnY1U Nanjio'sCatalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka.B. The Buddhist logician Nagarjuna.tma-tattva-viveka.D.D. . Ravi Gup~. Subsequently a large number of logicians such as 1 Vide V.D. In the 9th and lOth centuries Dharmottara.D. my papers on "The influence of Bnddhism on the development of Nyaya.. the Buddhists.:' edited bv Sarat Chandra Das Calcutta. Dr. Unlike the Jainas. Sakya Bodhi. 'riira:nlitha's GeschlChte des Buddhlsmus von Schiefner. Vi~!1ta Deva. and" Dpag-bsam-ljonbzan.Bodhi. 1905. Kamala Sila.

349 Jina Mitra.) respectively. were Buddhists who bestowed great patronage on the Buddhist teachers and monastic communities. Vaisaii. the first. The kings of the Pala dynasty. Asoka (255 B.D.Buddhism.. Kumara Gupta. But at last their principles of thought were almost entirely absorbed into the Brahma:q. by King Sirilha ~arman of the Pallava dynasty. by certain kings of the Gupta dynasty. was backed up about 500 A.D. to 1100 A. PrajiHikara Gupta. For nearly 800 years from 300 A D.C. Skanda Gupta.ism grew in popularity.C. . the Buddhists fought valiantly against the Brahmal). Loss OF ROYAL PATRONAGE. another Buddhist logician.C ).). second.D.THE DECJ~INE OF BUDDHIST LOGIC.D.ic Logic which left no room for an independent existence of the Buddhist Logic 144. burnt the Bodhi tree at BuddhaGaya.. The GrEeco-Bactrian king M~nander supported. Though Sasailka ~arendra Gupta.C. a king of the Andhra dynasty.the foremost of Buddhist logicianR.accession of the Calukva kings on the throne dhlsm lU Southern IndIa.ism. W lC hold there. Pataliputra and Jalandhara under the patronage of kings Ajata-satru (about 490 B. who ruled in Bengal and Behar during 750-1119 A. Ism. Numerous temples dedicated to Siva or Vi~i}. Jetari. The Buddhist logician Nagarjuna (about 300 A.u were built and many manuals of worship were compiled.D.ic forms of BrahtnaQ. The Ra~~rakfita .. During the two hundred years of Calukya rule the Paura:Q. Pura Gupta and Baladitya. Since the middle of the 6th century A. From tIme to time Buddhism received encouragement and favour frOll the rulers. King Sri HarE?a of Kanau] (606-647 A D. a great change took . Kalasoka (about 390 B. destroyed the foot-prints of Buddha at 'Patallputra and smashed numerous Buddhist temples and monasteries about 600 A. third and fourth Buddhist Councils were held in Rajagrha. rs ose rei n extended from 815 A.) and Kani/?ka (about 78 A.D. . slowly declined and was gradually super~eded by J ainism and Brahma:Q. -' B U ddh' '" h' h h a d a slJronga t "(7l atapl. Sankarananda and ~iok~a­ kara Gupta appeared in the field to vindicate the Buddhist Logic from the attack of BrahmaQas. Buddhism could not be totally extirpated by him. As already stated Patronage in the past. to at j. was patronised in the 5th century A. which he accepted as his religion about J50 B.D. Va sub andhu. Dignaga.as. King of Central Bengal and a worshipper of Siva. viz. place in religion in the Deccan with the ~ers~cutlOn of Bud.) while revering Siva and the Sun entertained a special faith in Buddha whose doctrines he defended with much care and enthusiasm.D.) received help from Satavahana.D.

it became impossible for their Logic to attain a further developmont. crest least 877 A.Buddhism from India. large part of enos. and during the two centuries following there occurred great politicral disorders In the country.it. a member of the Ka. whose emblem the buH was adopted by them as their family In 10 19 A.hat Magadha. Under him and his successor'S Buddhism languished until It. . a stronghold of Buddhism. The Buddhists having in large numbers turned Mahomedans. He died in 1040 A. ADVENT OF THE l\I. t.malllc revlval m wrested from the PaJa kings a. A large proportion of the Buddhist popUlation thought it expedient to embrace the Ma. B 13~Rl. Nanya Deva who was a Pramara KRatriya of Karnata succeeded Kart}a Deva and reigned in Mithila from 1089-'1125 A. re-established the RrahmaIflC religion in Bengal in oppoFlition to their predecessors the Pala kings who had been Buddhists. SCHOOL. ~Ia.D. BUDDHIS'l' LOGIC. The Mahomedan invasion is said to have exerted u. Gangeya Deva of the Cedi race set up a kmgdom in Tirhut (Mithila).h. the Hmdu Shahiya dynasty of KU8mira was extitpated by the Mahomedans.l was attacked by the Turuskas (Mahomedans) and Behar.D. mira.D. Buddhism having thus lost all patronage. 145. from the loth century onwards.).D. while the Buddhist Unhrersity of Vlkramasila was burnt by Bakhtiar Khiliji about l197 A D. Lak~mar:ta Sena and others who ruled in Bengal up to 1197 A. OGIC. while speaking of Kamala Rak~ita observes .D . 1 . About 1021 AD.Jamism. Vijaya and his successors Vallala Sena. MED. . These kings. D.D.rnataka Kf?atriya race and a contemporary of Nanya Deva of Mlthila. CHAP. IV. Unlike the earlier kings the later rult'r~ of the PaltLva dvn~sty.t.l' 13npn Mithllii. RevIval of BriihmaI. Lama Taranatha. brought about the revival of Bl'ahmary. who overthrew Buddhism.homedan f. J.~50 INDIAN r. Bengal about 1119 A.).ism In Mithil. considerable influence on the disappearance of MahomedanFl in Ka~. These circumstances led to the decline of Buddhism in Kasmira.~HOMEDANS.D.D. became worshippers' of Siva. finally disappeared in the 12th century A. at the end of the lOth century A.• was a follower of Dlgttmbara .homedans In Benga.. the Buddhist Logic could not prosper.nd was succeeded by his son Karna Deva who was a contempol'<1l'Y of Naya Pala about 1038--1065 A. Vijaya Sena.

Europe a. Thousands of enterprising monks visited Nepal. Tibet. Burmah.) to re-establish the Br£ihmp~nic faith there are too well known to ne€ >d a.s about 260 B.. Corea.C. the monks. As regards Northern India. While Buddhism was undergoing persecution in India it was accorded a warm reception in foreign countries.dc preachers began to flourish in Southern 1n Southern IndIa India to revive the Brahmar.ourished in Sripernmatur. The Maurya emperor A80ka. the doctrine glo'riQUS Preach ye a life of holiness. the field of Buddhist Logic in India was entirely deserted and suffered to grow wild and barre-no Buddha instructed his followers. 0 Bhikkhus. It is a matter of common knowledge how in the 15th c~ntury A. SHELTER IN FOREIG:r. Mongolia.THE D~('UNE OF BUDDHIST LOGIC.nd the welfare of the many in compa-ssian for the Africa.. It wa. for the good.r sects that were founded in India to supplant Buddhi'lm.D. to foreign countries.." Following this inl'truction many monks turned missionaries. Sumatra. Bhatta (about B30 AD) and Sankaracarya (about 785 A D. in the 10th century to replace Buddhism by the Brahma:q. etq. In the seventh century A. detailed notice. to take up the 11 ves of missionaries. Java. but also to the .and onwards many Brahmar. It is not necessary to gIve here a detailed account of the othf>. ~ 147.lnkya a.ava sect In Bengal and Sankara Deva founded the Mahapuru~la sect in Assam. Go ye. Bhikkhus . perfect and pure. 146 THE RRAHMA:r.ava preacher. f~r the g¥n. there were left very . Siam. ft. China.nd Cola dynasties to his religion.lc faith.COUNTRIES.q-IC PREACHERS. Oaitanya founded the Vais1). Japan. and converted th~ kings of the Ca. Sprea:<i of Buddhism and wander forth for the gain of the many.D.sily engaged in carrying on their propaganda in IndIa. Ceylon. of Buddha to the middle of the third century B. 18 miles east north easL of Kancipura (Conjeeveram). the Buddhist missionaries were bl1. From the nfrva."". for the welfare of gods and men Proclaim. The BrahmaI")ic faith of new orders being thus I3stablished. the celebrated VaisQ. I have f).tic religion th\ere The attempts made by Kumarila.lready referred to the efforts made by Udayanacarya of Mithila In Nor-them Iucha. despatohed mis<sionaries not only to all his protected states such as those of the Gandharas and Kambojas. In ASla.. world. that Buddhism was carried abroad.C. The Buddhist monks being thus attracted in large numbers. Ramanuja. Early in the 12th century A D..q. few Buddhist writers who could continue to work in the field of J-Iogic. where they were cordially welcomed and accepted as revered preceptors. saying: .

landa visited China where he translated many Sanskrit works i11to Chinese and received in 100] A. a monk of Udyana. aries m large numbers to the celestial empire.D. t BuddhIst missionaries went in large numbers Buddhism In Khotan.D. a native of Embassy at Rome.D. 10th. a minister of king .D Thon-mi-sam-bhota. SroIi-tsan-gam-po of Tibet. Dharmarak~a. the Indian sages In ~jbet.J?.ldhlst missiona. It will be an impossible task to enumerate the missionaries that visited China during the thousand years of the Christian era.. translated numerous Sanskrit works mto Chinese until he died in 1058 A. Among tbe numerous learned missionaries that ::. a posthumous title of great honour. who arrived in China in 980 A. Macedonia and Epirus governed respectively by Diodotus Antiochos Theos Ptolemy Phlladelphos. Dana Pala. Magas.) deserve a special notice. Lha-tsun-byan-chub. and received a special title of honour from the Ohinese Emperor. . .D.D. But it was not till the time of Kaniska that Buc. IV. went at the head of an embassy from the Indian king Poros to the court of Augm~tus Caesar at Rome about 29 B. a Buddhist monk named Zarmana Chagos (Sramc. SOHOOL. sent an envoy named Bgya-tshon-seIi-ge to invite DipaIikara SrIjfiana or Atisa of Vikramasila and to accompany him to Tibet. to Khotan. Dharmadeva of Na. In the 9th..D. Buddhism was first kllO\Vn to China in the 2nd century B.. Hellenistic monarchies of the Yona country (Graeco-Bactria).. a king of Tibet. Instances may be enormously multiplied to show how Bt".ranslate Sanskrit books into Tibetan.:. Cyrene. As late as in the 10th century A. who reached China in 1004 A. To preach Buddhism in Ceylon Asoka sent his own son Mahinda and own daughter Sanghamitta with a numBuddhIsm m Ceylon. f h .352 INDIAN LOGIO. a learned Buddhist monk of Magadha.r. anta 0 t e UDlversity of Nalanda and Guru Padma Sambhava of Udyana was invited at the court of Khri·sroIi-deu~tsan who ruled in Tibet from 728 A D. S ' "Rakslta and Kamala ~Ila . The Tibetan versions prepared by t. Syria.C During the reign of the Kusana king Kani~ka and his successors. Khasgar and other provinces of Central Asia. Strabo the historic an tells us that.hem were afterwards collected together to constitute . B~ddhlst mISSIOnarieS while in the 8th century A D. They were usefully employed with the co-operation of lamas to t.ubsequently visIted Csy]on the names of Buddha Gho~a of Gaya (about 431 A. was the recipient of a similar honour from the Chinese Emperor. About 1038 A D. BUDDHIST LOGIC.acarya). In the 7th century A.D) and Anuruddha Thera of Kancipura (12th eentury A D..ddhist monks were received with honour in China.ries arrangements could be made to send' missionm Chma. MED. Antiogonos Go~atas and Alexander as IS evident from his edicts.the J . 11th and 12th centuries A. visited Magadha. to 864 A.. CHAP. Barygaza (Broach) near Guzerat. ber of priests to that island.D.C. Egypt. the number of Buddhist monks of Bengal and Behar that visited Tibet was enormously large. e.

. Buddha Sri. Ananta Varman. Sumatl Kirti. Prajiiii Guhya. Sat'vajiia Deva. . Sanatana Sri. Vlmala Sri. Vi~uddhi Simha. 353 by the great Tibetan sage BU~§lton of the monastery of Shalu nea. countries 148. Gayiidhara. Kalasa. Sila. Kanaka. who were engaged In trans-. Lak\?mika. Jilana Vall'a. Jiiana Sri of Kasmira. The few that redhism as a separate ormained reverted to the Brahmanic faith of the ganism. Padma-sambhava. VaJra Kirti of Nepal. Tantrika. Dana Sila. Prajila Pala. Dana Sri. Dana. MUn! Va.1ic N yaya and the Buddhist science of Prama/y!a. Buddha SriJi'liina. 408). Sraddhakara Varma.rma. Candra Rahula. Niskalatika Deva.. PraJila Varma. Bodhi Mitra. Siam. Gangadhara. .·SJc::t ~ .. Dharmakirti. 'Kalyii~a Mitra. Yamsrl.THE DECLINE OF' BUDDHIST LOGiC. Buddha Pala. Mantra. SA:dhu Kirtl. Java. Re:hula Sri of Timra Dvipa anti Kirti Pandlta. Ananta Sri. Jaya Deva. Jay ananta .r Tashi-Ihun-po under orders of the Tlbeto·Chinese--Mongol Emperor Kublai Khan in 1270 A D.. IndIan Pa'p~ltas. Prajila SriJiians. Ratna. (Vide :Qpag-bsam-ljon-l. The vitalIty of Buddhism ~::l S.~·Q~·crr. etc. Atulya. Dasa. Sadbharata. Siinyata-samadhi Vajra. Sri. separate organism was lost in the 13th century A.l\1ailJll Gho~a. Jina MItra. Sakya Srlbhadra of Kasmira. I have shown that some of the Buddhists were received with hospitality in foreign countries while others Disappearance of Bud. Saiva or Vai~1)ava order The Buddhist systems of thought were ilbsorbed into the BrnhmaItic systems. Mandala Sri. included the following:Santa Rak!}lta. VIm ala MItra.·~·~.:> lating SanskrIt works into Tibetan. Soma Natha. Mahayana Vajra. Santi Garbha. GayS: Sri of Nepal. Vidyakara Prabhs. Dhira Pala. Dharma Pals. sna Manju (of Nepal). Amogha VaJra.?zan. Kalukltla. Sambhoga Vajra. Dipankara SriJilli. Darpa~a Acal'ya. Sangha Sri. Subhaslta. 1 6oI~:::. Ravl Kirti. . Kirt! of Nepal. Varma.became foHowers of Islam. Vibhutl Canda. Dhana Gupta 9 Samal1ta Sri. Buddha Guhya. Smrt1jiiana-kirti. Kumal'a. p. Kusara. Ratna Sri. Bindu Kalasa.na. Japan. EXTINCTION OF THE BUDDHISTS AND 'l'HElR DOCTRINES IN INDIA.ra. Jagat-mitra Nandi. Kumal's. h Mongolia. Vmaya Sri. B u ddh Ism In ot ~r Sumatra.I Numerous Buddhist monks were also graciously recehred in Corea.. BaIa Candra. Mahasana of Nepal.·~·a. and the Modern School of Brahma~ic Logic was the result of a combination of the BrahmaI. Sangha Sri. Amara Candra. Mukti Mitra. Vail'ocana. Surendra Bodhi Silendra Bodhi. Nepal~ Burma. Kamala Sila. Sugata Sri.D. after which we ucar no more of Buddhist logicians. Sankara Brahma~a.. Sila Sri.

which were quite different from the old schools so universal in their character and application.lic legislators of different provinces composed treatjses imposing laws J restrictions. Thus there grew up a number of different schools of thought and culture. but there arose the necessity of making strict rules for the maintenance of the integrity of their society and for the prevention of new . In the Deccan. CHAPTER I The Nyiya.admissions into it. organized-their society on a secure basis.D. TIfB NEO-BRAHMA~1C AGE (CIRCA 9'00 A.% the Buddhists became almost extinct by 1200 A. 'fHE }IODERN SCHOOL O:F INDIA. D. COMPOSl'fION OF THE Prakara'f)as. It was at this period that different BrahmaI.. for several centuries. In part II we have seen how Jainism and Buddhism exercised.eval school. while for their subjectmatter they went ba. applieg.& reduces its Categories to one. Placed in this 'new environment J the Brahmal)ic writers.PART III. The Brahmat. PrakaraI)a-Manual of Logic.-Prakar&J).-1920 A. MANUALS OF LOGIC. 1.ck to the works of the ancient Rchooi. a potent influence on the system ot philosophy and culture of the BrahmaI). . while in North Indi. the decline of Buddhism commenced in the seventh century A.las.N LOGI(\ SECTION 1. They tQok back into their folds some of their members who had embraced Buddhism or Jainism. themselves to the study and teaching of Logic in quite a new spirit. borrowed their forms from the works of the media. who survi ved them. It may be observed that social exclu siveness became more marked in the Hindu Society at this period with the advent of the Muhammadans in India 2.).D. and injunctions upon people of their province suited to their new local conditions. which were composed by them.as. The treatise$ on Logic. often under the patronage of local landholders.D. with local colourings of their own.

~): (:fiT iT~ Ulf ~'l{ I mfi~miiiil':W '8{T"1lfi~t..a.9_'. Most of the authors on manuals considered it necessarv to combine such subjects of the Nyaya and Vaise~ika as would give us a completeI ~~ Jlr. This treatment of certain subjects in preference to other subjects was most probably due to the influence of the J aina and Buddhist systems of Logic which intervened.356 INDIAN LOGIC.ya and certain topics of the Vaise~ika. I.g. PRAKARA:r:rA. jati (analogue) and nigrahasthana (points of defeat). In the Pal"asara UpapuraQ.ssimilating in them the Nyaya category of pramal). the syllogism (avayava) which was briefly treated in the ancient works has been elaborately explained in the manuals.a quoted in the commentaries on Nyaya-sara and Saptapadarthi. have been clearly explained in the latter. the Nyaya-sara and Sapf.apadarthl-two very early manuals of Logic-treat in a very lucid way most topics of the Nyaya sutra and Vaisef. and (4.) the works which treat certain topics of the Nya. The paralcaral. MODERN SCHOOL. On the other hand. e. (2) the Nyaya works which embody in them the categories of the Vaisef?ika philosophy. Many matters which are elaborately treated in the works of the ancient school have been dismissed with scant ceremony in the logical manuals.la8 (manuals) are in fact remarkable for their accuracy and lucidity a~ weH as for their dire~t handling of various 'topics in their serial orders.a to which the remaining fifteen categories were subordinated. for instance. and at the same time some topics not included in those sutras. The manuals of Logic called Prakaral)as may be principally divided into four classes: (1) rrhe Nyaya works treating only of the pramaq. Definitions of tBrms are broad and accurate and not full of niceties. (3) the works which treat of six or seven Vaisef?ika categories a. the style of the latter was expository. the prakm-a'Qa is defined as a book which concerns itself with the topics of a portion of a sastra which may deal even with matters not included in the sastra. drew very little attention fro~ the ~uthors of the manuals. FOUR CLASSES OF prakara'fJ. which occupied so much space in the works of the ancient school.?ika Butra respectively. The works so composed in this period were technically caned Prakara'Y)as I or Manuals of Logic. CHAP. 3. In respect of their styles also the ancient works differed considerahlv from the manuals: while the style of the former was mostly" aphoristic.as. while some subjects which were merely referred to in the former. ~~ 1I11i q'Wl~ct fi'f~: I .fWlif1{ I ~1"$. the topics of chala (quibble).

T ~~a-T: • ..a (cavil). and 1025 A..a writers. vita1J. 5.TEGORIES TO ONE. dealt with only one category. I . L Suali.q.). native of Kasmira.. Satis Chandra..Q. such as Prameya (objects of knowledge). Shhba's NyayatStparya-diplkahas been edited by Dr.).ic writers chose only one category. jalpa (wrangling).. NYAYA-PRAKARA~A DEVELOPING THE OATEGORY OF pramar. 134-135..:ij~lf'Rmr liIIiT'lpi{rvf"t. Introduction. l! Vide Satia Chandra Vidyabhusana's editIOn of Sragdhara stotram.JI~~rofiriir . respectively.te. viz. These Brahmal}. The Jaina and Buddhist writers.bout 950 A.D. BHA-SARVAJ~A 950 A. the means of valid knowledge.bhusana and published. 94).. 4.u as its sub-divisions. • IfT~'ift ~~'ft'cfi~Fi'~n~. p.D. ti liT~~W 'iI~t ~~=(SIT~iT~: I ~ itilT ~Ali1j1l[1. which they developed in such a way that it could assimilate in itself the remaining fifteen categories of the ancient schooL Certain categories. 357 theory of valid knowledge as well as of the objects which would give rise to that knowlege. xxx. viz. he is mentioned by the Jams.'s "History of the Medireval School of Indian Logic. and nigrahasthana (the point of defeat) had to be exchlded.-vrtti." pp.hem some of the BrahmaI}. jiiti (analogue). . lS Vide Satis Chandra Vldyabhusana.a. Pramarpa.r ~r~­ 'i~T .in the Blbliotheca Indica Series of Calcutta. The first Brahma9io writer. His da.aratna's Sa:idarsana. which is very peculiar. bears a c!os. who lived in Kaamira about 775 A.NYAYA-FRAKARA~A REDUCES ITS OA. Vidya. who attempted to reduce the sixteen categories to one. the celebrated author of Nyaya-sa.). His name.aratna t (1409 A. was Bha-sarvajiia..il it. and Maladhari Raj as ekh ara Ii (1348 A. The earliest of these writers seem to have been Bha-sarvajiia.D.. _ __' As the reputed author of Nyaya-sara. (ABOUT 1 Bhasarvajiia's Nyaya-sira. his birth He seems to me to' have been a.D.ra. published in the Bibhotheca Indica series. pramarpa..D. who founded the Mediae'\Z~1 School of Indian Logic. wIth Jaya. Nothing is definitely known about the age in which he flourished or the country which he adorned '\by His life. I who flourished a. of whom accotlnts will shortly be given) were the true representatives of the Mediaeval School of Indian Logic. .J -" resemblance to the names of Sarvajiia Mitra 2 and Sarvajiia~ Deva 3 . edlted by Dr. Following t. p.D.cfi~"1 5 if'" (Gul). while other categories were conveniently stuck on to PramfJ/f]. sages GU.

and verbal testimony (agama). .- d".D. " (. 115).'* Bha-sarvajna was evidently junior to Trilocana. 12) Raghava Bhaqa's commentary on the Naya-sara in reference to the ~~ ij' ~1~~~"T~~ "IQ'q'~Ti( .D. must indeed have flourished in Kasmira in the lOth century A. This threefold division of Prama1}a furnished a contrast to Ak~apada who recognized a fourth ~T~~lfCIf~ ij Tt«tiT WI'" Sift:Jnli1tfi I ($aq.nakara Santi. Bha-sarvajiia undertook in his Nyaya-sara. whose fallacies of example ha've.r'(mp. 11 t A.rlarsana-sam nccaya by :\1 aladharl RaJasekhara SUrI. t preceptor of Rat.rsm7Tiflim~ii-qi~ . Vldyabhusana's edition).. to treat only 6f Pramatz. Dharmakirtl observes : - f<1i~~lliJrU ~ttr ~itl:l.. was desIgnated as ~yaya-sara follows no partICular work. 4 Blla-sal''' aJfia wrItes.f. which proceeded from the pen of Bha-sarvaJua. I. p. Nyaya-sara. The earliest limit may be fixed at 650 A.erson.* mana). p. OHAP.. 5 On these and other considerations I am inclIned to believe that Bha-sarvajiia lived about 950 A.: I (Nya~:abindu. Nyaya.!i.D.358 INDIAN LOGIC.B.S..d Sastrl..a. It occupied a remarkable position in the history of I ndian Logic. p.r~'lll:li!qiftj'?ii W~fl.iT~~T'Vr'if. pllbl1shed in thE' YasoviJflya Granthamala. PRAKARAlS"A. according to Raghava BhaHa. During their times there were already eighteen commentaries on thE. edIted by Pet. The weU·knO\vn logical treatise. which I beHeve to be idt'ntical with the work of same name quoted by the Buddhist sage Ratnaklrti. Following the method current in his time.('q11iT fir~~r -r~"'i~ I:~ I •••. edited by SatIs Chandra Vldyabhusana.sara. pasI:>age: 6 V~de C~yaya-sara. One of them iR named Nyaya bhul?a:q. MODERN SCHPOL. the Essence of Logic. been quoted by him. Hara Prasa. • •• I (Ratnakirti's ApohaSlddhl.a which he divided into three kinds: perception (p1'atyak~a)~ inference (an1. BHA-SARVAJ:NA'S NYAYA-SARA. ~'if ijVl~~ fcr'_i'ij~'flttrf..l\1.D when Brahma]fism and Buddhism flourished there side by side. Bha·sarvajfla who attempted to reconstruct BrahmaQlc Logic on the plan of Buddhist Logic.) 2 V~d( Part II on Buddhist LogIc. '. edlt. p. when ttlere lived the Buddhist logician Dharmakirti 3 whose controversy about the fallacy of "DOD -erroneous contradiction" (v'iruddhavyabh~'cari) IS referred to in the Nyaya-sara.f~ lf~~ri:fiTlijl1tlJrr~. Benares) 1 RatnakirtI observes :_ ~Fi:lr=r itll'€!li~~ ~~T~v. 13. This is therefore the latest date that we can assign to Bha-sarvajna. CI1'(~f1ff I (Nyaya-sara.ed by M. G.ho lived about 1000 A.

for the reduction of sixteen categories into one.?a. vitanda (12). viz perception and inference. voda. of the fallacies of the minor term.id down in the Nyitya-s8Jra. . 1. .Prarn. From the above it is evident that Bha-sarvajfia embodied in his Pram(1)a all the categories of the Nyaya-sutra except prayoJana (4) and 8'iddl~anta (6) which did not. QUIbble..~t Bha-sarvajfia close to the Samkhyas and Jainas who admitted three kinds of PramaQa.-I __ ! I Yogi I ----~- j Anumana -----.bular form thus. 7. ----- I 1---.bhas(f (13 j nirnaya (9). I I-_l Area I Anarsa. the fallacies of example. says :-t' "Bowing down to Samhhu (Siva) the .ji. . but differed from Ak~apada v. etc. chala (14). pleasure could be eternal.-PARKARA~A REDUCES ITS CATEGORIES TO ONE. which excludes hetvo. . and leads to (lVayava (7).---------_-. ma~7 be exhibited in thE' ta.NYAYA. but distinguished him from the Buddhists who dealt with only two. It brougi. In the opening line. he divided Inference into that for one's self (svarthanumana) and that for the sake of others (para-rthanumana). (2) wlthont a ste.j. . PerceptloD-pratyak.. Like the Buddhist and Jaina writers. of the NYhya-sara. were not aUogether overlooked by Bha-sarvajiia who dealt witt them in connection with an inference for the sake of others. .lpa (11). 359 kind named comparison (upamana). and like them he gave an account. Sa 1u"a I o n .hara'Yja.-------1 Svartha. ho den :ed the eternality of pleasure.arw (I) [ (the means for establishing prameya.. Sal~ation (mok. Parartha carried or~ tiu'ough '--""I-~-! Laukika I Yukta Ayukta. (10). ia.m of (3) and 1. and nigrahasthana (16). . constitute its integral parts and drl!~anta (5) which was included in aVQyat'a under the name of wi.~am·(1.wparyaya . B}1asarvajii~ who bv . according to him. through the channels of tarlca (8). iati (15). ~advidhA. which had been prominent topics in the NytLya-sfitra. analogue) etc.~a) was described by him as the soul's attainment of eternal pleasure In this respect he agreed with the Prabhakaras who affirmed that. CONTENTS OF THE NVAYA-SARA. The scheme la.?/(f I Pratyaksa I .::uprem(' Lord of the uniyer~f'.

genus. and (6) particularity-. n rCOUl'Se.. etc.. inference (anumana). may be · fP t' either contemplative (yogi-pratyak~a) or D efinItlon 0 Eif'OOp IOn. two causes t viz the soul. .his mind in conseq uenoe of his merit. viz. this is Devadatta. there is a union of merely two causes.360 lNDlAN LOGIC. The intercourse ID4Y be of six kinds. and its division and definition. It is the perception of a saint. ~ if~@. time. But while he is not in oontemplation) he perceives objects through the union of four. perception (pratyak~a). It is of three kinds> viz. or merely the soul and the mind.t4l~ II . The indeterminate perception is the knowledge which exhibits the mere essenoe of an object independent of its relation In "SJ1IQI Jflli' ~: 1f~ ~ff~"ij"tilt1rct ~I I fIrIJ' 'SJ"lftvr~ ff1Tff~lft.... I. ord' lnary (a·yog~-pra . ception is knowledge of an object indicative of a relation of the object to Its name. (4) inherence. Perception may also be divided as determinate or mediate · d fP t' (8avikalpaka) and indeterminate or immeK In S 0 ercep Ion. the soul and the mind. ka The determlnate ' late (n~rm per. threefold union. (1) union. viz. etc. which is the means of direct cognition. and verbal testimony (agama) Perception..g.. etc. ' In the olfactory.. Il While in a state of contemplation the saint perceives infinite objects through the mere union of his soul with . The contemplative perception exhibits objects which are too remote in time and space or too fine in nature. or the soul.all of which have been explain~d before.. space. in order that children may understand them well. action. (3) united-inherent inherence. I shall explain Pram(1)lJ. the mind.. nature. the mjnd and the ear (the sound which inheres in the ear being identical with the same).. a sense and an object. d' " k a l pa).iA. PRAKARAJ:." f Pram(1)a is defined in the work as the means of right knowledge freed from doubt and error. gustatory. visual and tactual perceptions there is the auditory perception there is a a union of four causes. (5) inherent inherence. MODERN SOHOOL. (2) unitedI te Inherence. ya k~a ). quality. who mayor may not be in a state of contemplation at the time. .t nTll( . In the perception of pleaiure. CHAP.. Th e ord' ~nary perception is that which exhibits gross objects through their intercourse wIth our senses brought about by a favourable combination of light. three or. e.. the mind and a sense. etc. viz. the soul. nature knows all truths.

we ascertain fire from smoke with which it is inseparably connected. Inference is of two kind". separable connection with another thing which lies within their range .gL 8.Rlnn nf t. to abide. (2) a reason. A proposition is the statement of the subject (minor term1_ of which something is desired to be established.panied by fire the major term.g. genus.]. and (5) a conclusion.Q. (1) inference for one's self (svarthanumana) and (2) inferen~e for the sake of Kinds of Inference..l proposition "whet~ ever there is no fire.. e. eternal.. v . (3) an example.~. The affirmative invariable concomita. 7~ 'th a t In ..NYXYA-PRAXARA~A REDUCES ITS OATEGOltIES 1'0 ONE. ~ (1) affirmative (anvaya) and negative (vyatirelca) .. A reason is the statement of the mark which enables us to establish something.. because it is smoky "-this is an inference in whiclJ. The de· monstration consists of a syllogism of five parts: (1) a proposition. 361 to· a name.. It is of two kinds: tance~vyapti. The hill is fiery.. Inference (an'umana) is the means of knowing a thing bey~nd the range of the senses through its inInference defined. a b'd 1 es. The reason may be exclusivelyaffirmative (kevalanvayi). Illference-anumana. The inseparable connection (in Sanskrit avinabhiiva) is also designated as pervasion or invariable conInvarlable concomioomitance (9'IIJJapti). and in the negative universa. there is no smoke "-the absence of fire is in all cases aocompanied by the absence of smoke. that the quality of the major term does not abide.. viz.::. The essential nature of a syllogism (pak'1a-dharmarta) refers to the . exclusively negative (kemla vyatireki) and affirmative negative (anvaya-vyatireki). nf t. it is known with certainty. with certainty.m T erms 0 £ an 1nfet'ence. nArvSI. e. A heterologue (vipak~a) is that in which.. A h OIDO1 ogue (sapalV/$. the knowledge produced by the first union of a sense wi'~h its object or the knowledge of a saint while he is in a state of contemplation.a) IS which the quality of the major term is known.tlnd is non:. others (parartkanumana) The first does not stand in need of demonstration but tile second does. there is fire " smoke is the middle term which is in all cases accmp.nce (anvaya-vyapti) is the accompaniment of the middle term by the major term in all oases. The negative invariable concomitance (vyatirekavyapti) is the a('companiment of the absence of the major term by the absence of the middle term in all cases Tn the affirmative universal proposition ""wherever there is smoke. The subject or minor term (pak~a) is that in which it is doubtiul whether the quality of the major ter. etc. hQ'I"Q(\+.hA middle term bv the maior term. (4) an application.

e. sound lS non~eternal. because it possesses smell AffirmatIve-negative iR the reason which abides minor term and its homologues but does Hot abide in the logues of the minor term. It is of various kinds as mentioned be . It is of following kinds:. [The first. and "lake" is a heterologue In whi~h. Fallacy of reason.tsible. is not visibleJ. Hetvabhasa-fallacy of the reason. sounClIS I1on~eternal. because it is smokv. e. sound is non-eternal. because It possesses generality which t'e. MODERN SCHOOL. (1) Unproved in respect of its nature (svarupasiddha) . I. vi81ble [soundness is not visible). we are sure. this is nameable. the earth is different from other elements.g. sound is non~eternal.g. e.? respeot of the substantive (vi8€ 1}yasiddha) .g. Exclusively-negative is the reason which abides in the minor term of which there are no homologues Kmds of the mIddle term and which is distinct from the heterologues. Unproved (asiddha) is the reason whose existence in the minor term has not been known with certainty. e. e. in respect of the adj~ctive (vi8e~a~8i(ldha). because it is t. (2) Unproved on account of its abiding in a difierent locus (vyadhikararp?isiddha). Take the fonowing syllogism :The hill is fiery. e. because it is knowable.lity [sound posses~es generality (soundness) but it. UNPROVED (asiddha). whieh is Hot counterbalanced sphere of which is not opposed by evidences.he subject or minor term on which the exiRtence of fire is to be proved. "kitchen" is a homologue in which fire is known with certainty to abide.g. sound is nolt-eternal. (3) Unproved i.jgasiddha) . . because a pot is a product. e.g. low:- A. in the heteroand the is fiery. PRAKARA~A.. fire does not abide Exclusively affirmative is the reason which abides in the minor term of which there are homalogues bat no heterologues. Fallacy (hetviibhasa) is that which possesses the appearanoe of a reason but not its essential characters.g. Here "hill" IS t. (5) UnlJroved in respect of a part (bh. the hill because it is smoky. because it is produced by effort. CHAP.g. because "it is a visible thing possessing genera. ' (4) Unproved. like a kitchen or like a lake.. e g.362 INDIAN LOGIC.

re eternal."ho IS a person.te knowledge has not yet grown in him v. [It IS doubtful as to \vhether true knowledge has not grown in hilllJ. because it is a product [like ether (homologue) ~ . vi8e~yastddha) e g Kaplia is still overwhelmed WIth passions.g. becausE' it smoky. soul and God a. IS not only useless but also 111correct]..g. [The Naiya. e g sound IS non-eternaL because It possesses general'ti..ill The fallacies called unproved mentioned above are of two descriptions according as the lack of truth involved in them is recognized by both the parties or one of the parties engaged in a debate.d on account of the sub"talltlve being doubtful (sandigdho..NYAYA-PRAKARAJ$'A REDUCES ITS CATAGORIES TO ONE. this place is fiery. it is said.g. [It is doubtful as to wheth"'r he is always devoid of true knowledge] . Unproved on account of the adjectiye being useless (vya1'chaV18e~a?Jasiadha). KapiIa is still overwhelmed ~ith passions been use he IS a person who is always devoid 0/ true knowledge. depend on it].g.g.Ylkas do not admit that primordial matter (Pralq·ti) is thE' prime source of the universe] Unproyed In respect of a part of the abode (asrayailwdesasiddlw). not the primor. [Here if the smoke turns out to be mist. Unproved on account of the reason bE'lng doubtful (sandig· dhaslddha).'dIal matter PlakrtLI Unproved on account of the substantIve being useless (vyarthallisesyasiddha). [The Naiyayikas admit the li:oul and God to be eternal but. e. sound is eternal. Unproved on account of the adjective being doubtful (sandigdha-vi8e~ana8idd7w). there is primordial matter. THE OONTRADIOTORY (viruddha). the prul1ordi:11 matter. Contradictory (viruddha) is the reason whioh abides in the minor term as well as in the opposite 6f it.ll "blOh 18 a product. because tr1. e g. Unproved lD respect of t. [To say that "soundness is a product .he abode (asTayasiddha) e. B. 363 (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) sound-wave is produced by effort. the oontradiotory reason may be of four kinds as follows : (1) The reason which abides in the minor term as well as in its heterologue (but not in its homologue). e.8 possessed of genctrllity [It is superfluous here to say that" a product is possessed of generality]. e. sound is non·eternal. a person" without ascertammg whether there IS smoke or mist says. but the succeeding sound-\'I'a yes do not. If there are homologues to the minor term. the mference be mvalId] Unprov € .. because the~r are not productc:. because it evolves into the universe. because it is a prGduct whz'ch 1. e.

. and like a pot (heterologue).vity of effort abides only in a part of the minor term. sound is eternal because it is a thing which possesses generality and is cognized by our external senses. (0) which possesses generality potn688.g. . etc. I.ves are not products of the same nature. but not in the --earth which is subtle or atomic. [Here an instance of the heterologue is a pot (a) which is noneternal. (3) The reason which abides in a part of the minor term as well as in a part of its heterologue but not in its homologue. sound is eternal. (2) The reason which abides in a part of the minor term and in a part of its heterologues.364 INDIAN LOGIO. sound i . because though non -eternal it is not cognized by our external senses I So the reason abides only in a part of the heterologue.g. "Pleastlre " oannot be an instance of the heterologue. sound is a special quality of ether as it is knowable. the contradictory reasons are four as follow: (1) The reason which abides in the minor term as well as in its heterologues. (4) The reason which abides in a part of the minor term. because it is a product of effort. MODERN SOBOOL. We cannot cite T. [The first wave of sound is a product of effort. At the same time it abides in all things which are non -eternal or heterologues to the minor term]. it does not possess generality potne8s-ness]. While there are no hom ologues.are no homologuee. because nothing but sound is a special quality of ether}. e g. because it is a product of effort. Productivity abides in sound as well as in its heterologue the potJ. but in the whole of its heterologne (and not in its homologue)..g. e.JOtness as a homologue. Similarly it abides only in a part of the he~rologue. (2) The reason which abides in the minor term as weH as in a part of its heterologue (but not in it~ homologue). . because though potness is eternal and cognized by our external sense. e. "Pot" is a heterologue which is a product of effort. [Knowableness abides in soulld as well as in its heterologues such as smell. There . etc. [Productivity abides in the earth which is gross. [Productivity of effort abides in the first sound-wave but does not abide in the succeeding sound waves. e. ~ (3) The reason which abides in the minor term and in a part of its heterolo ues e .g. but not in other heterologues as the soul. but" grass" is a heterologue which is not a product of ettort. So the producti. because it is a product. but the succeeding wa. the earth is eternal. e. CHAP. it abides in some beterologues as pot. PRAKARA~A. sound is a special quality of ether.]. and (c) which is cognized by our external senses.

e. but does not ablde in some of the eternal as ether 1 (3) The reason which abides -in the minor tel'm and its homologues as wen as in a. p leusure pam. but in the".g. [Some sounds arise from words such as those which we read in books.hile other 11eterologues snch as . because It is perceptible [( 1) Perceptibility abides in . and (3) it abides in some of the eternal as generalit. 365 because It is cognizable by the external senses [All sounds are cognizable by the external senses It is only some heterologues :mch as a pot. [Incorporeality abides in space and time but . [Percep~ tihility abides in earth which IS gross. a part of its homologues and in the whole of its heterologues. which abides in a part of the minor term. e.NYAYA-PRAKA. [Horns abide in "this" as well as in its homologues cow.. that are cognizable by the external senses .g. a part of its homologues and a part. etc. sound is non-eternaL because it IS knovi'able. because it has horns. the earth is Hon-eternal. its homologues and heterologues. No sound which is not a special quality of ether.g sound is a special quality of ether. of its heteroiogues. (6) The reason which abides in a part of the minor tf'rm. THE UNCERTA. etc They abide with some of the heterologues such as a buffalo but do not alJ1de in other heterologues such as a horseJ (4) The reason "hlOh abIdes in the minor term and its heterologues and in a part of its homoJogues. space. of lts heterologues. sound. e..g. arises from words]. sound is non-eternal. Uncertain (anaikantika) is the reason which abideR in the minor term. but not in earth which is subtle (atomic).RA~A REDUCES ITS CA. because it has horns. in a part of Its homologuE'S and In a part. because It does not arise from words. (2) The reason "hich abides In the mmor term..g. hole of its heterologues. are not so cognizable] l'he reason which abides in a part of the minor term. part of its heterologues.v.g.TEGORIES TO ONE. e. but does not a bide in some of the non·et~rnal as the binary compound of atoms. while others do not. e. its homologues and heterologues: its subdivisions are the following:(1) The reason which abides in the mmor term.g.IN (anaikantika). Similarly it abides in some hetel'ologuE'5 as g€'neralit~1 but not in other heterologues as ether]. but not in other homologues a. because they are incorporeal. e. because it is perceptible. time and mind are substances. C. It abides in some homologues as a pot.. (5) The reason. this IS a cow. such as the sounds of a drum. this is not a cow.. doth etc . calf." (2) it abides in some of the non-eternal as a pot. e.s a binary compound of atoms.

1)1r. sound and intelligence which are respectively the special qualities of ether and soul being momentary. without a definite connection with the major term. MODERN SCHOOL.g. but not in other homo· logues as earth. generality. a. The reason .1 Non-tried (anadhyavasita) is the reason which abides in the minor term alone. water. and also in heterologues as earth. ether. ether. CHAP. Va.g.. p. or anupasamhari) . etc. time. because it is a special quality of ether. is mentioned by Bhi-sarvajiiA. P. existence" does however abide in " all "J. e. action.g. (Nyaya-sara.g. all are non-eternal. sound is noneternal. soul and mind are not substances. [The devoidance of special qualities of momentary character abides in space. It abides in all homologues as quality. V. I.idya's. exoept by i§ailkara MiSra.ll substances are non-eternal. alone. (4) The reason which abides in a part of the minor term of which there are both homologues and heterologues. because they are existent. fire and air. It is subdivided as follows :(1) The reason which abides in the minor term of which there are n€ 'ither homologues nor heterologues. who. all are non· eternal. 30. The reason "product" abides in non·etel'· nal things but not in eternal things both of which are comprised by "all"}. action. J t a bides 10 all heterologues as qualIty. observes :-" This hetvabhiisa. particularity and inherence] . P. because they are devoid of special qualities of momentary character. (7) The reason which abides m aU homo]ogues and heterologues. has homologues which are however not qualities of ether]. space. time and mind but not in ether and soul. e. e. It abides in some homologues as soul. but only in a part of the minor term. e. says that It is the same as anupasamhari-anaikintika. not in mind which is an atom in dimension. about the 15th century. lSound which is a special quality of ether. because they are products.366 INDIAN LOGIC.. because they are possessed of 1 . has neither homologues nor heterologues. [" All " which includes everything. Vaidya. water. (3) The reason which abides in the minor term of which there are both homologues and heterologues. NON-TRIED OR NON-CONCLUSIVE (anadhyavasita. particularity and inherence. [" AU" having included every thing there is no homologue or hpterologue left behind.g. . (2) The reason which abides in a part of the minor term of which there are neither homologues nor heterologues. PRAKARA~A. which latter did not take its name and form in the time of BhA-satvajfia. edition). fire and air] D. V. generality. e.

is not originated]. e.. e g.] F. because they are originated. although both are substances. Vaidya observes :-" Tbis fallacy is known in later works as. e. because they are composed of parts. There is no acti Vlty in quality and action which are homologues and In generality. MrSTIMED OR INCOMPATIBLE REASON (k1iJatyayopadi~ta! or (badhita). e.YA-PRAKARA~A REDUCES ITS CATEGOaIFlS TO ONE. fluidity) colour.t which constltutes the minor term.g. all products" which constitutes the minor term Ether. [There is actIvity in earth but not in ether. (2) Opposed by inference. all heats are non-warm. BALANOING THE OONTROVERSY (prakara'f)a-8ama) • . £lellY. this fire iR non-warm. [There is no heterologue of . because they are bodies like those of ours. because they abide in atoms which do not oc<cupY space. (Nyaya-sara. Accol'dmg to later writers I . (4) Partly opposed by perceptIon~ e. (5) Partly opposed by inference. Ether is a homologue but it is not composed of parts] E. etc.g. [Heat of fire is warm but that of moon-stone is non-warm]. because it is a product. MdMea. e. 1 Mr. which is a homologue. etc. V. because they have forms. Mistimed or ineompatible is the reason which abides in the minor term as opposed by evidences. 31). e g all produots are eternal.Balancing the oontroversy (prakara'/Jta-sama) is the reason which possesses its three forms.g. the atoms are non-eternal. (6) Partly opposed by scripture. 367 activity. (3) Opposed by scripture. taste. all products are eternal. bodies of all celestIal sages are earthy.g.g wine should be drunk by BrahmaJ?as) because it is a liquid thing like milk. p. those of others watery.NY:\. [Bodies of some celestial sages are € 'arthy. (6) The reason wbich abides in a part of the mmor term and \ has homologues but no heteroJogues. (5) The reason which abides in the minor term and has homologues but no heterologues. P.g. [" Pot" &'nd intelligence are both products) one is composed of parts but the other is not There IS no heterologue of " all products . It is subdivided as f01- lows:- '(I) Opposed by perceptlOll) e. because they are corporeal. . smell and touch abiding in eternal things are eternal.g. but establishes one's own side as weH as the opposite side. kaUltita" is the name of the fallacy. e. particularity and inhArence whwh are heterologues of the non-eternal].

e. viz. (1) sound is non-eternal. (2) bec3. (3) like etber. e. (3) whate\~er possesses acuteness. (3) whatever is not non-eternal does not possess acuteness.g. the mind is non-eLernal.a. etc. is non-eternal. (3) like a pot. An affirmative example is the statement of an illustration in the positive or direct order. (affirmative example). because It is the abode of a special quality cognized by one of our external senses) hke a.. (2) becau'3e it possesses acutene~~. like the soul. An example (l1daltara1}a) is the statement of a complete illustration It is of two kinds. the following:(1) An example defective in the major term (sadhya-vikala) .. (1) homogeneous or affirmative (sadharmya). because it is corporeal like an atom. pot. a disputant says : Ether is eternal. tion in negative or indirect order.ij/ri.on which occurs when there is an advancement of two contradictory reasons of equal characters.(1) Sound IS eternal.ddhavyabkir. like pleasure.dahara'tJ. (2) because it possesses acuteness. etc. His oppon ent says : Ether is non-eternal.sa) is one which appears as an example but is really devoid of its essential character.g. Some say that there is a fallacy called non-erroneous contradicti. .use it is sound. The non-erroneous contradiction is a fallacy with reference to one party..mple. etc . like ether etc. e. (negative example). ( 1) Sound i~ non -eternal. Example -u.g. etc. OJ". and (2) heterogenous or negative (vaidharrnya). because it i~ an incorporeal substance. udahararpabhii. G. Kinds of example. (2) because Jt is sound. A negative example is the statement of a complete illustra-. NON-ERRONEOUS CONTRADIOTION-viru. e.. A fallacious example (the faUacy or semblance of an example. (l) sound is non-eternal..llacies of affirmative example are tive exa.g.The fa. but is a good reasoning with reference to the other party. Fallacies of an affirms.. etc.

tive form as follow :-(1) An example of doubtful major terll1 e. e. the mind is non-eternal.] (6) An example whose pervasion is inversely stated (vi-pantavyapti) . e. whatever is not non-eternal is not corporeal. because it is corporeal like a.kinds of fallacious examples of the affirmaample.g.mple of excluded mlddle term (sadhanavylivrtta). as ether. this person is l j (1) An example of excluded major term. says. the mind is non-eternal. (IiI) whatever is non-eternal is corporeal like a pot. e. (3) An example of excluded major and middle terms (ubhayavyavrtta) e.g. FallaCIes of negative example. (2) An example of doubtful middle term. e. Bha-sarvajfia 1 mentions another four Other fallacies of ex. Vaidya's edition of Nyaya-sara. like ether. whatever is not non·eternal is not corporeal. as a skyflower.g.g. who mllst therefore have flourished before Bha-sarvajAa. (4) An example which is supportless (asraya-hina) . e g.g. e g. like a certain prince of that race. P. because he is sprung from the lunar race. as ether. because it is corporeal. (ii) because it is corporeal. V.(2) An example defective in the middle term (sadhana-vikala) e. like a pot. the mind is non-eternal. whatever is not non-eternal is not corporeal. because it is corporeal. e. the mind is non-eternal. e.g.g.g. notes. e. like a potJ. (6) An example with inverse pervasion (viparita-vyaptyabhidhana). whatever is not 1 Raghava BhaHa m his commentary on the Nyaya-$arEl. like the horn of a hare. [There is no pervasion or universal connection between corporeality and non-eternality. as a pot. th.at these eIght kinds of fallacious examples (four of the affirmatIVe form and foul' of the negtltlve form) were laid down by TrIiocana. e. 35) 24 . (i) the mind is non-eternal. [This should have been stated thus: whatever is corporeal is non-eternal.g. because it is corporeal. this perSOll will exercise sovereignty. as an action.t action (3) An example defective in both the major and middle terms (ubhayavikala) . The fallacies of negative example are similarly of six kinds specified below :- non -eternal is not corporeal as an atom (2) An exa. (5) An example which is non-pervasive (avyapti) . whatever is not corporeal is not non-eternal.g whatever is not non-eternal is not corporeal. (5) A non-pervasive example (avyaptyabhidhana) . (4) An example which is without support (asraya-hina). (Of.g. p.

e~ta).370 INDIAN LOGIC.g. The authoritativeness of the first kind of assertion is evident from the action one takes on hearing the assertion. vita'l)qlj. (cavil). presumption (arthapatti) and probability (sambhava) are included in inference. CHAP. one performs sacrifice on the strength of the Vedic injunction that a son is born when a sacrifice is performed for the same. Verbal testimony-agama. /tatoo (disputation).. ~c::-:pture" which ~:nables us to h"lloW thmgs beyond our senses. MODERN SCHOOL. jalpa (wl'8)ngling). It is of two mony kinds. etc. reliable. like Devadatta.. and the other sIgmfies . e. n£grahasthana (point of defe8Jt). The three means of right knowledge have been explained.rvajiia uses the word agama as a synonym for sabda. this person IS not omniscient. Prameya The objeot of our knowledge (prameya) of four kinds as follows:- IS . not omniscient. the assertlon of a reliable person.! Bha-sa. vada (discussIOn). as such. AU other so-called means are included in legg~~er means of ICnow. Emancipation-mok~a. e. Jati (analogue). because he speaks evil." . e. ni'rrpaya (ascertainment). I. according as the assertion refers to matter open to our senses or to matter beyond our senses.sed on their doubtful character Bha-sarvajfia 1 closely follows the Nyaya·sutra in his explanation of upanaya (3!pplication). because he is passionate like the man on the street. In realIty one sigmfies .I~r. e.. nigamana FolJowmg Nyaya-si3tra. Similarly there are four kinds of fallacious examples of the negative form ba.g.g. and negation or non-existence (abhava) in any of the three according to circumstances. e. rumour (aitihya) and nluscular movement «(.them.s.A. Muscular movement alleged to be a means of knowledge is only an action substituted for a word or assertion. and is. PRAKARA. like Devadatta's son who wIll be born. The authoritativeness of the second kind of assertion is interred from its having proceeded from a person who possesses supersensuous knowledge.g. because he has accumulated merits. this person will go to heaven. (3) An example of doubtful major and middle term.g. a boy runs to receive a mango when he is asked by his father to do so. in verbal testimony. (4) An example whose support is doubtful. Verbal testimony or reliable assertion (agama) is the means of knowing things accurately through indicaKmds of verbal testi· tory signs (or convention). (conclusion).

Gunaratn[l. .lYd and Gunart~tns's S.:::~C~Q~~l . (4) The means for the removal of misery or suffering. 05) Another manuscript of it V'71iten in Kusmin ehar:tcter is to be found in tho hhr<lry of the Asia be Society of Bengal bearing No. No. K. and b5' the Ja. (5) Nyayasaratika by Jayatirtha (vlde India Office Catn. 2 The orcnmg Imc~ of the KyayasarnpadapailJ!ld:i run .the oldf3st commenta. Sekh:lra's Saildarsana samuec.1. 8. p. (V£de S.ry mentioned by MaUldha:ri Ri1J}1" Sekhara (1348 A D. Soul Of the eighteen commentaries on Nyayasara enumerated by .RAKARA~A REDUCES ITS CATEGORIES TO ONE.1'. The individual soul. samuccaya Vrtti (1409" A. the SaddarSall[l. 1552 In the opening Hnes 1 1 rlde nEiJ<).lsucieva. R. in the Sa\kbrSana sumuccaya Vrtti (1400 A.voided. No manuscript of It has yet been recovered. No manuscript of it has yet been recovered . viz.ina sage Jayasirilha Suri.:: ~)~_<t :WOO A.3_)o:~a.lddar&fllla samuccay. ment. In the state of final emancipation the individual sonl. being finally freed from. (4) Nya. merit (dharma) or' dement (adharma). Bhandarkar'sCatalogue of MSS. misery. i571 \]) That whIch 1R fit only to be a. ignorance (avidya).. p 58). A manuscript of It has been recovered from Bikaner. misery or suffering (du[t. in the Decem College. which has to undergo sufferlngs from tne bondage of the world.yJ. scmpt of it has yet been recoYerf'd.Jaina wrlters some are noticed below:(1) Nyaya-bhi1sana. viz the true know·ledge of soul (atma). viz. lust (tr~~a).logue. m hIS Nvayatat. COMMENTARIES ON THE NYAYASARA. of which there are twpnty-one varieties alreadyexplamed. 1888. follows'- ~~ll~\iTW~ ~.ft and the supreme soul (para atma). attains final emvmcip~tion (mok~a) through the knowledge of the supreme soul caned Siva. by V.2) Nyayakabka by Jayanta.. Siffiha Ga~i. (Vide S.D).) and Gunaratntt (1409 AD) fl!1C1 quoted bv the BuddhIst sage Ratnakirti in his ~.D).:iTf~!~~lIilR'(1{ I .e Deccan College..D ). Bhandarkar's Catalogue of MSS. A manuscnpt ot It has been recovered from Kasmim.ioned b~. No manu.sara~ika by Vljaya. the individual soul (apara atm. in th.kha).NYAYA-P.paryadlpika. enjoy~ eternal pleasure. (2) That whwh causes misery or suffering. viz. (3) Nyayakusumanjali tarka mentioned by Gunarotlla in. 3132-1412) 1(6) Nyayasarapadapailjika. 1888. vrtt'. (3) The cessation or misery or suffermg. The soul is of two kinds.

1252 is contained in the library of the Queen's College. is ~ftlfil1. Vasudeva El-peaks of himself as the author of the work and in the colophon he is stated to be a native of Kasmira.ha SUr!.. crl~lff1l~ m~ I ~~~T~~~~~II The Nyayaearavicara ends as follows:- 1tifi ~~:~:rlft.: ~a f.~: I w:ff: tl1frf"1r1iij1lf "~q q(ijl. X). ~nr: \I The verse may be interpreted to glve Saka 1174 (A. ~. A manuscript of it dated 1 Saka 1174 A.q~ i'iWl"-l.D. 1365. ~ .372 INDIAN LOGIC. 1252) or Saka 1274..(It:tcT: II ~if ~r~ilU?lqT~finuwr~r."CfT1!£ f{ f( ~Slliian".D. (7) Nyayasaravicara by Bhat~a Raghava. 1352 A.) 2 Nyayatatparyadiplka with the text of Nyayasara has been edIted by Satl"! Chandra Vidyabhusana aDd publlshed in the Blbliotheca Indica series. ~~ m:nrf:slltit1R!l~~~~~l"'{ 11 (KumarapiHa Caritra Prasastl.. Calcutta. Benares. I. CRAP. (8) Ny~yatatparyadipika 2 by Jayasi:rp. a Jaina of the Svetambara Sect.D. ~~ 1{fITfllf~~N.".D. . Chap. PR.. I m. IV[QDERN SCHOOL.D. who lived in the fourteenth century A.:Piff1::: "f~TN .r~cif'f~T'('eJG1::\TI~~it ~~~T'(~. as his Kumarapaiac31ritra B is dated Sam vat 1422 or A.i\KARAlgA.

" A short account of the two works is given here _ V ARADA-RAJA (ABOUT 1150 A. such as dravya. .. THE N~XYA INCORPORAa':iS THE VAISEl?IKA. Hence the two philosophies were called samiina-iant'ta or allied systems. At last the Vaise~ika and . edited by M. As instances of Nyaya absOTbing -the Vaise~ika categories. Com pare I (Mallinatha's commentary on Tarlnkaraks8. possibly also after the lIth century A. "atman. .T€::. Pro. 9. Kesava Misra on the other hand brings the six categories of the Vais':'E.la by Varadaraja and Tarkabha~a by KesavaMisra. in the Madras Presidency.D.:t 1 Varadaraja wrote a commentary on Udayana's Kusumaiijab called Nyaya Kusumanjali tika.' ~--S:I."Ifi ~~~-Vf'~T~ ~ifOlliit 'IfT.rt=~~ ffl1I'~ ~ ~C*."" ~~ "~Cfq ~~It!ffi' ~~T~I~~.. ~~ a .D. which is one of the twelve objects included in the second Nyaya category "Prftmeya. Varadaraja. 10. In faot the Vaise~ika and Ny-aya philosophies of the Ancient and Mediaeval periods supplemented each ·other in respect of their subjects and styles.the Nyaya philosophy preand VaiSeslka.lika under 'c artha"..M.. Nyaya-prakaranas embodying 'Vaisei?ika categories.. who deals with all the sixteen categories of Nyaya.).CHAP'PER n. ..la. :. we may cite the cases of TarkikarakE. includes in the second category. philosophy rendered considerable help to the development of the Nyaya (Logic) and many Coalescence :>f t~e Nyaya of the sU tras of. etc." etc. viz.. not only the twelve objects of Nyaya. as he mentions Trilocana. Sl. The six or seven categories of the Vaise1jika were entirely absorbed in the treatise on N yaya philosophy and the Nyaya categories of prama~a in lts developed form were actually absorbed in the treatises on Vaise~ika philosophy.. Vindhyesvan Prasad.Nyaya philosophies actually coalesced. ifl!IT ~tn"1{ I . or "Protection of Logicians. such as. suppoee those of the Valse~llka. Vacaspati Misra. but also the six categories of the Vaise~ika.if." He seems to hava been a native of Andhra or Telingana..D..meya. Varadaraja must have flourished after the lOth century A. page 46). The Vaise~ika Varadaraja I wrote a work on Logic called TarkikarakE. .

and as several preceptors intervened.. Venis' prefatory notwe to Tirkikal'ak:.a. nigrahasthana. (4) prayojana. Vis't"c.i{O'l''4f ~. (3) sarnsaya.. occupIed the seat of guru at the end of the 15th century A. ..~ 3 ~ ¢I.& 11.. (12) vitarpj. (1) prama'l}a.. Very probably he flourished about 1150 A. the first of which deals Category. Nyayacaryya (Sivaditya)..lu Svamin is sa)d to have been the original founder of a Vali?~ava sect caned in later times the Vallabhacari.ij~ ~fCfPi ~.aya.'ll'lif ~"~1lif cn~ firttl iI1Err« f~~M1f lfTtd. Theimmediabe disciple of Vi~!}u Svamin was Jfiana Deva who was succeeded consecutively by Nama Deva and the junior Trilocana. viz. Dr. 2 Vide SarvadarsWlasamgraha.-. i1T t1i. p.Udayanacaryya. Salikanatha. edited by :\i. if placed in 1150 A. (6) siddhanta) (7) avayava.ftf 40 ~. ehapter on purna. ~ ~firll. viz. caned Laghudipika. shortly after which JfiaL1. 58). On the other hand.' Perhaps there followed a few other preceptors hefore Vallabhacaryya. (8) tarka.fi!f. §ati. (9) nir1).aa or Jiia.D. Vindhyelivarl Pra. TARKIKARAK~A. he is mentioned by JrtIadhvacaryya ~ in the Sarvadarsana sam.-praJfia-dar§ana lU which we read:- . Ii (Tarkikaraksa.. (11) jalpa.Jayar:te.lla Deva..~nfil~~ ¥i: II ~. son of Laki?ma:q. edIted by MM.. with the first fourteen categories of Nyaya. which at once begins its subject. (13) hetvabhasa...graha.D. 1'1 t.':. p.arvc. Tarkikarak~at The -----------.D. if~if~q N'I~l~fff'il' I ~~ilm:liI( ~it f~) it.u Svamin.l and Bhuiiiarp. t1e date of Varadaraja. Bha-sarvajiia. a disciple of Vi91).!'fipa.&kara. As Vallabhacaryya lived between 1450 and 1530 A. wrote a commentary on the Tarkikarak~a..'~.lfia thus : 'l~TS.IQ'f firiffennr I ~~. 8 Vi~f.a Bhatt&..------~rft . (2) prameya.. (TeHngana) . and (14) chala. while the third chapter treats of the sixteenth category viz.a. Benares) I VaradaraJa quotes Bhii. (5) dr~tanta.a Purz. of Andhra.M. (10) vada. composed in the 14t\1centnry A. 364.if1it 'ST~~ fltq I (Tarklkarak~Ei:. Benares. is divided into three chapters. VmdhyesvarI Prasad.D.- ~.aii'ci. will not be far wrong.lif~tUlP'r q~~(f:sn~~'~"T ~~ett~T ~n1t II Vide Imperial Gazetteer. ~ V~de . The seoond chapter deals with the fifteenth category.D.

a.'tion. • . vo and co-exl·s.J. • S"""'I"'''''''''' . and apavarga. but the combination is far from The scheme of combmation. viz.a conwhieh are mentioned here. buddhi.: s'jdhanta..~nce The categories of the N yaya and Vais~ika are thus combined together.. whereas that of the seven categories of the Vaisefilika IS only an indirect means. particularity (vi8e~a).::~.'_v.ri .yava. r I Valid knowledge-p'rama~a. hetvsbhas:)" ehala. buddki (intellect or knowledge)...~ m~ ~fi:ff1'((~~-q't~ ~~lll ~1~~tI{ ~cfi ~Ci!1Tft( Tarkikarak~a.. pr2-yo]ana.r d13cussions tlOn of pramary. iiI. but. 13. p.he Nyaya and Vmse~ika sysLems.... Prasad. It1troduces The Buddhlstw Uefill.. Vmdhye~vA.a . du. 130). it rT.--..vc -. duhkha. aOf}a. .~ s2"n~n~'a). 1 Twelve obJects of Nyaya. according to Varadaraja..l'kika. e g.. Varadaraja't. action (karma). being satisfactory. prameya. pretyabhava. edlted hy l\I. .~p::. Moreover there is hardly any truth in the statement 1 that the knowledge of the sixteen categories of Nyaya is the direct means of our attaining emam:ip2. I incorporates also the six predicaments of the Vaise~ika philosophy. etc.here and there some pecuhe:. I jati..rak~a. ave. the Buddhists define valid knowledge (p7'amii~a) as tha... ::!r:". manas) pravrtti.i. Benares). ge~e!'a!i~::. my k:i0\":led. tarktt.. . artka. demned.d Varadaraja~ in his Tj.--.j.Prameya. mgrahasthana.g.t which is not non-correspondent wHh our pr:1Ctical activity. It is evident that the categories of the Vais€ f?ika and objects coming under Prameya of the Nyaya overlap each other. samsaya.<JI-w Padartha I I Pram at]._". the substance (dravya) .. p._:2.. manas (the mind). according to the N yaya-stl tl'a. quality (gu~a).J_ ~ ~ ~c __ . or ___ ~ -'.?a.hkha (pain).l.\I. ~ . soheme of combination of the Nyaya and Vaise~ika systems is shown below :s. The sixteen categoriee of Nyaya have already been ex~!a. signifies atman Tirkikarak~i incoL'porates the Vaiseslka categories.:!::"~..b}::.e of a cup of water IS vaHd if the activity prompted by it is fruitfuL Varadaraj3J condemns ------.t n (Tsrklkarakl... are included in both t. For instance.=.. phala.-. ina?'iya.. .~'-'_ sarira.~Ul!'naya> vaa. because atman (the soul).

~fif~""~ ~T1l~ -'Wlnr.. With regard to a past or future thing 1 we can draw an inference.. This verse IS quoted from Dharmakirti's Prama. Upad. but cannot prove the validity of the inference inasmuch as there is no practical activity prompted by it. W~nat]f(~cnf1ren\{Tlf: I. e g. .. i "'. C(1lil'T't' lfi(W'I1t{ 1\ "i(~'M1t I ..~'iI'TlfT1'f ~) I .. -66).k~li. llt'inabh(iva of the Inv~riable concomitance (vya)pti) /J also caned Buddhist. this definition by observing that it is too narrow.' The Naiyayikas say that the invariable concomitance of one thing with another thing is based on their uniform agreement in presence and absence. ance.. I do not quote here the deflmtlOn·of these terms as they WIll rec1ll' in the Tattvacintamam. 65)..·~Q~·~~·. It.. p.. (Tiirkikarak~. smoke is in invariable concomitance with fire.z:..1I11llTiJTmifr ~(~~.1"'. p. inseparableness (avinabhava). '4ft\fIn1lO"f1rr: vr~Tl1l . --.----~ ..-vartika-ldirika Tlbetan version runs as follows : ~·:. 7 -...rq~'f1~f~ftf 'ffi{41tt .. condition..·Q ~~ ! (TArkikara. because where there is smoke there is fire and where there is no fire there is no smoke.variInvariable concomitable concomitance with another thing. In opposition to this definiti(')n the Buddhists fl say that the invariable concomitance of one i.. According to Varadaraja. lit"" iiI. . Inference-anumana. -po 64). condemned..-r~\o11lfT{t ~m fir~n~ ... it cannot apply to our inferential knowledge of a thing that existed in the past or will exist in the future. ~I.hi.-.lfa.----~-. ~-----J ---------"-: ----._ m.'qT~: 11 (Tarkika1:aksi. is thus defined :- p. 82)..~ ~ Q'~at: I The .~~.. 14). For instance.mrrq'lltliEUQ'ii ~~ih~.is of two kiX.I~I(T~"~~Tif(g p. _ .)... I 2 (Tarklkarakfila. is that relation which is devoid of condition (upadhi).rq~iN =\::"·QEt~·~~·Q~·'ij".hing with another thing is really based on their mutual relation of cause \ .<!s: (I) sure (niScita) and (2) suspected (aankita. We can test the validity of our knowledge only of a thing that exists in the present time.. inference (anumanal'i is the knowledge of a thing derived through its in.r~: I ~Tilfimft (Tarkikarakl?a. .--..

though between the taste and form there is neither the causal relation nor the relation of identity in essence. :Mdo. Sylloglsm-avayava.g. an example and an application in the following form:All that is smoky is fiery. An that is smoky fiery. In explaining the seventh category.ftfn~~~t{ II (Tlirkikaraksa.'il!~'~~ . p. which con~ syllogism.z:. p. as follows :-' All that is smoky is fiery. may either begin with an example or end with the same. Ca. as a kitchen is The Saugatas (Buddhists) are said to maintain that a syllogism consists of only two parts. Varadaraja condemns the Buddhists by saying that their definition is untenable. 175). 12~tan-hgyur. as a kitchen. as a kitchen. ~~'~'~'Q. avayava 1 parts of a syllogism. siats of three pat'ts.g. the hill has smoke. viz. there is l'am. reason or middle term (Ui~ga or hetu) which is in invariable concomitance with the predicate Fiv~ cha.and effect or identity in essence. viz. We infer the form of an orange from its taste.. . De La Vallee Poussin's French translatIOn of Sarvadarsana-samgraha. Therefore the hill is fiery.l ~ ~l'z:. Because it is smokv.ra. minor term. and this is a tree.e. This hill is smoky. e. A sign. l ~~~)'. a syllogism." the existence of the sign in the subject or !! (PramAna-"artika-kiirika.'~~ ~~ ~l'z:. or The hlll is fiery. in La Bouddhisme ). Varadaraja says that according The l\1imlimsi form of to the Mimal1lSaka. leaf 196. I lft"~"T' ~~'lt1l:I' ~.I(II{{"iWIV[ ~ ~~Ti{T~~rft(ltili1. The sign-linga. because there was cloud (cloud being the cause of rain). because it is a simsapa (simsapa being a species of tree which is its genus). 4. The hill is smoky.'~'l'Q'!.. • • ' actenstlCs as follows : (1) Pak~adharmata. e.cterlstics of or maJ' or term (sadhya) possesses five charthe mIddle term. also Prof. QvayaVQ.

. (2) (3) (4) (5) The method to be followed in carrying on a particular debate.--. The six requisites for a council of debate are the foHowing :(1) A set of rules as to a cert:1ID thesis and its proof. Specification of the disputant and his respondent. the sign hears only four characteristics.l'~ ~:ifiJlI(~tQn~ I page 179. (6) Agreement as to the stage of termination of a debate Some logicians hold that the requisites for a council of detate are only four. e. ~.dent. t (Tarkikara. an (4) the members. edIted by M. vada. that which has smoke has fire. that which has no fife has no smoke. (Tirkikarak~a» p.. . non-existen.. but fire is not necessarily a sign of smoke unless it is nourished by wet fuel (here wet fuel is the condition).ce of the sign in heterologues. (3) the president. Vindhye~va. 1Iifl!lT if\tm ~f.g.g. the object of the sign not being in· compatible. In the case of an exclusively affirmative or exclusively nega· tive inference... d the respon. e. _-..I$ • •IR: ~. Sapak~e8attvam. Election of 'the President and members of the Council Determlnation of the points of defeat involved wholly or partly in a debate. there is no incompatibility for smoke abiding in the hill.borate exposition of debate Rules of debate (kathu) '2 which is defined as a number of sentences spoken by more personl3 than one as oonstituting the subjects for their judgment... f1r~~~ftBf. t1e4ij'.l.res).. there is nothing else which counterbalances smoke in re~pect of proving fire. viz. In treating of the t-enth category.klj. (I) the disputant. Varadaraja gives an ela.:: ... as it does not then abide in the heterologue or homologue. viz. ----. (2) Requisites of a debate. (4) Abadhita vi~ayatvam. there being no counterbalancing sign.--. (2) -~ ---------. The La~nm1ilii is said to be the works of Sividitya MiSra.M..\i~ 'i ~""'~ iI(i1I~lRii . existence of the sign in homologue. Debate-katha...g.g. 206). (5) A6at'Pratipak~atl)am. as a lake. --~-----.ri Prasid Dvivedi t Bena. as a kitchen. smoke is the sign of fire... P. In the logICal work called Lak~anamala i a sign (linga) is defined as that which is in invariable conUpadhl comitance with the major term freed from any condition (upadhi)) e. -------. (3) V ipak:te asattvam.g.. ----------. -_ . e..

Theil' duty is to control the debate. members to settle the main points at issue. p. and (3) cavil (vitatbqJi). . viz.~Ri. d ~~~if' ~i(q~I_!.k~ii. The seven points of defeat which may ~!~.. z A discussion end 3 only when one points out in it a fallacy of reason.is to announoe to the \louncH the conclusion of a debate when it comes to a close.to bo.) must be employed with the approval of the disputant and his respondent.BODYI~G V'Al$E~IKA CATEGORIES. The president (sabkapa6i) must be satisfactory to the disputant. 37~ If it is intended to record a debate. . A wrangling or cS'liI may be stopped byexposing the points of deres:: 11t'igra~. to awaken one who is broken-hearted and to reneat a speech to one who is slow. Kmd 01 debate. or a point of defeat called censuring the non-censurable.1ITq~iI'lfl ~JliT~ C'f1ln' ~:r. retaining and demonstrating the purport of othersY speech. p.th the parties and conversant with their tenets. to point out the exoellence or defect of the debates. poi1l1t ou. in which. (2) wI'angling (jaZpa).{nr ff 1iT~ I ~t{ II (Tarklkarak!}&. while their number must he uneven and not less than three.dmitted into the council as its regulat.: 'ef ~ ~'li II \i (Tarkikara. the respondent and the members.- t ~~~~n \Q)lt. but in the case of wrang!i!l6 and cavil even chance-comers act as regular members.~p~~rFcr~l1 \i . in the debate. If the parties agree. They cannot however be ::. The memhers (sabhya) . Persons coming by chance before a council of debate may. 363}. They must be capablt:' of receiving. This procedc.. etc. ~~ ::-_c~a"Ce is of three kmds. inasmuch as the conclusion drawn from such a debate could have been obtained from the expert alone.N'tKYA~PRAKARA~A EM. hetvftbhaaa.. a w::iter (lelchaka. he must not be Influenced by affection or aversion. His dU'C't7 . C:::33?:J:::::. must be freed from affection and aversion..Al~'4)sf~ iff I ~fiI~ f1rsrr: . The disputant (vad~) must be equal to the respondent (lJra.reapplies to a council l of fair debate or discussion.tivad?:) in respect of his learning. fir'tl'''T: I ~~ifiT: iIf'fl11t 'I\f ~EfIefJfl(f~~): II (Tarklkara. 362). A debate. ~ . Capable of showing favour or frown. 18 useless.t irregularities.~it p.nds against an ordinary per30n..asthana) which are necessarHy involved in them. 'ZOS). an expert sta. (1) discussion (vada).

Mallinathais generally supposed to have lived in the 14th to century A D. 1658.D. (6) repetition. Laghudipika. Vindhyesvari Pra. Who lived in Kolacala.. Benares College. page 324. summary of essences" (sarasamgraha). . <j.taka. page 19. {5) overlooking the censurable. c. The sage in his commentary on Kiratarjuniya mentions Pijul?avarf?a whose date is unknown. (2) non in